Fundamentals of Protection Practice: Network Protection & Automation Guide

A1
Fundamentals of
Protection Practice
Network Protection & Automation Guide
Chapter
A1
Fundamentals of
Protection Practice
1. Introduction 11
2. Protection equipment 13
3. Zones of protection 13
4. Reliability 15
5. Selectivity 16
6. Stability 17
7. Speed 17
8. Sensitivity 17
9. Primary and back-up protection 18
10. Output devices 19
11. Tripping circuits 20
12. Trip circuit supervision 21

Fundamentals of Protection Practice
A1 1. Introduction
The purpose of an electrical power system is to generate and

supply electrical energy to consumers. The system should be
designed and managed to deliver this energy to the utilisation
points with both reliability and economy. Severe disruption to
the normal routine of modern society is likely if power outages
are frequent or prolonged, placing an increasing emphasis on
reliability and security of supply. As the requirements of
reliability and economy are largely opposed, power system
design is inevitably a compromise.
A power system comprises many diverse items of equipment.
Figure A1.2 shows a hypothetical power system; this and Figure
A1.1 illustrates the diversity of equipment that is found.
Figure A1.1:
Power station
R7
T9 E
G G'
L6 T17
G7
R6
T16
B B'
T4
G6 T8
CCGT power station
L1A G5 T7 380kV 110kV

T3
L8
A R5 380kV L5
R2
L1B 380kV 33kV

L4
G2 T2 F'
T14
Grid
Grid
Hydro power station
G1 substation 380kV
T1
L7A F
L3
R1
380kV
C C'
T6 D
R4 T15
D'
L2 T13
T5
G4 T11
L7B T12
Steam power station
G3 T10
380kV 110kV
33kV
R3
220kV
Figure A1.2:
Example power system
11 Network Protection & Automation Guide

1. Introduction A1
Many items of equipment are very expensive, and so the

complete power system represents a very large capital
investment. To maximise the return on this outlay, the system
must be utilised as much as possible within the applicable
constraints of security and reliability of supply. More
fundamental, however, is that the power system should operate
in a safe manner at all times. No matter how well designed,
faults will always occur on a power system, and these faults
may represent a risk to life and/or property. Figure A1.3 shows
the onset of a fault on an overhead line. The destructive power
of a fault arc carrying a high current is very great; it can burn
through copper conductors or weld together core laminations
in a transformer or machine in a very short time – some tens
or hundreds of milliseconds. Even away from the fault arc itself,
heavy fault currents can cause damage to plant if they continue
for more than a few seconds.
The provision of adequate protection to detect and disconnect
elements of the power system in the event of fault is therefore
an integral part of power system design. Only by so doing can
the objectives of the power system be met and the investment
protected. Figure A1.4 provides an illustration of the
consequences of failure to provide appropriate protection.
This is the measure of the importance of protection systems
as applied in power system practice and of the responsibility
vested in the Protection Engineer.
Figure A1.3:
Onset of an overhead line fault
Figure A1.4:
Possible consequence of inadequate protection
Network Protection & Automation Guide 12

A1 2. Protection equipment
The definitions that follow are generally used in relation to power Relays may be classified according to the technology used:
system protection:
a. static
a. Protection System: a complete arrangement of protection
b. digital
equipment and other devices required to achieve a specified
function based on a protection principal (IEC 60255-20) c. numerical
b. Protection Equipment: a collection of protection devices The different types have somewhat different capabilities, due
(relays, fuses, etc.). Excluded are devices such as Current to the limitations of the technology used. They are described
Transformers (CT’s),Circuit Breakers (CB’s), Contactors, etc. in more detail in Chapter [B1: Relay Technology].
c. Protection Scheme: a collection of protection equipment In many cases, it is not feasible to protect against all hazards
providing a defined function and including all equipment with a relay that responds to a single power system quantity.
required to make the scheme work (i.e. relays, CT’s, CB’s, An arrangement using several quantities may be required. In
batteries, etc.) this case, either several relays, each responding to a single
quantity, or, more commonly, a single relay containing several
In order to fulfill the requirements of protection with the optimum
elements, each responding independently to a different quantity
speed for the many different configurations, operating conditions
may be used.
and construction features of power systems, it has been
necessary to develop many types of relay that respond to The terminology used in describing protection systems and
various functions of the power system quantities. For example, relays is given in Appendix [AX1: Terminology]. Different
observation simply of the magnitude of the fault current suffices symbols for describing relay functions in diagrams of protection
in some cases but measurement of power or impedance may schemes are used.The two most common methods (IEC and
be necessary in others. Relays frequently measure complex IEEE/ANSI) are provided in Appendix [AX2: ANSI & IEC Function
functions of the system quantities, which are only readily References]. In addition these are cross referred to equivalent
expressible by mathematical or graphical means. Logical Nodes from the IEC 61850 standard.
3. Zones of protection
To limit the extent of the power system that is disconnected zone. This problem is dealt with by intertripping or some form
when a fault occurs, protection is arranged in zones. The of zone extension, to ensure that the remote end of the feeder
principle is shown in Figure A1.5. Ideally, the zones of is tripped also.
protection should overlap, so that no part of the power system
The point of connection of the protection with the power
is left unprotected. This is shown in Figure A1.6(a), the circuit
system usually defines the zone and corresponds to the
breaker being included in both zones.
location of the current transformers. Unit type protection will
For practical physical and economic reasons, this ideal is not result in the boundary being a clearly defined closed loop.
always achieved, accommodation for current transformers Figure A1.7 illustrates a typical arrangement of overlapping
being in some cases available only on one side of the circuit zones.
breakers, as in Figure A1.6(b). This leaves a section between
Alternatively, the zone may be unrestricted; the start will be
the current transformers and the circuit breaker A that is not
defined but the extent (or ‘reach’) will depend on measurement
completely protected against faults. In Figure A1.6(b) a fault
of the system quantities and will therefore be subject to
at F would cause the busbar protection to operate and open
variation, owing to changes in system conditions and
the circuit breaker but the fault may continue to be fed through
measurement errors.
the feeder. The feeder protection, if of the unit type (see
section 5.2), would not operate, since the fault is outside its

3. Zones of protection A1
Zone 1 Busbar
protection
Zone 2
Feeder
protection
(a) CT's on both sides of circuit breaker
Zone 3
A Busbar
protection
Zone 4 F
Zone 5 Zone 7
Feeder
protection
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3
(b) CT's on circuit side of circuit breaker
Zone 6
Figure A1.5: Figure A1.6:

Division of power system into protection zones CT locations
~
Figure A1.7:
Overlapping zones of protection systems

A1 4. Reliability
The need for a high degree of reliability is discussed in Section 4.5 Deterioration in service
1. Incorrect operation can be attributed to one of the following
Subsequent to installation in perfect condition, deterioration
classifications:
of equipment will take place and may eventually interfere with
a. incorrect design/settings correct functioning. For example, contacts may become rough
or burnt owing to frequent operation, or tarnished owing to
b. incorrect installation/testing
atmospheric contamination; coils and other circuits may
c. deterioration in service become open-circuited, electronic components and auxiliary
devices may fail, and mechanical parts may seize up.
4.1 Design
The time between operations of protection relays may be years
The design of a protection scheme is of paramount importance.
rather than days. During this period defects may have developed
This is to ensure that the system will operate under all required
unnoticed until revealed by the failure of the protection to
conditions, and (equally important) refrain from operating
respond to a power system fault. For this reason, relays should
when so required (including, where appropriate, being
be regularly tested in order to check for correct functioning.
restrained from operating for faults external to the zone being
protected). Due consideration must be given to the nature, Testing should preferably be carried out without disturbing
frequency and duration of faults likely to be experienced, all permanent connections. This can be achieved by the provision
relevant parameters of the power system (including the of test blocks or switches.
characteristics of the supply source, and methods of
The quality of testing personnel is an essential feature when
operation) and the type of protection equipment used. Of
assessing reliability and considering means for improvement.
course, no amount of effort at this stage can make up for the
Staff must be technically competent and adequately trained,
use of protection equipment that has not itself been subject
as well as self-disciplined to proceed in a systematic manner
to proper design.
to achieve final acceptance.
4.2 Settings
Important circuits that are especially vulnerable can be
It is essential to ensure that settings are chosen for protection provided with continuous electrical supervision; such
relays and systems which take into account the parameters arrangements are commonly applied to circuit breaker trip
of the primary system, including fault and load levels, and circuits and to pilot circuits. Digital and numerical relays
dynamic performance requirements etc. The characteristics usually incorporate self-testing/ diagnostic facilities to assist
of power systems change with time, due to changes in loads, in the detection of failures. With these types of relay, it may
location, type and amount of generation, etc. Therefore, setting be possible to arrange for such failures to be automatically
values of relays may need to be checked at suitable intervals reported by communications link to a remote operations
to ensure that they are still appropriate. Otherwise, unwanted centre, so that appropriate action may be taken to ensure
operation or failure to operate when required may occur. continued safe operation of that part of the power system
and arrangements put in hand for investigation and correction
4.3 Installation
of the fault.
The need for correct installation of protection systems is
4.6 Protection performance
obvious, but the complexity of the interconnections of many
systems and their relationship to the remainder of the Protection system performance is frequently assessed
installation may make checking difficult. Site testing is therefore statistically. For this purpose each system fault is classed as
necessary; since it will be difficult to reproduce all fault an incident and only those that are cleared by the tripping of
conditions correctly, these tests must be directed to proving the correct circuit breakers are classed as ‘correct’. The
the installation. The tests should be limited to such simple percentage of correct clearances can then be determined.
and direct tests as will prove the correctness of the connections,
This principle of assessment gives an accurate evaluation of
relay settings, and freedom from damage of the equipment.
the protection of the system as a whole, but it is severe in its
No attempt should be made to ‘type test’ the equipment or
judgement of relay performance. Many relays are called into
to establish complex aspects of its technical performance.
operation for each system fault, and all must behave correctly
4.4 Testing for a correct clearance to be recorded.
Comprehensive testing is just as important, and this testing Complete reliability is unlikely ever to be achieved by further
should cover all aspects of the protection scheme, as well as improvements in construction. If the level of reliability achieved
reproducing operational and environmental conditions as by a single device is not acceptable, improvement can be
closely as possible. Type testing of protection equipment to achieved through redundancy, e.g. duplication of equipment.
recognised standards fulfils many of these requirements, but Two complete, independent, main protection systems are
it may still be necessary to test the complete protection scheme provided, and arranged so that either by itself can carry out
(relays, current transformers and other ancillary items) and the required function. If the probability of each equipment
the tests must simulate fault conditions realistically. failing is x/unit, the resultant probability of both equipments

4. Reliability A1
failing simultaneously, allowing for redundancy, is x2. Where It has long been the practice to apply duplicate protection
x is small the resultant risk (x2) may be negligible. systems to busbars, both being required to operate to
complete a tripping operation. Loss of a busbar may cause
Where multiple protection systems are used, the tripping
widespread loss of supply, which is clearly undesirable. In
signal can be provided in a number of different ways. The
other cases, important circuits are provided with duplicate
two most common methods are:
main protection systems, either being able to trip independently.
a. all protection systems must operate for a tripping operation On critical circuits, use may also be made of a fault simulator
to occur (e.g. ‘two-out-of-two’ arrangement) to model the relevant section of the power system and check
the performance of the relays used.
b. only one protection system need operate to cause a trip
(e.g.‘one-out-of two’ arrangement)
The former method guards against maloperation while the
latter guards against failure to operate due to an unrevealed
fault in a protection system. Rarely, three main protection
systems are provided, configured in a ‘two-out-of three’
tripping arrangement, to provide both reliability of tripping,
and security against unwanted tripping.
5. Selectivity
When a fault occurs, the protection scheme is required to trip protection can be applied throughout a power system and,
only those circuit breakers whose operation is required to since it does not involve time grading, is relatively fast in
isolate the fault. This property of selective tripping is also operation. The speed of response is substantially independent
called ‘discrimination’ and is achieved by two general methods. of fault severity.
5.1 Time grading Unit protection usually involves comparison of quantities at
the boundaries of the protected zone as defined by the
Protection systems in successive zones are arranged to
locations of the current transformers. This comparison may
operate in times that are graded through the sequence of
be achieved by direct hard-wired connections or may be
equipments so that upon the occurrence of a fault, although
achieved via a communications link. However certain protection
a number of protection equipments respond, only those
systems derive their ‘restricted’ property from the configuration
relevant to the faulty zone complete the tripping function. The
of the power system and may be classed as unit protection,
others make incomplete operations and then reset. The speed
e.g. earth fault protection applied to the high voltage delta
of response will often depend on the severity of the fault, and
winding of a power transformer. Whichever method is used,
will generally be slower than for a unit system.
it must be kept in mind that selectivity is not merely a matter
5.2 Unit systems of relay design. It also depends on the correct co- ordination
of current transformers and relays with a suitable choice of
It is possible to design protection systems that respond only
relay settings, taking into account the possible range of such
to fault conditions occurring within a clearly defined zone.
variables as fault currents, maximum load current, system
This type of protection system is known as ‘unit protection’.
impedances and other related factors, where appropriate.
Certain types of unit protection are known by specific names,
e.g. restricted earth fault and differential protection. Unit

A1 6. Stability
The term ‘stability’ is usually associated with unit protection

schemes and refers to the ability of the protection system to
remain unaffected by conditions external to the protected
zone, for example through load current and external fault
conditions.
7. Speed
The function of protection systems is to isolate faults on the are usually protected by time-graded systems. Generating
power system as rapidly as possible. The main objective is plant and EHV systems require protection gear of the highest
to safeguard continuity of supply by removing each disturbance attainable speed; the only limiting factor will be the necessity
before it leads to widespread loss of synchronism and for correct operation, and therefore unit systems are normal
consequent collapse of the power system. practice.
As the loading on a power system increases, the phase shift
between voltages at different busbars on the system also
increases, and therefore so does the probability that
synchronism will be lost when the system is disturbed by a
fault. The shorter the time a fault is allowed to remain in the
system, the greater can be the loading of the system. Figure
Phase-earth
A1.8 shows typical relations between system loading and
Load power
fault clearance times for various types of fault. It will be noted Phase-phase
that phase faults have a more marked effect on the stability
of the system than a simple earth fault and therefore require Phase-phase-earth
faster clearance. Three-phase
System stability is not, however, the only consideration. Rapid
operation of protection ensures that fault damage is minimised,
as energy liberated during a fault is proportional to the square Time
of the fault current times the duration of the fault. Protection
must thus operate as quickly as possible but speed of
operation must be weighed against economy. Distribution Figure A1.8:
circuits, which do not normally require a fast fault clearance, Typical power/time relationship for various fault types
8. Sensitivity
Sensitivity is a term frequently used when referring to the cause operation. With digital and numerical relays the
minimum operating level (current, voltage, power etc.) of achievable sensitivity is seldom limited by the device design
relays or complete protection schemes. The relay or scheme but by its application and CT/VT parameters.
is said to be sensitive if the primary operating parameter(s)
is low.
With older electromechanical relays, sensitivity was considered
in terms of the sensitivity of the measuring movement and
was measured in terms of its volt-ampere consumption to

9. Primary and back-up protection A1
The reliability of a power system has been discussed earlier, circuit breaker tripping in the event of failure of the main
including the use of more than one primary (or ‘main’) primary unit protection. To maintain complete separation and
protection system operating in parallel. In the event of failure thus integrity, current transformers, voltage transformers,
or non- availability of the primary protection some other means relays, circuit breaker trip coils and d.c. supplies would be
of ensuring that the fault is isolated must be provided. These duplicated. This ideal is rarely attained in practice.
secondary systems are referred to as ‘back-up protection’.
The following compromises are typical:
Back-up protection may be considered as either being ‘local’
a. separate current transformers (cores and secondary
or ‘remote’. Local back-up protection is achieved by protection
windings only) are provided. This involves little extra cost
which detects an un-cleared primary system fault at its own
or accommodation compared with the use of common
location and which then trips its own circuit breakers, e.g.
current transformers that would have to be larger because
time graded overcurrent relays. Remote back-up protection
of the combined burden. This practice is becoming less
is provided by protection that detects an un-cleared primary
common when digital or numerical relays are used, because
system fault at a remote location and then issues a local trip
of the extremely low input burden of these relay types
command, e.g. the second or third zones of a distance relay.
In both cases the main and back-up protection systems detect b. voltage transformers are not duplicated because of cost
a fault simultaneously, operation of the back-up protection and space considerations. Each protection relay supply
being delayed to ensure that the primary protection clears is separately protected (fuse or MCB) and continuously
the fault if possible. Normally being unit protection, operation supervised to ensure security of the VT output. An alarm
of the primary protection will be fast and will result in the is given on failure of the supply and, where appropriate,
minimum amount of the power system being disconnected. prevent an unwanted operation of the protection
Operation of the back-up protection will be, of necessity,
c. trip supplies to the two protections should be separately
slower and will result in a greater proportion of the primary
protected (fuse or MCB). Duplication of tripping batteries
system being lost.
and of circuit breaker tripping coils may be provided. Trip
The extent and type of back-up protection applied will naturally circuits should be continuously supervised
be related to the failure risks and relative economic importance
d. it is desirable that the main and back-up protections (or
of the system. For distribution systems where fault clearance
duplicate main protections) should operate on different
times are not critical, time delayed remote back-up protection
principles, so that unusual events that may cause failure
may be adequate. For EHV systems, where system stability
of the one will be less likely to affect the other
is at risk unless a fault is cleared quickly, multiple primary
protection systems, operating in parallel and possibly of Digital and numerical relays may incorporate suitable back-up
different types (e.g. distance and unit protection), will be used protection functions (e.g. a distance relay may also incorporate
to ensure fast and reliable tripping. Back-up overcurrent time-delayed overcurrent protection elements as well). A
protection may then optionally be applied to ensure that two reduction in the hardware required to provide back-up
separate protection systems are available during maintenance protection is obtained, but at the risk that a common relay
of one of the primary protection systems. element failure (e.g. the power supply) will result in simultaneous
loss of both main and back-up protection. The acceptability
Back-up protection systems should, ideally, be completely
of this situation must be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
separate from the primary systems. For example a circuit
protected by a current differential relay may also have time
graded overcurrent and earth fault relays added to provide

A1 10. Output devices
In order to perform their intended function, relays must be fitted breaker may range from up to 50 watts for a small ‘distribution’
with some means of providing the various output signals circuit breaker, to 3000 watts for a large, extra-high-voltage
required. Contacts of various types usually fulfill this function. circuit breaker.
10.1 Contact systems The relay may therefore energise the tripping coil directly, or,
according to the coil rating and the number of circuits to be
Relays may be fitted with a variety of contact systems for
energised, may do so through the agency of another multi-
providing electrical outputs for tripping and remote indication
contact auxiliary relay.
purposes. The most common types encountered are as follows:
The basic trip circuit is simple, being made up of a hand-trip
a. Self-reset
control switch and the contacts of the protection relays in
The contacts remain in the operated condition only while
parallel to energise the trip coil from a battery, through a normally
the controlling quantity is applied, returning to their original
open auxiliary switch operated by the circuit breaker. This
condition when it is removed
auxiliary switch is needed to open the trip circuit when the
b. Hand or electrical reset circuit breaker opens since the protection relay contacts will
These contacts remain in the operated condition after the usually be quite incapable of performing the interrupting duty.
controlling quantity is removed. They can be reset either
The auxiliary switch will be adjusted to close as early as possible
by hand or by an auxiliary electromagnetic element
in the closing stroke, to make the protection effective in case
The majority of protection relay elements have self-reset contact the breaker is being closed onto a fault.
systems, which, if so desired, can be modified to provide hand
Where multiple output contacts, or contacts with appreciable
reset output contacts by the use of auxiliary elements. Hand
current-carrying capacity are required, interposing, contactor
or electrically reset relays are used when it is necessary to
type elements will normally be used.
maintain a signal or lockout condition. Contacts are shown on
diagrams in the position corresponding to the un-operated or In general, static and microprocessor relays have discrete
de-energised condition, regardless of the continuous service measuring and tripping circuits, or modules. The functioning
condition of the equipment. For example, an undervoltage of the measuring modules is independent of operation of the
relay, which is continually energised in normal circumstances, tripping modules. Such a relay is equivalent to a sensitive
would still be shown in the de-energised condition. electromechanical relay with a tripping contactor, so that the
number or rating of outputs has no more significance than the
A ‘make’ contact is one that closes when the relay picks up,
fact that they have been provided.
whereas a ‘break’ contact is one that is closed when the relay
is de-energised and opens when the relay picks up. Examples For larger switchgear installations the tripping power requirement
of these conventions and variations are shown in Figure A1.9. of each circuit breaker is considerable, and further, two or more
breakers may have to be tripped by one protection system.
A protection relay is usually required to trip a circuit breaker,
There may also be remote signalling requirements, interlocking
the tripping mechanism of which may be a solenoid with a
with other functions (for example auto-reclosing arrangements),
plunger acting directly on the mechanism latch or an electrically
and other control functions to be performed. These various
operated valve. The power required by the trip coil of the circuit
operations may then be carried out by multi-contact tripping
relays, which are energised by the protection relays and provide
the necessary number of adequately rated output contacts.
Self reset 10.2 Operation indicators

Electrical indicators may be simple attracted armature elements,
where operation of the armature releases a shutter to expose
Hand reset an indicator as above, or indicator lights (usually light emitting
diodes). For the latter, some kind of memory circuit is provided
`make' contacts `break' contacts to ensure that the indicator remains lit after the initiating event
(normally open) (normally open) has passed.
With the advent of digital and numerical relays, the operation
indicator has almost become redundant. Relays will be provided
with one or two simple indicators that indicate that the relay is
Time delay on Time delay on powered up and whether an operation has occurred. The
pick up drop-off
remainder of the information previously presented via indicators
is available by interrogating the relay locally via a ‘Human
Machine Interface’ (e.g. a keypad and liquid crystal display
Figure A1.9: screen), or remotely via a communication system.
Contact types

11. Tripping circuits A1
There are three main circuits in use for circuit breaker tripping: 11.1 Series sealing
a. series sealing The coil of the series contactor carries the trip current initiated
by the protection relay, and the contactor closes a contact in
b. shunt reinforcing
parallel with the protection relay contact. This closure relieves
c. shunt reinforcement with sealing the protection relay contact of further duty and keeps the
tripping circuit securely closed, even if chatter occurs at the
These are illustrated in Figure A1.10.
main contact. The total tripping time is not affected, and the
indicator does not operate until current is actually flowing
through the trip coil.
PR 52a TC The main disadvantage of this method is that such series

elements must have their coils matched with the trip circuit with
which they are associated.
(a) Series sealing The coil of these contacts must be of low impedance, with
about 5% of the trip supply voltage being dropped across
them.
PR 52a TC When used in association with high-speed trip relays, which
usually interrupt their own coil current, the auxiliary elements
must be fast enough to operate and release the flag before
their coil current is cut off. This may pose a problem in design
(b) Shunt reinforcing
if a variable number of auxiliary elements (for different phases
and so on) may be required to operate in parallel to energise
a common tripping relay.
PR 52a TC
11.2 Shunt reinforcing
Here the sensitive contacts are arranged to trip the circuit
breaker and simultaneously to energise the auxiliary unit, which
(c) Shunt reinforcing with series sealing then reinforces the contact that is energising the trip coil.
Two contacts are required on the protection relay, since it is
not permissible to energise the trip coil and the reinforcing
Figure A1.10: contactor in parallel. If this were done, and more than one
Typical relay tripping circuits protection relay were connected to trip the same circuit breaker,
all the auxiliary relays would be energised in parallel for each
relay operation and the indication would be confused.
For electromechanical relays, electrically operated indicators,
The duplicate main contacts are frequently provided as a three-
actuated after the main contacts have closed, avoid imposing
point arrangement to reduce the number of contact fingers.
an additional friction load on the measuring element, which
would be a serious handicap for certain types. Care must be 11.3 Shunt reinforcement with sealing
taken with directly operated indicators to line up their operation This is a development of the shunt reinforcing circuit to make
with the closure of the main contacts. The indicator must have it applicable to situations where there is a possibility of contact
operated by the time the contacts make, but must not have bounce for any reason.
done so more than marginally earlier. This is to stop indication
occurring when the tripping operation has not been completed. Using the shunt reinforcing system under these circumstances
With protection relays, the use of various alternative methods would result in chattering on the auxiliary unit, and the possible
of providing trip circuit functions is largely obsolete. Auxiliary burning out of the contacts, not only of the sensitive element
miniature contactors are provided within the relay to provide but also of the auxiliary unit. The chattering would end only
output contact functions and the operation of these contactors when the circuit breaker had finally tripped. The effect of contact
is independent of the measuring system, as mentioned bounce is countered by means of a further contact on the
previously. The making current of the relay output contacts auxiliary unit connected as a retaining contact.
and the need to avoid these contacts breaking the trip coil This means that provision must be made for releasing the
current largely dictates circuit breaker trip coil arrangements. sealing circuit when tripping is complete; this is a disadvantage,
Comments on the various means of providing tripping because it is sometimes inconvenient to find a suitable contact
arrangements are, however, included below as a historical to use for this purpose.
reference applicable to earlier electromechanical relay designs.

A1 12. Trip circuit supervision
The trip circuit includes the protection relay and other The resistance in series with the lamp prevents the breaker
components, such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary being tripped by an internal short circuit caused by failure of
switch contacts, etc., and in some cases through a considerable the lamp. This provides supervision while the circuit breaker
amount of circuit wiring with intermediate terminal boards. is closed; a simple extension gives pre-closing supervision.
These interconnections coupled with the importance of the
Figure A1.11(b) shows how, the addition of a normally closed
circuit, result in a requirement in many cases to monitor the
auxiliary switch and a resistance unit can provide supervision
integrity of the circuit. This is known as trip circuit supervision.
while the breaker is both open and closed.
The simplest arrangement contains a healthy trip lamp, as
shown in Figure A1.11(a). In either case, the addition of a normally open push-button
contact in series with the lamp will make the supervision
indication available only when required.
PR 52a TC Schemes using a lamp to indicate continuity are suitable for

locally controlled installations, but when control is exercised
from a distance it is necessary to use a relay system. Figure
(a) Supervision while circuit breaker is closed A1.11(c) illustrates such a scheme, which is applicable wherever
(scheme H4) a remote signal is required.
With the circuit healthy, either or both of relays A and B are
PR 52a TC operated and energise relay C. Both A and B must reset to
allow C to drop- off. Relays A, B and C are time delayed to
52b
prevent spurious alarms during tripping or closing operations.
(b) Supervision while circuit breaker is open or closed The resistors are mounted separately from the relays and their
(scheme H5) values are chosen such that if any one component is
inadvertently short-circuited, tripping will not take place.
PR 52a TC The alarm supply should be independent of the tripping supply
so that indication will be obtained in case of failure of the
A B
tripping supply.
C The above schemes are commonly known as the H4, H5 and

H7 schemes, arising from the diagram references of the utility
Alarm specification in which they originally appeared. Figure A1.11(d)
(c) Supervision with circuit breaker open or closed shows implementation of scheme H5 using the facilities of a
with remote alarm (scheme H7) modern numerical relay. Remote indication is achieved through
use of programmable logic and additional auxiliary outputs
available in the protection relay.
Trip
Circuit breaker
Trip 52a TC
52b
(d) Implementation of H5 scheme in numerical relay
Figure A1.11:
Typical relay tripping circuits

A2
Fundamental Theory

Chapter
A2
Fundamental Theory
1. Introduction 25
2. Vector algebra 25
3. Manipulation of complex quantities 26
4. Circuit quantities and conventions 28
5. Impedance notation 31
6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction 32
7. References 36
24
Fundamental Theory
A2 1. Introduction
The Protection Engineer is concerned with limiting the effects relay. Relays may also be designed to respond to other system
of disturbances in a power system. These disturbances, if quantities such as frequency, power, etc.
allowed to persist, may damage plant and interrupt the supply
In order to apply protection relays, it is usually necessary to
of electric energy. They are described as faults (short and
know the limiting values of current and voltage, and their relative
open circuits) or power swings, and result from natural hazards
phase displacement at the relay location, for various types of
(for instance lightning), plant failure or human error.
short circuit and their position in the system. This normally
To facilitate rapid removal of a disturbance from a power system, requires some system analysis for faults occurring at various
the system is divided into ‘protection zones’. Relays monitor points in the system.
the system quantities (current, voltage) appearing in these
The main components that make up a power system are
zones; if a fault occurs inside a zone, the relays operate to
generating sources, transmission and distribution networks,
isolate the zone from the remainder of the power system.
and loads. Many transmission and distribution circuits radiate
The operating characteristic of a relay depends on the from key points in the system and these circuits are controlled
energising quantities fed to it such as current or voltage, or by circuit breakers. For the purpose of analysis, the power
various combinations of these two quantities, and on the manner system is treated as a network of circuit elements contained
in which the relay is designed to respond to this information. in branches radiating from nodes to form closed loops or
For example, a directional relay characteristic would be obtained meshes. The system variables are current and voltage, and in
by designing the relay to compare the phase angle between steady state analysis, they are regarded as time varying
voltage and current at the relaying point. An impedance- quantities at a single and constant frequency. The network
measuring characteristic, on the other hand, would be obtained parameters are impedance and admittance; these are assumed
by designing the relay to divide voltage by current. Many other to be linear, bilateral (independent of current direction) and
more complex relay characteristics may be obtained by constant for a constant frequency.
supplying various combinations of current and voltage to the
2. Vector algebra
A vector represents a quantity in both magnitude and direction. It may be resolved into two components at right angles to each
In Figure A2.1 the vector OP has a magnitude Z at an angle Ѳ other, in this case x and y. The magnitude or scalar value of
with the reference axis OX. vector Z is known as the modulus Z , and the angle Ѳ is the
argument, and is written as arg Z .
The conventional method of expressing a vector Z is to write
simply |Z| ∠ Ѳ.
Y
This form completely specifies a vector for graphical
representation or conversion into other forms.
For vectors to be useful, they must be expressed algebraically.
In Figure A2.1, the vector Z is the resultant of vectorially adding
P
its components x and y; algebraically this vector may be written
as:
|Z|
y
Z = x + jy ...Equation A2.1
where the operator j indicates that the component y is

perpendicular to component x. In electrical nomenclature, the
X
0 x axis OC is the ‘real’ or ‘in-phase’ axis, and the vertical axis OY
is called the ‘imaginary’ or ‘quadrature’ axis. The operator j
rotates a vector anti-clockwise through 90°. If a vector is made
to rotate anti-clockwise through 180°, then the operator j has
Figure A2.1: performed its function twice, and since the vector has reversed
Vector OP its sense, then:
25 Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide

Fundamental Theory
2. Vector algebra A2
22 From Equations A2.1 and A2.2:

jj xx jj or jj == -1
-1
whence j = -1 Z = Z (cosѲ + jsinѲ) ...Equation A2.3
The representation of a vector quantity algebraically in terms

and since cos Ѳ and sin Ѳ may be expressed in exponential
of its rectangular co-ordinates is called a ‘complex quantity’.
form by the identities:
Therefore, x + jy is a complex quantity and is the rectangular
form of the vector |Z| ∠ Ѳ where: e jѲ -e -jѲ
sin Ѳ =
2j
Z = (x+ y2 
2

)
e jѲ +e -jѲ
 cos Ѳ =
Ѳ = tan −1 y  2
x 
 it follows that Z may also be written as:
x = Z cos Ѳ
 ...Equation A2.2 Z = Z e jѲ ...Equation A2.4
y = Z sin Ѳ 
 Therefore, a vector quantity may also be represented
trigonometrically and exponentially.
3. Manipulation of complex quantities
algebra, complex quantities in rectangular form can be

Y
manipulated algebraically, as can be seen by the following:
...Equation A2.5
Z1 + Z2= (x1+ x2) + j(y1 + y2 )
|Z2| Z1 - Z2= (x1- x2 ) + j(y1- y2 ) ...Equation A2.6 (see Figure A2.2)

y2
Z1 Z2 = Z1 Z2 Ѳ1+ Ѳ2
|Z1|
y1 Z1 Z1
X
= Ѳ1- Ѳ2 ...Equation A2.7
0 x1 x2 Z2 Z2
3.1 Complex variables

Figure
Figure A2.2:
3.2: Addition of vectors
Addition of vectors Some complex quantities are variable with, for example, time;
when manipulating such variables in differential equations it is
Complex quantities may be represented in any of the four expedient to write the complex quantity in exponential form.
co-ordinate systems given below: When dealing with such functions it is important to appreciate
a. Polar |Z| ∠ Ѳ that the quantity contains real and imaginary components. If
it is required to investigate only one component of the complex
b. Rectangular x + jy variable, separation into components must be carried out after
c. Trigonometric Z (cosѲ + jsinѲ) the mathematical operation has taken place.
d. Exponential Z e jѲ Example:
The modulus Z and the argument Ѳ are together known as Determine the rate of change of the real component of a vector
‘polar co-ordinates’, and x and y are described as ‘cartesian Z t with time.
co-ordinates’. Conversion between co-ordinate systems is Z t = Z (cos t + jsin t) = Z e j ωt
easily achieved. As the operator j obeys the ordinary laws of
Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide 26

Fundamental Theory
A2 3. Manipulation of complex quantities
The real component of the vector is Z cos t . Differentiating Operators are distinguished by one further feature; they are
Z e j ωt with respect to time: the roots of unity. Using De Moivre’s theorem, the nth root of
unity is given by solving the expression:
d
Z e jω t = j Z e jωt 1/n
dt 11/ n = ( cos 2 πm + j sin 2πm )
Separating into real and imaginary components: where m is any integer. Hence:
d
dt ( Z e )= Z
jωt
(- sin t + j cos t) 11/ n = cos
2 πm
+ j sin
2π m
n n
Thus, the rate of change of the real component of a vector where m has values 1, 2, 3,... (n-1)
Z t is:
From the above expression j is found to be the 4th root and
-Z sin t a the 3rd root of unity, as they have four and three distinct
values respectively. Table A2.1 gives some useful functions
3.2 Complex numbers of the a operator.
A complex number may be defined as a constant that represents
the real and imaginary components of a physical quantity. The
= − 1 + 3 = j 23P
impedance parameter of an electric circuit is a complex number a j e2 P
having real and imaginary components, which are described 2 1
a=− + j
2
3 j
=e 3
as resistance and reactance respectively. 2 2
Confusion often arises between vectors and complex numbers.
4P
A vector, as previously defined, may be a complex number.
1 3 4 Pj
In this context, it is simply a physical quantity of constant a =
a 2−= − −−jj
2 1 3 =e=e3 3
j
magnitude acting in a constant direction. A complex number,
which, being a physical quantity relating stimulus and response
2 2 22
in a given operation, is known as a ‘complex operator’. In this j0
context, it is distinguished from a vector by the fact that it has 1=1+ j0 = e 1 −a 2 =− j 3 a
j0
no direction of its own. 1=1+ j0 = e 1 −a 2 =− j 3 a
1+ a + a 2= 0 a −a 2 = j 3
Because complex numbers assume a passive role in any
2
calculation, the form taken by the variables in the problem 1+ a 1+−aa =2=j 03 a 2 a−
a −aa 2 = j 3
j=
determines the method of representing them. 3
3.3 Mathematical operators a −a 2
1 −a = j 3 a 2 j=
Mathematical operators are complex numbers that are used 3
to move a vector through a given angle without changing the
magnitude or character of the vector. An operator is not a
physical quantity; it is dimensionless.
Table A2.1:
The symbol j, which has been compounded with quadrature
Properties of the a operator
components of complex quantities, is an operator that rotates
a quantity anti-clockwise through 90°. Another useful operator
is one which moves a vector anti-clockwise through 120°,
commonly represented by the symbol a.

Fundamental Theory
4. Circuit quantities and conventions A2
Circuit analysis may be described as the study of the response

Y e
of a circuit to an imposed condition, for example a short circuit.
The circuit variables are current and voltage. Conventionally,
current flow results from the application of a driving voltage,
but there is complete duality between the variables and either
may be regarded as the cause of the other.
t
X' 0 X
When a circuit exists, there is an interchange of energy; a
circuit may be described as being made up of ‘sources’ and
‘sinks’ for energy. The parts of a circuit are described as
elements; a ‘source’ may be regarded as an ‘active’ element
and a ‘sink’ as a ‘passive’ element. Some circuit elements are Y' t=0
dissipative, that is, they are continuous sinks for energy, for
example resistance. Other circuit elements may be alternately
sources and sinks, for example capacitance and inductance. Figure A2.3:
Representation of a sinusoidal function
The elements of a circuit are connected together to form a
network having nodes (terminals or junctions) and branches
(series groups of elements) that form closed loops (meshes). Em
i= sin( t+ - )
In steady state a.c. circuit theory, the ability of a circuit to Z ...Equation A2.9
accept a current flow resulting from a given driving voltage where:
is called the impedance of the circuit. Since current and
voltage are duals the impedance parameter must also have Z = R 2 + X2
a dual, called admittance.
4.1 Circuit variables X= L- 1
C
As current and voltage are sinusoidal functions of time, varying -1
at a single and constant frequency, they are regarded as = tan X ...Equation A2.10
R
rotating vectors and can be drawn as plan vectors (that is,
vectors defined by two co-ordinates) on a vector diagram. From Equations A2.9 and A2.10 it can be seen that the angular
displacement between the current and voltage vectors and
For example, the instantaneous value e, of a voltage varying
the current magnitude I m = E m Z is dependent upon the
sinusoidally with time is:
impedance Z . In complex form the impedance may be written
e = Em sin( t+ ) ...Equation A2.8 Z = R+jX . The ‘real component’, R, is the circuit resistance,
and the ‘imaginary component’, X, is the circuit reactance. When
where:
the circuit reactance is inductive (that is, L>1/ C), the current
Em is the maximum amplitude of the waveform ‘lags’ the voltage by an angle , and when it is capacitive (that
is,1/ C> L) it ‘leads’ the voltage by an angle .
= 2 f is the angular velocity
When drawing vector diagrams, one vector is chosen as the
is the argument defining the amplitude of the voltage ‘reference vector’ and all other vectors are drawn relative to the
at a time t = 0 reference vector in terms of magnitude and angle. The circuit
At , the actual value of the voltage is Em sin . So if Em is impedance Z is a complex operator and is distinguished from a
regarded as the modulus of a vector, whose argument is , then vector only by the fact that it has no direction of its own. A further
Em sin is the imaginary component of the vector Em . convention is that sinusoidally varying quantities are described by
their ‘effective’ or ‘root mean square’ (r.m.s.) values; these are
Figure A2.3 illustrates this quantity as a vector and as a usually written using the relevant symbol without a suffix.
sinusoidal function of time.
Thus:
The current resulting from applying a voltage to a circuit
depends upon the circuit impedance. If the voltage is a I = Im 2  ...Equation A2.11
sinusoidal function at a given frequency and the impedance 
is constant the current will also vary harmonically at the same E = Em 2 
frequency, so it can be shown on the same vector diagram
The ‘root mean square’ value is that value which has the same
as the voltage vector, and is given by the equation:
heating effect as a direct current quantity of that value in the
same circuit, and this definition applies to non-sinusoidal as
well as sinusoidal quantities.

Fundamental Theory
A2 4. Circuit quantities and conventions
4.2 Sign conventions Voltage drops are also positive when acting in the direction
of current flow. From Figure A2.4(a) it can be seen that
In describing the electrical state of a circuit, it is often necessary
(Z1 + Z2 + Z3 ) I is the total voltage drop in the loop in the direction
to refer to the ‘potential difference’ existing between two points
of current flow, and must equate to the total voltage rise E1- E2.
in the circuit. Since wherever such a potential difference exists,
current will flow and energy will either be transferred or In Figure A2.4(b), the voltage drop between nodes a and b
absorbed, it is obviously necessary to define a potential designatedVab indicates that point b is at a lower potential than
difference in more exact terms. For this reason, the terms a, and is positive when current flows from a to b. Conversely
voltage rise and voltage drop are used to define more accurately Vba is a negative voltage drop.
the nature of the potential difference.
Symbolically:
Voltage rise is a rise in potential measured in the direction of
current flow between two points in a circuit. Voltage drop is V ab =V an −V bn  ...Equation A2.14
the converse. A circuit element with a voltage rise across it 
acts as a source of energy. A circuit element with a voltage V ba =V bn −V an 
drop across it acts as a sink of energy. Voltage sources are where n is a common reference point.
usually active circuit elements, while sinks are usually passive
circuit elements. The positive direction of energy flow is from
sources to sinks.
Kirchhoff’s first law states that the sum of the driving voltages must
equal the sum of the passive voltages in a closed loop. This is
illustrated by the fundamental equation of an electric circuit:
Ldi 1
idt = e ...Equation A2.12
dt C ∫
iR + +
where the terms on the left hand side of the equation are voltage
drops across the circuit elements. Expressed in steady state
terms Equation A2.12 may be written:
∑ E =∑ IZ ...Equation A2.13 (a) Diagrammatic

and this is known as the equated-voltage equation [Ref A2.1:
Power System Analysis].
I
It is the equation most usually adopted in electrical network
calculations, since it equates the driving voltages, which are
known, to the passive voltages, which are functions of the
currents to be calculated.
In describing circuits and drawing vector diagrams, for formal
analysis or calculations, it is necessary to adopt a notation which
defines the positive direction of assumed current flow, and
establishes the direction in which positive voltage drops and
voltage rises act. Two methods are available: one, the double (b) Double suffix
suffix method, is used for symbolic analysis; the other, the single
suffix or diagrammatic method, is used for numerical calculations.
Figure A2.4:
In the double suffix method the positive direction of current Methods of representing a circuit
flow is assumed to be from node a to node b and the current
is designated Iab. With the diagrammatic method, an arrow
indicates the direction of current flow. 4.3 Power
The voltage rises are positive when acting in the direction of The product of the potential difference across and the current
current flow. It can be seen from Figure A2.4 that E1 and Ean through a branch of a circuit is a measure of the rate at which
are positive voltage rises and E2 and Ebn are negative voltage energy is exchanged between that branch and the remainder
rises. In the diagrammatic method their direction of action is of the circuit. If the potential difference is a positive voltage
simply indicated by an arrow, whereas in the double suffix drop, the branch is passive and absorbs energy. Conversely,
method, Ean and Ebn indicate that there is a potential rise in if the potential difference is a positive voltage rise, the branch
directions na and nb. is active and supplies energy.

Fundamental Theory
4. Circuit quantities and conventions A2
The rate at which energy is exchanged is known as power, If a polyphase system has balanced voltages, that is, equal in
and by convention, the power is positive when energy is being magnitude and reaching a maximum at equally displaced time
absorbed and negative when being supplied. With a.c. circuits intervals, and the phase branch impedances are identical, it
the power alternates, so, to obtain a rate at which energy is is called a ‘balanced’ system. It will become ‘unbalanced’ if
supplied or absorbed, it is necessary to take the average power any of the above conditions are not satisfied. Calculations using
over one whole cycle. a balanced polyphase system are simplified, as it is only
necessary to solve for a single phase, the solution for the
If e = Em sin( t+ ) and i = l m sin( t+ - ) then the power
remaining phases being obtained by symmetry.
equation is:
The power system is normally operated as a three-phase,
p = ei=P[1-cos2( t+ )]+Qsin2( t+ ) ...Equation A2.15
balanced, system. For this reason the phase voltages are equal
where: in magnitude and can be represented by three vectors spaced
120° or 2π/3 radians apart, as shown in Figure A2.5(b).
P= E I cos and
Q= E I sin
From Equation A2.15 it can be seen that the quantity P varies A A'
from 0 to 2P and quantity Q varies from -Q to +Q in one cycle,
and that the waveform is of twice the periodic frequency of the N' Phase branches
N
current voltage waveform.
C B C' B'
The average value of the power exchanged in one cycle is a
constant, equal to quantity P, and as this quantity is the product
(a) Three-phase system
of the voltage and the component of current which is ‘in phase’
with the voltage it is known as the ‘real’ or ‘active’ power. Ea
The average value of quantity Q is zero when taken over a
cycle, suggesting that energy is stored in one half-cycle and Direction
returned to the circuit in the remaining half-cycle. 120° 120° of rotation
Q is the product of voltage and the quadrature component of

current, and is known as ‘reactive power’. As P and Q are
constants which specify the power exchange in a given circuit, 120°
and are products of the current and voltage vectors, then if S
(b) Balanced system of vectors
is the vector product E I it follows that with E as the reference
vector and as the angle between E and I .
S = P + jQ ...Equation A2.16 Figure A2.5:

Methods of representing a circuit
The quantity S is described as the ‘apparent power’, and is
the term used in establishing the rating of a circuit. S has units
of VA. Since the voltages are symmetrical, they may be expressed
4.4 Single-phase and polyphase systems in terms of one, that is:
A system is single or polyphase depending upon whether the Ea = Ea

sources feeding it are single or polyphase. A source is single
Eb = a2 Ea
or polyphase according to whether there are one or several
driving voltages associated with it. For example, a three-phase Ec = a Ea ...Equation A2.17
source is a source containing three alternating driving voltages
that are assumed to reach a maximum in phase order, A, B, where a is the vector operator e j2p/3 . Further, if the phase
C. Each phase driving voltage is associated with a phase branch impedances are identical in a balanced system, it
branch of the system network as shown in Figure A2.5(a). follows that the resulting currents are also balanced.

Fundamental Theory
A2 5. Impedance notation
It can be seen by inspection of any power system diagram If the system is relatively simple and contains mainly transmission
that: line data, given in ohms, then the ohmic method can be adopted
with advantage. However, the per unit method of impedance
a. several voltage levels exist in a system
notation is the most common for general system studies since:
b. it is common practice to refer to plant MVA in terms of
a. impedances are the same referred to either side of a
per unit or percentage values
transformer if the ratio of base voltages on the two sides
c. transmission line and cable constants are given in ohms/km of a transformer is equal to the transformer turns ratio
Before any system calculations can take place, the system b. confusion caused by the introduction of powers of 100 in
parameters must be referred to ‘base quantities’ and percentage calculations is avoided
represented as a unified system of impedances in either
c. by a suitable choice of bases, the magnitudes of the data
ohmic, percentage, or per unit values.
and results are kept within a predictable range, and hence
The base quantities are power and voltage. Normally, they errors in data and computations are easier to spot
are given in terms of the three-phase power in MVA and the
line voltage in kV. The base impedance resulting from the
above base quantities is:
11.8kV 11.8/141kV 132/11kV
(kV ) 2
Zb = Ω 132kV 11kV
MVA ...Equation A2.18 Overhead line Distribution
and, provided the system is balanced, the base impedance
may be calculated using either single-phase or three-phase Wrong selection of base voltage
quantities. 11.8kV 132kV 11kV
The per unit or percentage value of any impedance in the

system is the ratio of actual to base impedance values. Right selection
11.8kV 141kV 141 x 11=11.7kV
Hence: 132
MVAb
Z ( p.u .) = Z ( Ω ) ×
(kVb ) 2 Figure A2.6:
Selection of base voltages
Z (% ) =
Z( p .u.) × 100 ...Equation A2.19
Most power system studies are carried out using software in

Where: MVAb = base MVA per unit quantities. Irrespective of the method of calculation,
kVb = base kV the choice of base voltage, and unifying system impedances
to this base, should be approached with caution, as shown in
Simple transposition of the above formulae will refer the
Figure A2.6.
ohmic value of impedance to the per unit or percentage
values and base quantities. From Figure A2.6 it can be seen that the base voltages in the
three circuits are related by the turns ratios of the intervening
Having chosen base quantities of suitable magnitude all
transformers. Care is required as the nominal transformation
system impedances may be converted to those base
ratios e.g. a 110/33kV (nominal) transformer may have a turns
quantities by using the equations given below:
ratio of 110/34.5kV. Therefore, the rule for hand calculations
MVAb 2 is: ‘to refer an impedance in ohms from one circuit to another
Zb2 = Zb1 × multiply the given impedance by the square of the turns ratio
MVAb1
(open circuit voltage ratio) of the intervening transformer’.
2
kVb1 ...Equation A2.20
Zb2 = Zb1 × Where power system simulation software is used, the software
kVb 2 normally has calculation routines built in to adjust transformer
parameters to take account of differences between the nominal
where
primary and secondary voltages and turns ratios. In this case,
suffix b1 denotes the value to the original base and b2 the choice of base voltages may be more conveniently made
denotes the value to new base. as the nominal voltages of each section of the power system.
This approach avoids confusion when per unit or percent
The choice of impedance notation depends upon the
values are used in calculations in translating the final results
complexity of the system, plant impedance notation and the
into volts, amps, etc.
nature of the system calculations envisaged.

Fundamental Theory
5. Impedance notation A2
impedance of 12.5% on 75MVA. Choosing 100MVA as base

MVA and 132kV as base voltage, find the percentage
impedances to new base quantities.
T1 a. Generator reactances to new bases are:

G1
100 (11)
2
132kV
overhead 26 × × = 0 .27%
lines 66.6 (132)2
G2
T2
b. Transformer reactances to new bases are:
100 (145)
2
12.5 × × = 20.1%
75 (132)2
Figure A2.7:
Section of a power system NOTE: The base voltages of the generator and circuits are
11kV and 145kV respectively, that is, the turns ratio of the
transformer. The corresponding per unit values can be found
For example, in Figure A2.7, generators G1 and G2 have a by dividing by 100, and the ohmic value can be found by using
sub-transient reactance of 26% on 66.6MVA rating at 11kV, Equation A2.19.
and transformers T1 and T2 a voltage ratio of 11/145kV and an
6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction
Most practical power system problems are solved by using Junction law
steady state analytical methods. The assumptions made are
The algebraic sum of all currents entering any junction (or
that the circuit parameters are linear and bilateral and constant
node) in a network is zero, that is:
for constant frequency circuit variables. In some problems,
described as initial value problems, it is necessary to study ∑ I =0
the behaviour of a circuit in the transient state. Such problems
Mesh law
can be solved using operational methods. Again, in other
problems, which fortunately are few in number, the assumption The algebraic sum of all the driving voltages in any closed path
of linear, bilateral circuit parameters is no longer valid. These (or mesh) in a network is equal to the algebraic sum of all the
problems are solved using advanced mathematical techniques passive voltages (products of the impedances and the currents)
that are beyond the scope of this book. in the components branches, that is:
6.1 Circuit laws ∑ E =∑ Z I

In linear, bilateral circuits, three basic network laws apply, Alternatively, the total change in potential around a closed loop
regardless of the state of the circuit, at any particular instant is zero.
of time. These laws are the branch, junction and mesh laws, 6.2 Circuit theorems
due to Ohm and Kirchhoff, and are stated below, using steady
state a.c. nomenclature. From the above network laws, many theorems have been
derived for the rationalisation of networks, either to reach a
Branch law quick, simple, solution to a problem or to represent a complicated
The current I in a given branch of impedance Z is proportional circuit by an equivalent. These theorems are divided into two
to the potential difference V appearing across the branch, that classes: those concerned with the general properties of
is, V=IZ . networks and those concerned with network reduction.

Fundamental Theory
A2 6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction
Of the many theorems that exist, the three most important are The impedance of a delta network corresponding to and
given. These are: the Superposition Theorem, Thévenin’s replacing any star network is:
Theorem and Kennelly’s Star/Delta Theorem.
Z12 = Zao + Zbo + Zao Zbo
Superposition theorem (general network theorem)
Zco
The resultant current that flows in any branch of a network due
and so on.
to the simultaneous action of several driving voltages is equal
to the algebraic sum of the component currents due to each 6.3 Network reduction
driving voltage acting alone with the remainder short-circuited.
The aim of network reduction is to reduce a system to a simple
Thévenin’s theorem (active network reduction theorem) equivalent while retaining the identity of that part of the system
Any active network that may be viewed from two terminals can to be studied.
be replaced by a single driving voltage acting in series with a For example, consider the system shown in Figure A2.9. The
single impedance. The driving voltage is the open-circuit voltage network has two sources E' and E", a line AOB shunted by
between the two terminals and the impedance is the impedance an impedance, which may be regarded as the reduction of a
of the network viewed from the terminals with all sources short- further network connected between A and B, and a load
circuited. connected between O and N. The object of the reduction is to
Kennelly’s star/delta theorem (passive network reduction study the effect of opening a breaker at A or B during normal
theorem) system operations, or of a fault at A or B. Thus the identity of
nodes A and B must be retained together with the sources,
Any three-terminal network can be replaced by a delta or star but the branch ON can be eliminated, simplifying the study.
impedance equivalent without disturbing the external network. Proceeding, A, B, N, forms a star branch and can therefore
The formulae relating the replacement of a delta network by be converted to an equivalent delta.
the equivalent star network is as follows (Figure A2.8):
Zco = Z13 + Z23 ( Z12 + Z13 + Z23 )

and so on. 2.55 Ω
1.6Ω 0.4Ω
A B
0
0.75Ω 0.45 Ω
O
a b E' E''
18.85Ω
c Figure A2.9:
Typical power system network
(a) Star network
ZAN = ZAO + ZNO + ZAO ZNO =0.75+18.85 + 0.75 x 18.85
ZBO 0.45
=51 Ω
1 2
ZBN = ZBO + ZNO + ZBO ZNO =0.45+18.85 + 0.45 x 18.85
ZAO 0.75
=30.6 Ω
ZAB = ZAO + ZBO + ZAO ZBO =1.2 Ω (since ZNO >>> ZAO ZBO )
ZNO
3
The network is now reduced as shown in Figure A2.10.
(b) Delta network
By applying Thévenin’s theorem to the active loops, these can
be replaced by a single driving voltage in series with an
impedance as shown in Figure A2.11.
Figure A2.8 :
Star-delta network transformation

Fundamental Theory
6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction A2
2.5Ω 2.5Ω
1.6Ω 1.2Ω 0.4Ω 1.55Ω 0.39Ω

A B
A B
1.2Ω
E' 51Ω 30.6Ω E''
0.97E' 0.99E''
N
N
Figure A2.10:
Reduction using star/delta transformation Figure A2.12:
Reduction of typical power system network
1.6 x 51 With the widespread availability of computer-based power

Ω
1.6Ω 52.6
A A
system simulation software, it is now usual to use such software
on a routine basis for network calculations without significant
51
network reduction taking place. However, the network reduction
E' 51Ω E'
52.6 techniques given above are still valid, as there will be occasions
where such software is not immediately available and a hand
N N calculation must be carried out.
(a) Reduction of left active mesh In certain circuits, for example parallel lines on the same towers,
0.4 x 30.6 there is mutual coupling between branches. Correct circuit
Ω
0.4Ω 31 reduction must take account of this coupling.
B B
Three cases are of interest. These are:
30.6Ω E'' 30.6 E'' a. two branches connected together at their nodes
31
b. two branches connected together at one node only
N N c. two branches that remain unconnected
(b) Reduction of right active mesh
Considering each case in turn:
a. consider the circuit shown in Figure A2.13(a). The application
Figure A2.11: of a voltage V between the terminals P and Q gives:
Reduction of active meshes, Thévenin’s Theorem
V = I a Zaa + I b Zab
V = I a Zab + I b Zbb
The network shown in Figure A2.9 is now reduced to that shown
in Figure A2.12 with the nodes A and B retaining their identity. where Ia and Ib are the currents in branches a and b,
Further, the load impedance has been completely eliminated. respectively and I = I a + I b, the total current entering at terminal
P and leaving at terminal Q.
The network shown in Figure A2.12 may now be used to study
system disturbances, for example power swings with and Solving for I a and I b :
without faults.
Most reduction problems follow the same pattern as the example Ib =
(Zaa − Zab )V
above. The rules to apply in practical network reduction are: Zaa Zbb − Zab
2
a. decide on the nature of the disturbance or disturbances from which

to be studied
Ia =
(Zbb − Zab )V
b. decide on the information required, for example the branch
Zaa Zbb − Zab
2
currents in the network for a fault at a particular location
and
c. reduce all passive sections of the network not directly
V ( Zaa + Zbb −2Zab )
involved with the section under examination I = I a +I b =
Zaa Zbb −Zab
2

d. reduce all active meshes to a simple equivalent, that is, to
a simple source in series with a single impedance

Fundamental Theory
A2 6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction
(a) Actual circuit
I
P Q = -
A
C
=
I B
P Q
= -
(b) Equivalent circuit

Reduction of two branches with mutual coupling Reduction of mutually-coupled branches with a common
terminal
so that the equivalent impedance of the original circuit is: c. consider the four-terminal network given in Figure A2.15(a),
V Zaa Zbb −Zab
2 in which the branches 11’ and 22’ are electrically separate
Z= = ...Equation A2.21
except for a mutual link. The equations defining the network
I Zaa + Zbb −2Zab are:
(Figure A2.13(b)), and, if the branch impedances are equal, V1 = Z11 I 1 +Z12 I 2
the usual case, then:
V2 = Z21 I 1 +Z22 I 2
1 I 1 = Y11 V1+Y12 V2
Z=
2
(Zaa +Zab ) ...Equation A2.22 (Figure A2.13(c)) I 2 = Y21 V1+Y22 V2
where Z12 = Z 21 and Y12 = Y21, if the network is assumed to

b. consider the circuit in Figure A2.14(a).
be reciprocal. Further, by solving the above equations it can
The assumption is made that an equivalent star network can be shown that:
replace the network shown. From inspection with one terminal
isolated in turn and a voltage impressed across the remaining Y11 = Z 22
terminals it can be seen that:
Y22 = Z11
Z a + Z c = Z aa ...Equation A2.24
Y12 = Z12
Z b + Z c = Z bb
= Z11Z22 Z122
Z a + Z b = Z aa + Z bb + 2Z ab
Solving these equations gives: There are three independent coefficients, namely Z12, Z11, Z22,
Z a = Z aa + Z ab so the original circuit may be replaced by an equivalent mesh
containing four external terminals, each terminal being
Z b = Z bb + Z ab ...Equation A2.23 (see Figure A2.14(b)) connected to the other three by branch impedances as shown
Z a = -Z ab in Figure A2.15(b).

Fundamental Theory
6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction A2
In order to evaluate the branches of the equivalent mesh let Equation A2.25, defining the equivalent mesh in Figure A2.15(b),
all points of entry of the actual circuit be commoned except and inserting radial branches having impedances equal to Z11
node 1 of circuit 1, as shown in Figure A2.15(c). Then all and Z22 in terminals 1 and 2, results in Figure A2.15(d).
impressed voltages except V1 will be zero and:
I 1 = Y11 V 1
I 2 = Y12 V 1 1 1'
If the same conditions are applied to the equivalent mesh, then:
I 1 = V1 Z11
2 2'
I 2 = -V1 / Z12 = -V1 / Z12
(a) Actual circuit
These relations follow from the fact that the branch connecting
nodes 1 and 1’ carries current I1 and the branches connecting
nodes 1 and 2’ and 1 and 2 carry current I2. This must be true 1 1'
since branches between pairs of commoned nodes can carry
no current.
By considering each node in turn with the remainder commoned,
2 2'
the following relationships are found:
Z 11' = 1/ Y11
Z 22' = 1/ Y22
1
Z 12' = -1/ Y12
Z 12 = Z 1'2' = -Z21' = -Z12'
C
Hence:
Z11 Z22 -Z122 (c) Equivalent with all nodes

Z 11' = commoned except 1
Z22
Z11 Z22 -Z122
Z 22' = 1 1'
Z11 ...Equation A2.25
Z11 Z22 -Z122
Z 12' =
Z12 2 2'
A similar but equally rigorous equivalent circuit is shown in (d) Equivalent circuit
Figure A2.15(d). This circuit [Ref A2.2: Equivalent Circuits I.]
follows the fact that the self - impedance of any circuit is
independent of all other circuits. Therefore, it need not appear Figure A2.15 :
in any of the mutual branches if it is lumped as a radial branch Equivalent circuits for four terminal network with mutual
at the terminals. So putting Z11 and Z22 equal to zero in coupling
7. References
[A2.1] Power System Analysis. [A2.2] Equivalent Circuits I.

J. R. Mortlock Frank M. Starr,
and M. W. Humphrey Davies. Proc. A.I.E.E.
Chapman & Hall. Vol. 51. 1932, pp. 287-298.

Fault Calculations
A3
A3
Fault Calculations

Chapter
A3
Fault Calculations
1. Introduction 39
2. Three phase fault calculations 39
3. Symmetrical component analysis of a three-phase network 41
4. Equations and network connections for various types of faults 43
5. Current and voltage distribution in a system due to a fault 47
6. Effect of system earthing on zero sequence quantities 50
7. References 54
38
Fault Calculations
A3 1. Introduction
A power system is normally treated as a balanced symmetrical The information normally required for each kind of fault at each
three-phase network. When a fault occurs, the symmetry is relaying point is:
normally upset, resulting in unbalanced currents and voltages
a. maximum fault current
appearing in the network. The only exception is the three-phase
fault, which, because it involves all three phases equally at the b. minimum fault current
same location, is described as a symmetrical fault. By using
c. maximum through fault current
symmetrical component analysis and replacing the normal
system sources by a source at the fault location, it is possible To obtain the above information, the limits of stable generation
to analyse these fault conditions. and possible operating conditions, including the method of
system earthing, must be known. Faults are always assumed
For the correct application of protection equipment, it is essential
to be through zero fault impedance.
to know the fault current distribution throughout the system
and the voltages in different parts of the system due to the
fault. Further, boundary values of current at any relaying point
must be known if the fault is to be cleared with discrimination.
2. Three-phase fault calculations
Three-phase faults are unique in that they are balanced, that

is, symmetrical in the three phases, and can be calculated
F
from the single-phase impedance diagram and the operating
conditions existing prior to the fault.
A fault condition is a sudden abnormal alteration to the normal

circuit arrangement. The circuit quantities (current and voltage)
will alter, and the circuit will pass through a transient state to
a steady state. In the transient state, the initial magnitude of
the fault current will depend upon the point on the voltage wave
at which the fault occurs. The decay of the transient condition,
N
until it merges into steady state, is a function of the parameters
of the circuit elements. The transient current may be regarded
as a d.c. exponential current superimposed on the symmetrical Figure A3.1:
steady state fault current. In a.c. machines, owing to armature Network with fault at F
reaction, the machine reactances pass through ‘sub transient’
and ‘transient’ stages before reaching their steady state point F are Z'1 and Z''1 , and the current through point F before
synchronous values. For this reason, the resultant fault current the fault occurs is I .
during the transient period, from fault inception to steady state
The voltage V at F before fault inception is:
also depends on the location of the fault in the network relative
to that of the rotating plant. V = E' - I Z' = E'' + I Z''
After the fault the voltage V is zero. Hence, the change in
In a system containing many voltage sources, or having a
voltage is -V . Because of the fault, the change in the current
complex network arrangement, it is tedious to use the normal
flowing into the network from F is:
system voltage sources to evaluate the fault current in the faulty
branch or to calculate the fault current distribution in the system.
A more practical method [Ref A3.1: Circuit Analysis of A.C.
∆I = −
V
= −V
(
Z1' + Z1'' )
Power Systems] is to replace the system voltages by a single
Z1 Z1' Z1''
driving voltage at the fault point. This driving voltage is the
voltage existing at the fault point before the fault occurs.
and, since no current was flowing into the network from F prior
Consider the circuit given in Figure A3.1 where the driving to the fault, the fault current flowing from the network into the
voltages are E' and E'' , the impedances on either side of fault fault is:

Fault Calculations
2. Three-phase fault calculations A3
I f = −∆ I = V
( Z1' + Z1'' ) 2.5Ω
Z1' Z1'' 1.55Ω 0.39Ω
A B
By applying the Principle of Superposition, the load currents 1.2Ω
circulating in the system prior to the fault may be added to the
currents circulating in the system due to the fault, to give the V
total current in any branch of the system at the time of fault
inception. However, in most problems, the load current is small
N
in comparison to the fault current and is usually ignored.
In a practical power system, the system regulation is such that (a) Three - phase fault diagram for a fault at node A
the load voltage at any point in the system is within 10% of the
declared open-circuit voltage at that point. For this reason, it Busbar
is usual to regard the pre-fault voltage at the fault as being the Circuit
open-circuit voltage, and this assumption is also made in a breaker
number of the standards dealing with fault level calculations.
For an example of practical three-phase fault calculations,
consider a fault at A in Figure A2.9. With the network reduced A
as shown in Figure A3.2, the load voltage at A before the fault
X
occurs is:
V = 0.97 E' + 1.55 I

1.2 x 2.5 + (b) Typical physical arrangement of node A
V = 0.99 E'' + 0.39 I
2.5 + 1.2 with a fault shown at X
2.5 Ω Figure A3.3:

Network with fault at node A
1.55 Ω 0.39 Ω
A B
1.2 Ω The network viewed from AN has a driving point impedance
Z1 = 0.68 Ω.
0.97 0.99 V
The current in the fault is
Z1 .
Let this current be 1.0 per unit. It is now necessary to find the
N fault current distribution in the various branches of the network
and in particular the current flowing from A to X on the
assumption that a relay at X is to detect the fault condition.
Figure A3.2: The equivalent impedances viewed from either side of the fault
Reduction of typical power system network
are shown in Figure A3.4(a).
The currents from Figure A3.4(a) are as follows:
For practical working conditions, E' >>> 1.55 I and 1.55
E'' >>>1.207 I . Hence E' ~
= E'' ~
= V. From the right:
2.76
= 0.563 p.u.
Replacing the driving voltages E'' and E'' by the load voltage
V between A and N modifies the circuit as shown in Figure 1.21
From the left: = 0.437 p.u.
A3.3(a). 2.76
The node A is the junction of three branches. In practice, the There is a parallel branch to the right of A
node would be a busbar, and the branches are feeders radiating Therefore, current in 2.5 ohm branch
from the bus via circuit breakers, as shown in Figure A3.3(b).
There are two possible locations for a fault at A; the busbar 1.2 x 0.563
= = 0.183 p.u.
side of the breakers or the line side of the breakers. In this 3.7
example, it is assumed that the fault is at X, and it is required
to calculate the current flowing from the bus to X.

Fault Calculations
A3 2. Three-phase fault calculations
and the current in 1.2 ohm branch

1.55Ω A 1.21Ω
2.5 x 0.563
= = 0.38 p.u.
3.7
Total current entering X from the left, that is, from A to X, is 0.437 V
+ 0.183 = 0.62 p.u. and from B to X is 0.38 p.u. The equivalent
network as viewed from the relay is as shown in Figure A3.4(b).
N
The impedances on either side are: (a) Impedance viewed from node A
0.68/0.62 = 1.1 Ω
and 0.68/0.38 = 1.79 Ω 1.1Ω X 1.79Ω
The circuit of Figure A3.4(b) has been included because the

Protection Engineer is interested in these equivalent parameters
when applying certain types of protection relay. V
N
(b) Equivalent impedances viewed from node X
Figure A3.4:
Impedances viewed from fault
3. Symmetrical component analysis of a three-phase network
The Protection Engineer is interested in a wider variety of faults

than just a three-phase fault. The most common fault is a
E1 =
1
3
( 
E a + aE b + a 2 E c  )
single- phase to earth fault, which, in LV systems, can produce 
a higher fault current than a three-phase fault. Similarly, because
protection is expected to operate correctly for all types of fault,
E2 =
1
3
( 2
E a + a E b + aE c 


)

it may be necessary to consider the fault currents due to many 1 
different types of fault. Since the three-phase fault is unique in E 0 =

3
(
Ea + Eb + Ec 

) ...Equation A3.2
being a balanced fault, a method of analysis that is applicable
to unbalanced faults is required. It can be shown [Ref A3.2:
Method of Symmetrical Co-ordinates Applied to the Solution where all quantities are referred to the reference phase A.
of Polyphase Networks] that, by applying the ‘Principle of A similar set of equations can be written for phase and sequence
Superposition’, any general three-phase system of vectors may currents.
be replaced by three sets of balanced (symmetrical) vectors; Figure A3.5 illustrates the resolution of a system of unbalanced
two sets are three-phase but having opposite phase rotation vectors.
and one set is co-phasal. These vector sets are described as
the positive, negative and zero sequence sets respectively. When a fault occurs in a power system, the phase impedances
are no longer identical (except in the case of three-phase faults)
The equations between phase and sequence voltages are and the resulting currents and voltages are unbalanced, the
given below: point of greatest unbalance being at the fault point. It has been
E a = E1 + E 2 + E 0  shown in Chapter [A1: Fundamentals of Protection Practice]
 that the fault may be studied by short-circuiting all normal

E b = a 2 E1 + aE 2 + E 0  driving voltages in the system and replacing the fault connection
 ...Equation A3.1 by a source whose driving voltage is equal to the pre-fault
E c = aE1 + a 2 E 2 + E 0 

Fault Calculations
3. Symmetrical component analysis of a three-phase network A3
In Figure A3.6, which represents a simple system, the voltage

drops I'1 Z'1 and I'1 Z''1 are equal to ( V - V1 ) where the currents
I'1 and I''1 enter the fault from the left and right respectively
and impedances Z'1 and Z''1 are the total system impedances
viewed from either side of the fault branch. The voltage V is
equal to the open-circuit voltage in the system, and it has been
shown that E' = E'' =V (see Section 2). So the positive sequence
voltages in the system due to the fault are greatest at the source,
as shown in the gradient diagram, Figure A3.6(b).
X
F
Figure A3.5:
Resolution of a system of unbalanced vectors N
(a) System diagram
voltage at the fault point. Hence, the system impedances remain N

symmetrical, viewed from the fault, and the fault point may now X I '1 Z '1
be regarded as the point of injection of unbalanced voltages
and currents into the system. F
This is a most important approach in defining the fault conditions V1

N'
since it allows the system to be represented by sequence (b) Gradient diagram
networks [Ref A3.3: Power System Analysis] using the method
of symmetrical components.
3.1 Positive sequence network Figure A3.6:
Fault at F, Positive sequence diagrams
During normal balanced system conditions, only positive
sequence currents and voltages can exist in the system, and
therefore the normal system impedance network is a positive 3.2 Negative sequence network
sequence network. If only positive sequence quantities appear in a power system
When a fault occurs in a power system, the current in the fault under normal conditions, then negative sequence quantities
branch changes from 0 to I and the positive sequence voltage can only exist during an unbalanced fault.
across the branch changes from V to V1; replacing the fault If no negative sequence quantities are present in the fault
branch by a source equal to the change in voltage and short- branch prior to the fault, then, when a fault occurs, the change
circuiting all normal driving voltages in the system results in a in voltage is V2, and the resulting current I2 flowing from the
current ∆I flowing into the system, and: network into the fault is:
∆I = −
(V − V ) 1
I2 =
−V2
Z1 Z2 ...Equation A3.5
...Equation A3.3
The impedances in the negative sequence network are generally
where Z1 is the positive sequence impedance of the system
the same as those in the positive sequence network. In machines
viewed from the fault. As before the fault no current was flowing
Z1 ≠ Z2, but the difference is generally ignored, particularly in
from the fault into the system, it follows that I1, the fault current
large networks.
flowing from the system into the fault must equal -∆I .
Therefore: The negative sequence diagrams, shown in Figure A3.7, are
similar to the positive sequence diagrams, with two important
V1= V - I1 Z1 ...Equation A3.4
differences; no driving voltages exist before the fault and the
is the relationship between positive sequence currents and negative sequence voltage V2 is greatest at the fault point.
voltages in the fault branch during a fault.

Fault Calculations
A3 3. Symmetrical component analysis of a three-phase network
3.3 Zero sequence network

X
The zero sequence current and voltage relationships during a
fault condition are the same as those in the negative sequence F
network.
Hence:
V0 = - I0 Z0 ...Equation A3.6
Also, the zero sequence diagram is that of Figure A3.7,

substituting I0 for I2, and so on. N
(a) Negative sequence network
The currents and voltages in the zero sequence network are
co-phasal, that is, all the same phase. For zero sequence F
currents to flow in a system there must be a return connection
X
through either a neutral conductor or the general mass of earth.
Note must be taken of this fact when determining zero sequence
equivalent circuits. Further, in general Z1 ≠ Z0 and the value of
Z0 varies according to the type of plant, the winding arrangement
and the method of earthing. N
(b) Gradient diagram
Figure A3.7:
Fault at F, positive sequence diagrams
4. Equations and network connections for various types of faults
The most important types of faults are as follows: the equations defining each fault (using phase-neutral values)
can be written down as follows:
a. single-phase to earth
a. Single-phase-earth (A-E)
b. phase to phase
c. phase-phase-earth Ib = 0 

d. three-phase (with or without earth) Ic = 0 
The above faults are described as single shunt faults because 
V a = 0 
they occur at one location and involve a connection between ...Equation A3.7
one phase and another or to earth.
b. Phase-phase (B-C)
In addition, the Protection Engineer often studies two other
types of fault: Ia = 0 

e. single-phase open circuit I b = −I c 
f. cross-country fault 
V b = V c 
...Equation A3.8
By determining the currents and voltages at the fault point, it
is possible to define the fault and connect the sequence c. Phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
networks to represent the fault condition. From the initial
equations and the network diagram, the nature of the fault Ia = 0 
currents and voltages in different branches of the system can 
be determined.
Vb = 0 

For shunt faults of zero impedance, and neglecting load current, V c = 0 
...Equation A3.9

Fault Calculations
4. Equations and network connections for various types of faults A3
d. Three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)
A F
Ia + Ib + Ic = 0
 B
Va = Vb  C

Vb = Vc

 ...Equation A3.10
It should be noted from the above that for any type of fault
there are three equations that define the fault conditions.
When there is a fault impedance, this must be taken into account
when writing down the equations. For example, with a single (a) Definition of fault
phase-earth fault through fault impedance Zf , Equations A3.7
are re-written:
F1 F2 F0
Ib = 0 
 N2 N0
Ic = 0 
N1

V a = I a Z f 
...Equation A3.11
4.1 Single-phase-earth fault (A-E)
Consider a fault defined by Equations A3.7 and by Figure
Figure A3.8:
A3.8(a). Converting Equations A3.7 into sequence quantities
Single-phase-earth fault at F
by using Equations A3.1 and A3.2, then:
1 ...Equation A3.12
I1 = I 2 = I o =
Ia The constraints imposed by Equations A3.15 and A3.17 indicate
3
that there is no zero sequence network connection in the
equivalent circuit and that the positive and negative sequence
V1 = - ( V2 + V0 ) ...Equation A3.13
networks are connected in parallel. Figure A3.9 shows the
Substituting for V1, V2 and V0 in Equation A3.13 from Equations defining and equivalent circuits satisfying the above equations.
A3.4, A3.5 and A3.6:
V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2 + I0 Z0
but, from Equation A3.12, I1 = I2 = I0, therefore:
A F
V = I1 ( Z1 + Z2 + Z3 ) ...Equation A3.14
B
The constraints imposed by Equations A3.12 and A3.14 indicate C
that the equivalent circuit for the fault is obtained by connecting
the sequence networks in series, as shown in Figure A3.8(b).
4.2 Phase-phase fault (B-C)
From Equation A3.8 and using Equations A3.1 and A3.2:
(a) Definition of fault
I1 = I2
I1 = 0 ... Equation A3.15
F1 F2 F0
V1 = V2 ... Equation A3.16
From network Equations A3.4 and A3.5, Equation A3.16 can

N2 N0
be re-written:
N1
V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2 + I0 Z0
V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2
and substituting for I2 from Equation A3.15:
V = I1 ( Z1 + Z2 ) ... Equation A3.17 Figure A3.9:

Phase-phase fault at F

Fault Calculations
A3 4. Equations and network connections for various types of faults
4.3 Phase-phase-earth fault (B-C-E)  Z0 Z 2 

V =  Z1 + I1
Again, from Equation A3.9 and Equations A3.1 and A3.2:
 Z 0 + Z 2 
I1 = -( I2 + I 0 ) ...Equation A3.18 or
and
I1 = V
(Z 0 + Z2 )
V1 = V2 = V0 ...Equation A3.19 Z1Z 0 + Z1Z 2 + Z 0 Z 2 ...Equation A3.22
Substituting for V2 and V0 using network Equations A3.5 and
A3.6: From the above equations it follows that connecting the three
sequence networks in parallel as shown in Figure A3.10(b)
I2 Z2 = I0 Z0 may represent a phase-phase-earth fault.
thus, using Equation A3.18:
4.4 Three-phase fault (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)
Z2 I1
I0 = − Assuming that the fault includes earth, then, from Equations
Z0 + Z 2 ...Equation A3.20 A3.10 and A3.1, A3.2, it follows that:
Z0 I1
V0 = V a 
I2 = −
Z0 + Z 2
...Equation A3.21  ...Equation A3.23
V1 = V 2 = 0 
Now equating V1 and V2 and using Equation A3.4 gives:
and
V - I1 Z1 = I2 Z2
I 0 = 0 ...Equation A3.24
or
Substituting V2 = 0 in Equation A3.5 gives:
V = I1 Z1 - I2 Z2
I 2 = 0 ...Equation A3.25
Substituting for I2 from Equation A3.21:
and substituting V1 = 0 in Equation A3.4:
0=V1 - I1 Z1
or
A F
V1 = I1 Z1 ...Equation A3.26
B
Further, since from Equation A3.24 I0 =0 it follows from
C
Equation A3.6 that V0 is zero when Z0 is finite. The equivalent
sequence connections for a three-phase fault are shown in
Figure A3.11.
A F
(a) Definition of fault
F1 F2 F0
B
F1 F2 F0 C
N2 N0
N1
N2 N0
N1
(b) Equivalent circuit (a) Definition of fault

Phase-phase-earth fault at F Three-phase-earth fault at F

Fault Calculations
4. Equations and network connections for various types of faults A3
4.5 Single-phase open circuit fault

The single-phase open circuit fault is shown diagrammatically F F'
in Figure A3.12(a). At the fault point, the boundary conditions

are: a-e b-e
Ia = 0 

V b = V c = 0  ...Equation A3.27 (a) `A' phase to ground at F and `B' phase to ground at F'
Hence, from Equations A3.2,

V0 = 1/3 Va
V1 = 1/3 Va
F1 F '1
and therefore:
V 1 = V 2 = V0 = 1 3 V a 
 ...Equation A3.28

I a = I1 + I 2 + I 0 = 0  N1 N '1
From Equations A3.28, it can be concluded that the sequence F2 F '2 1 2

a
networks are connected in parallel, as shown in Figure A3.12(b).
P Q N2 N '2
na F0 F '0 1
a
nb
nc N0 N '0
(a) Circuit diagram
P1 P2 P0 Figure A3.13:
N1 +ve N2 -ve N0 Zero Cross-country fault-phase A to phase B
Sequence n1 Sequence n2 Sequence n0
Network Q1 Network Q2 Network Q0
Therefore:
I a1 = I a 2 = I a 0 
 ...Equation A3.29
V a1 + V a 2 + V a 0 = 0 
Figure A3.12:
Open circuit on phase A
b) At point F'

4.6 Cross-country faults I ' a = I ' c = 0 
A cross-country fault is one where there are two faults affecting V 'b = 0 
the same circuit, but in different locations and possibly involving
different phases. Figure A3.13(a) illustrates this.
and therefore:
The constraints expressed in terms of sequence quantities are
I'b1 = I'b2 = I'b0 ...Equation A3.32
as follows:
a) At point F
I b + I c = 0 

Va = 0 

Fault Calculations
A3 4. Equations and network connections for various types of faults
To solve, it is necessary to convert the currents and voltages Converting:

at point F' to the sequence currents in the same phase as
those at point F. From Equation A3.32, a 2V'a1 + a V'a2 + V'a0 = 0
a2I'a1 = a I'a2 = I'a0 or
or
V'a1 + a 2V'a2 + a V'a0 = 0 ...Equation A3.34
I'a1 = a 2I'a2 = a I'a0 ... Equation A3.33
The fault constraints involve phase shifted sequence quantities.
and, for the voltages
To construct the appropriate sequence networks, it is
necessary to introduce phase-shifting transformers to couple
V'b1 + V'b2 = V'b0 = 0
the sequence networks. This is shown in Figure A3.13(b).
5. Current and voltage distribution in a system due to a fault
Practical fault calculations involve the examination of the effect Further calculations for establishing voltage variation at the
of a fault in branches of network other than the faulted branch, relaying point, or the stability limit of the system with a fault on
so that protection can be applied correctly to isolate the section it, are now carried out in order to determine the class of
of the system directly involved in the fault. It is therefore not protection necessary, such as high or low speed, unit or non-
enough to calculate the fault current in the fault itself; the fault unit, etc.
current distribution must also be established. Further, abnormal
5.1 Current distribution
voltage stresses may appear in a system because of a fault,
and these may affect the operation of the protection. Knowledge The phase current in any branch of a network is determined
of current and voltage distribution in a network due to a fault from the sequence current distribution in the equivalent circuit
is essential for the application of protection. of the fault. The sequence currents are expressed in per unit
terms of the sequence current in the fault branch.
The approach to network fault studies for assessing the
application of protection equipment may be summarised as In power system calculations, the positive and negative
follows: sequence impedances are normally equal. Thus, the division
of sequence currents in the two networks will also be identical.
a. from the network diagram and accompanying data,
assess the limits of stable generation and possible The impedance values and configuration of the zero sequence
operating conditions for the system network are usually different from those of the positive and
negative sequence networks, so the zero sequence current
NOTE: When full information is not available assumptions may
distribution is calculated separately.
have to be made
If C0 and C1 are described as the zero and positive sequence
b. with faults assumed to occur at each relaying point in
distribution factors then the actual current in a sequence branch
turn, maximum and minimum fault currents are calculated
is given by multiplying the actual current in the sequence fault
for each type of fault
branch by the appropriate distribution factor.
NOTE: The fault is assumed to be through zero impedance
For this reason, if I1, I2 and I0 are sequence currents in an
c. by calculating the current distribution in the network for arbitrary branch of a network due to a fault at some point in
faults applied at different points in the network (from (b) the network, then the phase currents in that branch may be
above) the maximum through fault currents at each relaying expressed in terms of the distribution constants and the
point are established for each type of fault sequence currents in the fault.
d. at this stage more or less definite ideas on the type of These are shown for the various common shunt faults, using
protection to be applied are formed. Equation A3.1 and the appropriate fault equations:

Fault Calculations
5. Current and voltage distribution in a system due to a fault A3
a. single-phase-earth (A-E)
I ' a = ( 2C1 + C 0 ) I 0  Power system

 A B
I ' b = −( C1 − C 0 ) I 0 

I ' c = −( C1 − C 0 ) I 0 
...Equation A3.35
O
Fault
b. phase-phase (B-C)
 Load
I'a = 0  (a) Single line diagram

(2
)
I ' b = a − a C1 I 1 
 j7.5Ω

( )
I ' c = a − a 2 C1 I 1 

...Equation A3.36
j0.9Ω
A
j2.6Ω j1.6Ω
B
0.08
j0.4Ω
0
c. phase-phase-earth (B-C-E) 1.0 0.165 0.112
0.755 j4.8Ω 0.192
 0.053
I ' a = −( C1 − C 0 ) I 0 

 (b) Zero sequence network
  
( Z
)
I ' b =  a − a 2 C1 0 − a 2C1 − C 0  I 0 
 Z1  
 j2.5Ω 0.183
 

(

Z
)
I ' c =  a 2 − a C1 0 − aC1 + C 0  I 0 
Z1   ...Equation A3.37
j1.6Ω
A
j0.75Ω 0 j0.45Ω
B
j0.4Ω
1.0 0.395 0.373

d. three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E) 0.422 j18.85Ω 0.556
0.022
I ' a = C1 I 1 

 (c) Positive and negative sequence networks
I ' b = a 2C1 I 1 

I
' c = aC1 I 1 
 ...Equation A3.38
Figure A3.14:
As an example of current distribution technique, consider the Typical power system
system in Figure A3.14(a). The equivalent sequence networks
are given in Figures A3.14(b) and (c), together with typical
Therefore, from Equation A3.14, the current in fault branch
values of impedances. A fault is assumed at A and it is desired
to find the currents in branch OB due to the fault. In each V
network, the distribution factors are given for each branch, with Ia =
0. 68
the current in the fault branch taken as 1.0 p.u. From the
diagram, the zero sequence distribution factor C0 in branch Assuming that V = 63.5 volts, then:
OB is 0.112 and the positive sequence factor C1 is 0.373. For 63.5
1
an earth fault at A the phase currents in branch OB from I0 = 3
Ia = = 31.2 A
Equation A3.35 are:
3 x 0.68
Ia = (0.746+0.112) I0 = 0.858 I0 If V is taken as the reference vector, then:
and I'a = 26.8 <-90° A
I' b = I' c = -(0.373+0.112) I0 = 0.261 I0 I'b = I'c = 8.15 <-90° A
By using network reduction methods and assuming that all The vector diagram for the above fault condition is shown in
impedances are reactive, it can be shown that Figure A3.15.
Z1 = Z0 = j0.68 Ω

Fault Calculations
A3 5. Current and voltage distribution in a system due to a fault
5.2 Voltage distribution and, using Equations A3.1:

The voltage distribution in any branch of a network is determined
Va = V1 + V2 + V0 = 56.76 - (6.74 + 2.25)
from the sequence voltage distribution. As shown by Equations
A3.4, A3.5 and A3.6 and the gradient diagrams, Figures A3.6(b) V 'a = 47.8<0°
and A3.7(b), the positive sequence voltage is a minimum at V 'b = a 2 V '1 + aV '2 + V '0 = 56.76 a 2- (6.74a + 2.25)
the fault, whereas the zero and negative sequence voltages
are a maximum. Thus, the sequence voltages in any part of V 'b = 61.5<-116.4° volts
the system may be given generally as: V 'c = a V '1 + a 2V '2 + V '0 = 56.76 a - (6.74a 2 + 2.25)
 n  V 'c = 61.5<116.4° volts
V1' = V − I 1  Z1 − ∑ C1n ∆Z1n  
 1   These voltages are shown on the vector diagram, Figure A3.15.

 n  
V 2 ' = − I 2  Z1 − ∑ C1n ∆Z1n  
 1  
 = 61.5-116.4°
 n  
V0 ' = − I 0  Z 0 − ∑ C 0 n ∆Z 0 n  
 1   ...Equation A3.39
Using the above equation, the fault voltages at bus B in the I'b=I'c =8.15-90°
previous example (Figure A3.14) can be found.
From the positive sequence distribution diagram Figure A3.8(c): =63.5-0°
[ {
V '1 = V − I1 Z1 − j ( 0.395 × 0. 75 ) + ( 0.373 × 0. 45 ) }] =47.8-0°
[
V ' 2 = V − I1 Z1 − j 0.464 ]
From the zero sequence distribution diagram Figure A3.8(b):
=26.8-90°
[ {
V ' 0 = I 0 Z 0 − j ( 0.165 × 2. 6 ) + ( 0.112 × 1. 6 ) }]
=61.5-116.4°
[
= I 0 Z 0 − j 0.608 ]
For earth faults, at the fault
Figure A3.15:
I 1 = I 2 = I 0 = j31.2A Vector diagram-fault currents and voltages in branch OB due
to P-E fault at bus A
when V = 63.5 volts and is taken as the reference vector.
Further, Z1 = Z2 = j0.68 Ω.
Hence:
V '1 = 63.5 - (0.216 x 31.2) = 56.76<0° volts

V '2 = 6.74 <180° volts
V '0 = 2.25 <180° volts

Fault Calculations
6. Effect of system earthing on zero sequence quantities A3
It has been shown previously that zero sequence currents flow

in the earth path during earth faults, and it follows that the
nature of these currents will be influenced by the method of
earthing. Because these quantities are unique in their association
with earth faults they can be utilised in protection, provided
their measurement and character are understood for all practical
system conditions.
6.1 Residual current and voltage
A
Residual currents and voltages depend for their existence on
two factors: (a) Residual current
a. a system connection to earth at two or more points

A
b. a potential difference between the earthed points resulting
B
in a current flow in the earth paths
C
Under normal system operation there is a capacitance between
the phases and between phase and earth; these capacitances
may be regarded as being symmetrical and distributed
uniformly through the system. So even when (a) above is
satisfied, if the driving voltages are symmetrical the vector sum
of the currents will equate to zero and no current will flow
between any two earth points in the system. When a fault to
earth occurs in a system an unbalance results in condition (b)
being satisfied. From the definitions given above it follows that
residual currents and voltages are the vector sum of phase
(b) Residual voltage
currents and phase voltages respectively.
Hence:
Figure A3.16:
I R = Ia + Ib + Ic  Measurement of residual quantities

and 
 6.2 System Z 0 Z 1 ratio
V R = V ae + V be + V ce  ...Equation A3.40
The system Z0 Z1 ratio is defined as the ratio of zero sequence
Also, from Equations A3.2: and positive sequence impedances viewed from the fault; it is
a variable ratio, dependent upon the method of earthing, fault
I R = 3 I 0 
position and system operating arrangement.
V R = 3V0  When assessing the distribution of residual quantities through
a system, it is convenient to use the fault point as the reference
It should be further noted that: as it is the point of injection of unbalanced quantities into the
system. The residual voltage is measured in relation to the
V ae = V an + V ne  normal phase-neutral system voltage and the residual current
 is compared with the three-phase fault current at the fault point.
V be = V bn + V ne  It can be shown [Ref A3.4: Neutral Groundings] [Ref A3.5:
 ...Equation A3.42
Fault Calculations] that the character of these quantities can
V ce = V cn + V ne 
be expressed in terms of the system Z0 Z1 ratio.
and since Vbn = a 2 Van ' Vcn = aVan then: The positive sequence impedance of a system is mainly
VR = 3Vne reactive, whereas the zero sequence impedance being affected
...Equation A3.43
by the method of earthing may contain both resistive and
where Vne is the neutral displacement voltage. reactive components of comparable magnitude. Thus the
Measurements of residual quantities are made using current and express of the Z0 Z1 ratio approximates to:
voltage transformer connections as shown in Figure A3.16. If relays
Z0 X R
are connected into the circuits in place of the ammeter and = 0 − j 0
voltmeter, it follows that earth faults in the system can be detected. Z1 X1 X1 ...Equation A3.44

Fault Calculations
A3 6. Effect of system earthing on zero sequence quantities
Expressing the residual current in terms of the three-phase

current and Z0 Z1 ratio: 3.0
Residual current for
Double-Phase-Earth fault
a. Single-phase-earth (A-E)
2.5
Residual voltage for
3V 3 V Single-Phase-Earth fault
IR = =
2 Z1 + Z 0 ( ) Z1 where K= Z0 Z1
and
2+K 2.0
as multiples of
V
I3 φ = 1.5
Z1
Thus: 1.0 Residual voltage for
and
IR 3
=
I3φ 2+K ( ) ...Equation A3.45
0.5
Residual current for

b. Phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
( )
0 1 2 3 4 5 •
3 Z1 V Z1 + Z 0
I R = 3I0 = − I1 I1 = =
Z1 + Z 0 2 Z1Z 0 + Z12
Hence: Figure A3.17:
3V Z1 3
V Variation of residual quantities at fault point
IR = − = −
2 Z1Z 0 + Z12 (
2 K + 1 Z1 )
6.3.1 Solid fault-isolated neutral
Therefore:
From Figure A3.18 it can be seen that the capacitance to earth
IR 3
= − of the faulted phase is short circuited by the fault and the
I 3φ 2K + 1( ) ...Equation A3.46 resulting unbalance causes capacitance currents to flow into
the fault, returning via sound phases through sound phase
Similarly, the residual voltages are found by multiplying
capacitances to earth.
Equations A3.45 and A3.46 by - K V .
At the fault point:
a. Single-phase-each (A-E)
VaF =0
3K
VR = − V
(2 + K ) ...Equation A3.47
and
VR =VbF +VcF = -3Ean
b. Phase-phase-earth (B-C-E)
At source:
3K
VR = V
( 2 K + 1) ...Equation A3.48
VR = 3Vne = -3Ean
since
The curves in Figure A3.17 illustrate the variation of the above
residual quantities with the Z0 Z1 ratio. The residual current in Ean + E bn + E cn = 0
any part of the system can be obtained by multiplying the
Thus, with an isolated neutral system, the residual voltage is
current from the curve by the appropriate zero sequence
three times the normal phase-neutral voltage of the faulted
distribution factor. Similarly, the residual voltage is calculated
phase and there is no variation between VR at source and VR
by subtracting from the voltage curve three times the zero
at fault.
sequence voltage drop between the measuring point in the
system and the fault. In practice, there is some leakage impedance between neutral
and earth and a small residual current would be detected at
6.3 Variation of residual quantities
X if a very sensitive relay were employed.
The variation of residual quantities in a system due to different
earth arrangements can be most readily understood by using
vector diagrams. Three examples have been chosen, namely
solid fault-isolated neutral, solid fault-resistance neutral, and
resistance fault-solid neutral. These are illustrated in Figures
A3.18, A3.19 and A3.20 respectively.

Fault Calculations
6. Effect of system earthing on zero sequence quantities A3
X X F
F A
A
B
N B C
(a) Circuit diagram
(a) Circuit diagram c
a(F)
c
X
n a(F)
b
(b) Vector diagram
b
(b) Vector diagram
(at source)
(at fault)
(c) Residual voltage diagram
Figure A3.19:
(c) Residual voltage diagram Solid fault-resistance neutral
Figure A3.18: From the residual voltage diagram it is clear that there is little
Solid fault-isolated neutral variation in the residual voltages at source and fault, as most
residual voltage is dropped across the neutral resistor. The
degree of variation in residual quantities is therefore dependent
6.3.2 Solid fault-resistance neutral on the neutral resistor value.
Figure A3.19 shows that the capacitance of the faulted phase 6.3.3 Resistance fault-solid neutral
is short-circuited by the fault and the neutral current combines
with the sound phase capacitive currents to give Ia in the faulted Capacitance can be neglected because, since the capacitance
phase. of the faulted phase is not short-circuited, the circulating
capacitance currents will be negligible.
With a relay at X, residually connected as shown in Figure
A3.16, the residual current will be Ian, that is, the neutral earth At the fault point:
loop current. VR =VFn +Vbn +Vcn
At the fault point: At relaying point X:
VR =VbF +VcF, since VFe = 0 VR =VXn +Vbn +Vcn
At source:
VR =VaX +VbX +VcX

Fault Calculations
A3 6. Effect of system earthing on zero sequence quantities
X
F
A
B
C
(a) Circuit diagram

c
n a
X
F
b
(b) Vector diagram
(c) Residual voltage (d) Residual voltage at

at fault relaying point
Figure A3.20:
Resistance fault-solid neutral
From the residual voltage diagrams shown in Figure A3.20, it

is apparent that the residual voltage is greatest at the fault and
reduces towards the source. If the fault resistance approaches
zero, that is, the fault becomes solid, then V Fn approaches
zero and the voltage drops in ZS and ZL become greater. The
ultimate value of V Fn will depend on the effectiveness of the
earthing, and this is a function of the system Z0 Z1 ratio.

Fault Calculations
7. References A3
[A3.1] Circuit Analysis of A.C. Power Systems, Volume I.

Edith Clarke. John Wiley & Sons.
[A3.2] Method of Symmetrical Co-ordinates

Applied to the Solution of Polyphase Networks.
C.L. Fortescue.
Trans. A.I.E.E.,Vol. 37, Part II, 1918, pp 1027-40
[A3.3] Power System Analysis.

J.R. Mortlock and M.W. Humphrey Davies.
Chapman and Hall.
[A3.4] Neutral Groundings.

R Willheim and M. Waters, Elsevier.
[A3.5] Fault Calculations.

F.H.W. Lackey,
Oliver & Boyd.

A4
Equivalent Circuits and Parameters
of Power System Plant
Chapter
Equivalent Circuits and Parameters

A4
of Power System Plant
1. Introduction 57
2. Synchronous machines 57
3. Armature reaction 58
4. Steady state theory 59
5. Salient pole rotor 60
6. Transient analysis 61
7. Asymmetry 63
8. Machine reactances 63
9. Negative sequence reactance 65
10. Zero sequence reactance 65
11. Direct and quadrature axis values 65
12. Effect of saturation on machine reactances 66
13. Transformers 66
14. Transformer positive sequence equivalent circuits 67
15. Transformer zero sequence equivalent circuits 68
16. Auto-transformers 70
17. Transformer impedances 71
18. Overhead lines and cables 73
19. Calculation of series impedance 74
20. Calculation of shunt impedance 75
21. Overhead line circuits with or without earth wires 78
22. OHL equivalent circuits 80
23. Cable circuits 81
24. Overhead line and cable data 82
25. References 92
Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of Power System Plant
A4 1. Introduction
Knowledge of the behaviour of the principal electrical system on the subject, of which [Ref A4.1: Physical significance of
plant items under normal and fault conditions is a prerequisite sub-subtransient quantities in dynamic behaviour of
for the proper application of protection. This chapter synchronous machines] is a good starting point.
summarises basic synchronous machine, transformer and
Power system plant may be divided into two broad groups
transmission line theory and gives equivalent circuits and
- static and rotating.
parameters so that a fault study can be successfully completed
before the selection and application of the protection systems The modelling of static plant for fault level calculations provides
described in later chapters. Only what might be referred to few difficulties, as plant parameters generally do not change
as ‘traditional’ synchronous machine theory is covered, as during the period of interest following fault inception. The
that is all that calculations for fault level studies generally problem in modelling rotating plant is that the parameters
require. Readers interested in more advanced models of change depending on the response to a change in power
synchronous machines are referred to the numerous papers system conditions.
2. Synchronous machines
There are two main types of synchronous machine: cylindrical

rotor and salient pole. In general, the former is confined to 2
and 4 pole turbine generators, while salient pole types are
built with 4 poles upwards and include most classes of duty.
Both classes of machine are similar in so far that each has a
stator carrying a three-phase winding distributed over its inner
periphery. Within the stator bore is carried the rotor which is
magnetised by a winding carrying d.c. current.
The essential difference between the two classes of machine
lies in the rotor construction. The cylindrical rotor type has a
uniformly cylindrical rotor that carries its excitation winding
distributed over a number of slots around its periphery. This
construction is unsuited to multi-polar machines but it is very
sound mechanically. Hence it is particularly well adapted for
the highest speed electrical machines and is universally
employed for 2 pole units, plus some 4 pole units.
The salient pole type has poles that are physically separate, Figure A4.1:
Large synchronous generator
each carrying a concentrated excitation winding. This type
of construction is in many ways complementary to that of the
cylindrical rotor and is employed in machines having 4 poles
speed of the generator is not subject to the same constraints
or more. Except in special cases its use is exclusive in
as with steam turbines.
machines having more than 6 poles. Figure A4.1 illustrates a
typical large cylindrical rotor generator installed in a power Generators with diesel engine drivers are invariably of four
plant. or more pole design, to match the running speed of the driver
without using a gearbox. Four-stroke diesel engines usually
Two and four pole generators are most often used in
have a higher running speed than two-stroke engines, so
applications where steam or gas turbines are used as the
generators having four or six poles are most common. Two-
driver. This is because the steam turbine tends to be suited
stroke diesel engines are often derivatives of marine designs
to high rotational speeds. Four pole steam turbine generators
with relatively large outputs (circa 30MW is possible) and may
are most often found in nuclear power stations as the relative
have running speeds of the order of 125rpm. This requires
wetness of the steam makes the high rotational speed of a
a generator with a large number of poles (48 for a 125rpm,
two-pole design unsuitable. Most generators with gas turbine
50Hz generator) and consequently is of large diameter and
drivers are four pole machines to obtain enhanced mechanical
short axial length. This is a contrast to turbine-driven machines
strength in the rotor, since a gearbox is often used to couple
that are of small diameter and long axial length.
the power turbine to the generator, the choice of synchronous

3. Armature Reaction A4
Armature reaction has the greatest effect on the operation of

a synchronous machine with respect both to the load angle
at which it operates and to the amount of excitation that it
needs. The phenomenon is most easily explained by
considering a simplified ideal generator with full pitch winding
Weak Strong Weak Strong
operating at unity p.f., zero lag p.f. and zero lead p.f. When
operating at unity p.f. (power factor), the voltage and current N S
in the stator are in phase, the stator current producing a cross
magnetising magneto-motive force (m.m.f.) which interacts
with that of the rotor, resulting in a distortion of flux across Direction of rotation
the pole face. As can be seen from Figure A4.2(a) the tendency (a)
is to weaken the flux at the leading edge or effectively to
distort the field in a manner equivalent to a shift against the
direction of rotation.
If the power factor were reduced to zero lagging, the current
in the stator would reach its maximum 90° after the voltage
and the rotor would therefore be in the position shown in
Figure A4.2(b). The stator m.m.f. is now acting in direct N S N
opposition to the field.
Similarly, for operation at zero leading power factor, the stator (b)
m.m.f. would directly assist the rotor m.m.f. This m.m.f. arising
from current flowing in the stator is known as ‘armature
reaction’. Figure A4.2:
Distortion of flux due to armature reaction

A4 4. Steady state theory
The vector diagram of a single cylindrical rotor synchronous is the per unit voltage produced on open circuit by ampere-
machine is shown in Figure A4.3, assuming that the magnetic turns ATf. It can be considered as the internal generated
circuit is unsaturated, the air-gap is uniform and all variable voltage of the machine and is designated Eo.
quantities are sinusoidal. Further, since the reactance of
The true leakage reactance of the stator winding which gives
machines is normally very much larger than the resistance,
rise to a voltage drop or regulation has been neglected. This
the latter has been neglected.
reactance is designated XL (or Xa in some texts) and the
voltage drop occurring in it, IXL is the difference between
the terminal voltage V and the voltage behind the stator
leakage reactance, EL.
IZL is exactly in phase with the voltage drop due to Xad, as
shown on the vector diagram Figure A4.3(c). It should be
ATe noted that Xad and XL can be combined to give a simple
ATar equivalent reactance; this is known as the ‘synchronous
ATf reactance’, denoted by Xd.
(a)
ATar The power generated by the machine is given by the equation:
ATe
ATf VE
ATe P =VI cos ϕ = sin δ
Xd ...Equation A4.1
where δ is the angle between the internal voltage and the

ATe
terminal voltage and is known as the load angle of the machine.
ATar
ATf It follows from the above analysis that, for steady state
(b) performance, the machine may be represented by the
equivalent circuit shown in Figure A4.4, where XL is a true
reactance associated with flux leakage around the stator
winding and Xad is a fictitious reactance, being the ratio of
armature reaction and open-circuit excitation magneto-motive
forces.
(c)
Xad XL
Figure A4.3:
Vector diagram of synchronous machine
The excitation ampere-turns, ATe, produces a flux Ф across

the air-gap thereby inducing a voltage, Et, in the stator. This
voltage drives a current I at a power factor cos-1 Ф and gives
rise to an armature reaction m.m.f. ATar in phase with it. The Figure A4.4:
m.m.f. ATf resulting from the combination of these two m.m.f. Equivalent circuit of elementary machine
vectors (see Figure A4.3(a)) is the excitation which must be
provided on the rotor to maintain flux Ф across the air-gap. In practice, due to necessary constructional features of a
Rotating the rotor m.m.f. diagram, Figure A4.3(a), clockwise cylindrical rotor to accommodate the windings, the reactance
until ATe coincides with Et and changing the scale of the Xa is not constant irrespective of rotor position, and modelling
diagram so that ATe becomes the basic unit, where ATe proceeds as for a generator with a salient pole rotor. However,
=Et=1, results in Figure A4.3(b). The m.m.f. vectors have thus the numerical difference between the values of Xad and Xaq
become, in effect, voltage vectors. is small, much less than for the salient pole machine.
For example ATar /ATe is a unit of voltage that is directly
proportional to the stator load current. This vector can be fully
represented by a reactance and in practice this is called
‘armature reaction reactance’ and is denoted by Xad . Similarly,
the remaining side of the triangle becomes ATf /ATe, which

5. Salient pole rotor A4
The preceding theory is limited to the cylindrical rotor generator.

The basic assumption that the air-gap is uniform is very
obviously not valid when a salient pole rotor is being
considered. The effect of this is that the flux produced by
armature reaction m.m.f. depends on the position of the rotor
at any instant, as shown in Figure A4.5.
Lag Lead
Armature
reaction M.M.F.
Flux
Flux
Quadrature axis
Direct axis pole
Pole axis
Figure A4.5:
Variation of armature reaction m.m.f. with pole position
Figure A4.6:
Vector diagram for salient pole machine
When a pole is aligned with the assumed sine wave m.m.f.
set up by the stator, a corresponding sine wave flux will be
set up, but when an inter-polar gap is aligned very severe
distortion is caused. The difference is treated by considering
these two axes, that is those corresponding to the pole and
the inter-polar gap, separately. They are designated the ‘direct’
and ‘quadrature’ axes respectively, and the general theory is
known as the ‘two axis’ theory.
The vector diagram for the salient pole machine is similar to
that for the cylindrical rotor except that the reactance and
currents associated with them are split into two components.
The synchronous reactance for the direct axis is Xd = Xad + XL,
while that in the quadrature axis is Xq = Xaq + XL. The vector
diagram is constructed as before but the appropriate quantities
in this case are resolved along two axes. The resultant internal
voltage is EO, as shown in Figure A4.6.
In passing it should be noted that E’O is the internal voltage
which would be given, in cylindrical rotor theory, by vectorially
adding the simple vectors IXd and V. There is very little
difference in magnitude between EO and E’O but a substantial
difference in internal angle; the simple theory is perfectly
adequate for calculation of excitation currents but not for
stability considerations where load angle is significant.

A4 6. Transient analysis
For normal changes in load conditions, steady state theory

is perfectly adequate. However, there are occasions when
almost instantaneous changes are involved, such as faults or
switching operations. When this happens new factors are
introduced within the machine and to represent these
adequately a corresponding new set of machine characteristics
is required.
The generally accepted and most simple way to appreciate (a) Synchronous reactance
the meaning and derivation of these characteristics is to
consider a sudden three-phase short circuit applied to a
machine initially running on open circuit and excited to normal
voltage EO.
This voltage will be generated by a flux crossing the air-gap.
It is not possible to confine the flux to one path exclusively in
any machine, and as a result there will be a leakage flux ФL
that will leak from pole to pole and across the inter-polar gaps (b) Transient reactance
without crossing the main air-gap as shown in Figure A4.7.
The flux in the pole will be Ф + ФL.
(c) Subtransient reactance
Figure A4.8:
L N L Synchronous machine reactances
2 2
It might be expected that the fault current would be given

(
F+
F
)L by EO / ( XL + Xad ) equal to EO / Xd, but this is very much
reduced, and the machine is operating with no saturation. For
this reason, the value of voltage used is the value read from
the air-gap line corresponding to normal excitation and is
rather higher than the normal voltage. The steady state current
Figure A4.7: is given by:
Flux paths of salient pole machine
Eg
Id =
Xd …Equation A4.2
If the stator winding is then short-circuited, the power factor
in it will be zero. A heavy current will tend to flow, as the where Eg = voltage on air gap line
resulting armature reaction m.m.f. is demagnetising. This will An important point to note now is that between the initial and
reduce the flux and conditions will settle until the armature final conditions there has been a severe reduction of flux. The
reaction nearly balances the excitation m.m.f., the remainder rotor carries a highly inductive winding which links the flux so
maintaining a very much reduced flux across the air-gap that the rotor flux linkages before the short circuit are produced
which is just sufficient to generate the voltage necessary to by ( Ф + ФL ). In practice the leakage flux is distributed over
overcome the stator leakage reactance (resistance neglected). the whole pole and all of it does not link all the winding. ФL is
This is the simple steady state case of a machine operating an equivalent concentrated flux imagined to link all the winding
on short circuit and is fully represented by the equivalent of and of such a magnitude that the total linkages are equal to
Figure A4.8(a); see also Figure A4.4. those actually occurring. It is a fundamental principle that any
attempt to change the flux linked with such a circuit will cause
current to flow in a direction that will oppose the change. In
the present case the flux is being reduced and so the induced
currents will tend to sustain it.

6. Transient analysis A4
For the position immediately following the application of the short As before, it is convenient to use rated voltage and to create
circuit, it is valid to assume that the flux linked with the rotor remains another fictitious reactance that is considered to be effective
constant, this being brought about by an induced current in the over this period. This is known as the ‘sub-transient reactance’
rotor which balances the heavy demagnetising effect set up by X’’d and is defined by the equation:
the short-circuited armature. So ( Ф + ФL )remains constant, but Eo …Equation A4.4
owing to the increased m.m.f. involved, the flux leakage will increase I ''d =
considerably. With a constant total rotor flux, this can only increase X ''d
at the expense of that flux crossing the air-gap. Consequently, this Xad Xf Xkd
where X ''d = X L +
generates a reduced voltage, which, acting on the leakage Xad Xf + Xkd Xf + Xad Xkd
reactance, gives the short circuit current.
or X ''d = X L + X 'kd
It is more convenient for machine analysis to use the rated
voltage EO and to invent a fictitious reactance that will give and Xkd = leakage reactance of damper winding(s)
rise to the same current. This reactance is called the ‘transient X’kd = effective leakage reactance of damper winding(s)
reactance’ X’d and is defined by the equation:
Eo It is greater than XL but less than X’d and the corresponding
Transient current I 'd = …Equation A4.3 equivalent circuit is shown in Figure A4.8(c).
X 'd
It is greater than XL, and the equivalent circuit is represented Again, the duration of this phase depends upon the time
by Figure A4.8(b) where: constant of the damper winding. In practice this is
approximately 0.05 seconds - very much less than the transient
Xad Xf - hence the term ‘sub-transient’.
X 'd = +XL
Xad + Xf
Figure A4.9 shows the envelope of the symmetrical component
and Xf is the leakage reactance of the field winding of an armature short circuit current indicating the values
described in the preceding analysis. The analysis of the stator
The above equation may also be written as:
current waveform resulting from a sudden short circuit test
X’d = XL +X’f is traditionally the method by which these reactances are
measured. However, the major limitation is that only direct
where X’f = effective leakage reactance of field winding
axis parameters are measured. Detailed test methods for
The flux will only be sustained at its relatively high value while synchronous machines are given in references [Ref A4.2: IEC
the induced current flows in the field winding. As this current 60034-4] and [Ref A4.3: IEEE Standards 115/115A], and
decays, so conditions will approach the steady state. include other tests that are capable of providing more detailed
Consequently, the duration of this phase will be determined parameter information.
by the time constant of the excitation winding. This is usually
of the order of a second or less - hence the term ‘transient’
applied to characteristics associated with it.
A further point now arises. All synchronous machines have
what is usually called a ‘damper winding’ or windings. In some Current
cases, this may be a physical winding (like a field winding,
but of fewer turns and located separately), or an ‘effective’
one (for instance, the solid iron rotor of a cylindrical rotor =
machine). Sometimes, both physical and effective damper
windings may exist (as in some designs of cylindrical rotor
generators, having both a solid iron rotor and a physical
damper winding located in slots in the pole faces).
Under short circuit conditions, there is a transfer of flux from =
the main air-gap to leakage paths. This diversion is, to a small
extent, opposed by the excitation winding and the main transfer =
will be experienced towards the pole tips.
Time
The damper winding(s) is subjected to the full effect of flux
transfer to leakage paths and will carry an induced current
tending to oppose it. As long as this current can flow, the
air-gap flux will be held at a value slightly higher than would
be the case if only the excitation winding were present, but Figure A4.9:
still less than the original open circuit flux Ф. Transient decay envelope of short-circuit current

A4 7. Asymmetry
The exact instant at which the short circuit is applied to the This asymmetry can be considered to be due to a d.c.
stator winding is of significance. If resistance is negligible component of current which dies away because resistance
compared with reactance, the current in a coil will lag the is present.
voltage by 90°, that is, at the instant when the voltage wave
The d.c. component of stator current sets up a d.c. field in
attains a maximum, any current flowing through would be
the stator which causes a supply frequency ripple on the field
passing through zero. If a short circuit were applied at this
current, and this alternating rotor flux has a further effect on
instant, the resulting current would rise smoothly and would
the stator. This is best shown by considering the supply
be a simple a.c. component. However, at the moment when
frequency flux as being represented by two half magnitude
the induced voltage is zero, any current flowing must pass
waves each rotating in opposite directions at supply frequency
through a maximum (owing to the 90° lag). If a fault occurs
relative to the rotor. So, as viewed from the stator, one is
at this moment, the resulting current will assume the
stationary and the other rotating at twice supply frequency.
corresponding relationship; it will be at its peak and in the
The latter sets up second harmonic currents in the stator.
ensuing 180° will go through zero to maximum in the reverse
Further development along these lines is possible but the
direction and so on. In fact the current must actually start
resulting harmonics are usually negligible and normally
from zero and so will follow a sine wave that is completely
neglected.
asymmetrical. Intermediate positions will give varying degrees
of asymmetry.
8. Machine reactances
Table A4.1 gives values of machine reactances for salient compensators – such machines are now rarely built, but
pole and cylindrical rotor machines typical of latest design significant numbers can still be found in operation.
practice. Also included are parameters for synchronous
Salient pole
synchronous Cylindrical rotor turbine generators Salient pole generators
condensers
Type of Machine
Hydrogen/
Hydrogen
4 Pole Multi-Pole Air Cooled Water 4 Pole Multi-Pole
Cooled
Cooled
Short circuit ratio 0.5-0.7 1.0-1.2 0.4-0.6 0.4-0.6 0.4-0.6 0.4-0.6 0.6-0.8
Direct axis synchronous reactance Xd (p.u.) 1.6-2.0 0.8-1.0 2.0-2.8 2.1-2.4 2.1-2.6 1.75-3.0 1.4-1.9
Quadrature axis synchronous reactance Xq (p.u.) 1.0-1.23 0.5-0.65 1.8-2.7 1.9-2.4 2.0-2.5 0.9-1.5 0.8-1.0
Direct axis transient reactance X ’d (p.u.) 0.3-0.5 0.2-0.35 0.2-0.3 0.27-0.33 0.3-0.36 0.26-0.35 0.24-0.4
Direct axis sub-transient reactance X ’’d (p.u.) 0.2-0.4 0.12-0.25 0.15-0.23 0.19-0.23 0.21-0.27 0.19-0.25 0.16-0.25
Quadrature axis sub-transient reactance X ’’q (p.u.) 0.25-0.6 0.15-0.25 0.16-0.25 0.19-0.23 0.21-0.28 0.19-0.35 0.18-0.24
Negative sequence reactance X2 (p.u.) 0.25-0.5 0.14-0.35 0.16-0.23 0.19-0.24 0.21-0.27 0.16-0.27 0.16-0.23
Zero sequence reactance X0 (p.u.) 0.12-0.16 0.06-0.10 0.06-0.1 0.1-0.15 0.1-0.15 0.01-0.1 0.045-0.23
Direct axis short circuit transient time constant T ’d (s) 1.5-2.5 1.0-2.0 0.6-1.3 0.7-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.4-1.1 0.25-1
Direct axis open circuit transient time constant T ’do (s) 5-10 3-7 6-12 6-10 6-9.5 3.0-9.0 1.7-4.0
Direct axis short circuit sub-transient time constant T ’’d (s) 0.04-0.9 0.05-0.10 0.013-0.022 0.017-0.025 0.022-0.03 0.02-0.04 0.02-0.06
Direct axis open circuit sub-transient time constant T ’’do (s) 0.07-0.11 0.08-0.25 0.018-0.03 0.023-0.032 0.025-0.035 0.035-0.06 0.03-0.1
Quadrature axis short circuit sub-transient time constant T ’’q (s) 0.04-0.6 0.05-0.6 0.013-0.022 0.018-0.027 0.02-0.03 0.025-0.04 0.025-0.08
Quadrature axis open circuit sub-transient time constant T ’’qo (s) 0.1-0.2 0.2-0.9 0.026-0.045 0.03-0.05 0.04-0.065 0.13-0.2 0.1-0.35
Table A4.1:
Typical synchronous generator parameters. Note: all reactance values are unsaturated

8. Machine reactances A4
8.1 Synchronous reactance Xd = XL + Xad Generally, the leakage reactance XL is equal to the effective
field leakage reactance X’f, about 0.1-0.25 p.u. The principal
The order of magnitude of XL is normally 0.1-0.25 p.u., while
factor determining the value of X’f is the field leakage. This
that of Xad is 1.0-2.5 p.u. The leakage reactance XL can be
is largely beyond the control of the designer, in that other
reduced by increasing the machine size (derating), or
considerations are at present more significant than field
increased by artificially increasing the slot leakage, but it will
leakage and hence take precedence in determining the field
be noted that XL is only about 10% of the total value of Xd
design.
and cannot exercise much influence.
XL can be varied as already outlined, and, in practice, control
The armature reaction reactance can be reduced by
of transient reactance is usually achieved by varying XL.
decreasing the armature reaction of the machine, which in
design terms means reducing the ampere conductor or 8.3 Sub-transient reactance X’’d = XL + X’kd
electrical (as distinct from magnetic) loading - this will often
The sub-transient reactance determines the initial current
mean a physically larger machine. Alternatively the excitation
peaks following a disturbance and in the case of a sudden
needed to generate open-circuit voltage may be increased;
fault is of importance for selecting the breaking capacity of
this is simply achieved by increasing the machine air-gap,
associated circuit breakers. The mechanical stresses on the
but is only possible if the excitation system is modified to
machine reach maximum values that depend on this constant.
meet the increased requirements.
The effective damper winding leakage reactance X’kd is
In general, control of X d is obtained almost entirely by varying largely determined by the leakage of the damper windings
Xad , and in most cases a reduction in Xd will mean a larger and control of this is only possible to a limited extent. X’kd
and more costly machine. It is also worth noting that XL normally has a value between 0.05 and 0.15 p.u. The major
normally changes in sympathy with Xad , but is completely factor is XL which, as indicated previously, is of the order of
overshadowed by it. 0.1-0.25 p.u., and control of the sub-transient reactance is
normally achieved by varying XL.
The value 1/Xd has a special significance as it approximates
to the short circuit ratio (S.C.R.), the only difference being It should be noted that good transient stability is obtained by
that the S.C.R. takes saturation into account whereas Xd is keeping the value of X’d low, which therefore also implies a
derived from the air-gap line. low value of X’’d. The fault rating of switchgear, etc. will
therefore be relatively high. It is not normally possible to
8.2 Transient reactance X’d = XL + X’f improve transient stability performance in a generator without
The transient reactance covers the behaviour of a machine adverse effects on fault levels, and vice versa.
in the period 0.1-3.0 seconds after a disturbance. This
generally corresponds to the speed of changes in a system
and therefore has a major influence in transient stability studies.

A4 9. Negative sequence reactance
Negative sequence currents can arise whenever there is any Machine Maximum Maximum
unbalance present in the system. Their effect is to set up a Rotor Rotor Type (SN) I2/IN for (I2/IN)2 t for
field rotating in the opposite direction to the main field construction cooling / Rating continuous continuous
generated by the rotor winding, so subjecting the rotor to (MVA) operation operation
double frequency flux pulsations. This gives rise to parasitic motors 0.1 20
currents and heating; most machines are quite limited in the generators 0.08 20
Indirect
amount of such current which they are able to carry, both in Synchronous
0.1 20
condensers
the steady-state and transiently. Salient
motors 0.08 15
An accurate calculation of the negative sequence current generators 0.05 15
Direct
capability of a generator involves consideration of the current Synchronous
0.08 15
paths in the rotor body. In a turbine generator rotor, for instance, condensers
they include the solid rotor body, slot wedges, excitation Indirectly
all 0.1 15
winding and end-winding retaining rings. There is a tendency cooled (air)
for local over-heating to occur and, although possible for the Indirectly
cooled all 0.1 10
stator, continuous local temperature measurement is not (hydrogen)
Cylindrical
practical in the rotor. Calculation requires complex mathematical <=350 0.08 8
techniques to be applied, and involves specialist software. 351-900 Note 1 Note 2
Directly
In practice an empirical method is used, based on the fact cooled 901-1250 Note 1 5
that a given type of machine is capable of carrying, for short 1251-1600 0.05 5
periods, an amount of heat determined by its thermal capacity, I2 S - 350
and for a long period, a rate of heat input which it can dissipate Note 1: Calculate as: = 0.08 - N
continuously. Synchronous machines are designed to be IN 3 x10 4
capable of operating continuously on an unbalanced system
2
 I 2 t = 8 - 0.00545 ( S N - 350 )
such that, with none of the phase currents exceeding the

Note 2: Calculate as:
rated current, the ratio of the negative sequence current I2  IN

to the rated current IN does not exceed the values given in
Table A4.2. Under fault conditions, the machine shall also be
2
capable of operation with the result of ( I2 / IN ) and time Table A4.2:
in seconds (t) not exceeding the values given. Unbalanced operating conditions for synchronous machines
(from IEC 60034-1)
10. Zero sequence reactance
If a machine is operating with an earthed neutral, a system it is generally low and often outweighed by other impedances
earth fault will give rise to zero sequence currents in the present in the circuit.
machine. This reactance represents the machine’s contribution
to the total impedance offered to these currents. In practice
11. Direct and quadrature axis values
The transient reactance is associated with the field winding and The damper winding (or its equivalent) is more widely spread and
since on salient pole machines this is concentrated on the direct hence the sub-transient reactance associated with this has a
axis, there is no corresponding quadrature axis value. The value definite quadrature axis value X’’q , which differs significantly in
of reactance applicable in the quadrature axis is the synchronous many generators from X’’d .
reactance, that is, X’q = Xq .

12. Effect on saturation on machine reactances A4
In general, any electrical machine is designed to avoid severe Most calculation methods assume infinite iron permeability
saturation of its magnetic circuit. However, it is not economically and for this reason lead to somewhat idealised unsaturated
possible to operate at such low flux densities as to reduce reactance values. The recognition of a finite and varying
saturation to negligible proportions, and in practice a moderate permeability makes a solution extremely laborious and in
degree of saturation is accepted. practice a simple factor of approximately 0.9 is taken as
representing the reduction in reactance arising from saturation.
Since the armature reaction reactance X ad is a ratio
ATar / ATe it is evident that ATe will not vary in a linear manner It is necessary to distinguish which value of reactance is
for different voltages, while ATar will remain unchanged. The being measured when on test. The normal instantaneous
value of Xad will vary with the degree of saturation present short circuit test carried out from rated open circuit voltage
in the machine, and for extreme accuracy should be determined gives a current that is usually several times full load value, so
for the particular conditions involved in any calculation. that saturation is present and the reactance measured will be
the saturated value. This value is also known as the ‘rated
All the other reactances, namely XL, X’d and X’’d are true
voltage’ value since it is measured by a short circuit applied
reactances and actually arise from flux leakage. Much of this
with the machine excited to rated voltage.
leakage occurs in the iron parts of the machines and hence
must be affected by saturation. For a given set of conditions, In some cases, if it is wished to avoid the severe mechanical
the leakage flux exists as a result of the net m.m.f. which strain to which a machine is subjected by such a direct short
causes it. If the iron circuit is unsaturated its reactance is low circuit, the test may be made from a suitably reduced voltage
and leakage flux is easily established. If the circuits are highly so that the initial current is approximately full load value.
saturated the reverse is true and the leakage flux is relatively Saturation is very much reduced and the reactance values
lower, so the reactance under saturated conditions is lower measured are virtually unsaturated values. They are also
than when unsaturated. known as ‘rated current’ values, for obvious reasons.
13. Transformers
A transformer may be replaced in a power system by an sequence currents implies a fault to earth and a flow of
equivalent circuit representing the self-impedance of, and the balancing currents in the windings of the transformer.
mutual coupling between, the windings. A two-winding
Practical three-phase transformers may have a phase shift
transformer can be simply represented as a ‘T’ network in
between primary and secondary windings depending on the
which the cross member is the short-circuit impedance, and
connections of the windings – delta or star. The phase shift
the column the excitation impedance. It is rarely necessary
that occurs is generally of no significance in fault level
in fault studies to consider excitation impedance as this is
calculations as all phases are shifted equally. It is therefore
usually many times the magnitude of the short-circuit
ignored. It is normal to find delta-star transformers at the
impedance. With these simplifying assumptions a three-
transmitting end of a transmission system and in distribution
winding transformer becomes a star of three impedances
systems for the following reasons:
and a four-winding transformer a mesh of six impedances.
a. at the transmitting end, a higher step-up voltage ratio is
The impedances of a transformer, in common with other plant,
possible than with other winding arrangements, while the
can be given in ohms and qualified by a base voltage, or in
insulation to ground of the star secondary winding does
per unit or percentage terms and qualified by a base MVA.
not increase by the same ratio
Care should be taken with multi-winding transformers to refer
all impedances to a common base MVA or to state the base b. in distribution systems, the star winding allows a neutral
on which each is given. The impedances of static apparatus connection to be made, which may be important in
are independent of the phase sequence of the applied voltage; considering system earthing arrangements
in consequence, transformer negative sequence and positive
c. the delta winding allows circulation of zero sequence
sequence impedances are identical. In determining the
currents within the delta, thus preventing transmission of
impedance to zero phase sequence currents, account must
these from the secondary (star) winding into the primary
be taken of the winding connections, earthing, and, in some
circuit. This simplifies protection considerations
cases, the construction type. The existence of a path for zero

A4 14. Transformer positive sequence equivalent circuits
The transformer is a relatively simple device. However, the If the secondary of the transformer is short-circuited, and Z3
equivalent circuits for fault calculations need not necessarily is assumed to be large with respect to Z1 and Z2, then
be quite so simple, especially where earth faults are concerned. the short-circuit impedance viewed from the terminals AA’
The following two sections discuss the equivalent circuits of is ZT = Z1 + Z2 and the transformer can be replaced by a
various types of transformers. two-terminal equivalent circuit as shown in Figure A4.10(e).
14.1 Two-winding transformers The relative magnitudes of ZT and XM are of the order of
10% and 2000% respectively. ZT and XM rarely have to be
The two-winding transformer has four terminals, but in most
considered together, so that the transformer may be
system problems, two-terminal or three-terminal equivalent
represented either as a series impedance or as an excitation
circuits as shown in Figure A4.10 can represent it. In Figure
impedance, according to the problem being studied.
A4.10(a), terminals A’ and B’ are assumed to be at the same
potential. Hence if the per unit self-impedances of the windings A typical power transformer is illustrated in Figure A4.11.
are Z11 and Z22 respectively and the mutual impedance
between them Z12 , the transformer may be represented by
Figure A4.10(b). The circuit in Figure A4.10(b) is similar to that
shown in Figure A2.14(a), and can therefore be replaced by
an equivalent ‘T‘ as shown in Figure A4.10(c) where:
Z1 = Z11 −Z12 

Z 2 = Z 22 −Z12  …Equation A4.5

Z 3 = Z12 
Z1 is described as the leakage impedance of winding AA’
and Z2 the leakage impedance of winding BB’.
Impedance Z3 is the mutual impedance between the windings,
usually represented by XM, the magnetising reactance
paralleled with the hysteresis and eddy current loops as
shown in Figure A4.10(d). Figure A4.11:
Large transformer
14.2 Three-winding transformers

A B
A B C
If excitation impedance is neglected the equivalent circuit of
~ Load a three-winding transformer may be represented by a star of
A' B' C ' impedances, as shown in Figure A4.12, where P, T and S are
A' B'
Zero bus the primary, tertiary and secondary windings respectively.
(a) Model of transformer (b) Equivalent circuit of model The impedance of any of these branches can be determined
by considering the short-circuit impedance between pairs of
windings with the third open.
A B A B
R
S
A' B' A' B'
Zero bus Zero bus
(c) 'T' equivalent circuit (d) 'π ' equivalent circuit Secondary
P Primary
A B
Tertiary
A' B'
Zero bus T
(e) Equivalent circuit: secondary winding s/c
Zero bus

Equivalent circuits for a two-winding transformer Equivalent circuit for a three-winding transformer

15. Transformer zero sequence equivalent circuits A4
The flow of zero sequence currents in a transformer is only

possible when the transformer forms part of a closed loop
for uni-directional currents and ampere-turn balance is a a
maintained between windings.
The positive sequence equivalent circuit is still maintained to
represent the transformer, but now there are certain conditions b b
attached to its connection into the external circuit. The order
of excitation impedance is very much lower than for the positive
sequence circuit; it will be roughly between 1 and 4 per unit,
Zero potential bus
but still high enough to be neglected in most fault studies.
(a) Two windings
The mode of connection of a transformer to the external circuit
is determined by taking account of each winding arrangement
and its connection or otherwise to ground. If zero sequence
currents can flow into and out of a winding, the winding a
terminal is connected to the external circuit (that is, link a is
closed in Figure A4.13). If zero sequence currents can
circulate in the winding without flowing in the external circuit,
the winding terminal is connected directly to the zero bus
(that is, link b is closed in Figure A4.13). Table A4.3 gives the
zero sequence connections of some common two- and three- a
winding transformer arrangements applying the above rules.
The exceptions to the general rule of neglecting magnetising
impedance occur when the transformer is star/star and either
or both neutrals are earthed. In these circumstances the
transformer is connected to the zero bus through the
magnetising impedance. Where a three-phase transformer a
bank is arranged without interlinking magnetic flux (that is a
three-phase shell type, or three single-phase units) and
provided there is a path for zero sequence currents, the zero b b b
sequence impedance is equal to the positive sequence
impedance. In the case of three-phase core type units, the Zero potential bus
zero sequence fluxes produced by zero sequence currents (b) Three windings
can find a high reluctance path, the effect being to reduce
the zero sequence impedance to about 90% of the positive
sequence impedance.
Figure A4.13:
However, in hand calculations, it is usual to ignore this variation Zero sequence equivalent circuits
and consider the positive and zero sequence impedances to
be equal. It is common when using software to perform fault
calculations to enter a value of zero-sequence impedance in
accordance with the above guidelines, if the manufacturer is
unable to provide a value.

A4 15. Transformer zero sequence equivalent circuits
Connections
Connections and zero phase and zero phase sequence currents
sequence currents Zero phase sequence network
Zero phase sequence network
a a a a
b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
a a
b b b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
a a
b b b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
a a
b b b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
a a
b b b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
a a a a
a a
b b b b b b
Zero bus Zero bus
Table A4.3:
Zero sequence equivalent circuit connections

16. Auto-transformers A4
The auto-transformer is characterised by a single continuous

winding, part of which is shared by both the high and low H
voltage circuits, as shown in Figure A4.14(a). The ‘common’
L
winding is the winding between the low voltage terminals
whereas the remainder of the winding, belonging exclusively
to the high voltage circuit, is designated the ‘series’ winding,
and, combined with the ‘common’ winding, forms the ‘series-
common’ winding between the high voltage terminals. The
advantage of using an auto-transformer as opposed to a N
(a) Circuit diagram
two-winding transformer is that the auto-transformer is smaller
and lighter for a given rating. The disadvantage is that galvanic H
isolation between the two windings does not exist, giving rise L
to the possibility of large overvoltages on the lower voltage T
system in the event of major insulation breakdown.
Three-phase auto-transformer banks generally have star N
connected main windings, the neutral of which is normally
connected solidly to earth. In addition, it is common practice
to include a third winding connected in delta called the tertiary
winding, as shown in Figure A4.14(b).
16.1 Positive sequence equivalent circuit (b) Circuit diagram with tertiary winding
The positive sequence equivalent circuit of a three-phase

auto- transformer bank is the same as that of a two- or three- L H
winding transformer. The star equivalent for a three-winding
transformer, for example, is obtained in the same manner, with
the difference that the impedances between windings are T
designated as follows: (c) Positive sequence impedance
1 
ZL =
2
( Z sc−c +Zc −t −Z sc−t ) 
L H
 …Equation A4.8 T
1 
Z H = ( Z sc−c +Z sc −t −Zc−t ) 
2  Zero potential bus
1  (d) Zero sequence equivalent circuit
ZT = ( Z sc−t +Zc −t −Z sc−c ) 
2 
L H
where:
Zsc-t = impedance between ‘series common’ and tertiary
T
windings
Zsc-c = impedance between ‘series common’ and ‘common’
windings Zero potential bus
(e) Equivalent circuit with isolated neutral
Zsc-t = impedance between ‘common’ and tertiary windings
When no load is connected to the delta tertiary, the point T
Figure A4.14:
will be open-circuited and the short-circuit impedance of the
Equivalent circuit of auto-transformer
transformer becomes ZL +ZH =Zsc-c’, that is, similar to the
equivalent circuit of a two-winding transformer, with
magnetising impedance neglected; see Figure A4.14(c). and the neutral voltage cannot be given directly. Furthermore,
in deriving the branch impedances, account must be taken
16.2 Zero sequence equivalent circuit
of an impedance in the neutral Zn , as shown in the following
The zero sequence equivalent circuit is derived in a similar equations, where Zx , Zy and Zz are the impedances of the
manner to the positive sequence circuit, except that, as there low, high and tertiary windings respectively and N is the ratio
is no identity for the neutral point, the current in the neutral between the series and common windings.

A4 16. Auto-transformers
 When the neutral is ungrounded Zn=µ and the impedances of

N  the equivalent star also become infinite because there are
Z x = Z L +3Zn
( N +1)  apparently no paths for zero sequence currents between the
 windings, although a physical circuit exists and ampere-turn
N 
Z = Z

y H −3Z n  …Equation A4.9 balance can be obtained. A solution is to use an equivalent delta
( N +1)2  circuit (see Figure A4.14(e)), and evaluate the elements of the
 delta directly from the actual circuit. The method requires three
1  equations corresponding to three assumed operating conditions.
Z z = ZT +3Zn
( N +1)  Solving these equations will relate the delta impedances to the
impedance between the series and tertiary windings, as follows:
Figure A4.14(d) shows the equivalent circuit of the transformer N
bank. Currents ILO and IHO are those circulating in the low and Z x = Z L +3Zn
( N +1)
high voltage circuits respectively. The difference between these
currents, expressed in amperes, is the current in the common N
Z y = Z H −3Zn
winding. ( N +1)2 …Equation A4.10
The current in the neutral impedance is three times the current 1
Z z = ZT +3Zn
in the common winding. ( N +1)
16.3 Special conditions of neutral earthing With the equivalent delta replacing the star impedances in
the auto-transformer zero sequence equivalent circuit the
With a solidly grounded neutral, Zn =0, the branch impedances
transformer can be combined with the system impedances
Zx , Zy , Zz , become ZL , ZH , ZT , that is, identical to the in the usual manner to obtain the system zero sequence
corresponding positive sequence equivalent circuit, except that
diagram.
the equivalent impedance ZT of the delta tertiary is connected
to the zero potential bus in the zero sequence network.
17. Transformer impedances
In the vast majority of fault calculations, the Protection Engineer MVA Z% HV/LV X/R Tolerance on Z%
is only concerned with the transformer leakage impedance; the <0.630 4.00 1.5 +/- 10.0
magnetising impedance is neglected, as it is very much higher.
0.631-1.25 5.00 3.5 +/- 10.0
Impedances for transformers rated 200MVA or less are given in
1.251 - 3.15 6.25 6.0 +/- 10.0
IEC 60076 and repeated in Table A4.4, together with an indication
3.151 - 6.3 7.15 8.5 +/- 10.0
of X/R values (not part of IEC 60076). These impedances are
6.301-12.5 8.35 13.0 +/- 10.0
commonly used for transformers installed in industrial plants.
12.501- 25.0 10.00 20.0 +/- 7.5
Some variation is possible to assist in controlling fault levels or
25.001 - 200 12.50 45.0 +/- 7.5
motor starting, and typically up to ±10% variation on the
>200 by agreement
impedance values given in the table is possible without incurring
a significant cost penalty. For these transformers, the tapping
Table A4.4:
range is small, and the variation of impedance with tap position Transformer impedances - IEC 60076
is normally neglected in fault level calculations.
For transformers used in electricity distribution networks, the IEC 60076 does not make recommendations of nominal
situation is more complex, due to an increasing trend to assign impedance in respect of transformers rated over 200MVA, while
importance to the standing (or no-load) losses represented by generator transformers and a.c. traction supply transformers
the magnetising impedance. This can be adjusted at the design have impedances that are usually specified as a result of Power
stage but there is often an impact on the leakage reactance in Systems Studies to ensure satisfactory performance. Typical
consequence. In addition, it may be more important to control values of transformer impedances covering a variety of
fault levels on the LV side than to improve motor starting voltage transformer designs are given in Tables A4.5 – A4.8. Where
drops. Therefore, departures from the IEC 60076 values are appropriate, they include an indication of the impedance variation
commonplace. at the extremes of the taps given. Transformers designed to
work at 60Hz will have substantially the same impedance as
their 50Hz counterparts.

17. Transformer impedances A4
MVA Primary Primary Taps Secondary Z% X/R MVA Primary kV Primary Secondary Z% X/R
kV kV HV/LV ratio Taps kV HV/LV ratio
7.5 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 7.5 15 24 33 ±10% 6.9 24 25

7.5 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 7.5 17 30 33 ±10% 6.9 24 25
8 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 8 9 30 132 +10% -20% 11 21.3 43
11.5 33 +5.72% -17.16% 6.6 11.5 24 30 132 +10% -20% 11 25 30
11.5 33 +5.72% -17.16% 6.6 11.5 24 30 132 +10% -20% 11 23.5 46
11.5 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 11.5 24 40 132 +10% -20% 11 27.9 37
11.5 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 11.5 26 45 132 +10% -20% 33 11.8 18
11.5 33 +4.5% -18% 6.6 11.5 24 60 132 +10% -20% 33 16.7 28
12 33 +5% -15% 11.5 12 27 60 132 +10% -20% 33 17.7 26
12 33 ±10% 11.5 12 27 60 132 +10% -20% 33 14.5 25
12 33 ±10% 11.5 12 25 60 132 +10% -20% 66 11 25
15 66 +9% -15% 11.5 15 14 60 132 +10% -20% 11/11 35.5 52
15 66 +9% -15% 11.5 15 16 60 132 +9.3% -24% 11/11 36 75
16 33 ±10% 11.5 16 16 60 132 +9.3% -24% 11/11 35.9 78
16 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 16 30 65 140 +7.5% -15% 11 12.3 28
16 33 +5.72% -17.16% 6.6 16 31 90 132 +10% -20% 33 24.4 60
19 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 19 37 90 132 +10% -20% 66 15.1 41
30 33 +5.72% -17.16% 11 30 40
Table A4.5:
Impedances of two winding distribution transformers – Primary voltage <200kV
(a) Three-phase units

Primary Primary Secondary Tertiary Z% X/R MVA Primary kV Primary Taps Secondary Z% HV/ X/R ratio
MVA
kV Taps kV kV HV/LV ratio kV LV
20 220 +12.5% -7.5% 6.9 - 9.9 18 95 132 ±10% 11 13.5 46
20 230 +12.5% -7.5% 6.9 - 10-14 13 140 157.5 ±10% 11.5 12.7 41
57 275 ±10% 11.8 7.2 18.2 34 141 400 ±5% 15 14.7 57
74 345 +14.4% -10% 96 12 8.9 25 151 236 ±5% 15 13.6 47
79.2 220 +10% -15% 11.6 11 18.9 35 167 145 +7.5% -16.5% 15 25.7 71
120 275 +10% -15% 34.5 - 22.5 63 180 289 ±5% 16 13.4 34
125 230 ±16.8% 66 - 13.1 52 180 132 ±10% 15 13.8 40
125 230 not known 150 - 10-14 22 247 432 +3.75% -16.25% 15.5 15.2 61
180 275 ±15% 66 13 22.2 38 250 300 +11.2% -17.6% 15 28.6 70
255 230 +10% 16.5 - 14.8 43 290 420 ±10% 15 15.7 43
307 432 +3.75% -16.25% 15.5 15.3 67
Table A4.6: Impedances of two winding distribution 346 435 +5% -15% 17.5 16.4 81
transformers – Primary voltage >200kV
420 432 +5.55% -14.45% 22 16 87
437.8 144.1 +10.8% -21.6% 21 14.6 50
450 132 ±10% 19 14 49
MVA Primary Primary Secondary Secondary Tertiary Z% X/R 600 420 ±11.25% 21 16.2 74
Taps kV Taps kV kV HV/LV ratio 716 525 ±10% 19 15.7 61
721 362 +6.25% -13.75% 22 15.2 83
100 66 - 33 - - 10.7 28
736 245 +7% -13% 22 15.5 73
180 275 - 132 ±15% 13 15.5 55
900 525 +7% -13% 23 15.7 67
240 400 - 132 +15% -5% 13 20.2 83
(b) Single-phase units
240 400 - 132 +15% -5% 13 20.0 51
240 400 - 132 +15% -5% 13 20.0 61 MVA / Primary kV Primary Taps Secondary Z% HV/ X/R ratio
phase kV LV
250 400 - 132 +15% -5% 13 10-13 50
266.7 432 / 3 +6.67% -13.33% 23.5 15.8 92
500 400 - 132 +0% -15% 22 14.3 51
750 400 - 275 - 13 12.1 90 266.7 432 / 3 +6.6% -13.4% 23.5 15.7 79
1000 400 - 275 - 13 15.8 89 277 515 / 3 ±5% 22 16.9 105
1000 400 - 275 - 33 17.0 91 375 525 / 3 +6.66% -13.32% 26 15 118
333.3 500 3 ±10% 230 3 22 18.2 101 375 420 / 3 +6.66% -13.32% 26 15.1 112
Table A4.8: Table A4.7:

Auto-transformer data Impedances of generator transformers

A4 18. Overhead lines and cables
In this section a description of common overhead lines and

cable systems is given, together with tables of their important
characteristics. The formulae for calculating the characteristics
are developed to give a basic idea of the factors involved,
and to enable calculations to be made for systems other than
those tabulated.
A transmission circuit may be represented by an equivalent
π or T network using lumped constants as shown in Figure
A4.15. Z is the total series impedance (R + jX) L and Y is
the total shunt admittance (G + jB) L, where L is the circuit
length. The terms inside the brackets in Figure A4.15 are
correction factors that allow for the fact that in the actual
circuit the parameters are distributed over the whole length
of the circuit and not lumped, as in the equivalent circuits.
With short lines it is usually possible to ignore the shunt
admittance, which greatly simplifies calculations, but on longer
lines it must be included. Another simplification that can be
made is that of assuming the conductor configuration to be
symmetrical. The self-impedance of each conductor becomes
Zp , and the mutual impedance between conductors becomes
Zm . However, for rigorous calculations a detailed treatment
is necessary, with account being taken of the spacing of a
conductor in relation to its neighbour and earth.
Figure A4.15:
Transmission circuit equivalents

19. Calculation of series impedance A4
The self impedance of a conductor with an earth return and It can be shown that the sequence impedances for a
the mutual impedance between two parallel conductors with symmetrical three-phase circuit are:
a common earth return are given by the Carson equations:
Z1 = Z2 = Zp - Zm 
  …Equation A4.12
Zp = R+0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log10 De  Z0 = Zp + 2Z m 
dc 

where Zp and Zm are given by Equation A4.11.
Zp = 0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log10 De 
D  Substituting Equation A4.11 in Equation A4.12 gives:
…Equation A4.11 D 
where: Z1 = Z 2 = R + j0.0029f log10 
dc
R = conductor a.c. resistance (ohms/km) 
De 
Zo = R +0.00296f + j0.00869f log10 3
dc = geometric mean radius of a single conductor dcD 2 
D = spacing between the parallel conductors
…Equation A4.13
f = system frequency
In the formula for Z0 the expression 3 dcD 2 is the geometric
De = equivalent spacing of the earth return path mean radius of the conductor group.
= 216 p/f where p is earth resistivity (ohms/cm3) Where the circuit is not symmetrical, the usual case, symmetry
can be maintained by transposing the conductors so that
The above formulae give the impedances in ohms/km. It should
each conductor is in each phase position for one third of the
be noted that the last terms in Equation A4.11 are very similar
circuit length. If A, B and C are the spacings between
to the classical inductance formulae for long straight
conductors bc, ca and ab then D in the above equations
conductors.
becomes the geometric mean distance between conductors,
The geometric means radius (GMR) of a conductor is an equal to 3 ABC .
equivalent radius that allows the inductance formula to be
Writing Dc = 3 dcD 2 , the sequence impedances in ohms/
reduced to a single term. It arises because the inductance
km at 50Hz become:
of a solid conductor is a function of the internal flux linkages
in addition to those external to it. If the original conductor can ABC 
3
be replaced by an equivalent that is a hollow cylinder with Z1 = Z 2 = R + j0.145 log10 

dc 
infinitesimally thin walls, the current is confined to the surface 
De 
of the conductor, and there can be no internal flux. The Zo = ( R +0.148) + j0.434 log10
geometric mean radius is the radius of the equivalent Dc  …Equation A4.14
conductor. If the original conductor is a solid cylinder having
a radius r its equivalent has a radius of 0.779 r.

A4 20. Calculation of shunt impedance
It can be shown that the potential of a conductor a above obtained directly from Equations A4.15 and A4.16. Further,
ground due to its own charge qa and a charge -qa on its as leakage can usually be neglected, the self and mutual
image is: shunt impedances Z’p and Z’m in megohm-km at a system
2h frequency of 50Hz are:
Va = 2 qa log e …Equation A4.15
r 2h 
Z'p = − j0.132 log10
r  …Equation A4.17
where h is the height above ground of the conductor and r 
D' 
is the radius of the conductor, as shown in Figure A4.16. Z'm = − j0.132 log10
D 
Where the distances above ground are great in relation to the
conductor spacing, which is the case with overhead lines,
2h=D’. From Equation A4.12, the sequence impedances of
a symmetrical three-phase circuit are:
D
Z1 = Z 2 =− j0.132 log10
Conductor r 
Radius 
D'  …Equation A4.18
Zo = − j0.396 log10 3
h rD 2 
It should be noted that the logarithmic terms above are similar
to those in Equation A4.13 except that r is the actual radius
of the conductors and D’ is the spacing between the
conductors and their images.
Earth
Again, where the conductors are not symmetrically spaced but
transposed, Equation A4.18 can be re-written making use of
the geometric mean distance between conductors, 3 ABC ,
and giving the distance of each conductor above ground, that
is, ha , hb , hc , as follows:
h 3
ABC 
Z1= Z 2 =− j0.132 log10 
r  …Equation A4.19

8ha hb hc 
Z0 = − j0.132 log10
r 3 A 2 B 2C 2 
Figure A4.16:
Geometry of two parallel conductors a and b the image of a (a’)
Similarly, it can be shown that the potential of a conductor a

due to a charge qb on a neighbouring conductor b and the
charge -qb on its image is:
D'
V 'a = 2 qb log e
D …Equation A4.16
where D is the spacing between conductors a and b and D’

is the spacing between conductor b and the image of
conductor a as shown in Figure A4.14.
Since the capacitance C =q/V and the capacitive reactance
Xc =1/ωC, it follows that the self and mutual capacitive
reactance of the conductor system in Figure A4.16 can be

20. Calculation of shunt impedance A4
3.80
A B C 0.50
a a
A A
6.0
A=3.5m
U n (kV) a (m)
R2
3.3 0.55
6.6 0.67 R1
11 0.8
22
W
1
33 1.25 X
Y
Single circuit Single circuit

Single circuit Un= 63kV/66kV/90kV Un= 90kV
1.75 - K
2.00 - N c
3.30 a 4.00
6.6 2
2.50 3.30 b
2
a d 3.50
2.50 a 2.8 2.8
2.70
a b c d a U n (kV) a (m)
3.5 3.5
3.0 3.7 3.0 1.4
3.50
63 kV(K)
Un(kV) a(m)
90 kV (N) 3.1 3.8 3.8 1.85 63 1.40
R1 R1 66 1.40
63 1.4
W 90 1.85 W 3.0 3.0 90 1.85
Y Y
Single circuit Double circuit Double circuit

Un= 63kV/90kV Un= 63kV/90kV Un= 63kV/66kV/90kV
3.4 6.20
6.60 2 a
2.75 4.1 3.9 3.9
2
b
3.7 5.80
2.75
3.10 a
4.2 4.2
a=3.7m
b=4.6m 8.0 8.0
R1 R1
W W
Y Y

Un= 110kV Un= 138kV Un= 170kV
Figure A4.17:
Typical OHL configurations (not to scale)

A4 20. Calculation of shunt impedance
8.45
12.2 2.5
d
1.75 5.0
5.0 7.5 5.20
a
p
6.0
16.4 b
7.50
6.0
c
n1 n2
a b c d n n1 n2 p
n
R1 R2 A 3.5 3.8 4.1 2.8
9.5 5.0 4.5 6.3
B 4.2 4.5 4.8 2.8
W R1 9.8 5.0 4.8 6.3
C 4.2 4.5 4.8 2.8
X W
Y
X

9.74 25.1
8.5
7.0
2.40 9.2 6.7 6.7
11.3 8.5
8.5 7.7 7.4 7.4

32.4
8.5
R1 R1
7.8 7.8
W W
X X

7.5 20.0
0 0
10.0
12.0
8.0 0 0 0
5.0
9.5
9.5 8.0
9.5 12.0
16.0
37.0
23.0
Single circuit Double circuit Single circuit

Figure A4.17 (cont.):

Typical OHL configurations (not to scale)

21. Overhead line circuits with or without earth wires A4
Typical configurations of overhead line circuits are given in variations in spacings between different line designs for the
Figure A4.17. Tower heights are not given as they vary same voltage level, so those depicted in Figure A4.17 are
considerably according to the design span and nature of the only typical examples.
ground. As indicated in some of the tower outlines, some
When calculating the phase self and mutual impedances,
tower designs are designed with a number of base extensions
Equations A4.11 and A4.17 may be used, but it should be
for this purpose. Figure A4.18 shows a typical tower.
remembered that in this case Zp is calculated for each
conductor and Zm for each pair of conductors. This section
is not, therefore, intended to give a detailed analysis, but
rather to show the general method of formulating the equations,
taking the calculation of series impedance as an example
and assuming a single circuit line with a single earth wire.
The phase voltage drops Va , Vb , Vc of a single circuit line
with a single earth wire due to currents Ia , Ib , Ic flowing in
the phases and Ie in the earth wire are:
Va = Zaa I a +Zab I b +Zac I c +Zae I e 


Vb = Zba I a +Zbb I b +Zbc I c +Zbe I e 

 …Equation A4.20
Vc = Zca I a +Z cb I b +Z cc I c +Z ce I e 

0 = Z ea I a +Z eb I b +Z ec I c +Z ee I e 
where:
De
Zaa = R + 0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log 10
dc
De
Zab =0.000988 f + j0.0029 f log 10
D
and so on.
The equation required for the calculation of shunt voltage
drops is identical to Equation A4.20 in form, except that primes
must be included, the impedances being derived from
Equation A4.17.
From Equation A4.20 it can be seen that:
Zea Z Z
−I e = I a + eb I b + ec I c
Figure A4.18: Zee Zee Zee
Typical overhead line tower
Making use of this relation, the self and mutual impedances
of the phase conductors can be modified using the following
In some cases, the phase conductors are not symmetrically formula:
disposed to each other and therefore, as previously indicated, Zne Zme
J nm = Znm − …Equation A4.21
electrostatic and electromagnetic unbalance will result, which
can be largely eliminated by transposition. Modern practice is
Zee
to build overhead lines without transposition towers to reduce For example:
costs; this must be taken into account in rigorous calculations Zae
2
of the unbalances. In other cases, lines are formed of bundled J aa = Zaa −
conductors, that is conductors formed of two, three or four
Zee
separate conductors. This arrangement minimises losses when Zae Zbe and so on.
voltages of 220kV and above are involved. J ab = Zab −
Zee
It should be noted that the line configuration and conductor
spacings are influenced, not only by voltage, but also by many So Equation A4.20 can be simplified while still taking account
other factors including type of insulators, type of support, of the effect of the earth wire by deleting the fourth row and
span length, conductor sag and the nature of terrain and fourth column and substituting Jaa for Zaa , Jab for Zab , and
external climatic loadings. Therefore, there can be large so on, calculated using Equation A4.21. The single circuit line

A4 21. Overhead line circuits with or without earth wires
with a single earth wire can therefore be replaced by an The development of these equations for double circuit lines
equivalent single circuit line having phase self and mutual with two earth wires is similar except that more terms are
impedances Jaa , Jab and so on. involved.
It can be shown from the symmetrical component theory given The sequence mutual impedances are very small and can
in Chapter [A3: Fault Calculations] that the sequence voltage usually be neglected; this also applies for double circuit lines
drops of a general three-phase circuit are: except for the mutual impedance between the zero sequence
circuits, namely (Z00’ = Z0’0). Table A4.9 gives typical values
V0 = Z 00 I 0 + Z 01 I1 + Z 02 I2  of all sequence self and mutual impedances some single
  …Equation A4.22
V1 = Z 10 I 0 + Z 11 I1 + Z 12 I2  and double circuit lines with earth wires. All conductors are
 400mm2 ACSR, except for the 132kV double circuit example
V2 = Z 20 I 0 + Z 21 I1 + Z 22 I2  where they are 200mm2.
And, from Equation A4.20 modified as indicated above and

Equation A4.22, the sequence impedances are:
1 
Z 00 = ( J aa + J bb + J cc ) + 2 ( J ab + J bc + J ac ) 
3 3 
1 
Z 11 = ( J aa + J bb + J cc ) - 1 ( J ab + J bc + J ac ) 
3 3 

1
Z 12 = ( J aa + a 2 J bb + a J cc ) + 2 ( a J ab + a 2 J ac + J bc ) 
3 3 

1
Z 21 = ( J aa + a J bb + a 2Jcc ) + 2 ( a 2J ab + a J ac + J bc ) 

3 3


1
Z 20 = ( J aa + a 2J bb + a Jcc ) - 1 ( a J ab + a 2 J ac + J bc ) 
3 3 

1
Z 10 = ( J aa + a J bb + a 2Jcc ) - 1 ( a 2 J ab + a J ac + J bc ) 

3 3 …Equation A4.23

Z 22 = Z 11 

Z 01 = Z 20 


Z =Z
02 10 

132kV 380kV 132kV 275kV

Sequence impedance Single circuit line Single circuit line Double circuit line Double circuit line
(400 mm2) (400 mm2) (200 mm2) (400 mm2)
Z00 = (Z0’0’) 1.0782 < 73°54’ 0.8227 < 70°36’ 1.1838 < 71°6’ 0.9520 < 76°46’
Z11 = Z22 = (Z1’1’) 0.3947 < 78°54’ 0.3712 < 75°57’ < 66°19’ 0.3354 < 74°35’
(Z0’0 =Z00’) 0.6334 < 71°2’ 0.5219 < 75°43’
Z01 = Z20 = (Z0’1’ = Z2’0’) 0.0116 < -166°52’ 0.0094 < -39°28’ 0.0257 < -63°25’ 0.0241 < -72°14’
Z02 = Z10 = (Z0’2’ = Z1’0’) < 5°8’ 0.0153 < 28°53’ 0.0197 < -94°58’ 0.0217 < -100°20’
Z12 = (Z1’2’) 0.0255 < -40°9’ 0.0275 < 147°26’ 0.0276 < 161°17’ 0.0281 < 149°46’
Z21 = (Z2’1’) 0.0256 < -139°1’ 0.0275 < 27°29’ 0.0277 < 37°13’ 0.0282 < 29°6’
(Z11’=Z1’1 = Z22’ = Z2’2) 0.0114 < 88°6’ 0.0129 < 88°44’
(Z02’ = Z0’2 = Z1’0 = Z10’) 0.0140 < -93°44’ 0.0185 < -91°16’
(Z02’ = Z0’2 = Z1’0 = Z10’ 0.0150 < -44°11’ 0.0173 < -77°2’
(Z1’2 = Z12’) 0.0103 < 145°10’ 0.0101 < 149°20’
(Z21’ = Z2’1) 0.0106 < 30°56’ 0.0102 < 27°31’
Table A4.9:
Sequence self and mutual impedances for various lines

22. OHL equivalent circuits A4
Consider an earthed, infinite busbar source behind a length It is customary to quote the impedances of a transmission
of transmission line as shown in Figure A4.19(a). An earth circuit in terms of Z1 and the ratio Z0/Z1 , since in this form
fault involving phase A is assumed to occur at F. If the driving they are most directly useful. By definition, the positive
voltage is E and the fault current is Ia then the earth fault sequence impedance Z1 is a function of the conductor
impedance is Ze. spacing and radius, whereas the Z0/Z1 ratio is dependent
primarily on the level of earth resistivity ρ.
From symmetrical component theory (see Chapter [A3: Fault
Calculations]: Further details may be found in Chapter [C4: Distance
Protection Schemes].
3E
Ia =
Z1 + Z 2 +Z0
thus F
Source Line
2Z1 + Z 0
Ze =
3 ~ C
since, as shown, Z 1 = Z 2 for a transmission circuit.

From Equations A4.12, Z1 = Zp - Zm and Z0 = Zp + 2Zm. ~ B
Thus, substituting these values in the above equation gives
Ze = Zp . This relation is physically valid because Zp is the
self-impedance of a single conductor with an earth return.
~ A
Similarly, for a phase fault between phases B and C at F :
3E
I b = −I c = E
2Z1
(a) Actual circuit
where 3E is the voltage between phases and 2Z is the
impedance of the fault loop. S F
C
Making use of the above relations a transmission circuit may
be represented, without any loss in generality, by the equivalent
of Figure A4.19(b), where Z1 is the phase impedance to the B
fault and (Z0-Z1)/3 is the impedance of the earth path, there
being no mutual impedance between the phases or between
phase and earth. The equivalent is valid for single and double Ia
A
circuit lines except that for double circuit lines there is zero
sequence mutual impedance, hence Z0=(Z00 - Z0’0).
E
The equivalent circuit of Figure A4.19(b) is valuable in distance
relay applications because the phase and earth fault relays (b) Equivalent circuit
are set to measure Z2 and are compensated for the earth
return impedance (Z0-Z1)/3.
Figure A4.19:
Three-phase equivalent of a transmission circuit

A4 23. Cable circuits
The basic formulae for calculating the series and shunt From this circuit it can be shown that:
impedances of a transmission circuit, Equations A4.11 and
 X cs2 
A4.17, may be applied for evaluating cable parameters; since Z 1 = Z 2 =  Rc + Rs 2

the conductor configuration is normally symmetrical, GMD  R +X 2
s s 
and GMR values can be used without risk of appreciable
errors. However, the formulae must be modified by the inclusion
 X cs2 
+ j Xc −X s 2
 …Equation A4.24
of empirical factors to take account of sheath and screen R +X 2
 s s 
effects. A useful general reference on cable formulae is given
in reference [Ref A4.4: Power System Analysis]; more detailed where Rc and Rs are the core and sheath (screen) resistances
information on particular types of cables should be obtained per unit length, Xc and Xs core and sheath (screen) reactances
direct from the manufacturers. The equivalent circuit for per unit length and Xcs the mutual reactance between core
determining the positive and negative sequence series and sheath (screen) per unit length. Xcs is in general equal
impedances of a cable is shown in Figure A4.20. to Xs.
The zero sequence series impedances are obtained directly
using Equation A4.11 and account can be taken of the sheath
Sheath circuit (s) Core circuit (c) in the same way as an earth wire in the case of an overhead
Ic
line.
Xcs Per unit length
The shunt capacitances of a sheathed cable can be calculated
from the simple formula:
Is
Rs'Xs Per unit length  

V  1 
C = 0.0241ε   µ F / km
 log d + 2T 
…Equation A4.25
 d 
where d is the overall diameter for a round conductor, T core

insulation thickness and ε permittivity of dielectric. When the
Rc'Xc Per unit length
conductors are oval or shaped, an equivalent diameter d’
V is voltage per unit length may be used where d’= (1/ π ) x periphery of conductor. No
simple formula exists for belted or unscreened cables, but
an empirical formula that gives reasonable results is:
Figure A4.20:
Equivalent circuit for determining positive or negative 0.0555 ε
impedance of cables
C= µ F / km
G …Equation A4.26
where G is a geometric factor which is a function of core and

belt insulation thickness and overall conductor diameter.

24. Overhead line and cable data A4
The following tables contain typical data on overhead lines Aluminium Alloy Conductors) and ACSR (Aluminium Conductor
and cables that can be used in conjunction with the various Steel Reinforced) conductor materials. It is based on commonly
equations quoted in this text. It is not intended that this data used standards for voltage drop and ambient temperature.
should replace that supplied by manufacturers. Where the Since these factors may not be appropriate for any particular
results of calculations are important, reliance should not be project, the table should only be used as a guide for initial
placed on the data in these tables and data should be sourced sizing, with appropriately detailed calculations carried out to
directly from a manufacturer/supplier. arrive at a final proposal.
At the conceptual design stage, initial selection of overhead
line conductor size will be determined by four factors: Number of Layers Number of Al GMR
Strands
a. maximum load to be carried in MVA
1 6 0.5r *
b. length of line
1 12 0.75r *
c. conductor material and hence maximum temperature 2 18 0.776r
d. cost of losses 2 24 0.803r
2 26 0.812r
Table A4.20 gives indicative details of the capability of various
2 30 0.826r
sizes of overhead lines using the above factors, for AAAC (All
2 32 0.833r
3 36 0.778r
Number of Strands GMR 3 45 0.794r
7 0.726r 3 48 0.799r
19 0.758r 3 54 0.81r
37 0.768r 3 66 0.827r
61 0.772r 4 72 0.789r
91 0.774r 4 76 0.793r
127 0.776r 4 84 0.801r
169 0.776r
Note:* Indicative values only, since GMR for single layer conductors is
Solid 0.779r affected by cyclic magnetic flux, which depends on various factors.
Table A4.10: Table A4.11:

GMR for stranded copper, aluminium and aluminium alloy GMR for aluminium conductor steel reinforced (ACSR)
conductors (r = conductor radius) (r = conductor radius)

A4 24. Overhead line and cable data
(a) ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

(a) to ASTM B232
standards
Overall Stranding and wire Sectional area
Stranding area diameter (20°C) Approxi.
Wire diameter diameter (mm) (mm2) Total RDC
(mm2) (mm) ( / km) overall
(mm) Designation area at 20°C
diameter
10.6 7 1.38 4.17 1.734 Aluminium Steel Aluminium Steel (mm2) ( / km)
(mm)
21.2 7 1.96 5.89 0.865
26.7 7 2.20 6.60 0.686 Sparrow 6 2.67 1 2.67 33.6 5.6 39.2 8.01 0.854
33.6 7 7.00 7.42 0.544 Robin 6 3 1 3 42.4 7.1 49.5 9 0.677
42.4 7 2.77 8.33 0.431 Raven 6 3.37 1 3.37 53.5 8.9 62.4 10.11 0.536
53.5 7 3.12 9.35 0.342 Quail 6 3.78 1 3.78 67.4 11.2 78.6 11.34 0.426
67.4 7 3.50 10.52 0.271 Pigeon 6 4.25 1 4.25 85.0 14.2 99.2 12.75 0.337
85.0 7 3.93 11.79 0.215 Penguin 6 4.77 1 4.77 107.2 17.9 125.1 14.31 0.268
107.2 7 4.42 13.26 0.171 Partridge 26 2.57 7 2 135.2 22.0 157.2 16.28 0.214
126.6 19 2.91 14.58 0.144 Ostrich 26 2.73 7 2.21 152.0 26.9 178.9 17.28 0.191
152.0 19 3.19 15.98 0.120 Merlin 18 3.47 1 3.47 170.5 9.5 179.9 17.35 0.169
177.3 19 3.45 17.25 0.103 Lark 30 2.92 7 2.92 201.4 46.9 248.3 20.44 0.144
202.7 19 3.69 18.44 0.090 Hawk 26 3.44 7 2.67 241.7 39.2 280.9 21.79 0.120
228.0 37 2.80 19.61 0.080 Dove 26 3.72 7 2.89 282.0 45.9 327.9 23.55 0.103
253.3 37 2.95 20.65 0.072 Teal 30 3.61 19 2.16 306.6 69.6 376.2 25.24 0.095
278.7 37 3.10 21.67 0.066 Swift 36 3.38 1 3.38 322.3 9.0 331.2 23.62 0.089
304.3 37 3.23 22.63 0.060 Tern 45 3.38 7 2.25 402.8 27.8 430.7 27.03 0.072
329.3 61 2.62 23.60 0.056 Canary 54 3.28 7 3.28 456.1 59.1 515.2 29.52 0.064
354.7 61 2.72 24.49 0.052 Curlew 54 3.52 7 3.52 523.7 68.1 591.8 31.68 0.055
380.0 61 2.82 25.35 0.048 Finch 54 3.65 19 2.29 565.0 78.3 643.3 33.35 0.051
405.3 61 2.91 26.19 0.045 Bittern 45 4.27 7 2.85 644.5 44.7 689.2 34.17 0.045
456.0 61 3.09 27.79 0.040 Falcon 54 4.36 19 2.62 805.7 102.4 908.1 39.26 0.036
506.7 61 3.25 29.26 0.036 Kiwi 72 4.41 7 2.94 1100.0 47.5 1147.5 44.07 0.027
(b) to BS 215.2
(b) BS (British Standards) standards
Stranding and wire Sectional area
Overall diameter (mm) (mm2) Approxi.
Stranding area diameter (20°C) Total RDC
Wire diameter overall
(mm2) (mm) ( / km) Designation area at 20°C
(mm) diameter
Aluminium Steel Aluminium Steel (mm2) ( / km)
(mm)
11.0 1 3.73 3.25 1.617
13.0 1 4.06 4.06 1.365
Gopher 6 2.36 1 2.36 26.2 4.4 30.6 7.08 1.093
14.0 1 4.22 4.22 1.269
Weasel 6 2.59 1 2.59 31.6 5.3 36.9 7.77 0.908
14.5 7 1.63 4.88 1.231
Ferret 6 3 1 3 42.4 7.1 49.5 9 0.676
16.1 1 4.52 4.52 1.103
Rabbit 6 3.35 1 3.35 52.9 8.8 61.7 10.05 0.542
18.9 1 4.90 4.90 0.938
Horse 12 2.79 7 2.79 73.4 42.8 116.2 13.95 0.393
23.4 1 5.46 5.46 0.756
Dog 6 4.72 7 1.57 105.0 13.6 118.5 14.15 0.273
32.2 1 6.40 6.40 0.549
38.4 7 2.64 7.92 0.466 Tiger 30 2.36 7 2.36 131.2 30.6 161.9 16.52 0.220
47.7 7 2.95 8.84 0.375 Wolf 30 2.59 7 2.59 158.1 36.9 194.9 18.13 0.182
65.6 7 3.45 10.36 0.273 Dingo 18 3.35 1 3.35 158.7 8.8 167.5 16.75 0.181
70.1 1 9.45 9.45 0.252 Lynx 30 2.79 7 2.79 183.4 42.8 226.2 19.53 0.157
97.7 7 4.22 12.65 0.183 Caracal 18 3.61 1 3.61 184.2 10.2 194.5 18.05 0.156
129.5 19 2.95 14.73 0.139 Jaguar 18 3.86 1 3.86 210.6 11.7 222.3 19.3 0.137
132.1 7 4.90 14.71 0.135 Panther 30 3 7 3 212.1 49.5 261.5 21 0.136
164.0 7 5.46 16.38 0.109 Zebra 54 3.18 7 3.18 428.9 55.6 484.5 28.62 0.067
165.2 19 3.33 16.64 0.109
Table A4.13:
Table A4.12: Overhead line conductor data - aluminium conductors steel
Overhead line conductor - hard drawn copper reinforced (ACSR).

(c) to DIN 48204 (a) ASTM
Stranding and wire Sectional area No. of Wire Sectional Overall RDC
diameter (mm) (mm2) Approxi. Standard Designation AI diameter area diameter at 20°C
Total RDC
overall strands (mm) (mm2) (mm) ( / km)
Designation area at 20°C
diameter
Aluminium Steel Aluminium Steel (mm2) ( / km) Kench 7 2.67 39.2 8.0 0.838
(mm)
Kibe 7 3.37 62.4 10.1 0.526
35/6 6 2.7 1 2.7 34.4 5.7 40.1 8.1 0.834 Kayak 7 3.78 78.6 11.4 0.418
Kopeck 7 4.25 99.3 12.8 0.331
44/32 14 2 7 2.4 44.0 31.7 75.6 11.2 0.652 Kittle 7 4.77 125.1 14.3 0.262
50/8 6 3.2 1 3.2 48.3 8.0 56.3 9.6 0.594 Radian 19 3.66 199.9 18.3 0.164
70/12 26 1.85 7 1.44 69.9 11.4 81.3 11.7 0.413 Rede 19 3.78 212.6 18.9 0.155
ASTM B-397
Ragout 19 3.98 236.4 19.9 0.140
95/15 26 2.15 7 1.67 94.4 15.3 109.7 13.6 0.305
Rex 19 4.14 255.8 19.9 0.129
95/55 12 3.2 7 3.2 96.5 56.3 152.8 16 0.299 Remex 19 4.36 283.7 21.8 0.116
120/70 12 3.6 7 3.6 122.1 71.3 193.4 18 0.236 Ruble 19 4.46 296.8 22.4 0.111
Rune 19 4.7 330.6 23.6 0.100
150/25 26 2.7 7 2.1 148.9 24.2 173.1 17.1 0.194
Spar 37 3.6 376.6 25.2 0.087
170/40 30 2.7 7 2.7 171.8 40.1 211.8 18.9 0.168 Solar 37 4.02 469.6 28.2 0.070
185/30 26 3 7 2.33 183.8 29.8 213.6 19 0.157 - 19 3.686 202.7 18.4 0.165
210/50 30 3 7 3 212.1 49.5 261.5 21 0.136 - 19 3.909 228.0 19.6 0.147
- 19 4.12 253.3 20.6 0.132
265/35 24 3.74 7 2.49 263.7 34.1 297.7 22.4 0.109 - 37 3.096 278.5 21.7 0.120
305/40 54 2.68 7 2.68 304.6 39.5 344.1 24.1 0.095 - 37 3.233 303.7 22.6 0.110
380/50 54 3 7 3 381.7 49.5 431.2 27 0.076 ASTM B-399 - 37 3.366 329.2 23.6 0.102
- 37 3.493 354.6 24.5 0.094
550/70 54 3.6 7 3.6 549.7 71.3 620.9 32.4 0.052
- 37 3.617 380.2 25.3 0.088
560/50 48 3.86 7 3 561.7 49.5 611.2 32.2 0.051 - 37 3.734 405.2 26.1 0.083
650/45 45 4.3 7 2.87 653.5 45.3 698.8 34.4 0.044 - 37 3.962 456.2 27.7 0.073
- 37 4.176 506.8 29.2 0.066
1045/45 72 4.3 7 2.87 1045.6 45.3 1090.9 43 0.028
(b) BS
(d) to NF C34-120
No. of Wire Sectional Overall RDC
Stranding and wire Sectional area Standard Designation AI diameter area diameter at 20°C
diameter (mm) (mm2) Approxi. RDC strands (mm) (mm2) (mm) ( / km)
Total
overall at 20°C Box 7 1.85 18.8 5.6 1.750
Designation area
diameter (Ohm/ Acacia 7 2.08 23.8 6.2 1.384
Aluminium Steel Aluminium Steel (mm2)
(mm) km)
Almond 7 2.34 30.1 7.0 1.094
Cedar 7 2.54 35.5 7.6 0.928
CANNA 59.7 12 2 7 2 37.7 22.0 59.7 10 0.765
Fir 7 2.95 47.8 8.9 0.688
CANNA 75.5 12 2.25 7 2.25 47.7 27.8 75.5 11.25 0.604
Hazel 7 3.3 59.9 9.9 0.550
CANNA 93.3 12 2.5 7 2.5 58.9 34.4 93.3 12.5 0.489 Pine 7 3.61 71.6 10.8 0.460
CANNA 116.2 30 2 7 2 94.2 22.0 116.2 14 0.306 Willow 7 4.04 89.7 12.1 0.367
CROCUS 116.2 30 2 7 2 94.2 22.0 116.2 14 0.306 - 7 4.19 96.5 12.6 0.341
- 7 4.45 108.9 13.4 0.302
CANNA 147.1 30 2.25 7 2.25 119.3 27.8 147.1 15.75 0.243
BS 3242 Oak 7 4.65 118.9 14.0 0.277
CROCUS 181.6 30 2.5 7 2.5 147.3 34.4 181.6 17.5 0.197
Mullberry 19 3.18 150.9 15.9 0.219
CROCUS 228 30 2.8 7 2.8 184.7 43.1 227.8 19.6 0.157 Ash 19 3.48 180.7 17.4 0.183
CROCUS 297 36 2.8 19 2.25 221.7 75.5 297.2 22.45 0.131 Elm 19 3.76 211.0 18.8 0.157
CANNA 288 30 3.15 7 3.15 233.8 54.6 288.3 22.05 0.124 Poplar 37 2.87 239.4 20.1 0.139
CROCUS 288 30 3.15 7 3.15 233.8 54.6 288.3 22.05 0.124 Sycamore 37 3.23 303.2 22.6 0.109
Upas 37 3.53 362.1 24.7 0.092
CROCUS 412 32 3.6 19 2.4 325.7 86.0 411.7 26.4 0.089
Yew 37 4.06 479.0 28.4 0.069
CROCUS 612 66 3.13 19 2.65 507.8 104.8 612.6 32.03 0.057 Totara 37 4.14 498.1 29.0 0.067
CROCUS 865 66 3.72 19 3.15 717.3 148.1 865.4 38.01 0.040 Rubus 61 3.5 586.9 31.5 0.057
Araucaria 61 4.14 821.1 28.4 0.040
Table A4.13 (cont):
Overhead line conductor data - aluminium conductors steel Table A4.14:
reinforced (ACSR). Overhead line conductor data - aluminium alloy.

(c) CSA (Canadian Standards Association) (e) NF (Association Francaise de Normalisation - AFNOR)
No. of Wire Sectional Overall RDC No. of Wire Sectional Overall RDC
Standard Designation AI diameter area diameter at 20°C Standard Designation AI diameter area diameter at 20°C
strands (mm) (mm2) (mm) ( / km) strands (mm) (mm2) (mm) ( / km)
10 7 1.45 11.5 4.3 2.863 ASTER 22 7 2 22.0 6.0 1.497
16 7 1.83 18.4 5.5 1.788 ASTER 34-4 7 2.5 34.4 7.5 0.958
25 7 2.29 28.8 6.9 1.142 ASTER 54-6 7 3.15 54.6 9.5 0.604
40 7 2.89 46.0 8.7 0.716 ASTER 75-5 19 2.25 75.5 11.3 0.438
63 7 3.63 72.5 10.9 0.454 ASTER 93,3 19 2.5 93.3 12.5 0.355
100 19 2.78 115.1 13.9 0.287 ASTER 117 19 2.8 117.0 14.0 0.283
125 19 3.1 143.9 15.5 0.230 ASTER 148 19 3.15 148.1 15.8 0.223
160 19 3.51 184.2 17.6 0.180 NF C34-125 ASTER 181-6 37 2.5 181.6 17.5 0.183
200 19 3.93 230.2 19.6 0.144 ASTER 228 37 2.8 227.8 19.6 0.146
250 19 4.39 287.7 22.0 0.115 ASTER 288 37 3.15 288.3 22.1 0.115
315 37 3.53 362.1 24.7 0.092 ASTER 366 37 3.55 366.2 24.9 0.091
CSA 400 37 3.98 460.4 27.9 0.072 ASTER 570 61 3.45 570.2 31.1 0.058
C49.1-M87 450 37 4.22 517.9 29.6 0.064 ASTER 851 91 3.45 850.7 38.0 0.039
500 37 4.45 575.5 31.2 0.058 ASTER 1144 91 4 1143.5 44.0 0.029
560 37 4.71 644.5 33.0 0.051 ASTER 1600 127 4 1595.9 52.0 0.021
630 61 3.89 725.0 35.0 0.046
710 61 4.13 817.2 37.2 0.041
800 61 4.38 920.8 39.5 0.036
900 61 4.65 1035.8 41.9 0.032
1000 91 4.01 1150.9 44.1 0.029
1120 91 4.25 1289.1 46.7 0.026
1250 91 4.49 1438.7 49.4 0.023
1400 91 4.75 1611.3 52.2 0.021
1500 91 4.91 1726.4 54.1 0.019
(d) DIN: (Deutsche Industrie Norm, Germany)
No. of Wire Sectional Overall RDC

Standard Designation AI diameter area diameter at 20°C
strands (mm) (mm2) (mm) ( / km)
16 7 1.7 15.9 5.1 2.091
25 7 2.1 24.3 6.3 1.370
35 7 2.5 34.4 7.5 0.967
50 19 1.8 48.4 9.0 0.690
50 7 3 49.5 9.0 0.672
70 19 2.1 65.8 10.5 0.507
95 19 2.5 93.3 12.5 0.358
DIN 48201
120 19 2.8 117.0 14.0 0.285
150 37 2.25 147.1 15.7 0.228
185 37 2.5 181.6 17.5 0.184
240 61 2.25 242.5 20.2 0.138
300 61 2.5 299.4 22.5 0.112
400 61 2.89 400.1 26.0 0.084
500 61 3.23 499.8 29.1 0.067
Table A4.14 (cont):

Overhead line conductor data - aluminium alloy.

(a) ASTM
Sectional area Approxi.

Stranding and wire diameter (mm) RDC
(mm2) Total area overall
Standard Designation at 20°C
(mm2) diameter
Alloy Steel Alloy Steel ( / km)
(mm)
26 2.62 7 2.04 140.2 22.9 163.1 7.08 0.240
26 2.97 7 2.31 180.1 29.3 209.5 11.08 0.187
30 2.76 7 2.76 179.5 41.9 221.4 12.08 0.188
26 3.13 7 2.43 200.1 32.5 232.5 13.08 0.168
30 3.08 7 3.08 223.5 52.2 275.7 16.08 0.151
26 3.5 7 2.72 250.1 40.7 290.8 17.08 0.135
26 3.7 7 2.88 279.6 45.6 325.2 19.08 0.120
30 3.66 19 2.2 315.6 72.2 387.9 22.08 0.107
ASTM B711
30 3.88 19 2.33 354.7 81.0 435.7 24.08 0.095
30 4.12 19 2.47 399.9 91.0 491.0 26.08 0.084
54 3.26 19 1.98 450.7 58.5 509.2 27.08 0.075
54 3.63 19 2.18 558.9 70.9 629.8 29.08 0.060
54 3.85 19 2.31 628.6 79.6 708.3 30.08 0.054
54 4.34 19 2.6 798.8 100.9 899.7 32.08 0.042
84 4.12 19 2.47 1119.9 91.0 1210.9 35.08 0.030
84 4.35 19 2.61 1248.4 101.7 1350.0 36.08 0.027
(b) DIN
Approxi.
Stranding and wire diameter (mm) Sectional area (mm2) RDC
Total area overall
Standard Designation at 20°C
(mm2) diameter
Alloy Steel Alloy Steel ( / km)
(mm)
70/12 26 1.85 7 1.44 69.9 11.4 81.3 11.7 0.479
95/15 26 2.15 7 1.67 94.4 15.3 109.7 13.6 0.355
125/30 30 2.33 7 2.33 127.9 29.8 157.8 16.3 0.262
150/25 26 2.7 7 2.1 148.9 24.2 173.1 17.1 0.225
170/40 30 2.7 7 2.7 171.8 40.1 211.8 18.9 0.195
185/30 26 3 7 2.33 183.8 29.8 213.6 19 0.182
210/50 30 3 7 3 212.1 49.5 261.5 21 0.158
DIN 48206
230/30 24 3.5 7 2.33 230.9 29.8 260.8 21 0.145
265/35 24 3.74 7 2.49 263.7 34.1 297.7 22.4 0.127
305/40 54 2.68 7 2.68 304.6 39.5 344.1 24.1 0.110
380/50 54 3 7 3 381.7 49.5 431.2 27 0.088
450/40 48 3.45 7 2.68 448.7 39.5 488.2 28.7 0.075
560/50 48 3.86 7 3 561.7 49.5 611.2 32.2 0.060
680/85 54 4 19 2.4 678.6 86.0 764.5 36 0.049
(c) NF
Approxi.
Stranding and wire diameter (mm) Sectional area (mm2) Total RDC
overall
Standard Designation area at 20°C
diameter
Alloy Steel Alloy Steel (mm2) ( / km)
(mm)
PHLOX 116.2 18 2 19 2 56.5 59.7 116.2 14 0.591
PHLOX 147.1 18 2.25 19 2.25 71.6 75.5 147.1 15.75 0.467
PASTEL 147.1 30 2.25 7 2.25 119.3 27.8 147.1 15.75 0.279
PHLOX 181.6 18 2.5 19 2.5 88.4 93.3 181.6 17.5 0.378
PASTEL 181.6 30 2.5 7 2.5 147.3 34.4 181.6 17.5 0.226
NF C34-125 PHLOX 228 18 2.8 19 2.8 110.8 117.0 227.8 19.6 0.300
PASTEL 228 30 2.8 7 2.8 184.7 43.1 227.8 19.6 0.180
PHLOX 288 18 3.15 19 3.15 140.3 148.1 288.3 22.05 0.238
PASTEL 288 30 3.15 7 3.15 233.8 54.6 288.3 22.05 0.142
PASTEL 299 42 2.5 19 2.5 206.2 93.3 299.4 22.45 0.162
PHLOX 376 24 2.8 37 2.8 147.8 227.8 375.6 26.4 0.226
Table A4.15:
Overhead line conductor data - aluminium alloy conductors, steel re-inforced (AACSR)

XAC at 50 Hz XAC at 50 Hz and shunt capacitance

RDC at 50 Hz @ 20°C
of Aluminium mm2
66 kV 132 kV
Sectional area
RDC at 20°C
3.3 6.6 33 kV
/ km
/ km
11 kV 22 kV Rat circuit Double vertical Triangle Double vertical Double triangle Rat circuit
kV kV
/ /
/ / X X X X X X
km km X C C C C C C C
km km / / / / / /
/ km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km
km km km km km km
13.3 2.1586 2.159 0.395 0.409 0.420 0.434 0.445 8.7 0.503 7.6 0.513 7.4 0.520 7.3 0.541 7.0 0.528 7.2 0.556 6.8
15.3 1.8771 1.877 0.391 0.405 0.415 0.429 0.441 8.8 0.499 7.7 0.508 7.5 0.515 7.4 0.537 7.1 0.523 7.3 0.552 6.9
21.2 1.3557 1.356 0.381 0.395 0.405 0.419 0.430 9.0 0.488 7.8 0.498 7.7 0.505 7.6 0.527 7.2 0.513 7.4 0.542 7.0
23.9 1.2013 1.201 0.376 0.390 0.401 0.415 0.426 9.1 0.484 7.9 0.494 7.8 0.501 7.6 0.522 7.3 0.509 7.5 0.537 7.1
26.2 1.0930 1.093 0.374 0.388 0.398 0.412 0.424 9.2 0.482 8.0 0.491 7.8 0.498 7.7 0.520 7.3 0.506 7.5 0.535 7.1
28.3 1.0246 1.025 0.352 0.366 0.377 0.391 0.402 9.4 0.460 8.2 0.470 8.0 0.477 7.8 0.498 7.5 0.485 7.7 0.513 7.3
33.6 0.8535 0.854 0.366 0.380 0.390 0.404 0.416 9.4 0.474 8.1 0.484 7.9 0.491 7.8 0.512 7.5 0.499 7.7 0.527 7.2
37.7 0.7647 0.765 0.327 0.341 0.351 0.365 0.376 9.7 0.435 8.4 0.444 8.2 0.451 8.1 0.473 7.7 0.459 7.9 0.488 7.4
42.4 0.6768 0.677 0.359 0.373 0.383 0.397 0.409 9.6 0.467 8.3 0.476 8.1 0.483 7.9 0.505 7.6 0.491 7.8 0.520 7.3
44.0 0.6516 0.652 0.320 0.334 0.344 0.358 0.369 9.9 0.427 8.5 0.437 8.3 0.444 8.2 0.465 7.8 0.452 8.0 0.481 7.5
47.7 0.6042 0.604 0.319 0.333 0.344 0.358 0.369 9.9 0.427 8.5 0.437 8.3 0.444 8.2 0.465 7.8 0.452 8.1 0.480 7.6
51.2 0.5634 0.564 0.317 0.331 0.341 0.355 0.367 10.0 0.425 8.6 0.434 8.4 0.441 8.2 0.463 7.9 0.449 8.1 0.478 7.6
58.9 0.4894 0.490 0.313 0.327 0.337 0.351 0.362 10.1 0.421 8.7 0.430 8.5 0.437 8.3 0.459 7.9 0.445 8.2 0.474 7.7
63.1 0.4545 0.455 0.346 0.360 0.371 0.385 0.396 9.9 0.454 8.5 0.464 8.3 0.471 8.2 0.492 7.8 0.479 8.0 0.507 7.5
67.4 0.4255 0.426 0.344 0.358 0.369 0.383 0.394 10.0 0.452 8.5 0.462 8.3 0.469 8.2 0.490 7.8 0.477 8.1 0.505 7.6
73.4 0.3930 0.393 0.306 0.320 0.330 0.344 0.356 10.3 0.414 8.8 0.423 8.6 0.430 8.5 0.452 8.1 0.438 8.3 0.467 7.8
79.2 0.3622 0.362 0.339 0.353 0.363 0.377 0.389 10.1 0.447 8.7 0.457 8.4 0.464 8.3 0.485 7.9 0.472 8.2 0.500 7.6
85.0 0.3374 0.338 0.337 0.351 0.361 0.375 0.387 10.2 0.445 8.7 0.454 8.5 0.461 8.4 0.483 7.9 0.469 8.2 0.498 7.7
94.4 0.3054 0.306 0.302 0.316 0.327 0.341 0.352 10.3 0.410 8.8 0.420 8.6 0.427 8.4 0.448 8.0 0.435 8.3 0.463 7.8
105.0 0.2733 0.274 0.330 0.344 0.355 0.369 0.380 10.4 0.438 8.8 0.448 8.6 0.455 8.5 0.476 8.1 0.463 8.3 0.491 7.8
121.6 0.2371 0.237 0.294 0.308 0.318 0.332 0.344 10.6 0.402 9.0 0.412 8.8 0.419 8.6 0.440 8.2 0.427 8.4 0.455 7.9
127.9 0.2254 0.226 0.290 0.304 0.314 0.328 0.340 10.7 0.398 9.0 0.407 8.8 0.414 8.7 0.436 8.2 0.422 8.5 0.451 8.0
131.2 0.2197 0.220 0.289 0.303 0.313 0.327 0.339 10.7 0.397 9.1 0.407 8.8 0.414 8.7 0.435 8.3 0.421 8.5 0.450 8.0
135.2 0.2133 0.214 0.297 0.311 0.322 0.336 0.347 10.5 0.405 9.0 0.415 8.8 0.422 8.6 0.443 8.2 0.430 8.4 0.458 7.9
148.9 0.1937 0.194 0.288 0.302 0.312 0.326 0.338 10.8 0.396 9.1 0.406 8.9 0.413 8.7 0.434 8.3 0.420 8.6 0.449 8.0
158.7 0.1814 0.182 0.292 0.306 0.316 0.330 0.342 10.7 0.400 9.1 0.410 8.9 0.417 8.7 0.438 8.3 0.425 8.5 0.453 8.0
170.5 0.1691 0.170 0.290 0.304 0.314 0.328 0.340 10.8 0.398 9.1 0.407 8.9 0.414 8.8 0.436 8.3 0.422 8.6 0.451 8.0
184.2 0.1565 0.157 0.287 0.302 0.312 0.326 0.337 10.9 0.395 9.2 0.405 9.0 0.412 8.8 0.433 8.4 0.420 8.6 0.449 8.1
201.4 0.1438 0.144 0.280 0.294 0.304 0.318 0.330 11.0 0.388 9.3 0.398 9.1 0.405 8.9 0.426 8.5 0.412 8.8 0.441 8.2
210.6 0.1366 0.137 0.283 0.297 0.308 0.322 0.333 11.0 0.391 9.3 0.401 9.1 0.408 8.9 0.429 8.4 0.416 8.7 0.444 8.1
221.7 0.1307 0.131 0.274 0.288 0.298 0.312 0.323 11.3 0.381 9.5 0.391 9.3 0.398 9.1 0.419 8.6 0.406 8.9 0.435 8.3
230.9 0.1249 0.126 0.276 0.290 0.300 0.314 0.326 11.2 0.384 9.4 0.393 9.2 0.400 9.0 0.422 8.6 0.408 8.9 0.437 8.3
241.7 0.1193 0.120 0.279 0.293 0.303 0.317 0.329 11.2 0.387 9.4 0.396 9.2 0.403 9.0 0.425 8.5 0.411 8.8 0.440 8.2
263.7 0.1093 0.110 0.272 0.286 0.296 0.310 0.321 11.3 0.380 9.5 0.389 9.3 0.396 9.1 0.418 8.6 0.404 8.9 0.433 8.3
282.0 0.1022 0.103 0.274 0.288 0.298 0.312 0.324 11.3 0.382 9.5 0.392 9.3 0.399 9.1 0.420 8.6 0.406 8.9 0.435 8.3
306.6 0.0945 0.095 0.267 0.281 0.291 0.305 0.317 11.5 0.375 9.7 0.384 9.4 0.391 9.2 0.413 8.7 0.399 9.1 0.428 8.4
322.3 0.0895 0.090 0.270 0.284 0.294 0.308 0.320 11.5 0.378 9.6 0.387 9.4 0.394 9.2 0.416 8.7 0.402 9.0 0.431 8.4
339.3 0.085 0.086 0.265 0.279 0.289 0.303 0.315 11.6 0.373 9.7 0.383 9.5 0.390 9.3 0.411 8.8 0.398 9.1 0.426 8.5
362.6 0.0799 0.081 0.262 0.276 0.286 0.300 0.311 11.7 0.369 9.8 0.379 9.6 0.386 9.4 0.408 8.9 0.394 9.2 0.423 8.5
386.0 0.0747 0.076 0.261 0.275 0.285 0.299 0.311 11.8 0.369 9.8 0.379 9.6 0.386 9.4 0.407 8.9 0.393 9.2 0.422 8.6
402.8 0.0719 0.073 0.261 0.275 0.285 0.299 0.310 11.8 0.368 9.9 0.378 9.6 0.385 9.4 0.407 8.9 0.393 9.2 0.422 8.6
428.9 0.0671 0.068 0.267 0.281 0.291 0.305 0.316 11.5 0.374 9.7 0.384 9.4 0.391 9.2 0.413 8.7 0.399 9.0 0.428 8.4
448.7 0.0642 0.066 0.257 0.271 0.281 0.295 0.306 11.9 0.364 10.0 0.374 9.7 0.381 9.5 0.402 9.0 0.389 9.3 0.418 8.7
456.1 0.0635 0.065 0.257 0.271 0.281 0.295 0.307 12.0 0.365 10.0 0.374 9.7 0.381 9.5 0.403 9.0 0.389 9.3 0.418 8.7
483.4 0.0599 0.061 0.255 0.269 0.279 0.293 0.305 12.0 0.363 10.0 0.372 9.8 0.379 9.6 0.401 9.0 0.387 9.4 0.416 8.7
494.4 0.0583 0.060 0.254 0.268 0.279 0.293 0.304 12.1 0.362 10.0 0.372 9.8 0.379 9.6 0.400 9.0 0.387 9.4 0.415 8.7
510.5 0.0565 0.058 0.252 0.266 0.277 0.291 0.302 12.1 0.360 10.1 0.370 9.8 0.377 9.6 0.398 9.1 0.385 9.4 0.413 8.7
523.7 0.0553 0.057 0.252 0.266 0.277 0.291 0.302 12.1 0.360 10.1 0.370 9.8 0.377 9.6 0.398 9.1 0.385 9.4 0.413 8.7
Table A4.16:
Feeder circuits data - overhead lines at 50Hz

XAC at 60 Hz XAC at 60 Hz and shunt capacitance

RDC at 50 Hz @ 20°C
Sectional area of
Aluminium mm2
66 kV 132 kV
RDC at 20°C
3.3 6.6 33 kV
/ km
/ km
11 kV 22 kV Rat circuit Double vertical Triangle Double vertical Double triangle Rat circuit
kV kV
/ /
/ / X X X X X X
km km X C C C C C C C
km km / / / / / /
/ km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km nF / km
km km km km km km
13.3 2.1586 2.159 0.474 0.491 0.503 0.520 0.534 8.7 0.604 7.6 0.615 7.4 0.624 7.3 0.649 7.0 0.633 7.2 0.668 6.8
15.3 1.8771 1.877 0.469 0.486 0.498 0.515 0.529 8.8 0.598 7.7 0.610 7.5 0.619 7.4 0.644 7.1 0.628 7.3 0.662 6.9
21.2 1.3557 1.356 0.457 0.474 0.486 0.503 0.516 9.0 0.586 7.8 0.598 7.7 0.606 7.6 0.632 7.2 0.616 7.4 0.650 7.0
23.9 1.2013 1.201 0.452 0.469 0.481 0.498 0.511 9.1 0.581 7.9 0.593 7.8 0.601 7.6 0.627 7.3 0.611 7.5 0.645 7.1
26.2 1.0930 1.093 0.449 0.466 0.478 0.495 0.508 9.2 0.578 8.0 0.590 7.8 0.598 7.7 0.624 7.3 0.608 7.5 0.642 7.1
28.3 1.0246 1.025 0.423 0.440 0.452 0.469 0.483 9.4 0.552 8.2 0.564 8.0 0.572 7.8 0.598 7.5 0.582 7.7 0.616 7.3
33.6 0.8535 0.854 0.439 0.456 0.468 0.485 0.499 9.4 0.569 8.1 0.580 7.9 0.589 7.8 0.614 7.5 0.598 7.7 0.633 7.2
37.7 0.7647 0.765 0.392 0.409 0.421 0.438 0.452 9.7 0.521 8.4 0.533 8.2 0.541 8.1 0.567 7.7 0.551 7.9 0.585 7.4
42.4 0.6768 0.677 0.431 0.447 0.460 0.477 0.490 9.6 0.560 8.3 0.572 8.1 0.580 7.9 0.606 7.6 0.589 7.8 0.624 7.3
44.0 0.6516 0.652 0.384 0.400 0.413 0.429 0.443 9.9 0.513 8.5 0.525 8.3 0.533 8.2 0.559 7.8 0.542 8.0 0.577 7.5
47.7 0.6042 0.604 0.383 0.400 0.412 0.429 0.443 9.9 0.513 8.5 0.524 8.3 0.533 8.2 0.558 7.8 0.542 8.1 0.576 7.6
51.2 0.5634 0.564 0.380 0.397 0.409 0.426 0.440 10.0 0.510 8.6 0.521 8.4 0.530 8.2 0.555 7.9 0.539 8.1 0.573 7.6
58.9 0.4894 0.490 0.375 0.392 0.404 0.421 0.435 10.1 0.505 8.7 0.516 8.5 0.525 8.3 0.550 7.9 0.534 8.2 0.568 7.7
63.1 0.4545 0.455 0.416 0.432 0.445 0.462 0.475 9.9 0.545 8.5 0.557 8.3 0.565 8.2 0.591 7.8 0.574 8.0 0.609 7.5
67.4 0.4255 0.426 0.413 0.430 0.442 0.459 0.473 10.0 0.543 8.5 0.554 8.3 0.563 8.2 0.588 7.8 0.572 8.1 0.606 7.6
73.4 0.3930 0.393 0.367 0.384 0.396 0.413 0.427 10.3 0.496 8.8 0.508 8.6 0.516 8.5 0.542 8.1 0.526 8.3 0.560 7.8
79.2 0.3622 0.362 0.407 0.424 0.436 0.453 0.467 10.1 0.536 8.7 0.548 8.4 0.556 8.3 0.582 7.9 0.566 8.2 0.600 7.6
85.0 0.3374 0.338 0.404 0.421 0.433 0.450 0.464 10.2 0.534 8.7 0.545 8.5 0.554 8.4 0.579 7.9 0.563 8.2 0.598 7.7
94.4 0.3054 0.306 0.363 0.380 0.392 0.409 0.423 10.3 0.492 8.8 0.504 8.6 0.512 8.4 0.538 8.0 0.522 8.3 0.556 7.8
105.0 0.2733 0.274 0.396 0.413 0.426 0.442 0.456 10.4 0.526 8.8 0.537 8.6 0.546 8.5 0.572 8.1 0.555 8.3 0.590 7.8
121.6 0.2371 0.238 0.353 0.370 0.382 0.399 0.413 10.6 0.482 9.0 0.494 8.8 0.502 8.6 0.528 8.2 0.512 8.4 0.546 7.9
127.9 0.2254 0.226 0.348 0.365 0.377 0.394 0.408 10.7 0.477 9.0 0.489 8.8 0.497 8.7 0.523 8.2 0.507 8.5 0.541 8.0
131.2 0.2197 0.220 0.347 0.364 0.376 0.393 0.407 10.7 0.476 9.1 0.488 8.8 0.496 8.7 0.522 8.3 0.506 8.5 0.540 8.0
135.2 0.2133 0.214 0.357 0.374 0.386 0.403 0.416 10.5 0.486 9.0 0.498 8.8 0.506 8.6 0.532 8.2 0.516 8.4 0.550 7.9
148.9 0.1937 0.194 0.346 0.362 0.375 0.392 0.405 10.8 0.475 9.1 0.487 8.9 0.495 8.7 0.521 8.3 0.504 8.6 0.539 8.0
158.7 0.1814 0.182 0.351 0.367 0.380 0.397 0.410 10.7 0.480 9.1 0.492 8.9 0.500 8.7 0.526 8.3 0.509 8.5 0.544 8.0
170.5 0.1691 0.170 0.348 0.365 0.377 0.394 0.408 10.8 0.477 9.1 0.489 8.9 0.497 8.8 0.523 8.3 0.507 8.6 0.541 8.0
184.2 0.1565 0.157 0.345 0.362 0.374 0.391 0.405 10.9 0.474 9.2 0.486 9.0 0.494 8.8 0.520 8.4 0.504 8.6 0.538 8.1
201.4 0.1438 0.145 0.336 0.353 0.365 0.382 0.396 11.0 0.466 9.3 0.477 9.1 0.486 8.9 0.511 8.5 0.495 8.8 0.529 8.2
210.6 0.1366 0.137 0.340 0.357 0.369 0.386 0.400 11.0 0.469 9.3 0.481 9.1 0.489 8.9 0.515 8.4 0.499 8.7 0.533 8.1
221.7 0.1307 0.132 0.328 0.345 0.357 0.374 0.388 11.3 0.458 9.5 0.469 9.3 0.478 9.1 0.503 8.6 0.487 8.9 0.522 8.3
230.9 0.1249 0.126 0.331 0.348 0.360 0.377 0.391 11.2 0.460 9.4 0.472 9.2 0.480 9.0 0.506 8.6 0.532 8.9 0.524 8.3
241.7 0.1193 0.120 0.335 0.351 0.364 0.381 0.394 11.2 0.464 9.4 0.476 9.2 0.484 9.0 0.510 8.5 0.493 8.8 0.528 8.2
263.7 0.1093 0.110 0.326 0.343 0.355 0.372 0.386 11.3 0.455 9.5 0.467 9.3 0.476 9.1 0.501 8.6 0.485 8.9 0.519 8.3
282.0 0.1022 0.103 0.329 0.346 0.358 0.375 0.389 11.3 0.458 9.5 0.470 9.3 0.478 9.1 0.504 8.6 0.488 8.9 0.522 8.3
306.6 0.0945 0.096 0.320 0.337 0.349 0.366 0.380 11.5 0.450 9.7 0.461 9.4 0.470 9.2 0.495 8.7 0.479 9.1 0.514 8.4
322.3 0.0895 0.091 0.324 0.341 0.353 0.370 0.384 11.5 0.453 9.6 0.465 9.4 0.473 9.2 0.499 8.7 0.483 9.0 0.517 8.4
339.3 0.0850 0.086 0.318 0.335 0.347 0.364 0.378 11.6 0.448 9.7 0.459 9.5 0.468 9.3 0.493 8.8 0.477 9.1 0.511 8.5
362.6 0.0799 0.081 0.314 0.331 0.343 0.360 0.374 11.7 0.443 9.8 0.455 9.6 0.463 9.4 0.489 8.9 0.473 9.2 0.507 8.5
386.0 0.0747 0.076 0.313 0.330 0.342 0.359 0.373 11.8 0.443 9.8 0.454 9.6 0.463 9.4 0.488 8.9 0.472 9.2 0.506 8.6
402.8 0.0719 0.074 0.313 0.330 0.342 0.359 0.372 11.8 0.442 9.9 0.454 9.6 0.462 9.4 0.488 8.9 0.472 9.2 0.506 8.6
428.9 0.0671 0.069 0.320 0.337 0.349 0.366 0.380 11.5 0.449 9.7 0.461 9.4 0.469 9.2 0.495 8.7 0.479 9.0 0.513 8.4
448.7 0.0642 0.066 0.308 0.325 0.337 0.354 0.367 11.9 0.437 10.0 0.449 9.7 0.457 9.5 0.483 9.0 0.467 9.3 0.501 8.7
456.1 0.0635 0.065 0.305 0.322 0.334 0.351 0.364 12.0 0.434 10.0 0.446 9.7 0.454 9.6 0.480 9.0 0.463 9.4 0.498 8.7
483.4 0.0599 0.062 0.306 0.323 0.335 0.352 0.366 12.0 0.435 10.0 0.447 9.8 0.455 9.6 0.481 9.0 0.465 9.4 0.499 8.7
494.4 0.0583 0.060 0.305 0.322 0.334 0.351 0.365 12.1 0.435 10.0 0.446 9.8 0.455 9.6 0.480 9.0 0.464 9.4 0.498 8.7
510.5 0.0565 0.059 0.303 0.320 0.332 0.349 0.362 12.1 0.432 10.1 0.444 9.8 0.452 9.6 0.478 9.1 0.462 9.4 0.496 8.7
523.7 0.0553 0.057 0.303 0.320 0.332 0.349 0.363 12.1 0.432 10.1 0.444 9.8 0.452 9.6 0.478 9.1 0.462 9.4 0.496 8.7
Table A4.16 (cont):

Feeder circuits data - overhead lines at 60Hz

Conductor size (mm2)

25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300 400 500* 630* 800* 1000* 1200* 1600*
Series Resistance
0.927 0.669 0.494 0.342 0.247 0.196 0.158 0.127 0.098 0.08 0.064 0.051 0.042
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
3.3kV 0.097 0.092 0.089 0.083 0.08 0.078 0.076 0.075 0.073 0.072 0.071 0.088 0.086
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.059 0.067 0.079 0.09 0.104 0.111 0.122 0.133 0.146 0.16 0.179 0.19 0.202
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
0.927 0.669 0.494 0.342 0.247 0.196 0.158 0.127 0.098 0.08 0.064 0.057 0.042
R ( / km)
6.6kV Series Reactance
0.121 0.113 0.108 0.102 0.096 0.093 0.091 0.088 0.086 0.085 0.083 0.088 0.086
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.085 0.095 0.104 0.12 0.136 0.149 0.16 0.177 0.189 0.195 0.204 0.205 0.228
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
0.927 0.669 0.494 0.342 0.247 0.196 0.158 0.127 0.098 0.08 0.064 0.051 0.042
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
11kV 0.128 0.119 0.114 0.107 0.101 0.098 0.095 0.092 0.089 0.087 0.084 0.089 0.086
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.068 0.074 0.082 0.094 0.105 0.115 0.123 0.135 0.15 0.165 0.182 0.194 0.216
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
0.669 0.494 0.348 0.247 0.196 0.158 0.127 0.098 0.08 0.064 0.051 0.042
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
22kV 0.136 0.129 0.121 0.114 0.11 0.107 0.103 0.1 0.094 0.091 0.096 0.093
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.053 0.057 0.065 0.072 0.078 0.084 0.091 0.1 0.109 0.12 0.128 0.141
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
0.669 0.494 0.348 0.247 0.196 0.158 0.127 0.098 0.08 0.064 0.051 0.042
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
33kV 0.15 0.143 0.134 0.127 0.122 0.118 0.114 0.109 0.105 0.102 0.103 0.1
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.042 0.045 0.05 0.055 0.059 0.063 0.068 0.075 0.081 0.089 0.094 0.103
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
0.0387 0.031 0.0254 0.0215
R ( / km)
66kV* Series Reactance
0.117 0.113 0.109 0.102
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.079 0.082 0.088 0.11
C (mS/km)
Series Resistance
0.0387 0.031 0.0254 0.0215
R ( / km)
0.13 0.125 0.12 0.115
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.053 0.06 0.063 0.072
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
0.0487 0.0387 0.0310 0.0254 0.0215 0.0161 0.0126
R ( / km)
0.145 0.137 0.134 0.128 0.123 0.119 0.113
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.044 0.047 0.05 0.057 0.057 0.063 0.072
C (mS/km)
Series Resistance
0.0310 0.0254 0.0215 0.0161 0.0126
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
420kV* 0.172 0.162 0.156 0.151 0.144
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.04 0.047 0.05 0.057 0.063
C (mS / km)
For aluminium conductors of the same cross-section, the resistance increases by 60-65 percent, the series reactance and shunt capacitance are virtually unaltered.
* - single core cables in trefoil.
Different values apply if laid in spaced flat formation.
Series resistance - a.c. resistance @ 90°C. Series reactance - equivalent star reactance.
Data for 245kV and 420kV cables may vary significantly from that given, dependent on manufacturer and construction.
Table A4.17:
Characteristics of polyethylene insulated cables (XLPE)


10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300 400 500* 630* 800* 1000*
Series Resistance
2063 1289 825.5 595 439.9 304.9 220.4 174.5 142.3 113.9 87.6 70.8 56.7 45.5 37.1 31.2 27.2
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
3.3kV 87.7 83.6 76.7 74.8 72.5 70.2 67.5 66.6 65.7 64.7 63.8 62.9 62.4 73.5 72.1 71.2 69.8
X ( / km)
Susceptance
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
514.2 326 206.4 148.8 110 76.2 55.1 43.6 35.6 28.5 21.9 17.6 14.1 11.3 9.3 7.8 6.7
R ( / km)
6.6kV Series Reactance
26.2 24.3 22 21.2 20.4 19.6 18.7 18.3 17.9 17.6 17.1 16.9 16.5 18.8 18.4 18 17.8
X ( / km)
Susceptance
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
111 0.87 0.63 0.46 0.32 0.23 0.184 0.15 0.12 0.092 0.074 0.059 0.048 0.039 0.033 0.028
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
11kV 9.26 0.107 0.1 0.096 0.091 0.087 0.085 0.083 0.081 0.079 0.077 0.076 0.085 0.083 0.081 0.08
X ( / km)
Susceptance
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
17.69 12.75 9.42 6.53 4.71 3.74 3.04 2.44 1.87 1.51 1.21 0.96 0.79 0.66 0.57
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
22kV 2.89 2.71 2.6 2.46 2.36 2.25 2.19 2.11 2.04 1.97 1.92 1.9 1.84 1.8 1.76
X ( / km)
Susceptance
C (mS / km)
Series Resistance
4.19 2.9 2.09 0.181 0.147 0.118 0.09 0.073 0.058 0.046 0.038 0.031 0.027
R ( / km)
Series Reactance
33kV 1.16 1.09 1.03 0.107 0.103 0.101 0.097 0.094 0.09 0.098 0.097 0.092 0.089
X ( / km)
Susceptance
0.104 0.116 0.124 0.194 0.151 0.281 0.179 0.198 0.22 0.245
C (mS / km)
Cables are of the solid type, 3 core except for those marked *. Impedances at 50Hz frequency
Table A4.18:
Characteristics of paper insulated cables
3.3kV
R / km X / km
16 1.380 0.106
25 0.870 0.100
35 0.627 0.094
50 0.463 0.091
70 0.321 0.086
95 0.232 0.084
120 0.184 0.081
150 0.150 0.079
185 0.121 0.077
240 0.093 0.076
300 0.075 0.075
400 0.060 0.075
500* 0.049 0.089
630* 0.041 0.086
800* 0.035 0.086
1000* 0.030 0.084
3 core copper conductors, 50Hz values
* - single core cables in trefoil
Table A4.19:
3.3 kV PVC insulated cables

Surge Voltage
Voltage level Cross Conductors Impedance Drop Indicative Thermal loading
Sectional per loading loading
area (mm2) phase
Un kV Um kV MVA MWkm MV A
30 1 0.3 11 2.9 151

50 1 0.3 17 3.9 204
11 12 90 1 0.4 23 5.1 268
120 1 0.5 27 6.2 328
150 1 0.5 30 7.3 383
1 1.2 44 5.8 151
50 1 1.2 66 7.8 204
24 30 90 1 1.2 92 10.2 268
120 1 1.4 106 12.5 328
150 1 1.5 119 14.6 383
50 1 2.7 149 11.7 204
90 1 2.7 207 15.3 268
33 36
120 1 3.1 239 18.7 328
150 1 3.5 267 21.9 383
90 1 11 827 41 268
150 1 11 1068 59 383
66 72.5
250 1 11 1240 77 502
250 2 15 1790 153 1004
150 1 44 4070 85 370
250 1 44 4960 115 502
132 145 250 2 58 7160 230 1004
400 1 56 6274 160 698
400 2 73 9057 320 1395
400 1 130 15600 247 648
220 245 400 2 184 22062 494 1296
400 4 260 31200 988 2592
400 2 410 58100 850 1296
400 4 582 82200 1700 2590
380 420
550 2 482 68200 1085 1650
550 3 540 81200 1630 2475
Table A4.20:
OHL capabilities

25. References A4
[A4.1] Physical significance of sub-subtransient

quantities in dynamic behaviour of synchronous
machines.
I.M. Canay.
Proc. IEE, Vol. 135, Pt. B, November 1988.
[A4.2] IEC 60034-4.
Methods for determining synchronous machine quantities
from tests.
[A4.3] IEEE Standards 115/115A.
IEEE Test Procedures for Synchronous Machines.
[A4.4] Power System Analysis.
J.R.Mortlock and M.W.Humphrey Davies
(Chapman & Hall, London).

B1
Relay Technology

Chapter
B1
Relay Technology
1. Introduction 95
2. Electromechanical relays 95
3. Static relays 96
4. Digital relays 97
5. Numerical relays 98
6. Additional features of numerical relays 102
7. Numerical relay issues 104

Relay Technology
B1 1. Introduction
Since the 1960s there have been enormous changes in relay This chapter charts the course of relay technology through the
technology. The electromechanical relay in all of its different years. As the purpose of the book is to describe modern
forms has been replaced successively by static, digital and protection relay practice, it is natural to concentrate on digital
numerical relays, each change bringing with it reductions in size and numerical relay technology. The vast number of
and improvements in functionality. At the same time, reliability electromechanical and static relays are still giving dependable
levels have been maintained or even improved and availability service, but descriptions on the technology used must necessarily
significantly increased due to techniques not available with older be somewhat brief.
relay types. This represents a tremendous achievement for all
those involved in relay design and manufacture.
2. Electromechanical relays
These relays were the earliest forms of relay used for the
protection of power systems, and they date back nearly 100
years. They work on the principle of a mechanical force causing
operation of a relay contact in response to a stimulus. The
mechanical force is generated through current flow in one or
more windings on a magnetic core or cores, hence the term
electromechanical relay. The principle advantage of such relays
is that they provide galvanic isolation between the inputs and
outputs in a simple, cheap and reliable form – therefore for simple
on/off switching functions where the output contacts have to
carry substantial currents, they are still used.
Electromechanical relays can be classified into several different (a) D.C. relay
types as follows:
a. attracted armature
b. moving coil
c. induction
d. thermal (b) Shading loop modification to pole of
e. motor operated relay (a) for a.c. operation
f. mechanical
2.1 Attracted armature relays
These generally consist of an iron-cored electromagnet that
attracts a hinged armature when energised. A restoring force
is provided by means of a spring or gravity so that the armature
will return to its original position when the electromagnet is de-
energised. Typical forms of an attracted armature relay are
shown in Figure B1.1. Movement of the armature causes contact (c) Solenoid relay
closure or opening, the armature either carrying a moving contact
that engages with a fixed one, or causes a rod to move that
brings two contacts together. It is very easy to mount multiple
contacts in rows or stacks, and hence cause a single input to (d) Reed relay
actuate a number of outputs. The contacts can be made quite
robust and hence able to make, carry and break relatively large
currents under quite onerous conditions (highly inductive circuits).
This is still a significant advantage of this type of relay that Figure B1.1:
ensures its continued use. Typical attracted armature relays

Relay Technology
2. Electromechanical relays B1
The energising quantity can be either an a.c. or a d.c. current. Some applications require the use of a polarised relay. This can
If an a.c. current is used, means must be provided to prevent be simply achieved by adding a permanent magnet to the basic
the chatter that would occur from the flux passing through zero electromagnet. Both self-reset and bi-stable forms can be
every half cycle. A common solution to the problem is to split achieved. Figure.B1.2 shows the basic construction. One possible
the magnetic pole and provide a copper loop round one half. example of use is to provide very fast operating times for a single
The flux change is now phase-shifted in this pole, so that at no contact, speeds of less than 1ms being possible.
time is the total flux equal to zero. Conversely, for relays energised
using a d.c. current, remanent flux may prevent the relay from
releasing when the actuating current is removed. This can be Armature
avoided by preventing the armature from contacting the

electromagnet by a non-magnetic stop, or constructing the
electromagnet using a material with very low remanent flux
properties. Core
Operating speed, power consumption and the number and type

of contacts required are a function of the design. The typical
attracted armature relay has an operating speed of between
Permanent
100ms and 400ms, but reed relays (whose use spanned a magnet
relatively short period in the history of protection relays) with S N
light current contacts can be designed to have an operating

Coil
time of as little as 1msec. Operating power is typically 0.05-0.2
watts, but could be as large as 80 watts for a relay with several
heavy-duty contacts and a high degree of resistance to Figure B1.2:
mechanical shock. Typical polarised relay
3. Static relays
The term ‘static’ implies that the relay has no moving parts. A number of design problems had to be solved with static
This is not strictly the case for a static relay, as the output relays. In particular, the relays generally require a reliable
contacts are still generally attracted armature relays. In a source of d.c. power and measures to prevent damage to
protection relay, the term ‘static’ refers to the absence of vulnerable electronic circuits had to be devised. Substation
moving parts to create the relay characteristic. environments are particularly hostile to electronic circuits due
to electrical interference of various forms that are commonly
Introduction of static relays began in the early 1960’s. Their
found (e.g. switching operations and the effect of faults).
design is based on the use of analogue electronic devices
While it is possible to arrange for the d.c. supply to be
instead of coils and magnets to create the relay characteristic.
generated from the measured quantities of the relay, this has
Early versions used discrete devices such as transistors and
the disadvantage of increasing the burden on the CT’s or
diodes in conjunction with resistors, capacitors, inductors, etc.,
VT’s, and there will be a minimum primary current or voltage
but advances in electronics enabled the use of linear and
below which the relay will not operate. This directly affects
digital integrated circuits in later versions for signal processing
the possible sensitivity of the relay. So provision of an
and implementation of logic functions. While basic circuits may
independent, highly reliable and secure source of relay power
be common to a number of relays, the packaging was still
supply was an important consideration. To prevent maloperation
essentially restricted to a single protection function per case,
or destruction of electronic devices during faults or switching
while complex functions required several cases of hardware
operations, sensitive circuitry is housed in a shielded case
suitably interconnected. User programming was restricted to
to exclude common mode and radiated interference. The
the basic functions of adjustment of relay characteristic curves.
devices may also be sensitive to static charge, requiring
They therefore can be viewed in simple terms as an analogue
special precautions during handling, as damage from this
electronic replacement for electromechanical relays, with some
cause may not be immediately apparent, but become apparent
additional flexibility in settings and some saving in space
later in the form of premature failure of the relay. Therefore,
requirements. In some cases, relay burden is reduced, making
radically different relay manufacturing facilities are required
for reduced CT/VT output requirements.
compared to electromechanical relays. Calibration and repair

Relay Technology
B1 3. Static relays
is no longer a task performed in the field without specialised

equipment. Figure B1.3 shows the circuit board for a simple
static relay. An example of static relay is shown in Figure B1.4.
Figure B1.3: Figure B1.4:

Circuit board of static relay Example of static relay
4. Digital relays
Digital protection relays introduced a step change in technology. than the static relay equivalent. However, the extra time is not
Microprocessors and microcontrollers replaced analogue circuits significant in terms of overall tripping and possible effects of
used in static relays to implement relay functions. Early examples power system stability. An example of a digital relay is shown
began to be introduced into service around 1980. However, such in Figure B1.5.
technology has been completely superseded by numerical relays.
Compared to static relays, digital relays introduce Analogue to
Digital (A/D) conversion of all measured analogue quantities
and use a microprocessor to implement the protection algorithm.
The microprocessor may use some kind of counting technique,
or use the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) to implement the
algorithm. However, the typical microprocessors used have
limited processing capacity and memory compared to that
provided in numerical relays. The functionality tends therefore
to be limited and restricted largely to the protection function
itself. Additional functionality compared to that provided by an
electromechanical or static relay is usually available, typically
taking the form of a wider range of settings, and greater accuracy.
A communications link to a remote computer may also be
provided.
The limited power of the microprocessors used in digital relays
restricts the number of samples of the waveform that can be
measured per cycle. This, in turn, limits the speed of operation
of the relay in certain applications. Therefore, a digital relay for Figure B1.5:
a particular protection function may have a longer operation time Example of digital relays

Relay Technology
5. Numerical relays B1
The distinction between digital and numerical relay rests on points Figure B1.6 shows typical numerical relays, and a circuit board
of fine technical detail, and is rarely found in areas other than is shown in Figure B1.7. Figure B1.8 provides an illustration of
Protection. They can be viewed as natural developments of digital the savings in space possible on a HV feeder showing the space
relays as a result of advances in technology. Typically, they use requirement for relays with electromechanical and numerical
either a specialised digital signal processor (DSP) as the relay technology to provide the same functionality.
computational hardware or a high performance microcontroller,
together with the associated software tools. The input analogue
signals are converted into a digital representation and processed
according to the appropriate mathematical algorithm.
In addition, the continuing reduction in the cost of microprocessors
and related digital devices (memory, I/O, etc.) naturally leads to
an approach where a single item of hardware is used to provide
a range of functions (‘one-box solution’ approach). By using
multiple microprocessors to provide the necessary computational
performance, a large number of functions previously implemented
in separate items of hardware can now be included within a
single item. Table B1.1 provides a list of typical functions available,
while Table B1.2 summarises the advantages of a modern
numerical relay over the static equivalent.
Figure B1.6:
Typical numerical relays
Distance Protection (several schemes including user definable)
Overcurrent Protection (directional/non-directional)
Several Setting Groups for protection values
Switch-on-to-Fault Protection
Power Swing Blocking
Voltage Transformer Supervision
Negative Sequence Current Protection
Undervoltage Protection
Overvoltage Protection
CB Fail Protection
Fault Location
CT Supervision
VT Supervision
Check Synchronisation
Autoreclose
CB Condition Monitoring
CB State Monitoring
User-Definable Logic
Broken Conductor Detection
Measurement of Power System Quantities (Current, Voltage, etc.) Figure B1.7:
Fault/Event/Disturbance recorder Circuit board for numerical relay
Table B1.1:
Numerical distance relay features
Several setting groups

Wider range of parameter adjustment
Remote communications built in
Internal Fault diagnosis
Power system measurements available
Distance to fault locator
Disturbance recorder
Auxiliary protection functions (broken conductor, negative sequence,
etc.)
CB monitoring (state, condition)
User-definable logic
Backup protection functions in-built
Consistency of operation times - reduced grading margin Figure B1.8 :
Table B1.2: Space requirements of different relay technologies for same
Advantages of numerical protection relays over static functionality

Relay Technology
B1 5. Numerical relays
Because a numerical relay may implement the functionality that Safety and Reliability]) and the ability to download amended
used to require several discrete relays, the relay functions software into memory (possibly using a remote link for download).
(overcurrent, earth fault, etc.) are now referred to as being ‘relay Practical experience indicates that numerical relays are at least
elements’, so that a single relay (i.e. an item of hardware housed as reliable and have at least as good a record of availability as
in a single case) may implement several functions using several relays of earlier technologies. In addition relays are now available
relay elements. Each relay element will typically be a software that are certified for Safety Integrity Level 2.
routine or routines.
An overview of the concepts behind a numerical relay is presented
The argument against putting many features into one piece of in the following sections.
hardware centres on the issues of reliability and availability. A
5.1 Hardware architecture
failure of a numerical relay may cause many more functions to
be lost, compared to applications where different functions are The typical architecture of a numerical relay is shown in Figure
implemented by separate hardware items. Comparison of B1.9. It consists of one or more DSP microprocessors, some
reliability and availability between the two methods is complex, memory, digital and analogue input/output (I/O), and a power
as inter-dependency of elements of an application provided by supply. Where multiple processors are provided, it is usual for
separate relay elements needs to be taken into account. one of them to be dedicated to executing the protection relay
algorithms, while the remainder implements any associated logic
With the experience gained with static and digital relays, most
and handles the Human Machine Interface (HMI) interfaces. By
hardware failure mechanisms are now well understood and
organising the I/O on a set of plug-in printed circuit boards
suitable precautions taken at the design stage. Software problems
(PCBs), additional I/O up to the limits of the hardware/software
are minimised by rigorous use of software design techniques,
can be easily added. The internal communications bus links the
extensive prototype testing (see Chapter [E1: Type Testing, Offer
hardware and therefore is critical component in the design.
Default settings & Digital input values Analogue input signals

parameters language text Digital inputs
software code CPU code Coprocessor board
& data
Main processor board SRAM Opto-isolated
inputs
Flash
EPROM FPGA as interface FPGA CPU Input board Transformer Current
CPU
between main board & voltage
& coprocessor board inputs
CPU code & data Serial data bus
setting database (sample data)
data ADC
SRAM
RS232 Front
Parallel data bus
comms port
Present values Rear RS485
Timing communication
of all settings data
Parallel port
E2 PROM test port
Field voltage
Relay board Power supply
Front
board
LCD panel Watchdog
Battery contacts
IRIG - B board
backed-up
(optional) Power supply, rear comms, Power
SRAM Output relays
LEDs data, output relay status supply
Alarm, event, fault &

maintenance records Output relay contacts Power supply
(multiple voltages),
IRIG - B signal Fibre optic rear comms data
rear comms
port optional
Legend:
SRAM - Static Read Only Memory ADC - Analogue to Digital Converter
CPU - Central Processing Unit E 2 PROM - Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
IRIG-B - Time Synchronisation Signal EPROM - Electrically Programmable Read Only Memory
FPGA - Field Programmable Logic Array LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
Figure B1.9:
Relay modules and information flow

Relay Technology
5. Numerical relays B1
It must work at high speed, use low voltage levels and yet be
immune to conducted and radiated interference from the Actual signal
electrically noisy substation environment. Excellent shielding of
the relevant areas is therefore required. Digital inputs are optically
isolated to prevent transients being transmitted to the internal
circuitry. Analogue inputs are isolated using precision transformers Apparent signal
to maintain measurement accuracy while removing harmful

transients. Additionally, the input signals must be amplitude limited
Sample points
to avoid them exceeding the power supply voltages, as otherwise
the waveform will appear distorted, as shown in Figure B1.10.
Figure B1.11:
Analogue signals are converted to digital form using an A/D Signal aliasing problem
converter. The cheapest method is to use a single A/D converter,
preceded by a multiplexer to connect each of the input signals
X X X X 
Xs = 2  0 + 1 + X2 + 3 + 0 - 5 - X6 - 7 

8  2 2 2 2 
(a) Sine filter
Figure B1.10:
Signal distortion due to excessive amplitude
in turn to the converter. The signals may be initially input to a

number of simultaneous sample-and–hold circuits prior to
X X X X 
Xc = 2 X0 + 1 + 0 - 3 - X4 - 5 + 0 + 7 

multiplexing, or the time relationship between successive samples 8  2 2 2 2
must be known if the phase relationship between signals is
(b) Cosine filter
important. The alternative is to provide each input with a dedicated
A/D converter, and logic to ensure that all converters perform the
measurement simultaneously. Figure B1.12:
Digital filters
The frequency of sampling must be carefully considered, as the
Nyquist criterion applies:
fs ≥ 2 × fh
Gain Alias of fundamental
where: 1
fs = sampling frequency
fh = highest frequency of interest
If too low a sampling frequency is chosen, aliasing of the input
signal can occur (Figure B1.11), resulting in high frequencies
appearing as part of signal in the frequency range of interest.
Incorrect results will then be obtained. The solution is to apply
an anti-aliasing filter, coupled with an appropriate choice of
sampling frequency, to the analogue signal, so those frequency 0
components that could cause aliasing are filtered out. Digital f0 2f0 3f0 4f0 5f0 6f0 7f0 8f0 9f0
sine and cosine filters are used (Figure B1.12), with a frequency Frequency
response shown in Figure B1.13, to extract the real and imaginary

components of the signal.
Figure B1.13:
Filter frequency response

Relay Technology
B1 5. Numerical relays
Frequency tracking of the input signals is applied to adjust the d. auxiliary functions – software to implement other features
sampling frequency so that the desired number of samples/cycle offered in the relay – often structured as a series of modules
is always obtained. A modern numerical relay may sample each to reflect the options offered to a user by the manufacturer
analogue input quantity at between 16 and 48 samples per cycle.
5.3 Application software
All subsequent signal processing is carried out digitally in
The relevant software algorithm is then applied. Firstly, the values
software, final digital outputs use relays to provide isolation or
of the quantities of interest have to be determined from the
are sent via an external communications bus to other devices.
available information contained in the data samples. This is
5.2 Relay software conveniently done by the application of the Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT), and the result is magnitude and phase information
The software provided is commonly organised into a series of
for the selected quantity. This calculation is repeated for all of the
tasks, operating in real time. An essential component is the Real
quantities of interest. The quantities can then be compared with
Time Operating System (RTOS), whose function is to ensure that
the relay characteristic, and a decision made in terms of the
the other tasks are executed as and when required, on a priority
following:
basis.
a. value above setting – start timers, etc.
Other task software provided will naturally vary according to the
function of the specific relay, but can be generalised as follows: b. timer expired – action alarm/trip
a. system services software – this is akin to the BIOS of an c. value returned below setting – reset timers, etc.
ordinary PC, and controls the low-level I/O for the relay (i.e.
d. value below setting – do nothing
drivers for the relay hardware, boot-up sequence, etc.)
e. value still above setting – increment timer, etc.
b. HMI interface software – the high level software for
communicating with a user, via the front panel controls or Since the overall cycle time for the software is known, timers are
through a data link to another computer running suitable generally implemented as counters.
software, storage of setting data, etc.
c. application software – this is the software that defines the
protection function of the relay

Relay Technology
6. Additional features of numerical relays B1
The processor in a numerical relay is normally of sufficient 6.2 VT/CT supervision

processing capacity that calculation of the relay protection
If suitable VTs are used, supervision of the VT/CT supplies
function only occupies part of the processing capacity. The
can be made available. VT supervision is made more
excess capacity is therefore available to perform other
complicated by the different conditions under which there
functions. Of course, care must be taken never to load the
may be no VT signal – some of which indicate VT failure and
processor beyond capacity, for if this happens, the protection
some occur because of a power system fault having occurred.
algorithm will not complete its calculation in the required time
and the protection function will be compromised. CT supervision is carried out more easily, the general principle
being the calculation of a level of negative sequence current
Typical functions that may be found in a numerical relay
that is inconsistent with the calculated value of negative
besides protection functions are described in this section.
sequence voltage.
Note that not all functions may be found in a particular relay.
In common with earlier generations of relays, manufacturers, 6.3 CB control/state indication/condition monitoring
in accordance with their perceived market segmentation, will System operators will normally require knowledge of the state
offer different versions offering a different set of functions. of all circuit breakers under their control. The CB position-
Function parameters will generally be available for display on switch outputs can be connected to the relay digital inputs
the front panel of the relay and also via an external and hence provide the indication of state via the communications
communications port, but some by their nature may only be bus to a remote control centre.
available at one output interface.
Circuit breakers also require periodic maintenance of their
6.1 Measured values display operating mechanisms and contacts to ensure they will operate
This is perhaps the most obvious and simple function to when required and that the fault capacity is not affected
implement, as it involves the least additional processor time. adversely. The requirement for maintenance is a function of the
The values that the relay must measure to perform its protection number of trip operations, the cumulative current broken and
function have already been acquired and processed. It is the type of breaker. A numerical relay can record all of these
therefore a simple task to display them on the front panel, parameters and hence be configured to send an alarm when
and/or transmit as required to a remote computer/HMI station. maintenance is due. If maintenance is not carried out within
Less obvious is that a number of extra quantities may be able defined criteria (such as a pre-defined time or number of trips)
to be derived from the measured quantities, depending on after maintenance is required, the CB can be arranged to trip
the input signals available. These might include: and lockout, or inhibit certain functions such as auto-reclose.
a. sequence quantities (positive, negative, zero) As the numerical relay is monitoring the state of the breaker
it can also detect a failure of the breaker to open or close
b. power, reactive power and power factor when requested. This information can then be used to alarm
c. energy (kWh, kvarh) and to provide signals to other devices upstream to trip.
d. max. demand in a period (kW, kvar; average and peak Finally, as well as tripping the CB as required under fault
values) conditions, it can also be arranged for a digital output to be
used for CB closure, so that separate CB close control circuits
e. harmonic quantities can be eliminated.
f. frequency 6.4 Disturbance recorder
g. temperatures/RTD status The relay memory requires a certain minimum number of
h. motor start information (start time, total no. of starts/ cycles of measured data to be stored for correct signal
reaccelerations, total running time) processing and detection of events. The memory can easily
be expanded to allow storage of a greater time period of
i. distance to fault
input data, both analogue and digital, plus the state of the
The accuracy of the measured values can only be as good relay outputs. It then has the capability to act as a disturbance
as the accuracy of the transducers used (VTs CTs, A/D recorder for the circuit being monitored, so that by freezing
converter, etc.). As CTs and VTs for protection functions may the memory at the instant of fault detection or trip, a record
have a different accuracy specification to those for metering of the disturbance is available for later download and analysis.
functions, such data may not be sufficiently accurate for tariff It may be inconvenient to download the record immediately,
purposes. However, it will be sufficiently accurate for an so facilities may be provided to capture and store a number
operator to assess system conditions and make appropriate of disturbances. In industrial and small distribution networks,
decisions. this may be all that is required. In transmission networks, it
may be necessary to provide a single recorder to monitor a
number of circuits simultaneously, and in this case, a separate
disturbance recorder will still be required.

Relay Technology
B1 6. Additional features of numerical relays
6.5 Time synchronisation This problem can be overcome by the provision within the
relay of a number of setting groups, only one of which is in
Disturbance records and data relating to energy consumption
use at any one time. Changeover between groups can be
require time tagging to serve any useful purpose. Although
achieved from a remote command from the operator, or
an internal clock will normally be present, this is of limited
possibly through the programmable logic system. This may
accuracy and use of this clock to provide time information
obviate the need for duplicate relays to be fitted with some
may cause problems if the disturbance record has to be
form of switching arrangement of the inputs and outputs
correlated with similar records from other sources to obtain
depending on network configuration. The operator will also
a complete picture of an event. Many numerical relays have
have the ability to remotely program the relay with a group of
the facility for time synchronisation from an external clock.
settings if required.
The standard normally used is an IRIG-B signal, which may
be derived from a number of sources, the latest being from 6.8 Conclusions
a GPS satellite system.
The provision of extra facilities in numerical relays may avoid
6.6 Programmable logic the need for other measurement/control devices to be fitted
in a substation. A trend can therefore be discerned in which
Logic functions are well suited to implementation using
protection relays are provided with functionality that in the
microprocessors. The implementation of logic in a relay is
past has been provided using separate equipment. The
not new, as functions such as intertripping and auto-reclose
protection relay no longer performs a basic protection function;
require a certain amount of logic. However, by providing a
but is becoming an integral and major part of a substation
substantial number of digital I/O and making the logic capable
automation scheme. The choice of a protection relay rather
of being programmed using suitable off-line software, the
than some other device is logical, as the protection relay is
functionality of such schemes can be enhanced and/or
probably the only device that is virtually mandatory on circuits
additional features provided. For instance, an overcurrent
of any significant rating. Thus, the functions previously carried
relay at the receiving end of a transformer feeder could use
out by separate devices such as bay controllers, discrete
the temperature inputs provided to monitor transformer winding
metering transducers and similar devices are now found in
temperature and provide alarm/trip facilities to the operator/
a protection relay. It is now possible to implement a substation
upstream relay, eliminating the need for a separate winding
automation scheme using numerical relays as the principal
temperature relay. This is an elementary example, but other
or indeed only hardware provided at bay level. As the power
advantages are evident to the relay manufacturer – different
of microprocessors continues to grow and pressure on
logic schemes required by different Utilities, etc., no longer
operators to reduce costs continues, this trend will probably
need separate relay versions or some hard-wired logic to
continue, one obvious development being the provision of
implement, reducing the cost of manufacture. It is also easier
RTU facilities in designated relays that act as local concentrators
to customise a relay for a specific application and eliminate
of information within the overall network automation scheme.
other devices that would otherwise be required.
6.7 Provision of setting groups
Historically, electromechanical and static relays have been
provided with only one group of settings to be applied to the
relay. Unfortunately, power systems change their topology
due to operational reasons on a regular basis. (e.g. supply
from normal/ emergency generation). The different
configurations may require different relay settings to maintain
the desired level of network protection (since, for the above
example, the fault levels will be significantly different on parts
of the network that remain energised under both conditions).

Relay Technology
7. Numerical relay issues B1
The introduction of numerical relays replaces some of the 7.2 Relay data management
issues of previous generations of relays with new ones. Some
A numerical relay usually provides many more features than
of the new issues that must be addressed are as follows:
a relay using static or electromechanical technology. To use
a. software version control these features, the appropriate data must be entered into the
memory of the relay. Users must also keep a record of all of
b. relay data management
the data, in case of data loss within the relay, or for use in
c. testing and commissioning system studies, etc. The amount of data per numerical relay
may be 10-50 times that of an equivalent electromechanical
7.1 Software version control
relay, to which must be added the possibility of user-defined
Numerical relays perform their functions by means of software. logic functions. The task of entering the data correctly into a
The process used for software generation is no different in numerical relay becomes a much more complex task than
principle to that for any other device using real-time software, previously, which adds to the possibility of a mistake being
and includes the difficulties of developing code that is error- made. Similarly, the amount of data that must be recorded is
free. Manufacturers must therefore pay particular attention to much larger, giving rise potentially to problems of storage.
the methodology used for software generation and testing to
The problems have been addressed by the provision of
ensure that as far as possible, the code contains no errors.
software to automate the preparation and download of relay
However, it is virtually impossible to perform internal tests that
setting data from a portable computer connected to a
cover all possible combinations of external effects, etc., and
communications port of the relay. As part of the process, the
therefore it must be accepted that errors may exist. In this
setting data can be read back from the relay and compared
respect, software used in relays is no different to any other
with the desired settings to ensure that the download has
software, where users accept that field use may uncover
been error-free. A copy of the setting data (including user
errors that may require changes to the software. Obviously,
defined logic schemes where used) can also be stored on
type testing can be expected to prove that the protection
the computer, for later printout and/or upload to the users
functions implemented by the relay are carried out properly,
database facilities.
but it has been known for failures of rarely used auxiliary
functions to occur under some conditions. More advanced software is available to perform the above
functions from an Engineering Computer in a substation
Where problems are discovered in software subsequent to
automation scheme.
the release of a numerical relay for sale, a new version of the
software may be considered necessary. This process then 7.3 Relay testing and commissioning
requires some form of software version control to be
The testing of relays based on software is of necessity radically
implemented to keep track of:
different from earlier generations of relays. The topic is dealt
a. the different software versions in existence with in detail in Chapter "Relay Testing and Commissioning",
but it can be mentioned here that site commissioning is usually
b. the differences between each version
restricted to the in-built software self-check and verification
c. the reasons for the change that currents and voltages measured by the relay are correct.
d. relays fitted with each of the versions Problems revealed by such tests require specialist equipment
to resolve, and hence field policy is usually on a repair-by-
With an effective version control system, manufacturers are replacement basis.
able to advise users in the event of reported problems if the
problem is a known software related problem and what
remedial action is required. With the aid of suitable software
held by a user, it may be possible to download the new software
version instead of requiring a visit from a service engineer.

B2
Current and Voltage
Transformers
Chapter
B2
Current and Voltage
Transformers
1. Introduction 107
2. Electromagnetic voltage transformers 107
3. Capacitor voltage transformers 111
4. Current transformers 113
5. Novel instrument transformers 121

Current and Voltage Transformers
B2 1. Introduction
Whenever the values of voltage or current in a power circuit are 1.1 Measuring transformers
too high to permit convenient direct connection of measuring
Voltage and current transformers for low primary voltage or
instruments or relays, coupling is made through transformers.
current ratings are not readily distinguishable; for higher ratings,
Such 'measuring' transformers are required to produce a scaled
dissimilarities of construction are usual. Nevertheless the
down replica of the input quantity to the accuracy expected for
differences between these devices lie principally in the way they
the particular measurement; this is made possible by the high
are connected into the power circuit. Voltage transformers are
efficiency of the transformer. The performance of measuring
much like small power transformers, differing only in details of
transformers during and following large instantaneous changes
design that control ratio accuracy over the specified range of
in the input quantity is important, in that this quantity may depart
output. Current transformers have their primary windings
from the sinusoidal waveform. The deviation may consist of a
connected in series with the power circuit, and so also in series
step change in magnitude, or a transient component that persists
with the system impedance. The response of the transformer is
for an appreciable period, or both. The resulting effect on
radically different in these two modes of operation.
instrument performance is usually negligible, although for
precision metering a persistent change in the accuracy of the
transformer may be significant.
However, many protection systems are required to operate during
the period of transient disturbance in the output of the measuring 1/1 Rp Lp Rs Ls
transformers that follows a system fault. The errors in transformer
output may abnormally delay the operation of the protection, or
cause unnecessary operations. The functioning of such
Ze Burden
transformers must, therefore, be examined analytically.
It can be shown that the transformer can be represented by the
equivalent circuit of Figure B2.1, where all quantities are referred
to the secondary side.
When the transformer is not 1/1 ratio, this condition can be
represented by energising the equivalent circuit with an ideal
Figure B2.1:
transformer of the given ratio but having no losses.
Equivalent circuit of transformer
2. Electromagnetic voltage transformers
In the shunt mode, the system voltage is applied across the 2.1 Errors
input terminals of the equivalent circuit of Figure B2.1. The
The ratio and phase errors of the transformer can be calculated
vector diagram for this circuit is shown in Figure B2.2.
using the vector diagram of Figure B2.2.
The secondary output voltage Vs is required to be an accurate The ratio error is defined as:
scaled replica of the input voltage Vp over a specified range
of output. To this end, the winding voltage drops are made ( K n Vs )
×100%
small, and the normal flux density in the core is designed to Vp
be well below the saturation density, in order that the exciting
current may be low and the exciting impedance substantially where:
constant with a variation of applied voltage over the desired Kn is the nominal ratio
operating range including some degree of overvoltage. These Vp is the primary voltage
limitations in design result in a VT for a given burden being Vs is the secondary voltage
much larger than a typical power transformer of similar rating.
If the error is positive, the secondary voltage exceeds the
The exciting current, in consequence, will not be as small,
nominal value. The turns ratio of the transformer need not be
relative to the rated burden, as it would be for a typical power
equal to the nominal ratio; a small turns compensation will
transformer.
usually be employed, so that the error will be positive for low
burdens and negative for high burdens.

2. Electromagnetic voltage transformers B2
The phase error is the phase difference between the reversed

secondary and the primary voltage vectors. It is positive when
the reversed secondary voltage leads the primary vector.
Requirements in this respect are set out in IEC 60044-2.
All voltage transformers are required to comply with one of
the classes in Table B2.1.
0.8 - 1.2 x rated voltage

Accuracy 0.25 - 1.0 x rated burden at 0.8pf
Class
phase displacement
voltage ratio error (%)
(minutes)
0.1 +/- 0.1 +/- 5
0.2 +/- 0.2 +/- 10
0.5 +/- 0.5 +/- 20
Im 1.0 +/- 1.0 +/- 40
3.0 +/- 3.0 not specified
Table B2.1:
Measuring voltage transformer error limits
For protection purposes, accuracy of voltage measurement

may be important during fault conditions, as the system voltage
might be reduced by the fault to a low value. Voltage
transformers for such types of service must comply with the
extended range of requirements set out in Table B2.2.
Figure B2.2: 0.8 - 1.2 x rated voltage

Vector diagram for voltage transformer Accuracy 0.25 - 1.0 x rated burden at 0.8pf
Class
phase displacement
voltage ratio error (%)
(minutes)
Vp = primary applied
= primary voltage
applied voltage 3P +/- 3.0 +/- 120
= primary induced e.m.f.
Ep = primary induced output
= secondary e.m.f. voltage 6P +/- 6.0 +/- 240
Vs = flux output voltage

= secondary
= exciting current Table B2.2:
F = flux = magnetizing component Additional limits for protection voltage transformers
= iron loss component
Ie = exciting current
= phase angle error
= secondary burden angle
Im = magnetizing component
= primary resistance voltage drop 2.2 Voltage factors
Ic = iron loss component
= primary reactance voltage drop
The quantity Vf in Table B2.3 is an upper limit of operating
Ф = phase angle errorresistance voltage drop
= secondary voltage, expressed in per unit of rated voltage. This is important
= secondary reactance voltage drop for correct relay operation and operation under unbalanced
Ѳ = secondary burden
= secondary angle
current fault conditions on unearthed or impedance earthed systems,
Ip Rp = load component
= primary resistance voltage of primary
drop current resulting in a rise in the voltage on the healthy phases.
= primary current
Ip Xp = primary reactance voltage drop Voltage factors, with the permissible duration of the maximum
voltage, are given in Table B2.3.
Is Rs = secondary resistance voltage drop
Is Xs = secondary reactance voltage drop
Is = secondary current
I pL = load component of primary current
Ip = primary current

B2 2. Electromagnetic voltage transformers
b. insulation – designed for the system impulse voltage level.

Voltage Primary winding connection / Insulation volume is often larger than the winding volume
Time rating
factor Vf system earthing conditions
c. mechanical design – not usually necessary to withstand
Between lines in any network. short-circuit currents. Must be small to fit the space available
1.2 continuous Between transformer star point within switchgear
and earth in any network.
Three-phase units are common up to 36kV but for higher
1.2 continuous
Between line and earth in an voltages single-phase units are usual. Voltage transformers for
1.5 30 s effectively earthed network . medium voltage circuits will have dry type insulation, but for
high and extra high voltage systems, oil immersed units are
1.2 continuous Between line and earth in a general. Resin encapsulated designs are in use on systems
non-effectively earthed neutral
up to 33kV. Figure B2.3 shows a typical voltage transformer.
1.9 30 s system with automatic earth fault
tripping.
1.2 continuous Between line and earth in an

isolated neutral system without
automatic earth fault tripping, or in
1.9 8 hours a resonant earthed system
without automatic earth fault
tripping.
Table B2.3:
Voltage transformers: Permissible duration of maximum
voltage
2.3 Secondary leads

Voltage transformers are designed to maintain the specified
accuracy in voltage output at their secondary terminals. To
maintain this if long secondary leads are required, a distribution Figure B2.3:
box can be fitted close to the VT to supply relay and metering Typical voltage transformer
burdens over separate leads. If necessary, allowance can be
made for the resistance of the leads to individual burdens
when the particular equipment is calibrated. 2.6 Residually connected voltage transformers
2.4 Protection of voltage transformers The three voltages of a balanced system summate to zero,
but this is not so when the system is subject to a single-phase
Voltage Transformers can be protected by H.R.C. fuses on
earth fault. The residual voltage of a system is measured by
the primary side for voltages up to 66kV. Fuses do not usually
connecting the secondary windings of a VT in 'broken delta'
have a sufficient interrupting capacity for use with higher
as shown in Figure B2.4.
voltages. Practice varies, and in some cases protection on
the primary is omitted.
The secondary of a Voltage Transformer should always be A B C
protected by fuses or a miniature circuit breaker (MCB). The
device should be located as near to the transformer as
possible. A short circuit on the secondary circuit wiring will
produce a current of many times the rated output and cause
excessive heating. Even where primary fuses can be fitted,
these will usually not clear a secondary side short circuit
because of the low value of primary current and the minimum
practicable fuse rating.
Residual
2.5 Construction voltage
The construction of a voltage transformer takes into account

the following factors:
a. output – seldom more than 200-300VA.
Figure B2.4:
Cooling is rarely a problem
Residual voltage connection

2. Electromagnetic voltage transformers B2
The output of the secondary windings connected in broken 2.8 Cascade voltage transformers
delta is zero when balanced sinusoidal voltages are applied,
The capacitor VT Section 3 was developed because of the
but under conditions of unbalance a residual voltage equal
high cost of conventional electromagnetic voltage transformers
to three times the zero sequence voltage of the system will
but, as shown in Section 3.2, the frequency and transient
be developed.
responses are less satisfactory than those of the orthodox
In order to measure this component, it is necessary for a zero voltage transformers. Another solution to the problem is the
sequence flux to be set up in the VT, and for this to be possible cascade VT (Figure B2.5).
there must be a return path for the resultant summated flux.
The conventional type of VT has a single primary winding,
The VT core must have one or more unwound limbs linking
the insulation of which presents a great problem for voltages
the yokes in addition to the limbs carrying windings. Usually
above about 132kV. The cascade VT avoids these difficulties
the core is made symmetrically, with five limbs, the two
by breaking down the primary voltage in several distinct and
outermost ones being unwound. Alternatively, three single-
separate stages.
phase units can be used. It is equally necessary for the primary
winding neutral to be earthed, for without an earth, zero The complete VT is made up of several individual transformers,
sequence exciting current cannot flow. the primary windings of which are connected in series, as
shown in Figure B2.5. Each magnetic core has primary
A VT should be rated to have an appropriate voltage factor
windings (P) on two opposite sides. The secondary winding
as described in Section 2.2 and Table B2.3, to cater for the
(S) consists of a single winding on the last stage only. Coupling
voltage rise on healthy phases during earth faults.
windings (C) connected in pairs between stages, provide low
Voltage transformers are often provided with a normal star- impedance circuits for the transfer of load ampere-turns
connected secondary winding and a broken-delta connected between stages and ensure that the power frequency voltage
‘tertiary’ winding. Alternatively the residual voltage can be is equally distributed over the several primary windings.
extracted by using a star/broken-delta connected group of
The potentials of the cores and coupling windings are fixed
auxiliary voltage transformers energised from the secondary
at definite values by connecting them to selected points on
winding of the main unit, providing the main voltage transformer
the primary windings. The insulation of each winding is
fulfils all the requirements for handling a zero sequence voltage
sufficient for the voltage developed in that winding, which is
as previously described. The auxiliary VT must also be suitable
a fraction of the total according to the number of stages. The
for the appropriate voltage factor. It should be noted that third
individual transformers are mounted on a structure built of
harmonics in the primary voltage wave, which are of zero
insulating material, which provides the interstage insulation,
sequence, summate in the broken-delta winding.
accumulating to a value able to withstand the full system
2.7 Transient performance voltage across the complete height of the stack.
Transient errors cause few difficulties in the use of conventional
voltage transformers, although some do occur. Errors are
A
generally limited to short time periods following the sudden
application or removal of voltage from the VT primary.
If a voltage is suddenly applied, an inrush transient will occur, C
as with power transformers. The effect will, however, be less P
severe than for power transformers because of the lower flux

C
density for which the VT is designed. If the VT is rated to have
a fairly high voltage factor, little inrush effect will occur. An
error will appear in the first few cycles of the output current C
in proportion to the inrush transient that occurs.
P - primary winding
When the supply to a voltage transformer is interrupted, the C C - coupling windings
core flux will not readily collapse; the secondary winding will S - secondary winding
tend to maintain the magnetising force to sustain this flux,

C
and will circulate a current through the burden which will
decay more or less exponentially, possibly with a superimposed
n
audio-frequency oscillation due to the capacitance of the S
a
winding. Bearing in mind that the exciting quantity, expressed N
in ampere-turns, may exceed the burden, the transient current
may be significant.
Figure B2.5:
Schematic diagram of typical cascade voltage transformer

B2 3. Capacitor voltage transformers
The entire assembly is contained in a hollow cylindrical Capacitors C1 and C2 cannot conveniently be made to close
porcelain housing with external weather-sheds; the housing tolerances, so tappings are provided for ratio adjustment,
is filled with oil and sealed, an expansion bellows being either on the transformer T, or on a separate auto-transformer
included to maintain hermetic sealing and to permit expansion in the secondary circuit. Adjustment of the tuning inductance
with temperature change. L is also needed; this can be done with tappings, a separate
tapped inductor in the secondary circuit, by adjustment of
The size of electromagnetic voltage transformers for the higher
gaps in the iron cores, or by shunting with variable capacitance.
voltages is largely proportional to the rated voltage; the cost
A simplified equivalent circuit is shown in Figure B2.7.
tends to increase at a disproportionate rate. The capacitor
voltage transformer (CVT) is often more economic.
This device is basically a capacitance potential divider. As
with resistance-type potential dividers, the output voltage is
seriously affected by load at the tapping point. The capacitance
divider differs in that its equivalent source impedance is
capacitive and can therefore be compensated by a reactor
connected in series with the tapping point. With an ideal
reactor, such an arrangement would have no regulation and
could supply any value of output.
A reactor possesses some resistance, which limits the output
that can be obtained. For a secondary output voltage of 110V,
the capacitors would have to be very large to provide a useful
output while keeping errors within the usual limits. The solution
Figure B2.7:
is to use a high secondary voltage and further transform the - tuning inductance
Simplified equivalent circuit of capacitor voltage transformer
output to the normal value using a relatively inexpensive - primary winding resistance (plus losses)
- exciting impedance of transformer T
electromagnetic transformer. The successive stages of this
- secondary circuit resistance
reasoning are indicated in Figure B2.6. It will be seen that
- burden the basic difference between Figure B2.7
impedance
and Figure B2.1 (in Figure presence of C and L. At normal
is the6.6)
frequency when C and L are in resonance and therefore
cancel, the circuit behaves in a similar manner to a conventional
VT. At other frequencies, however, a reactive component exists
C1 which modifies the errors.
Standards generally require a CVT used for protection to
conform to accuracy requirements of Table B2.2 within a
C2 C2
frequency range of 97-103% of nominal. The corresponding
frequency range of measurement CVT’s is much less, 99%-
101%, as reductions in accuracy for frequency deviations
(a) Basic capacitive (b) Capacitive divider with
voltage divider inductive compensation outside this range are less important than for protection
applications.
L = tuning inductance
Rp = primary winding resistance (plus losses)
Ze = exciting impedance of transformer T
Rs = secondary circuit resistance
(c) Divider with E/M VT output stage Zb = burden impedance
C = C1 + C2 (in Figure B2.6)
3.1 Voltage protection of auxiliary capacitor
Figure B2.6:
Development of capacitor voltage transformer If the burden impedance of a CVT were to be short-circuited,
the rise in the reactor voltage would be limited only by the
reactor losses and possible saturation, that is, to Q × E2 where
There are numerous variations of this basic circuit. The E2 is the no-load tapping point voltage and Q is the amplification
inductance L may be a separate unit or it may be incorporated factor of the resonant circuit. This value would be excessive
in the form of leakage reactance in the transformer T . and is therefore limited by a spark gap connected across the

3. Capacitor voltage transformers B2
auxiliary capacitor. The voltage on the auxiliary capacitor is components, oscillations at fundamental frequency or at other
higher at full rated output than at no load, and the capacitor sub-harmonics or multiples of the supply frequency are
is rated for continuous service at this raised value. The spark possible but the third sub-harmonic is the one most likely to
gap will be set to flash over at about twice the full load voltage. be encountered.
The effect of the spark gap is to limit the short-circuit current The principal manifestation of such an oscillation is a rise in
which the VT will deliver and fuse protection of the secondary output voltage, the r.m.s. value being perhaps 25%-50% above
circuit has to be carefully designed with this point in mind. the normal value; the output waveform would generally be of
Facilities are usually provided to earth the tapping point, either the form shown in Figure B2.8.
manually or automatically, before making any adjustments to
tappings or connections.
3.2 Transient behaviour of capacitor voltage
transformers
A CVT is a series resonant circuit. The introduction of the
electromagnetic transformer between the intermediate voltage
Amplitude
and the output makes possible further resonance involving
Time
the exciting impedance of this unit and the capacitance of
the divider stack. When a sudden voltage step is applied,
oscillations in line with these different modes take place, and
will persist for a period governed by the total resistive damping
that is present. Any increase in resistive burden reduces the
time constant of a transient oscillation, although the chance
of a large initial amplitude is increased.
Figure B2.8:
For very high-speed protection, transient oscillations should Typical secondary voltage waveform with third sub-harmonic
be minimised. Modern capacitor voltage transformers are oscillation.
much better in this respect than their earlier counterparts, but
high performance protection schemes may still be adversely
affected. Such oscillations are less likely to occur when the circuit losses
are high, as is the case with a resistive burden, and can be
3.3 Ferro-resonance
prevented by increasing the resistive burden. Special anti-
The exciting impedance Ze of the auxiliary transformer T and ferro-resonance devices that use a parallel-tuned circuit are
the capacitance of the potential divider together form a sometimes built into the VT. Although such arrangements help
resonant circuit that will usually oscillate at a sub-normal to suppress ferro-resonance, they tend to impair the transient
frequency. If this circuit is subjected to a voltage impulse, the response, so that the design is a matter of compromise.
resulting oscillation may pass through a range of frequencies.
Correct design will prevent a CVT that supplies a resistive
If the basic frequency of this circuit is slightly less than one-
burden from exhibiting this effect, but it is possible for non-
third of the system frequency, it is possible for energy to be
linear inductive burdens, such as auxiliary voltage transformers,
absorbed from the system and cause the oscillation to build
to induce ferro- resonance. Auxiliary voltage transformers for
up. The increasing flux density in the transformer core reduces
use with capacitor voltage transformers should be designed
the inductance, bringing the resonant frequency nearer to
with a low value of flux density that prevents transient voltages
the one-third value of the system frequency.
from causing core saturation, which in turn would bring high
The result is a progressive build-up until the oscillation exciting currents.
stabilises as a third sub-harmonic of the system, which can
be maintained indefinitely. Depending on the values of

B2 4. Current transformers
The primary winding of a current transformer is connected 4.1 Errors

in series with the power circuit and the impedance is negligible
The general vector diagram (Figure B2.2) can be simplified
compared with that of the power circuit. The power system
by the omission of details that are not of interest in current
impedance governs the current passing through the primary
measurement; see Figure B2.10. Errors arise because of the
winding of the current transformer. This condition can be
shunting of the burden by the exciting impedance. This uses
represented by inserting the load impedance, referred through
a small portion of the input current for exciting the core,
the turns ratio, in the input connection of Figure B2.1.
reducing the amount passed to the burden. So Is = Ip - Ie,
This approach is developed in Figure B2.9, taking the numerical where Ie is dependent on Ze, the exciting impedance and
example of a 300/5A CT applied to an 11kV power system. the secondary e.m.f. Es, given by the equation
The system is considered to be carrying rated current (300A)
Es = Is (Zs + Zb), where:
and the CT is feeding a burden of 10VA.
Zs = the self-impedance of the secondary winding, which
A study of the final equivalent circuit of Figure B2.9(c), taking
can generally be taken as the resistive component Rs
note of the typical component values, will reveal all the
only
properties of a current transformer. It will be seen that:
Zb = the impedance of the burden
a. the secondary current will not be affected by change of
the burden impedance over a considerable range
b. the secondary circuit must not be interrupted while the
primary winding is energised. The induced secondary
e.m.f. under these circumstances will be high enough to
present a danger to life and insulation
c. the ratio and phase angle errors can be calculated easily
if the magnetising characteristics and the burden Ip
impedance are known
=21.2Ω
=6350V 300/5A Burden

10VA
= Secondary induced e.m.f. = Secondary resistance voltage drop
= Secondary output voltage = Secondary reactance voltage drop
(a) Physical arrangement = Primary current = Exciting current
= Secondary current = Component of in phase with
= Phase angle error = Component of in quadrature with
= Flux
=21.2Ω 0.2Ω
'Ideal' Figure B2.10:

CT
=6350V j50Ω 150Ω 0.4Ω Vector diagram for current transformer (referred to secondary)
r=300/5
4.1.1 Current or ratio error

(b) Equivalent circuit of (a)
This is the difference in magnitude between Ip and Is and is
equal to Ir, the component of Ie which is in phase with Is.
=21.2Ω x 602
=76.2kΩ 0.2Ω 4.1.2 Phase error
This is represented by Iq, the component of Ie in quadrature
=6350V x 60 j50Ω 150Ω 0.4Ω
with Is and results in the phase error Ф.
=381kV
The values of the current error and phase error depend on
the phase displacement between Is and Ie, but neither current
(c) Equivalent circuit, all quantities referred nor phase error can exceed the vectorial error Ie. It will be
to secondary side seen that with a moderately inductive burden, resulting in Is
and Ie approximately in phase, there will be little phase error
and the exciting component will result almost entirely in ratio
Figure B2.9: error.
Derivation of equivalent circuit of a current transformer

4. Current transformers B2
A reduction of the secondary winding by one or two turns is 4.3 Accuracy limit current of protection current
often used to compensate for this. For example, in the CT transformers
corresponding to Figure B2.9, the worst error due to the use
Protection equipment is intended to respond to fault conditions,
of an inductive burden of rated value would be about 1.2%.
and is for this reason required to function at current values
If the nominal turns ratio is 2:120, removal of one secondary
above the normal rating. Protection class current transformers
turn would raise the output by 0.83% leaving the overall current
must retain a reasonable accuracy up to the largest relevant
error as -0.37%.
current. This value is known as the ‘accuracy limit current’
For lower value burden or a different burden power factor, the and may be expressed in primary or equivalent secondary
error would change in the positive direction to a maximum of terms. The ratio of the accuracy limit current to the rated
+0.7% at zero burden; the leakage reactance of the secondary current is known as the 'accuracy limit factor'.
winding is assumed to be negligible. No corresponding
The accuracy class of protection current transformers is
correction can be made for phase error, but it should be noted
shown in Table B2.5.
that the phase error is small for moderately reactive burdens.
4.2 Composite error
Phase Composite
This is defined in IEC 60044-1 as the r.m.s. value of the Current error
displacement error at rated
at rated
difference between the ideal secondary current and the actual Class at rated accuracy
primary
secondary current. It includes current and phase errors and current limit primary
current (%)
(minutes) current (%)
the effects of harmonics in the exciting current. The accuracy
class of measuring current transformers is shown in Table 5P +/-1 +/-60 5
B2.4. 10P +/-3 10
Standard accuracy limit factors are 5, 10, 15, 20, and 30
(a) Limits of error accuracy for error classes 0.1 - 1.0

Table B2.5:
+/- Percentage current (ratio) error Protection CT error limits for classes 5P and 10P
Accuracy
% current
class
5 20 100 120
Even though the burden of a protection CT is only a few VA
0.1 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.1 at rated current, the output required from the CT may be
0.2 0.75 0.35 0.2 0.2 considerable if the accuracy limit factor is high. For example,
0.5 1.5 0.75 0.5 0.5 with an accuracy limit factor of 30 and a burden of 10VA, the
1 3 1.5 1.0 1.0 CT may have to supply 9000VA to the secondary circuit.
Alternatively, the same CT may be subjected to a high burden.
+/- Phase displacement (minutes) For overcurrent and earth fault protection, with elements of
Accuracy similar VA consumption at setting, the earth fault element of
% current
class
an electromechanical relay set at 10% would have 100 times
5 20 100 120
the impedance of the overcurrent elements set at 100%.
0.1 15 8 5 5
Although saturation of the relay elements somewhat modifies
0.2 30 15 10 10 this aspect of the matter, it will be seen that the earth fault
0.5 90 45 30 30 element is a severe burden, and the CT is likely to have a
1 180 90 60 60 considerable ratio error in this case. So it is not much use
applying turns compensation to such current transformers;
it is generally simpler to wind the CT with turns corresponding
(b) Limits of error for error classes 3 and 5
to the nominal ratio.
+/- Percentage current (ratio) error
Accuracy Current transformers can be used for the dual duty of
% current
class measurement and protection. They will then need to be rated
50 120 according to a class selected from both Tables B2.4 and B2.5.
3 3 5 The applied burden is the total of instrument and relay
5 3 5 burdens. Turns compensation may well be needed to achieve
the measurement performance. Measurement ratings are
expressed in terms of rated burden and class, for example
Table B2.4:
CT error classes 15VA Class 0.5. Protection ratings are expressed in terms of
rated burden, class, and accuracy limit factor, for example
10VA Class 10P10.

4.4 Class PX current transformers 4.5.1 Wound primary type

The classification of Table B2.5 is only used for overcurrent This type of CT has conventional windings formed of copper
protection. Class PX is the definition in IEC 60044-1 for the wire wound round a core. It is used for auxiliary current
quasi-transient current transformers formerly covered by transformers and for many low or moderate ratio current
Class X of BS 3938, commonly used with unit protection transformers used in switchgear of up to 11kV rating.
schemes.
4.5.2 Bushing or bar primary type
Guidance was given in the specifications to the application
Many current transformers have a ring-shaped core, sometimes
of current transformers to earth fault protection, but for this
built up from annular stampings, but often consisting of a
and for the majority of other protection applications it is better
single length of strip tightly wound to form a close-turned
to refer directly to the maximum useful e.m.f. that can be
spiral. The distributed secondary winding forms a toroid which
obtained from the CT. In this context, the 'knee-point' of the
should occupy the whole perimeter of the core, a small gap
excitation curve is defined as 'that point at which a further
being left between start and finish leads for insulation.
increase of 10% of secondary e.m.f. would require an
increment of exciting current of 50%’; see Figure B2.11. Such current transformers normally have a single concentrically
placed primary conductor, sometimes permanently built into
the CT and provided with the necessary primary insulation. In
other cases, the bushing of a circuit breaker or power
transformer is used for this purpose. At low primary current
+ 10% ratings it may be difficult to obtain sufficient output at the desired
accuracy. This is because a large core section is needed to
provide enough flux to induce the secondary e.m.f. in the small
number of turns, and because the exciting ampere-turns form
+ 50% a large proportion of the primary ampere-turns available. The
effect is particularly pronounced when the core diameter has
been made large so as to fit over large EHV bushings.
4.5.3 Core-balance current transformers
Exciting voltage
The core-balance CT (or CBCT) is normally of the ring type,

through the centre of which is passed cable that forms the
primary winding. An earth fault relay, connected to the
secondary winding, is energised only when there is residual
current in the primary system.
The advantage in using this method of earth fault protection
lies in the fact that only one CT core is used in place of three
phase CTs whose secondary windings are residually connected.
In this way the CT magnetising current at relay operation is
reduced by approximately three-to-one, an important
consideration in sensitive earth fault relays where a low effective
Exciting current setting is required. The number of secondary turns does not
need to be related to the cable rated current because no
secondary current would flow under normal balanced conditions.
Figure B2.11: This allows the number of secondary turns to be chosen such
Definition of knee-point of excitation curve as to optimise the effective primary pick-up current.
Core-balance transformers are normally mounted over a cable
Design requirements for current transformers for general at a point close up to the cable gland of switchgear or other
protection purposes are frequently laid out in terms of knee- apparatus. Physically split cores ('slip-over' types) are normally
point e.m.f., exciting current at the knee-point (or some other available for applications in which the cables are already
specified point) and secondary winding resistance. Such made up, as on existing switchgear.
current transformers are designated Class PX.
4.5.4 Summation current transformers
4.5 CT winding arrangements
The summation arrangement is a winding arrangement used
A number of CT winding arrangements are used. These are in a measuring relay or on an auxiliary current transformer to
described in the following sections. give a single-phase output signal having a specific relationship
to the three-phase current input.

4.5.5 Air-gapped current transformers

These are auxiliary current transformers in which a small air
gap is included in the core to produce a secondary voltage
output proportional in magnitude to current in the primary
winding. Sometimes termed 'transactors' and 'quadrature
current transformers', this form of current transformer has
been used as an auxiliary component of unit protection
schemes in which the outputs into multiple secondary circuits
must remain linear for and proportioned to the widest practical
range of input currents.
4.6 Line current CTs
CT's for measuring line currents fall into one of three types.
4.6.1 Overdimensioned CTs
Overdimensioned CTs are capable of transforming fully offset
fault currents without distortion. In consequence, they are
very large, as can be deduced from Section 4.10. They are
prone to errors due to remanent flux arising, for instance, from
the interruption of heavy fault currents.
Figure B2.12:
4.6.2 Anti-remanence CTs Typical modern CT for use on MV systems
This is a variation of the overdimensioned current transformer
and has small gap(s) in the core magnetic circuit, thus
also occurs, particularly in wound primary current transformers,
reducing the possible remanent flux from approximately 90%
although its precise measurement is difficult. The non-linear
of saturation value to approximately 10%. These gap(s) are
nature of the CT magnetic circuit makes it difficult to assess
quite small, for example 0.12mm total, and so the excitation
the definite ohmic value representing secondary leakage
characteristic is not significantly changed by their presence.
reactance.
However, the resulting decrease in possible remanent core
flux confines any subsequent d.c. flux excursion, resulting It is, however, normally accepted that a current transformer
from primary current asymmetry, to within the core saturation is of the low reactance type provided that the following
limits. Errors in current transformation are therefore significantly conditions prevail:
reduced when compared with those with the gapless type of
a. the core is of the jointless ring type (including spirally
core.
wound cores)
Transient protection current transformers are included in IEC
b. the secondary turns are substantially evenly distributed
60044-6 as types TPX, TPY and TPZ and this specification
along the whole length of the magnetic circuit
gives good guidance to their application and use.
c. the primary conductor(s) passes through the approximate
4.6.3 Linear current transformers
centre of the core aperture or, if wound, is approximately
The 'linear' current transformer constitutes an even more evenly distributed along the whole length of the magnetic
radical departure from the normal solid core CT in that it circuit
incorporates an appreciable air gap, for example 7.5-10mm.
d. flux equalising windings, where fitted to the requirements
As its name implies the magnetic behaviour tends to
of the design, consist of at least four parallel-connected
linearisation by the inclusion of this gap in the magnetic circuit.
coils, evenly distributed along the whole length of the
However, the purpose of introducing more reluctance into the
magnetic circuit, each coil occupying one quadrant
magnetic circuit is to reduce the value of magnetising
reactance. This in turn reduces the secondary time- constant Alternatively, when a current transformer does not obviously
of the CT, thereby reducing the overdimensioning factor comply with all of the above requirements, it may be proved
necessary for faithful transformation. Figure B2.12 shows a to be of low- reactance where:
typical modern CT for use on MV systems.
e. the composite error, as measured in the accepted way,
4.7 Secondary winding impedance does not exceed by a factor of 1.3 that error obtained
directly from the V-I excitation characteristic of the
As a protection CT may be required to deliver high values of
secondary winding
secondary current, the secondary winding resistance must
be made as low as practicable. Secondary leakage reactance

4.8 Secondary current rating most important, and were first observed in connection with
balanced forms of protection, which were liable to operate
The choice of secondary current rating is determined largely
unnecessarily when short-circuit currents were suddenly
by the secondary winding burden and the standard practice
established.
of the user. Standard CT secondary current ratings are 5A
and 1A. The burden at rated current imposed by digital or 4.10.1 Primary current transient
numerical relays or instruments is largely independent of the
The power system, neglecting load circuits, is mostly inductive,
rated value of current. This is because the winding of the
so that when a short circuit occurs, the fault current that flows
device has to develop a given number of ampere-turns at
is given by:
rated current, so that the actual number of turns is inversely
Ep
proportional to the current, and the impedance of the winding
varies inversely with the square of the current rating. However,
ip =
R + ω L
2 2 2
[ sin (ω t + β − α ) + sin ( α − β ) e − ( R L) t
]

electromechanical or static earth-fault relays may have a
...Equation B2.1
burden that varies with the current tapping used.
where:
Interconnection leads do not share this property, however,
being commonly of standard cross-section regardless of Ep = peak system e.m.f.
rating. Where the leads are long, their resistance may be R = system resistance
appreciable, and the resultant burden will vary with the square
of the current rating. For example a CT lead run of the order L = system inductance
of 200 metres, a typical distance for outdoor EHV switchgear, β = initial phase angle governed by instant of fault
could have a loop resistance of approximately 3 Ω. occurrence
The CT lead VA burden if a 5A CT is used would be 75VA, to α = system power factor angle
which must be added the relay burden (up to perhaps 10VA
for an electromechanical relay, but less than 1VA for a numerical = tan-1ωL/R
relay), making a total of 85VA. Such a burden would require The first term of Equation B2.1 represents the steady state
the CT to be very large and expensive, particularly if a high alternating current, while the second is a transient quantity
accuracy limit factor were also applicable. responsible for displacing the waveform asymmetrically.
With a 1A CT secondary rating, the lead burden is reduced
Ep is the steady state peak current Ip.
to 3VA, so that with the same relay burden the total becomes
R +ω L
2 2 2
a maximum of 13VA. This can be provided by a CT of normal
dimensions, resulting in a saving in size, weight and cost. The maximum transient occurs when sin = ( α - β ) = 1; no
Hence modern CT’s tend to have secondary windings of 1A other condition need be examined.
rating. However, where the primary rating is high, say above
2000A, a CT of higher secondary rating may be used, to limit So:
the number of secondary turns. In such a situation secondary   π 
i p = I p  sin ω t −  + e − (
R L) t

ratings of 5A may be used. In extreme cases a 20A secondary   2  ...Equation B2.2
CT may be used, followed by a 20/1 interposing CT.
When the current is passed through the primary winding of a
4.9 Rated short-time current
current transformer, the response can be examined by replacing
A current transformer is overloaded while system short-circuit the CT with an equivalent circuit as shown in Figure B2.9(b).
currents are flowing and will be short-time rated. Standard
As the 'ideal' CT has no losses, it will transfer the entire function,
times for which the CT must be able to carry rated short-time
and all further analysis can be carried out in terms of equivalent
currents (STC) are 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 or 3.0 seconds.
secondary quantities ( is and Is ). A simplified solution is
A CT with a particular short-time current/ time rating will carry obtainable by neglecting the exciting current of the CT.
a lower current for a longer time in inverse proportion to the
The flux developed in an inductance is obtained by integrating
square of the ratio of current values. The converse, however,
the applied e.m.f. through a time interval:
cannot be assumed, and larger current values than the S.T.C.
t2
rating are not permissible for any duration unless justified by
φ= K ∫t vdt ...Equation B2.3
a new rating test to prove the dynamic capability. 1
4.10 Transient response of a current transformer

For the CT equivalent circuit, the voltage is the drop on the
When accuracy of response during very short intervals is burden resistance Rb.
being studied, it is necessary to examine what happens when
the primary current is suddenly changed. The effects are

Integrating for each component in turn, the steady state peak

flux is given by: 20
Flux (multiples of steady value)

3 π 2ω
π 16
φ A = KR b I s ∫ sin ωt − dt
π ω
2
12
KR b I s ...Equation B2.4
=
ω
8
The transient flux is given by: T = 0.06s
α 4
KR b I s L
φ B = KR b I s ∫ e − ( R L) t
dt =
0
R ...Equation B2.5
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2
Hence, the ratio of the transient flux to the steady state value
is: Time (seconds)
T - time constant of primary circuit
B wL X
= =
A R R
Figure B2.13:
where X and R are the primary system reactance and Response of a CT of infinite shunt impedance
resistance values. to transient asymmetric primary current
The CT core has to carry both fluxes, so that:

X ...Equation B2.6 Since a CT requires a finite exciting current to maintain a flux,
C = A + B = A 1+ it will not remain magnetised (neglecting hysteresis), and for
R
this reason a complete representation of the effects can only
The term (1+X/R) has been called the 'transient factor' (TF), be obtained by including the finite inductance of the CT in
the core flux being increased by this factor during the transient the calculation. The response of a current transformer to a
asymmetric current period. From this it can be seen that the ratio transient asymmetric current is shown in Figure B2.14.
of reactance to resistance of the power system is an important
feature in the study of the behaviour of protection relays.
Alternatively, L/R is the primary system time constant T, so
1.0
that the transient factor can be written:
0.9
ωL
=1 + = 1 + ωT
R 0.8
Amplitude of transient component
0.7
Again, fT is the time constant expressed in cycles of the a.c.
quantity T', so that: 0.6
TF = 1+2πf T = 1 + 2πT ' 0.5
This latter expression is particularly useful when assessing a 0.4

recording of a fault current, because the time constant in 0.3
cycles can be easily estimated and leads directly to the
transient factor. 0.2
0.1
For example, a system time constant of three cycles results
in a transient factor of (1+6 π ), or 19.85; that is, the CT would 0
Time
be required to handle almost twenty times the maximum flux
-0.1
produced under steady state conditions.
= Transient exciting current
The above theory is sufficient to give a general view of the = Secondary output current to burden
problem. In this simplified treatment, no reverse voltage is = 0.06s
= 0.12s
applied to demagnetise the CT, so that the flux would build
up as shown in Figure B2.13.
Figure B2.14:
Response of a current transformer to a transient asymmetric
current

Let: increment of flux from any possible remanent value positive

or negative. The formula would then be reasonable provided
is = the nominal secondary current
the applied current transient did not produce saturation
i's = the actual secondary output current
It will be seen that a precise calculation of the flux and
ie = the exciting current excitation current is not feasible; the value of the study is to
explain the observed phenomena. The asymmetric (or d.c.)
then:
component can be regarded as building up the mean flux
is = ie + i's ...Equation B2.7 over a period corresponding to several cycles of the sinusoidal
also, component, during which period the latter component
produces a flux swing about the varying 'mean level'
di e ...Equation B2.8 established by the former. The asymmetric flux ceases to
Le = R b i's
dt increase when the exciting current is equal to the total
asymmetric input current, since beyond this point the output
whence: current, and hence the voltage drop across the burden
resistance, is negative. Saturation makes the point of equality
di e R i R i
+ b e = b s between the excitation current and the input occur at a flux
dt Le Le ...Equation B2.9 level lower than would be expected from linear theory.
which gives for the transient term When the exponential component drives the CT into saturation,
the magnetising inductance decreases, causing a large
T
ie = I1
T1 − T
(
e −t T − e −t T
1
) increase in the alternating component ie.
The total exciting current during the transient period is of the
where: form shown in Figure B2.15 and the corresponding resultant
T = primary system time constant L/R distortion in the secondary current output, due to saturation,
is shown in Figure B2.16.
T1 = CT secondary circuit time constant Le/Rb
I1 = prospective peak secondary current
4.10.2 Practical conditions
Practical conditions differ from theory for the following reasons:
Exciting current
a. no account has been taken of secondary leakage or burden

inductance. This is usually small compared with Lc so that
it has little effect on the maximum transient flux
b. iron loss has not been considered. This has the effect of
reducing the secondary time constant, but the value of
the equivalent resistance is variable, depending upon both Time
the sine and exponential terms. Consequently, it cannot
be included in any linear theory and is too complicated for
Figure B2.15:
a satisfactory treatment to be evolved
Typical exciting current of CT during transient asymmetric
c. the theory is based upon a linear excitation characteristic. input current
This is only approximately true up to the knee-point of the
excitation curve. A precise solution allowing for non-linearity
Primary current
is not practicable. Solutions have been sought by replacing referred to
the excitation curve with a number of chords; a linear secondary
Current
analysis can then be made for the extent of each chord

The above theory is sufficient, however, to give a good insight
Time
into the problem and to allow most practical issues to be decided. 0
d. the effect of hysteresis, apart from loss as discussed under Secondary current
(b) above, is not included. Hysteresis makes the inductance Residual flux = 0
Resistive burden
different for flux build up and decay, so that the secondary Power system T.C. = 0.05s
time constant is variable. Moreover, the ability of the core
to retain a 'remanent' flux means that the value of B
developed in Equation B2.5 has to be regarded as an Figure B2.16:
Distortion in secondary current due to saturation

The presence of residual flux varies the starting point of the 4.11 Harmonics during the transient period
transient flux excursion on the excitation characteristic.
When a CT is required to develop a high secondary e.m.f.
Remanence of like polarity to the transient will reduce the
under steady state conditions, the non-linearity of the excitation
value of symmetric current of given time constant which the
impedance causes some distortion of the output waveform;
CT can transform without severe saturation; conversely, reverse
such a waveform will contain, in addition to the fundamental
remanence will greatly increase the ability of a CT to transform
current, odd harmonics only.
transient current.
When, however, the CT is saturated uni-directionally while
If the CT were the linear non-saturable device considered in
being simultaneously subjected to a small a.c. quantity, as in
the analysis, the sine current would be transformed without
the transient condition discussed above, the output will contain
loss of accuracy. In practice the variation in excitation
both odd and even harmonics. Usually the lower numbered
inductance caused by transferring the centre of the flux swing
harmonics are of greatest amplitude and the second and
to other points on the excitation curve causes an error that
third harmonic components may be of considerable value.
may be very large. The effect on measurement is of little
This may affect relays that are sensitive to harmonics.
consequence, but for protection equipment that is required
to function during fault conditions, the effect is more serious. 4.12 Test windings
The output current is reduced during transient saturation,
On-site conjunctive testing of current transformers and the
which may prevent the relays from operating if the conditions
apparatus that they energise is often required. It may be
are near to the relay setting. This must not be confused with
difficult, however, to pass a suitable value of current through
the increased r.m.s. value of the primary current due to the
the primary windings, because of the scale of such current
asymmetric transient, a feature which sometimes offsets the
and in many cases because access to the primary conductors
increase ratio error. In the case of balanced protection, during
is difficult. Additional windings may be provided to make such
through faults the errors of the several current transformers
tests easier, these windings usually being rated at 10A. The
may differ and produce an out-of-balance quantity, causing
test winding will inevitably occupy appreciable space and
unwanted operation.
the CT will cost more. This fact should be weighed against
the convenience achieved; very often it will be found that the
tests in question can be replaced by alternative procedures.

B2 5. Novel instrument transformers
The preceding types of instrument transformers have all been Optical converters and optical glass fibre channels implement
based on electromagnetic principles using a magnetic core. the link between the sensor and the low-voltage output. The
There are now available several new methods of transforming fundamental difference between an instrument transducer
the measured quantity using optical and mass state methods. and a conventional instrument transformer is the electronic
interface needed for its operation, providing a low power
5.1 Optical instrument transducers
signal (voltage or current or digital) for connection to protection
The key features of a freestanding optical instrument transducer devices. This type of interface is not practical for 1 or 5A
can be illustrated with the functional diagram of Figure B2.17. conventional inputs. This interface is required both for the
sensing function and for adapting the new sensor technology
to that of the secondary output in low current, low voltage or
digital communication format (IEC 61850-9-2).
HV
Bus Non-conventional optical transducers lend themselves to
smaller, lighter devices where the overall size and power rating
Insulating of the unit does not have any significant bearing on the size
function
Sensor
Sensing and the complexity of the sensor. Small, lightweight insulator
function Instrument structures may be tailor-made to fit optical sensing devices
E/O converter Transformer
+ as an integral part of the insulator. Additionally, the non-linear
Communication effects and electromagnetic interference problems in the
secondary wiring of conventional VTs and CTs are minimised.
Optical link
(fibre optics) Optical transducers can be separated into two families: firstly
Electronic the hybrid transducers, making use of conventional electrical
interface Communication circuit techniques to which are coupled various optical
+
O/E converter converter systems, and secondly the ‘all-optical’ transducers
that are based on fundamental, optical sensing principles.
Secondary
output 5.1.1 Optical sensor concepts
Certain optical sensing media (glass, crystals, plastics) show
a sensitivity to electric and magnetic fields and some properties
of a probing light beam can be altered when passing through
Figure B2.17: them. One simple optical transducer description is given in
Functional diagram of optical instrument transducer Figure. B2.18.
'Odd' polariser
input output
polariser polariser
optical optical
fibre fibre sensing
light
detector
in out
light source
45 ∞ 90 ∞
optical
zero field level
1.0 sensing 1.0
medium
+
0.5 0.5
0 0
t t
reference modulated
light input light input
intensity intensity
Figure. B2.18:
Schematic representation of the concepts behind the optical sensing of varying electric and magnetic fields

5. Novel instrument transformers B2
Consider the case of a beam of light passing through a pair of current measuring device the sensitive element is either located
polarising filters. If the input and output polarising filters have their free in the magnetic field (Figure B2.19(a)) or it can be immersed
axes rotated 45° from each other, only half the light will come in a field-shaping magnetic ‘gap’ (Figure B2.19(b)). In the case of
through. The reference light input intensity is maintained constant a voltage-sensing device (Figure B2.20) the same alternatives
over time. Now if these two polarising filters remain fixed and a exist, this time for elements that are sensitive to electric fields. The
third polarising filter is placed in between them, a random rotation possibility exists of combining both sensors within a single housing,
of this middle polariser either clockwise or counter-clockwise will thus providing both a CT and VT within a single compact housing
be monitored as a varying or modulated light output intensity at that gives rise to space savings within a substation.
the light detector.
When a block of optical sensing material (glass or crystal) is
immersed in a varying magnetic or electric field, it plays the role I AC line current
of the ‘odd’ polariser. Changes in the magnetic or electric field in

which the optical sensor is immersed are monitored as a varying
Optical fibre
intensity of the probing light beam at the light detector. The light Magneto-optic sensor
output intensity fluctuates around the zero-field level equal to 50% Magnetic Optical fibre
of the reference light input. This modulation of the light intensity field
due to the presence of varying fields is converted back to time- (a) 'Free-field' type
varying currents or voltages. AC line current
A transducer uses a magneto-optic effect sensor for optical current I
measuring applications. This reflects the fact that the sensor is not
basically sensitive to a current but to the magnetic field generated
by this current. Although ‘all-fibre’ approaches are feasible, most Optical fibres
Magnetic field
commercially available optical current transducers rely on a bulk-
Gapped
glass sensor. Most optical voltage transducers, on the other hand, magnetic core
Magneto-optic sensor
rely on an electro-optic effect sensor. This reflects the fact that the (b) 'Field-shaping' type
sensor used is sensitive to the imposed electric field.

5.1.2 Hybrid transducers Figure B2.19:
Optical current sensor based on the magnetic properties of
The hybrid family of non-conventional instrument transducers can optical materials
be divided into two types: those with active sensors and those
with passive sensors. The idea behind a transducer with an active
sensor is to change the existing output of the conventional 'Floating'
electrode
instrument transformer into an optically isolated output by adding
an optical conversion system (Figure B2.18). This conversion
system may require a power supply of its own: this is the active Electro-optic
sensor
AC line
sensor type. The use of an optical isolating system serves to de- voltage
Optical fibres
couple the instrument transformer output secondary voltages and
currents from earthed or galvanic links. Thus the only link that
remains between the control room and the switchyard is a fibre
Reference
optic cable. (a) 'Free-field' type electrode
Another type of hybrid non-conventional instrument transformer Reference

electrode
is achieved by retrofitting a passive optical sensing medium into
a conventional ‘hard-wire secondary’ instrument transformer. This
can be termed as a passive hybrid type since no power supply Light
AC line path
of any kind is needed at the secondary level. voltage Electro-optic
sensor
5.1.3 ‘All-optical’ transducers
These instrument transformers are based entirely on optical
Reference
materials and are fully passive. The sensing function is achieved electrode Optical
directly by the sensing material and a simple fibre optic cable (b) 'Field shaping' type
fibres
running between the base of the unit and the sensor location
provides the communication link.
Figure B2.20:
The sensing element is made of an optical material that is positioned Optical voltage sensor based on the electrical properties of
in the electric or magnetic field to be sensed. In the case of a optical materials

In all cases there is an optical fibre that channels the probing Similar to conventional instrument transformers there are ‘live
reference light from a source into the medium and another tank’ and ‘dead tank’ optical transducers. Typically, current
fibre that channels the light back to analysing circuitry. In transducers take the shape of a closed loop of light-transparent
sharp contrast with a conventional free-standing instrument material, fitted around a straight conductor carrying the line
transformer, the optical instrument transformer needs an current (Figure B2.22). In this case a bulk-glass sensor unit
electronic interface module in order to function. Therefore its is depicted (Figure B2.22(a)), along with an ‘all-optical’ sensor
sensing principle (the optical material) is passive but its example, as shown in Figure B2.22(b).
operational integrity relies on the interface that is powered in
the control room (Figure B2.21).
High voltage
sensor assembly
Fibre optic cable
Optical
interface
unit
Junction
box
AC/DC source
Figure B2.21:
Novel instrument transducer concept requiring an electronic interface in the control room
Electro-optic sensor
(bulk-glass transducer) AC line current
Dome
I
Electro-optic sensor
('all-fibre' transducer)
AC Bulk-glass
H1 H2 sensing element
line I I
current
Light in
Optical fibres
Light out
Fibre optic Liquid /solid/ gaseous
cable conduit internal insulation (a) Glass sensor approach
AC line current
I
Insulator
column Light in
Fibre junction box

Optical fibres
Sensor #1 Fibre
optic Light out
Sensor #2 cables Fibre
sensing element
(b) 'All-fibre' sensor concept
Figure B2.22:
Conceptual design of a double-sensor optical CT

5. Novel instrument transformers B2
Light detectors are basically very sensitive devices and the

sensing material can thus be selected in such a way as to
scale-up readily for larger currents. ‘All-optical’ voltage
transducers however do not lend themselves easily for
extremely high line voltages. Two concepts using a 'full-voltage'
sensor are shown in Figure B2.23. Conductor
Although ‘all-optical’ instrument transformers were first

introduced 10-15 years ago, there are still only a few in service
nowadays. Figure B2.24 shows a field installation of a
combined optical CT/VT.
(a) 'Live tank' (b) 'Dead tank'
Figure B2.23:
Optical voltage transducer concepts, using a ‘full-voltage’ sensor
Figure B2.24:
Field installation of a combined optical CT/VT

5.2 Other sensing systems

There are a number of other sensing systems that can be
Electrical to optical
used, as described below. converter/transmitter
I
5.2.1 Zero-flux (Hall Effect) current transformer Burden
In this case the sensing element is a semi-conducting wafer
that is placed in the gap of a magnetic concentrating ring.
This type of transformer is also sensitive to d.c. currents. The Optical
fibres
transformer requires a power supply that is fed from the line
or from a separate power supply. The sensing current is
typically 0.1% of the current to be measured. In its simplest Current transformer
shape, the Hall effect voltage is directly proportional to the
magnetising current to be measured. For more accurate and
more sensitive applications, the sensing current is fed through
a secondary, multiple-turn winding, placed around the Figure B2.26:
magnetic ring in order to balance out the gap magnetic field. Design principle of a hybrid magnetic current transformer
This zero-flux, or null-flux, version allows very accurate current fitted with an optical transmitter
measurements in both d.c. and high-frequency applications.
A schematic representation of the sensing part is shown in
Figure B2.25.
5.2.3 Rogowski coils
The Rogowski coil is based on the principle of an air-cored
current transformer with a very high load impedance. The
Magnetic concentrator secondary winding is wound on a toroid of insulation material.
I (gapped magnetic core)
In most cases the Rogowski coil will be connected to an
amplifier, in order to deliver sufficient power to the connected
measuring or protection equipment and to match the input
impedance of this equipment. The Rogowski coil requires
i integration of the magnetic field and therefore has a time and
phase delay whilst the integration is completed. This can be
V
corrected for within a digital protection relay. The schematic
representation of the Rogowski coil sensor is shown in Figure
i B2.27.
Sensing current
Sensing element
Air core
toroidal coil
Figure B2.25:
Conceptual design of a Hall-effect current sensing element Electrical to optical
fitted in a field-shaping gap converter
5.2.2 Hybrid magnetic-optical sensor Optical

fibres
This type of transformer is mostly used in applications such
as series capacitive compensation of long transmission lines,
where a non-grounded measurement of current is required.
In this case, several current sensors are required on each Current carrying
phase in order to achieve capacitor surge protection and conductor
balance. The preferred solution is to use small toroidally wound
magnetic core transformers connected to fibre optic isolating
systems. These sensors are usually active sensors in the
Figure B2.27:
sense that the isolated systems require a power supply. This Schematic representation of a Rogowski coil, used for current
is illustrated in Figure B2.26. sensing

B2

B3
Industrial & Commercial
Power System Protection
Chapter
Industrial & Commercial

B3
Power System Protection
1. Introduction 129
2. Busbar arrangement 129
3. Discrimination 130
4. HRC fuses 131
5. Industrial circuit breakers 132
6. Protection relays 135
7. Co-ordination problems 137
8. Fault current contribution from induction motors 139
9. Automatic changeover systems 140
10. Voltage and phase reversal protection 141
11. Power factor correction and protection of capacitors 141
12. Examples 146
13. References 150

Industrial & Commercial Power System Protection
B3 1. Introduction
As industrial and commercial operations processes and plants plant see Chapter [C8: Generator and Generator-Transformer
have become more complex and extensive (Figure B3.1), the Protection] for further details).
requirement for improved reliability of electrical power supplies
Industrial systems typically comprise numerous cable feeders
has also increased. The potential costs of outage time following
and transformers. Chapter [C7: Transformer and Transformer-
a failure of the power supply to a plant have risen dramatically
Feeder Protection] covers the protection of transformers and
as well. The introduction of automation techniques into industry
Chapters [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults]
and commerce has naturally led to a demand for the deployment
and [C2: Line Differential Protection], the protection of feeders.
of more power system automation, to improve reliability and
efficiency.
The protection and control of industrial power supply systems
must be given careful attention. Many of the techniques that
have been evolved for EHV power systems may be applied to
lower voltage systems also, but typically on a reduced scale.
However, industrial systems have many special problems that
have warranted individual attention and the development of
specific solutions.
Many industrial plants have their own generation installed.
Sometimes it is for emergency use only, feeding a limited number
of busbars and with limited capacity. This arrangement is often
adopted to ensure safe shutdown of process plant and personnel
safety. In other plants, the nature of the process allows production
of a substantial quantity of electricity, perhaps allowing export
of any surplus to the public supply system – at either sub-
transmission or distribution voltage levels. Plants that run
generation in parallel with the public supply distribution network
are often referred to as co-generation or embedded generation.
Special protection arrangements may be demanded for Figure B3.1:
the point of connection between the private and public Utility Large modern industrial plant
2. Busbar arrangement
The arrangement of the busbar system is obviously very

important, and it can be quite complex for some very large HV supply HV supply
industrial systems. However, in most systems a single busbar 1 2
divided into sections by a bus-section circuit breaker is

common, as illustrated in Figure B3.2. Main and standby
drives for a particular item of process equipment will be fed
Transformer Transformer
from different sections of the switchboard, or sometimes from 1 2
different switchboards.
2 out of 3
The main power system design criterion is that single outages mechanical or
electrical interlock
on the electrical network within the plant will not cause loss
of both the main and standby drives simultaneously.
Considering a medium sized industrial supply system as
shown in Figure B3.3, with duplicated supplies and
transformers. Certain important loads are segregated and
fed from ‘Essential Services Board(s)’ or ‘Emergency Boards’
distributed throughout the plant. This enables maximum
Figure B3.2:
utilisation of the standby generator facility. Typical switchboard configuration for an industrial plant

2. Busbar arrangement B3
A standby generator is usually of the turbo-charged diesel-

110kV
driven type. On detection of loss of incoming supply at any
switchboard with an emergency section, the generator is
* automatically started. The appropriate circuit breakers will
NO
33kV
close once the generating set is up to speed and rated voltage
to restore supply to the Essential Services sections of the
switchboards affected, provided that the normal incoming
supply is absent - for a typical diesel generator set, the
*
A B 6kV emergency supply would be available within 10-20 seconds
NO
from the start sequence command being issued.
EDG
The Essential Services Boards are used to feed equipment

NO
that is essential for the safe shut down, limited operation or
*
A B NC C 0.4kV
preservation of the plant and for the safety of personnel.
NO
A
NO
B This will cover process drives essential for safe shutdown,
6kV
venting systems, UPS loads feeding emergency lighting,
*
process control computers, etc. The emergency generator
NO may range in size from a single unit rated 20-30kW in a small
* NC B
plant up to several units of 2-10MW rating in a large oil refinery
A C
NO
0.4kV or similar plant. Large financial trading institutions may also
NO have standby power requirements of several MW to maintain
* NC
computer services.
0.4kV
A NO B C
Bus section C - Essential supplies
EDG - Emergency generator
* - Two out of three interlock
Figure B3.3:
Typical industrial power system
3. Discrimination
Protection equipment works in conjunction with switchgear.

For a typical industrial system, feeders and plant will be
protected mainly by circuit breakers of various types and by
fused contactors. Circuit breakers will have their associated
overcurrent and earth fault relays. A contactor may also be
equipped with a protection device (e.g. motor protection),
but associated fuses are provided to break fault currents in
excess of the contactor interrupting capability. The rating of
fuses and selection of relay settings is carried out to ensure
that discrimination is achieved – i.e. the ability to select and
isolate only the faulty part of the system.

B3 4. HRC fuses
The protection device nearest to the actual point of power Since the electromagnetic forces on busbars and connections
utilisation is most likely to be a fuse or a system of fuses and carrying short circuit current are related to the square of the
it is important that consideration is given to the correct current, it will be appreciated that ‘cut-off’ significantly reduces
application of this important device. the mechanical forces produced by the fault current and
which may distort the busbars and connections if not correctly
The HRC fuse is a key fault clearance device for protection
rated. A typical example of ‘cut-off’ current characteristics
in industrial and commercial installations, whether mounted
is illustrated in Figure B3.5.
in a distribution fuseboard or as part of a contactor or fuse-
switch. The latter is regarded as a vital part of LV circuit
protection, combining safe circuit making and breaking with
an isolating capability achieved in conjunction with the reliable 1000
short-circuit protection of the HRC fuse. Fuses combine the
characteristics of economy and reliability; factors that are
most important in industrial applications.
100 1250A
HRC fuses remain consistent and stable in their breaking 710A 800A
500A 630A
characteristics in service without calibration and maintenance. 400A
This is one of the most significant factors for maintaining fault 200A 315A
Cut off current (peak kA)

125A
clearance discrimination. Lack of discrimination through 80A
incorrect fuse grading will result in unnecessary disconnection 10
50A
of supplies, but if both the major and minor fuses are HRC 35A
25A
devices of proper design and manufacture, this need not 16A
endanger personnel or cables associated with the plant.
1.0 6A
4.1 Fuse characteristics 2A
The time required for melting the fusible element depends on

the magnitude of current. This time is known as the ‘pre-arcing’
0.1
time of the fuse. Vaporisation of the element occurs on melting
0.1 1.0 10 100 500
and there is fusion between the vapour and the filling powder
leading to rapid arc extinction. Prospective current (kA r.m.s. symmetrical)
Fuses have a valuable characteristic known as ‘cut-off’, illustrated

in Figure B3.4. When an unprotected circuit is subjected to a
Figure B3.5:
short circuit fault, the r.m.s. current rises towards a ‘prospective’ Typical fuse cut-off current characteristics
(or maximum) value. The fuse usually interrupts the short circuit
current before it can reach the prospective value, in the first
quarter to half cycle of the short circuit. The rising current is It is possible to use this characteristic during the design stage
interrupted by the melting of the fusible element, subsequently of a project to utilise equipment with a lower fault withstand
dying away to zero during the arcing period. rating downstream of the fuse, than would be the case if
‘cut-off’ was ignored. This may save on costs, but appropriate
documentation and maintenance controls are required
to ensure that only replacement fuses of very similar
Curve of asymmetrical
characteristics are used throughout the lifetime of the plant
prospective short-circuit
current concerned – otherwise a safety hazard may arise.
Current trace
4.2 Discrimination between fuses
Ip
Fuses are often connected in series electrically and it is
Time essential that they should be able to discriminate with each
Start of other at all current levels. Discrimination is obtained when the
short-circuit
larger (‘major’) fuse remains unaffected by fault currents that
Arcing are cleared by the smaller (‘minor’) fuse.
Pre-arcing time
time
The fuse operating time can be considered in two parts:
Total clearance time 1 Cycle
a. the time taken for fault current to melt the element, known
as the ‘pre-arcing time’
Figure B3.4: b. the time taken by the arc produced inside the fuse to
HRC fuse cut-off feature extinguish and isolate the circuit, known as the ‘arcing time’

4. HRC fuses B3
The total energy dissipated in a fuse during its operation Cables constructed using other insulating materials (e.g.
consists of ‘pre-arcing energy’ and ‘arc energy’. The values paper, XLPE) have no special requirements in this respect.
are usually expressed in terms of I2t, where I is the current
4.4 Effect of ambient temperature
passing through the fuse and t is the time in seconds.
Expressing the quantities in this manner provides an High ambient temperatures can influence the capability of
assessment of the heating effect that the fuse imposes on HRC fuses. Most fuses are suitable for use in ambient
associated equipment during its operation under fault temperatures up to 35 °C, but for some fuse ratings, derating
conditions. may be necessary at higher ambient temperatures.
Manufacturers’ published literature should be consulted for
To obtain positive discrimination between fuses, the total I2t
the de-rating factor to be applied.
value of the minor fuse must not exceed the pre-arcing I2t
value of the major fuse. In practice, this means that the major 4.5 Protection of motors
fuse will have to have a rating significantly higher than that of
The manufacturers’ literature should also be consulted when
the minor fuse, and this may give rise to problems of
fuses are to be applied to motor circuits. In this application,
discrimination. Typically, the major fuse must have a rating of
the fuse provides short circuit protection but must be selected
at least 160% of the minor fuse for discrimination to be
to withstand the starting current (possibly up to 8 times full
obtained.
load current) and also carry the normal full load current
4.3 Protection of cables by fuses continuously without deterioration. Tables of recommended
fuse sizes for both ‘direct on line’ and ‘assisted start’ motor
PVC cable is allowed to be loaded to its full nominal rating
applications are usually given. Examples of protection using
only if it has ‘close excess current protection’. This degree
fuses are given in Section 12.1.
of protection can be given by means of a fuse link having a
‘fusing factor’ not exceeding 1.5, where:
Minimum Fusing Current
Fusing factor =
Current Rating
5. Industrial circuit breakers
Some parts of an industrial power system are most effectively manually closed, electrically or manually opened switch housed
protected by HRC fuses, but the replacement of blown fuse in a moulded plastic casing. They are suitable for use on 230V
links can be particularly inconvenient in others. In these a.c. single-phase/400V a.c. three-phase systems and for d.c.
locations, circuit breakers are used instead, the requirement auxiliary supply systems, with current ratings of up to 125A.
being for the breaker to interrupt the maximum possible fault Contained within each unit is a thermal element, in which a
current successfully without damage to itself. In addition to bimetal strip will trip the switch when excessive current passes
fault current interruption, the breaker must quickly disperse through it. This element operates with a predetermined inverse-
the resulting ionised gas away from the breaker contacts, to time/current characteristic. Higher currents, typically those
prevent re-striking of the arc, and away from other live parts exceeding 3-10 times rated current, trip the circuit breaker
of equipment to prevent breakdown. The breaker, its cable or without intentional delay by actuating a magnetic trip overcurrent
busbar connections, and the breaker housing, must all be element. The operating time characteristics of MCBs are not
constructed to withstand the mechanical forces resulting from adjustable. European Standard EN 60898-2 defines the
the magnetic fields and internal arc gas pressure produced instantaneous trip characteristics, while the manufacturer can
by the highest levels of fault current to be encountered. define the inverse time thermal trip characteristic. Therefore,
a typical tripping characteristic does not exist. The maximum
The types of circuit breaker most frequently encountered in
a.c. breaking current permitted by the standard is 25kA.
industrial systems are described in the following sections.
Single-pole units may be coupled mechanically in groups to
5.1 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)
form 2, 3 or 4 pole units, when required, by assembly on to a
MCBs are small circuit breakers, both in physical size but more rail in a distribution board. The available ratings make MCBs
importantly, in ratings. The basic single pole unit is a small, suitable for industrial, commercial or domestic applications,

B3 5. Industrial circuit breakers
for protecting equipment such as cables, lighting and heating examination of the device. The standard permits a service
circuits, and also for the control and protection of low power breaking capacity of as little as 25% of the ultimate breaking
motor circuits. They may be used instead of fuses on individual capacity. While there is no objection to the use of MCCBs to
circuits, and they are usually ‘backed-up’ by a device of higher break short-circuit currents between the service and ultimate
fault interrupting capacity. values, the inspection required after such a trip reduces the
usefulness of the device in such circumstances. It is also clearly
Various accessory units, such as isolators, timers, and
difficult to determine if the magnitude of the fault current was
undervoltage or shunt trip release units, may be combined with
in excess of the service rating.
an MCB to suit the particular circuit to be controlled and
protected. When personnel or fire protection is required, a The time-delay characteristics of the magnetic or thermal timed
residual current device (RCD) may be combined with the MCB. trip, together with the necessity for, or size of, a back-up device
The RCD contains a miniature core balance current transformer varies with make and size of breaker. Some MCCBs are fitted
that embraces all of the phase and neutral conductors to with microprocessor-controlled programmable trip
provide sensitivity to earth faults within a typical range of 0.05% characteristics offering a wide range of such characteristics.
to 1.5% of rated current, dependent on the RCD selected. The Time–delayed overcurrent characteristics may not be the same
core balance CT energises a common magnetic trip actuator as the standard characteristics for dependent-time protection
for the MCB assembly. stated in IEC 60255-3. Hence, discrimination with other
protection must be considered carefully.
It is also possible to obtain current-limiting MCBs. These types
open prior to the prospective fault current being reached, and There can be problems where two or more MCBs or MCCBs are
therefore have similar properties to HRC fuses. It is claimed electrically in series, as obtaining selectivity between them may
that the extra initial cost is outweighed by lifetime savings in be difficult. There may be a requirement that the major device
replacement costs after a fault has occurred, plus the advantage should have a rating of k times the minor device to allow
of providing improved protection against electric shock if an discrimination, in a similar manner to fuses – the manufacturer
RCD is used. As a result of the increased safety provided by should be consulted as to value of k. Careful examination of
MCBs fitted with an RCD device, they are tending to replace manufacturers’ literature is always required at the design stage
fuses, especially in new installations. to determine any such limitations that may be imposed by particular
makes and types of MCCBs. An example of co-ordination between
5.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)
MCCBs, fuses and relays is given in Section 12.2.
These circuit breakers are broadly similar to MCBs but have
5.3 Air Circuit Breakers (ACBs)
the following important differences:
a. the maximum ratings are higher, with voltage ratings up Air circuit breakers are frequently encountered on industrial
to 1000V a.c./1200V d.c. Current ratings of 2.5kA systems rated at 3.3kV and below. Modern LV ACBs are
continuous/180kA r.m.s break are possible, dependent available in current ratings of up to 6.3kA with maximum
upon power factor breaking capacities in the range of 85kA-120kA r.m.s.,
depending on system voltage.
b. the breakers are larger, commensurate with the level of
ratings. Although available as single, double or triple pole This type of breaker operates on the principle that the arc
units, the multiple pole units have a common housing for produced when the main contacts open is controlled by
all the poles. Where fitted, the switch for the neutral circuit directing it into an arc chute. Here, the arc resistance is
is usually a separate device, coupled to the multi-pole increased and hence the current reduced to the point where
MCCB the circuit voltage cannot maintain the arc and the current
reduces to zero. To assist in the quenching of low current arcs,
c. the operating levels of the magnetic and thermal protection
an air cylinder may be fitted to each pole to direct a blast of
elements may be adjustable, particularly in the larger
air across the contact faces as the breaker opens, so reducing
MCCBs
contact erosion.
d. because of their higher ratings, MCCBs are usually
Air circuit breakers for industrial use are usually withdrawable
positioned in the power distribution system nearer to the
and are constructed with a flush front plate making them ideal
power source than the MCBs
for inclusion together with fuse switches and MCBs/MCCBs in
e. the appropriate European specification is EN 60947-2 modular multi-tier distribution switchboards, so maximising the
Care must be taken in the short-circuit ratings of MCCBs. number of circuits within a given floor area.
MCCBs are given two breaking capacities, the higher of which Older types using a manual or dependent manual closing
is its ultimate breaking capacity. The significance of this is that mechanism are regarded as being a safety hazard. This arises
after breaking such a current, the MCCB may not be fit for under conditions of closing the CB when a fault exists on the
continued use. The lower, or service, short circuit breaking circuit being controlled. During the close-trip operation, there
capacity permits continued use without further detailed is a danger of egress of the arc from the casing of the CB, with

5. Industrial circuit breakers B3
a consequent risk of injury to the operator. Such types may be after a prescribed number of fault clearances, when the degree
required to be replaced with modern equivalents. ACBs are of contamination reaches an unacceptable level.
normally fitted with integral overcurrent protection, thus avoiding
Because of the fire risk involved with oil, precautions such as
the need for separate protection devices. However, the operating
the construction of fire/blast walls may have to be taken when
time characteristics of the integral protection are often designed
OCBs are installed.
to make discrimination with MCBs/MCCBs/fuses easier and so
they may not be in accordance with the standard dependent 5.5 Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCBs)
time characteristics given in IEC 60255-3. Therefore, problems
Since the introduction of vacuum switching technology in the
in co-ordination with discrete protection relays may still arise,
1960’s, Vacuum switchgear has all but replaced Air Circuit Breaker
but modern numerical relays have more flexible characteristics
(ACBs) and Oil Circuit Breaker (OCBs) at medium voltage levels.
to alleviate such difficulties. ACBs will also have facilities for
accepting an external trip signal, and this can be used in Vacuum switchgear is rated for fault level up to 63kA with
conjunction with an external relay if desired. Figure B3.6 continuous ratings of greater than 5000A.
illustrates the typical tripping characteristics available. The vacuum interrupter is a compact, inherently reliable and
maintenance free device with an expected life of more than
10,000 operations and is capable of interrupting full fault
Inverse currents up to 100 times.
Very Inverse These characteristics have resulted in a dramatic reduction in
Ultra Inverse switchgear maintenance compared to ACBs or OCBs and are
Short Circuit used in a wide range of applications, including Distribution
networks and medium to large industry.
1000
The reduction in maintenance requirements and smaller dimensions
have allowed the configuration of switchgear to be adapted from
100 the conventional withdrawable pattern to a fixed pattern Air Insulated
Switchgear (AIS, See Fig B3.7). Fixed pattern switchgear is generally
10 more compact, easier to install and has simpler operation.
Time (s)
0.1
0.01
1 10 20
Current (multiple of setting)
Figure B3.6:
Typical tripping characteristics of an ACB
5.4 Oil Circuit Breakers (OCBs)

Oil circuit breakers have been very popular for many years for
industrial supply systems at voltages of 3.3kV and above. They
are found in both ‘bulk oil’ and ‘minimum oil’ types, the only
significant difference being the volume of oil in the tank.
In this type of breaker, the main contacts are housed in an
oil-filled tank, with the oil acting as the both the insulation and
the arc-quenching medium. The arc produced during contact
separation under fault conditions causes dissociation of the
hydrocarbon insulating oil into hydrogen and carbon. The
hydrogen extinguishes the arc. The carbon produced mixes Figure B3.7:
with the oil. As the carbon is conductive, the oil must be changed Typical air insulated vacuum contactor switchgear

B3 5. Industrial circuit breakers
The fixed pattern is also available in a gas insulated configuration Gas Insulated Switchgear is normally found in higher voltage
(GIS) where the Vacuum Interrupter and main current carrying applications. i.e. 24kV and above.
parts are insulated with SF6 gas. This further enhances the
A variation of vacuum switchgear is the vacuum contactor. This
compact nature of the design. Typically 36kV GIS has similar
device has a limited fault interrupting rating and is used in
dimensions to 12kV AIS (See Figure B3.8).
conjunction with High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses, The
contactor has a very high operating duty – up to 1 million
operations, and is typically used to switch MV motors.
5.6 SF6 circuit breakers
Circuit breakers using SF6 gas as the arc-quenching medium
are also available and in some countries and for some
applications are preferred. Generally these have similar ratings
to those of vacuum switchgear and in some cases can be
incorporated into the same cubicle as vacuum circuit breakers.
5.7 Improved safety
Changes in International Standards have resulted in
improvements to operator safety. One area is Internal Arc (Arc
Flash) protection. Many switchgear designs have passive
protection ‘built in’ and are capable of controlling the effects
of an internal arc fault even at the highest fault levels available.
To supplement this, or to improve the performance of existing
switchgear, active solutions, which detect the occurrence of
an arc fault and then initiate the disconnection of the supply,
are available in conjunction with protection relay systems. For
more details on arc protection solutions please refer to Chapter
[C11: Arc Protection].
Figure B3.8:
Typical gas insulated vacuum contactor switchgear
6. Protection relays
When the circuit breaker itself does not have integral protection, economy is still a consideration in terms of the number of
then a suitable external relay will have to be provided. For an analogue current inputs that have to be provided. Two
industrial system, the most common protection relays are overcurrent elements will detect any interphase fault, so it is
time- delayed overcurrent and earth fault relays. Chapter [C1: conventional to apply two elements on the same phases at
Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults] provides all relay locations. The phase CT residual current connections
details of the application of overcurrent relays. for an earth fault relay element are unaffected by this
convention. Figure B3.9 illustrates the possible relay
Traditionally, for three wire systems, overcurrent relays have
connections and limitations on settings.
often been applied to two phases only for relay element
economy. Even with modern multi-element relay designs,

6. Protection relays B3
Residual
CT Phase Type of
current System Notes
connections elements fault
elements
A B C
Petersen coil and

(a) 3Ph. 3w Ph. - Ph.
unearthed systems
A B C
(a) Ph. - Ph. * Earth-fault protection
(b) 3Ph. 3w
(b) Ph. - E* only if earth-fault
current is not less
than twice primary
(a) Ph. - Ph. operating
(c) 3Ph. 4w (b) Ph. - E* current
(c) Ph. - N
A B C
Phase elements must

be in same phases at
(a) Ph. - Ph. all stations.
(d) 3Ph. 3w
(b) Ph. - E Earth-fault settings
may be less than full
load
A B C Earth-fault settings
(a) Ph. - Ph.
(e) 3Ph. 3w may be less than full
(b) Ph. - E
load
Earth-fault settings
(a) Ph. - Ph. may be less than full
(f) 3Ph. 4w (b) Ph. - E load, but must be
(c) Ph. - N greater than largest
Ph. - N load
A B C N
(a) Ph. - Ph. Earth-fault settings

(g) 3Ph. 4w (b) Ph. - E may be less than full
(c) Ph. - N load
A B C N
3Ph. 3w Earth-fault settings

(h) or Ph. - E may be less than full
3Ph. 4w load
Ph. = phase ; w = wire ; E = earth ; N = neutral
Figure B3.9:
Overcurrent and earth fault relay connections

B3 7. Co-ordination problems
There are a number of problems that commonly occur in

industrial and commercial networks that are covered in the Cable gland
following sections. Cable
box
7.1. Earth fault protection with residually-connected
CTs
For four-wire systems, the residual connection of three phase Cable gland /sheath >
CTs to an earth fault relay element will offer earth fault ground connection
protection, but the earth fault relay element must be set above
the highest single- phase load current to avoid nuisance
tripping. Harmonic currents (which may sum in the neutral
conductor) may also result in spurious tripping. The earth
fault relay element will also respond to a phase-neutral fault
for the phase that is not covered by an overcurrent element
where only two overcurrent elements are applied. Where it is
required that the earth fault protection should respond only
to earth fault current, the protection element must be residually Relay does not operate
connected to three phase CTs and to a neutral CT or to a >
core-balance CT. In this case, overcurrent protection must be
(a) Incorrect
applied to all three phases to ensure that all phase-neutral
faults will be detected by overcurrent protection. Placing a
CT in the neutral earthing connection to drive an earth fault
relay provides earth fault protection at the source of supply
for a 4-wire system. If the neutral CT is omitted, neutral current
is seen by the relay as earth fault current and the relay setting
would have to be increased to prevent tripping under normal
load conditions.
When an earth fault relay is driven from residually connected Relay operates
CTs, the relay current and time settings must be such that >
that the protection will be stable during the passage of (b) Correct
transient CT spill current through the relay. Such spill current
can flow in the event of transient, asymmetric CT saturation
during the passage of offset fault current, inrush current or
Figure B3.10:
motor starting current. The risk of such nuisance tripping is
CBCT connection for four-wire system
greater with the deployment of low impedance electronic
relays rather than electromechanical earth CBCT connection
for four-wire system fault relays which presented significant 7.2.1 Use of 3-pole CBs
relay circuit impedance. Energising a relay from a core balance
When both neutrals are earthed at the transformers and all
type CT generally enables more sensitive settings to be
circuit breakers are of the 3-pole type, the neutral busbar in
obtained without the risk of nuisance tripping with residually
the switchgear creates a double neutral to earth connection,
connected phase CTs. When this method is applied to a four-
as shown in Figure B3.11. In the event of an uncleared feeder
wire system, it is essential that both the phase and neutral
earth fault or busbar earth fault, with both the incoming supply
conductors are passed through the core balance CT aperture.
breakers closed and the bus section breaker open, the earth
For a 3-wire system, care must be taken with the arrangement
fault current will divide between the two earth connections.
of the cable sheath, otherwise cable faults involving the sheath
Earth fault relay RE2 may operate, tripping the supply to the
may not result in relay operation (Figure B3.10).
healthy section of the switchboard as well as relay RE1 tripping
7.2 Four-wire dual-fed substations the supply to the faulted section.
The co-ordination of earth fault relays protecting four-wire If only one incoming supply breaker is closed, the earth fault
systems requires special consideration in the case of low relay on the energised side will see only a proportion of the
voltage, dual-fed installations. Horcher [Ref B3.1: Overcurrent fault current flowing in the neutral busbar. This not only
Relay Co-ordination for Double Ended Substations] significantly increases the relay operating time but also
has suggested various methods of achieving optimum reduces its sensitivity to low-level earth faults.
co-ordination. Problems in achieving optimum protection for
common configurations are described below.

7. Co-ordination problems B3
However, should an earth fault occur on one side of the busbar

when relays RS are already operated, it is possible for a contact
race to occur. When the bus section breaker opens, its break
contact may close before the RS relay trip contact on the
healthy side can open (reset). Raising the pick-up level of
relays RS1 and RS2 above the maximum unbalanced neutral
current may prevent the tripping of both supply breakers in
this case. However, the best solution is to use 4-pole circuit
breakers, and independently earth both sides of the busbar.
If, during a busbar earth fault or uncleared feeder earth fault,
the bus section breaker fails to open when required, the
Supply 1 Supply 2 interlocking break auxiliary contact will also be inoperative.
Neutral busbar This will prevent relays RS1 and RS2 from operating and
providing back-up protection, with the result that the fault
Bus section CB must be cleared eventually by slower phase overcurrent relays.
An alternative method of obtaining back-up protection could
be to connect a second relay R'E , in series with relay RE ,
having an operation time set longer than that of relays RS1
and RS2 . But since the additional relay must be arranged to
trip both of the incoming supply breakers, back-up protection
would be obtained but busbar selectivity would be lost.
Figure B3.11: An example of protection of a typical dual-fed switchboard

Dual fed four-wire systems: use of 3-pole CBs is given in Section 12.3.
The solution to this problem is to utilise 4-pole CBs that switch

the neutral as well as the three phases. Then there is only a
single earth fault path and relay operation is not compromised.
7.2.2 Use of single earth electrode
A configuration sometimes adopted with four-wire dual-fed
substations where only a 3-pole bus section CB is used is to
use a single earth electrode connected to the mid-point of
RS2
the neutral busbar in the switchgear, as shown in Figure B3.12.
When operating with both incoming main circuit breakers and Supply 1 Supply 2
the bus section breaker closed, the bus section breaker must
be opened first should an earth fault occur, in order to achieve
discrimination. The co-ordination time between the earth fault N
relays R F and R E should be established at fault level F2 for a

substation with both incoming supply breakers and bus section
breaker closed.
When the substation is operated with the bus section switch
closed and either one or both of the incoming supply breakers
closed, it is possible for unbalanced neutral busbar load
current caused by single phase loading to operate relay RS1
and/or RS2 and inadvertently trip the incoming breaker.
Interlocking the trip circuit of each R S relay with normally
Figure B3.12:
closed auxiliary contacts on the bus section breaker can
Dual fed four-wire systems: use of single point neutral earthing
prevent this.

B3 8. Fault current contribution from induction motors
When an industrial system contains motor loads, the motors For protection calculations, motor fault level contribution is
will contribute fault current for a short time. They contribute not an issue that is generally is important. In industrial networks,
to the total fault current via the following mechanism. fault clearance time is often assumed to occur at 5 cycles
after fault occurrence, and at this time, the motor fault level
When an induction motor is running, a flux, generated by the
contribution is much less than just after fault occurrence. In
stator winding, rotates at synchronous speed and interacts
rare cases, it may have to be taken into consideration for
with the rotor. If a large reduction in the stator voltage occurs
correct time grading for through-fault protection considerations,
for any reason, the flux in the motor cannot change
and in the calculation of peak voltage for high-impedance
instantaneously and the mechanical inertia of the machine
differential protection schemes.
will tend to inhibit speed reduction over the first few cycles
of fault duration. The trapped flux in the rotor generates a It is more important to take motor contribution into account
stator voltage equal initially to the back e.m.f. induced in the when considering the fault rating of equipment (busbars,
stator before the fault and decaying according to the cables, switchgear, etc.). In general, the initial a.c. component
X/R ratio of the associated flux and current paths. The of current from a motor at the instant of fault is of similar
induction motor therefore acts as a generator, resulting in a magnitude to the direct-on-line starting current of the motor.
contribution of current having both a.c. and d.c. components For LV motors, 5xFLC is often assumed as the typical fault
decaying exponentially. Typical 50Hz motor a.c. time constants current contribution (after taking into account the effect of
lie in the range 10ms-60ms for LV motors and 60-200ms for motor cable impedance), with 5.5xFLC for HV motors, unless
HV motors. This motor contribution has often been neglected it is known that low starting current HV motors are used. It is
in the calculation of fault levels. also accepted that similar motors connected to a busbar can
be lumped together as one equivalent motor.
Industrial systems usually contain a large component of motor
load, so this approach is incorrect. The contribution from In doing so, motor rated speed may need to be taken into
motors to the total fault current may well be a significant consideration, as 2 or 4 pole motors have a longer fault current
fraction of the total in systems having a large component of decay than motors with a greater number of poles. The kVA
motor load. Standards relating to fault level calculations, such rating of the single equivalent motor is taken as the sum of
as IEC 60909, require the effect of motor contribution to be the kVA ratings of the individual motors considered. It is still
included where appropriate. They detail the conditions under possible for motor contribution to be neglected in cases where
which this should be done, and the calculation method to be the motor load on a busbar is small in comparison to the total
used. Guidance is provided on typical motor fault current load (again IEC 60909 provides guidance in this respect).
contribution for both HV and LV motors if the required data However, large LV motor loads and all HV motors should be
is not known. Therefore, it is now relatively easy, using considered when calculating fault levels.
appropriate calculation software, to determine the magnitude
and duration of the motor contribution, so enabling a more
accurate assessment of the fault level for:
a. discrimination in relay co-ordination
b. determination of the required switchgear/busbar fault rating

9. Automatic changeover systems B3
Induction motors are often used to drive critical loads. In some generated by the motors running down on that section has fallen
industrial applications, such as those involving the pumping of to a an acceptable level. This is between 25% and 40%, of
fluids and gases, this has led to the need for a power supply nominal voltage, dependent on the characteristics of the power
control scheme in which motor and other loads are transferred system. The choice of residual voltage setting will influence the
automatically on loss of the normal supply to an alternative re-acceleration current after the bus section breaker closes.
supply. A quick changeover, enabling the motor load to be re- For example, a setting of 25% may be expected to result in an
accelerated, reduces the possibility of a process trip occurring. inrush current of around 125% of the starting current at full
Such schemes are commonly applied for large generating units voltage. Alternatively, a time delay could be used as a substitute
to transfer unit loads from the unit transformer to the station for residual voltage measurement, which would be set with
supply/start-up transformer. knowledge of the plant to ensure that the residual voltage would
have decayed sufficiently before transfer is initiated.
When the normal supply fails, induction motors that remain
connected to the busbar slow down and the trapped rotor flux The protection relay settings for the switchboard must take
generates a residual voltage that decays exponentially. All account of the total load current and the voltage dip during the
motors connected to a busbar will tend to decelerate at the re- acceleration period in order to avoid spurious tripping during
same rate when the supply is lost if they remain connected to this time. This time can be several seconds where large inertia
the busbar. This is because the motors will exchange energy HV drives are involved.
between themselves, so that they tend to stay ‘synchronised’
to each other. As a result, the residual voltages of all the motors
decay at nearly the same rate. The magnitude of this voltage
Preferred Standby
and its phase displacement with respect to the healthy alternative feeder feeder
supply voltage is a function of time and the speed of the motors.
The angular displacement between the residual motor voltage
and the incoming voltage will be 180° at some instant. If the
healthy alternative supply is switched on to motors which are
running down under these conditions, very high inrush currents
may result, producing stresses which could be of sufficient
Phase
High speed
magnitude to cause mechanical damage, as well as a severe angle <
CB
dip in the alternative supply voltage. relay
Two methods of automatic transfer are used:

a. in-phase transfer system
b. residual voltage system
The in-phase transfer method is illustrated in Figure B3.13(a). M
Normal and standby feeders from the same power source are
(a) In phase transfer method
used.
Feeder No.1 Feeder No.2
Phase angle measurement is used to sense the relative phase
angle between the standby feeder voltage and the motor busbar
voltage. When the voltages are approximately in phase, or just
prior to this condition through prediction, a high-speed circuit
breaker is used to complete the transfer. This method is restricted
to large high inertia drives where the gradual run down
characteristic upon loss of normal feeder supply can be
predicted accurately.
Figure B3.13(b) illustrates the residual voltage method, which
is more common, especially in the petrochemical industry.
Two feeders are used, supplying two busbar sections connected
by a normally open bus section breaker. Each feeder is capable
of carrying the total busbar load. Each bus section voltage is M M M M
monitored and loss of supply on either section causes the (b) Residual voltage method
relevant incomer CB to open. Provided there are no protection
operations to indicate the presence of a busbar fault, the bus
section breaker is closed automatically to restore the supply to Figure B3.13:
the unpowered section of busbar after the residual voltage Auto-transfer systems

B3 10. Voltage and phase reversal protection
Voltage relays have been widely used in industrial power Motor Protection]. Older installations may still utilise discrete
supply systems. The principle purposes are to detect undervoltage relays, but the setting criteria remain the same.
undervoltage and/or overvoltage conditions at switchboards
Reverse phase sequence voltage protection should be applied
to disconnect supplies before damage can be caused from
where it may be dangerous for a motor to be started with
these conditions or to provide interlocking checks. Prolonged
rotation in the opposite direction to that intended. Incorrect
overvoltage may cause damage to voltage-sensitive equipment
rotation due to reverse phase sequence might be set up
(e.g. electronics), while undervoltage may cause excessive
following some error after power system maintenance or
current to be drawn by motor loads. Motors are provided with
repairs, e.g. to a supply cable. Older motor control boards
thermal overload protection to prevent damage with excessive
might have been fitted with discrete relays to detect this
current, but undervoltage protection is commonly applied to
condition. Modern motor protection relays may incorporate
disconnect motors after a prolonged voltage dip. With a voltage
this function. If reverse phase sequence is detected, motor
dip caused by a source system fault, a group of motors could
starting can be blocked. If reverse phase sequence voltage
decelerate to such a degree that their aggregate re-
protection is not provided, the high-set negative phase
acceleration currents might keep the recovery voltage
sequence current protection in the relay would quickly detect
depressed to a level where the machines might stall. Modern
the condition once the starting device is closed – but initial
numerical motor protection relays typically incorporate voltage
reverse rotation of the motor could not be prevented.
protection functions, thus removing the need for discrete
undervoltage relays for this purpose. See Chapter [C.9: A.C.
11. Power factor correction and protection of capacitors
Loads such as induction motors draw significant reactive

power from the supply system, and a poor overall power factor
may result. The flow of reactive power increases the voltage-
drops through series reactances such as transformers and
reactors, it uses up some of the current carrying capacity of
power system plant and it increases the resistive losses in
Capacitor kvar
the power system.

To offset the losses and restrictions in plant capacity they
incur and to assist with voltage regulation, Utilities usually
apply tariff penalties to large industrial or commercial
customers for running their plant at excessively low power kW V
factor. The customer is thereby induced to improve the power
factor of his system and it may be cost-effective to install kVA lo
2 a
fixed or variable power factor correction equipment to raise with co d current
kV mpens
or regulate the plant power factor to an acceptable level. A ation
co load
1
Shunt capacitors are often used to improve power factor. The m cu

pe rr
Compensating kvar
ns en
basis for compensation is illustrated in Figure B3.14, where at t w
Magnetising kvar
ion it
∠ϕ1 represents the uncorrected power factor angle and ∠ϕ2 ho
ut
the angle relating to the desired power factor, after correction.
The following may be deduced from this vector diagram:
kW
a. Uncorrected power factor = = cos ∠ϕ1
kVA 1
kW
b. Corrected power factor = = cos ∠ϕ2
kVA 2
Figure B3.14:
c. Reduction in kVA = kVA1 - kVA2 Power factor correction principle

11. Power factor correction and protection of capacitors B3
If the kW load and uncorrected power factors are known, failure. This can result in the production of a high voltage or
then the capacitor rating in kvar to achieve a given degree in mechanical damage if there is a sudden restoration of
of correction may be calculated from: supply. Since most star/delta or auto-transformer starters
other than the ‘Korndorffer’ types involve a transitional break
Capacitor kvar = kW x (tan∠ϕ1 - tan∠ϕ2)
in supply, it is generally recommended that the capacitor
A spreadsheet can easily be constructed to calculate the rating should not exceed 85% of the motor magnetising
required amount of compensation to achieve a desired power reactive power.
factor.
11.3 Capacitor protection
11.1 Capacitor control
When considering protection for capacitors, allowance should
Where the plant load or the plant power factor varies be made for the transient inrush current occurring on switch-
considerably, it is necessary to control the power factor on, since this can reach peak values of around 20 times
correction, since over-correction will result in excessive system normal current. Switchgear for use with capacitors is usually
voltage and unnecessary losses. In a few industrial systems, de-rated considerably to allow for this. Inrush currents may
capacitors are switched in manually when required, but be limited by a resistor in series with each capacitor or bank
automatic controllers are standard practice. A controller of capacitors.
provides automatic power factor correction, by comparing
Protection equipment is required to prevent rupture of the
the running power factor with the target value. Based on the
capacitor due to an internal fault and also to protect the cables
available groupings, an appropriate amount of capacitance
and associated equipment from damage in case of a capacitor
is switched in or out to maintain an optimum average power
failure. If fuse protection is contemplated for a three-phase
factor. The controller is fitted with a ’loss of voltage’ relay
capacitor, HRC fuses should be employed with a current rating
element to ensure that all selected capacitors are disconnected
of not less than 1.5 times the rated capacitor current.
instantaneously if there is a supply voltage interruption. When
the supply voltage is restored, the capacitors are reconnected Medium voltage capacitor banks can be protected by the
progressively as the plant starts up. To ensure that capacitor scheme shown in Figure B3.15. Since harmonics increase
groups degrade at roughly the same rate, the controller usually capacitor current, the relay will respond more correctly if it
rotates selection or randomly selects groups of the same size does not have in-built tuning for harmonic rejection.
in order to even out the connected time. The provision of
Double star capacitor banks are employed at medium voltage.
overvoltage protection to trip the capacitor bank is also
As shown in Figure B3.16, a current transformer in the inter
desirable in some applications. This would be to prevent a
star-point connection can be used to drive a protection relay
severe system overvoltage if the power factor correction (PFC)
to detect the out-of-balance currents that will flow when
controller fails to take fast corrective action.
capacitor elements become short-circuited or open-circuited.
The design of PFC installations must recognise that many The relay will have adjustable current settings, and it might
industrial loads generate harmonic voltages, with the result contain a bias circuit, fed from an external voltage transformer,
that the PFC capacitors may sink significant harmonic currents. that can be adjusted to compensate for steady-state spill
A harmonic study may be necessary to determine the capacitor current in the inter star-point connection.
thermal ratings or whether series filters are required.
Some industrial loads such as arc furnaces involve large
11.2 Motor power factor correction inductive components and correction is often applied using
very large high voltage capacitors in various configurations.
When dealing with power factor correction of motor loads,
group correction is not always the most economical method. Another high voltage capacitor configuration is the ‘split phase’
Some industrial consumers apply capacitors to selected motor arrangement where the elements making up each phase of
substations rather than applying all of the correction at the the capacitor are split into two parallel paths. Figure B3.17
main incoming substation busbars. Sometimes, power factor shows two possible connection methods for the relay. A
correction may even be applied to individual motors, resulting differential relay can be applied with a current transformer
in optimum power factor being obtained under all conditions for each parallel branch, comparing the currents in the split
of aggregate motor load. In some instances, better motor phases. Alternatively an overcurrent relay can be applied with
starting may also result, from the improvement in the voltage a current transformer in the bridge link, where normally no
regulation due to the capacitor. Motor capacitors are often current should flow. Both relays use sensitive current settings
six-terminal units, and a capacitor may be conveniently but also adjustable compensation for the unbalance currents
connected directly across each motor phase winding. arising from initial capacitor mismatch.
Capacitor sizing is important, such that a leading power factor The difference of current through the split phases or the
does not occur under any load condition. If excess capacitance increase of the current through the bridge link indicates a
is applied to a motor, it may be possible for self-excitation to defect of a single capacitor unit ‘can’ where the amount of
occur when the motor is switched off or suffers a supply additional current is directly dependent on the can dimensions.

B3 11. Power factor correction and protection of capacitors
From
incoming transformer
Metering
11kV
Trip
Lockout
P1
>> >>
> >
Metering
PFC/V
Controller
P2
Capacitor bank
> > >
* * *
Element fuses
*
Figure B3.15:
Protection of capacitor banks

11. Power factor correction and protection of capacitors B3
A
A
B
>
C
Capacitor
bank >
IU >
>
Alarm Trip
Alarm Trip
(a)
A
Figure B3.16:
Protection of double star capacitor banks without and with
grounded starpoint
>
The usual aim is to get an alarm if one of the cans is defective

and to trip the bank if a second can becomes defective. It is B
possible to deduce which can is defective from the phase
relationships of the current and hence help to reduce repair
time.
Capacitor units shall be suitable for continuous operation at >
an r.m.s. current of 1,30 times the current that occurs at rated
sinusoidal voltage and rated frequency. In order to prevent
thermal damage under load conditions a protection with a
C
1st order thermal model using the maximum phase current
r.m.s. value is typical. Optionally this can be biased by
measured ambient (coolant) temperature. Depending on the
design/size of the capacitor bank, a dedicated overload >
protection may be required for current limiting reactors
connected in series.
The usual design of capacitor banks allows a continuous
sinusoidal voltage of 110% of rated nominal voltage at Alarm Trip
(b)
nominal frequency, in line with normal operation limits of
power systems. So by design, the rated voltage of a
capacitor bank would be chosen as 121 kV for a 110 kV
nominal system. Figure B3.17:
Differential protection of split phase capacitor banks

B3 11. Power factor correction and protection of capacitors
A short-time overvoltage is permitted where duration naturally As voltage across the capacitor bank is usually not directly
gets shorter with higher voltage. This results in an inverse-time accessible through voltage transformers, the voltage is
characteristic per IEC 60871-1 or ANSI/IEEE 37.99, as shown evaluated by integration of the phase currents:
in Figure B3.18. Accordingly, overvoltage protection should 1
c ∫
v= i dt
consist of a high set definite time delayed and inverse timed
element. Due to the “memory effect” of capacitances, a reset Voltage protection requires coordination with nearby
characteristic should also be considered to prevent damage generators. Capacitor banks should be disconnected to
from repetitive overvoltages. reduce system overvoltage prior to operation of generator
under-excitation protection.
Time-staged tripping of capacitor banks is recommended if
banks are installed nearby (the same or neighbouring
V/Vnom
substation). This is done to avoid simultaneous tripping that
2.20 might result in a sudden loss of capacitance, which may
2.00
provoke a subsequent critical undervoltage situation in the
power system.
1.80
The residual voltage of a capacitor bank prior to energisation
1.60
shall not exceed 10 % of its rated voltage to minimise the
1.40 voltage transients when switching due to the network
1.20 impedances. For this purpose resistors are connected in
parallel to the capacitors and designed to internally discharge
1.00
0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0 them when becoming disconnected from the power grid. The
time in [s] resistors are sized to ensure that the capacitor residual voltage
occurs within 5 minutes. Therefore after switching off the
capacitor bank a suitably long (re-)close blocking time should
Figure B3.18: be provided in the capacitor control and/or protection circuit.
Capacitor bank overvoltage characteristic

12. Examples B3
In this section, examples of the topics dealt with in the Chapter However, there are industrial applications where discrimination
are considered. is a secondary factor. In the application shown in Figure B3.20,
a contactor having a fault rating of 20kA controls the load in
12.1 Fuse co-ordination
one sub-circuit. A fuse rating of 630A is selected for the minor
An example of the application of fuses is based on the fuse in the contactor circuit to give protection within the
arrangement in Figure B3.19(a). This shows an unsatisfactory through-fault capacity of the contactor.
scheme with commonly encountered shortcomings. It can be
seen that fuses B, C and D will discriminate with fuse A, but
the 400A sub-circuit fuse E may not discriminate, with the
500A sub-circuit fuse D at higher levels of fault current.
800A
The solution, illustrated in Figure B3.19(b), is to feed the 400A
400V
circuit direct from the busbars.
630A
Fused contactor
Rating
1000A
Rating Rating Rating Auxiliary circuits

500A 500A 500A
Figure B3.20:
Example of back-up protection
Rating
Rating 30A
400A each The major fuse of 800A is chosen as the minimum rating that
is greater than the total load current on the switchboard.
Discrimination between the two fuses is not obtained, as the
pre-arcing I2t of the 800A fuse is less than the total I2t of
(a) Incorrect layout giving rise to problems in discrimination
the 630A fuse. Therefore, the major fuse will blow as well as
the minor one, for most faults so that all other loads fed from
Rating the switchboard will be lost. This may be acceptable in some
1000A cases. In most cases, however, loss of the complete
switchboard for a fault on a single outgoing circuit will not be
acceptable, and the design will have to be revised.
Rating Rating Rating Rating
400A 100A 500A 500A 12.2 Grading of fuses/MCCBs/overcurrent relays
An example of an application involving a moulded case circuit
breaker, fuse and a protection relay is shown in Figure B3.21.
A 1MVA 3.3kV/400V transformer feeds the LV board via a
Rating circuit breaker, which is equipped with a MiCOM P141
30A
numerical relay having a setting range of 8-400% of rated
current and fed from 2000/1A CTs.
(b) Correct layout and discrimination

Fuse
400A
1MVA
2000/1A
Figure B3.19: LV board fault
Fuse protection: effect of layout on discrimination level = 30kA
3300/415V
MCCB
>
400A
The sub-circuit fuse D may now have its rating reduced from
500A to a value, of say 100A, appropriate to the remaining
sub-circuit. This arrangement now provides a discriminating Figure B3.21:
fuse distribution scheme satisfactory for an industrial system. Network diagram for protection co-ordination example
– fuse/MCCB/relay

B3 12. Examples
Discrimination is required between the relay and both the choice of a value at the lower end of this current setting range
fuse and MCCB up to the 40kA fault rating of the board. To would move the relay characteristic towards that of the MCCB
begin with, the time/current characteristics of both the 400A and discrimination may be lost at low fault currents. It is
fuse and the MCCB are plotted in Figure B3.22. therefore prudent to select initially a relay current setting of
100%.
12.2.2 Relay characteristic and time multiplier selection
10.0 An EI characteristic is selected for the relay to ensure
discrimination with the fuse (see Chapter [C1: Overcurrent
Protection for Phase and Earth Faults] for details). From Figure
B3.20, it may be seen that at the fault level of 40kA the fuse
Characteristic for relay
will operate in less than 0.01s and the MCCB operates in
approximately 0.014s. Using a fixed grading margin of 0.4s,
the required relay operating time becomes 0.4 + 0.014 =
1.0 0.414s. With a CT ratio of 2000/1A, a relay current setting of
100%, and a relay TMS setting of 1.0, the extremely inverse
Operating time (s)
curve gives a relay operating time of 0.2s at a fault current

of 40kA. This is too fast to give adequate discrimination and
indicates that the EI curve is too severe for this application.
Turning to the VI relay characteristic, the relay operation time
is found to be 0.71s at a TMS of 1.0. To obtain the required
Fuse relay operating time of 0.414s:
0.1
0.414
TMS setting =
0. 71
MCCB
= 0.583
Use a TMS of 0.6, nearest available setting.
The use of a different form of inverse time characteristic
0.01 makes it advisable to check discrimination at the lower current
1000 10,000 100,000
Operating current (A) to 415V base levels also at this stage. At a fault current of 4kA, the relay
will operate in 8.1s, which does not give discrimination with
Original relay characteristic
the MCCB. A relay operation time of 8.3s is required. To
Revised relay characteristic
overcome this, the relay characteristic needs to be moved
away from the MCCB characteristic, a change that may be
achieved by using a TMS of 0.625. The revised relay
Figure B3.22:
characteristic is also shown in Figure B3.22.
Grading curves for Fuse/MCCB/relay grading example
12.3 Protection of a dual-fed substation
12.2.1 Determination of relay current setting As an example of how numerical protection relays can be
used in an industrial system, consider the typical large
The relay current setting chosen must not be less than the industrial substation of Figure B3.23. Two 1.6MVA, 11/0.4kV
full load current level and must have enough margin to allow transformers feed a busbar whose bus-section CB is normally
the relay to reset with full load current flowing. The latter may open. The LV system is solidly earthed. The largest outgoing
be determined from the transformer rating: feeder is to a motor rated 160kW, 193kVA, and a starting
kVA current of 7 x FLC.
FLC =
kV × 3 The transformer impedance is to IEC standards. The LV
switchgear and bus bars are fault rated at 50kA r.m.s. To simplify
1000 the analysis, only the phase-fault LV protection is considered.
= = 1443A
0. 4 × 3 12.3.1 General considerations
With the CT ratio of 2000/1A and a relay reset ratio of 95% Analysis of many substations configured as in Figure B3.23
of the nominal current setting, a current setting of at least shows that the maximum fault level and feeder load current
80% would be satisfactory, to avoid tripping and/or failure to are obtained with the bus-section circuit breaker closed and
reset with the transformer carrying full load current. However, one of the infeeding CBs open. This applies so long as the

12. Examples B3
switchboard has a significant amount of motor load. The b. Instantaneous element:

contribution of motor load to the fault level at the switchboard
current setting: 2.32kA
is usually larger than that from a single infeeding transformer,
as the transformer restricts the amount of fault current infeed These are the only settings relevant to the upstream relays.
from the primary side. The three-phase break fault level at
12.3.3 Relay B settings
the switchboard under these conditions is assumed to be
40kA r.m.s. Relay B settings are derived from consideration of the loading
and fault levels with the bus-section breaker between busbars
A1 and A2 closed. No information is given about the load
split between the two busbars, but it can be assumed in the
absence of definitive information that each busbar is capable
1.6 MVA of supplying the total load of 1.6MVA. With fixed tap
11/0.4kV
Z=6.25%
transformers, the bus voltage may fall to 95% of nominal under
these conditions, leading to a load current of 2430A. The
>> >>
Relay C1 > 2500/1 2500/1 I Relay C2 IDMT current setting must be greater than this, to avoid relay
Trip Trip operation on normal load currents and (ideally) with aggregate
2500/1 NO A2 0.4kV starting/re-acceleration currents. If the entire load on the
A1
50kA rms busbar was motor load, an aggregate starting current in
excess of 13kA would occur, but a current setting of this order
>> Trip
> would be excessively high and lead to grading problems
further upstream. It is unlikely that the entire load is motor
Relay B
>>
load (though this does occur, especially where a supply
300/1 Relay A
voltage of 690V is chosen for motors – an increasingly common
practice) or that all motors are started simultaneously (but
Motor cable
simultaneous re-acceleration may well occur).
M What is essential is that relay B does not issue a trip command

160kW under these circumstances – i.e. the relay current/time
characteristic is in excess of the current/time characteristic
of the worst-case starting/re-acceleration condition. It is
Figure B3.23: therefore assumed that 50% of the total bus load is motor
Relay grading example for dual-fed switchboard load, with an average starting current of 600% of full load
current (= 6930A), and that re-acceleration takes 3s. A current
Relays C are not required to have directional characteristics setting of 3000A is therefore initially used. The SI characteristic
see Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth is used for grading the relay, as co-ordination with fuses is
Faults, Section 14.3] as all three circuit breakers are only not required. The TMS is required to be set to grade with the
closed momentarily during transfer from a single infeeding thermal protection of relay A under ‘cold’ conditions, as this
transformer to a two infeeding transformers configuration. gives the longest operation time of Relay A, and the re-
This transfer is normally an automated sequence, and the acceleration conditions. A TMS value of 0.41 is found to
chance of a fault occurring during the short period (of the provide satisfactory grading, being dictated by the motor
order of 1s) when all three CBs are closed is taken to be starting/ re-acceleration transient. Adjustment of both current
negligibly small. Similarly, although this configuration gives and TMS settings may be required depending on the exact
the largest fault level at the switchboard, it is not considered re-acceleration conditions. Note that lower current and TMS
from either a switchboard fault rating or protection viewpoint. settings could be used if motor starting/re-acceleration did
not need to be considered.
It is assumed that modern numerical relays are used. For
simplicity, a fixed grading margin of 0.3s is used. The high-set setting needs to be above the full load current
and motor starting/re-acceleration transient current, but less
12.3.2 Motor protection relay settings
than the fault current by a suitable margin. A setting of 12.5kA
From the motor characteristics given, the overcurrent relay is initially selected. A time delay of 0.3s has to used to ensure
settings (Relay A) can be found using the guidelines set out grading with relay A at high fault current levels; both relays
in Chapter [C9: A.C. Motor Protection] as: A and B may see a current in excess of 25kA for faults on
the cable side of the CB feeding the 160kW motor. The relay
a. Thermal element:
curves are illustrated in Figure B3.24.
current setting: 300A
time constant: 20 mins

B3 12. Examples
12.3.5 Comments on grading

Relay
Relay While the above grading may appear satisfactory, the
Re-acceleration
Relay setting
protection on the primary side of the transformer has not been
Relay setting considered. IDMT protection at this point will have to grade
1000 with relays C and with the through-fault short-time withstand
100
curves of the transformer and cabling. This may result in
excessively long operation times. Even if the operation time
Time (s)
10
at the 11kV level is satisfactory, there is probably a Utility
1 infeed to consider, which will involve a further set of relays
and another stage of time grading, and the fault clearance
0.1
time at the utility infeed will almost certainly be excessive.
0.01 One solution is to accept a total loss of supply to the 0.4kV
100 1000 10000 100000
Current (A) referred to 0.4kV
bus under conditions of a single infeed and bus section CB
closed. This is achieved by setting relays C such that grading
with relay B does not occur at all current levels, or omitting
Figure B3.24: relay B from the protection scheme. The argument for this is
Grading of relays A and B that network operation policy is to ensure loss of supply to
both sections of the switchboard does not occur for single
contingencies. As single infeed operation is not normal, a
12.3.4 Relays C settings contingency (whether fault or maintenance) has already
The setting of the IDMT element of relays C1 and C2 has to occurred, so that a further fault causing total loss of supply
be suitable for protecting the busbar while grading with relay to the switchboard through tripping of one of relays B is a
B. The limiting condition is grading with relay B, as this gives second contingency. Total loss of supply is therefore
the longest operation time for relays C. acceptable. The alternative is to accept a lack of discrimination
at some point on the system, as already noted in Chapter
The current setting has to be above that for relay B to achieve
[C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults].
full co-ordination, and a value of 3250A is suitable. The TMS
Another solution is to employ partial differential protection to
setting using the SI characteristic is chosen to grade with that
remove the need for Relay A, but this is seldom used. The
of relay B at a current of 12.5kA (relay B instantaneous
strategy adopted will depend on the individual circumstances.
setting), and is found to be 0.45. The high-set element must
grade with that of relay B, so a time delay of 0.62sec is
required. The current setting must be higher than that of relay
B, so use a value of 15kA. The final relay grading curves and
settings are illustrated in Figure B3.25.
Relay Re-acceleration
Relay Relay setting
Relay Relay setting
Relay setting
Parameter Value Parameter Value Parameter Value Parameter Value
Relay 300A Time const 1200s 2320A 0
Relay 2500A TMS 0.175 12500A 0.32s
Relay 2750A TMS 0.25 15000 0.62s
(a) Relay settings
1000
100 I> and I>>

Time (s)
10
1
and I> and I>>
and
0.1
and
0.01
100 1000 10000 100000
Current (A) referred to 0.4kV
(b) Grading curves
Figure B3.25:
Final relay grading curves

13. References B3
[B3.1] Overcurrent Relay Co-ordination for Double

Ended Substations
George R Horcher
IEEE. Vol. 1A-14, No. 6, 1978

C1
Overcurrent Protection
for Phase and Earthfaults
Chapter
Overcurrent Protection
C1
for Phase and Earthfaults
1. Introduction 153
2. Co-ordination procedure 153
3. Principles of time/current grading 154
4. Standard I.D.M.T. overcurrent relays 156
5. Combined I.D.M.T. and high set instantaneous overcurrent relays 157
6. Very inverse (VI) overcurrent relays 158
7. Extremely inverse (EI) overcurrent relays 159
8. Other relay characteristics 159
9. Independent (definite) time overcurrent relays 160
10. Relay current setting 161
11. Relay time grading margin 161
12. Recommended grading margins 162
13. Calculation of phase fault overcurrent relay settings 163
14. Directional phase fault overcurrent relays 164
15. Ring mains 166
16. Earthfault protection 167
17. Directional earthfault overcurrent protection 170
18. Earthfault protection on insulated networks 171
19. Earthfault protection on Petersen Coil earthed networks 173
20. Examples of time and current grading 175
21. References 185

Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earthfaults
C1 1. Introduction
Protection against excess current was naturally the earliest

protection system to evolve. From this basic principle, the
graded overcurrent system, a discriminative fault protection,
has been developed. This should not be confused with
‘overload’ protection, which normally makes use of relays that
operate in a time related in some degree to the thermal
capability of the plant to be protected.
Overcurrent protection, on the other hand, is directed entirely
to the clearance of faults, although with the settings usually
adopted some measure of overload protection may be
obtained.
2. Co-ordination procedure
Correct overcurrent relay application requires knowledge of The relay settings are first determined to give the shortest
the fault current that can flow in each part of the network. operating times at maximum fault levels and then checked to
Since large-scale tests are normally impracticable, system see if operation will also be satisfactory at the minimum fault
analysis must be used – see Chapter [A3: Fault Calculations] current expected. It is always advisable to plot the curves of
for details. The data required for a relay setting study are: relays and other protection devices, such as fuses, that are
to operate in series, on a common scale. It is usually more
a. a one-line diagram of the power system involved, showing
convenient to use a scale corresponding to the current
the type and rating of the protection devices and their
expected at the lowest voltage base, or to use the predominant
associated current transformers
voltage base. The alternatives are a common MVA base or a
b. the impedances in ohms, per cent or per unit, of all power separate current scale for each system voltage.
transformers, rotating machine and feeder circuits
The basic rules for correct relay co-ordination can generally
c. the maximum and minimum values of short circuit currents be stated as follows:
that are expected to flow through each protection device
a. whenever possible, use relays with the same operating
d. the maximum load current through protection devices characteristic in series with each other
e. the starting current requirements of motors and the b. make sure that the relay farthest from the source has
starting and locked rotor/stalling times of induction motors current settings equal to or less than the relays behind it,
that is, that the primary current required to operate the
f. the transformer inrush, thermal withstand and damage
relay in front is always equal to or less than the primary
characteristics
current required to operate the relay behind it
g. decrement curves showing the rate of decay of the fault
current supplied by the generators
h. performance curves of the current transformers

3. Principles of time/current grading C1
Among the various possible methods used to achieve correct 3.2 Discrimination by current
relay co-ordination are those using either time or overcurrent,
Discrimination by current relies on the fact that the fault current
or a combination of both. The common aim of all three methods
varies with the position of the fault because of the difference
is to give correct discrimination. That is to say, each one must
in impedance values between the source and the fault. Hence,
isolate only the faulty section of the power system network,
typically, the relays controlling the various circuit breakers
leaving the rest of the system undisturbed.
are set to operate at suitably tapered values of current such
3.1 Discrimination by time that only the relay nearest to the fault trips its breaker. Figure
C1.2 illustrates the method.
In this method, an appropriate time setting is given to each
of the relays controlling the circuit breakers in a power system For a fault at F1, the system short-circuit current is given by:
to ensure that the breaker nearest to the fault opens first. A
simple radial distribution system is shown in Figure C1.1, to 6350
I = A
illustrate the principle. Z S + Z L1
where
Zs = source impedance
E D C B A
11 2
= = 0.485 Ω
250
ZL1 = cable impedance between C and B = 0.24 Ω
F
Hence
11
I= = 8800 A
Figure C1.1: 3 × 0.725
Radial system with time discrimination
So, a relay controlling the circuit breaker at C and set to operate
at a fault current of 8800 A would in theory protect the whole
of the cable section between C and B. However, there are two
Overcurrent protection is provided at B, C, D and E, that is, at
important practical points that affect this method of co-ordination:
the infeed end of each section of the power system. Each
protection unit comprises a definite-time delay overcurrent a. it is not practical to distinguish between a fault at F1 and a fault
relay in which the operation of the current sensitive element at F2, since the distance between these points may be only a
simply initiates the time delay element. Provided the setting of few metres, corresponding to a change in fault current of
the current element is below the fault current value, this element approximately 0.1%
plays no part in the achievement of discrimination. For this b. in practice, there would be variations in the source fault level,
reason, the relay is sometimes described as an ‘independent typically from 250 MVA to 130 MVA. At this lower fault level the
definite-time delay relay’, since its operating time is for practical fault current would not exceed 6800 A, even for a cable fault
purposes independent of the level of overcurrent. close to C. A relay set at 8800 A would not protect any part of
It is the time delay element, therefore, which provides the the cable section concerned
means of discrimination. The relay at B is set at the shortest Discrimination by current is therefore not a practical proposition for
time delay possible to allow the fuse to blow for a fault at A correct grading between the circuit breakers at C and B. However,
on the secondary side of the transformer. After the time delay the problem changes appreciably when there is significant impedance
has expired, the relay output contact closes to trip the circuit between the two circuit breakers concerned. Consider the grading
breaker. The relay at C has a time delay setting equal to t1 required between the circuit breakers at C and A in Figure C1.2.
seconds, and similarly for the relays at D and E.
If a fault occurs at F, the relay at B will operate in t seconds
and the subsequent operation of the circuit breaker at B will 11 kV 200 metres 200 metres 4 MVA
250 MVA 240mm2 P.I.L.C. 240mm2 P.I.L.C. 11/3.3 kV
clear the fault before the relays at C, D and E have time to Source Cable Cable 7%
operate. The time interval between each relay time setting
must be long enough to ensure that the upstream relays do
not operate before the circuit breaker at the fault location has
tripped and cleared the fault.
C B A
The main disadvantage of this method of discrimination is
that the longest fault clearance time occurs for faults in the
section closest to the power source, where the fault level Figure C1.2:
(MVA) is highest. Radial system with current discrimination

C1 3. Principles of time/current grading
Assuming a fault at F4, the short-circuit current is given by:

1000.
6350
I = A
Z S + Z L1
where
ZS = source impedance = 0.485 Ω
ZL1 = cable impedance between C and B = 0.24 Ω
100.
ZL2 = cable impedance between B and 4 MVA transformer
= 0.04 Ω
112
ZT = transformer impedance = 0.07 = 2.12 Ω
4
Hence I
11 = 2200 A
= 10.00
3 × 2.885
For this reason, a relay controlling the circuit breaker at B and

Relay B operating
set to operate at a current of 2200 A plus a safety margin
Time (s)
time
would not operate for a fault at F4 and would thus discriminate
with the relay at A. Assuming a safety margin of 20% to allow
Relay A operating
for relay errors and a further 10% for variations in the system time
1.00
impedance values, it is reasonable to choose a relay setting
of 1.3 x 2200 A, that is 2860 A, for the relay at B.
Now, assuming a fault at F3, at the end of the 11 kV cable
feeding the 4 MVA transformer, the short-circuit current is
given by:
11
I = 0.10
3 ( Z s + Z L1 + Z L2 ) 100 1000 10,000
Current (A)
Thus, assuming a 250 MVA source fault level: Relay A: Current setting = 100 A, TMS = 1.0
11 = 8300 A
Relay B: Current setting = 125 A, TMS = 1.3
I=
3 ( 0.485+0. 24 + 0.04)
Figure C1.3:
Alternatively, assuming a source fault level of 130 MVA: Relay characteristics for different settings
11 = 5250 A
I=
3 ( 0.93+0.214 +0. 04 )
characteristic, the time of operation is inversely proportional
In other words, for either value of source level, the relay at B to the fault current level and the actual characteristic is a
would operate correctly for faults anywhere on the 11 kV cable function of both ‘time’and 'current' settings. Figure C1.3
feeding the transformer. illustrates the characteristics of two relays given different
current/time settings. For a large variation in fault current
3.3 Discrimination by both time and current between the two ends of the feeder, faster operating times
Each of the two methods described so far has a fundamental can be achieved by the relays nearest to the source, where
disadvantage. In the case of discrimination by time alone, the fault level is the highest. The disadvantages of grading
the disadvantage is due to the fact that the more severe faults by time or current alone are overcome.
are cleared in the longest operating time. On the other hand, The selection of overcurrent relay characteristics generally
discrimination by current can be applied only where there is starts with selection of the correct characteristic to be used
appreciable impedance between the two circuit breakers for each relay, followed by choice of the relay current settings.
concerned. Finally the grading margins and hence time settings of the
It is because of the limitations imposed by the independent relays are determined. An iterative procedure is often required
use of either time or current co-ordination that the inverse to resolve conflicts, and may involve use of non-optimal
time overcurrent relay characteristic has evolved. With this characteristics, current or time grading settings.

4. Standard I.D.M.T. overcurrent relays C1
The current/time tripping characteristics of IDMT relays may

need to be varied according to the tripping time required and 1000.00
the characteristics of other protection devices used in the

network. For these purposes, IEC 60255 defines a number
of standard characteristics as follows:
a. standard inverse (SI)
b. very inverse (VI) 100.00
c. extremely inverse (EI)
Operating time (seconds)

d. long time inverse
Relay characteristic Equation

10.00
Standard inverse (SI)

t = TMS x 0.14
Ir0.02 - 1
Standard inverse (SI)
Very inverse (VI)

t = TMS x 13.5
Ir - 1 1.00 Definite time (DT): t=1
t = TMS x 80 Very inverse (VI)

Extremely inverse (EI)
Ir2 - 1
Extremely inverse (EI)
Long time inverse

t = TMS x 120 0.10
Ir - 1 1 10 100
Current (multiples of IS)
(a): IDMT relay characteristics to IEC 60255-151 (a) IEC 60255 characteristics ; TMS=1.0
1000.00
(b): North American IDMT relay characteristics

Relay characteristic Equation
IEEE C37.112
t = TMS 0.0515 + 0.114 100.00
Moderately inverse
I 0.02
r
-1
IEEE C37.112
t = TMS 19.61 + 0.491
Very inverse I 2r -1
10.00
IEEE C37.112
t = TMS 28.2 + 0.1217
Extremely inverse I 2r -1
1.00
Moderately inverse
t = TMS 5.95 + 0.18
US CO8 inverse Very inverse
I 2r -1 CO 2 short
time inverse
CO 8 inverse
Extremely
US CO2 short time
t = TMS 0.16758 + 0.11858 inverse
inverse I 0.02
r
-1 0.10
1 10 100
Current (multiples of IS)
(Ir = (I/Is), where Is = relay setting current (b) North American characteristics; TMS=1
TMS = Time multiplier setting
TD = Time dial setting
Figure C1.4:
Table C1.1: Definitions of standard relay characteristics IDMT relay characteristics

C1 4. Standard I.D.M.T. overcurrent relays
The mathematical descriptions of the curves are given in

10
Table C1.1(a), and the curves based on a common setting
8
current and time multiplier setting of 1 second are shown in
6 Figure C1.4(a). The tripping characteristics for different TMS
settings using the SI curve are illustrated in Figure C1.5.
4
Although the curves are only shown for discrete values of
3 TMS, continuous adjustment may be possible in an
TMS
1.0 electromechanical relay. For other relay types, the setting
2 0.9
0.8 steps may be so small as to effectively provide continuous
0.7
0.6
adjustment. In addition, almost all overcurrent relays are also
0.5 fitted with a high-set instantaneous element.
Time (seconds)
1
0.4
0.8 In most cases, use of the standard SI curve proves satisfactory,
0.6
0.3 but if satisfactory grading cannot be achieved, use of the VI
or EI curves may help to resolve the problem. When digital
0.2
0.4 or numeric relays are used, other characteristics may be
0.3 provided, including the possibility of user-definable curves.
More details are provided in the following sections.
0.1
0.2
Relays for power systems designed to North American practice
utilise ANSI/IEEE curves. Table C1.1(b) gives the mathematical
description of these characteristics and Figure C1.4(b) shows
0.1
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 the curves standardised to a time dial setting of 1.0.
Current (multiples of plug settings)
Figure C1.5:
Typical time/current characteristics of standard IDMT relay
5. Combined I.D.M.T. high set instantaneous overcurrent relays
A high-set instantaneous element can be used where the of 0.15 instead of 0.2 while maintaining a grading margin
source impedance is small in comparison with the protected between relays of 0.4s. Similarly, relay R1 is graded with R2
circuit impedance. This makes a reduction in the tripping time at 1400A and not at 2300A.
at high fault levels possible. It also improves the overall system
grading by allowing the 'discriminating curves' behind the
high set instantaneous elements to be lowered. 3
2
As shown in Figure C1.6, one of the advantages of the high
set instantaneous elements is to reduce the operating time 1
of the circuit protection by the shaded area below the
'discriminating curves'.
Time (seconds)
If the source impedance remains constant, it is then possible

to achieve high-speed protection over a large section of the I.D.M.T. Relay settings
set at 500 A 0.125 TMS
protected circuit. The rapid fault clearance time achieved 0.1
set at 125 A 0.15 TMS
100 1000 10,000 set at 62.5 A 0.10 TMS
helps to minimise damage at the fault location. Figure C1.6 Fault current (Amps)
High set instantaneous
Source
also illustrates a further important advantage gained by the 250 MVA
Ratio 1/1 relay settings
11 kV set at 300 A
use of high set instantaneous elements. Grading with the 400/1 A 100/1 A 50/1 A set at 1400 A
Fault level 13000 A Fault level 2300 A Fault level 1100 A set at 500 A
relay immediately behind the relay that has the instantaneous
elements enabled is carried out at the current setting of the
instantaneous elements and not at the maximum fault level. Figure C1.6:
For example, in Figure C1.6, relay R2 is graded with relay R3 Characteristics of combined IDMT and high-set instantaneous
at 500A and not 1100A, allowing relay R2 to be set with a TMS overcurrent relays

6. Very inverse (VI) overcurrent relays C1
6.1 Transient overreach Figure C1.7 provides a comparison of the SI and VI curves
for a relay. The VI curve is much steeper and therefore the
The reach of a relay is that part of the system protected by
operation increases much faster for the same reduction in
the relay if a fault occurs. A relay that operates for a fault that
current compared to the SI curve. This enables the requisite
lies beyond the intended zone of protection is said to
grading margin to be obtained with a lower TMS for the same
overreach.
setting current, and hence the tripping time at source can be
When using instantaneous overcurrent elements, care must minimised. It is noted that the curves become definite minimum
be exercised in choosing the settings to prevent them operating time typically at 20-30 x IS.
for faults beyond the protected section. The initial current due
to a d.c. offset in the current wave may be greater than the
relay pick-up value and cause it to operate. This may occur
even though the steady state r.m.s. value of the fault current 100.00
for a fault at a point beyond the required reach point may be

less than the relay setting. This phenomenon is called transient
overreach, and is defined as:
% transient overreach
I1 - I2
x 100% …Equation C1.1
I2
where:
10.00
I1 = r.m.s steady-state relay pick-up current
I2 = steady state r.m.s. current which when fully offset just

causes relay pick-up
When applied to power transformers, the high set instantaneous Standard inverse (SI)
overcurrent elements must be set above the maximum through
fault current that the power transformer can supply for a fault
across its LV terminals, in order to maintain discrimination 1.00
with the relays on the LV side of the transformer.
Very inverse (VI)
Very inverse overcurrent relays are particularly suitable if
there is a substantial reduction of fault current as the distance
from the power source increases, i.e. there is a substantial
increase in fault impedance. The VI operating characteristic
is such that the operating time is approximately doubled for
reduction in current from 7 to 4 times the relay current setting. 0.10
1 10 100
This permits the use of the same time multiplier setting for
Current ( multiples of I s )
several relays in series.
Figure C1.7:
Comparison of SI and VI relay characteristics

C1 7. Extremely inverse (EI) overcurrent relays
With this characteristic, the operation time is approximately

inversely proportional to the square of the applied current. 200.0
This makes it suitable for the protection of distribution feeder
circuits in which the feeder is subjected to peak currents on 100.0
switching in, as would be the case on a power circuit supplying
refrigerators, pumps, water heaters and so on, which remain
connected even after a prolonged interruption of supply. The
long time operating characteristic of the extremely inverse
relay at normal peak load values of current also makes this
relay particularly suitable for grading with fuses.
Figure C1.8 shows typical curves to illustrate this. It can be 10.0
seen that use of the EI characteristic gives a satisfactory
grading margin, but use of the VI or SI characteristics at the
Time (secs)
same settings does not. Another application of this relay is Standard
inverse (SI)
in conjunction with auto-reclosers in low voltage distribution
circuits. The majority of faults are transient in nature and
Very inverse (VI)
unnecessary blowing and replacing of the fuses present in
final circuits of such a system can be avoided if the auto- 1.0
reclosers are set to operate before the fuse blows. If the fault Extremely
persists, the auto-recloser locks itself in the closed position inverse (EI)
after one opening and the fuse blows to isolate the fault.
200A Fuse
0.1
100 1000 10,000
Current (amps)
Figure C1.8:
Comparison of relay and fuse characteristics
8. Other relay characteristics
User definable curves may be provided on some types of Digital and numerical relays may also include pre-defined
digital or numerical relays. The general principle is that the logic schemes utilising digital (relay) I/O provided in the relay
user enters a series of current/time co-ordinates that are to implement standard schemes such as CB failure and trip
stored in the memory of the relay. Interpolation between points circuit supervision. This saves the provision of separate relay
is used to provide a smooth trip characteristic. Such a feature, or PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) hardware to perform
if available, may be used in special cases if none of the these functions.
standard tripping characteristics is suitable. However, grading
of upstream protection may become more difficult, and it is
necessary to ensure that the curve is properly documented,
along with the reasons for use. Since the standard curves
provided cover most cases with adequate tripping times, and
most equipment is designed with standard protection curves
in mind, the need to utilise this form of protection is relatively
rare.

9. Independent (definite) time overcurrent relays C1
Overcurrent relays are normally also provided with elements characteristic, to indicate that lower operating times are
having independent or definite time characteristics. These achieved by the inverse relay at the higher values of fault
characteristics provide a ready means of co-ordinating several current, whereas the definite time relay has lower operating
relays in series in situations in which the system fault current times at the lower current values.
varies very widely due to changes in source impedance, as
Vertical lines T1, T2, T3, and T4 indicate the reduction in
there is no change in time with the variation of fault current.
operating times achieved by the inverse relay at high fault
The time/current characteristics of this curve are shown in
levels.
Figure C1.9, together with those of the standard I.D.M.T.
Grading margin between relays: 0.4 s

10
Time (seconds)
0.1
10 100 1000 10.000
Fault current (amps)
Fault level 6000 A 3500 A 2000 A 1200 A
Settings of independent (definite) time relay Settings of I.D.M.T. relay with standard inverse characteristic
set at 300 A 1.8 s set at 300 A 0.2 TMS
set at 57.5 A 0.6 s set at 57.5 A 0.42 TMS
Figure C1.9:
Comparison of definite time and standard I.D.M.T. relay

C1 10. Relay current setting
An overcurrent relay has a minimum operating current, known protection. In general, the current setting will be selected to
as the current setting of the relay. The current setting must be above the maximum short time rated current of the circuit
be chosen so that the relay does not operate for the maximum involved. Since all relays have hysteresis in their current
load current in the circuit being protected, but does operate settings, the setting must be sufficiently high to allow the relay
for a current equal or greater to the minimum expected fault to reset when the rated current of the circuit is being carried.
current. Although by using a current setting that is only just The amount of hysteresis in the current setting is denoted by
above the maximum load current in the circuit a certain degree the pick-up/drop-off ratio of a relay – the value for a modern
of protection against overloads as well as faults may be relay is typically 0.95. Thus, a relay minimum current setting
provided, the main function of overcurrent protection is to of at least 1.05 times the short-time rated current of the circuit
isolate primary system faults and not to provide overload is likely to be required.
11. Relay time grading margin
The time interval that must be allowed between the operation 11.2 Relay timing error
of two adjacent relays in order to achieve correct discrimination
All relays have errors in their timing compared to the ideal
between them is called the grading margin. If a grading
characteristic as defined in IEC 60255. For a relay specified
margin is not provided, or is insufficient, more than one relay
to IEC 60255, a relay error index is quoted that determines
will operate for a fault, leading to difficulties in determining
the maximum timing error of the relay. The timing error must
the location of the fault and unnecessary loss of supply to
be taken into account when determining the grading margin.
some consumers.
11.3 Overshoot
The grading margin depends on a number of factors:
When the relay is de-energised, operation may continue for
a. the fault current interrupting time of the circuit breaker
a little longer until any stored energy has been dissipated.
b. relay timing errors For example, an induction disc relay will have stored kinetic
energy in the motion of the disc; static relay circuits may have
c. the overshoot time of the relay
energy stored in capacitors. Relay design is directed to
d. CT errors minimising and absorbing these energies, but some allowance
is usually necessary.
e. final margin on completion of operation
The overshoot time is defined as the difference between the
Factors (b) and (c) above depend to a certain extent on the
operating time of a relay at a specified value of input current
relay technology used – an electromechanical relay, for
and the maximum duration of input current, which when
instance, will have a larger overshoot time than a numerical
suddenly reduced below the relay operating level, is insufficient
relay.
to cause relay operation.
Grading is initially carried out for the maximum fault level at
11.4 CT errors
the relaying point under consideration, but a check is also
made that the required grading margin exists for all current Current transformers have phase and ratio errors due to the
levels between relay pick-up current and maximum fault level. exciting current required to magnetise their cores. The result
is that the CT secondary current is not an identical scaled
11.1 Circuit breaker interrupting time
replica of the primary current. This leads to errors in the
The circuit breaker interrupting the fault must have completely operation of relays, especially in the time of operation. CT
interrupted the current before the discriminating relay ceases errors are not relevant when independent definite-time delay
to be energised. The time taken is dependent on the type of overcurrent relays are being considered.
circuit breaker used and the fault current to be interrupted.
11.5 Final margin
Manufacturers normally provide the fault interrupting time at
rated interrupting capacity and this value is invariably used After the above allowances have been made, the discriminating
in the calculation of grading margin. relay must just fail to complete its operation. Some extra
allowance, or safety margin, is required to ensure that relay
operation does not occur.

11. Relay time grading margin C1
11.6 Overall accuracy

50
The overall limits of accuracy according to IEC 60255-4 for 40
Pick-up 1.05 - 1.3 times setting
an IDMT relay with standard inverse characteristic are shown

30
in Figure C1.10.
20
10
Time (seconds)
8
6
5
4
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
Current (multiples of plug settings)
Time/Current characteristic allowable limit

At 2 times setting 2.5 x Declared error
At 5 times setting 1.5 x Declared error
Figure C1.10: At 10 times setting 1.0 x Declared error
Typical limits of accuracy and miminum setting range from IEC At 20 times setting 1.0 x Declared error
60255-151 for an inverse definite minimum time overcurrent relay
12. Recommended grading intervals
The following sections give the recommended overall grading Relay technology
margins between different protection devices.
Electro-
Static Digital Numerical
12.1 Grading: Relay to relay mechanical
Typical basic
The total interval required to cover the above items depends 7.5 5 5 5
timing error (%)
on the operating speed of the circuit breakers and the relay Overshoot time (s) 0.05 0.03 0.02 0.02
performance. At one time 0.5 s was a normal grading margin.
Safety margin (s) 0.1 0.05 0.03 0.03
With faster modern circuit breakers and a lower relay overshoot
Typical overall
time, 0.4 s is reasonable, while under the best conditions even grading margin 0.4 0.35 0.3 0.3
lower intervals may be practical. - relay to relay (s)
The use of a fixed grading margin is popular, but it may be

better to calculate the required value for each relay location. Table C1.2:
This more precise margin comprises a fixed time, covering Typical relay timing errors - standard IDMT relays
circuit breaker fault interrupting time, relay overshoot time
and a safety margin, plus a variable time that allows for relay time) may exceed the fixed grading margin, resulting in the
and CT errors. Table C1.2 gives typical relay errors according possibility that the relay fails to grade correctly while remaining
to the technology used. within specification. This requires consideration when
considering the grading margin at low fault current levels.
It should be noted that use of a fixed grading margin is only
appropriate at high fault levels that lead to short relay operating A practical solution for determining the optimum grading
times. At lower fault current levels, with longer operating times, margin is to assume that the relay nearer to the fault has a
the permitted error specified in IEC 60255 (7.5% of operating maximum possible timing error of +2E, where E is the basic

C1 12. Recommended grading intervals
timing error. To this total effective error for the relay, a further 12.2 Grading: Fuse to fuse
10% should be added for the overall current transformer error.
The operating time of a fuse is a function of both the
A suitable minimum grading time interval, t', may be calculated pre-arcing and arcing time of the fusing element, which follows
as follows: an I2t law. So, to achieve proper co-ordination between two
fuses in series, it is necessary to ensure that the total I2t taken
 2E +E  by the smaller fuse is not greater than the pre-arcing I2t value
t ′ =  R CT  t +t CB +t o +t s seconds
 100 
…Equation C1.2 of the larger fuse. It has been established by tests that
satisfactory grading between the two fuses will generally be
where:
achieved if the current rating ratio between them is greater
ER = relay timing error (IEC 60255-4) than two.
ECT = allowance for CT ratio error (%) 12.3 Grading: Fuse to relay
t = operating time of relay nearer fault (s) For grading inverse time relays with fuses, the basic approach
tCB = CB interrupting time (s) is to ensure whenever possible that the relay backs up the
fuse and not vice versa. If the fuse is upstream of the relay,
to = relay overshoot time (s) it is very difficult to maintain correct discrimination at high
ts = safety margin (s) values of fault current because of the fast operation of the
fuse.
If, for example t = 0.5 s, the time interval for an electromechanical
relay tripping a conventional circuit breaker would be 0.375 s, The relay characteristic best suited for this co-ordination with
whereas, at the lower extreme, for a static relay tripping a vacuum fuses is normally the extremely inverse (EI) characteristic as
circuit breaker, the interval could be as low as 0.24 s. it follows a similar I2t characteristic. To ensure satisfactory
co-ordination between relay and fuse, the primary current
When the overcurrent relays have independent definite time setting of the relay should be approximately three times the
delay characteristics, it is not necessary to include the current rating of the fuse. The grading margin for proper co-
allowance for CT error. Hence: ordination, when expressed as a fixed quantity, should not
 2E  …Equation C1.3 be less than 0.4s or, when expressed as a variable quantity,
t ′ =  R  t +t CB +t o +t s seconds should have a minimum value of:
 100 
t'= 0.4t + 0.15 seconds …Equation C1.4
Calculation of specific grading times for each relay can often
be tedious when performing a protection grading calculation where t is the nominal operating time of fuse.
on a power system. Table C1.2 also gives practical grading Section 20.1 gives an example of fuse to relay grading.
times at high fault current levels between overcurrent relays
for different technologies. Where relays of different technologies
are used, the time appropriate to the technology of the
downstream relay should be used.
13. Calculation of phase fault overcurrent relay settings
The correct co-ordination of overcurrent relays in a power principal relay data may be tabulated in a table similar to that
system requires the calculation of the estimated relay settings shown in Table C1.3, if only to assist in record keeping.
in terms of both current and time.
It is usual to plot all time/current characteristics to a common
The resultant settings are then traditionally plotted in suitable voltage/MVA base on log/log scales. The plot includes all
log/log format to show pictorially that a suitable grading margin relays in a single path, starting with the relay nearest the load
exists between the relays at adjacent substations. Plotting and finishing with the relay nearest the source of supply.
may be done by hand, but nowadays is more commonly
A separate plot is required for each independent path, and
achieved using suitable software.
the settings of any relays that lie on multiple paths must be
The information required at each relaying point to allow a relay carefully considered to ensure that the final setting is
setting calculation to proceed is given in Section 2. The appropriate for all conditions. Earthfaults are considered

13. Calculation of phase fault overcurrent relay settings C1
Fault current Relay The settings must be high enough to avoid relay operation
(A) Maximun current setting Relay with the maximum probable load, a suitable margin being
load CT time allowed for large motor starting currents or transformer inrush
Location Primary multiplier
current ratio transients.
Max. Min. (A) Per cent current setting
(A)
Time settings will be chosen to allow suitable grading margins,
as discussed in Section 12.
13.2 Inverse time relays
When the power system consists of a series of short sections
Table C1.3:
of cable, so that the total line impedance is low, the value of
Typical relay data table
fault current will be controlled principally by the impedance
of transformers or other fixed plant and will not vary greatly
separately from phase faults and require separate plots. with the location of the fault. In such cases, it may be possible
After relay settings have been finalised, they are entered in to grade the inverse time relays in very much the same way
a table. One such table is shown in Table C1.3. This also as definite time relays. However, when the prospective fault
assists in record keeping and during commissioning of the current varies substantially with the location of the fault, it is
relays at site. possible to make use of this fact by employing both current
and time grading to improve the overall performance of the
13.1 Independent (definite) time relays relay.
The selection of settings for independent (definite) time relays The procedure begins by selection of the appropriate relay
presents little difficulty. The overcurrent elements must be characteristics. Current settings are then chosen, with finally
given settings that are lower, by a reasonable margin, than the time multiplier settings to give appropriate grading margins
the fault current that is likely to flow to a fault at the remote between relays. Otherwise, the procedure is similar to that
end of the system up to which back-up protection is required, for definite time delay relays. An example of a relay setting
with the minimum plant in service. study is given in Section 20.1.
14. Directional phase fault overcurrent relays
When fault current can flow in both directions through the relay defined as if they were obtained by suitable connection of
location, it may be necessary to make the response of the relay the input quantities, irrespective of the actual method used.
directional by the introduction of a directional control facility.
14.2 90° Relay quadrature connection
The facility is provided by use of additional voltage inputs to
the relay, in order to provide a directional reference quantity. This is the standard connection for static, digital or numerical
relays. Depending on the angle by which the applied voltage
14.1 Relay connections
is shifted to produce maximum relay sensitivity (the Relay
There are many possibilities for a suitable connection of Characteristic Angle, or RCA) two types are available.
voltage and current inputs. The various connections are
14.2.1 90°-30° characteristic (30° RCA)
dependent on the phase angle, at unity system power factor,
by which the current and voltage applied to the relay are The A phase relay element is supplied with current Ia and
displaced. Reference [Ref C1.1: Directional Element voltage Vbc displaced by 30° in an anti-clockwise direction.
Connections for Phase Relays] details all of the connections In this case, the relay maximum sensitivity is produced when
that have been used. However, only very few are used in the current lags the system phase to neutral voltage by 60°.
current practice and these are described below. This connection gives a correct directional tripping zone over
the current range of 30° leading to 150° lagging; see Figure
In a digital or numerical relay, the phase displacements are
C1.11. The relay sensitivity at unity power factor is 50% of
realised by the use of software, while electromechanical and
the relay maximum sensitivity and 86.6% at zero power factor
static relays generally obtain the required phase displacements
lagging. This characteristic is recommended when the relay
by suitable connection of the input quantities to the relay. The
is used for the protection of plain feeders with the zero
history of the topic results in the relay connections being
sequence source behind the relaying point.

C1 14. Directional phase fault overcurrent relays
Zero torque line Zero torque line
A A
MT MT
30° 30°
150° 150°
30° 30°
A phase element connected A phase element connected

B phase element connected B phase element connected
C phase element connected C phase element connected
Figure C1.11: Figure C1.12:

Vector diagram for the 90°-30° connection (phase A element) Vector diagram for the 90°-45° connection (phase A element)
14.2.2 90°-45° characteristic (45° RCA) c. a phase-phase fault on a power transformer with the relay
looking into the delta winding of the transformer
The A phase relay element is supplied with current Ia and
voltage Vbc displaced by 45° in an anti-clockwise direction. It should be remembered, however, that the conditions
The relay maximum sensitivity is produced when the current assumed above to establish the maximum angular displacement
lags the system phase to neutral voltage by 45°. This connection between the current and voltage quantities at the relay are
gives a correct directional tripping zone over the current range such that, in practice, the magnitude of the current input to
of 45° leading to 135° lagging. The relay sensitivity at unity the relay would be insufficient to cause the overcurrent element
power factor is 70.7% of the maximum torque and the same to operate. It can be shown analytically that the possibility of
at zero power factor lagging; see Figure C1.12. maloperation with the 90°-45° connection is, for all practical
purposes, non-existent.
This connection is recommended for the protection of
transformer feeders or feeders that have a zero sequence 14.3 Application of directional relays
source in front of the relay. It is essential in the case of parallel
If non-unit, non-directional relays are applied to parallel
transformers or transformer feeders, in order to ensure correct
feeders having a single generating source, any faults that
relay operation for faults beyond the star/delta transformer.
might occur on any one line will, regardless of the relay settings
This connection should also be used whenever single-phase
used, isolate both lines and completely disconnect the power
directional relays are applied to a circuit where a current
supply. With this type of system configuration, it is necessary
distribution of the form 2-1-1 may arise. For a digital or
to apply directional relays at the receiving end and to grade
numerical relay, it is common to allow user-selection of the
them with the non-directional relays at the sending end, to
RCA angle within a wide range.
ensure correct discriminative operation of the relays during
Theoretically, three fault conditions can cause maloperation line faults. This is done by setting the directional relays R'1
of the directional element: and R'2 in Figure C1.13 with their directional elements looking
into the protected line, and giving them lower time and current
a. a phase-phase-ground fault on a plain feeder
settings than relays R1 and R2. The usual practice is to set
b. a phase-ground fault on a transformer feeder with the zero relays R'1 and R'1 to 50% of the normal full load of the
sequence source in front of the relay protected circuit and 0.1 TMS, but care must be taken to

14. Directional phase fault overcurrent relays C1
ensure that the continuous thermal rating of the relays of

twice rated current is not exceeded. An example calculation
is given in Section 20.3.
Source
Load
Fault
Figure C1.13:
Directional relays applied to parallel feeders
15. Ring mains
A particularly common arrangement within distribution networks for a directional one. If a VT was not provided originally, this
is the Ring Main. The primary reason for its use is to maintain may be very difficult to install at a later date.
supplies to consumers in case of fault conditions occurring
on the interconnecting feeders. A typical ring main with
associated overcurrent protection is shown in Figure C1.14.
Current may flow in either direction through the various relay
locations, and therefore directional overcurrent relays are
6' 6
applied.
2.1 2.1
In the case of a ring main fed at one point only, the settings of 1
1'
the relays at the supply end and at the mid-point substation 0.1
are identical. They can therefore be made non-directional, if, 0.1
Ix
5' 1.7 5
in the latter case, the relays are located on the same feeder, 1.7
that is, one at each end of the feeder. Fault
It is interesting to note that when the number of feeders round

Iy 0.5
the ring is an even number, the two relays with the same 2 0.5 2'
1.3
operating time are at the same substation. They will therefore 1.3
have to be directional. When the number of feeders is an odd 4
4'
number, the two relays with the same operating time are at 0.9 0.9
different substations and therefore do not need to be directional.

3 3'
It may also be noted that, at intermediate substations, whenever
the operating time of the relays at each substation are different,
2.1 1.7 1.3 0.9 0.5 0.1
the difference between their operating times is never less than
the grading margin, so the relay with the longer operating time 6' 5' 4'' 3' 2' 1'
can be non-directional. With modern numerical relays, a
directional facility is often available for little or no extra cost, so 0.1 0.5 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.1
that it may be simpler in practice to apply directional relays at
1 2 3 4 5 6
all locations. Also, in the event of an additional feeder being
added subsequently, the relays that can be non-directional
need to be re-determined and will not necessarily be the same Figure C1.14:
– giving rise to problems of changing a non-directional relay Grading of ring mains

C1 15. Ring mains
15.1 Grading of ring mains the ring, one set of relays will be made inoperative because
of the direction of current flow, and the other set operative. It
The usual grading procedure for relays in a ring main circuit
will also be found that the operating times of the relays that
is to open the ring at the supply point and to grade the relays
are inoperative are faster than those of the operative relays,
first clockwise and then anti-clockwise. That is, the relays looking
with the exception of the mid-point substation, where the
in a clockwise direction around the ring are arranged to operate
operating times of relays 3 and 3’ happen to be the same.
in the sequence 1-2-3-4-5-6 and the relays looking in the anti-
clockwise direction are arranged to operate in the sequence The relays that are operative are graded downwards towards
1’-2’-3’-4’-5’-6’, as shown in Figure C1.14. the fault and the last to be affected by the fault operates first.
This applies to both paths to the fault. Consequently, the faulted
The arrows associated with the relaying points indicate the
line is the only one to be disconnected from the ring and the
direction of current flow that will cause the relay to operate. A
power supply is maintained to all the substations.
double-headed arrow is used to indicate a non-directional relay,
such as those at the supply point where the power can flow When two or more power sources feed into a ring main, time
only in one direction. A single-headed arrow is used to indicate graded overcurrent protection is difficult to apply and full
a directional relay, such as those at intermediate substations discrimination may not be possible. With two sources of supply,
around the ring where the power can flow in either direction. two solutions are possible. The first is to open the ring at one
The directional relays are set in accordance with the invariable of the supply points, whichever is more convenient, by means
rule, applicable to all forms of directional protection, that the of a suitable high set instantaneous overcurrent relay. The ring
current in the system must flow from the substation busbars is then graded as in the case of a single infeed. The second
into the protected line in order that the relays may operate. method is to treat the section of the ring between the two supply
points as a continuous bus separate from the ring and to protect
Disconnection of the faulted line is carried out according to
it with a unit protection system, and then proceed to grade the
time and fault current direction. As in any parallel system, the
ring as in the case of a single infeed. Section 20.4 provides a
fault current has two parallel paths and divides itself in the
worked example of ring main grading.
inverse ratio of their impedances. Thus, at each substation in
16. Earthfault protection
In the foregoing description, attention has been principally the earthfault relay between the star points of the relay group
directed towards phase fault overcurrent protection. More and the current transformers.
sensitive protection against earthfaults can be obtained by
Phase fault overcurrent relays are often provided on only two
using a relay that responds only to the residual current of the
phases since these will detect any interphase fault; the
system, since a residual component exists only when fault
connections to the earthfault relay are unaffected by this
current flows to earth. The earthfault relay is therefore
consideration. The arrangement is illustrated in Figure
completely unaffected by load currents, whether balanced
C1.15(c).
or not, and can be given a setting which is limited only by the
design of the equipment and the presence of unbalanced The typical settings for earthfault relays are 30%-40% of the
leakage or capacitance currents to earth. This is an important full-load current or minimum earthfault current on the part of
consideration if settings of only a few percent of system rating the system being protected. However, account may have to
are considered, since leakage currents may produce a residual be taken of the variation of setting with relay burden as
quantity of this order. described in Section 16.1 below. If greater sensitivity than
this is required, one of the methods described in Section 16.3
On the whole, the low settings permissible for earthfault relays
for obtaining sensitive earthfault protection must be used.
are very useful, as earthfaults are not only by far the most
frequent of all faults, but may be limited in magnitude by the 16.1 Effective setting of earthfault relays
neutral earthing impedance, or by earth contact resistance.
The primary setting of an overcurrent relay can usually be
The residual component is extracted by connecting the line taken as the relay setting multiplied by the CT ratio. The CT
current transformers in parallel as shown in Figure C1.15. can be assumed to maintain a sufficiently accurate ratio so
The simple connection shown in Figure C1.15(a) can be that, expressed as a percentage of rated current, the primary
extended by connecting overcurrent elements in the individual setting will be directly proportional to the relay setting.
phase leads, as illustrated in Figure C1.15(b), and inserting However, this may not be true for an earthfault relay. The

16. Earthfault protection C1
burden at nominal or rated current, because of its lower setting.

A For example, a relay with a setting of 20% will have an impedance
of 25 times that of a similar element with a setting of 100%.
B Very frequently, this burden will exceed the rated burden of
the current transformers. It might be thought that correspondingly
C larger current transformers should be used, but this is
considered to be unnecessary. The current transformers that
handle the phase burdens can operate the earthfault relay and
the increased errors can easily be allowed for.
I >
Not only is the exciting current of the energising current
(a) transformer proportionately high due to the large burden of the
earthfault relay, but the voltage drop on this relay is impressed
A
on the other current transformers of the paralleled group, whether
they are carrying primary current or not. The total exciting current
B
is therefore the product of the magnetising loss in one CT and
C
the number of current transformers in parallel. The summated
magnetising loss can be appreciable in comparison with the
operating current of the relay, and in extreme cases where the
I> I> I > setting current is low or the current transformers are of low
I>
performance, may even exceed the output to the relay. The
‘effective setting current’ in secondary terms is the sum of the
relay setting current and the total excitation loss. Strictly speaking,
(b)
the effective setting is the vector sum of the relay setting current
and the total exciting current, but the arithmetic sum is near
A enough, because of the similarity of power factors. It is instructive
to calculate the effective setting for a range of setting values of
B a relay, a process that is set out in Table C1.4, with the results
illustrated in Figure C1.16.
C
I> I> I >
Relay plug setting Coil Effective setting

Exciting
voltage
current
Current at setting Current
% (Ie) %
(c) (A) (V) (A)
5 0.25 12 0.583 24 0
10 0.5 6 0.405 1.715 34.3
Figure C1.15:
15 0.75 4 0.3 1.65 33
Residual connection of current transformers to earthfault relays
20 1 3 0.27 1.81 36
40 2 1.5 0.17 2.51 50
performance varies according to the relay technology used. 60 3 1 0.12 3.36 67
16.1.1 Static, digital and numerical relays 80 4 0.75 0.1 4.3 86

100 5 0.6 0.08 5.24 105
When static, digital or numerical relays are used the relatively
low value and limited variation of the relay burden over the
Table C1.4:
relay setting range results in the above statement holding
Calculation of effective settings
true. The variation of input burden with current should be
checked to ensure that the variation is sufficiently small. If
not, substantial errors may occur, and the setting procedure The effect of the relatively high relay impedance and the
will have to follow that for electromechanical relays. summation of CT excitation losses in the residual circuit is
16.1.2 Electromechanical relays augmented still further by the fact that, at setting, the flux
density in the current transformers corresponds to the bottom
When using an electromechanical relay, the earthfault element
bend of the excitation characteristic. The exciting impedance
generally will be similar to the phase elements. It will have a
under this condition is relatively low, causing the ratio error
similar VA consumption at setting, but will impose a far higher
to be high. The current transformer actually improves in

C1 16. Earthfault protection
with the errors calculated for each current level, making the
30 process much more tedious, or longer grading margins must
be allowed. However, for other types of relay, the procedure
adopted for phase fault relays can be used.
Secondary voltage
20
16.3 Sensitive earthfault protection
LV systems are not normally earthed through an impedance,
10 due to the resulting overvoltages that may occur and
Current transformer consequential safety implications. HV systems may be
excitation characteristic designed to accommodate such overvoltages, but not the
majority of LV systems.
0 0.5 1.0 1.5
Exciting current (amperes) However, it is quite common to earth HV systems through an
impedance that limits the earthfault current. Further, in some
100 countries, the resistivity of the earth path may be very high
due to the nature of the ground itself (e.g. desert or rock). A
80 fault to earth not involving earth conductors may result in the
Effective setting (per cent)
flow of only a small current, insufficient to operate a normal

60 protection system. A similar difficulty also arises in the case
of broken line conductors, which, after falling on to hedges
or dry metalled roads, remain energised because of the low
40
leakage current, and therefore present a danger to life.
20 To overcome the problem, it is necessary to provide an
earthfault protection system with a setting that is considerably
lower than the normal line protection. This presents no difficulty
0 20 40 60 80 100
to a modern digital or numerical relay. However, older
Relay setting (per cent)
electromechanical or static relays may present difficulties due
to the high effective burden they may present to the CT.
The required sensitivity cannot normally be provided by means
Figure C1.16:
Effective setting of earthfault relay of conventional CTs. A core balance current transformer
(CBCT) will normally be used. The CBCT is a current
transformer mounted around all three phase (and neutral if
performance with increased primary current, while the relay present) conductors so that the CT secondary current is
impedance decreases until, with an input current several proportional to the residual (i.e. earth) current. Such a CT can
times greater than the primary setting, the multiple of setting be made to have any convenient ratio suitable for operating
current in the relay is appreciably higher than the multiple of a sensitive earthfault relay element. By use of such techniques,
primary setting current which is applied to the primary circuit. earthfault settings down to 10% of the current rating of the
This causes the relay operating time to be shorter than might circuit to be protected can be obtained.
be expected.
Care must be taken to position a CBCT correctly in a cable
At still higher input currents, the CT performance falls off until circuit. If the cable sheath is earthed, the earth connection
finally the output current ceases to increase substantially. from the cable gland/sheath junction must be taken through
Beyond this value of input current, operation is further the CBCT primary to ensure that phase-sheath faults are
complicated by distortion of the output current waveform. detected. Figure C1.17 shows the correct and incorrect
methods. With the incorrect method, the fault current in the
16.2 Time grading of earthfault relays
sheath is not seen as an unbalance current and hence relay
The time grading of earthfault relays can be arranged in the operation does not occur.
same manner as for phase fault relays. The time/primary
The normal residual current that may flow during healthy
current characteristic for electro-mechanical relays cannot
conditions limits the application of non-directional sensitive
be kept proportionate to the relay characteristic with anything
earthfault protection. Such residual effects can occur due to
like the accuracy that is possible for phase fault relays. As
unbalanced leakage or capacitance in the system.
shown above, the ratio error of the current transformers at
relay setting current may be very high. It is clear that time
grading of electromechanical earthfault relays is not such a
simple matter as the procedure adopted for phase relays in
Table C1.3. Either the above factors must be taken into account

16. Earthfault protection C1
Cable gland
Cable
box
Cable gland /sheath >

I
ground connection
No operation Operation
(a) Physical connections I > I >
(b) Incorrect positioning (c) Correct positioning
Figure C1.17:
Positioning of core balance current transformers
17. Directional earthfault overcurrent protection
Directional earthfault overcurrent may need to be applied in

the following situations: A
a. for earthfault protection where the overcurrent protection B

is by directional relays
C
b. in insulated-earth networks
c. in Petersen coil earthed networks
d. where the sensitivity of sensitive earthfault protection is
insufficient – use of a directional earthfault relay may
provide greater sensitivity
The relay elements previously described as phase fault >
elements respond to the flow of earthfault current, and it is (a) Relay connections
important that their directional response be correct for this
condition. If a special earthfault element is provided as
described in Section 16 (which will normally be the case), a
related directional element is needed.
17.1 Relay connections
The residual current is extracted as shown in Figure C1.15.
Since this current may be derived from any phase, in order
to obtain a directional response it is necessary to obtain an
appropriate quantity to polarise the relay. In digital or numerical
(b) Balanced system (c) Unbalanced system
relays there are usually two choices provided. (zero residual volts) phase A to ground
fault ( residual volts)
17.1.1 Residual voltage
A suitable quantity is the residual voltage of the system. This
is the vector sum of the individual phase voltages. If the Figure C1.18:
secondary windings of a three-phase, five limb voltage Voltage polarised directional earthfault relay

C1 17. Directional earthfault overcurrent protection
transformer or three single-phase units are connected in displaced from the residual current by the characteristic angle
broken delta, the voltage developed across its terminals will of the source impedance. The residual quantities are applied
be the vector sum of the phase to ground voltages and hence to the directional element of the earthfault relay.
the residual voltage of the system, as illustrated in Figure
The residual current is phase offset from the residual voltage
C1.18.
and hence angle adjustment is required. Typically, the current
The primary star point of the VT must be earthed. However, will lag the polarising voltage. The method of system earthing
a three-phase, three limb VT is not suitable, as there is no also affects the Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA), and the
path for the residual magnetic flux. For applications where following settings are usual:
the main voltage transformer associated with the high voltage
a. resistance-earthed system: 0° RCA
system is not provided with a broken delta secondary winding
to polarise the directional earthfault relay, it is permissible to b. distribution system, solidly-earthed: -45° RCA
use three single-phase interposing voltage transformers. Their
c. transmission system, solidly-earthed: -60° RCA
primary windings are connected in star and their secondary
windings are connected in broken delta. For satisfactory The different settings for distribution and transmission systems
operation, however, it is necessary to ensure that the main arise from the different X/R ratios found in these systems.
voltage transformers are of a suitable construction to 17.1.2 Negative sequence current
reproduce the residual voltage and that the star point of the
primary winding is solidly earthed. In addition, the star point The residual voltage at any point in the system may be
of the primary windings of the interposing voltage transformers insufficient to polarise a directional relay, or the voltage
must be connected to the star point of the secondary windings transformers available may not satisfy the conditions for
of the main voltage transformers. providing residual voltage. In these circumstances, negative
sequence current can be used as the polarising quantity. The
The residual voltage will be zero for balanced phase voltages. fault direction is determined by comparison of the negative
For simple earthfault conditions, it will be equal to the sequence voltage with the negative sequence current. The
depression of the faulted phase voltage. In all cases the RCA must be set based on the angle of the negative phase
residual voltage is equal to three times the zero sequence sequence source voltage.
voltage drop on the source impedance and is therefore
18. Earthfault protection on insulated networks
Occasionally, a power system is run completely insulated element can be used to detect the fault. However, the method
from earth. The advantage of this is that a single phase- does not provide any discrimination, as the unbalanced voltage
earthfault on the system does not cause any earthfault current occurs on the whole of the affected section of the system.
to flow, and so the whole system remains operational. The One advantage of this method is that no CT’s are required,
system must be designed to withstand high transient and as voltage is being measured. However, the requirements for
steady-state overvoltages however, so its use is generally the VT’s as given in Section 17.1.1 apply.
restricted to low and medium voltage systems.
Grading is a problem with this method, since all relays in the
It is vital that detection of a single phase-earthfault is achieved, affected section will see the fault. It may be possible to use
so that the fault can be traced and rectified. While system definite-time grading, but in general, it is not possible to
operation is unaffected for this condition, the occurrence of provide fully discriminative protection using this technique.
a second earthfault allows substantial currents to flow.
18.2 Sensitive earthfault
The absence of earthfault current for a single phase-earthfault
This method is principally applied to MV systems, as it relies
clearly presents some difficulties in fault detection. Two
on detection of the imbalance in the per-phase charging
methods are available using modern relays.
currents that occurs.
18.1 Residual voltage
Figure C1.19 illustrates the situation that occurs when a single
When a single phase-earthfault occurs, the healthy phase phase-earthfault is present. The relays on the healthy feeders
voltages rise by a factor of √3 and the three phase voltages see the unbalance in charging currents for their own feeders.
no longer have a phasor sum of zero. Hence, a residual voltage The relay in the faulted feeder sees the charging currents in

18. Earthfault protection on insulated networks C1
the rest of the system, with the current of its own feeders This may be calculated at the design stage, but confirmation
cancelled out. Figure C1.20 shows the phasor diagram. by means of tests on-site is usual. A single phase-earthfault
is deliberately applied and the resulting currents noted, a
Use of Core Balance CTs is essential. With reference to Figure
process made easier in a modern digital or numeric relay by
C1.20, the unbalance current on the healthy feeders lags the
the measurement facilities provided. As noted earlier,
residual voltage by 90°. The charging currents on these
application of such a fault for a short period does not involve
feeders will be √3 times the normal value, as the phase-earth
any disruption to the network, or fault currents, but the duration
voltages have risen by this amount. The magnitude of the
should be as short as possible to guard against a second
residual current is therefore three times the steady-state
such fault occurring.
charging current per phase. As the residual currents on the
healthy and faulted feeders are in antiphase, use of a It is also possible to dispense with the directional element if
directional earthfault relay can provide the discrimination the relay can be set at a current value that lies between the
required. The polarising quantity used is the residual voltage. charging current on the feeder to be protected and the
By shifting this by 90°, the residual current seen by the relay charging current of the rest of the system.
on the faulted feeder lies within the ‘operate’ region of the
directional characteristic, while the residual currents on the
healthy feeders lie within the ‘restrain’ region. Thus, the RCA
required is 90°. The relay setting has to lie between one and
three times the per-phase charging current.
Restrain
Operate
An RCA setting of +90 ° shifts

the "centre of the characteristic" to here
Figure C1.20:
Phasor diagram for insulated system with C phase-earthfault
= IH1 + IH2
Figure C1.19:
Current distribution in an insulated system with a C phase –
earthfault

C1 19. Earthfault protection on Petersen Coil earthed networks
Petersen Coil earthing is a special case of high impedance

earthing. The network is earthed via a reactor, whose reactance
is made nominally equal to the total system capacitance to
earth. Under this condition, a single phase-earthfault does
not result in any earthfault current in steady-state conditions.
The effect is therefore similar to having an insulated system.
The effectiveness of the method is dependent on the accuracy
of tuning of the reactance value – changes in system
capacitance (due to system configuration changes for
instance) require changes to the coil reactance. In practice,
perfect matching of the coil reactance to the system
capacitance is difficult to achieve, so that a small earthfault
current will flow. Petersen Coil earthed systems are commonly
found in areas where the system consists mainly of rural
overhead lines, and are particularly beneficial in locations
subject to a high incidence of transient faults.
To understand how to correctly apply earthfault protection to I
R3
such systems, system behaviour under earthfault conditions
must first be understood.
Figure C1.21 illustrates a simple network earthed through a
Petersen Coil. The equations clearly show that, if the reactor
is correctly tuned, no earthfault current will flow.
Figure C1.22 shows a radial distribution system earthed using
Figure C1.22:
a Petersen Coil. One feeder has a phase-earthfault on phase
Distribution of currents during a C phase-earthfault
C. – radial distribution system
Source A
N
If if:
Petersen
coil C B
a) Capacitive and inductive currents
C B
Current vectors for A phase fault
b) Unfaulted line c) Faulted line
Figure C1.21: Figure C1.23: C phase-earthfault in Petersen Coil earthed

Earthfault in Petersen Coil earthed system network: theoretical case - no resistance present in XL or XC

19. Earthfault protection on Petersen Coil earthed networks C1
Figure C1.23 shows the resulting phasor diagrams, assuming

that no resistance is present. In Figure C1.23(a), it can be Resistive component Resistive component in feeder
seen that the fault causes the healthy phase voltages to rise in grounding coil
A
by a factor of √3 and the charging currents lead the voltages
by 90°.
Using a CBCT, the unbalance currents seen on the healthy
N
feeders can be seen to be a simple vector addition of Ia1 and
Ib1, and this lies at exactly 90° lagging to the residual voltage C B
(Figure C1.23(b). The magnitude of the residual current IR1 a) Capacitive and inductive currents
with resistive components
is equal to three times the steady-state charging current per
Restrain
phase. On the faulted feeder, the residual current is equal to Operate IL
IL - IH1 - IH2, as shown in Figure C1.23(c) and more clearly Zero torque line
for O° RCA
by the zero sequence network of Figure C1.24.
Faulted Restrain
feeder Zero torque line for 0° RCA
Operate
Healthy
b) Unfaulted line c) Faulted line
feeders
Figure C1.25:
C phase-earthfault in Petersen Coil earthed network: practical
case with resistance present in XL or XC
Key:
=residual current on faulted feeder
=residual current on healthy feeder 19.1 Sensitive earthfault protection
It can therefore be seen that:
To apply this form of protection, the relay must meet two
requirements:
So: a. current measurement setting capable of being set to very
low values
b. an RCA of 0°, and capable of fine adjustment around this
Figure C1.24: value
Zero sequence network showing residual currents
The sensitive current element is required because of the very
low current that may flow – so settings of less than 0.5% of
However, in practical cases, resistance is present and Figure rated current may be required. However, as compensation
C1.25 shows the resulting phasor diagrams. If the residual by the Petersen Coil may not be perfect, low levels of steady-
voltage Vres is used as the polarising voltage, the residual state earthfault current will flow and increase the residual
current is phase shifted by an angle less than 90° on the current seen by the relay. An often used setting value is the
faulted feeder and greater than 90° on the healthy feeders. per phase charging current of the circuit being protected.
Hence a directional relay can be used, and with an RCA of Fine tuning of the RCA is also required about the 0° setting,
0°, the healthy feeder residual current will fall in the ‘restrain’ to compensate for coil and feeder resistances and the
area of the relay characteristic while the faulted feeder residual performance of the CT used. In practice, these adjustments
current falls in the ‘operate’ area. are best carried out on site through deliberate application of
faults and recording of the resulting currents.
Often, a resistance is deliberately inserted in parallel with the
Petersen Coil to ensure a measurable earthfault current and 19.2 Sensitive wattmetric protection
increase the angular difference between the residual signals It can be seen in Figure C1.25 that a small angular difference
to aid relay application. exists between the spill current on the healthy and faulted
Having established that a directional relay can be used, two feeders. Figure C1.26 illustrates how this angular difference
possibilities exist for the type of protection element that can gives rise to active components of current which are in
be applied – sensitive earthfault and zero sequence wattmetric. antiphase to each other.

C1 19. Earthfault protection on Petersen Coil earthed networks
Wattmetric power is calculated in practice using residual

quantities instead of zero sequence ones. The resulting values
Active component are therefore nine times the zero sequence quantities as the
of residual current: residual values of current and voltage are each three times
faulted feeder Operate
the corresponding zero sequence values. The equation used
is:
Active component
Vres x Ires x cos ( ϕ - ϕc )
Zero torque line Restrain
of residual current:
healthy feeder
for O° RCA = 9 xVo x Io x cos ( ϕ - ϕc ) …Equation C1.5
where:
Vres = residual voltage
Figure C1.26:
Resistive components of spill current Ires = residual current
Vo = zero sequence voltage
Consequently, the active components of zero sequence power Io = zero sequence current
will also lie in similar planes and a relay capable of detecting
active power can make a discriminatory decision. If the
ϕ = angle between Vres and Ires
wattmetric component of zero sequence power is detected ϕc = relay characteristic angle setting
in the forward direction, it indicates a fault on that feeder,
The current and RCA settings are as for a sensitive earthfault
while a power in the reverse direction indicates a fault
relay.
elsewhere on the system. This method of protection is more
popular than the sensitive earthfault method, and can provide
greater security against false operation due to spurious CBCT
output under non-earthfault conditions.
20. Examples of time and current grading
This section provides details of the time/current grading of

some example networks, to illustrate the process of relay
setting calculations and relay grading. They are based on the
use of a modern numerical overcurrent relay illustrated in
Figure C1.27, with setting data taken from this relay.
20.1 Relay phase fault setting example
Consider the system shown in Figure C1.28.
The problem is to calculate appropriate relay settings for
relays 1-5 inclusive. Because the example is concerned with
grading, considerations such as bus-zone protection, and
CT knee-point voltage requirements, etc., are not dealt with.
All curves are plotted to an 11kV base. The contactors in
series with fuses FS1 / FS2 have a maximum breaking capacity
of 3 kA, and relay FS2 has been set to ensure that the fuse
operates prior to the contactor for currents in excess of this
Figure C1.27:
value. CT’s for relays, F1 / F2 and 5 are existing CTs with 5 A MiCOM Px40 in 60 TE
secondaries, while the remaining CTs are new with 1 A
secondaries. Relay 5 is the property of the supply utility, and
is required to be set using an SI characteristic in order to
ensure grading with upstream relays.

20. Examples of time and current grading C1
c. Cables C2, C3
500 MVA 11 kV
Utility source
ZC2 , ZC3 = 0.158 Ω
11 kV
5 On 500 MVA base,
I>>
I>
3000/5 Utility 0 .158 ×100 × 500 = 65.3%
I > client ZC2 , ZC3 =
Max load 2800A
Cable C 1 : 5 x 3 x1 c x 630mm2 XLPE
(11)2
4 Z = 0.042 + j 0.086 / km / cable
I> L = 2 km d. Source Impedance (500 MVA base)
I > 3000/1
500
Bus A Z S =
× 100% = 100%
11 kV 500
3
I>> 20.1.2 Fault Levels
I> 1000/1
The fault levels are calculated as follows:

Reactor R1 : a. At bus C
Z=4% on 20 MVA
Max load 1000 A
For 2 feeders,
Bus B
500 × 100
11 kV 1 2 Fault Level = MVA
I>
500/1
I>
500/1
Z R1 + ZS +ZC1 + ZC 2 2
I > I >
= 10.6 kA on 11 kV base
Max load 400 A/feeder
Cables C2,C3: For a single feeder, fault level
1 x 3c x 185mm 2 XLPE C2 C3
= 178 MVA
Z = 0.128 + j 0.093 / km
L = Ikm = 9.33 kA
Bus C b. At bus B
11 kV
FS2 FS1
500 × 100
160 A 125 A Fault Level = MVA
F2 F1 ZS + ZC1 +Z R1
150/5 I> 200/5 I>
IS = 120% IS = 110% = 232 MVA

TMS = 0.25 TMS = 0.1
Max load 130 A Max load 190 A Max load 90 A = 12. 2 kA
c. At bus A
500 ×100
Figure C1.28: Fault Level = MVA
IDMT relay grading example ZS + ZC1
= 432MVA
20.1.1 Impedance Calculations = 22.7kA
All impedances must first be referred to a common base, d. Source
taken as 500 MVA, as follows:
Fault Level = 500 MVA
a. Reactor R1
= 26.3 kA
4 × 500
Z R1 = = 100 % 20.1.3 CT ratio selection
20
This requires consideration not only of the maximum load
b. Cable C1 current, but also of the maximum secondary current under
fault conditions.
0.096
ZC1 = × 2 = 0.038 Ω
5 CT secondaries are generally rated to carry a short-term current
equal to 100 x rated secondary current. Therefore, a check is
On 500 MVA base, required that none of the new CT secondaries has a current
0.038 ×100 × 500 = 15.7% of more than 100 A when maximum fault current is flowing in
ZC1 = the primary. Using the calculated fault currents, this condition
(11)2 is satisfied, so modifications to the CT ratios are not required.

C1 20. Examples of time and current grading
20.1.4 Relay overcurrent settings – Relays 1/2 level may make the choice of relay current settings difficult.
These relays perform overcurrent protection of the cable The grading margin now has to be considered. For simplicity,
feeders, Busbar C and backup-protection to relays F1, F2 a fixed grading margin of 0.3 s between relays is used in the
and their associated fuses FS1 and FS2. The settings for calculations, in accordance with Table C1.2. Between fuse
Relays1 and 2 will be identical, so calculations will only be and relay, Equation C1.4 is applied, and with fuse FS2 pre-
performed for Relay1. Consider first the current setting of arcing time of 0.01 s (from Figure C1.29), the grading margin
the relay. is 0.154 s.
Relay 1 must be able to reset at a current of 400 A – the rating Consider first the IDMT overcurrent protection. Select the EI
of the feeder. The relay has a drop-off/pick-up ratio of 0.95, characteristic, as fuses exist downstream, to ensure grading.
so the relay current setting must not be less than 400/0.95, The relay must discriminate with the longest operating time
or 421 A. A suitable setting that is greater than this value is between relays FS1, and fuse FS2 (being the largest fuse) at
450 A. However, Section 12.3 also recommends that the current the maximum fault level seen by relays 1 and 2. The maximum
setting should be three times the largest fuse rating (i.e. 3 x fault current seen by relay1 for a fault at Busbar C occurs when
160 A, the rating of the largest fuse on the outgoing circuits only one of cables C2, C3 is in service. This is because the
from Busbar C ), leading to a current setting of 480 A, or 96% whole of the fault current then flows through the feeder that is
of relay rated primary current. Note that in this application of in service. With two feeders in service, although the fault level
relays to a distribution system, the question of maximum and at Busbar C is higher, each relay only sees half of the total fault
minimum fault levels are probably not relevant as the difference current, which is less than the fault current with a single feeder
between maximum and minimum fault levels will be very small. in service. With EI characteristics used for relays F1 and F2,
However in other applications where significant differences the operating time for relay F1 is 0.02 s at TMS-0.1 because
between maximum and minimum fault levels exist, it is essential the fault current is greater than 20 times relay setting, at which
to ensure that the selection of a current setting that is greater point the EI characteristic becomes definite time (Figure C1.4)
than full load current does not result in the relay failing to and 0.05 s for relay F2 (TMS=0.25).
operate under minimum fault current conditions. Such a
Hence select relay 1 operating time = 0.3 + 0.05 = 0.35 s, to
situation may arise for example in a self-contained power
ensure grading with relay F2 at a fault current of 9.33 kA.
system with its own generation. Minimum generation may be
represented by the presence of a single generator and the With a primary setting of 480 A, a fault current of 9.33 kA
difference between minimum fault level and maximum load represents 9330/480 = 19.44 times setting.
100.00 100.00
10.00 10.00
Time (sec)
Time (sec)
1.00 1.00
0.10 0.10
0.01 0.01
100 1000 10000 100000 10000
100 1000 100000
Current (A) Current (A)
(a) Initial grading curves (b) Revised initial grading curves
Relay F1 Relays 1/2 Relay F1 Relays 1/2

Relay F2 Relay 3 Relay F2 Relay 3
Fuse FS1 Relay 4 Fuse FS1 Relay 4
Fuse FS2 Fuse FS2
Figure C1.29:
Initial relay grading curves – overcurrent relay example

Thus relay 1 operating time at TMS=1.0 is 0.21 s. The 20.1.5 Relay overcurrent settings - Relay 3
required TMS Setting is given by the formula:
This relay provides overcurrent protection for reactor R1, and
operation time required backup overcurrent protection for cables C2 and C3.
TMS=
Actual op. time required at TMS =1.0 The overcurrent protection also provides busbar protection
for Busbar B.
0. 35
TMS = =1.66 Again, the EI characteristic is used to ensure grading with
0. 21
relays 1 and 2. The maximum load current is 1000 A. Relay
This value of TMS is outside the settable range of the relay 3 current setting is therefore
(maximum setting 1.2). Therefore, changes must be made to
feeder flc
the relay current setting in order to bring the value of TMS I sr 3 >
required into the range available, provided this does not result CT primary current ×0. 95
in the inability of the relay to operate at the minimum fault
Substituting values,
level.
Isr3 > 1052 A
By re-arrangement of the formula for the EI characteristic:
Use a setting of 106% or 1060 A, nearest available setting
80 above 1052 A.
I sr1 f = +1
t Relay 3 has to grade with relays ½ under two conditions:
where
1. for a fault just beyond relays 1 and 2 where the fault current
t is the required operation time (s) will be the busbar fault current of 12.2 kA
Isr1f = setting of relay at fault current 2. for a fault at Bus C where the fault current seen by either
relay 1 or 2 will be half the total Bus C fault current of
Hence, with t = 0.35, 10.6 kA, i.e. 5.3 kA
Isr1f = 15.16 Examining first condition 1. With a current setting of 620 A, a
or, TMS of 1.0 and a fault current of 12.2 kA, relay 1 will operate
in 0.21 s. Using a grading interval of 0.3 s, relay 3 must therefore
9330
I sr1 = = 615.4 A operate in
15.16
0.3 + 0.21 = 0.51 s
616
I sr1 = = 1.232 at a fault current of 12.2 kA.
500
12.2 kA represents 12200/1060 = 11.51 times setting for relay
Use 1.24 = 620A nearest available value 3 and thus the time multiplier setting of relay 3 should be
0.84 to give an operating time of 0.51 s at 11.51 times setting.
At a TMS of 1.0, operation time at 9330 A
Consider now condition 2. With settings of 620 A and TMS
80 of 1.0 and a fault current of 5.3 kA, relay 1 will operate in
= 2
= 0.355 s
 9330  1.11 s. Using a grading interval of 0.3 s, relay 3 must therefore
  −1
 620  operate in
Hence, required TMS

0.3 + 1.11 = 1.41 s
0. 35 at a fault current of 5.3 kA.
= = 0.99
0.355 5.3 kA represents 5300/1060 = 5 times setting for relay 3,
and thus the time multiplier setting of relay 3 should be 0.33
for convenience, use a TMS of 1.0, slightly greater than the to give an operating time of 1.11 s at 5 times setting. Thus
required value. condition 1 represents the worst case and the time multiplier
From the grading curves of Figure C1.29, it can be seen that setting of relay 3 should be set at 0.84. In practice, a value
there are no grading problems with fuse FS1 or relays F1 of 0.85 is used as the nearest available setting on the relay.
and F2. Relay 3 also has an instantaneous element. This is set such
that it will not operate for the maximum through-fault current
seen by the relay, a setting of 130% of this value being
satisfactory. The setting is therefore:
1.3 x 12.2 kA = 15.86 kA

This is equal to a current setting of 14.96 times the setting of always be as low as possible to help ensure positive operation
relay 3. of the relay and provide overload protection. Trial and error
is often used, but suitable software can speed the task – for
20.1.6 Relay 4
instance it is not difficult to construct a spreadsheet with the
This must grade with relay 3 and relay 5. The supply authority fuse/relay operation times and grading margins calculated.
requires that relay 5 use an SI characteristic to ensure grading Satisfactory grading can be found for relay 4 setting values
with relays further upstream, so the SI characteristic will be of:
used for relay 4 also. Relay 4 must grade with relay 3 at Bus
Ist4 = 1.0 or 3000 A
A maximum fault level of 22.7 kA. However with the use of an
instantaneous high set element for relay 3, the actual grading TMS = 0.275
point becomes the point at which the high set setting of relay
At 22.7 kA, the operation time of relay 4 is 0.93 s. The revised
3 operates, i.e. 15.86 kA. At this current, the operation time
grading curves are shown in Figure C1.29(b).
of relay 3 is
80 20.1.7 Relay 5
× 0.85 s = 0.305 s
Relay 5 must grade with relay 4 at a fault current of 22.7 kA.
(14.96 )
2
−1
At this fault current, relay 4 operates in 0.93 s and thus relay
Thus, relay 4 required operating time is 5 must operate in
0.305 + 0.3 = 0.605 s 0.3 + 0.93 = 1.23 s at 22.7 kA
at a fault level of 15.86 kA. A current setting of 110% of relay 4 current setting (i.e. 110%
or 3300 A) is chosen to ensure relay 4 picks up prior to relay
Relay 4 current setting must be at least
5. Thus 22.7 kA represents 6.88 times the setting of relay 5.
2800 Relay 5 must grade with relay 4 at a fault current of 22.7 kA,
= 98%
3000 × 0.95 where the required operation time is 1.23 s. At a TMS of 1.0,
relay 5 operation time is
For convenience, use a value of 100% (=3000 A). Thus relay
0.14
4 must operate in 0.605 s at 15860/3000 = 5.29 times setting. = 3.56 s
(6.88)
0. 02
Thus select a time multiplier setting of 0.15, giving a relay −1
operating time of 0.62 s for a normal inverse type characteristic.
Therefore, the required TMS is 1.23/3.56 = 0.345, use 0.35
At this stage, it is instructive to review the grading curves, nearest available value.
which are shown in Figure C1.29(a). While it can be seen that
The protection grading curves that result are shown in Figure
there are no grading problems between the fuses and relays
C1.30 and the setting values in Table C1.5. Grading is now
1/2, and between relays F1/2 and relays 1/2, it is clear that
satisfactory. In situations where one of the relays to be graded
relay 3 and relay 4 do not grade over the whole range of fault
is provided by a third party, it is common for the settings of
current. This is a consequence of the change in characteristic
the relay to be specified and this may lead to a lack of
for relay 4 to SI from the EI characteristic of relay 3 to ensure
co-ordination between this relay and others (usually those
grading of relay 4 with relay 5.
downstream). Negotiation is then required to try and achieve
The solution is to increase the TMS setting of relay 4 until acceptable settings, but it is often the case that no change
correct grading is achieved. The alternative is to increase the to the settings of the relay provided by the third party is
current setting, but this is undesirable unless the limit of the allowed. A lack of co-ordination between relays then has to
TMS setting is reached, because the current setting should be accepted over at least part of the range of fault currents.

100.00
10.00
Relay F1
Relay F2
Time (sec)
Fuse FS1
1.00
Fuse FS2
Relays 1/2
Relay 3
Relay 4
0.10
Relay 5
0.01
100 1000 10000 100000
Current (A)
Figure C1.30:
IDMT relay grading example
Relay settings
Max. fault
Load current
Relay / fuse current Ct ratio Fuse rating Charac- Current setting
(A) TMS
(A) teristic Primary amps Per cent
F1 190 10.6 200/5 EI 100 100 0.1
F2 130 10.6 150/5 EI 150 120 0.25
FS1 90 10.6 - 125 A
FS2 130 10.6 - 160 A - - -
1 400 12.2 500/1 EI 620 124 1
2 400 12.2 500/1 EI 620 124 1
1060 106
3 1000 22.7 1000/1 EI Instant. 0.85
15860 14.96
4 3000 22.7 3000/1 EI 3000 100 0.275
5 3000 26.25 3000/5 EI 3300 110 0.35
Table C1.5:
Relay settings for overcurrent relay example
20.2 Relay earthfault settings levels have to be used. Note that earthfault levels can be
higher than phase fault levels if the system contains multiple
The procedure for setting the earthfault elements is identical
earth points, or if earthfault levels are considered on the star
to that for the overcurrent elements, except that zero sequence
side of a delta/star transformer when the star winding is solidly
impedances must be used if available and different from
earthed.
positive sequence impedances in order to calculate fault
levels. However, such impedances are frequently not available, On the circuit with fuse F2, low-level earthfaults may not be
or known only approximately, and the phase fault current of sufficient magnitude to blow the fuse.

Attempting to grade the earthfault element of the upstream

T1
relay with fuse F2 will not be possible. Similarly, relays F1 220/110kV
and F2 have phase fault settings that do not provide effective 4 50MVA
Z=12.5%
2
I> I>
protection against earthfaults. The remedy would be to modify Id Ia Ic
the downstream protection, but such considerations lie outside Source 6 IF4 IF3
the scope of this example. In general therefore, the earthfault 10000MVA I> F4 F3
If Bus P
elements of relays upstream of circuits with only phase fault 220kV T2
220/110kV Bus Q 1 IF1
protection (i.e. relays with only phase fault elements or fuses) 50MVA 110kV I> F1
Z=12.5%
will have to be set with a compromise that they will detect Ie Ib
downstream earthfaults but will not provide a discriminative 5 3 IF2
I> I>
trip. This illustrates the practical point that it is rare in anything
(a) Circuit diagram F2
other than a very simple network to achieve satisfactory
grading for all faults throughout the network.
4 2
In the example of Figure C1.27, it is likely that the difference I> Z=0.25pu I>
Id Ia Ic
in fault levels between phase to phase and phase to earthfaults
6 IF4 IF3
will be very small and thus the only function of earthfault Source Bus P
F4
0.01pu I I> F3
elements is to detect and isolate low level earthfaults not seen f
by the phase fault elements. Following the guidelines 1 IF1
Bus Q I>
of Section 16, relays 1/2 can use a current setting of 30% Z=0.25pu F1
Ie Ib
(150 A) and a TMS of 0.2, using the EI characteristic. Grading
5 3 IF2
of relays 3/4/5 follows the same procedure as described for I> I>
the phase-fault elements of these relays. All impedances to F2
100MVA, 110kV base
20.3 Protection of parallel feeders (b) Impedance diagram
Figure C1.31(a) shows two parallel transformer feeders forming

part of a supply circuit. Impedances are as given in the
diagram. Figure C1.31:
System diagram: parallel feeder example
The example shows that unless relays 2 and 3 are made
directional, they will maloperate for a fault at F3. Also shown
is how to calculate appropriate relay settings for all six relays
to ensure satisfactory protection for faults at locations F1 -
The settings shown in Figure C1.32(a) can be arrived at, with
F4. the relay operation times shown in Figure C1.32(b). It is clear
Figure C1.31(b) shows the impedance diagram, to 100 MVA, that for a fault at F3 with both transformer feeders in service,
110 kV base. The fault currents for faults with various system relay 3 operates at the same time as relay 2 and results in
configurations are shown in Table C1.6. total disconnection of Bus Q and all consumers supplied
solely from it. This is undesirable – the advantages of
If relays 2 and 3 are non-directional, then, using SI relay
duplicated 100% rated transformers have been lost.
characteristics for all relays, grading of the relays is dictated
by the following: By making relays 2 and 3 directional as shown in Figure
C1.33(a), lower settings for these relays can be adopted –
a. fault at location F1, with 2 feeders in service
they can be set as low as reasonably practical but normally
b. fault at location F4, with one feeder in service a current setting of about 50% of feeder full load current is
System Relay settings

Fault position
config. Fault la lb lc ld le if
F1 2 fdrs 3888 1944 1944 0 972 972 1944
F1 / F2 2 fdr 2019 2019 0 0 1009 0 1009
F2 2 fdrs 3 888 1944 1944 0 972 972 1944
F3 2 fdrs 3888 1944 1944 1944 972 972 1944
F4 1 fdr 26243 0 0 0 26243 0 26243
Table C1.6:
Fault currents for parallel feeder example

T1
Current Characteristic
Relay CT primary setting TMS 220/110 kV
1 300 1 0.2 SI
4 50 MVA 2
300 0.3
I> Z=12,5% I I> I
2 1.1 SI Id a c
3 300 1.1 0.3 SI
4 300 0.61 0.425 SI 6 IF4 IF3
F4 F3
5 300 0.61 0.425 SI I> Bus P
If T2
6 300 0.7 0.7 SI 220 kV
220/110 kV 1I
(a) Relay settings - non-directional relays Source I> 50 MVA Bus Q
I> F1 F1
10000 MVA Ie Z=12,5% I 110 kV
100.00 b
5 3 IF2
Relay 1
I> (a) Circuit I>
Time (sec)
10.00 diagram F2
Relays 2/3
Relays 4/5
1.00
Current Characteristic
Relay 6 Relay CT primary setting TMS
0.10 1 300 1 0.2 SI
100 1000 10000 100000 2 300 0.42 0.1 SI
3 300 0.42 0.1 SI
Current (A) 4 300 0.6 0.275 SI
(b) Relay grading curves - non-directional relays 5 300 0.6 0.275 SI
6 300 0.7 0.475 SI
(b) Relay settings

Figure C1.32:
Relay grading for parallel feeder example – non-directional
relays 100.00
10.00
Time (sec)
used, with a TMS of 0.1. Grading rules can be established

as follows:
1.00
a. relay 4 is graded with relay 1 for faults at location F1 with
one transformer feeder in service
0.10
b. relay 4 is graded with relay 3 for faults at location F3 with 100 1000 (ii) (i) 10000 (iii) 100000
two transformer feeders in service Current (A) - referred to 110 kV
c. relay 6 grades with relay 4 for faults at F4.
Relay 1 (i) Fault current 3888 A -
d. relay 6 also has to grade with relay 4 for faults at F1 with Relays 2/3
faults F1, F2, F3 - 2 feeders
both transformer feeders in service – relay 6 sees the total (ii) Fault current 2019 A -
Relays 4/5 faults F1, F2 - 1 feeder
fault current but relay 4 only 50% of this current.
Relay 6 (iii) Fault current 26243 A -
Normal rules about calculating current setting values of relays fault F4 - 1 feeder
in series apply. The settings and resulting operation times are
(c) Relay characteristics
given in Figure C1.33(b) and (c) respectively.
In practice, a complete protection study would include
instantaneous elements on the primary side of the transformers
Figures C1.33:
and analysis of the situation with only one transformer in Relay grading for parallel feeder example – directional relays
service. These have been omitted from this example, as the
purpose is to illustrate the principles of parallel feeder
protection in a simple fashion.
20.4 Grading of a ring main
Figure C1.34 shows a simple ring main, with a single infeed
at Bus A and three load busbars. Settings for the directional
relays R2-R7 and non-directional relays R1-R8 are required.
Maximum load current in the ring is 785 A (maximum continuous
current with one transformer out of service), so 1000/1 A CTs
are chosen. The relay considered is a MiCOM P140 series.

The first step is to establish the maximum fault current at each

relay location. Assuming a fault at Bus B (the actual location
is not important), two possible configurations of the ring have V
to be considered, firstly a closed ring and secondly an open
ZS+ZT
ring. For convenience, the ring will be considered to be open
6.08%
at CB1 (CB8 is the other possibility to be considered, but the
A
conclusion will be the same). ZAD ZAB
4.13% 6.2%
D B
11 kV fault level =200 MVA ZCD ZBC
11 kV
5.37% I1 8.26%
V
I1=
5 MVA 5 MVA
⎭
⎫
ZBC+ZCD+ZAD ⎪
⎪
⎪
ZS 1+ +ZBC+ZCD+ZAD
⎪ ⎪
Z=7.15% Z=7.15% ⎬
⎪
⎪
⎬
⎪
ZAB
⎪
⎪ ⎪
⎫ ⎪
⎭
1000/1 1000/1
(a) Ring closed
A
3.3 kV
CB8 CB1
R8
I> I>
R1
V
1000/1 1000/1
C1 C4 ZS+ZT
= 1 km = 1 . 5 km 6.08%
CB7 1000/1 1000/1 CB2
A
ZAD ZAB
R7 I> 4.13% 6.2%
D I> R2 B
D B
CB6 1000/1 1000/1 CB3 ZCD ZBC
5.37% I1 8.26%
3.3 kV 3.3 kV
R6 C2 C3 R3
I> =1. .3 km = 2 km I> C
V
R5 R4 I'1=
I> 1000/1 1000/1 I>
+ZS+ZBC+ZCD+ZAD
CB5 CB4
C
(b) Ring open at CB1
3.3 kV
All cables are 3 x 1c x 1200mm2, AI conductor, Z = 0.09 / km

VTs omitted for clarity
Figure C1.35:
Impedance diagrams with ring open
Figure C1.34:
Ring main grading example – circuit diagram
Clockwise Clockwise
Open point CB8 Open point CB1
Figure C1.35 shows the impedance diagram for these two Bus Fault current kA Bus Fault current kA
cases. D 7.124 B 3.665
Three-phase fault currents I1 and I'1 can be calculated as C 4.259 C 5.615
2.13 kA and 3.67 kA respectively, so that the worst case is B 3.376 D 8.568
with the ring open (this can also be seen from consideration
of the impedance relationships, without the necessity of Table C1.7:
performing the calculation). Fault current tabulation with ring open
Table C1.7 shows the fault currents at each bus for open
points at CB1 and CB8.

For grading of the relays, consider relays looking in a clockwise

100.00
direction round the ring, i.e. relays R1/R3/R5/R7.
20.4.1 Relay R7
Load current cannot flow from Bus D to Bus A since Bus A
is the only source. Hence low relay current and TMS settings 10.00
can be chosen to ensure a rapid fault clearance time. These
Time (sec)
can be chosen arbitrarily, so long as they are above the cable
charging current and within the relay setting characteristics.
Select a relay current setting of 0.8 (i.e. 800A CT primary
current) and TMS of 0.05. This ensures that the other relays 1.00
will not pick up under conditions of normal load current. At Relay R1
Relay R3
a fault current of 3376 A, relay operating time on the SI
Relay R5
characteristic is
 0.14  0.10
Relay R7
0.05 ×   s = 0.24 s 1000 10000

Current (A)
100,000
 ( 4.22)
0.02
− 1 
  (a) Clockwise grading of relays (ring open at CB8)
20.4.2 Relay R5
100.00
This relay must grade with relay R7 at 3376 A and have a
minimum operation time of 0.54 s. Relay R5 current setting
must be at least 110% of relay R7 to prevent unwanted pickup,
so select relay R5 current setting of 0.88 (i.e. 880 A CT primary
current). 10.00
Time (sec)
Relay R5 operating time at TMS = 1.0

 0.14 
=  s = 5.14 s
 (3.84)
0.02
− 1  1.00
  Relay R8
Relay R6
Hence, relay R5 TMS = 0.54 = 0.105 s Relay R4
5.14
Relay R2
Use nearest settable value of TMS of 0.125. 0.10
1000 10000 100,000
Table C1.8 summarises the relay settings, while Figure C1.36 Current (A)
(b) Anticlockwise grading of relays (ring open at CB1)
illustrates the relay grading curves.
Figure C1.36:
Ring main example – relay grading curves
Max. fault
Max. load Current setting
Bus Relay Relay charact. CT radio current (A) TMS
current (A) p.u.
(3.3kV base)
D R7 SI 1000/1 874 3376 0.8 0.05
C R5 SI 1000/1 874 4259 0.88 0.125
B R3 SI 1000/1 874 7124 0.97 0.2
A R1 SI 1000/1 874 14387 1.07 0.275
A R8 SI 1000/1 874 14387 1.07 0.3
D R6 SI 1000/1 874 8568 0.97 0.2
C R4 SI 1000/1 874 5615 0.88 0.125
B R2 SI 1000/1 874 3665 0.8 0.05
Table C1.8:
Ring main example relay settings

C1 21. References
[C1.1] Directional Element Connections for Phase Relays.

W.K Sonnemann,
Transactions A.I.E.E. 1950.

C1

C2
Line Differential Protection

Chapter

C2
1. Introduction 189
2. Convention of direction 190
3. Conditions for direction comparison 190
4. Circulating current system 190
5. Balanced voltage system 192
6. Summation arrangements 192
7. Examples of electromechanical and static unit protection systems 193
8. Digital / numerical current differential protection systems 194
9. Carrier unit protection schemes 197
10. Current differential scheme – analogue techniques 197
11. Phase comparison protection scheme considerations 201
12. Examples 204
13. References 207

C2 1. Introduction
The graded overcurrent systems described in Chapter [C1:

Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults], though End G End H
attractively simple in principle, do not meet all the protection
requirements of a power system. Application difficulties are
encountered for two reasons: firstly, satisfactory grading
cannot always be arranged for a complex network, and
secondly, the settings may lead to maximum tripping times Relay
at points in the system that are too long to prevent excessive
disturbances occurring.
These problems led to the concept of ‘Unit Protection’, whereby
sections of the power system are protected individually as a
Figure C2.1:
complete unit without reference to other sections. One form Circulating current system
of ‘Unit Protection’ is also known as ‘Differential Protection’,
as the principle is to sense the difference in currents between
the incoming and outgoing terminals of the unit being An alternative arrangement is shown in Figure C2.2, in which
protected. the CT secondary windings are opposed for through-fault
Other forms can be based on directional comparison, or conditions so that no current flows in the series connected
distance teleprotection schemes, which are covered in Chapter relays. The former system is known as a ‘Circulating Current’
[C4: Distance Protection Schemes], or phase comparison system, while the latter is known as a ‘Balanced Voltage’
protection, which is discussed later in this chapter. The system.
configuration of the power system may lend itself to unit Most systems of unit protection function through the
protection; for instance, a simple earth fault relay applied at determination of the relative direction of the fault current. This
the source end of a transformer-feeder can be regarded as direction can only be expressed on a comparative basis, and
unit protection provided that the transformer winding such a comparative measurement is the common factor of
associated with the feeder is not earthed. In this case the many systems, including directional comparison protection
protection coverage is restricted to the feeder and transformer and distance teleprotection schemes with directional
winding because the transformer cannot transmit zero impedance measurement.
sequence current to an out-of-zone fault.
A major factor in consideration of unit protection is the method
In most cases, however, a unit protection system involves the of communication between the relays. This is covered in detail
measurement of fault currents (and possibly voltages) at each in Chapter [D2: Signalling and Intertripping in Protection
end of the zone, and the transmission of information between Schemes] in respect of the latest fibre-optic based digital
the equipment at zone boundaries. It should be noted that a techniques. For older ‘pilot wire’ systems, only brief mention
stand-alone distance relay, although nominally responding is made.
only to faults within its setting zone, does not satisfy the
conditions for a unit system because the zone is not clearly
defined; it is defined only within the accuracy limits of the
measurement. Also, to cater for some conditions, the setting End G End H
of a stand-alone distance relay may also extend outside of
the protected zone to cater for some conditions.
Merz and Price [Ref C2.1: Protective Gear] first established
the principle of current differential unit systems; their
fundamental differential systems have formed the basis of
many highly developed protection arrangements for feeders
and numerous other items of plant. In one arrangement, an Relay G Relay H
auxiliary ‘pilot’ circuit interconnects similar current transformers
at each end of the protected zone, as shown in Figure C2.1.
Current transmitted through the zone causes secondary Figure C2.2:
current to circulate round the pilot circuit without producing Balanced voltage system
any current in the relay.
For a fault within the protected zone the CT secondary currents
will not balance, compared with the through-fault condition,
and the difference between the currents will flow in the relay.

2. Convention of direction C2
It is useful to establish a convention of direction of current

flow; for this purpose, the direction measured from a busbar
outwards along a feeder is taken as positive. Hence the Source Source
notation of current flow shown in Figure C2.3; the section GH + _ + +
carries a through current which is counted positive at G but
negative at H, while the infeeds to the faulted section HJ are
both positive.
Fault
Neglect of this rule has often led to anomalous arrangements G H J
of equipment or difficulty in describing the action of a complex
system. When applied, the rule will normally lead to the use
of identical equipments at the zone boundaries, and is equally
Figure C2.3:
suitable for extension to multi-ended systems. It also conforms Convention of current direction
to the standard methods of network analysis.
3. Conditions for direction comparison
The circulating current and balanced voltage systems of To define a current requires that both magnitude and phase
Figures C2.1 and C2.2 perform full vectorial comparison of be stated. Comparison in terms of both of these quantities
the zone boundary currents. Such systems can be treated as is performed in the Merz-Price systems, but it is not always
analogues of the protected zone of the power system, in easy to transmit all this information over some pilot channels.
which CT secondary quantities represent primary currents Chapter [D2: Signalling and Intertripping in Protection
and the relay operating current corresponds to an in-zone Schemes] provides a detailed description of modern methods
fault current. that may be used.
These systems are simple in concept; they are nevertheless
applicable to zones having any number of boundary
connections and for any pattern of terminal currents.
4. Circulating current system
The principle of this system is shown in outline in Figure C2.1. FF' will be very small, but the CT exciting currents will be
If the current transformers are ideal, the functioning of the unequal due to the unequal burdens and relay current IR will
system is straightforward. The transformers will, however, have still be non-zero.
errors arising from both Wattmetric and magnetising current
4.1 Transient instability
losses that cause deviation from the ideal, and the
interconnections between them may have unequal impedances. It is shown in Chapter [B2: Current and Voltage Transformers,
This can give rise to a ‘spill’ current through the relay even Section 4.10], that an asymmetrical current applied to a current
without a fault being present, thus limiting the sensitivity that transformer will induce a flux that is greater than the peak flux
can be obtained. Figure C2.4 illustrates the equivalent circuit corresponding to the steady state alternating component of
of the circulating current scheme. If a high impedance relay the current. It may take the CT into saturation, with the result
is used, then unless the relay is located at point J in the circuit, that the dynamic exciting impedance is reduced and the
a current will flow through the relay even with currents IPg and exciting current greatly increased.
IPh being identical. If a low impedance relay is used, voltage

C2 4. Circulating current system
below which the relay element does not have the sensitivity
End G End H to pick up. Relay calibration can in fact be in terms of voltage.
4.2 Bias
The ‘spill’ current in the relay arising from these various sources
of error is dependent on the magnitude of the through current,
iSh being negligible at low values of through-fault current but
Relay sometimes reaching a disproportionately large value for more
severe faults. Setting the operating threshold of the protection
above the maximum level of spill current produces poor
sensitivity. By making the differential setting approximately
proportional to the fault current, the low-level fault sensitivity
(a) Subscripts: is greatly improved. Figure C2.5 illustrates a typical bias
- CT Primary characteristic for a modern relay that overcomes the problem.
- CT Secondary At low currents, the bias is small, thus enabling the relay to
- exciting
- Lead be made sensitive. At higher currents, such as would be
G'
- end G obtained from inrush or through fault conditions, the bias used
F' - end H is higher, and thus the spill current required to cause operation
G''
is higher. The relay is therefore more tolerant of spill current
J H
at higher fault currents and therefore less likely to maloperate,
G F
while still being sensitive at lower current levels.
H'
H''
Electro-motive forces with high impedance relay

Electro-motive forces with low impedance relay
(b)
Figure C2.4:
Equivalent circuit of circulating current scheme Percentage
bias
Operate
When the balancing current transformers of a unit protection

system differ in excitation characteristics, or have unequal Percentage
burdens, the transient flux build-ups will differ and an increased bias
Restrain
‘spill’ current will result. There is a consequent risk of relay
operation on a healthy circuit under transient conditions, which
is clearly unacceptable. One solution is to include a stabilising
resistance in series with the relay. Details of how to calculate
the value of the stabilising resistor are usually included in the
instruction manuals of all relays that require one.
When a stabilising resistor is used, the relay current setting
can be reduced to any practical value, the relay now being Figure C2.5:
a voltage- measuring device. There is obviously a lower limit, Typical bias characteristic of relay

5. Balanced voltage system C2
This section is included for historical reasons, mainly because 5.1 Stability Limit of the Voltage Balance System
of the number of such schemes still to be found in service
Unlike normal current transformers, transactors are not subject
– for new installations it has been almost completely
to errors caused by the progressive build-up of exciting
superseded by circulating current schemes. It is the dual of
current, because the whole of the primary current is expended
the circulating current protection, and is summarised in Figure
as exciting current. In consequence, the secondary e.m.f. is
C2.2 as used in the ‘Translay H04’ scheme.
an accurate measure of the primary current within the linear
With primary through current, the secondary e.m.f.s of the range of the transformer. Provided the transformers are
current transformers are opposed, and provide no current in designed to be linear up to the maximum value of fault current,
the interconnecting pilot leads or the series connected relays. balance is limited only by the inherent limit of accuracy of
An in-zone fault leads to a circulating current condition in the the transformers, and as a result of capacitance between the
CT secondaries and hence to relay operation. pilot cores. A broken line in the equivalent circuit shown in
Figure C2.6 indicates such capacitance. Under through-fault
An immediate consequence of the arrangement is that the
conditions the pilots are energised to a proportionate voltage,
current transformers are in effect open-circuited, as no
the charging current flowing through the relays. The stability
secondary current flows for any primary through-current
ratio that can be achieved with this system is only moderate
conditions. To avoid excessive saturation of the core and
and a bias technique is used to overcome the problem.
secondary waveform distortion, the core is provided with
non-magnetic gaps sufficient to absorb the whole primary
m.m.f. at the maximum current level, the flux density remaining
within the linear range. The secondary winding therefore End G End H
develops an e.m.f. and can be regarded as a voltage source.

The shunt reactance of the transformer is relatively low, so
the device acts as a transformer loaded with a reactive shunt;
hence the American name of transactor. The equivalent circuit
of the system is as shown in Figure C2.6.
The series connected relays are of relatively high impedance; Pilot
Parameters
because of this the CT secondary winding resistances are
not of great significance and the pilot resistance can be
moderately large without significantly affecting the operation
of the system. This is why the scheme was developed for Relay Relay
feeder protection.
Figure C2.6:
Equivalent circuit for balanced voltage system
6. Summation arrangements
Schemes have so far been discussed as though they were industrial and urban power distribution systems. Clearly, each
applied to single-phase systems. A polyphase system could phase would require a separate set of pilot wires if the
be provided with independent protection for each phase. protection was applied on a per phase basis. The cost of
Modern digital or numerical relays communicating via fibre- providing separate pilot-pairs and also separate relay elements
optic links operate on this basis, since the amount of data to per phase is generally prohibitive. Summation techniques can
be communicated is not a major constraint. For older relays, be used to combine the separate phase currents into a single
use of this technique over pilot wires may be possible for relaying quantity for comparison over a single pair of pilot
relatively short distances, such as would be found with wires.

C2 7. Examples of electromechanical and static unit protection systems
As mentioned above, the basic balanced voltage principle of Bias is produced by a copper shading loop fitted to the pole of
protection evolved to biased protection systems. Several of the upper magnet, thereby establishing a Ferraris motor action
these have been designed, some of which appear to be quite that gives a reverse or restraining torque proportional to the
different from others. These dissimilarities are, however, square of the upper magnet flux value.
superficial.
Typical settings achievable with such a relay are:
A number of these systems that are still in common use are
a. Least sensitive earth fault - 40% of rating
described below.
b. Least sensitive phase-phase fault - 90% of rating
7.1 Balanced voltage electromechanical system
c. Three-phase fault - 52% of rating
A typical biased, electromechanical balanced voltage system,
still giving useful service on distribution systems is shown in 7.2 Static circulating current unit protection system
Figure C2.7.
A typical static modular pilot wire unit protection system operating
The electromechanical design derives its balancing voltages on the circulating current principle is shown in Figure C2.8. This
from the transactor incorporated in the measuring relay at each uses summation transformers with a neutral section that is tapped,
line end. The latter are based on the induction-type meter to provide alternative earth fault sensitivities. Phase comparators
electromagnet as shown in Figure C2.7. tuned to the power frequency are used for measurement and a
restraint circuit gives a high level of stability for through-faults
and transient charging currents. High-speed operation is
obtained with moderately sized current transformers and where
space for current transformers is limited and where the lowest
End G End H possible operating time is not essential, smaller current
A
B
transformers may be used. This is made possible by a special
C adjustment ( Kt ) by which the operating time of the differential
protection can be selectively increased if necessary, thereby
enabling the use of current transformers having a correspondingly
Summation decreased knee-point voltage, whilst ensuring that through-fault
winding
stability is maintained to greater than 50 times the rated current.
Secondary
winding Pilot Internal faults give simultaneous tripping of relays at both ends
Bias loop
of the line, providing rapid fault clearance irrespective of whether
the fault current is fed from both line ends or from only one line
end.
Figure C2.7:
Typical biased electromechanical differential protection
system.
The upper magnet carries a summation winding to receive the

output of the current transformers, and a secondary winding
which delivers the reference e.m.f. The secondary windings of
the conjugate relays are interconnected as a balanced voltage
system over the pilot channel, the lower electromagnets of both
relays being included in this circuit.
Through current in the power circuit produces a state of balance
in the pilot circuit and zero current in the lower electromagnet
coils. In this condition, no operating torque is produced.
An in-zone fault causing an inflow of current from each end of
the line produces circulating current in the pilot circuit and the
energisation of the lower electromagnets. These co-operate with
the flux of the upper electromagnets to produce an operating
torque in the discs of both relays. An infeed from one end only
will result in relay operation at the feeding end, but no operation
at the other, because of the absence of upper magnet flux.

7. Examples of electromechanical and static unit protection systems C2
A
- Summation transformer
B
- Auxiliary transformer
C
- Non linear resistor
Trip Trip - Operating winding
- Restraining winding
Tr
- Linear resistor
c c
Pilot wires - Pilots padding resistor
c - Phase comparator
Figure C2.8:
Typical static circulating current feeder unit protection circuit diagram
8. Digital / numerical current differential protection systems
A digital or numerical unit protection relay may typically provide A facility for vector/ratio compensation of the measured
phase-segregated current differential protection. This means currents, so that transformer feeders can be included in the
that the comparison of the currents at each relay is done on unit protection scheme without the use of interposing CTs or
a per phase basis. For digital data communication between defining the transformer as a separate zone, increases
relays, it is usual that a direct optical connection is used (for versatility. Any interposing CTs required are implemented in
short distances) or a multiplexed link. Link speeds of up to software. Maloperation on transformer inrush is prevented by
64kbit/s (56kbit/s in North America) are normal. Through second harmonic detection. Care must be taken if the
current bias is typically applied to provide through fault stability transformer has a wide-ratio on-load tap changer, as this
in the event of CT saturation. A dual slope bias technique results in the current ratio departing from nominal and may
(Figure C2.5) is used to enhance stability for through faults. cause maloperation, depending on the sensitivity of the relays.
A typical trip criterion is as follows: The initial bias slope should be set taking this into consideration.
For |Ibias|< Is2 Tuned measurement of power frequency currents provides
a high level of stability with capacitance inrush currents during
|Idiff|< k1|Ibias|+ Is1
line energisation. The normal steady-state capacitive charging
For |Ibias|< Is2 current can be allowed for if a voltage signal can be made
available and the susceptance of the protected zone is known.
|Idiff|< k2|Ibias|-(k2-k1)Is2+ Is1
Where an earthed transformer winding or earthing transformer
Once the relay at one end of the protected section has
is included within the zone of protection, some form of zero
determined that a trip condition exists, an intertrip signal is
sequence current filtering is required. This is because there
transmitted to the relay at the other end. Relays that are
will be an in-zone source of zero sequence current for an
supplied with information on line currents at all ends of the
external earth fault. The differential protection will see zero
line may not need to implement intertripping facilities. However,
sequence differential current for an external fault and it could
it is usual to provide intertripping in any case to ensure the
incorrectly operate as a result.
protection operates in the event of any of the relays detecting
a fault.

C2 8. Digital / numerical current differential protection systems
In older protection schemes, the problem was eliminated by Method (a)

delta connection of the CT secondary windings. For a digital
is not used, as the error between the assumed and actual
or numerical relay, a selectable software zero sequence filter
value will be too great.
is typically employed.
Method (b)
The problem remains of compensating for the time difference
between the current measurements made at the ends of the provides reliable data if direct communication between relays
feeder, since small differences can upset the stability of the is used. As signal propagation delays may change over a
scheme, even when using fast direct fibre-optic links. The period of years, repeat measurements may be required at
problem is overcome by either time synchronisation of the intervals and relays re-programmed accordingly. There is
measurements taken by the relays, or continuous calculation some risk of maloperation due to changes in signal propagation
of the propagation delay of the link. time causing incorrect time synchronisation between
measurement intervals. The technique is less suitable if rented
8.1 Time synchronisation of relays
fibre-optic pilots are used, since the owner may perform circuit
Fibre-optic media allow direct transmission of the signals re-routing for operational reasons without warning, resulting
between relays for distances of up to several km without the in the propagation delay being outside of limits and leading
need for repeaters. For longer distances repeaters will be to scheme maloperation. Where re-routing is limited to a few
required. Where a dedicated fibre pair is not available, routes, it may be possible to measure the delay on all routes
multiplexing techniques can be used. As phase comparison and pre-program the relays accordingly, with the relay digital
techniques are used on a per phase basis, time synchronisation inputs and ladder logic being used to detect changes in route
of the measurements is vitally important. This requires and select the appropriate delay accordingly.
knowledge of the transmission delay between the relays. Four
Method (c)
techniques are possible for this:
is a robust technique, employing continuous sensing of the
a. assume a value
signal propagation delay. One method of achieving this is
b. measurement during commissioning only shown in Figure C2.9.
c. continuous online measurement Relays A and B sample signals at time are TA1, TA2 … and
TB1, TB2 ... respectively. The times will not be coincident, even
d. GPS time signal
if they start coincidentally, due to slight differences in sampling
Digital communications link

A B
End A End B
Measured sampling time Propagation delay time - sampling instants of relay

- sampling instants of relay
- propagation delay time
Curren from relay to
t vecto
rs
- propagation delay time
from relay to
- time between the arrival
of message at relay
and despatch of message
- arrival time of message
and relay
t vectors - arrival time of message
Curren
and relay
- the measured sampling
time of by relay
Figure C2.9:
Signal propagation delay measurement

8. Digital / numerical current differential protection systems C2
frequencies. At time TA1 relay A transmits its data to relay B, 8.2 Application to mesh corner and 1 1/2 breaker
containing a time tag and other data. Relay B receives it at switched substations
time TA1 + Tp1 where Tp1 is the propagation time from relay
These substation arrangements are quite common, and the
A to relay B. Relay B records this time as time TB*. Relay B arrangement for the latter is shown in Figure C2.10. Problems
also sends messages of identical format to relay A. It transmits
exist in protecting the feeders due to the location of the line
such a message at time TB3, received by relay A at time TB3+
CT’s, as either Bus 1 or Bus 2 or both can supply the feeder.
Tp2 ( say time TA* ), where Tp2 is the propagation time from Two alternatives are used to overcome the problem, and they
relay B to relay A. The message from relay B to relay A
are illustrated in the figure. The first is to common the line CT
includes the time TB3, the last received time tag from relay A
inputs (as shown for Feeder A) and the alternative is to use
( TA1 ) and the delay time between the arrival time of the
a second set of CT inputs to the relay (as shown for Feeder
message from A ( TB* ) and TB3 – call this the delay time Td.
B).
The total elapsed time is therefore:
In the case of a through fault as shown, the relay connected
( T A* - TA1 ) = ( Td + Tp1 + Tp2 ) to Feeder A theoretically sees no unbalance current, and
If it is assumed that Tp1 = Tp2, then the value of Tp1 and Tp2 hence will be stable. However, with the line disconnect switch
can be calculated, and hence also TB3 . The relay B measured open, no bias is produced in the relay, so CT’s need to be
data as received at relay A can then be adjusted to enable well matched and equally loaded if maloperation is to be
data comparison to be performed. Relay B performs similar avoided.
computations in respect of the data received from relay A
For Feeder B, the relay also theoretically sees no differential
(which also contains similar time information). Therefore,
current, but it will see a large bias current even with the line
continuous measurement of the propagation delay is made,
disconnect switch open. This provides a high degree of
thus reducing the possibility of maloperation due to this cause
stability, in the event of transient asymmetric CT saturation.
to a minimum. Comparison is carried out on a per-phase
Therefore, this technique is preferred.
basis, so signal transmission and the calculations are required
for each phase. Sensing of the state of the line isolator through auxiliary
contacts enables the current values transmitted to and
A variation of this technique is available that can cope with
received from remote relays to be set to zero when the isolator
unequal propagation delays in the two communication
is open. Hence, stub-bus protection for the energised part
channels under well-defined conditions.
of the bus is then possible, with any fault resulting in tripping
The technique can also be used with all types of pilots, subject of the relevant CB.
to provision of appropriate interfacing devices.
Method (d)
Bus 1 Bus 2
is also a robust technique. It involves both relays being capable B2 B1
of receiving a time signal from a GPS satellite. The propagation
delay on each communication channel is no longer required
to be known or calculated as both relays are synchronised
to a common time signal. For the protection scheme to meet
the required performance in respect of availability and Stub
maloperation, the GPS signal must be capable of reliable bus
inputs
receipt under all atmospheric conditions. There is extra satellite
signal receiving equipment required at both ends of the line, A B
which implies extra cost.
The minimum setting that can be achieved with such techniques Figure C2.10:
while ensuring good stability is 20% of CT primary current. Breaker and a half switched substation

C2 9. Carrier unit protection schemes
In earlier sections, the pilot links between relays have been for use in conjunction with the relaying quantities derived
treated as an auxiliary wire circuit that interconnects relays locally, and forms the basis for all carrier systems of unit
at the boundaries of the protected zone. In many circumstances, protection.
such as the protection of longer line sections or where the
Carrier systems are generally insensitive to induced power
route involves installation difficulties, it is too expensive to
system currents since the systems are designed to operate
provide an auxiliary cable circuit for this purpose, and other
at much higher frequencies, but each medium may be
means are sought.
subjected to noise at the carrier frequencies that may interfere
In all cases (apart from private pilots and some short rented with its correct operation.
pilots) power system frequencies cannot be transmitted
Variations of signal level, restrictions of the bandwidth available
directly on the communication medium. Instead a relaying
for relaying and other characteristics unique to each medium
quantity may be used to vary the higher frequency associated
influence the choice of the most appropriate type of scheme.
with each medium (or the light intensity for fibre-optic systems),
Methods and media for communication are discussed in
and this process is normally referred to as modulation of a
Chapter [D2: Signalling and Intertripping in Protection
carrier wave. Demodulation or detection of the variation at a
Schemes].
remote receiver permits the relaying quantity to be reconstituted
10. Current differential scheme - analogue techniques
The carrier channel is used in this type of scheme to convey The principles of phase comparison are illustrated in Figure
both the phase and magnitude of the current at one relaying C2.11. The carrier channel transfers a logic or ‘on/off’ signal
point to another for comparison with the phase and magnitude that switches at the zero crossing points of the power frequency
of the current at that point. Transmission techniques may use waveform. Comparison of a local logic signal with the
either voice frequency channels using FM modulation or A/D corresponding signal from the remote end provides the basis
converters and digital transmission. Signal propagation delays for the measurement of phase shift between power system
still need to be taken into consideration by introducing a currents at the two ends and hence discrimination between
deliberate delay in the locally derived signal before a internal and through-faults.
comparison with the remote signal is made.
Current flowing above the set threshold results in turn-off of
A further problem that may occur concerns the dynamic range the carrier signal. The protection operates if gaps in the carrier
of the scheme. As the fault current may be up to 30 times the signal are greater than a set duration – the phase angle setting
rated current, a scheme with linear characteristics requires of the protection.
a wide dynamic range, which implies a wide signal transmission
Load or through-fault currents at the two ends of a protected
bandwidth. In practice, bandwidth is limited, so either a non-
feeder are in antiphase (using the normal relay convention
linear modulation characteristic must be used or detection of
for direction), whilst during an internal fault the (conventional)
fault currents close to the setpoint will be difficult.
currents tend towards the in-phase condition. Hence, if the
10.1 Phase comparison scheme phase relationship of through-fault currents is taken as a
reference condition, internal faults cause a phase shift of
The carrier channel is used to convey the phase angle of
approximately 180° with respect to the reference condition.
the current at one relaying point to another for comparison
with the phase angle of the current at that point.

10. Current differential scheme - analogue techniques C2
End G End H
Signalling equipment and

A communication channel C
Summation B D
Squarer Transmitter
network
D'
Receiver
Phase
E comparator
Pulse length
discrimination
Load or through fault Internal fault
F G H G H
A. Summation voltage at end G
1 1
B. Squarer output at end G
0 0
C. Summation voltage at end H
1 1
D. Squarer output at end H 0 0
(Received at end G via
ideal carrier system as D')
1 1
E. Comparator output at end G
0 0
E=B+D'
1 1
F. Discriminator output at end G
0 0
Stability setting
Figure C2.11
Principles of phase comparison protection

C2 10. Current differential scheme - analogue techniques
Phase comparison schemes respond to any phase shift from

the reference conditions, but tripping is usually permitted
only when the phase shift exceeds an angle of typically 30 θ =90°
to 90 degrees, determined by the time delay setting of the
measurement circuit, and this angle is usually referred to as
the Stability Angle. Figure C2.12 is a polar diagram that
illustrates the discrimination characteristics that result from
the measurement techniques used in phase comparison θ =180° -Tripping O Stability R
schemes. θ =0°
Since the carrier channel is required to transfer only binary

information, the techniques are associated with sending
teleprotection commands. Blocking or permissive trip modes
of operation are possible, however Figure C2.11 illustrates
θ =270°
the more usual blocking mode, since the comparator provides
an output when neither squarer is at logic ‘1’. A permissive θ System differential phase shift referred to through
fault reference condition
trip scheme can be realised if the comparator is arranged to
OR Through fault
give an output when both squarers are at logic ‘1’. Performance reference condition G H
of the scheme during failure or disturbance of the carrier
( ' conventional relay currents at ends of protected feeder)
channel and its ability to clear single-end-fed faults depends
Discriminator stability angle setting.
on the mode of operation, the type and function of fault
detectors or starting units, and the use of any additional
signals or codes for channel monitoring and transfer tripping.
Signal transmission is usually performed by voice frequency Figure C2.12
channels using frequency shift keying (FSK) or PLC techniques. Polar diagram for phase comparison scheme
Voice frequency channels involving FSK use two discrete

frequencies either side of the middle of the voice band. This of half a cycle, so that the composite signal is continuously
arrangement is less sensitive to variations in delay or frequency above the threshold level and the detector output logic is
response than if the full bandwidth was used. Blocking or continuously ‘1’. Any phase shift relative to the through-fault
permissive trip modes of operation may be implemented. In condition produces a gap in the composite carrier signal and
addition to the two frequencies used for conveying the squarer hence a corresponding ‘0’ logic level from the detector. The
information, a third tone is often used, either for channel duration of the logic ‘0’ provides the basis for discrimination
monitoring or transfer tripping dependent on the scheme. between internal and external faults, tripping being permitted
For a sensitive phase comparison scheme, accurate only when a time delay setting is exceeded. This delay is
compensation for channel delay is required. However, since usually expressed in terms of the corresponding phase shift
both the local and remote signals are logic pulses, simple in degrees at system frequency φS in Figure C2.12.
time delay circuits can be used, in contrast to the analogue The advantages generally associated with the use of the
delay circuitry usually required for current differential schemes. power line as the communication medium apply, namely that
The principles of the Power Line Carrier channel technique a power line provides a robust, reliable, and low-loss
are illustrated in Figure C2.13. The scheme operates in the interconnection between the relaying points. In addition,
blocking mode. The ‘squarer’ logic is used directly to turn a dedicated ‘on/off’ signalling is particularly suited for use in
transmitter ‘on’ or ‘off’ at one end, and the resultant burst (or phase comparison blocking mode schemes, as signal
block) of carrier is coupled to and propagates along the attenuation is not a problem. This is in contrast to permissive
power line which is being protected to a receiver at the other or direct tripping schemes, where high power output or
end. Carrier signals above a threshold are detected by the boosting is required to overcome the extra attenuation due
receiver, and hence produce a logic signal corresponding to to the fault.
the block of carrier. In contrast to Figure C2.11, the signalling The noise immunity is also very good, making the scheme
system is a 2-wire rather than 4-wire arrangement, in which very reliable. Signal propagation delay is easily allowed for
the local transmission is fed directly to the local receiver along in the stability angle setting, making the scheme very sensitive
with any received signal. The transmitter frequencies at both as well.
ends are nominally equal, so the receiver responds equally
to blocks of carrier from either end. Through-fault current
results in transmission of blocks of carrier from both ends,
each lasting for half a cycle, but with a phase displacement

10. Current differential scheme - analogue techniques C2
End G End H
Line trap
Line trap
Coupling
Summation filter
network
A
Squarer Transmitter B
Identical
relay
C to end G
Receiver
Pulse length
discriminator
D Trip
Trip Load or through fault Internal fault
1 1
A. Squarer output at end G 0 0
Blocks of carrier transmitted from end G
Squarer output at end H 1 1

0 0
Blocks of carrier transmitted from end H
B. Composite carrier signal at end G
C. Carrier detector output

1 1
0 0
1 1
D. Discriminator output 0 0
Stability setting
Figure C2.13
Principles of power line carrier phase comparison

C2 11. Phase comparison protection scheme considerations
One type of unit protection that uses carrier techniques for

communication between relays is phase comparison
protection. Communication between relays commonly uses
PLCC or frequency modulated carrier modem techniques. A
There are a number of considerations that apply only to phase c
comparison protection systems, which are discussed in this Through Fault
s
section. O
Reference
11.1 Lines with shunt capacitance
A problem can occur with the shunt capacitance current that
flows from an energising source. Since this current is in Squarer Threshold
addition to the load current that flows out of the line, and Starter Threshold
typically leads it by more than 90°, significant differential
phase shifts between the currents at the ends of the line can Limits of differential phase shift due
occur, particularly when load current is low. to capacitive current
The system differential phase shift may encroach into the Encroachment into tripping region
for discriminator with stability angle setting s
tripping region of the simple discriminator characteristic,
regardless of how large the stability angle setting may be. `Keyhole' characteristic capacitive current
Figure C2.14 illustrates the effect and indicates techniques Minimum starter threshold =
sin s
that are commonly used to ensure stability. where s = tan-1
Operation of the discriminator can be permitted only when Characteristic of system with amplitude dependent
compensation s = angular compensation
current is above some threshold, so that measurement of the for current of magnitude OA
large differential phase shifts which occur near the origin of
the polar diagram is avoided. By choice of a suitable threshold 2sin-1 for squarer threshold
and stability angle, a ‘keyhole’ characteristic can be provided OA
such that the capacitive current characteristic falls within the = load current
resultant stability region. Fast resetting of the fault detector
is required to ensure stability following the clearance of a
through-fault when the currents tend to fall towards the origin Figure C2.14:
of the polar diagram. Capacitive current in phase comparison schemes and
techniques used to avoid instability
The mark-space ratio of the squarer (or modulating) waveform
can be made dependent on the current amplitude. Any
decrease in the mark-space ratio will permit a corresponding stability angle of the scheme. Hence:
differential phase shift to occur between the currents before
Ѳo = ϕs + Ѳc ...Equation C2.1
any output is given from the comparator for measurement in
the discriminator. A squarer circuit with an offset or bias can where
provide a decreasing mark-space ratio at low currents, and ϕs = stability angle setting
with a suitable threshold level the extra phase shift Ѳc which
is permitted can be arranged to equal or exceed the phase Ѳc = capacitive current compensation (when applicable)
shift due to capacitive current. At high current levels the The currents at the ends of a transmission line IG and IH may
capacitive current compensation falls towards zero and the be expressed in terms of magnitude and phase shift Ѳ with
resultant stability region on the polar diagram is usually smaller respect a common system voltage.
than on the keyhole characteristic, giving improvements in
sensitivity and/or dependability of the scheme. Since the IG = | IG | < ѲG
stability region encompasses all through-fault currents, the IH = | IH | < ѲH
resetting speed of any fault detectors or starter (which may
still be required for other purposes, such as the control of a Using the relay convention described in Section 2, the
normally quiescent scheme) is much less critical than with reference through-fault condition is
the keyhole characteristic. IG = IH
11.2 System tripping angles ∴IG < ѲG = -IH < ѲH = IH < ѲH ± 180°
For the protection scheme to trip correctly on internal faults ∴| ѲG - ѲH | = 180°
the change in differential phase shift, Ѳo, from the through-
fault condition taken as reference, must exceed the effective

11. Phase comparison protection scheme considerations C2
During internal faults, the system tripping angle ѲO is the for IF > IL' | ѲG - ѲH | ≈ 180° ...Equation C2.4
differential phase shift relative to the reference condition.
where
∴ ѲG = 180° - | ѲG - ѲH |
IF = fault current contribution from weak source
Substituting ѲO in Equation C2.1, the conditions for tripping
IL = load current flowing towards weak source
are:
To avoid any risk of failure to operate, fault detectors with a
180° - | ѲG - ѲH | ≥ ϕS + Ѳc
setting greater than the maximum load current may be applied,
∴ | ѲG - ѲH | ≤ 180°- ( ϕS + Ѳc ) ...Equation C2.2 but they may limit the sensitivity of scheme. When the fault
detector is not operated at one end, fault clearance invariably
The term ( ϕS + Ѳc ) is the effective stability angle setting of
involves sequential tripping of the circuit breakers.
the scheme. Substituting a typical value of 60° in Equation
C2.2. gives the tripping condition as Most phase comparison schemes use summation techniques
to produce a single modulating quantity, responsive to faults
| ѲG - ѲH | ≤ 120° ...Equation C2.3
on any of the three phases. Phase sequence components
In the absence of pre-fault load current, the voltages at the are often used and a typical modulating quantity is:
two ends of a line are in phase. Internal faults are fed from
IM = MI2 + NI1 ...Equation C2.5
both ends with fault contributions whose magnitudes and
angles are determined by the position of the fault and the where
system source impedances. Although the magnitudes may
I1 = Positive phase sequence component
be markedly different, the angles (line plus source) are similar
and seldom differ by more than about 20°. I2 = Negative phase sequence component
Hence | ѲG - ѲH | ≤ 20° and the requirements of Equation M,I = constants
C2.3 are very easily satisfied. The addition of arc or fault
With the exception of three phase faults all internal faults give
resistance makes no difference to the reasoning above, so
rise to negative phase sequence (NPS) currents, I2, which
the scheme is inherently capable of clearing such faults.
are approximately in phase at the ends of the line and therefore
11.3 Effect of load current could form an ideal modulating quantity. In order to provide
a modulating signal during three phase faults, which give rise
When a line is heavily loaded prior to a fault the e.m.f.s of the
to positive phase sequence (PPS) currents, I1, only, a practical
sources which cause the fault current to flow may be displaced
modulating quantity must include some response to I1 in
by up to about 50°, that is, the power system stability limit.
addition to I2.
To this the differential line and source angles of up to 20°
mentioned above need to be added. Typical values of the ratio M/N exceed 5:1, so that the
modulating quantity is weighted heavily in favour of NPS, and
So | ѲG - ѲH | ≤ 70° and the requirements of Equation C2.3
any PPS associated with load current tends to be swamped
are still easily satisfied.
out on all but the highest resistance faults.
For three phase faults, or solid earth faults on phase-by-phase
For a high resistance phase-earth fault, the system remains
comparison schemes, through load current falls to zero during
well balanced so that load current IL is entirely positive
the fault and so need not be considered. For all other faults,
sequence. The fault contribution IF provides equal parts of
load current continues to flow in the healthy phases and may
positive, negative and zero sequence components IF/3.
therefore tend to increase towards the through-fault reference
Assuming the fault is on ‘A’ phase and the load is resistive,
value. For low resistance faults the fault current usually far
all sequence components are in phase at the infeed end G:
exceeds the load current and so has little effect. High
resistance faults or the presence of a weak source at one MI FG NI FG
end can prove more difficult, but high performance is still ∴ I mG = NI L + +
possible if the modulating quantity is chosen with care and/
3 3
or fault detectors are added. and
11.4 Modulating quantity ѲG ≈ 0

Phase-by-phase comparison schemes usually use phase At the outfeed end load current is negative,
current for modulation of the carrier. Load and fault currents
MI FH NI FH
are almost in antiphase at an end with a weak source. Correct ∴ I mH = − NI L + +
performance is possible only when fault current exceeds load 3 3
current, or: Now, for
for IF < IL' | ѲG - ѲH | ≈ 180° ImH > 0, ѲH = 0, and | ѲG - ѲH | = 0°

C2 11. Phase comparison protection scheme considerations
and for
ImH < 0, ѲH = 180°, and | ѲG - ѲH | = 180° System voltage reference
Hence for correct operation ImH ≥ 0

1.1
3
Let ImH = 0 0.9
3
=0
Then 1.1
3
0.9
3
3I L ImG
I FH = = IE =0
M  ...Equation C2.6 =180°
 + 1 1.1
 N  0.9
3
3
0.9 1.1 3
3
The fault current in Equation C2.6 is the effective earth fault (a) A phase to earth fault (b) A phase to earth fault
sensitivity of the scheme. For the typical values of | - | = 180° | - | = 0°
M = 6 and N = -1
3
M/N = -6 3
3
3
Comparing this with Equation C2.4, a scheme using summation
is potentially 1.667 times more sensitive than one using phase
current for modulation.
120° 120°
Even though the use of a negative value of M gives a lower
3 3
value of IE than if it were positive, it is usually preferred since
the limiting condition of IM = 0 then applies at the load infeed 3 3
end. Load and fault components are additive at the outfeed (c) B phase to earth fault (d) C phase to earth fault
| - | = 70°
end so that a correct modulating quantity occurs there, even
with the lowest fault levels. For operation of the scheme it is Assumptions for examples:
sufficient therefore that the fault current contribution from the Infeed of load at end
load infeed end exceeds the effective setting. Outfeed of load at end
For faults on phase B or C, the NPS components are displaced therefore and from Equation C2.6
by 120° or 240° with respect to the PPS components. No effective earth fault sensitivity
simple cancellation can occur, but instead a phase also
displacement is introduced. For tripping to occur, Equation
C2.2 must be satisfied, and to achieve high dependability
under these marginal conditions, a small effective stability
angle is essential. Figure C2.15 illustrates operation near to Figure C2.15:
Effect of load current on differential phase shift |Ѳg - ѲH| for
the limits of earth fault sensitivity.
resistive earth faults at the effective earth fault sensitivity IE
Very sensitive schemes may be implemented by using high
values of M/N but the scheme then becomes more sensitive
must operate to provide a trip output, and the fault detector
to differential errors in NPS currents, such as the unbalanced
may limit the sensitivity of the scheme. Requirements for the
components of capacitive current or spill from partially
fault detectors vary according to the type of carrier channel
saturated CT’s.
used, mode of operation used in the phase angle measurement,
Techniques such as capacitive current compensation and that is, blocking or permissive, and the features used to provide
reduction of M/N at high fault levels may be required to tolerance to capacitive current.
ensure stability of the scheme.
11.6 Normally quiescent power line carrier
11.5 Fault detection and starting (blocking mode)
For a scheme using a carrier system that continuously transmits To ensure stability of through-faults, it is essential that carrier
the modulating quantity, protecting an ideal line (capacitive transmission starts before any measurement of the width of
current is zero) in an interconnected transmission system, the gap is permitted. To allow for equipment tolerances and
measurement of current magnitude might be unnecessary. the difference in magnitude of the two currents due to
In practice, fault detector or starting elements are invariably capacitive current, two starting elements are used, usually
provided and the scheme then becomes a permissive tripping referred to as ‘Low Set’ and ‘High Set’ respectively. Low Set
scheme in which both the fault detector and the discriminator controls the start-up of transmission whilst High Set, having

11. Phase comparison protection scheme considerations C2
a setting typically 1.5 to 2 times that of the Low Set element, purpose. If the fault current is insufficient to operate the fault
permits the phase angle measurement to proceed. detector, circuit breaker tripping will normally occur
sequentially.
The use of impulse starters that respond to the change in
current level enables sensitivities of less than rated current 11.9 Fault detector operating quantities
to be achieved. Resetting of the starters occurs naturally after
Most faults cause an increase in the corresponding phase
a swell time or at the clearance of the fault. Dwell times and
current(s) so measurement of current increase could form
resetting characteristics must ensure that during through
the basis for fault detection. However, when a line is heavily
faults, a High Set is never operated when a Low Set has reset
loaded and has a low fault level at the outfeed end, some
and potential race conditions are often avoided by the
faults can be accompanied by a fall in current, which would
transmitting of an unmodulated (and therefore blocking)
lead to failure of such fault detection, resulting in sequential
carrier for a short time following the reset of low set; this
tripping (for blocking mode schemes) or no tripping (for
feature is often referred to as ‘Marginal Guard.’
permissive schemes). Although fault detectors can be
11.7 Scheme without capacitive current compensation designed to respond to any disturbance (increase or decrease
of current), it is more usual to use phase sequence components.
The ‘keyhole’ discrimination characteristic depends on the
All unbalanced faults produce a rise in the NPS components
inclusion of a fault detector to ensure that no measurements
from the zero level associated with balanced load current,
of phase angle can occur at low current levels, when the
whilst balanced faults produce an increase in the PPS
capacitive current might cause large phase shifts. Resetting
components from the load level (except at ends with very low
must be very fast to ensure stability following the shedding
fault level) so that the use of NPS and PPS fault detectors
of through load.
make the scheme sensitive to all faults. For schemes using
11.8 Scheme with capacitive current compensation summation of NPS and PPS components for the modulating
(blocking mode) quantity, the use of NPS and PPS fault detectors is particularly
appropriate since, in addition to any reductions in hardware,
When the magnitude of the modulating quantity is less than
the scheme may be characterized entirely in terms of sequence
the threshold of the squarer, transmission if it occurred, would
components. Fault sensitivities IF for PPS and NPS impulse
be a continuous blocking signal. This might occur at an end
starter settings I1S and I2S respectively are as follows:
with a weak source, remote from a fault close to a strong
source. A fault detector is required to permit transmission a. Three phase fault I F = I 1S
only when the current exceeds the modulator threshold by
b. Phase-phase fault I F = 3I 2S
some multiple (typically about 2 times) so that the effective
stability angle is not excessive. For PLCC schemes, the low c. Phase-earth fault I F = 3I 2S
set element referred to in Section 11.6 is usually used for this
12. Examples
This section gives examples of setting calculations for simple long. The relevant properties of the line are:
unit protection schemes. It cannot and is not intended to
a. Line voltage V = 33kV
replace a proper setting calculation for a particular application.
It is intended to illustrate the principles of the calculations b. Line impedance Z = 0.157 + j0.337Ω/km
required. The examples use the Schneider Electric Industries
c. Shunt charging current Ic = 0.065A/km
MiCOM P541 Current Differential relay, which has the setting
ranges given in Table C2.1 for differential protection. The relay
also has backup distance, high-set instantaneous, and earth-
fault protection included in the basic model to provide a
complete ‘one-box’ solution of main and backup protection.
12.1 Unit protection of a plain feeder
The circuit to be protected is shown in Figure C2.16. It consists
of a plain feeder circuit formed of an overhead line 25km

C2 12. Examples
33kV 25km 33kV

400/1 400/1
Digital communications link
Steady state charging current = 0.065A / km
Figure C2.16:
Typical plain feeder circuit and
Idmin = ( k2 IL - ( k2 - k1 ) Is2 + Is1 )/(1 - 0.5 k2 )
To arrive at the correct settings, the characteristics of the for Ibias > Is2
relays to be applied must be considered.
where
The recommended settings for three of the adjustable values
(taken from the relay manual) are: IL = load current, and hence the minimum operating current
at no load is 0.235 p.u. or 94A.
In cases where the capacitive charging current is very large
and hence the minimum tripping current needs to be set to
Parameter Setting Range
an unacceptably high value, some relays offer the facility of
Differential Current Setting, 0.2 -2.0 subtracting the charging current from the measured value.
Use of this facility depends on having a suitable VT input and
Bias Current Threshold Setting, 1-30 knowledge of the shunt capacitance of the circuit.
Lower Percentage Bias Setting, 0.3-1.5
Higher Precentage Bias Setting, 0.3-1.5 8
- CT rated secondary current

7
= 2.0 p.u. , = 30% , = 150%

6
Table C2.1:
5
Relay setting ranges
To provide immunity from the effects of line charging current, Trip

the setting of Is1 must be at least 2.5 times the steady-state 3
charging current, i.e. 4.1A or 0.01 p.u., after taking into

consideration the CT ratio of 400/1. The nearest available 2
Restrain
setting above this is 0.20 p.u. This gives the points on the
relay characteristic as shown in Figure C2.17. 1
The minimum operating current Idmin is related to the value

of Is1 by the formula 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Idmin = ( k1 IL + Is1 ) / ( 1 - 0.5 k1 )

for Ibias < Is2
Figure C2.17:
Relay characteristic; plain feeder example

12. Examples C2
12.2 Unit protection of a transformer feeder Only the second combination is satisfactory, since only this
one provides the necessary zero-sequence current trap to
Figure C2.18 shows unit protection applied to a transformer
avoid maloperation of the protection scheme for earth faults
feeder. The feeder is assumed to be a 100m length of cable,
on the LV side of the transformer outside of the protected
such as might be found in some industrial plants or where a
zone.
short distance separates the 33kV and 11kV substations.
While 11kV cable capacitance will exist, it can be regarded Ratio correction must also be applied, in order to ensure that
as negligible for the purposes of this example. the relays see currents from the primary and secondary sides
of the transformer feeder that are well balanced under full
The delta/star transformer connection requires phase shift
load conditions. This is not always inherently the case, due
correction of CT secondary currents across the transformer,
to selection of the main CT ratios.
and in this case software equivalents of interposing CT’s are
used. For the example of Figure C2.18, transformer turns ratio at
nominal tap:
Since the LV side quantities lag the HV side quantities by 30°,
it is necessary to correct this phase shift by using software Vp / Vs = 11 kV/33 kV = 0.3333
CT settings that produce a 30° phase shift. There are two
Required turns ratio, according to the CT ratios used
obvious possibilities:
400
a. HV side: Yd1 1 = 0. 32
=
LV side: Yy0 1250
1
b. HV side: Yy0
LV side: Yd11
20 MVA
33kV 33/11kV
11kV
400/1 Dyn1 Cable 1250/1
100m
350A 1050A
0° -30°
0.875A 0.84A
Digital communication
channel
Ratio correction: 1.14 Ratio correction: 1.19

software CT: Yy0 software CT: Yd11
Figure C2.18:
Unit protection of a transformer feeder

C2 12. Examples
Spill current that will arise due to the incompatibility of the transformer rated primary current = 350A
CT ratios used with the power transformer turns ratio may
transformer rated secondary current = 1050A
cause relay maloperation. This has to be eliminated by
using the facility in the relay for CT ratio correction factors. With the line charging current being negligible, the
For this particular relay, the correction factors are chosen following relay settings are then suitable, and allow for
such that the full load current seen by the relay software is transformer efficiency and mismatch due to tap-changing:
equal to 1A.
IS1 = 20% (minimum possible)
The appropriate correction factors are:
IS1 = 20%
• HV: 400 / 350 = 1.14
k1 = 30%
• LV: 1250/1050 = 1.19 where:
k2 = 150%
13. References
[C2.1] Merz-Price Protective Gear.

K. Faye-Hansen and G. Harlow.
IEE Proceedings, 1911.

C2

C3
Distance Protection

Chapter
C3
Distance Protection
1. Introduction 211
2. Principles of distance relays 211
3. Relay performance 212
4. Relationship between relay voltage and ZS / ZL ratio 213
5. Voltage limit for accurate reach point measurement 214
6. Zones of protection 215
7. Distance relay characteristics 216
8. Distance relay implementation 223
9. Effect of source impedance and earthing methods 225
10. Distance relay application problems 227
11. Other distance relay features 229
12. Distance relay application example 230
13. References 232

Distance Protection
C3 1. Introduction
The problem of combining fast fault clearance with selective

tripping of plant is a key aim for the protection of power systems. =10
To meet these requirements, high-speed protection systems
for transmission and primary distribution circuits that are suitable =4
for use with the automatic reclosure of circuit breakers are =10
under continuous development and are very widely applied.
>>
115kV
Distance protection, in its basic form, is a non-unit system of
protection offering considerable economic and technical
advantages. Unlike phase and neutral overcurrent protection, 115kV Relay setting >7380A
= 7380A
3x(5+4 )
the key advantage of distance protection is that its fault coverage
of the protected circuit is virtually independent of source (a)
impedance variations.
This is illustrated in Figure C3.1, where it can be seen that =10
overcurrent protection cannot be applied satisfactorily. Distance
=4
protection is comparatively simple to apply and it can be fast
in operation for faults located along most of a protected circuit.
It can also provide both primary and remote back-up functions >>
in a single scheme. It can easily be adapted to create a unit 115kV
protection scheme when applied with a signalling channel. In 115kV
= 6640A
this form it is eminently suitable for application with high-speed 3x10
auto-reclosing, for the protection of critical transmission lines. (b)
Therefore, for relay operation for line faults,

Relay current setting <6640A and >7380A
This is impractical, overcurrent relay not suitable
Must use Distance or Unit Protection
Figure C3.1:
Advantages of distance over overcurrent protection
2. Principles of distance relays
Since the impedance of a transmission line is proportional to The reach point of a relay is the point along the line impedance
its length, for distance measurement it is appropriate to use a locus that is intersected by the boundary characteristic of the
relay capable of measuring the impedance of a line up to a relay. Since this is dependent on the ratio of voltage and current
predetermined point (the reach point). Such a relay is described and the phase angle between them, it may be plotted on an
as a distance relay and is designed to operate only for faults R/X diagram. The loci of power system impedances as seen
occurring between the relay location and the selected reach by the relay during faults, power swings and load variations
point, thus giving discrimination for faults that may occur in may be plotted on the same diagram and in this manner the
different line sections. performance of the relay in the presence of system faults and
disturbances may be studied.
The basic principle of distance protection involves the division
of the voltage at the relaying point by the measured current.
The apparent impedance so calculated is compared with the
reach point impedance. If the measured impedance is less
than the reach point impedance, it is assumed that a fault exists
on the line between the relay and the reach point.

Distance Protection
3. Relay performance C3
Distance relay performance is defined in terms of reach 3.1 Electromechanical/static distance relays
accuracy and operating time. Reach accuracy is a comparison
With electromechanical and earlier static relay designs, the
of the actual ohmic reach of the relay under practical conditions
magnitude of input quantities particularly influenced both reach
with the relay setting value in ohms. Reach accuracy particularly
accuracy and operating time. It was customary to present
depends on the level of voltage presented to the relay under
information on relay performance by voltage/reach curves, as
fault conditions. The impedance measuring techniques
shown in Figure C3.2, and operating time/fault position curves
employed in particular relay designs also have an impact.
for various values of source impedance ratios (SIRs) as shown
Operating times can vary with fault current, with fault position in Figure C3.3, where:
relative to the relay setting, and with the point on the voltage
SIR=ZS /ZL
wave at which the fault occurs. Depending on the measuring
techniques employed in a particular relay design, measuring and
signal transient errors, such as those produced by Capacitor
ZS = power system source impedance behind the relay location
Voltage Transformers or saturating CT’s, can also adversely
delay relay operation for faults close to the reach point. It is ZL = line impedance equivalent to relay reach setting
usual for electromechanical and static distance relays to claim
both maximum and minimum operating times. However, for
modern digital or numerical distance relays, the variation
between these is small over a wide range of system operating
conditions and fault positions. Operation time (ms)
50
40
30
20 Max
10
(% Zone 1 setting)
Impedance reach
105 Min
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
100 Fault position (% relay setting)
(a) With source impedance ratio of 1/1

95
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 65
% relay rated voltage
Operation time (ms)
(a) Phase-earth faults 50

40
105
(% Zone 1 setting)
Impedance reach
30
20 Max
100
10
Min
95 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
0 20 40 60 80 100
Fault position (% relay setting)
(b) Phase-phase faults (b) With source impedance ratio of 30/1
105
(% Zone 1 setting)
Impedance reach
100 Figure C3.3:

Typical operation time characteristics for Zone 1 phase-phase faults
95
0 20 40 60 80 100
(c) Three-phase and three-phase-earth faults Alternatively, the above information was combined in a family
of contour curves, where the fault position expressed as a
percentage of the relay setting is plotted against the source
to line impedance ratio, as illustrated in Figure C3.4(a) and
C3.4(b).
Figure C3.2:
Typical impedance reach accuracy characteristics for Zone 1

Distance Protection
Fault position (p.u. relay setting ZL)

C3 3. Relay performance 1.0
Boundary
0.9 13ms
0.8 9ms
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
3.2 Digital/numerical distance relays conditions,
0.3 but their maximum operating times are also less
under 0.2
adverse waveform conditions or for boundary fault
Digital/Numerical distance relays tend to have more consistent 0.1
conditions.
operating times. They are usually slightly slower than some of 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000
or S.I.R.
the older relay designs when operating under the best
(a) Zone 1 phase-phase fault: minimum operation times

Boundary Boundary
1.0 1.0
0.9 13ms 0.9
0.8 0.8 20ms
9ms
0.7 0.7
0.6
15ms
0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000

or S.I.R. or S.I.R.
(a) Zone 1 phase-phase fault: minimum operation times
(b) Zone 1 phase-phase fault: maximum operation times
Figure C3.4a: Figure C3.4b:

Boundary
Typical1.0minimum operation-time contours Typical maximum operation-time contours
0.9
0.8 20ms
0.7
0.6
15ms
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
4. Relationship between relay voltage and ZS / ZL ratio
0.1
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000

or S.I.R.
(b) Zone 1 phase-phase fault: maximum operation times

A single, generic, equivalent circuit, as shown in Figure C3.5(a), Therefore :
may represent any fault condition in a three-phase power
system. The voltage V applied to the impedance loop is the
ZL
VR = V
open circuit voltage of the power system. Point R represents ZS + Z L
the relay location; IR and VR are the current and voltage or
measured by the relay, respectively.
1
VR = V
The impedances ZS and ZL are described as source and line
impedances because of their position with respect to the relay
(ZS Z L ) +1 ...Equation C3.1
location. Source impedance ZS is a measure of the fault level The above generic relationship betweenV R and Z S /Z L,
at the relaying point. For faults involving earth it is dependent illustrated in Figure C3.5(b), is valid for all types of short circuits
on the method of system earthing behind the relaying point. provided a few simple rules are observed. These are:
Line impedance ZL is a measure of the impedance of the a. for phase faults, V is the phase-phase source voltage and
protected section. The voltageVR applied to the relay is, ZS /ZL is the positive sequence source to line impedance
therefore, IR ZL. For a fault at the reach point, this may be ratio. VR is the phase-phase relay voltage and IR is the
alternatively expressed in terms of source to line impedance phase-phase relay current, for the faulted phases
ratio ZS /ZL by means of the following expressions: 1
VR = V p−p
V R= I RZ L (ZS Z L ) +1 ...Equation C3.2
where: b. for earth faults, V is the phase-neutral source voltage and
V ZS /ZL is a composite ratio involving the positive and zero
IR =
ZS + Z L sequence impedances. VR is the phase-neutral relay voltage
and IR is the relay current for the faulted phase

Distance Protection
4. Relationship between relay voltage and ZS / ZL ratio C3
1 and
VR = V l −n
2+p ...Equation C3.3 ZS0
(ZS ZL )   +1
 2+q 
p=
Z S1
where Z L0
q=
ZS = 2ZS1 + ZS0 = ZS1 (2 + p) Z L1
ZL = 2ZL1 + ZL0 = ZL1 (2 + q)
10
7.5
100 5.0
VR (%)
90 2.5
Source Line (% rated voltage) 80 0

10 20 30 4050
70
60
50
Voltage
40
V 30
20
(a) Power system configuration 10
0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10
Source impedance ratio
(b) Variation of relay voltage with system source to line impedance ratio
Figure C3.5:
Relationship between source to line ratio and relay voltage
5. Voltage limit for accurate reach point measurement
The ability of a distance relay to measure accurately for a reach polarisation and/or memory voltage polarisation. The prime
point fault depends on the minimum voltage at the relay location purpose of the relay polarising voltage is to ensure correct
under this condition being above a declared value. This voltage, relay directional response for close-up faults, in the forward or
which depends on the relay design, can also be quoted in reverse direction, where the fault-loop voltage measured by
terms of an equivalent maximum ZS /ZL or SIR. the relay may be very small.
Distance relays are designed so that, provided the reach point
voltage criterion is met, any increased measuring errors for
faults closer to the relay will not prevent relay operation. Most
modern relays are provided with healthy phase voltage

Distance Protection
C3 6. Zones of protection
Careful selection of the reach settings and tripping times for the does not extend beyond the minimum effective Zone 1 reach
various zones of measurement enables correct co-ordination of the adjacent line protection.
between distance relays on a power system. Basic distance
This avoids the need to grade the Zone 2 time settings between
protection will comprise instantaneous directional Zone 1
upstream and downstream relays. In electromechanical and static
protection and one or more time-delayed zones. Typical reach
relays, Zone 2 protection is provided either by separate elements
and time settings for a 3-zone distance protection are shown in
or by extending the reach of the Zone 1 elements after a time
Figure C3.6. Digital and numerical distance relays may have
delay that is initiated by a fault detector. In most digital and
more than three zones (e.g. MiCOM P44x up to five, MiCOM
numerical relays, the Zone 2 elements are implemented in software.
P43x up to eight), some set to measure in the reverse direction.
Typical settings for three forward-looking zones of basic distance Zone 2 tripping must be time-delayed to ensure grading with
protection are given in the following sub- sections. To determine the primary relaying applied to adjacent circuits that fall within
the settings for a particular relay design or for a particular distance the Zone 2 reach. Thus complete coverage of a line section is
teleprotection scheme, involving end-to- end signalling, the relay obtained, with fast clearance of faults in the first 80-85% of
manufacturer’s instructions should be referred to. the line and somewhat slower clearance of faults in the
remaining section of the line.
6.3 Zone 3 setting
Time Remote back-up protection for all faults on adjacent lines can
Y
X be provided by a third zone of protection that is time delayed
Source H J K Source to discriminate with Zone 2 protection plus circuit breaker trip
0
time for the adjacent line. Zone 3 reach should be set to at
X
Y least 1.2 times the impedance presented to the relay for a fault
Time at the remote end of the second line section.
Zone 1 = 80-85% of protected line impedance On interconnected power systems, the effect of fault current
Zone 2 (minimum) = 120% of protected line infeed at the remote busbars will cause the impedance
Zone 2 (maximum) < Protected line + 50% of shortest second line
presented to the relay to be much greater than the actual
Zone 3F = 1.2 (protected line + longest second line)
Zone 3R = 20% of protected line impedance to the fault and this needs to be taken into account
X = Circuit breaker tripping time when setting Zone 3. In some systems, variations in the remote
Y = Discriminating time
busbar infeed can prevent the application of remote back-up
Zone 3 protection, but on radial distribution systems with single
end infeed, no difficulties should arise.
Figure C3.6:
Typical time/distance characteristics for three zone distance 6.4 Settings for reverse reach and other zones
protection
Modern digital or numerical relays may have additional
6.1 Zone 1 setting impedance zones that can be utilised to provide additional
protection functions. For example, where the first three zones
Electromechanical/static relays usually have a reach setting of are set as above, Zone 4 might be used to provide back-up
up to 80% of the protected line impedance for instantaneous protection for the local busbar, by applying a reverse reach
Zone 1 protection. For digital/numerical distance relays, settings setting of the order of 25% of the Zone 1 reach. Alternatively,
of up to 85% may be safe. The resulting 15-20% safety margin one of the forward-looking zones (typically Zone 3) could be
ensures that there is no risk of the Zone 1 protection over-reaching set with a small reverse offset reach from the origin of the R/X
the protected line due to errors in the current and voltage diagram, in addition to its forward reach setting.
transformers, inaccuracies in line impedance data provided for
setting purposes and errors of relay setting and measurement. An offset impedance measurement characteristic is non-
Otherwise, there would be a loss of discrimination with fast directional. One advantage of a non-directional zone of
operating protection on the following line section. Zone 2 of the impedance measurement is that it is able to operate for a
distance protection must cover the remaining 15-20% of the line. close-up, zero- impedance fault, in situations where there may
be no healthy phase voltage signal or memory voltage signal
6.2 Zone 2 setting available to allow operation of a directional impedance zone.
To ensure full cover of the line with allowance for the sources With the offset-zone time delay bypassed, there can be provision
of error already listed in the previous section, the reach setting of ‘Switch-on-to-Fault’ (SOTF) protection. This is required where
of the Zone 2 protection should be at least 120% of the there are line voltage transformers, to provide fast tripping in
protected line impedance. In many applications it is common the event of accidental line energisation with maintenance
practice to set the Zone 2 reach to be equal to the protected earthing clamps left in position. Additional impedance zones
line section +50% of the shortest adjacent line. Where possible, may be deployed as part of a distance protection scheme
this ensures that the resulting maximum effective Zone 2 reach used in conjunction with a teleprotection signalling channel.

Distance Protection
7. Distance relay characteristics C3
Some numerical relays measure the absolute fault impedance in Figure C3.7, is therefore non-directional, and in this form
and then determine whether operation is required according would operate for all faults along the vector AL and also for
to impedance boundaries defined on the R/X diagram. all faults behind the busbars up to an impedance AM. It is
Traditional distance relays and numerical relays that emulate to be noted that A is the relaying point and RAB is the angle
the impedance elements of traditional relays do not measure by which the fault current lags the relay voltage for a fault on
absolute impedance. They compare the measured fault voltage the line AB and RAC is the equivalent leading angle for a
with a replica voltage derived from the fault current and the fault on line AC. Vector AB represents the impedance in front
zone impedance setting to determine whether the fault is of the relay between the relaying point A and the end of line
within zone or out-of-zone. Distance relay impedance AB. Vector AC represents the impedance of line AC behind
comparators or algorithms which emulate traditional the relaying point. AL represents the reach of instantaneous
comparators are classified according to their polar Zone 1 protection, set to cover 80% to 85% of the protected
characteristics, the number of signal inputs they have, and line.
the method by which signal comparisons are made. The
common types compare either the relative amplitude or phase
of two input quantities to obtain operating characteristics that Line AC Line AB
are either straight lines or circles when plotted on an R/X
C A B
diagram. At each stage of distance relay design evolution,
the development of impedance operating characteristic <
shapes and sophistication has been governed by the
technology available and the acceptable cost. Since many X
traditional relays are still in service and since some numerical B

relays emulate the techniques of the traditional relays, a brief Restrains
L
review of impedance comparators is justified.
Operates Line AB
7.1 Amplitude and phase comparison
A R
Relay measuring elements whose functionality is based on
the comparison of two independent quantities are essentially Line AC
either amplitude or phase comparators. For the impedance M
elements of a distance relay, the quantities being compared C
are the voltage and current measured by the relay. There are Impedance
numerous techniques available for performing the comparison, relay
depending on the technology used. They vary from balanced-

beam (amplitude comparison) and induction cup (phase
Figure C3.7:
comparison) electromagnetic relays, through diode and Plain impedance relay characteristic
operational amplifier comparators in static-type distance
relays, to digital sequence comparators in digital relays and
A relay using this characteristic has three important
to algorithms used in numerical relays.
disadvantages:
Any type of impedance characteristic obtainable with one
a. it is non-directional; it will see faults both in front of and
comparator is also obtainable with the other. The addition and
behind the relaying point, and therefore requires a
subtraction of the signals for one type of comparator produces
directional element to give it correct discrimination
the required signals to obtain a similar characteristic using
the other type. For example, comparing V and I in an amplitude b. it has non-uniform fault resistance coverage
comparator results in a circular impedance characteristic
c. it is susceptible to power swings and heavy loading of
centred at the origin of the R/X diagram. If the sum and
a long line, because of the large area covered by the
difference of V and I are applied to the phase comparator
impedance circle
the result is a similar characteristic.
Directional control is an essential discrimination quality for a
7.2 Plain impedance characteristic
distance relay, to make the relay non-responsive to faults
This characteristic takes no account of the phase angle outside the protected line. This can be obtained by the addition
between the current and the voltage applied to it; for this of a separate directional control element. The impedance
reason its impedance characteristic when plotted on an R/X characteristic of a directional control element is a straight
diagram is a circle with its centre at the origin of the co- line on the R/X diagram, so the combined characteristic of
ordinates and of radius equal to its setting in ohms. Operation the directional and impedance relays is the semi-circle APLQ
occurs for all impedance values less than the setting, that is, shown in Figure C3.8.
for all points within the circle. The relay characteristic, shown

Distance Protection
C3 7. Distance relay characteristics
If a fault occurs at F close to C on the parallel line CD, the

directional unit RD at A will restrain due to current IF1. At the
same time, the impedance unit is prevented from operating
by the inhibiting output of unit RD. If this control is not provided,
the under impedance element could operate prior to circuit
Restrain
breaker C opening. Reversal of current through the relay
from IF1 to IF2 when C opens could then result in incorrect
tripping of the healthy line if the directional unit RD operates
before the impedance unit resets. This is an example of the
Operate
need to consider the proper co-ordination of multiple relay
elements to attain reliable relay performance during evolving
fault conditions. In older relay designs, the type of problem (a) Phase comparator inputs
to be addressed was commonly referred to as one of ‘contact
race’.
X
Impedance
B element
B
L Restrain
P Operates
A
R
Restrains Q
Directional Operate
element
A
(a) Characteristic of combined directional/impedance relay
Restrain
K
A B (b) Mho impedance characteristic
Source Source
<
C D
(b) Illustration of use of directional/impedance relay: circuit diagram P Q
& &
Trip relay
Combined directional/impedance relay
: distance element at A
RAD : directional element at A
(c) Logic for directional and impedance elements at A A
AP Relay impedance setting

Figure C3.8: Relay characteristic angle setting
AB Protected line
Combined directional and impedance relays K PQ Arc resistance
Line angle
(c) Increased arc resistance coverage

7.3 Self-polarised mho relay
The mho impedance element is generally known as such
because its characteristic is a straight line on an admittance Figure C3.9:
diagram. It cleverly combines the discriminating qualities of Mho relay characteristic

Distance Protection
both reach control and directional control, thereby eliminating where:

the ‘contact race’ problems that may be encountered with
Ra = arc resistance (Ω)
separate reach and directional control elements. This is
achieved by the addition of a polarising signal. Mho impedance L = length of arc (m)
elements were particularly attractive for economic reasons
I = arc current (A)
where electromechanical relay elements were employed. As
a result, they have been widely deployed worldwide for many On long overhead lines carried on steel towers with overhead
years and their advantages and limitations are now well earth wires the effect of arc resistance can usually be neglected.
understood. For this reason they are still emulated in the The effect is most significant on short overhead lines and with
algorithms of some modern numerical relays. fault currents below 2000A (i.e. minimum plant condition), or
if the protected line is of wood-pole construction without earth
The characteristic of a mho impedance element, when plotted
wires. In the latter case, the earth fault resistance reduces the
on an R/X diagram, is a circle whose circumference passes
effective earth-fault reach of a mho Zone 1 element to such an
through the origin, as illustrated in Figure C3.9(a). This
extent that the majority of faults are detected in Zone 2 time.
demonstrates that the impedance element is inherently
This problem can usually be overcome by using a relay with a
directional and such that it will operate only for faults in the
cross-polarised mho or a polygonal characteristic.
forward direction along line AB as shown in Figure C3.9(b).
Where a power system is resistance-earthed, it should be
The impedance characteristic is adjusted by setting Zn, the
appreciated that this does not need to be considered with
impedance reach, along the diameter and ϕ, the angle of
regard to the relay settings other than the effect that reduced
displacement of the diameter from the R axis. Angle ϕ is
fault current may have on the value of arc resistance seen. The
known as the Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA). The relay
earthing resistance is in the source behind the relay and only
operates for values of fault impedance Z F within its
modifies the source angle and source to line impedance ratio
characteristic.
for earth faults. It would therefore be taken into account only
It will be noted that the impedance reach varies with fault when assessing relay performance in terms of system
angle. As the line to be protected is made up of resistance impedance ratio.
and inductance, its fault angle will be dependent upon the
7.4 Offset mho/lenticular characteristics
relative values of R and X at the system operating frequency.
Under an arcing fault condition, or an earth fault involving Under close up fault conditions, when the relay voltage falls to
additional resistance, such as tower footing resistance or fault zero or near-zero, a relay using a self-polarised mho characteristic
through vegetation, the value of the resistive component of or any other form of self-polarised directional impedance
fault impedance will increase to change the impedance angle. characteristic may fail to operate when it is required to do so.
Thus a relay having a characteristic angle equivalent to the Methods of covering this condition include the use of non-
line angle will under-reach under resistive fault conditions. directional impedance characteristics, such as offset mho,
offset lenticular, or cross-polarised and memory polarised
It is usual, therefore, to set the RCA less than the line angle,
directional impedance characteristics.
so that it is possible to accept a small amount of fault
resistance without causing under-reach. However, when If current bias is employed, the mho characteristic is shifted
setting the relay, the difference between the line angle Ѳ to embrace the origin, so that the measuring element can
and the relay characteristic angle ϕ must be known. The operate for close-up faults in both the forward and the reverse
resulting characteristic is shown in Figure C3.9(c) where AB directions. The offset mho relay has two main applications:
corresponds to the length of the line to be protected. With ϕ 7.4.1 Third zone and busbar back-up zone
set less than Ѳ, the actual amount of line protected, AB, would
be equal to the relay setting value AQ multiplied by cosine (Ѳ-ϕ). In this application it is used in conjunction with mho measuring
Therefore the required relay setting AQ is given by: units as a fault detector and/or Zone 3 measuring unit. So, with
the reverse reach arranged to extend into the busbar zone, as
AB shown in Figure C3.10(a), it will provide back-up protection for
AQ =
cos ( Ѳ − ϕ ) busbar faults. This facility can also be provided with quadrilateral
characteristics. A further benefit of the Zone 3 application is
Due to the physical nature of an arc, there is a non-linear relationship for Switch-on-to-Fault (SOTF) protection, where the Zone 3 time
between arc voltage and arc current, which results in a non-linear delay would be bypassed for a short period immediately
resistance. Using the empirical formula derived by A.R. van C. following line energisation to allow rapid clearance of a fault
Warrington [Ref C3.1: Protective Relays – their Theory and Practice] anywhere along the protected line.
the approximate value of arc resistance can be assessed as:
28710
R a =
L ...Equation C3.4
I 1. 4

Distance Protection
resistance coverage consistent with non-operation under maximum

X load transfer conditions.
Figure C3.11 shows how the lenticular characteristic can tolerate
much higher degrees of line loading than offset mho and plain
Zone impedance characteristics.
3
Zone Reduction of load impedance from ZD3 to ZD1 will correspond

2 to an equivalent increase in load current.
Zone
1
R
Busbar
X
zone
Offset Lenticular
(a) Busbar zone back-up using an offset mho relay characteristic
b
Offset Mho
characteristic
X a
J
Zone Load
H 3 area
0 R
Zone Carrier stop
2
Zone
1
R
G
Impedance
Carrier start characteristic
K
(b) Carrier starting in distance blocking schemes

Figure C3.11:
Minimum load impedance permitted with lenticular, offset mho
and impedance relays
Figure C3.10:
Typical applications for the offset mho relay
7.5 Fully cross-polarised mho characteristic

7.4.2 Carrier starting unit in distance schemes with carrier The previous section showed how the non-directional offset
blocking mho characteristic is inherently able to operate for close-up
zero voltage faults, where there would be no polarising voltage
If the offset mho unit is used for starting carrier signalling, it is
to allow operation of a plain mho directional element. One way
arranged as shown in Figure C3.10(b). Carrier is transmitted
of ensuring correct mho element response for zero-voltage
if the fault is external to the protected line but inside the reach
faults is to add a percentage of voltage from the healthy
of the offset mho relay, in order to prevent accelerated tripping
phase(s) to the main polarising voltage as a substitute phase
of the second or third zone relay at the remote station.
reference. This technique is called cross-polarising, and it has
Transmission is prevented for internal faults by operation of
the advantage of preserving and indeed enhancing the
the local mho measuring units, which allows high-speed fault
directional properties of the mho characteristic. By the use of
clearance by the local and remote end circuit breakers.
a phase voltage memory system, that provides several cycles
7.4.3 Application of lenticular characteristic of pre-fault voltage reference during a fault, the cross-
There is a danger that the offset mho relay shown in Figure polarisation technique is also effective for close-up three-phase
C3.10(a) may operate under maximum load transfer conditions faults. For this type of fault, no healthy phase voltage reference
if Zone 3 of the relay has a large reach setting. A large Zone is available.
3 reach may be required to provide remote back-up protection Early memory systems were based on tuned, resonant,
for faults on the adjacent feeder. To avoid this, a shaped type analogue circuits, but problems occurred when applied to
of characteristic may be used, where the resistive coverage networks where the power system operating frequency could
is restricted. vary. More modern digital or numerical systems can offer a
With a ‘lenticular’ characteristic, the aspect ratio of the lens is (a/b) synchronous phase reference for variations in power system
adjustable, enabling it to be set to provide the maximum fault frequency before or even during a fault.

Distance Protection
As described in Section 7.3, a disadvantage of the self-

polarised, plain mho impedance characteristic, when applied Positive current direction
to overhead line circuits with high impedance angles, is that it for relay
Source
has limited coverage of arc or fault resistance. The problem is
aggravated in the case of short lines, since the required Zone
1 ohmic setting is low. The amount of the resistive coverage
Relay location
offered by the mho circle is directly related to the forward reach
setting.
Hence, the resulting resistive coverage may be too small in N1
relation to the expected values of fault resistance.
N2
X
=25
Mho unit
characteristic
(not cross-polarized) X
=0
R
R
30°
Figure C3.12:
Fully cross-polarised mho relay characteristic with variations Mho unit characteristic
(fully cross-polarized) -X
of ZS/ZL ratio
One additional benefit of applying cross-polarisation to a mho Figure C3.13:

impedance element is that its resistive coverage will be Illustration of improvement in relay resistive coverage for fully
enhanced. This effect is illustrated in Figure C3.12, for the case crosspolarised characteristic
where a mho element has 100% cross-polarisation. With cross-
polarisation from the healthy phase(s) or from a memory system, another phase. This is of no consequence in a switched distance
the mho resistive expansion will occur during a balanced relay, where a single comparator is connected to the correct
three-phase fault as well as for unbalanced faults. The expansion fault loop impedance by starting units before measurement
will not occur under load conditions, when there is no phase begins. However, modern relays offer independent impedance
shift between the measured voltage and the polarising voltage. measurement for each of the three earth-fault and three phase-
The degree of resistive reach enhancement depends on the fault loops. For these types of relay, maloperation of healthy
ratio of source impedance to relay reach (impedance) setting phases is undesirable, especially when single-pole tripping is
as can be deduced by reference to Figure C3.13. It must be required for single-phase faults.
emphasised that the apparent extension of a fully cross-
7.6 Partially cross-polarised mho characteristic
polarised impedance characteristic into the negative reactance
quadrants of Figure C3.13 does not imply that there would be Where a reliable, independent method of faulted phase selection
operation for reverse faults. With cross-polarisation, the relay is not provided, a modern non-switched distance relay may
characteristic expands to encompass the origin of the only employ a relatively small percentage of cross polarisation.
impedance diagram for forward faults only. For reverse faults, The level selected must be sufficient to provide reliable
the effect is to exclude the origin of the impedance diagram, directional control in the presence of CVT transients for close-
thereby ensuring proper directional responses for close-up up faults, and also attain reliable faulted phase selection. By
forward or reverse faults. employing only partial cross- polarisation, the disadvantages
of the fully cross-polarised characteristic are avoided, while
Fully cross-polarised characteristics have now largely been
still retaining the advantages. Figure C3.14 shows a typical
superseded, due to the tendency of comparators connected
characteristic that can be obtained using this technique.
to healthy phases to operate under heavy fault conditions on

Distance Protection
Shield-shaped X
characteristic with
16% square-wave Self-polarised Mho circle
cross-polarisation X Fully cross-polarised
Mho circle Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
-R
R Zone
s 1&2
Extra resistive
coverage of shield
Conventional 16%
-X partially cross-polarised
Mho circle Zone 3
(a) Comparison of polarised characteristics drawn for SIR = 6
Figure C3.15:
0 1 6 12 60 Quadrilateral characteristic
24
R
implications of implementing this characteristic using discrete

(b) Resistive expansion of shaped partially cross-polarised component electromechanical or early static relay technology
Mho with increasing values of SIR do not arise.
7.8 Protection against power swings
Figure C3.14: – Use of the ohm characteristic
Partially cross-polarised characteristic with ‘shield’ shape
During severe power swing conditions from which a system is
unlikely to recover, stability might only be regained if the swinging
sources are separated. Where such scenarios are identified,
7.7 Quadrilateral characteristic power swing, or out-of-step, tripping protection can be deployed,
This form of polygonal impedance characteristic is shown in to strategically split a power system at a preferred location.
Figure C3.15. The characteristic is provided with forward reach Ideally, the split should be made so that the plant capacity and
and resistive reach settings that are independently adjustable. connected loads on either side of the split are matched.
It therefore provides better resistive coverage than any mho- This type of disturbance cannot normally be correctly identified
type characteristic for short lines. This is especially true for by an ordinary distance protection. As previously mentioned,
earth fault impedance measurement, where the arc resistances it is often necessary to prevent distance protection schemes
and fault resistance to earth contribute to the highest values from operating during stable or unstable power swings, in order
of fault resistance. To avoid excessive errors in the zone reach to avoid cascade tripping. To initiate system separation for a
accuracy, it is common to impose a maximum resistive reach prospective unstable power swing, an out-of-step tripping
in terms of the zone impedance reach. Recommendations in scheme employing ohm impedance measuring elements can
this respect can usually be found in the appropriate relay be deployed.
manuals.
Ohm impedance characteristics are applied along the forward
Quadrilateral elements with plain reactance reach lines can and reverse resistance axes of the R/X diagram and their
introduce reach error problems for resistive earth faults where operating boundaries are set to be parallel to the protected
the angle of total fault current differs from the angle of the line impedance vector, as shown in Figure C3.16.
current measured by the relay. This will be the case where the
local and remote source voltage vectors are phase shifted with The ohm impedance elements divide the R/X impedance
respect to each other due to pre-fault power flow. This can be diagram into three zones, A, B and C. As the impedance
overcome by selecting an alternative to use of a phase current changes during a power swing, the point representing the
for polarisation of the reactance reach line. Polygonal impedance impedance moves along the swing locus, entering the three
characteristics are highly flexible in terms of fault impedance zones in turn and causing the ohm units to operate in sequence.
coverage for both phase and earth faults. For this reason, most When the impedance enters the third zone the trip sequence
digital and numerical distance relays now offer this form of is completed and the circuit breaker trip coil can be energised
characteristic. A further factor is that the additional cost at a favourable angle between system sources for arc interruption

Distance Protection
with little risk of restriking. Only an unstable power swing 7.9 Other characteristics
condition can cause the impedance vector to move successively
The execution time for the algorithm for traditional distance
through the three zones. Therefore, other types of system
protection using quadrilateral or similar characteristics may
disturbance, such as power system fault conditions, will not
result in a relatively long operation time, possibly up to 40ms
result in relay element operation.
in some relay designs based on Fourier filtering. To overcome
this, some numerical distance relays also use alternative
algorithms that can be executed significantly faster. These
Locus of algorithms are based generally on detecting changes in current
power swing X and voltage that are in excess of what is expected, often known
as the ‘Delta’ algorithm.
H
Zone C Line impedance This algorithm detects a fault by comparing the measured
values of current and voltage with the values sampled previously.
If the change between these samples exceeds a predefined
Zone B amount (the ‘delta’), it is assumed a fault has occurred. In
parallel, the distance to fault is also computed. Provided the
Zone A
computed distance to fault lies within the Zone reach of the
relay, a trip command is issued. This algorithm can be executed
R significantly faster than the conventional distance algorithm,
G
resulting in faster overall tripping times. Faulted phase selection
can be carried out by comparing the signs of the changes in
voltage and current.
Out-of-step tripping relay
characteristic Relays that use the ‘Delta’ algorithm generally run both this
and conventional distance protection algorithms in parallel, as
some types of fault (e.g. high-resistance faults) may not fall
within the fault detection criteria of the Delta algorithm.
Figure C3.16:
Application of out-of-step tripping relay characteristic

Distance Protection
C3 8. Distance relay implementation
Discriminating zones of protection can be achieved using With electromechanical technology, each of the measuring
distance relays, provided that fault distance is a simple function elements would have been a separate relay housed in its own
of impedance. While this is true in principle for transmission case, so that the distance relay comprised a panel-mounted
circuits, the impedances actually measured by a distance assembly of the required relays with suitable inter-unit wiring.
relay also depend on the following factors: Figure C3.17(a) shows an example of such a relay scheme.
Digital/numerical distance relays (Figure C3.17(b)) are likely
a. the magnitudes of current and voltage (the relay may not
to have all of the above functions implemented in software.
see all the current that produces the fault voltage)
Starter units may not be necessary. The complete distance
b. the fault impedance loop being measured relay is housed in a single unit, making for significant
economies in space, wiring and increased dependability,
c. the type of fault
through the increased availability that stems from the provision
d. the fault resistance of continuous self-supervision. When the additional features
e. the symmetry of line impedance detailed in Section 11 are taken into consideration, such
equipment offers substantial user benefits.
f. the circuit configuration (single, double or multi-terminal
circuit)
It is impossible to eliminate all of the above factors for all
possible operating conditions. However, considerable success
can be achieved with a suitable distance relay. This may
comprise relay elements or algorithms for starting, distance
measuring and for scheme logic.
The distance measurement elements may produce impedance
characteristics selected from those described in Section 7.
Various distance relay formats exist, depending on the
operating speed required and cost considerations related to
the relaying hardware, software or numerical relay processing
capacity required. The most common formats are:
a. a single measuring element for each phase is provided,
which covers all phase faults
b. a more economical arrangement is for ‘starter’ elements
to detect which phase or phases have suffered a fault.
The starter elements switch a single measuring element
or algorithm to measure the most appropriate fault
impedance loop. This is commonly referred to as a switched
distance relay
c. a single set of impedance measuring elements for each Figure C3.17a:
First generation of static distance relay
impedance loop may have their reach settings progressively
increased from one zone reach setting to another. The
increase occurs after zone time delays that are initiated
by operation of starter elements. This type of relay is
commonly referred to as a reach-stepped distance relay
d. each zone may be provided with independent sets of
impedance measuring elements for each impedance loop.
This is known as a full distance scheme, capable of offering
the highest performance in terms of speed and application
flexibility
Furthermore, protection against earth faults may require
different characteristics and/or settings to those required for
phase faults, resulting in additional units being required. A
total of 18 impedance - measuring elements or algorithms
would be required in a full distance relay for three-zone
protection for all types of fault. Figure C3.17b:
MiCOM P440 series numerical distance relay

Distance Protection
8. Distance relay implementation C3
8.1 Starters for switched distance protection Some applications may require the numerical relay
characteristics to match those of earlier generations already
Electromechanical and static distance relays do not normally
installed on a network, to aid selectivity. Such relays are
use an individual impedance-measuring element per phase.
available, often with refinements such as multi-sided polygonal
The cost and the resulting physical scheme size made this
impedance characteristics that assist in avoiding tripping due
arrangement impractical, except for the most demanding
to heavy load conditions.
EHV transmission applications. To achieve economy for other
applications, only one measuring element was provided, With electromechanical or static switched distance relays, a
together with ‘starter’ units that detected which phases were selection of available starters often had to be made. The
faulted, in order to switch the appropriate signals to the single choice of starter was dependent on power system parameters
measuring function. A distance relay using this technique is such as maximum load transfer in relation to maximum reach
known as a switched distance relay. A number of different required and power system earthing arrangements.
types of starters have been used, the most common being
Where overcurrent starters are used, care must be taken to
based on overcurrent, undervoltage or under-impedance
ensure that, with minimum generating plant in service, the
measurement.
setting of the overcurrent starters is sensitive enough to detect
Numerical distance relays permit direct detection of the phases faults beyond the third zone. Furthermore, these starters
involved in a fault. This is called faulted phase selection, often require a high drop-off to pick-up ratio, to ensure that they
abbreviated to phase selection. Several techniques are available will drop off under maximum load conditions after a second
for faulted phase selection, which then permits the appropriate or third zone fault has been cleared by the first zone relay in
distance-measuring zone to trip. Without phase selection, the the faulty section. Without this feature, indiscriminate tripping
relay risks having over- or under-reach problems, or tripping may result for subsequent faults in the second or third zone.
three-phase when single-pole fault clearance is required. For satisfactory operation of the overcurrent starters in a
Several techniques are available for faulted phase selection, switched distance scheme, the following conditions must be
such as: fulfilled:
a. superimposed current comparisons, comparing the step a. the current setting of the overcurrent starters must be
change of level between pre-fault load, and fault current not less than 1.2 times the maximum full load current of
(the ‘Delta’ algorithm). This enables very fast detection of the protected line
the faulted phases, within only a few samples of the
b. the power system minimum fault current for a fault at the
analogue current inputs
Zone 3 reach of the distance relay must not be less than
b. change in voltage magnitude 1.5 times the setting of the overcurrent starters
c. change in current magnitude On multiple-earthed systems where the neutrals of all the
power transformers are solidly earthed, or in power systems
Numerical phase selection is much faster than traditional
where the fault current is less than the full load current of the
starter techniques used in electromechanical or static distance
protected line, it is not possible to use overcurrent starters.
relays. It does not impose a time penalty as the phase selection
In these circumstances under-impedance starters are typically
and measuring zone algorithms run in parallel. It is possible
used.
to build a full-scheme relay with these numerical techniques.
The phase selection algorithm provides faulted phase The type of under-impedance starter used is mainly dependent
selection, together with a segregated measuring algorithm on the maximum expected load current and equivalent
for each phase-ground and phase to phase fault loop ( AN, minimum load impedance in relation to the required relay
BN, CN, AB, BC, CA), thus ensuring full-scheme operation. setting to cover faults in Zone 3. This is illustrated in Figure
C3.11 where ZD1, ZD2, and ZD3 are respectively the minimum
However, there may be occasions where a numerical relay
load impedances permitted when lenticular, offset mho and
that mimics earlier switched distance protection techniques
impedance relays are used.
is desired. The reasons may be economic (less software
required – thus cheaper than a relay that contains a full-scheme
implementation) and/or technical.

Distance Protection
C3 9. Effect of source impedance and earthing methods
F
A
For correct operation, distance relays must be capable of Applying the difference of the phase voltages to the relay
B
measuring the distance to the fault accurately. To ensure this, eliminates the dependence on ZS1.
C
it is necessary to provide the correct measured quantities to
For example:
the measurement elements. It is not always the case that use
of the voltage and current for a particular phase will give the
correct result, or that additional compensation is required.
( )
V' bc = a2 - a ZL1 I' 1 (for 3-phase faults)
= 2(a - a)Z
(a) Single-phase to earth (A-E)
9.1 Phase fault impedance measurement V' bc 2
L1 I 1' (for double-phase faults)
F
A
FF
Figure C3.18 shows the current and voltage
AA relations for the
B Distance measuring elements are usually calibrated in terms of
different types of Cfault. If ZS1 and ZL are the
BB source and line
the positive sequence impedance. Correct measurement for both
positive sequence impedances, viewed fromCCthe relaying point,
phase-phase and three-phase faults is achieved by supplying
the currents and voltages at this point for double phase faults
each phase-phase measuring element with its corresponding
are dependent on the source impedance as well as the line
phase - phase voltage and difference of phase currents. Thus, for
impedance. The relationships are given in Figure C3.19.
(a) Single-phase to earth (A-E) the B-C element, the current measured will be:
(a)Three-phase
(b) Single-phase(A-B-C
to earth
or(A-E)
A-B-C-E)
( )
I' b - I' c = a2 - a I' 1 (for 3-phase faults)
= 2(a - a) I' 1
F
A
F
AB
FF
AA I' b - I' c 2
(for double-phase faults)
BC
BB
and the relay will measure ZL1 in each case.
CC
C
9.2 Earth fault impedance measurement
When a phase-earth fault occurs, the phase-earth voltage at the
fault location is zero. It would appear that the voltage drop to the
(b) Three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E)
(b) Three-phase fault is simply the product of the phase current and line impedance.
(a) Single-phase to earth (A-E) (c) Double phase to(A-B-C
earth or A-B-C-E)
(B-C-E)
F
However, the current in the fault loop depends on the number of
A
F
F
F A
earthing points, the method of earthing and sequence impedances
AB A
B
of the fault loop. Unless these factors are taken into account, the
BC B
C
impedance measurement will be incorrect.
C C
The voltage drop to the fault is the sum of the sequence voltage
drops between the relaying point and the fault. The voltage
drop to the fault and current in the fault loop are:
(c) Double phase to earth (B-C-E) (d) Double-phase (B-C)
(b) Three-phase (A-B-C or A-B-C-E) (c) Double phase to earth (B-C-E) V ' a = I '1 Z L 1 + I ' 2 Z L 1 + I ' 0 Z L 0
F
F
A
F
I ' a = I '1 + I ' 2 + I ' 0
Figure C3.18: A A
B
Current and voltage
B relationships for some shunt
B
faults and the residual current I'N at the relaying point is given by:
C
C C I' n = I' a + I' b +I' c = 3I'0
where I'a, I'b, I'c are the phase currents at the relaying point.
Fault Three-phase Double-phase
quantity
(d) Double-phase (B-C) (A-B-C) (B-C) From the above expressions, the voltage at the relaying point
(d) Double-phase (B-C)
I'(c)a Double phase to earth (B-C-E)I'1 0 can be expressed in terms of:
I'b a2I'1 (a2-a)I'1 a. the phase currents at the relaying point
F
I'c A aI'1 (a-a2)I'1 b. the ratio of the transmission line zero sequence to positive
V'a B
ZL1I'1 2(ZS1+ZL1)I'1 sequence impedance K(=ZLO/ZL1)
C
V'b a2ZL1I'1 (2a2ZL1-ZS1)I'1 c. the transmission line positive sequence impedance ZL1:
V'c aZL1I'1 (2aZL1-ZS1)I'1
 K − 1 ...Equation C3.5
1 V ' a = Z L1  I ' a + ( I ' a + I ' b + I ' c ) 
Note 1: (d)aDouble-phase
= - + j (B-C)
x 3/2 I' and V' are at relay location  3 
2
Note 2: I'1 = 1 (I'a+aI'b+a2I'c) The voltage appearing at the relaying point, as previously
3 mentioned, varies with the number of infeeds, the method of
system earthing and the position of the relay relative to the
infeed and earthing points in the system. Figure C3.20 illustrates
Figure C3.19:
Phase currents and voltages at relaying point for 3-phase and the three possible arrangements that can occur in practice
double-phase faults with a single infeed.

Distance Protection
9. Effect of source impedance and earthing methods C3
In Figure C3.20(a), the healthy phase currents are zero, so that Hence, the required setting of ZN for balance at the reach
the phase currents Ia, Ib and Ic have a 1-0-0 pattern. The point is given by equating the above two expressions:
impedance seen by a relay comparing Ia and Va is:
3 I 1 ( Z1 + Z N ) = I 1 ( 2 Z1 + Z N )

Z = 1 +
( K − 1)  Z
Z 0 − Z1 ...Equation C3.7
 L1 ...Equation C3.6 ZN =
 3  3
In Figure C3.20(b), the currents entering the fault from the relay
=
( Z0 − Z1 )
Z1
branch have a 2-1-1 distribution, so: 3 Z1
Z = ZL1 Z 0 − Z1
With the replica impedance set to ,
In Figure C3.20(c), the phase currents have a 1-1-1 distribution, 3
earth fault measuring elements will measure the fault impedance
and hence:
correctly, irrespective of the number of infeeds and earthing
Z = KZL1 points on the system.
If there were infeeds at both ends of the line, the impedance

measured would be a superposition of any two of the above
examples, with the relative magnitudes of the infeeds taken
Relaying
into account. point
Supply
A 1 A
This analysis shows that the relay can only measure an
impedance which is independent of infeed and earthing B 0 B
arrangements if a proportion C 0 C
KN =
( K − 1)
3
where
of the residual current In = Ia + Ib + Ic is added to the phase
current Ia. (a) System earthed at one point only behind the relaying point
This technique is known as ‘residual compensation’.
Most distance relays compensate for the earth fault conditions
Relaying
by using an additional replica impedance Z N within the point
Supply
measuring circuits. Whereas the phase replica impedance Z1 A 1 2 A
is fed with the phase current at the relaying point,ZN is fed with 1 1
B B
the full residual current. The value of ZN is adjusted so that for 1 1
C C
a fault at the reach point, the sum of the voltages developed
across Z1 and ZN equals the measured phase to neutral voltage
in the faulted phase.
The required setting for ZN can be determined by considering
(b) System earthed at one point only in front of the relaying point
an earth fault at the reach point of the relay. This is illustrated
with reference to the A-N fault with a single earthing point
behind the relay as in Figure C3.20(a).
Relaying
Voltage supplied from the VT’s: point
Supply
A 1 2 A
= I1(Z1 + Z2 + Z0) = I1(2Z1 + Z0) 1 1
B B
Voltage across the replica impedances: C 1 1 C
= I aZ 1 + I NZ N
= Ia(Z1 + ZN)
= 3I1(Z1 + ZN) (c) As for (b) but with relaying point at receiving end
Figure C3.20:
Effect of infeed and earthing arrangements on earth fault
distance measurement

Distance Protection
C3 10. Distance relay application problems
Distance relays may suffer from a number of difficulties in their The main cause of underreaching is the effect of fault current
application. Many of them have been overcome in the latest infeed at remote busbars. This is best illustrated by an example.
numerical relays. Nevertheless, an awareness of the problems
is useful where a protection engineer has to deal with older
relays that are already installed and not due for replacement.
10.1 Minimum voltage at relay terminals
To attain their claimed accuracy, distance relays that do not
employ voltage memory techniques require a minimum voltage
Source
at the relay terminals under fault conditions. This voltage should
A
be declared in the data sheet for the relay. With knowledge of F
the sequence impedances involved in the fault, or alternatively
the fault MVA, the system voltage and the earthing arrangements,
<
it is possible to calculate the minimum voltage at the relay
Relaying point
terminals for a fault at the reach point of the relay. It is then only
Relay setting:
necessary to check that the minimum voltage for accurate reach
Relay actual reach due to parallel line infeed:
measurement can be attained for a given application. Care
should be taken that both phase and earth faults are considered.
10.2 Minimum length of line Figure C3.21:
Effect on distance relays of infeed at the remote busbart
To determine the minimum length of line that can be protected
by a distance relay, it is necessary to check first that any
minimum voltage requirement of the relay for a fault at the Zone
In Figure C3.21, the relay at A will not measure the correct
1 reach is within the declared sensitivity for the relay. Secondly,
impedance for a fault on line section Zc due to current infeed
the ohmic impedance of the line (referred if necessary to VT/
CT secondary side quantities) must fall within the ohmic setting
IB. Consider a relay setting of ZA + ZC .
range for Zone 1 reach of the relay. For very short lines and For a fault at point F, the relay is presented with an impedance:
especially for cable circuits, it may be found that the circuit
IA + IB
impedance is less than the minimum setting range of the relay. ZA + × x × ZC
In such cases, an alternative method of protection will be IA
required.
So, for relay balance:
A suitable alternative might be current differential protection,
as the line length will probably be short enough for the cost- Z A + ZC = Z A +
(I A + IB )
× x × ZC
effective provision of a high bandwidth communication link IA
between the relays fitted at the ends of the protected circuit.
Therefore the effective reach is
However, the latest numerical distance relays have a very wide
range of impedance setting ranges and good sensitivity with  IA 
ZA +   ZC
low levels of relaying voltage, so such problems are now rarely  I A + I B  ...Equation C3.8
encountered. Application checks are still essential, though.
When considering earth faults, particular care must be taken It is clear from Equation C3.8 that the relay will under-reach. It
to ensure that the appropriate earth fault loop impedance is is relatively easy to compensate for this by increasing the reach
used in the calculation. setting of the relay, but care has to be taken. Should there be
a possibility of the remote infeed being reduced or zero, the
10.3 Under-reach - Effect of remote infeed relay will then reach further than intended. For example, setting
A distance relay is said to under-reach when the impedance Zone 2 to reach a specific distance into an adjacent line section
presented to it is apparently greater than the impedance to under parallel circuit conditions may mean that Zone 2 reaches
the fault. beyond the Zone 1 reach of the adjacent line protection under
single circuit operation. If IB=9IA and the relay reach is set to
Percentage under-reach is defined as:
see faults at F, then in the absence of the remote infeed, the
ZR − ZF relay effective setting becomes ZA+10ZC.
×100%
ZR Care should also be taken that large forward reach settings
will not result in operation of healthy phase relays for reverse
where:
earth faults, see Section 10.5.
ZR = intended relay reach (relay reach setting)
ZF = effective reach

Distance Protection
10. Distance relay application problems C3
10.4 Over-reach zones, or on an, all zones applied/inhibited, basis, depending

on the particular relay used.
A distance relay is said to over-reach when the apparent
impedance presented to it is less than the impedance to the Various techniques are used in different relay designs to
fault. inhibit power swing blocking in the event of a fault occurring
while a power swing is in progress. This is particularly
Percentage over-reach is defined by the equation:
important, for example, to allow the relay to respond to a fault
ZF − ZR ...Equation C3.9 that develops on a line during the dead time of a single pole
×100% autoreclose cycle.
ZR
Some Utilities may designate certain points on the network
where:
as split points, where the network should be split in the event
ZR = relay reach setting of an unstable power swing or pole-slipping occurring. A
ZF = effective reach dedicated power swing tripping relay may be employed for
this purpose (see Section 7.8). Alternatively, it may be possible
An example of the over-reaching effect is when distance to achieve splitting by strategically limiting the duration for
relays are applied on parallel lines and one line is taken out which the operation a specific distance relay is blocked during
of service and earthed at each end. This is covered in Chapter power swing conditions.
[C5: Protection of Complex Transmission Circuits, Section
2.3]. 10.7 Voltage transformer supervision
10.5 Forward reach limitations Fuses or sensitive miniature circuit breakers normally protect
the secondary wiring between the voltage transformer
There are limitations on the maximum forward reach setting secondary windings and the relay terminals.
that can be applied to a distance relay. For example, with
reference to Figure C3.6, Zone 2 of one line section should Distance relays having:
not reach beyond the Zone 1 coverage of the next line section a. self-polarised offset characteristics encompassing the zero
relay. Where there is a link between the forward reach setting impedance point of the R/X diagram
and the relay resistive coverage (e.g. a Mho Zone 3 element),
b. sound phase polarisation
a relay must not operate under maximum load conditions.
Also, if the relay reach is excessive, the healthy phase-earth c. voltage memory polarisation
fault units of some relay designs may be prone to operation
may maloperate if one or more voltage inputs are removed
for heavy reverse faults. This problem only affected older
due to operation of these devices.
relays applied to three-terminal lines that have significant line
section length asymmetry. A number of the features offered For these types of distance relay, supervision of the voltage
with modern relays can eliminate this problem. inputs is recommended. The supervision may be provided
by external means, e.g. separate voltage supervision circuits,
10.6 Power swing blocking
or it may be incorporated into the distance relay itself. On
Power swings are variations in power flow that occur when detection of VT failure, tripping of the distance relay can be
the internal voltages of generators at different points of the inhibited and/or an alarm is given. Modern distance protection
power system slip relative to each other. The changes in load relays employ voltage supervision that operates from sequence
flows that occur as a result of faults and their subsequent voltages and currents. Zero or negative sequence voltages
clearance are one cause of power swings. and corresponding zero or negative sequence currents are
derived. Discrimination between primary power system faults
A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a
and wiring faults or loss of supply due to individual fuses
distance relay to move away from the normal load area and
blowing or MCB’s being opened is obtained by blocking the
into the relay characteristic. In the case of a stable power
distance protection only when zero or negative sequence
swing it is especially important that the distance relay should
voltage is detected without the presence of zero or negative
not trip in order to allow the power system to return to a stable
sequence current. This arrangement will not detect the
conditions. For this reason, most distance protection schemes
simultaneous loss of all three voltages and additional detection
applied to transmission systems have a power swing blocking
is required that operates for loss of voltage with no change
facility available. Different relays may use different principles
in current, or a current less than that corresponding to the
for detection of a power swing, but all involve recognising
three phase fault current under minimum fault infeed conditions.
that the movement of the measured impedance in relation to
If fast-acting miniature circuit breakers are used to protect
the relay measurement characteristics is at a rate that is
the VT secondary circuits, contacts from these may be used
significantly less than the rate of change that occurs during
to inhibit operation of the distance protection elements and
fault conditions. When the relay detects such a condition,
prevent tripping.
operation of the relay elements can be blocked. Power swing
blocking may be applied individually to each of the relay

Distance Protection
C3 11. Other distance relay features
Numerical distance relays will often incorporate additional Relay Parameter Parameter
features that assist the protection engineer in providing a Units
parameter description value
comprehensive solution to the protection requirements of a Line positive sequence
48.42
particular part of a network. impedance (magnitude)
Line positive sequence
impedance 79.41 deg
(phase angle)
Fault Location (Distance to fault)
Line zero sequence
Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection 163.26
impedance (magnitude)
Tee’d feeder protection Line zero sequence
impedance 74.87 deg
Alternative setting groups (phase angle)
CT supervision Default residual
Check synchroniser compensation factor 0.79 -
(magnitude)
Auto-reclose
Default residual
CB state monitoring compensation factor -6.5 deg
(phase angle)
CB condition monitoring
Zone 1 reach impedance
38.74
CB control setting (magnitude)
Measurement of voltages, currents, etc. Zone 1 reach impedance
80 deg
setting (phase angle)
Event Recorder
Disturbance Recorder 62.95
setting (magnitude)
CB failure detection/logic Zone 2 reach impedance
80 deg
setting (phase angle)
Directional/Non-directional phase fault overcurrent protection
(backup to distance protection) 83.27
setting (magnitude)
Directional/Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection Zone 3 reach impedance
setting 80 deg
(backup to distance protection) (phase angle)
Negative sequence protection Phase fault resistive
78
reach value - Zone 1
Under/Overvoltage protection
Phase fault resistive
Stub-bus protection 78
Broken conductor detection Phase fault resistive
78
User-programmable scheme logic reach value - Zone 3
Time delay - Zone 1 0 s
Table C3.1: Time delay - Zone 2 0.35 s
Additional features in a distance relay Time delay - Zone 3 0.8 s
Ground fault resistive
104
Table C3.1 provides an indication of the additional features
that may be provided in such a relay. The combination of 104
features that are actually provided is manufacturer and relay
model dependent, but it can be seen from the Table that steady 104
progression is being made towards a ‘one-box’ solution that
incorporates all the protection and control requirements for a
Table C3.2:
line or cable. However, at the highest transmission voltages, Distance relay parameters for example
the level of dependability required for rapid clearance of any
protected circuit fault will still demand the use of two independent
protection systems.

Distance Protection
12. Distance relay application example C3
The system diagram shown in Figure C3.22 shows a simple different from the positive sequence impedance, the impedance
230kV network. The following example shows the calculations seen by the relay in the case of an earth fault, involving the
necessary to apply three-zone distance protection to the line passage of zero sequence current, will be different to that seen
interconnecting substations ABC and XYZ. All relevant data for a phase fault.
for this exercise are given in the diagram. The MiCOM P441
Hence, the earth fault reach of the relay requires zero sequence
relay with quadrilateral characteristics is considered in this
compensation (see Section 9.2).
example. Relay parameters used in the example are listed in
Table C3.2. For the relay used, this adjustment is provided by the residual
(or neutral) compensation factor KZO, set equal to:
K Z0 =
( Z0 − Z1 )
ABC XYZ PQR
1000A/1A 100km 60km
3 Z1
230kV 230kV 230kV ∠ K Z0 = ∠

( Z0 − Z1 )
230kV/110V 3 Z1
For each of the transmission lines:
Z< (
Z L1 = 0.089 + j 0.476Ω 0.484 ∠ 79.41o Ω )
Source Impedance: 5000MVA max Z L0 = 0.426 + j1.576Ω (1.632 ∠ 74.87 Ω ) o
2000MVA min
Line impedance: Z1=0.089+j0.476 /km Hence,
Z0=0.426+j1.576 /km
K Z 0 = 0.792
Figure C3.22: ∠ K Z 0 = −6. 5 o
Example network for distance relay setting calculation
12.3 Zone 1 phase reach

Calculations are carried out in terms of primary system The required Zone 1 reach is 80% of the line impedance.
impedances in ohms, rather than the traditional practice of Therefore,
using secondary impedances. With numerical relays, where
the CT and VT ratios may be entered as parameters, the scaling
between primary and secondary ohms can be performed by
( o
) o
0.8 × 48.42 ∠ 79.41 Ω = 38.74 ∠ 79.41 Ω
the relay. This simplifies the example by allowing calculations

Use 38.74∠80˚ Ω nearest settable value.
to be carried out in primary quantities and eliminates
considerations of VT/CT ratios. 12.4 Zone 2 phase reach
For simplicity, it is assumed that only a conventional 3-zone Ideally, the requirements for setting Zone 2 reach are:
distance protection is to be set and that there is no teleprotection
1. at least 120% of the protected line
scheme to be considered. In practice, a teleprotection scheme
would normally be applied to a line at this voltage level. 2. less than the protected line + 50% of the next line
12.1 Line impedance Sometimes, the two requirements are in conflict. In this case,
both requirements can be met. A setting of the whole of the
The line impedance is:
line between substations ABC and XYZ, plus 50% of the
ZL = (0.089 + j0.476)Ω/km x 100km adjacent line section to substation PQR is used.
= 8.9 + j 47.6Ω Hence, Zone 2 reach:
= 48.42 ∠ 79.41˚Ω 48.42 ∠ 79 .41 o +
Use values of 48.42 Ω (magnitude) and 80° (angle) as nearest
= Ω
0.5 x 60 km x 0.089 1 + j0.476
settable values. km
12.2 Residual compensation = 62.95 ∠ 79.41o Ω
The relays used are calibrated in terms of the positive sequence
Use 62.95∠80˚ Ω nearest available setting.
impedance of the protected line. Since the zero sequence
impedance of the line between substations ABC and XYZ is

Distance Protection
C3 12. Distance relay application example
12.5 Zone 3 phase reach Two constraints are imposed upon the settings, as follows:
Zone 3 is set to cover 120% of the sum of the lines between a. it must be greater than the maximum expected phase-phase
substations ABC and PQR, provided this does not result in any fault resistance (principally that of the fault arc)
transformers at substation XYZ being included. It is assumed
b. it must be less than the apparent resistance measured due
that this constraint is met.
to the heaviest load on the line
Hence, Zone 3 reach:
The minimum fault current at Substation ABC is of the order
 48.42 ∠ 79.41 + o  of 1.8kA, leading to a typical arc resistance Rarc using the van
= Ω Warrington formula (Equation C3.4) of 8 Ω. Using the current
1. 2 × 60 × 0.484 ∠ 79.41o  transformer ratio as a guide to the maximum expected load
 
current, the minimum load impedance Zlmin will be 130 Ω.
= 83.27 ∠ 79.41o Ω Typically, the resistive reaches will be set to avoid the minimum
load impedance by a 40% margin for the phase elements,
Use a setting of 83.27∠80˚ Ω nearest available setting. leading to a maximum resistive reach setting of 78 Ω.
12.6 Zone time delay settings Therefore, the resistive reach setting lies between 8 Ω and
Proper co-ordination of the distance relay settings with those 78 Ω. Allowance should be made for the effects of any remote
of other relays is required. Independent timers are available fault infeed, by using the maximum resistive reach possible.
for the three zones to ensure this. While each zone can have its own resistive reach setting, for
this simple example they can all be set equal. This need not
For Zone 1, instantaneous tripping is normal. A time delay is always be the case, it depends on the particular distance
used only in cases where large d.c. offsets occur and old circuit protection scheme used and the need to include Power Swing
breakers, incapable of breaking the instantaneous d.c. Blocking.
component, are involved.
Suitable settings are chosen to be 80% of the load resistance:
The Zone 2 element has to grade with the relays protecting the
line between substations XYZ and PQR since the Zone 2 element R3ph = 78 Ω
covers part of these lines. Assuming that this line has distance, R2ph = 78 Ω
unit or instantaneous high-set overcurrent protection applied,
the time delay required is that to cover the total clearance time
R1ph = 78 Ω
of the downstream relays. To this must be added the reset time 12.8 Earth fault impedance reach settings
for the Zone 2 element following clearance of a fault on the
By default, the residual compensation factor as calculated in
adjacent line, and a suitable safety margin. A typical time delay
Section 12.2 is used to adjust the phase fault reach setting in
is 350ms, and the normal range is 200-500ms.
the case of earth faults, and is applied to all zones.
The considerations for the Zone 3 element are the same as for
12.9 Earth fault resistive reach settings
the Zone 2 element, except that the downstream fault clearance
time is that for the Zone 2 element of a distance relay or IDMT The margin for avoiding the minimum load impedance need
overcurrent protection. Assuming distance relays are used, a only be 20%. Hence the settings are:
typical time is 800ms. In summary:
R3G = 104 Ω
TZ1 = 0ms (instantaneous)
R2G = 104 Ω
TZ2 = 350ms
R1G = 104 Ω
TZ3 = 800ms
This completes the setting of the relay. Table C3.2 also shows
12.7 Phase fault resistive reach settings the settings calculated.
With the use of a quadrilateral characteristic, the resistive reach
settings for each zone can be set independently of the
impedance reach settings. The resistive reach setting represents
the maximum amount of additional fault resistance (in excess
of the line impedance) for which a zone will trip, regardless of
the fault within the zone.

Distance Protection
13. References C3
[C3.1] Protective Relays – their Theory and Practice.

A. R. van C. Warrington, Chapman and Hall, 1962.

C4
Distance Protection Schemes

Chapter
C4
1. Introduction 235
2. Zone 1 extension scheme 236
3. Transfer trip schemes 237
4. Blocking over-reaching schemes 240
5. Directional comparison unblocking scheme 242
6. Comparison of transfer trip and blocking relaying schemes 242

C4 1. Introduction
Conventional time-stepped distance protection is illustrated in Unit schemes of protection that compare the conditions at the
Figure C4.1. One of the main disadvantages of this scheme two ends of the feeder simultaneously (e.g., line differential
is that the instantaneous Zone 1 protection at each end of the protection) positively identify whether the fault is internal or
protected line cannot be set to cover the whole of the feeder external to the protected section and provide high-speed
length and is usually set to about 80%. This leaves two ‘end protection for the whole feeder length. This advantage is
zones’, each being about 20% of the protected feeder length. balanced by the fact that the unit scheme does not provide the
Faults in these zones are cleared in Zone 1 time by the protection back up protection for adjacent feeders given by a distance
at one end of the feeder and in Zone 2 time (typically 0.25 to scheme.
0.4 seconds) by the protection at the other end of the feeder.
The most desirable scheme is obviously a combination of the
This situation cannot be tolerated in some applications, for two best features of both arrangements, that is, instantaneous
main reasons: tripping over the whole feeder length plus back-up protection
to adjacent feeders. This can be achieved by interconnecting
a. faults remaining on the feeder for Zone 2 time may cause
the distance protection relays at each end of the protected
the system to become unstable
feeder by a communications channel. Communication
b. where high-speed auto-reclosing is used, the non- techniques are described in detail in Chapter [D2: Signalling
simultaneous opening of the circuit breakers at both ends and Intertripping in Protection Schemes].
of the faulted section results in no ‘dead time’ during the
The purpose of the communications channel is to transmit
auto-reclose cycle for the fault to be extinguished and for
information about the system conditions from one end of the
ionised gases to clear. This results in the possibility that a
protected line to the other, including requests to initiate or
transient fault will cause permanent lockout of the circuit
prevent tripping of the remote circuit breaker. The former
breakers at each end of the line section
arrangement is generally known as a ‘transfer tripping scheme’
Even where instability does not occur, the increased duration while the latter is generally known as a ‘blocking scheme’.
of the disturbance may give rise to power quality problems, However, the terminology of the various schemes varies widely,
and may result in increased plant damage. according to local custom and practice.
Relay A
end zone
Z3G
Z2A Z1
Z1A
A B C
F Z2 T 0
Time
Z2
0 1 Trip
Z1 B Z3 T 0
Z3
Z2B
Z3B
Relay B (b) Trip circuit (solid state logic)

end zone
(a) Stepped time/distance characteristics
Figure C4.1:
Conventional distance scheme

2. Relay performance C4
This scheme is intended for use with an auto-reclose facility, If the fault is transient, the tripped circuit breakers will reclose
or where no communications channel is available, or the channel successfully, but otherwise further tripping during the reclaim
has failed. Thus it may be used on radial distribution feeders, time is subject to the discrimination obtained with normal Zone
or on interconnected lines as a fallback when no communications 1 and Zone 2 settings.
channel is available, e.g. due to maintenance or temporary
The disadvantage of the Zone 1 extension scheme is that
fault. The scheme is shown in Figure C4.2.
external faults within the Z1X reach of the relay result in tripping
The Zone 1 elements of the distance relay have two settings. of circuit breakers external to the faulted section, increasing
One is set to cover 80% of the protected line length as in the the amount of breaker maintenance needed and needless
basic distance scheme. The other, known as ‘Extended Zone transient loss of supply to some consumers. This is illustrated
1’or ‘Z1X’, is set to overreach the protected line, a setting of in Figure C4.3(a) for a single circuit line where three circuit
120% of the protected line being common. The Zone 1 reach breakers operate and in Figure C4.3(b) for a double circuit line,
is normally controlled by the Z1X setting and is reset to the where five circuit breakers operate.
basic Zone 1 setting when a command from the auto-reclose
relay is received.
Z1A Z1ext A
Z3A A B C
Z2A
Z1A Z1ext A
A B C
Z1extB1 Z1B1 Z1B2 Z1ext B2
Z1ext C Z1C
Z1ext B Z1B Breakers
Z2 B marked thus
auto-reclose
Z3 B
(a) Distance/time characteristics (a) Fault within Zone 1 extension reach of distance relays
(single circuit lines)
Auto-reclose Z1A Z1extA

Reset Zone 1ext
Zone 1ext
& A D
B C
Z1ext D Z1D
Zone 1 1
Z1ext B Z1B
Z1C Z1extC
Z2 T 0
Zone 2
1 Trip
Zone 3 Z3 T 0
Z1P Z1extP
P L
(b) Simplified logic
N M
Z1extN Z1N
Figure C4.2: Z1M Z1ext M

Z1ext L Z1L
Zone 1 extension scheme
(b) Fault within Zone 1 extension reach of distance relays

(double circuit lines)
On occurrence of a fault at any point within the Z1X reach, the
relay operates in Zone 1 time, trips the circuit breaker and
initiates auto-reclosure. The Zone 1 reach of the distance relay
Figure C4.3:
is also reset to the basic value of 80%, prior to the auto-reclose Performance of Zone 1 extension scheme in conjunction with
closing pulse being applied to the breaker. This should also auto-reclose relays
occur when the auto-reclose facility is out of service. Reversion
to the Z1X reach setting occurs only at the end of the reclaim
time. For interconnected lines, the Z1X scheme is established
(automatically or manually) upon loss of the communications
channel by selection of the appropriate relay setting (setting
group in a numerical relay).

C4 3. Transfer tripping schemes
A number of these schemes are available, as described below. A variant of this scheme, found on some relays, allows tripping
Selection of an appropriate scheme depends on the by Zone 3 element operation as well as Zone 2, provided the
requirements of the system being protected. fault is in the forward direction. This is sometimes called the
PUP-Fwd scheme.
3.1 Direct under-reach transfer tripping scheme
Time delayed resetting of the ‘signal received’ element is
The simplest way of reducing the fault clearance time at the
required to ensure that the relays at both ends of a single-end
terminal that clears an end zone fault in Zone 2 time is to adopt
fed faulted line of a parallel feeder circuit have time to trip when
a direct transfer trip or intertrip technique, the logic of which
the fault is close to one end. Consider a fault F in a double
is shown in Figure C4.4.
circuit line, as shown in Figure C4.6.
A contact operated by the Zone 1 relay element is arranged
to send a signal to the remote relay requesting a trip. The
scheme may be called a ‘direct under-reach transfer tripping
scheme’, ‘transfer trip under-reaching scheme’, or ‘intertripping Signal send
Z1
under-reach distance protection scheme’, as the Zone 1 relay
elements do not cover the whole of the line. Z2 T 0
Z2
Z3 T 0
Z3 1 Trip
Signal
send Signal
Z1 receive 0 T
&
Z2 T 0
Z2
(a) Signal logic
1 Trip
Z3 T 0
Z3
Signal Send Send Signal
Distance relay
Distance relay
circuit circuit
send (f1) send
(f1)
Signal receive
Signal Receive Receive Signal
receive circuit circuit receive
(f1) (f1)
Signalling equipment Signalling equipment
-EndA -EndB
Figure C4.4:
Logic for direct under-reach transfer tripping scheme (b) Signalling arrangement
A fault F in the end zone at end B in Figure C4.1(a) results in Figure C4.5:
operation of the Zone 1 relay and tripping of the circuit breaker Permissive under-reach transfer tripping scheme
at end B. A request to trip is also sent to the relay at end A.
The receipt of a signal at A initiates tripping immediately
because the receive relay contact is connected directly to the The fault is close to end A, so there is negligible infeed from
trip relay. The disadvantage of this scheme is the possibility of end B when the fault at F occurs. The protection at B detects
undesired tripping by accidental operation or maloperation of a Zone 2 fault only after the breaker at end A has tripped. It is
signalling equipment, or interference on the communications possible for the Zone 1 element at B to reset, thus removing
channel. As a result, it is not commonly used. the permissive signal to and causing the ‘signal received’
element at B to reset before the Zone 2 unit at end B operates.
3.2 Permissive under-reach transfer tripping
It is therefore necessary to delay the resetting of the ‘signal
(PUP) scheme
received’ element to ensure high speed tripping at end B.
The direct under-reach transfer tripping scheme described
The PUP schemes require only a single communications channel
above is made more secure by supervising the received signal
for two-way signalling between the line ends, as the channel
with the operation of the Zone 2 relay element before allowing
is keyed by the under-reaching Zone 1 elements.
an instantaneous trip, as shown in Figure C4.5. The scheme is
then known as a ‘permissive under-reach transfer tripping When the circuit breaker at one end is open, or there is a weak
scheme’ (sometimes abbreviated as PUP Z2 scheme) or infeed such that the relevant relay element does not operate,
‘permissive under-reach distance protection’, as both relays instantaneous clearance cannot be achieved for end-zone
must detect a fault before the remote end relay is permitted to faults near the ‘breaker open’ terminal unless special features
trip in Zone 1 time. are included, as detailed in section 3.5.

3. Transfer tripping schemes C4
Z3A
A B Z2 A
F
Z1A
A B C
Z1B
Z2 B
Z3B
(a) Fault occurs-bus bar voltage low so

negligible fault current via end B (a) Distance/time characteristics
A B Z1 & Z2
F
Open 1
Z3 Z3 T 0 Trip
Z2 T 0
1
Range change signal
Signal
(b) End A relay clears fault and current receive
starts feeding from end B
&
Signal send
Figure C4.6:
(b) Signal logic
PUP scheme: Single-end fed close-up fault on double circuit
line
Figure C4.7:
3.3 Permissive under-reaching acceleration scheme Permissive under-reaching acceleration scheme
This scheme is applicable only to zone switched distance relays

that share the same measuring elements for both Zone 1 and comparison scheme’, or ‘permissive overreach distance
Zone 2. In these relays, the reach of the measuring elements protection scheme’.
is extended from Zone 1 to Zone 2 by means of a range change
signal immediately, instead of after Zone 2 time. It is also called Since the signalling channel is keyed by over-reaching Zone
an ‘accelerated underreach distance protection scheme’. 2 elements, the scheme requires duplex communication
channels - one frequency for each direction of signalling.
The under-reaching Zone 1 unit is arranged to send a signal
to the remote end of the feeder in addition to tripping the local If distance relays with mho characteristics are used, the scheme
circuit breaker. The receive relay contact is arranged to extend may be more advantageous than the permissive under-reaching
the reach of the measuring element from Zone 1 to Zone 2. scheme for protecting short lines, because the resistive
This accelerates the fault clearance at the remote end for faults coverage of the Zone 2 unit may be greater than that of
that lie in the region between the Zone 1 and Zone 2 reaches. Zone 1.
The scheme is shown in Figure C4.7. Modern distance relays To prevent operation under current reversal conditions in a
do not employ switched measuring elements, so the scheme parallel feeder circuit, it is necessary to use a current reversal
is likely to fall into disuse. guard timer to inhibit the tripping of the forward Zone 2 elements.
3.4 Permissive over-reach transfer tripping (POP) Otherwise maloperation of the scheme may occur under current
scheme reversal conditions, see Chapter [C3: Distance Protection, Section
9] for more details. It is necessary only when the Zone 2 reach
In this scheme, a distance relay element set to reach beyond is set greater than 150% of the protected line impedance.
the remote end of the protected line is used to send an
intertripping signal to the remote end. However, it is essential The timer is used to block the permissive trip and signal send
that the receive relay contact is monitored by a directional relay circuits as shown in Figure C4.9. The timer is energised if a
contact to ensure that tripping does not take place unless the signal is received and there is no operation of Zone 2 elements.
fault is within the protected section; see Figure C4.8. The An adjustable time delay on pick-up (tp) is usually set to allow
instantaneous contacts of the Zone 2 unit are arranged to send instantaneous tripping to take place for any internal faults, taking
the signal, and the received signal, supervised by Zone 2 into account a possible slower operation of Zone 2. The timer
operation, is used to energise the trip circuit. The scheme is will have operated and blocked the ‘permissive trip’ and ‘signal
then known as a ‘permissive over-reach transfer tripping send’ circuits by the time the current reversal takes place.
scheme’ (sometimes abbreviated to ‘POP’), ‘directional

C4 3. Transfer tripping schemes
The above scheme using Zone 2 relay elements is often referred

Signal send to as a POP Z2 scheme. An alternative exists that uses Zone 1
Z1 elements instead of Zone 2, and this is referred to as the POP
Z1 scheme.
Z2 T 0
Z2
3.5 Weak infeed conditions
Z3 Z3T 0
1 Trip In the standard permissive over-reach scheme, as with the
permissive under-reach scheme, instantaneous clearance cannot
be achieved for end-zone faults under weak infeed or breaker
Signal receive & open conditions. To overcome this disadvantage, two possibilities
exist.
(a) Signal logic
The Weak Infeed Echo feature available in some protection relays
allows the remote relay to echo the trip signal back to the sending
Signal Send f1 f2 Send Signal relay even if the appropriate remote relay element has not
Distance relay
Distance relay
circuit circuit send

send
(f1) (f2) operated. This caters for conditions of the remote end having
Signal Receive Receive Signal a weak infeed or circuit breaker open condition, so that the
circuit f 2 circuit
receive
(f2)
f1
(f1)
receive relevant remote relay element does not operate. Fast clearance
Signalling equipment Signalling equipment for these faults is now obtained at both ends of the line. The
-EndA -EndB
logic is shown in Figure C4.10. A time delay (T1) is required in
(b) Signalling arrangement the echo circuit to prevent tripping of the remote end breaker
when the local breaker is tripped by the busbar protection or
breaker fail protection associated with other feeders connected
Figure C4.8: to the busbar. The time delay ensures that the remote end Zone
Permissive over-reach transfer tripping scheme 2 element will reset by the time the echoed signal is received at
that end. Signal transmission can take place even after the remote
end breaker has tripped. This gives rise to the possibility of
The timer is de-energised if the Zone 2 elements operate or the continuous signal transmission due to lock-up of both signals.
‘signal received’ element resets. The reset time delay (td) of the Timer T1 is used to prevent this. After this time delay, ‘signal
timer is set to cover any overlap in time caused by Zone 2 send’ is blocked.
elements operating and the signal resetting at the remote end,
A variation on the Weak Infeed Echo feature is to allow tripping
when the current in the healthy feeder reverses. Using a timer
of the remote relay under the circumstances described above,
in this manner means that no extra time delay is added in the
providing that an undervoltage condition exists, due to the fault.
permissive trip circuit for an internal fault.
This is known as the Weak Infeed Trip feature and ensures that
both ends are tripped if the conditions are satisfied.
Z1
Z2 T 0
Z2 1 Trip
From 'POP' signal
send logic
Z3 T 0
Z3 (Figure 12.8)
To 'POP' trip logic

Signal tp td (Figure 12.8)
receive & &
Breaker 'open' 0
0
& & 1 Signal
send
Signal receive
& Signal send

Current reversal guard logic – permissive over-reach scheme Weak Infeed Echo logic circuit

4. Blocking over-reaching schemes C4
The arrangements described so far have used the signalling relay for Zone 2 faults external to the protected section. To
channel(s) to transmit a tripping instruction. If the signalling achieve this, the reverse-looking elements and the signalling
channel fails or there is no Weak Infeed feature provided, channel must operate faster than the forward-looking elements.
end-zone faults may take longer to be cleared. In practice, this is seldom the case and to ensure discrimination,
a short time delay is generally introduced into the blocking
Blocking over-reaching schemes use an over-reaching
mode trip circuit. Either the Zone 2 or Zone 1 element can be
distance scheme and inverse logic. Signalling is initiated only
used as the forward-looking element, giving rise to two variants
for external faults and signalling transmission takes place
of the scheme.
over healthy line sections. Fast fault clearance occurs when
no signal is received and the over-reaching Zone 2 distance 4.1.1 Blocking over-reaching protection scheme using
measuring elements looking into the line operate. The signalling zone 2 element
channel is keyed by reverse-looking distance elements (Z3
This scheme (sometimes abbreviated to BOP Z2) is based
in the diagram, though which zone is used depends on the
on the ideal blocking scheme of Figure C4.11, but has the
particular relay used). An ideal blocking scheme is shown in
signal logic illustrated in Figure C4.12. It is also known as a
Figure C4.11. The single frequency signalling channel operates
‘directional comparison blocking scheme’ or a ‘blocking over-
both local and remote receive relays when a block signal is
reach distance protection scheme’.
initiated at any end of the protected section.
Z1
Z3 A
Z2 A
Z2 T 0
Z1 A Z2 1 Trip
C
Z3 T 0
Z3
Z1 B
Z2 B
Z3 B Signal tp td
receive & &
(a) Distance/time characteristics
Signal send
Z1
& Signal send
Z2 T 0
Z2
Z3 Z3T 0 1
Trip Figure C4.12:
Signal logic for BOP Z2 scheme
Signal receive &
Operation of the scheme can be understood by considering

(b) Simplified logic
the faults shown at F1, F2 and F3 in Figure C4.11 along with
the signal logic of Figure C4.12.
Signal Send Send Signal
A fault at F1 is seen by the Zone 1 relay elements at both
Distance relay
Distance relay
circuit circuit
send send
ends A and B; as a result, the fault is cleared instantaneously
Signal Receive Receive Signal
circuit circuit receive
at both ends of the protected line. Signalling is controlled by
receive
the Z3 elements looking away from the protected section, so
Signalling equipment Signalling equipment
-End -End no transmission takes place, thus giving fast tripping via the
forward-looking Zone 1 elements.
(c) Signalling arrangement
A fault at F2 is seen by the forward-looking Zone 2 elements
at ends A and B and by the Zone 1 elements at end B. No
Figure C4.11: signal transmission takes place, since the fault is internal and
Ideal distance protection blocking scheme the fault is cleared in Zone 1 time at end B and after the short
time lag (STL) at end A.
4.1 Practical blocking schemes A fault at F3 is seen by the reverse-looking Z3 elements at

end B and the forward looking Zone 2 elements at end A.
A blocking instruction has to be sent by the reverse-looking
The Zone 1 relay elements at end B associated with line
relay elements to prevent instantaneous tripping of the remote
section B-C would normally clear the fault at F3. To prevent

C4 4. Blocking over-reaching schemes
the Z2 elements at end A from tripping, the reverse-looking Blocking schemes, like the permissive over-reach scheme,
Zone 3 elements at end B send a blocking signal to end A. are also affected by the current reversal in the healthy feeder
If the fault is not cleared instantaneously by the protection on due to a fault in a double circuit line. If current reversal
line section B-C, the trip signal will be given at end B for conditions occur, as described in section 9.9, it may be
section A-B after the Z3 time delay. possible for the maloperation of a breaker on the healthy line
to occur. To avoid this, the resetting of the ‘signal received’
The setting of the reverse-looking Zone 3 elements must be
element provided in the blocking scheme is time delayed.
greater than that of the Zone 2 elements at the remote end
of the feeder, otherwise there is the possibility of Zone 2 The timer with delayed resetting (td) is set to cover the time
elements initiating tripping and the reverse looking Zone 3 difference between the maximum resetting time of reverse-
elements failing to see an external fault. This would result in looking Zone 3 elements and the signalling channel. So, if
instantaneous tripping for an external fault. When the signalling there is a momentary loss of the blocking signal during the
channel is used for a stabilising signal, as in the above case, current reversal, the timer does not have time to reset in the
transmission takes place over a healthy line section if power blocking mode trip circuit and no false tripping takes place.
line carrier is used. The signalling channel should then be
4.1.2 Blocking over-reaching protection scheme using
more reliable when used in the blocking mode than in tripping
zone 1 element
mode.
This is similar to the BOP Z2 scheme described above, except
It is essential that the operating times of the various relays
that an over-reaching Zone 1 element is used in the logic,
be skilfully co-ordinated for all system conditions, so that
instead of the Zone 2 element. It may also be known as the
sufficient time is always allowed for the receipt of a blocking
BOP Z1 scheme.
signal from the remote end of the feeder. If this is not done
accurately, the scheme may trip for an external fault or 4.2 Weak infeed conditions
alternatively, the end zone tripping times may be delayed The protection at the strong infeed terminal will operate for
longer than is necessary. all internal faults, since a blocking signal is not received from
If the signalling channel fails, the scheme must be arranged the weak infeed terminal end. In the case of external faults
to revert to conventional basic distance protection. Normally, behind the weak infeed terminal, the reverse-looking elements
the blocking mode trip circuit is supervised by a ‘channel-in- at that end will see the fault current fed from the strong infeed
service’ contact so that the blocking mode trip circuit is isolated terminal and operate, initiating a block signal to the remote
when the channel is out of service, as shown in Figure C4.12. end. The relay at the strong infeed end operates correctly
In a practical application, the reverse-looking relay elements without the need for any additional circuits. The relay at the
may be set with a forward offset characteristic to provide weak infeed end cannot operate for internal faults, and so
back-up protection for busbar faults after the zone time delay. tripping of that breaker is possible only by means of direct
It is then necessary to stop the blocking signal being sent for intertripping from the strong source end.
internal faults. This is achieved by making the ‘signal send’
circuit conditional upon non-operation of the forward-looking
Zone 2 elements, as shown in Figure C4.13.
Z3 G
Z2G
Z1G
Z1H
Z2 H
Z3 H
(a) Distance/time characteristics
Z3
Z2 & Signal send
(b) Solid state logic of send circuit
Figure C4.13:
Blocking scheme using reverselooking relays with offset

5. Directional comparison unblocking scheme C4
The permissive over-reach scheme described in Section 3.4 short-circuited by the fault. This is achieved by allowing aided
can be arranged to operate on a directional comparison tripping for a short time interval, typically 100 to 150
unblocking principle by providing additional circuitry in the milliseconds, after the loss of both the block and the unblock
signalling equipment. In this scheme (also called a ’deblocking frequency signals. After this time interval, aided tripping is
over-reach distance protection scheme’), a continuous block permitted only if the unblock frequency signal is received.
(or guard) signal is transmitted. When the over-reaching
This arrangement gives the scheme improved security over
distance elements operate, the frequency of the signal
a blocking scheme, since tripping for external faults is possible
transmitted is shifted to an ‘unblock’ (trip) frequency. The
only if the fault occurs within the above time interval of channel
receipt of the unblock frequency signal and the operation of
failure. Weak Infeed terminal conditions can be catered for
over-reaching distance elements allow fast tripping to occur
by the techniques detailed in Section 3.5.
for faults within the protected zone. In principle, the scheme
is similar to the permissive over-reach scheme. In this way, the scheme has the dependability of a blocking
scheme and the security of a permissive over-reach scheme.
The scheme is made more dependable than the standard
This scheme is generally preferred when power line carrier
permissive over-reach scheme by providing additional circuits
is used, except when continuous transmission of signal is not
in the receiver equipment. These allow tripping to take place
acceptable.
for internal faults even if the transmitted unblock signal is
6. Comparison of transfer trip and blocking relaying schemes
On normal two-terminal lines the main deciding factors in Criterion Transfer Blocking
the choice of the type of scheme, apart from the reliability of tripping scheme
the signalling channel previously discussed, are operating scheme
speed and the method of operation of the system. Table C4.1 Speed of operation Fast Not as fast
compares the important characteristics of the various types
Speed with
of scheme. Slower As fast
in-service testing
Modern digital or numerical distance relays are provided with Suitable for auto-
a choice of several schemes in the same relay. Thus, scheme Yes Yes
reclose
selection is now largely independent of relay selection, and Security against
the user is assured that a relay is available with all the required maloperation due to:
features to cope with changing system conditions.
Special features Special features
Current reversal
required required
Loss of
Poor Good
communications
Special features Special features
Weak Infeed/Open CB
required required
Table C4.1:
Comparison of different distance protection schemes

C5
Protection of Complex
Transmission Circuits
Chapter
Protection of Complex
C5
Transmission Circuits
1. Introduction 245
2. Parallel feeders 245
3. Multi-ended feeders – unit protection 249
4. Multi-ended feeders – distance protection 252
5. Multi-ended feeders - application of distance protection schemes 255
6. Protection of series compensated lines 256
7. Examples 257
8. References 260
Protection of Complex Transmission Circuits
C5 1. Introduction
Chapters [C2: Line Differential Protection], [C3: Distance which protection schemes are particularly appropriate for use
Protection] and [C4: Distance Protection Schemes] have in these situations.
covered the basic principles of protection for two terminal,
single circuit lines whose circuit impedance is due solely to
the conductors used. However parallel transmission circuits
are often installed, either as duplicate circuits on a common Bus C
structure, or as separate lines connecting the same two terminal
points via different routes. Also, circuits may be multi-ended,
a three-ended circuit being the most common.
For economic reasons, transmission and distribution lines can Source Source
be much more complicated, maybe having three or more
terminals (multi-ended feeder), or with more than one circuit
carried on a common structure (parallel feeders), as shown in
Figure C5.1. Other possibilities are the use of series capacitors
Bus A Bus B
or direct-connected shunt reactors. The protection of such
lines is more complicated and requires the basic schemes
described in the above chapters to be modified.
The purpose of this chapter is to explain the special requirements Figure C5.1:
of some of these situations in respect of protection and identify Parallel and multi-ended feeders
2. Parallel feeders
If two overhead lines are supported on the same structures or 2.2.1 Current reversal on double circuit lines
are otherwise in close proximity over part or whole of their
When a fault is cleared sequentially on one circuit of a double
length, there is a mutual coupling between the two circuits.
circuit line with generation sources at both ends of the circuit,
The positive and negative sequence coupling between the two
the current in the healthy line can reverse for a short time.
circuits is small and is usually neglected. The zero sequence
Unwanted tripping of CBs on the healthy line can then occur
coupling can be strong and its effect cannot be ignored.
if a Permissive Over- reach or Blocking distance scheme, see
The other situation that requires mutual effects to be taken into Chapter [C4: Distance Protection Schemes] is used. Figure
account is when there is an earth fault on a feeder when the C5.2 shows how the situation can arise. The CB at D clears
parallel feeder is out of service and earthed at both ends. An the fault at F faster than the CB at C. Before CB D opens, the
earth fault in the feeder that is in service can induce current in Zone 2 elements at A may see the fault and operate, sending
the earth loop of the earthed feeder, causing a misleading a trip signal to the relay for CB B. The reverse looking element
mutual compensation signal. of the relay at CB B also sees the fault and inhibits tripping of
CBs A and B. However, once CB D opens, the relay element
2.1 Unit protection systems
at A starts to reset, while the forward looking elements at B
Types of protection that use current only, for example unit pick up (due to current reversal) and initiate tripping. If the
protection systems, are not affected by the coupling between reset time of the forward-looking elements of the relay at A is
the feeders. Therefore, compensation for the effects of mutual longer than the operating time of the forward-looking elements
coupling is not required for the relay tripping elements. at B, the relays will trip the healthy line. The solution is to
incorporate a blocking time delay that prevents the tripping of
If the relay has a distance-to-fault feature, mutual compensation
the forward-looking elements of the relays and is initiated by
is required for an accurate measurement. Refer to Section 2.2.3
the reverse-looking element. The time delay must be longer
for how this is achieved.
than the reset time of the relay elements at A.
2.2 Distance protection
There are a number of problems applicable to distance relays,
as described in the following sections.

2. Parallel feeders C5
induced voltage proportional to the zero sequence current in

the other circuit.
As the current distribution in the two circuits is unaffected by
Z< Z< the presence of mutual coupling, no similar variation in the
current applied to the relay element takes place and, consequently,
Fault
the relay measures the impedance to the fault incorrectly. Whether
the apparent impedance to the fault is greater or less than the
actual impedance depends on the direction of the current flow
Z< Z< in the healthy circuit. For the common case of two circuits, A
and B, connected at the local and remote busbars, as shown
(a) Fault current distribution
at instant of fault in Figure C5.3, the impedance of Line A measured by a distance
relay, with the normal zero sequence current compensation from
its own feeder, is given by:
Open
 ( I B 0 I A 0 ) M 
Z A = nZ L1 1 + 
 2( I A1 I A 0 ) + K 
Z< Z< ...Equation C5.1
Fault where:
M =Z M 0
Z L1
Z< Z<
The true impedance to the fault is nZL1 where n is the per unit
(b) Fault current distribution fault position measured from R and ZL1 is the positive sequence
with circuit breaker D open impedance of a single circuit.
The ‘error’in measurement is determined from the fraction inside
the bracket; this varies with the positive and zero sequence
Figure C5.2: currents in circuit A and the zero sequence currents in circuit B.
Fault current distribution in a double-circuit line
These currents are expressed below in terms of the line and
2.2.2 Under-reach on parallel lines source parameters :
If a fault occurs on a line beyond the remote terminal end of I BO nZ''SO -(1-n) Z'SO
a parallel line circuit, the distance relay will under-reach for =
I AO (2-n) Z''SO + (1-n) ( Z'SO + Z LO + Z MO )
those zones set to reach into the affected line.
Analysis shows that under these conditions, because the relay
sees only 50% (for two parallel circuits) of the total fault current
(2-n) Z ''S1 +(1-n) ( Z'S1 + Z L1 )
I A1 = I1
for a fault in the adjacent line section, the relay sees the 2 ( Z'S1 + Z''S1 ) + Z L1
impedance of the affected section as twice the correct value.
This may have to be allowed for in the settings of Zones 2 and (2-n) Z ''SO +(1-n) ( Z'SO + Z LO +Z MO )
3 of conventionally set distance relays. I AO = IO
2 ( Z'SO + Z''SO ) + Z LO + Z MO
Since the requirement for the minimum reach of Zone 2 is to
the end of the protected line section and the under-reach effect
only occurs for faults in the following line section(s), it is not and ZMO = zero sequence mutual impedance between the
usually necessary to adjust Zone 2 impedance settings to two circuits
compensate. Note: For earth faults 11 = 1O
However, Zone 3 elements are intended to provide backup All symbols in the above expressions are either self-explanatory
protection to adjacent line sections and hence the under- from Figure C5.3 or have been introduced in Chapter [C3:
reaching effect must be allowed for in the impedance Distance Protection]. Using the above formulae, families of reach
calculations. curves may be constructed, of which Figure C5.4 is typical. In
this figure, n’ is the effective per unit reach of a relay set to protect
2.2.3 Behaviour of distance relays with earth faults on
80% of the line. It has been assumed that an infinite busbar is
the protected feeder
located at each line end, that is, Z'S1 and Z"S1 are both zero. A
When an earth fault occurs in the system, the voltage applied family of curves of constant n’ has been plotted for variations in
to the earth fault element of the relay in one circuit includes an the source zero sequence impedances Z'SO and Z"SO.

C5 2. Parallel feeders
100
Line B Limit of n' 5
=0.67 67
ZM0 50 when y ' = 0.
n 8
x 0 .6
=0
n'
.7
Line A =0
n'
n 5
.7
Fault 10 =0
n' .8
=0 5
Relay n'
1)
5 .8
=0
e
on
location n'
(Z
(a) Single line diagram
g
in
.9
tt
=0
se
n'
al
in
m
1
5
No
.9
=0
n'
0.5
Limit of
n'=1
when y 0
x
0.1 0.5 1 5 10 50 100
R
(b) Positive sequence network
Figure C5.4:
Typical reach curves illustrating the effect of mutual coupling
with infinite sources at both ends
IA0
R
hazards associated with feeding a relay protecting one circuit
from a CT located in a different circuit.
(c) Zero Sequence network For a solid phase to earth fault at the theoretical reach of the
relay, the voltage and current in the faulty phase at the relaying
point are given by:
Figure C5.3:
General parallel circuit fed from both ends V A = I A1Z L1 + I A 2 Z L 2 + I A 0 Z L 0 +I B 0 Z M 0 
 ...Equation C5.2
I A = I A1 + I A 2 + I A 0 
It can be seen from Figure C5.4 that relay R can under-reach
or over-reach, according to the relative values of the zero The voltage and current fed into the relay are given by:
sequence source to line impedance ratios; the extreme effective
per unit reaches for the relay are 0.67 and 1. Relay over-reach V R =V A 
is not a problem, as the condition being examined is a fault in  ...Equation C5.3
the protected feeder, for which relay operation is desirable. It I R = I A + K R I A 0 + K M I B 0 
can also be seen from Figure C5.4 that relay R is more likely
to under-reach. However the relay located at the opposite line where:
end will tend to over-reach. As a result, the Zone 1 characteristic
KR is the residual compensation factor
of the relays at both ends of the feeder will overlap for an earth
fault anywhere in the feeder. KM is the mutual compensation factor:
Satisfactory protection can be obtained with a transfer trip, For the relay to measure the line impedance accurately, the
under- reach type distance scheme. Further, compensation for following condition must be met:
the effect of zero sequence mutual impedance is not necessary
unless a distance-to-fault facility is provided. Some relays VR Z
= L1
compensate for the effect of mutual impedance in the distance IR
relay elements, usually as a setting option.
Thus:
Compensation is achieved by injecting a proportion of the zero
Z L 0 −Z L1 ZM 0
sequence current flowing in the parallel feeder into the relay. KR = KM =
However, some Utilities will not permit this due to the potential Z L1 Z L1

2. Parallel feeders C5
2.2.4 Distance relay behaviour with earth faults on the Humpage and Kandil [Ref C5.2: Distance protection performance
parallel feeder under conditions of single-circuit working in double-circuit
transmission lines] have shown that the apparent impedance
Although distance relays with mutual compensation measure
presented to the relay under these conditions is given by:
the correct distance to the fault, they may not operate correctly
2
if the fault occurs in the adjacent feeder. Davison and Wright I A0 Z M 0
[Ref C5.1: Some factors affecting the accuracy of distance
Z R = Z L1 −
I RZ L0 ...Equation C5.4
type protective equipment under earth fault conditions] have
shown that, while distance relays without mutual compensation where:
will not over-reach for faults outside the protected feeder, the
IR is the current fed into the relay = IA +KR IAO
relays may see faults in the adjacent feeder if mutual
compensation is provided. With reference to Figure C5.3, the The ratio IAO / IR varies with the system conditions, reaching a
amount of over-reach is highest when Z"S1 = Z"S2 = Z"SO = ∞ . maximum when the system is earthed behind the relay with no
Under these conditions, faults occurring in the first 43% of generation at that end. In this case, the ratio IAO / IR is equal to
feeder A will appear to the distance relay in feeder B to be ZL1 / ZLO, and the apparent impedance presented to the relay is:
within its Zone 1 reach. The solution is to compare the parallel
 Z2 
line residual current to the protected line residual current and Z R = Z L1 1− M2 0 
disable the mutual compensation when the ratio is high.  Z L0 
2.2.5 Distance relay behaviour with single-circuit operation It is apparent from the above formulae that the relay has a
tendency to over-reach. Care should be taken when Zone 1
If only one of the parallel feeders is in service, the protection settings are selected for the distance protection of lines in
in the remaining feeder measures the fault impedance correctly, which this condition may be encountered. In order to overcome
except when the feeder that is not in service is earthed at both this possible over-reaching effect, some Utilities reduce the
ends. In this case, the zero sequence impedance network is reach of earth fault relays to around 0.65 ZL1 (80% of normal
as shown in Figure C5.5. reach) when lines are taken out of service. However, the
probability of having a fault on the first section of the following
line while one line is out of service is very small, and many
Utilities do not reduce the setting under this condition. It should
be noted that the use of mutual compensation would not
overcome the over-reaching effect since earthing clamps are
normally placed on the line side of the current transformers.
Relay
location Typical values of zero sequence line impedances for HV lines
are given in Table C5.1, where the maximum per unit over-reach
error (ZMO/ZLO)2 is also given. It should be noted that the
over-reach values quoted in this table are maxima, and will be
found only in rare cases. In most cases, there will be generation
at both ends of the feeder and the amount of over-reach will
therefore be reduced. In the calculations carried out by
Figure C5.5: Humpage and Kandil, with more realistic conditions, the
Zero sequence impedance network during single circuit maximum error found in a 400kV double circuit line was 18.6%.
operation
Zero sequence mutual Zero sequence line

Conductor size Per unit
impedance ZMO impedance ZLO
Line over-reach
voltage Metric error
(sq.in) (sq.mm) ohms/mile ohms/km ohms/mile ohms/km (ZMO/ZLO)2
equiv.
132kV 0.4 258 0.3 + j0.81 0.19 + j0.5 0.41+j1.61 0.25+j1.0 0.264
275kV 2 x 0.4 516 0.18 + j0.69 0.11 + j0.43 0.24+j1.3 0.15+j0.81 0.292
400kV 4 x 0.4 1032 0.135 + j0.6 0.80 + j0.37 0.16+j1.18 0.1+j0.73 0.266
Table C5.1:
Maximum over-reach errors found during single circuit working

C5 3. Multi-ended feeders – unit protection schemes
A multi-ended feeder is defined as one having three or more The plain feeder settings are increased in the tee’d scheme by
terminals, with either load or generation, or both, at any terminal. 50% for one tee and 75% for two.
Those terminals with load only are usually known as ’taps’.
The simplest multi-terminal feeders are three-ended, and are
generally known as tee’d feeders. This is the type most
End A End B
commonly found in practice. A
B
The protection schemes described previously for the protection C
of two-ended feeders can also be used for multi-ended feeders.
However, the problems involved in the application of these Quadrature CT
schemes to multi-ended feeders are much more complex and
require special attention.
A1 A1
The protection schemes that can be used with multi-ended 1
C1
A C C1 A C
feeders are unit protection and distance schemes. Each uses N1 N N1 N
End C
some form of signalling channel, such as fibre-optic cable, A1
S1 S2 S1 S2
power line carrier or pilot wires. The specific problems that
1
A C C1
N1 N
may be met when applying these protections to multi-ended Relay
feeders are discussed in the following sections. S1 S2
Pilots
3.1 A.C. pilot wire protection
A.C. pilot wire relays provide a low-cost fast protection; they
are insensitive to power swings and, owing to their relative
simplicity, their reliability is excellent. Figure C5.6:
Balanced voltage Tee’d feeder scheme
The limitations of pilot wire relays for plain feeder protection
also apply. The length of feeder that can be protected is limited
by the characteristics of the pilot wires. The protection sees
increasing pilot wire resistance as tending to an open circuit 3.1.2 Dual pilot schemes
and shunt capacitance as an a.c. short circuit across the pilots. It is possible to avoid reducing sensitivity by providing an
The protection will have limiting values for each of these additional pilot for the bias value. This type is shown in Figure
quantities, and when these are exceeded, loss of sensitivity C5.7. Summation quadrature transformers are used to provide
for internal faults and maloperation for external faults may occur. the analogue quantity, which is balanced in a series loop through
For tee’d feeders, the currents for an external earth fault will a pilot circuit. Separate secondary windings on the quadrature
not usually be the same. The protection must be linear for any current transformers are connected to full-wave rectifiers, the
current up to the maximum through-fault value. As a result, the outputs of which are connected in series in a second pilot loop,
voltage in the pilots during fault conditions cannot be kept to so that the electromotive forces summate arithmetically.
low values, and pilot wires with 250V insulation grade are
The measuring relay is a double-wound moving coil type, one
required.
coil being energized from the vectorial summation loop; the
Two types of older balanced voltage schemes still found in other receives bias from the scalar summation in the second
many locations are described below. loop proportional to the sum of the currents in the several line
3.1.1 ‘Translay’ balanced voltage protection terminals, the value being adjusted by the inclusion of an
appropriate value of resistance. Since the operating and biasing
This is a modification of the balanced voltage scheme described quantities are both derived by summation, the relays at the
in Chapter [C2: Line Differential Protection, Section 7.1]. Since different terminals all behave alike, either to operate or to restrain
it is necessary to maintain linearity in the balancing circuit, as appropriate.
though not in the sensing element, the voltage reference is
derived from separate quadrature transformers, as shown in Special features are included to ensure stability, both in the
Figure C5.6. These are auxiliary units with summation windings presence of transformer inrush current flowing through the
energized by the main current transformers in series with the feeder zone and also with a 2-1-1 distribution of fault current
upper electromagnets of the sensing elements. The secondary caused by a short circuit on the secondary side of a star-delta
windings of the quadrature current transformers at all ends transformer.
are interconnected by the pilots in a series circuit that also
includes the lower electromagnets of the relays. Secondary
windings on the relay elements are not used, but these elements
are fitted with bias loops in the usual way.

3. Multi-ended feeders – unit protection schemes C5
End A End B
T
End C
Fault
Quadrature
CT
D E D E D E
Figure C5.8:
External fault conditions
Operating pilots
Bias pilots
A further unfavourable condition is that illustrated in Figure
Typical Values C5.9. If an internal fault occurs near one of the ends of the
D Operating coil
> Least sensitive e/f 33% feeder (end B in Figure C5.9) and there is little or no generation
E Restraints coil > Least sensitive ph-ph 100%
> Three phase 58% at end C, the current at this end may be flowing outwards. The
protection is then prevented from operating, since the fault
current distribution is similar to that for an external fault; see
Figure C5.8. The fault can be cleared only by the back-up
Figure C5.7: protection and, if high speed of operation is required, an
Dual pilot tee’d feeder protection
alternative type of primary protection must be used.
3.2 Power line carrier phase comparison schemes

The operating principle of these protection schemes has already T
been covered in detail in Chapter “Distance Protection” (Section
9). It involves comparing the phase angles of signals derived
from a combination of the sequence currents at each end of
the feeder. When the phase angle difference exceeds a pre-set
value, the ‘trip angle’, a trip signal is sent to the corresponding
circuit breakers. In order to prevent incorrect operation for Fault
external faults, two different detectors, set at different levels,
are used. The low-set detector starts the transmission of carrier
signal, while the high-set detector is used to control the trip
output. Without this safeguard, the scheme could operate
incorrectly for external faults because of operating tolerances Figure C5.9:
of the equipment and the capacitive current of the protected Internal fault with current flowing out at one line end
feeder. This condition is worse with multi-terminal feeders, since
the currents at the feeder terminals can be very dissimilar for
A point that should also be considered when applying this
an external fault. In the case of the three-terminal feeder in
scheme is the attenuation of carrier signal at the ‘tee’ junctions.
Figure C5.8, if incorrect operation is to be avoided, it is
This attenuation is a function of the relative impedances of the
necessary to make certain that the low-set detector at end A
branches of the feeder at the carrier frequency, including the
or end B is energised when the current at end C is high enough
impedance of the receiving equipment. When the impedances
to operate the high-set detector at that end.
of the second and third terminals are equal, a power loss of
As only one low-set starter, at end A or end B, needs to be 50% takes place. In other words, the carrier signal sent from
energised for correct operation, the most unfavourable condition terminal A to terminal B is attenuated by 3dB by the existence
will be when currents IA and IB are equal. To maintain stability of the third terminal C. If the impedances of the two branches
under this condition, the high-set to low-set setting ratio of the corresponding to terminal B to C are not equal, the attenuation
fault detectors needs to be twice as large as that required may be either greater or less than 3dB.
when the scheme is applied to a plain feeder. This results in a
loss of sensitivity, which may make the equipment unsuitable
if the minimum fault level of the power system is low.

C5 3. Multi-ended feeders – unit protection schemes
3.3 Differential relay using optical fibre signalling

Current differential relays can provide unit protection for Trip
multi- ended circuits without the restrictions associated with
Differential
other forms of protection. In Chapter [D2: Signalling and current
Intertripping in Protection Schemes, Section 6.5], the
characteristics of optical fibre cables and their use in protection =
signalling are outlined.
Restrain
Their use in a three-ended system is shown in Figure C5.10, IS
where the relays at each line end are digital/numerical relays
interconnected by optical fibre links so that each can send
information to the others. In practice the optical fibre links can Bias current
be dedicated to the protection system or multiplexed, in which
case multiplexing equipment, not shown in Figure C5.10, will
Figure C5.11:
Percentage biased differential protection characteristic
Optical fibre signalling channels

Figure C5.11 shows the percentage biased differential
characteristic used, the tripping criteria being:
I diff > K I bias and I diff > I s

A B
where:
K = percentage bias setting
RC
IS = minimum differential current setting
C If the magnitudes of the differential currents indicate that a
fault has occurred, the relays trip their local circuit breaker. The
relays also continuously monitor the communication channel
Figure C5.10:
Current differential protection for tee’d feeders using optical performance and carry out self-testing and diagnostic
fibre signalling operations. The system measures individual phase currents
and so single phase tripping can be used when required.
be used to terminate the fibres. Relays are provided with software to re-configure the protection
between two and three terminal lines, so that modification of
If IA, IB, IC are the current vector signals at line ends A, B, C, the system from two terminals to three terminals does not
then for a healthy circuit: IA + IB + IC = 0 require relay replacement. Further, loss of a single
The basic principles of operation of the system are that each communications link only degrades scheme performance
relay measures its local three phase currents and sends its slightly. The relays can recognise this and use alternate
values to the other relays. Each relay then calculates, for each communications paths. Only if all communication paths from
phase, a resultant differential current and also a bias current, a relay fail does the scheme have to revert to backup protection.
which is used to restrain the relay in the manner conventional
for biased differential unit protection.
The bias feature is necessary in this scheme because it is
designed to operate from conventional current transformers
that are subject to transient transformation errors.
The two quantities are:
I diff > I A + I B + I C
1
I bias =
2
(
I A + I B + IC )

4. Multi-ended feeders – distance relays C5
Distance protection is widely used at present for tee’d feeder

protection. However, its application is not straightforward, Z A = Z LA +Z LB +
(ZSB +Z LB ) Z
requiring careful consideration and systematic checking of (ZSC +Z LC ) LB
all the conditions described later in this section.
The magnitude of the third term in this expression is a function
Most of the problems found when applying distance protection of the total impedances of the branches A and B and can
to tee’d feeders are common to all schemes. A preliminary reach a relatively high value when the fault current contribution
discussion of these problems will assist in the assessment of branch C is much larger than that of branch A. Figure
of the performance of the different types of distance schemes. C5.13 illustrates how a distance relay with a mho characteristic
located at A with a Zone 2 element set to 120% of the
4.1 Apparent impedance seen by distance relays
protected feeder AB, fails to see a fault at the remote busbar
The impedance seen by the distance relays is affected by B. The ’tee’ point T in this example is halfway between
the current infeeds in the branches of the feeders. substations A and B(ZLA=ZLB) and the fault currents IA and
IC have been assumed to be identical in magnitude and phase
angle. With these conditions, the fault appears to the relay to
be located at B' instead of at B - i.e. the relay appears to
A B under-reach.
T
X
Fault
B'
Figure C5.12:
Fault at substation B busbars
T
Referring to Figure C5.12, for a fault at the busbars of the
substation B, the voltage VA at busbar A is given by:
VA = IA ZLA + IB ZLB
so the impedance ZA seen by the distance relay at terminal R
A
A is given by:
VA I
ZA = =Z LA + B Z LB Figure C5.13:
IA IA
Apparent impedance presented to the relay at substation A for
a fault at substation B busbars
or
IB
Z A = Z LA + Z LB
IA ...Equation C5.5 The under-reaching effect in tee’d feeders can be found for
any kind of fault. For the sake of simplicity, the equations and
or examples mentioned so far have been for balanced faults
IC only. For unbalanced faults, especially those involving earth,
Z A = Z LA +Z LB + Z LB the equations become somewhat more complicated, as the
IA
ratios of the sequence fault current contributions at terminals
The apparent impedance presented to the relay has been A and C may not be the same. An extreme example of this
modified by the term (IC/IA)ZLB. If the pre-fault load is zero, condition is found when the third terminal is a tap with no
the currents IA and IC are in phase and their ratio is a real generation but with the star point of the primary winding of
number. The apparent impedance presented to the relay in the transformer connected directly to earth, as shown in Figure
this case can be expressed in terms of the source impedances C5.14. The corresponding sequence networks are illustrated
as follows: in Figure C5.15.

C5 4. Multi-ended feeders – distance relays
4.2 Effect of pre-fault load

A B
T In all the previous discussions it has been assumed that the
power transfer between terminals of the feeder immediately
before the fault occurred was zero. If this is not the case, the
Phase A fault currents IA and IC in Figure C5.12 may not be in phase,
to ground fault
and the factor IC / IA in the equation for the impedance seen
by the relay at A, will be a complex quantity with a positive
or a negative phase angle according to whether the current
C IC leads or lags the current IA.
M Load
For the fault condition previously considered in Figures C5.12 and
C5.13, the pre-fault load current may displace the impedance
seen by the distance relay to points such as B'1 or B'2, shown in
Figure C5.14:
Transformer tap with primary winding solidly earthed Figure C5.16, according to the phase angle and the magnitude
of the pre-fault load current. Humpage and Lewis [Ref C5.3:
Distance protection of tee’d circuits] have analysed the effect of
It can be seen from Figure C5.15 that the presence of the tap pre-fault load on the impedances seen by distance relays for typical
has little effect in the positive and negative sequence networks. cases. Their results and conclusions point out some of the limitations
However, the zero sequence impedance of the branch actually of certain relay characteristics and schemes.
shunts the zero sequence current in branch A. As a result,
the distance relay located at terminal A tends to under-reach.
One solution to the problem is to increase the residual current X B'2
compensating factor in the distance relay, to compensate for B'1
the reduction in zero sequence current. However, the solution
has two possible limitations:
a. over-reach will occur when the transformer is not connected, B
and hence operation for faults outside the protected zone
may occur
b. the inherent possibility of maloperation of the earth fault T
elements for earth faults behind the relay location is
increased
R
A
Figure C5.16:
Effects of the pre-fault load on the apparent impedance
presented to the relay
4.3 Effect of the fault current flowing outwards

at one terminal
Up to this point it has been assumed that the fault currents
at terminals A and C flow into the feeder for a fault at the
busbar B. Under some conditions, however, the current at
one of these terminals may flow outwards instead of inwards.
A typical case is illustrated in Figure C5.17; that of a parallel
tapped feeder with one of the ends of the parallel circuit open
at terminal A.
As the currents IA and IC now have different signs, the factor
IC/IA becomes negative. Consequently, the distance relay at
terminal A sees an impedance smaller than that of the
Figure C5.15: protected feeder, (ZA+ZB), and therefore has a tendency to
Sequence networks for a phase A to ground fault at busbar B over-reach. In some cases the apparent impedance presented
in the system shown in Figure C5.14 to the relay may be as low as 50% of the impedance of the

4. Multi-ended feeders – distance relays C5
and the reverse fault current are now related, the first being
A B
T a function of the maximum line length and the second
depending mainly on the impedance of the shortest feeder
and the fault level at that terminal.
For instance, referring to Figure C5.19, the setting of the relay
at terminal A will depend on the impedance (ZA+ZB) and
the fault current infeed IC, for a fault at B, while the fault current
IA for a reverse fault may be quite large if the T point is near
Fault the terminals A and C.
A B
T
Figure C5.17:
Fault
Internal Fault at busbar B with current flowing out at terminal
protected feeder, and even lower if other lines exist between

terminals B and C. C
If the fault is internal to the feeder and close to the busbars

B, as shown in Figure C5.18, the current at terminal C may
still flow outwards. As a result, the fault appears as an external
fault to the distance relay at terminal C, which fails to operate. Figure C5.19:
External fault behind the relay at terminal A
A B A summary of the main problems met in the application of

T
distance protection to tee’d feeders is given in Table C5.2.
Fault
Relevant figure
Case Description
number
Under-reaching effect for

1 internal faults due to current C5.12 to C5.15
infeed at the T point
Effect of pre-fault load on the

C 2 C5.16
impedance ‘seen’ by the relay
Over-reaching effect for external

3 faults, due to current flowing C5.17
outwards at one terminal
Failure to operate for an internal

Figure C5.18: 4 fault, due to current flowing out C5.18
Internal fault near busbar B with current flowing out at at one terminal
terminal C
Incorrect operation for an
5 external fault, due to high current C5.19
4.4 Maloperation with reverse faults fed from nearest terminal 1
Earth fault distance relays with a directional characteristic

tend to lose their directional properties under reverse Table C5.2:
unbalanced fault conditions if the current flowing through the Main problems met in the application of distance protection to
relay is high and the relay setting relatively large. These tee’d feeders
conditions arise principally from earth faults. The relay setting

C5 5. Multi-ended feeders - application of distance protection schemes
The schemes that have been described in Chapter [C4: These considerations, in addition to the signalling channel
Distance Protection Schemes] for the protection of plain requirements mentioned later on, make transfer trip over-reach
feeders may also be used for tee’d feeder protection. However, schemes unattractive for multi-ended feeder protection.
the applications of some of these schemes are much more
5.3 Blocking schemes
limited in this case.
Blocking schemes are particularly suited to the protection of
Distance schemes can be subdivided into two main groups;
multi-ended feeders, since high-speed operation can be
transfer trip schemes and blocking schemes. The usual
obtained with no fault current infeed at one or more terminals.
considerations when comparing these schemes are security,
The only disadvantage is when there is fault current outfeed
that is, no operation for external faults, and dependability, that
from a terminal, as shown in Figure C5.18. This is case 4 in
is, assured operation for internal faults.
Table C5.2. The protection units at that terminal may see the
In addition, it should be borne in mind that transfer trip fault as an external fault and send a blocking signal to the
schemes require fault current infeed at all the terminals to remote terminals. Depending on the scheme logic either relay
achieve high- speed protection for any fault in the feeder. This operation will be blocked, or clearance will be in Zone 2 time.
is not the case with blocking schemes. While it is rare to find
The setting of the directional unit should be such that no
a plain feeder in high voltage systems where there is current
maloperation can occur for faults in the reverse direction;
infeed at one end only, it is not difficult to envisage a tee’d
case 5 in Table C5.2.
feeder with no current infeed at one end, for example when
the tee’d feeder is operating as a plain feeder with the circuit 5.4 Signalling channel considerations
breaker at one of the terminals open. Nevertheless, transfer
The minimum number of signalling channels required depends
trip schemes are also used for tee’d feeder protection, as
on the type of scheme used. With under-reach and blocking
they offer some advantages under certain conditions.
schemes, only one channel is required, whereas a permissive
5.1 Transfer trip under-reach schemes over-reach scheme requires as many channels as there are
feeder ends. The signalling channel equipment at each
The main requirement for transfer trip under-reach schemes
terminal should include one transmitter and (N-1) receivers,
is that the Zone 1 of the protection, at one end at least, shall
where N is the total number of feeder ends. This may not be
see a fault in the feeder. In order to meet this requirement,
a problem if fibre-optic cables are used, but could lead to
the Zone 1 characteristics of the relays at different ends must
problems otherwise.
overlap, either the three of them or in pairs. Cases 1, 2 and
3 in Table C5.2 should be checked when the settings for the If frequency shift channels are used to improve the reliability
Zone 1 characteristics are selected. If the conditions mentioned of the protection schemes, mainly with transfer trip schemes,
in case 4 are found, direct transfer trip may be used to clear N additional frequencies are required for the purpose.
the fault; the alternative is sequentially at end C when the fault Problems of signal attenuation and impedance matching
current IC reverses after the circuit breaker at terminal B has should also be carefully considered when power line carrier
opened; see Figure C5.18. frequency channels are used.
Transfer trip schemes may be applied to feeders that have 5.5 Directional comparison blocking schemes
branches of similar length. If one or two of the branches are
The principle of operation of these schemes is the same as
very short, and this is often the case in tee’d feeders, it may
that of the distance blocking schemes described in the
be difficult or impossible to make the Zone 1 characteristics
previous section. The main advantage of directional
overlap. Alternative schemes are then required.
comparison schemes over distance schemes is their greater
Another case for which under-reach schemes may be capability to detect high- resistance earth faults. The reliability
advantageous is the protection of tapped feeders, mainly of these schemes, in terms of stability for through faults, is
when the tap is short and is not near one of the main terminals. lower than that of distance blocking schemes. However, with
Overlap of the Zone 1 characteristics is then easily achieved, the increasing reliability of modern signalling channels,
and the tap does not require protection applied to the terminal. directional comparison blocking schemes seem to offer good
solutions to the many and difficult problems encountered in
5.2 Transfer trip over-reach schemes
the protection of multi-ended feeders. Modern relays
For correct operation when internal faults occur, the relays at implement the required features in different ways – for further
the three ends should see a fault at any point in the feeder. information see Chapter [C4: Distance Protection Schemes]
This condition is often difficult to meet, since the impedance and specific relay manuals.
seen by the relays for faults at one of the remote ends of the
feeder may be too large, as in case 1 in Table C5.2, increasing
the possibility of maloperation for reverse faults, case 5 in
Table C5.2. In addition, the relay characteristic might encroach
on the load impedance.

6. Protection of series compensated lines C5
Figure C5.20 depicts the basic power transfer equation.

It can be seen from this equation that transmitted power is
proportional to the system voltage level and load angle whilst
being inversely proportional to system impedance. Series
compensated lines are used in transmission networks where
the required level of transmitted power cannot be met, either
from a load requirement or system stability requirement. Series E
compensated transmission lines introduce a series connected
capacitor, which has the net result of reducing the overall
inductive impedance of the line, hence increasing the
prospective, power flow. Typical levels of compensation are
35%, 50% and 70%, where the percentage level dictates the
capacitor impedance compared to the transmission line it is
associated with. New schemes with >100% compensation
are also being discussed. Figure C5.21:
Voltage inversion on a transmission line
EA Bus A Bus B EB
leads the system e.m.f. by 90° whilst the measured fault voltage
ZT remains in phase with system e.m.f.. Again this condition can
give rise to directional stability problems for a variety of
protection devices. Practically, the case of current inversion
is difficult to obtain. In order to protect capacitors from high
EA EB sin
PT a over-voltages during fault conditions some form of voltage
ZT
limiting device (usually in the form of MOVs) is installed to
bypass the capacitor at a set current level. In the case of
Where δ is the phase difference between Bus A and Bus B current inversion, the overall fault impedance has to be
capacitive and will generally be small. This leads to high levels
of fault current, which will trigger the MOVs and bypass the
Figure C5.20: capacitors, hence leaving an inductive fault impedance and
Power transfer in a transmission line preventing the current inversion.
In general, the application of protective relays to a series
The introduction of a capacitive impedance to a network can
compensated power system needs careful evaluation. The
give rise to several relaying problems. The most common of
problems associated with the introduction of a series capacitor
these is the situation of voltage inversion, which is shown in
can be overcome by a variety of relaying techniques so it is
Figure C5.21. In this case a fault occurs on the protected line.
important to ensure the suitability of the chosen protection.
The overall fault impedance is inductive and hence the fault
Each particular application requires careful investigation to
current is inductive (shown lagging the system e.m.f. by 90
determine the most appropriate solution in respect of
degrees in this case). However, the voltage measured by the
protection – there are no general guidelines that can be given.
relay is that across the capacitor and will therefore lag the
fault current by 90 degrees.
The net result is that the voltage measured by the relay is in
antiphase to the system e.m.f.. Whilst this view is highly
simplistic, it adequately demonstrates potential relay problems,
in that any protection reliant upon making a directional decision
bases its decision on an inductive system i.e. one where a
forward fault is indicated by fault current lagging the measured
voltage. A good example of this is a distance relay, which
assumes the transmission line is an evenly distributed inductive
impedance. Presenting the relay with a capacitive voltage
(impedance) can lead the relay to make an incorrect directional
decision.
A second problem is that of current inversion which is
demonstrated in Figure C5.22. In this case, the overall fault
impedance is taken to be capacitive. The fault current therefore Figure C5.22:
Current inversion in a transmission line

C5 7. Examples
In this section, an example calculation illustrating the solution 7.1.1 Residual compensation
to a problem mentioned in this Chapter is given.
The relays used are calibrated in terms of the positive sequence
7.1 Distance relay applied to parallel circuits impedance of the protected line. Since the earth fault
impedance of Line 1 is different from the positive sequence
The system diagram shown in Figure C5.23 indicates a simple
impedance, the impedance seen by the relay in the case of
110kV network supplied from a 220kV grid through two auto-
a fault involving earth will be different to that seen for a phase
transformers. The following example shows the calculations
fault. Hence, the reach of the earth fault elements of the relay
necessary to check the suitability of three zone distance
needs to be different.
protection to the two parallel feeders interconnecting
substations A and B, Line 1 being selected for this purpose. For the relay used, this adjustment is provided by the residual
All relevant data for this exercise are given in the diagram. (or neutral) compensation factor ZZO, set equal to:
The MiCOM P441 relay with quadrilateral characteristics is
used to provide the relay data for the example. Relay quantities K ZO =
(Zo −Z1 )
used in the example are listed in Table C5.3, and calculations 3Z1
are carried out in terms of actual system impedances in ohms,
rather than CT secondary quantities. This simplifies the
∠K ZO =∠
(Zo −Z1 )
calculations, and enables the example to be simplified by 3Z1
excluding considerations of CT ratios. Most modern distance For Lines 1 and 2,
relays permit settings to be specified in system quantities
rather than CT secondary quantities, but older relays may ZL1 = 0.177 + j0.402Ω
require the system quantities to be converted to impedances (0.439∠66.236˚Ω)
as seen by the relay.
ZL0 = 0.354 + j1.022Ω
(1.082∠ +70.895˚Ω)
Hence,
Grid supply at 220kV
Maximum fault level
7500MVA
|KZ0| = 0.490
Minimum fault level
2500MVA ∠KZ0= 7.8˚
120MVA 220/110/11kV 7.1.2 Zone impedance reach settings – phase faults
transformers
=0.15 ; =0.35; Firstly, the impedance reaches for the three relay zones are
=0.25
=0.125 ; =0.025 calculated.
=0.225 on 120MVA
7.1.3 Zone 1 reach
110kV Substation P
Zone 1 impedance is set to 80% of the impedance of the
Current transformer
ratio 600/1A protected line. Hence,
Voltage transformer
Z1 = 0.8 × 50 × (0.439∠66.236˚) Ω
45MVA ratio 110kV/110V
Line 1 110/33kV Line 2 = 0.8 × 21.95∠66.236˚Ω
transformers
XT=0.125 =17.56∠66.236˚Ω
110kV
Substation Q Use a value of 17.56∠66.2˚Ω
45MVA 132/33kV 7.1.4 Zone 2 reach
transformers
XT=0.125 Zone 2 impedance reach is set to cover the maximum of:
Line 3 Line 4
33kV a. 120% of Line 1 length
busbars
b. Line 1 + 50% of shortest line from Substation B i.e. 50%
110kV transmission lines: / km of Line 4
/ km
From the line impedances given,
Length of line: 1, 2 =50km
3 =100km 4 =40km a. 1.2 × 21.95∠66.236˚=26.34∠66.236˚Ω
b. 21.95∠66.236˚ +
Figure C5.23: 0.5 × 40 × 0.439∠66.236˚Ω =30.73∠66.2˚Ω
Example network for distance relay setting calculation

7. Examples C5
It is clear that condition (b.) governs the setting, and therefore 7.1.7 Phase fault resistive reach settings
the initial Zone 2 reach setting is:
With the use of a quadrilateral characteristic, the resistive
Z2 =30.73∠66.2˚Ω reach settings for each zone can be set independently of the
impedance reach settings. The resistive reach setting
The effect of parallel Line 2 is to make relay 1 under-reach for
represents the maximum amount of additional fault resistance
faults on adjacent line sections, as discussed in Section 2.2
(in excess of the line impedance) for which a zone will trip,
of this chapter. This is not a problem for the phase fault elements
regardless of the fault within the zone.
because Line 1 will always be protected.
Two constraints are imposed upon the settings, as follows:
7.1.5 Zone 3 reach
a. it must be greater than the maximum expected phase-
The function of Zone 3 is to provide backup protection for
phase fault resistance (principally that of the fault arc)
uncleared faults in adjacent line sections. The criterion used
is that the relay should be set to cover 120% of the impedance b. it must be less than the apparent resistance measured
between the relay location and the end of the longest adjacent due to the heaviest load on the line
line, taking account of any possible fault infeed from other
The minimum fault current at Substation B is of the order of
circuits or parallel paths. In this case, faults in Line 3 will result
1.5kA, leading to a typical arc resistance Rarc using the van
in the relay under-reaching due to the parallel Lines 1 and 2,
Warrington formula [C3: Distance Protection, Equation C3.4]
so the impedance of Line 3 should be doubled to take this
of 9Ω. Using the current transformer ratio on Line 1 as a guide
effect into account.
to the maximum expected load current, the minimum load
Therefore, impedance Zlmin will be 106Ω. Typically, the resistive reaches
21.95∠66.2o will be set to avoid the minimum load impedance by a 40%
Z3 =1. 2 × Ω margin for the phase elements, leading to a maximum resistive
+100×2 × 0.439∠66.2o reach setting of 63.6Ω.
. ∠ 66. 2o Ω
=1318 Therefore, the resistive reach setting lies between 9Ω and
63.6Ω. While each zone can have its own resistive reach setting,
7.1.6 Zone time delay settings
for this simple example, all of the resistive reach settings can
Proper co-ordination of the distance relay settings with those be set equal (depending on the particular distance protection
of other relays is required. Independent timers are available scheme used and the need to include Power Swing Blocking,
for the three zones to ensure this. this need not always be the case).
For Zone 1, instantaneous tripping is normal. A time delay is Suitable settings are chosen to be 60% of the load resistance:
used only in cases where large d.c. offsets occur and old
circuit breakers, incapable of breaking the instantaneous d.c.
R3 ph = 63.6 Ω
component, are involved. R2 ph = 63.6 Ω
The Zone 2 element has to grade with the relays protecting R1 ph = 63.6 Ω
Lines 3 and 4 since the Zone 2 element covers part of these
lines. Assuming that Lines 3/4 have distance, unit or 7.1.8 Earth fault reach settings
instantaneous high-set overcurrent protection applied, the By default, the residual compensation factor as calculated in
time delay required is that to cover the total clearance time of section 7.1.1 is used to adjust the phase fault reach setting in
the downstream relays. To this must be added the reset time the case of earth faults, and is applied to all zones. However,
for the Zone 2 elements following clearance of a fault on an it is also possible to apply this compensation to zones
adjacent line, and a suitable safety margin. A typical time individually. Two cases in particular require consideration, and
delay is 250ms, and the normal range is 200-400ms. are covered in this example.
The considerations for the Zone 3 element are the same as 7.1.9 Zone 1 earth fault reach
for the Zone 2 element, except that the downstream fault
clearance time is that for the Zone 2 element of a distance Where distance protection is applied to parallel lines (as in
relay or IDMT overcurrent protection. Assuming distance relays this example), the Zone 1 earth fault elements may sometimes
are used, a typical time is 1s. over-reach and therefore operate when one line is out of service
and earthed at both ends.
In summary:
The solution is to reduce the earth fault reach of the Zone 1
TZ1 = 0ms (instantaneous) element to typically 80% of the default setting. Hence:
TZ2 = 250ms KZ1 = 0.8 × KZ0
TZ3 = 1s = 0.8 × 0.532
= 0.426

C5 7. Examples
In practice, the setting is selected by using an alternative

Under-reach
setting group, selected when the parallel line is out of service % Under-reach =
and earthed. Reach of protected zone
7.1.10 Zone 2 earth fault reach
and hence
With parallel circuits, the Zone 2 element will tend to under-
% Under-reach = 14.3%
reach due to the zero sequence mutual coupling between the
lines. This amount of under-reach is not significant and no adjustment
need be made. If adjustment is required, this can be achieved
Maloperation may occur, particularly for earth faults occurring
by using the KZ2 relay setting, increasing it over the KZ0 setting
on the remote busbar. The effect can be countered by
by the percentage under-reach. When this is done, care must
increasing the Zone 2 earth fault reach setting, but first it is
also be taken that the percentage over-reach during single
necessary to calculate the amount of under-reach that occurs.
circuit operation is not excessive – if it is then use can be
I fltp made of the alternative setting groups provided in most modern
Under-reach = Zadj × distance relays to change the relay settings according to the
I flt
number of circuits in operation.
where:
7.1 11 Ground fault resistive reach settings
Zadj = impedance of adjacent line covered by Zone 2
The same settings can be used as for the phase fault resistive
Ifltp = fault current in parallel line reaches. Hence,
Iflt = total fault current R3G = 63.6 Ω
since the two parallel lines are identical, and hence, for Lines R2G = 63.6 Ω
1 and 2,
R1G = 63.6 Ω
Under-reach = 8.78∠66.2˚ × 0.5
This completes the setting of the relay. Table C5.3 also shows
= 4.39∠66.2˚Ω the settings calculated.
Relay Parameter Parameter

Units
ZL1 (mag) Line positive sequence impedance (magnitude) 21.95 Ω
ZL1 (ang) Line positive sequence impedance (phase angle) 66.2 deg
ZL0 (mag) Line zero sequence impedance (magnitude) 54.1 Ω
ZL0 (ang) Line zero sequence impedance (phase angle) 70.895 deg
KZ0 (mag) Default residual compensation factor (magnitude) 0.49 -
KZ0 (ang) Default residual compensation factor (phase angle) 7.8 deg
Z1 (mag) Zone 1 reach impedance setting (magnitude) 17.56 Ω
Z1 (ang) Zone 1 reach impedance setting (phase angle) 66.2 deg
Table C5.3: Distance relay settings

7. Examples C5
Relay Parameter Parameter

Units
R 1ph Phase fault resistive reach value - Zone 1 63.6 Ω
KZ1 (mag) Zone 1 residual compensation factor (magnitude) 0.426 -
KZ1 (ang) Zone 1 residual compensation factor (phase angle) 9.2 deg
KZ2 (mag) Zone 2 residual compensation factor (magnitude) 0.49 -
KZ2 (ang) Zone 2 residual compensation factor (phase angle) 7.8 deg
TZ1 Time delay - Zone 1 0 s
TZ2 Time delay - Zone 2 0.25 s
TZ3 Time delay - Zone 3 1 s
R1G Ground fault resistive reach value - Zone 1 63.6 Ω
Table C5.3 (cont.): Distance relay settings
8. References
[C5.1] Some factors affecting the accuracy of distance

type protective equipment under earth fault conditions.
Davison, E.B. and Wright, A.
Proc. IEE Vol. 110, No. 9, Sept. 1963, pp. 1678-1688.
[C5.2] Distance protection performance under

conditions of single- circuit working in double-circuit
transmission lines.
Humpage, W.D. and Kandil, M.S.
Proc. IEE. Vol. 117. No. 4, April 1970, pp. 766-770.
[C5.3] Distance protection of tee’d circuits.

Humpage, W.A. and Lewis, D.W.
Proc. IEE, Vol. 114, No. 10, Oct. 1967, pp. 1483-1498.

C6
Busbar Protection

Chapter
C6
Busbar Protection
1. Introduction 263
2. Busbar faults 263
3. Protection requirements 264
4. Types of protection system 265
5. System protection schemes 266
6. Frame-earth protection (Howard protection) 266
7. Differential protection principles 269
8. High impedance differential protection 272
9. Low impedance biased differential protection 277
10. Numerical busbar protection 282
11. References 284
262
Busbar Protection
C6 1. Introduction
The protection scheme for a power system should cover the concentration of fault MVA, may be very extensive indeed, up
whole system against all probable types of fault. Unrestricted to the complete loss of the station by fire. Serious damage to
forms of line protection, such as overcurrent and distance or destruction of the installation would probably result in
systems, meet this requirement, although faults in the busbar widespread and prolonged supply interruption.
zone are cleared only after some time delay. But if unit protection
Finally, system protection will frequently not provide the cover
is applied to feeders and plant, the busbars are not inherently
required. Such protection may be good enough for small
protected.
distribution substations, but not for important stations. Even if
Busbars have often been left without specific protection, for distance protection is applied to all feeders, the busbar will lie
one or more of the following reasons: in the second zone of all the distance protections, so a bus
fault will be cleared relatively slowly, and the resultant duration
a. the busbars and switchgear have a high degree of reliability,
of the voltage dip imposed on the rest of the system may not
to the point of being regarded as intrinsically safe
be tolerable.
b. it was feared that accidental operation of busbar protection
With outdoor switchgear the case is less clear since, although
might cause widespread dislocation of the power system,
the likelihood of a fault is higher, the risk of widespread damage
which, if not quickly cleared, would cause more loss than
resulting is much less. In general then, busbar protection is
would the very infrequent actual bus faults
required when the system protection does not cover the
c. it was hoped that system protection or back-up protection busbars, or when, in order to maintain power system stability,
would provide sufficient bus protection if needed high-speed fault clearance is necessary. Unit busbar protection
provides this, with the further advantage that if the busbars
It is true that the risk of a fault occurring on modern metal-clad
are sectionalised, one section only need be isolated to clear
gear is very small, but it cannot be entirely ignored. However,
a fault. The case for unit busbar protection is in fact strongest
the damage resulting from one uncleared fault, because of the
when there is sectionalisation.
2. Busbar faults
The majority of bus faults involve one phase and earth, but
faults arise from many causes and a significant number are
interphase clear of earth. In fact, a large proportion of busbar
faults result from human error rather than the failure of switchgear
components.
With fully phase-segregated metalclad gear, only earth faults
are possible, and a protection scheme need have earth fault
sensitivity only. In other cases, an ability to respond to phase
faults clear of earth is an advantage, although the phase fault
sensitivity need not be very high.

Busbar Protection
3. Protection requirements C6
Although not basically different from other circuit protection, In order to maintain the high order of integrity needed for busbar
the key position of the busbar intensifies the emphasis put on protection, it is an almost invariable practice to make tripping
the essential requirements of speed and stability. The special depend on two independent measurements of fault quantities.
features of busbar protection are discussed below. Moreover, if the tripping of all the breakers within a zone is
derived from common measuring relays, two separate elements
3.1 Speed
must be operated at each stage to complete a tripping operation.
Busbar protection is primarily concerned with: Although not current practice, in many cases the relays are
separated by about 2 metres so that no reasonable accidental
a. limitation of consequential damage
mechanical interference to both relays simultaneously is
b. removal of busbar faults in less time than could be achieved possible.
by back-up line protection, with the object of maintaining
The two measurements may be made by two similar differential
system stability
systems, or one differential system may be checked by a
Some early busbar protection schemes used a low impedance frame-earth system, by earth fault relays energised by current
differential system having a relatively long operation time, of transformers in the transformer neutral-earth conductors or by
up to 0.5 seconds. The basis of most modern schemes is a overcurrent relays. Alternatively, a frame-earth system may be
differential system using either low impedance biased or high checked by earth fault relays.
impedance unbiased relays capable of operating in a time of
If two systems of the unit or other similar type are used, they
the order of one cycle at a very moderate multiple of fault
should be energised by separate current transformers in the
setting. To this must be added the operating time of the tripping
case of high impedance unbiased differential schemes. The
relays, but an overall tripping time of less than two cycles can
duplicate ring CT cores may be mounted on a common primary
be achieved. With high- speed circuit breakers, complete fault
conductor but independence must be maintained throughout
clearance may be obtained in approximately 0.1 seconds.
the secondary circuit.
When a frame-earth system is used, the operating speed is
comparable. In the case of low impedance, biased differential schemes that
cater for unequal ratio CTs, the scheme can be energised from
3.2 Stability
either one or two separate sets of main current transformers.
The stability of bus protection is of paramount importance.
The criteria of double feature operation before tripping can be
Bearing in mind the low rate of fault incidence, amounting to
maintained by the provision of two sets of ratio matching
no more than an average of one fault per busbar in twenty
interposing CTs per circuit. When multi-contact tripping relays
years, it is clear that unless the stability of the protection is
are used, these are also duplicated, one being energised from
absolute, the degree of disturbance to which the power system
each discriminating relay; the contacts of the tripping relay are
is likely to be subjected may be increased by the installation
then series-connected in pairs to provide tripping outputs.
of bus protection. The possibility of incorrect operation has,
in the past, led to hesitation in applying bus protection and has Separate tripping relays, each controlling one breaker only, are
also resulted in application of some very complex systems. usually preferred. The importance of such relays is then no more
Increased understanding of the response of differential systems than that of normal circuit protection, so no duplication is required
to transient currents enables such systems to be applied with at this stage. Not least among the advantages of using individual
confidence in their fundamental stability. The theory of differential tripping relays is the simplification of trip circuit wiring, compared
protection is given later in Section 7. with taking all trip circuits associated with a given bus section
through a common multi-contact tripping relay.
Notwithstanding the complete stability of a correctly applied
protection system, dangers exist in practice for a number of In double busbar installations, a separate protection system
reasons. These are: is applied to each section of each busbar; an overall check
system is provided, covering all sections of both busbars. The
a. interruption of the secondary circuit of a current transformer
separate zones are arranged to overlap the busbar section
will produce an unbalance, which might cause tripping on
switches, so that a fault on the section switch trips both the
load depending on the relative values of circuit load and
adjacent zones. This is sometimes avoided by giving the section
effective setting. It would certainly do so during a through-
switch a time advantage; the section switch is tripped first and
fault, producing substantial fault current in the circuit in
the remaining breakers delayed.
question
Only the zone on the faulty side of the section switch will remain
b. a mechanical shock of sufficient severity may cause
operated and trip, the other zone resetting and retaining that
operation, although the likelihood of this occurring with
section in service. This gain, applicable only to very infrequent
modern numerical schemes is reduced
section switch faults, is obtained at the expense of seriously
c. accidental interference with the relay, arising from a mistake delaying the bus protection for all other faults. This practice is
during maintenance testing, may lead to operation therefore not generally favoured. Some variations are dealt with

Busbar Protection
C6 3. Protection requirements
later under the more detailed scheme descriptions. There are are arranged in a ‘two-out-of three’ voting arrangement, as
many combinations possible, but the essential principle is that shown in Figure C6.1.
no single accidental incident of a secondary nature shall be
capable of causing an unnecessary trip of a bus section.
Security against maloperation is only achieved by increasing
the amount of equipment that is required to function to complete + _
an operation; and this inevitably increases the statistical risk X Y Trip
that a tripping operation due to a fault may fail. Such a failure, circuits
leaving aside the question of consequential damage, may Y Z
result in disruption of the power system to an extent as great,
Z X
or greater, than would be caused by an unwanted trip. The
relative risk of failure of this kind may be slight, but it has been
thought worthwhile in some instances to provide a guard in
this respect as well. Figure C6.1:
Two-out-of-three principle
Security of both stability and operation is obtained by providing
three independent channels (say X, Y and Z) whose outputs
4. Types of protection system
A number of busbar protection systems have been devised: But more recently the advances in semiconductor technology,
coupled with a more pressing need to be able to accommodate
a. system protection used to cover busbars
CTs of unequal ratio, have led to the re-introduction of biased
b. frame-earth protection schemes, generally using static relay designs, particularly for
the most extensive and onerous applications.
c. differential protection
Frame-earth protection systems have been in use for many
d. phase comparison protection
years, mainly associated with smaller busbar protection
e. directional blocking protection schemes at distribution voltages and for metalclad busbars
Of these, (a) is suitable for small substations only. Detailed (e.g. SF6 insulated busbars). However, it has often been quite
discussion of types (b) and (c) occupies most of this chapter. common for a unit protection scheme to be used in addition,
to provide two separate means of fault detection.
Early forms of biased differential protection for busbars, such
as versions of ‘Translay’ protection and also a scheme using The different types of protection are described in the following
harmonic restraint, were superseded by unbiased high sections.
impedance differential protection.
The relative simplicity of the latter, and more importantly the
relative ease with which its performance can be calculated,
have ensured its success up to the present day.

Busbar Protection
5. System protection schemes C6
System protection that includes overcurrent or distance systems

will inherently give protection cover to the busbars. Overcurrent
protection will only be applied to relatively simple distribution
systems, or as a back-up protection, set to give a considerable
time delay. Distance protection will provide cover for busbar
faults with its second and possibly subsequent zones. In both
cases the busbar protection obtained is slow and suitable only
for limiting the consequential damage.
The only exception is the case of a mesh-connected substation,
in which the current transformers are located at the circuit
breakers. Here, the busbars are included, in sections, in the
individual zones of the main circuit protection, whether this is
of unit type or not. In the special case when the current
transformers are located on the line side of the mesh, the circuit
protection will not cover the busbars in the instantaneous zone
and separate busbar protection, known as mesh-corner
protection, is generally used – see Section 7.2.1 for details.
6. Frame-earth protection (Howard protection)
Frame leakage protection has been extensively used in the past

in many different situations. There are several variations of frame Switchgear frame
leakage schemes available, providing busbar protection schemes
with different capabilities. The schemes in the following sections
have been retained for historical and general reference purposes.
A considerable number of schemes are still in service and frame G H J K
leakage may provide an acceptable solution in particular
circumstances. However, the need to insulate the switchboard
frame and provide cable gland insulation and the availability of
Frame-earth
alternative schemes using numerical relays, has contributed to a fault relay Neutral
decline in use of frame leakage systems. check relay
6.1 Single-busbar frame-earth protection

> >
This is purely an earth fault system and, in principle, involves
simply measuring the fault current flowing from the switchgear
frame to earth. A current transformer is mounted on the earthing
conductor and is used to energise a simple instantaneous relay
as shown in Figure C6.2. +
Trip all
No other earth connections of any type, including incidental circuit
breaker
connections to structural steelwork are allowed. This requirement
is so that:
a. the principal earth connection and current transformer are Figure C6.2:
not shunted, thereby raising the effective setting. An Single zone frame-earth protection
increased effective setting gives rise to the possibility of
relay maloperation. This risk is small in practice
The switchgear must be insulated as a whole, usually by
b. earth current flowing to a fault elsewhere on the system
standing it on concrete. Care must be taken that the foundation
cannot flow into or out of the switchgear frame via two earth
bolts do not touch the steel reinforcement; sufficient concrete
connections, as this might lead to a spurious operation

Busbar Protection
C6 6. Frame-earth protection (Howard protection)
must be cut away at each hole to permit grouting-in with no seldom greater than 1Ω, so with 10Ω insulation resistance the
risk of touching metalwork. The insulation to earth finally current I1 is limited to 10% of the total earth fault current I1
achieved will not be high, a value of 10 ohms being satisfactory. and I2.
When planning the earthing arrangements of a frame-leakage For this reason, the recommended minimum setting for the
scheme, the use of one common electrode for both the scheme is about 30% of the minimum earth fault current.
switchgear frame and the power system neutral point is
All cable glands must be insulated, to prevent the circulation
preferred, because the fault path would otherwise include the
of spurious current through the frame and earthing system by
two earthing electrodes in series. If either or both of these are
any voltages induced in the cable sheath. Preferably, the gland
of high resistance or have inadequate current carrying capacity,
insulation should be provided in two layers or stages, with an
the fault current may be limited to such an extent that the
interposing layer of metal, to facilitate the testing of the gland
protection equipment becomes inoperative. In addition, if the
insulation. A test level of 5kV from each side is suitable.
electrode earthing the switchgear frame is the offender, the
potential of the frame may be raised to a dangerous value. The 6.2 Frame-earth protection - sectioned busbars
use of a common earthing electrode of adequate rating and
Section 6.1 covered the basic requirements for a system to
low resistance ensures sufficient current for scheme operation
protect switchgear as a whole. When the busbar is divided into
and limits the rise in frame potential. When the system is
sections, these can be protected separately, provided the frame
resistance earthed, the earthing connection from the switchgear
is also sub-divided, the sections mutually insulated, and each
frame is made between the bottom of the earthing resistor and
provided with a separate earth conductor, current transformer
the earthing electrode.
and relay.
Figure C6.3 illustrates why a lower limit of 10 ohms insulation
Ideally, the section switch should be treated as a separate
resistance between frame and earth is necessary.
zone, as shown in Figure C6.4, and provided with either a
separate relay or two secondaries on the frame-leakage current
transformer, with an arrangement to trip both adjacent zones.
The individual zone relays trip their respective zone and the
Outgoing Switchgear section switch.
feeder frame
Switchgear frame
Frame-leakage bonding bar
current
transformer Insulation
Generator barriers
Zone G Zone H Zone J
System L
earthing K M
Earth resistor
bar
I >
Frame Earthing
insulation electrode
resistance to earth resistance Zone G I >
frame leakage
relay
Zone H
frame leakage
relay
Figure C6.3:
Current distribution for external fault
Trip L1 L2
K M
relays
Under external fault conditions, the current I1 flows through
the frame-leakage current transformer. If the insulation
Trip K Trip L Trip M
resistance is too low, sufficient current may flow to operate the
frame-leakage relay, and, as the check feature is unrestricted,
this will also operate to complete the trip circuit. The earth
resistance between the earthing electrode and true earth is Figure C6.4:
Three zone frame earth scheme

Busbar Protection
6. Frame-earth protection (Howard protection) C6
If it is inconvenient to insulate the section switch frame on one with the additional feature that circuits connected to the auxiliary
side, this switch may be included in that zone. It is then bus are tripped for all faults, as shown in Figure C6.6.
necessary to intertrip the other zone after approximately 0.5
seconds if fault persists after the zone including the section
switch has been tripped. This is illustrated in Figure C6.5. For
Insulation
the above schemes to function it is necessary to have a least barriers
one infeed or earthed source of supply, and in the latter case Zone J
it is essential that this source of supply be connected to the M
side of the switchboard not containing the section switch. Zone G Zone H
Further, if possible, it is preferable that an earthed source of g1 j1 L h1 j2
supply be provided on both sides of the switchboard, in order
K N
to ensure that any faults that may develop between the insulating
barrier and the section switch will continue to be fed with fault
current after the isolation of the first half of the switchboard, I > Zone H
and thus allow the fault to be removed. Of the two arrangements, relay
the first is the one normally recommended, since it provides Zone G I >
instantaneous clearance of busbar faults on all sections of the relay
switchboard.
+ _
g1
K
j1
Insulation M1
barrier
M2
Tripping
Zone G Zone H relays
L1
K
J L L2
h1
N
Zone G j2
Zone H GHJ Busbar
D.C. Zone bus wires isolator
auxiliary switches
I > I >
Figure C6.6:
Frame-earth scheme for double busbar substation
6.4 Frame-earth protection - check system

Trip
relays J K1 K2 L On all but the smallest equipments, a check system should be
provided to guard against such contingencies as operation
due to mechanical shock or mistakes made by personnel.
Trip J Trip K Trip L Faults in the low voltage auxiliary wiring must also be prevented
from causing operation by passing current to earth through
the switchgear frame. A useful check is provided by a relay
Figure C6.5: energised by the system neutral current, or residual current.
Frame-earth scheme: bus section breaker insulated on one If the neutral check cannot be provided, the frame-earth relays
side only
should have a short time delay.
When a check system is used, instantaneous relays can be
used, with a setting of 30% of the minimum earth fault current
6.3 Frame-earth scheme - double bus substation
and an operating time at five times setting of 15 milliseconds
It is not generally feasible to separately insulate the metal or less.
enclosures of the main and auxiliary busbars. Protection is
therefore generally provided as for single bus installations, but

Busbar Protection
C6 6. Frame-earth protection (Howard protection)
Figure C6.7 shows a frame-leakage scheme for a metalclad

+ Trip relays _
switchgear installation similar to that shown in Figure C6.4 and In Out 64A-1 GH 64CH-1
incorporating a neutral current check obtained from a suitable K
CSS-G 64B-1
zero sequence current source, such as that shown in Figure
CSS-H L1
C6.2.
The protection relays used for the discriminating and check L2
functions are of the attracted armature type, with two normally

M
open self reset contacts. The tripping circuits cannot be
complete unless both the discriminating and check relays L5
operate; this is because the discriminating and check relay 64CH-2 64A-2
I >
contacts are connected in series. The tripping relays are of 64B-2
the attracted armature type. 74-1
It is usual to supervise the satisfactory operation of the 74-2
protection scheme alarms and indications for the following: In Out L3
a. busbar faults L4
CSS-G L3
b. busbar protection in service
L4
c. busbar protection out of service CSS-H L6
d. tripping supply healthy
74 Alarm cancellation relay
e. alarm supply healthy CSS Control selector switch protection in/protection out
L3 Busbar protection in service lamp
L4 Busbar protection out of service lamp
To enable the protection equipment of each zone to be taken L5 Tripping supply healthy lamp
out of service independently during maintenance periods, L6 Alarm and indication supply healthy lamp
isolating switches - one switch per zone - are provided in the

trip supply circuits and an alarm cancellation relay is used.
Figure C6.7:
Typical tripping and alarm circuits for a frame-leakage scheme
7. Differential protection principles
The Merz-Price principle is applicable to a multi-terminal zone The phase and earth fault settings are identical, and this
such as a busbar. The principle is a direct application of scheme is recommended for its ease of application and good
Kirchhoff’s first law. Usually, the circulating current arrangement performance.
is used, in which the current transformers and interconnections
7.1 Differential protection for sectionalised and duplicate
form an analogue of the busbar and circuit connections. A
busbars
relay connected across the CT bus wires represents a fault
path in the primary system in the analogue and hence is not Each section of a divided bus is provided with a separate
energised until a fault occurs on the busbar; it then receives circulating current system. The zones so formed are over-lapped
an input that, in principle at least, represents the fault current. across the section switches, so that a fault on the latter will trip
the two adjacent zones. This is illustrated in Figure C6.9.
The scheme may consist of a single relay connected to the bus
wires connecting all the current transformers in parallel, one set Tripping two zones for a section switch fault can be avoided
per circuit, associated with a particular zone, as shown in Figure by using the time-delayed technique of Section 6.2. However
C6.8(a). This will give earth fault protection for the busbar. This instantaneous operation is the preferred choice.
arrangement has often been thought to be adequate.
For double bus installation, the two busbars will be treated
If the current transformers are connected as a balanced as separate zones. The auxiliary busbar zone will overlap the
group for each phase together with a three-element relay, as appropriate main busbar zone at the bus coupler.
shown in Figure C6.8(b), additional protection for phase faults
Since any circuit may be transferred from one busbar to the
can be obtained.
other by isolator switches, these and the associated tripping

Busbar Protection
7. Differential protection principles C6
7.2 Location of current transformers
G H J K
Ideally, the separate discriminating zones should overlap each
other and also the individual circuit protections. The overlap
Id> should occur across a circuit breaker, so that the latter lies in
both zones. For this arrangement it is necessary to install
Differential current transformers on both sides of the circuit breakers,
relay
which is economically possible with many but not all types
of switchgear. With both the circuit and the bus protection
current transformers on the same side of the circuit breakers,
a) Basic circulating current scheme (earth fault protection only) the zones may be overlapped at the current transformers, but
a fault between the CT location and the circuit breaker will
G H
not be completely isolated. This matter is important in all
switchgear to which these conditions apply, and is particularly
important in the case of outdoor switchgear where separately
mounted, multi-secondary current transformers are generally
A used. The conditions are shown in Figure C6.10(a). Figure
B
C C6.10 (a) shows the ideal arrangement in which both the
N
circuit and busbar zones are overlapped, leaving no region
Differential relay Id> Id> Id> of the primary circuit unprotected.
b) Phase and earth fault circulating current scheme using

three-element relay
(a) (b)
Figure C6.8: Bus protection

Circulating current scheme
circuit must also be switched to the appropriate zone by ‘early

make’ and ‘late break’ auxiliary contacts. This is to ensure Fault
that when the isolators are closing, the auxiliary switches

make before the main contacts of the isolator, and that when
the isolators are opened, their main contacts part before the
auxiliary switches open. The result is that the secondary
circuits of the two zones concerned are briefly paralleled
while the circuit is being transferred; these two zones have Circuit
protection
in any case been united through the circuit isolators during
the transfer operation.
a. Current transformers mounted on both sides
of breaker, no unprotected region
b. Current transformers mounted on circuit side
only of breaker, fault shown not cleared by circuit protection
Zone A Zone B
BS
Figure C6.10:
Unprotected zone with current transformers mounted on one
BC BC side of the circuit breaker only
Figure C6.10(b) shows how mounting all current transformers

on the circuit side of the breaker results in a small region of
Zone C the primary circuit unprotected. This unprotected region is
typically referred to as the ‘short zone’. The fault shown will
cause operation of the busbar protection, tripping the circuit
Typical feeder circuits
breaker, but the fault will continue to be fed from the circuit,
if a source of power is present.
Figure C6.9:
Zones of protection for double bus station

Busbar Protection
C6 7. Differential protection principles
It is necessary for the bus protection to intertrip the far end

of the circuit protection, if the latter is of the unit type. Mesh corner
(Note 1)
With reference to Figure C6.10(b), special ‘short zone’
protection can be provided to detect that the circuit breaker
has opened but that the fault current is still flowing. Under
Line
these conditions, the protection can initiate an intertrip to the protection
remote end of the circuit. This technique may be used, relay
particularly when the circuit includes a generator. In this case
the intertrip proves that the fault is in the switchgear connections Note 1: Only 1 connection to the mesh corner permitted
and not in the generator; the latter is therefore tripped (a) CT arrangements for protection including mesh corner
electrically but not shut down on the mechanical side so as
to be immediately ready for further service if the fault can be
cleared.
7.2.1 CT location for mesh-connected substations
The protection of busbars in mesh connected substations
Transformer
gives rise to additional considerations in respect of CT location. protection
A single mesh corner is shown in Figure C6.11(a). Where only
one connection to the mesh is made at a corner, CTs located
Mesh corner
as shown will provide protection not only to the line but also (Note 2)
the corner of the mesh included between them. However, this
arrangement cannot be used where more than one connection
Line
is made to a mesh corner. This is because a fault on any of protection
the connected circuits would result in disconnection of them Mesh corner
all, without any means of determining the faulted connection. protection
Protection CTs must therefore be located on each connection,

as shown in Figure C6.11(b). This leaves the corner of the Note 2: Multiple circuits may be connected
mesh unprotected, so additional CTs and a relay to provide to the mesh corner
(b) CT arrangements for protection -
mesh-corner protection are added, as also shown in Figure additional mesh corner protection required
C6.11(b).
Figure C6.11:
Mesh-corner protection

Busbar Protection
8. High impedance differential protection C6
This form of protection is still in common use. The considerations It is not feasible to calculate the spill current that may occur,
that have to be taken into account are detailed in the following but, fortunately this is not necessary; an alternative approach
sections. provides both the necessary information and the technique
required to obtain a high performance.
8.1 Stability
An equivalent circuit, as in Figure C6.12, can represent a
The incidence of fault current with an initial unilateral transient
circulating current system.
component causes an abnormal build-up of flux in a current
transformer, as described in Chapter [B2: Current and Voltage The current transformers are replaced in the diagram by ideal
Transformers, Section 4.10]. When through-fault current current transformers feeding an equivalent circuit that
traverses a zone protected by a differential system, the represents the magnetising losses and secondary winding
transient flux produced in the current transformers is not resistance, and also the resistance of the connecting leads.
detrimental as long as it remains within the substantially linear These circuits can then be interconnected as shown, with a
range of the magnetising characteristic. With fault current of relay connected to the junction points to form the complete
appreciable magnitude and long transient time constant, the equivalent circuit.
flux density will pass into the saturated region of the
Saturation has the effect of lowering the exciting impedance,
characteristic; this will not in itself produce a spill output from
and is assumed to take place severely in current transformer H
a pair of balancing current transformers provided that these
until, at the limit, the shunt impedance becomes zero and the
are identical and equally burdened. A group of current
CT can produce no output. This condition is represented by a
transformers, though they may be of the same design, will
short circuit, shown in broken line, across the exciting impedance.
not be completely identical, but a more important factor is
It should be noted that this is not the equivalent of a physical
inequality of burden. In the case of a differential system for
short circuit, since it is behind the winding resistance.
a busbar, an external fault may be fed through a single circuit,
the current being supplied to the busbar through all other Applying the Thévenin method of solution, the voltage
circuits. The faulted circuit is many times more heavily loaded developed across the relay will be given by:
than the others and the corresponding current transformers Vf
are likely to be heavily saturated, while those of the other IR =
circuits are not. Severe unbalance is therefore probable,
R R + R LH + R CTH ...Equation C6.1
which, with a relay of normal burden, could exceed any The current through the relay is given by:
acceptable current setting. For this reason such systems were
at one time always provided with a time delay. This practice I f ( R LH + R CTH )
is, however, no longer acceptable.
=
R R + R LH + R CTH ...Equation C6.2
If RR is small, IR will approximate to IF , which is unacceptable.

On the other hand, if RR is large IR is reduced. Equation C6.2
can be written, with little error, as follows:
Vf I f (R LH + R CTH )
IR = =
RR RR ...Equation C6.3
or alternatively:
G H I R R R = Vf = I f ( R LH + R CTH ) ...Equation C6.4
It is clear that, by increasing RR , the spill current IR can be

RLG
reduced below any specified relay setting. RR is frequently
RCTG RLH RCTH
increased by the addition of a series-connected resistor which
is known as the stabilising resistor.
R
R It can also be seen from Equation C6.4 that it is only the
voltage drop in the relay circuit at setting current that is
ZEG Id> ZEH important. The relay can be designed as a voltage measuring
device consuming negligible current; and provided its setting
voltage exceeds the value Vf of Equation C6.4, the system
will be stable. In fact, the setting voltage need not exceed Vf ,
since the derivation of Equation C6.4 involves an extreme
condition of unbalance between the G and H current
transformers that is not completely realised. So a safety margin
Figure C6.12:
is built-in if the voltage setting is made equal to Vf.
Equivalent circuit of circulating current system

Busbar Protection
C6 8. High impedance differential protection
It is necessary to realise that the value of If to be inserted in summation should strictly speaking be vectorial, but is usually
Equation C6.4 is the complete function of the fault current done arithmetically. It can be expressed as:
and the spill current I R through the relay, in the limiting
IR = IS + nleS ...Equation C6.6
condition, will be of the same form. If the relay requires more
time to operate than the effective duration of the d.c. transient where:
component, or has been designed with special features to
IR = effective setting current
block the d.c. component, then this factor can be ignored
and only the symmetrical value of the fault current need to IS = relay circuit setting current
be entered in Equation C6.4. If the relay setting voltage, VS, IeS = CT excitation current at relay setting voltage
is made equal to Vf, that is, If (RL + RCT ), an inherent safety
factor of the order of two will exist. n = number of parallel - connected CTs
In the case of a faster relay, capable of operating in one cycle Having established the relay setting voltage from stability
and with no special features to block the d.c. component, it considerations, as shown in Section 8.1, and knowing the
is the r.m.s. value of the first offset wave that is significant. excitation characteristic of the current transformers, the effective
This value, for a fully offset waveform with no d.c. decrement, setting can be computed. The secondary setting is converted
is √3 If. If settings are then chosen in terms of the symmetrical to the primary operating current by multiplying by the turns ratio
component of the fault current, the √3 factor which has been of the current transformers. The operating current so determined
ignored will take up most of the basic safety factor, leaving should be considered in terms of the conditions of the application.
only a very small margin. For a phase and earth fault scheme the setting can be based
Finally, if a truly instantaneous relay were used, the relevant on the fault current to be expected for minimum plant and
value of If would be the maximum offset peak. In this case, maximum system outage conditions. However, it should be
the factor has become less than unity, possibly as low as 0.7. remembered that:
It is therefore possible to rewrite Equation C6.4 as: a. phase-phase faults give only 86% of the three-phase fault
K × VS current
I SL =
R L + R CT ...Equation C6.5 b. fault arc resistance and earth path resistance reduce fault
currents somewhat
where:
c. a reasonable margin should be allowed to ensure that
ISL = stability of scheme current relays operate quickly and decisively
VS = relay circuit voltage setting It is desirable that the primary effective setting should not exceed
RL + RCT = lead + CT winding resistance 30% of the prospective minimum fault current.
K = factor depending on relay design (range 0.7 - 2.0) In the case of a scheme exclusively for earth fault protection,
the minimum earth fault current should be considered, taking
It remains to be shown that the setting chosen is suitable.
into account any earthing impedance that might be present as
The current transformers will have an excitation curve which well. Furthermore, in the event of a double phase to earth fault,
has not so far been related to the relay setting voltage, the latter regardless of the inter-phase currents, only 50% of the system
being equal to the maximum nominal voltage drop across the e.m.f. is available in the earth path, causing a further reduction
lead loop and the CT secondary winding resistance, with the in the earth fault current.
maximum secondary fault current flowing through them. Under
The primary operating current must therefore be not greater
in-zone fault conditions it is necessary for the current transformers
than 30% of the minimum single-phase earth fault current. In
to produce sufficient output to operate the relay. This will be
order to achieve high-speed operation, it is desirable that settings
achieved provided the CT knee-point voltage exceeds the relay
should be still lower, particularly in the case of the solidly earthed
setting. In order to cater for errors, it is usual to specify that the
power system. The transient component of the fault current in
current transformers should have a knee-point e.m.f. of at least
conjunction with unfavourable residual flux in the CT can cause
twice the necessary setting voltage; a higher multiple is of
a high degree of saturation and loss of output, possibly leading
advantage in ensuring a high speed of operation.
to a delay of several cycles additional to the natural operating
8.2 Effective setting or primary operating current time of the element.
The minimum primary operating current is a further criterion This will not happen to any large degree if the fault current is a
of the design of a differential system. The secondary effective larger multiple of setting; for example, if the fault current is five
setting is the sum of the relay minimum operating current and times the scheme primary operating current and the CT knee-
the excitation losses in all parallel connected current point e.m.f. is three times the relay setting voltage, the additional
transformers, whether carrying primary current or not. This delay is unlikely to exceed one cycle.

Busbar Protection
The primary operating current is sometimes designed to exceed check will usually be a similar type of scheme applied to the
the maximum expected circuit load in order to reduce the switchboard as a single overall zone.
possibility of false operation under load current as a result of a
A set of current transformers separate from those used in the
broken CT lead. Desirable as this safeguard may be, it will be
discriminating zones should be provided. No CT switching is
seen that it is better not to increase the effective current setting
required and no current transformers are needed for the
too much, as this will sacrifice some speed; the check feature
check zone in bus-coupler and bus-section breakers.
in any case, maintains stability.
8.4 Supervision of CT secondary circuits
An overall earth fault scheme for a large distribution board may
be difficult to design because of the large number of current Any interruption of a CT secondary circuit up to the paralleling
transformers paralleled together, which may lead to an excessive interconnections will cause an unbalance in the system,
setting. It may be advantageous in such a case to provide a equivalent to the load being carried by the relevant primary
three-element phase and earth fault scheme, mainly to reduce circuit. Even though this degree of spurious output is below
the number of current transformers paralleled into one group. the effective setting the condition cannot be ignored, since
it is likely to lead to instability under any through fault condition.
Extra-high-voltage substations usually present no such
problem. Using the voltage-calibrated relay, the current Supervision can be carried out to detect such conditions by
consumption can be very small. connecting a sensitive alarm relay across the bus wires of
each zone. For a phase and earth fault scheme, an internal
A simplification can be achieved by providing one relay per
three-phase rectifier can be used to effect a summation of
circuit, all connected to the CT paralleling buswires. This
the bus wire voltages on to a single alarm element; see Figures
enables the trip circuits to be confined to the least area and
C6.13 and C6.14.
reduces the risk of accidental operation.
The alarm relay is set so that operation does not occur with
8.3 Check feature
the protection system healthy under normal load. Subject to
Schemes for earth faults only can be checked by a frame- this proviso, the alarm relay is made as sensitive as possible;
earth system, applied to the switchboard as a whole, no the desired effective setting is 125 primary amperes or 10%
subdivision being necessary. For phase fault schemes, the of the lowest circuit rating, whichever is the greater.
Zone R
c1 c2
D H
Zone M1 Zone M2
a1 b1
E F G
c1 c2
a1 b1
Zone M1 A
B
Bus wires C
A Zone M2
B
C Bus wires
Zone R A
B
Bus wires C
N
Check zone A
B
Bus wires C
N
95CHX-2
95CHX-3
Zone R relay Zone M1 relay 95CHX-4 Zone M2 relay
same as check same as check same as check
M1 First main busbar
+ Stabilising Resistor
M2 Second main busbar _ 95
CH
R Reserve busbar V V V
High Impedance
Supervision Id> Id> Id> Circulating Current
Relay Metrosil Relay
(non-linear resistor)
Figure C6.13:
A.C. circuits for high impedance circulating current scheme for duplicate busbars

Busbar Protection
+
In Out 87M1-1 M1 M2 R 87CH-1
96
D1
CSS-M1 87M2-1 96
a1 D2
CSS-M2 87R-1 96
c1 E
CSS-R
96
F1
96
b1 F2
96
c2 G
96
H1
96
H2
D.C. Buswires
80
T
87CH-2 87M1-2
30
87M2-2 M1
30
87R-2 M2
30
95M1-1 R
95
95M2-1 M1X
95
95R-1 M2X
95
95CH-1 RX
95
30M1-1 CHX
74
30M2-1 74-1
30R-1 74-2
95M1X-1
95M2X-1
95RX-1
95CHX-1
In Out
L1
L2
CSS-M1
L1
L2
CSS-M2
L1
L2
CSS-R
80
I
30 Zone indicating relay 95X Zone bus wires shorting relay
74 Alarm cancellation relay CSS Control selector switch
80 D.C. volts supervision relay L1 Indicating lamp protection in service
87 High impedance circulating current relay L2 Indicating lamp protection out of service
95 Bus wires supervision relay
Figure C6.14:
D.C. circuits for high impedance circulating current scheme

Busbar Protection
Since a relay of this order of sensitivity is likely to operate manufacturing tolerance. Also, they should preferably be of
during through-faults, a time delay, typically of three seconds, similar design; where this is not possible the magnetising
is applied to avoid unnecessary alarm signals. characteristics should be reasonably matched.
8.5 Arrangement of CT connections Current transformers for use with high impedance protection
schemes should meet the requirements of Class PX of IEC
It is shown in Equation C6.4 how the setting voltage for a given
60044-1.
stability level is directly related to the resistance of the CT
secondary leads. This should therefore be kept to a practical 8.6.3 Setting voltage
minimum. Taking into account the practical physical laying
The setting voltage is given by the equation
of auxiliary cables, the CT bus wires are best arranged in the
form of a ring around the switchgear site. Vs > If (RL + RCT)
In a double bus installation, the CT leads should be taken where:
directly to the isolator selection switches. The usual routing
Vs = relay circuit voltage setting
of cables on a double bus site is as follows:
If = steady-state through fault current
a. current transformers to marshalling kiosk
RL = CT lead loop resistance
b. marshalling kiosk to bus selection isolator auxiliary switches
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
c. interconnections between marshalling kiosks to form a
closed ring 8.6.4 Knee-point voltage of current transformers
The relay for each zone is connected to one point of the ring This is given by the formula
bus wire. For convenience of cabling, the main zone relays VK ≥ 2VS
will be connected through a multicore cable between the relay
panel and the bus section-switch marshalling cubicle. The 8.6.5 Effective setting (secondary)
reserve bar zone and the check zone relays will be connected The effective setting of the relay is given by
together by a cable running to the bus coupler circuit breaker
marshalling cubicle. It is possible that special circumstances IR = IS + nIeS IR
involving onerous conditions may over-ride this convenience where:
and make connection to some other part of the ring desirable.
IS = relay circuit current setting
Connecting leads will usually be not less than 7/0.67mm
(2.5mm²), but for large sites or in other difficult circumstances IeS = CT excitation current at voltage setting
it may be necessary to use cables of, for example 7/1.04mm n = number of CTs in parallel
(6mm²) for the bus wire ring and the CT connections to it. The
cable from the ring to the relay need not be of the larger section. For the primary fault setting multiply IR by the CT turns ratio.
When the reserve bar is split by bus section isolators and the 8.6.6 Current transformer secondary rating
two portions are protected as separate zones, it is necessary It is clear from Equations C6.4 and C6.6 that it is advantageous
to common the bus wires by means of auxiliary contacts, to keep the secondary fault current low; this is done by making
thereby making these two zones into one when the section the CT turns ratio high. It is common practice to use current
isolators are closed. transformers with a secondary rating of 1A.
8.6 Summary of practical details It can be shown that there is an optimum turns ratio for the
This section provides a summary of practical considerations current transformers; this value depends on all the application
when implementing a high-impedance busbar protection parameters but is generally about 2000/1. Although a lower
scheme. ratio, for instance 400/1, is often employed, the use of the
optimum ratio can result in a considerable reduction in the
8.6.1 Designed stability level physical size of the current transformers.
For normal circumstances, the stability level should be 8.6.7 Peak voltage developed by current transformers
designed to correspond to the switchgear rating; even if the
available short-circuit power in the system is much less than Under in-zone fault conditions, a high impedance relay
this figure, it can be expected that the system will be developed constitutes an excessive burden to the current transformers,
up to the limit of rating. leading to the development of a high voltage; the voltage
waveform will be highly distorted but the peak value may be
8.6.2 Current transformers many times the nominal saturation voltage.
Current transformers must have identical turns ratios, but a
turns error of one in 400 is recognised as a reasonable

Busbar Protection
When the burden resistance is finite although high, an particularly those with a low secondary current rating, the
approximate formula for the peak voltage is: voltage may be very high, above a suitable insulation voltage.
The voltage can be limited without detriment to the scheme
VP = 2 2VK ( VF - VK ) ...Equation C6.7
by connecting a ceramic non-linear resistor in parallel with
where: the relay having a characteristic given by:
VP = peak voltage developed V=CIβ
VK = knee-point voltage where C is a constant depending on dimensions and β is a
constant in the range 0.2-0.25.
VF = prospective voltage in absence of saturation
The current passed by the non-linear resistor at the relay
This formula does not hold for the open circuit condition and
voltage setting depends on the value of C; in order to keep
is inaccurate for very high burden resistances that approximate
the shunting effect to a minimum it is recommended to use
to an open circuit, because simplifying assumptions used in
a non-linear resistor with a value of C of 450 for relay voltages
the derivation of the formula are not valid for the extreme
up to 175V and one with a value of C of 900 for setting voltages
condition.
up to 325V.
Another approach applicable to the open circuit secondary
8.6.8 High impedance relay
condition is:
If Instantaneous attracted armature relays are used. Simple
...Equation C6.8
VP = 2 VK fast-operating relays would have a low safety factor constant
I ek in the stability equation, Equation C6.5, as discussed in Section
where: 8.1. The performance is improved by series-tuning the relay
coil, thereby making the circuit resistive in effect. Inductive
If = fault current reactance would tend to reduce stability, whereas the action
Iek = exciting current at knee - point voltage of capacitance is to block the unidirectional transient
component of fault current and so raise the stability constant.
VK = knee - point voltage
An alternative technique used in some relays is to apply the
Any burden connected across the secondary will reduce the limited spill voltage principle shown in Equation C6.4. A tuned
voltage, but the value cannot be deduced from a simple element is connected via a plug bridge to a chain of resistors;
combination of burden and exciting impedances. and the relay is calibrated in terms of voltage.
These formulae are therefore to be regarded only as a guide
to the possible peak voltage. With large current transformers,
9. Low impedance biased differential protection
The principles of low impedance differential protection have 9.1 Stability

been described in Chapter [C2: Line Differential Protection,
With some biased relays, the stability is not assured by the
Section 4], including the principle advantages to be gained
through current bias feature alone, but is enhanced by the
by the use of a bias technique. Most modern busbar protection
addition of a stabilising resistor, having a value which may
schemes use this technique.
be calculated as follows.
The principles of a check zone, zone selection, and tripping
The through current will increase the effective relay minimum
arrangements can still be applied. Current transformer
operating current for a biased relay as follows:
secondary circuits are not switched directly by isolator
contacts but instead by isolator repeat relays after a secondary IR = IS + BIF
stage of current transformation. These switching relays form
where:
a replica of the busbar within the protection and provide the
complete selection logic. IR = effective minimum oprating current
IS = relay setting current

Busbar Protection
9. Low impedance biased differential protection C6
IF = through fault current

B = percentage restraint Iop Iop
As IF is generally much greater than IS, the relay effective
current, IR = B IF approximately.
) IS )
From Equation C6.4, the value of stabilising resistor is given (B% (B%
e e
by: IS s Lin I'S s Lin
Bia Bia
I f ( R LH + R CTH ) R LH + R CTH IB IB
RR = = IB IS
IR B
It is interesting to note that the value of the stabilising resistance
is independent of current level, and that there would appear IS
to be no limit to the through-faults stability level. This has been
identified [Ref C6.1: The Behaviour of Current Transformers
subjected to Transient Asymmetric Currents and the Effects
on Associated Protective Relays] as ‘The Principle of Infinite
Stability’. The stabilising resistor still constitutes a significant IR = IS + BIB IR = IS + I'S + B I'S
2
burden on the current transformers during internal faults. B
= I'S 1 +
2
An alternative technique, used by some older systems described
(a) Superseded definition (b) Current definition
in Section 9.6, is to block the differential measurement during
the portion of the cycle that a current transformer is saturated.
If this is achieved by momentarily short-circuiting the differential
Figure C6.15:
path, a very low burden is placed on the current transformers.
Definitions of relay setting current for biased relays
In this way the differential circuit of the relay is prevented from
responding to the spill current.
It must be recognised though that the use of any technique Using the definition presently applicable, the effective minimum
for inhibiting operation, to improve stability performance for primary operating current
through faults, must not be allowed to diminish the ability of = N [ I S + B ∑ I eS ]
the relay to respond to internal faults.
where:
9.2 Effective setting or primary operating current
N = CT ratio
For an internal fault, and with no through fault current flowing,
the effective setting ( IR ) is raised above the basic relay Unless the minimum effective operating current of a scheme
setting ( IS ) by whatever biasing effect is produced by the has been raised deliberately to some preferred value, it will
sum of the CT magnetising currents flowing through the bias usually be determined by the check zone, when present, as
circuit. With low impedance biased differential schemes the latter may be expected to involve the greatest number of
particularly where the busbar installation has relatively few current transformers in parallel.
circuits, these magnetising currents may be negligible, A slightly more onerous condition may arise when two
depending on the value of IS. discriminating zones are coupled, transiently or otherwise,
The basic relay setting current was formerly defined as the by the closing of primary isolators.
minimum current required solely in the differential circuit to It is generally desirable to attain an effective primary operating
cause operation – Figure C6.15(a). This approach simplified current that is just greater than the maximum load current, to
analysis of performance, but was considered to be unrealistic, prevent the busbar protection from operating spuriously from
as in practice any current flowing in the differential circuit load current should a secondary circuit wiring fault develop.
must flow in at least one half of the relay bias circuit causing This consideration is particularly important where the check
the practical minimum operating current always to be higher feature is either not used or is fed from common main CTs.
than the nominal basic setting current. As a result, a later
definition, as shown in Figure C6.15(b) was developed. 9.3 Check feature
Conversely, it needs to be appreciated that applying the later For some low impedance schemes, only one set of main CTs
definition of relay setting current, which flows through at least is required. This seems to contradict the general principle of
half the bias circuit, the notional minimum operation current all busbar protection systems with a check feature that
in the differential circuit alone is somewhat less, as shown in complete duplication of all equipment is required, but it is
Figure C6.15(b).

Busbar Protection
C6 9. Low impedance biased differential protection
claimed that the spirit of the checking principle is met by

making operation of the protection dependent on two different
criteria such as directional and differential measurements.
In the scheme, described in Section 9.6, the provision of Main Main
auxiliary CTs as standard for ratio matching also provides a zone zone
ready means for introducing the check feature duplication at
the auxiliary CTs and onwards to the relays. This may be an
attractive compromise when only one set of main CTs is
available. Check Check
zone zone
9.4 Supervision of CT secondary circuits
In low impedance schemes the integrity of the CT secondary
circuits can also be monitored. A current operated auxiliary
relay, or element of the main protection equipment, may be
applied to detect any unbalanced secondary currents and
give an alarm after a time delay. For optimum discrimination, Figure C6.16:
Alternative CT connections
the current setting of this supervision relay must be less than
that of the main differential protection.
In modern busbar protection schemes, the supervision of the A separate module is used for each circuit breaker and also
secondary circuits typically forms only a part of a comprehensive one for each zone of protection. In addition to these there is
supervision facility. a common alarm module and a number of power supply units.
Ratio correction facilities are provided within each differential
9.5 Arrangement of CT connections
module to accommodate a wide range of CT mismatch.
It is a common modern requirement of low impedance
Figure C6.17 shows the correlation between the circuit
schemes that none of the main CT secondary circuits should
breakers and the protection modules for an old double busbar
be switched, in the previously conventional manner, to match
installation. In practice the modules are mounted in a multi-tier
the switching of primary circuit isolators.
rack or cubicle.
The usual solution is to route all the CT secondary circuits
The modules are interconnected via a multicore cable that is
back to the protection panel.
plugged into the back of the modules. There are five main
In static protection equipment it is undesirable to use isolator groups of buswires, allocated for:
auxiliary contacts directly for the switching without some form
a. protection for main busbar
of insulation barrier. Position transducers that follow the
opening and closing of the isolators may provide the latter. b. protection for reserve busbar
Alternatively, a simpler arrangement may be provided on c. protection for the transfer busbar. When the reserve busbar
multiple busbar systems where the isolators switch the auxiliary is also used as a transfer bar then this group of buswires
current transformer secondary circuits via auxiliary relays is used
within the protection. These relays form a replica of the busbar
d. auxiliary connections used by the protection to combine
and perform the necessary logic. It is therefore necessary to
modules for some of the more complex busbar configurations
route all the current transformer secondary circuits to the
relay to enable them to be connected into this busbar replica. e. protection for the check zone
Some installations have only one set of current transformers One extra module, not shown in this diagram, is plugged into
available per circuit. Where the facility of a check zone is still the multicore bus. This is the alarm module, which contains
required, this can still be achieved with the low impedance the common alarm circuits and the bias resistors. The power
biased protection. In the past, connection was made to the supplies are also fed in through this module.
auxiliary circuit current transformers at the input of the main
9.6.1 Bias
and check zones in series, as shown in Figure C6.16.
All zones of measurement are biased by the total current
9.6 Static low impedance biased differential protection
flowing to or from the busbar system via the feeders. This
This older scheme conforms in general to the principles ensures that all zones of measurement will have similar fault
outlined earlier and comprises a system of standard modules sensitivity under all load conditions. The bias is derived from
that can be assembled to suit a particular busbar installation. the check zone and fixed at 20% with a characteristic generally
Additional modules can be added at any time as the busbar as shown in Figure C6.15(b). Thus some ratio mismatch is
is extended. tolerable.

Busbar Protection
9. Low impedance biased differential protection C6
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 3a Zone 3b
Check
Bus coupler 1 Feeder 1 Z1 Z3a Feeder 2 Bus section Feeder 3 Z2 Z3b Feeder 4 zone Bus coupler 2
Intermodule plug-in buswire connections
Figure C6.17:
Older type busbar protection showing correlation between circuit breakers and protection modules
9.6.2 Stability with saturated current transformers 9.6.3 Operation for internal faults
The traditional method for stabilising a differential relay is to If the CTs carrying fault current are not saturated there will
add a resistor to the differential path. Whilst this improves be ample current in the differential circuit to operate the
stability it increases the burden on the current transformer differential relay quickly for fault currents exceeding the
for internal faults. The technique used in this scheme minimum operating level, which is adjustable between 20%-
overcomes this problem. 200% rated current.
The scheme design detects when a CT is saturated and When the only CT(s) carrying internal fault current become
short-circuits the differential path for the portion of the cycle saturated, it might be supposed that the CT saturation
for which saturation occurs. The resultant spill current does detectors may completely inhibit operation by short-circuiting
not then flow through the measuring circuit and stability is the differential circuit. However, the resulting inhibit pulses
assured. remove only an insignificant portion of the differential current,
so operation of the relay is therefore virtually unaffected.
This principle allows a very low impedance differential circuit
to be developed that will operate successfully with relatively 9.6.4 Discrepancy alarm feature
small CTs.
As shown in Figure C6.18, each measuring module contains
duplicated biased differential elements and also a pair of supervision
elements, which are a part of a comprehensive supervision facility.

Busbar Protection
C6 9. Low impedance biased differential protection
Supervision
c = Check
m = Main
r = Reserve
=1 1 t = Transfer
Current CT Fault
Buswire
Selection
Links Alarm
Supervision OR
c
Differential
m Enable
1
r Protection
fault Trip
Buswire
Selection
t Biased Links Trip
Differential
c
Enable m
=1 1
Bias
r
Biased t
Differential Trip
Out of service
Figure C6.18:
Block diagram of measuring unit
This arrangement provides supervision of CT secondary of their impedances. If both of the two measuring elements
circuits for both open circuit conditions and any impairment are of low and equal impedance the effective minimum
of the element to operate for an internal fault, without waiting operating current of the scheme will be doubled.
for an actual system fault condition to show this up. For a zone
This is avoided by using a ‘master/follower’ arrangement. By
to operate it is necessary for both the differential supervision
making the impedance of one of the measuring elements
element and the biased differential element to operate. For a
very much higher than the other it is possible to ensure that
circuit breaker to be tripped it requires the associated main
one of the relays retains its original minimum operation current.
zone to be operated and also the overall check zone, as shown
Then to ensure that both the parallel-connected zones are
in Figure C6.19.
tripped the trip circuits of the two zones are connected in
parallel. Any measuring unit can have the role of ‘master’ or
‘follower’ as it is selectable by means of a switch on the front
Main zone Check zone of the module.
S1 D1 S1 D1
9.6.6 Transfer tripping for breaker failure
+ ve Trip
S2 D2 S2 D2
Serious damage may result, and even danger to life, if a circuit
breaker fails to open when called upon to do so. To reduce
this risk breaker fail protection schemes were developed some
years ago.
Figure C6.19: These schemes are generally based on the assumption that
Busbar protection trip logic if current is still flowing through the circuit breaker a set time
after the trip command has been issued, then it has failed to
function. The circuit breakers in the next stage back in the
9.6.5 Master/follower measuring units
system are then automatically tripped.
When two sections of a busbar are connected together by
For a bus coupler or section breaker this would involve tripping
isolators it will result in two measuring elements being
all the breakers to the adjacent zone, a facility that is included
connected in parallel when the isolators are closed to operate
in the busbar protection scheme.
the two busbar sections as a single bar. The fault current will
then divide between the two measuring elements in the ratio

Busbar Protection
10. Numerical busbar protection schemes C6
Feeder 1 Feeder 2
CT CT CT CT
PU CB PU CB PU CB CB
Fibre optic link
Personal
PU
Computer
Central Unit
CU
System Communication Network
PU: Peripheral Unit

CU: Central Unit
Figure C6.20:
Architecture for distributed bus bar protection
The application of numerical relay technology to busbar c. breaker failure

protection has lagged behind that of other protection functions.
d. dead zone protection
Static technology is no longer usual for such schemes, but
numerical technology is now readily available. The very latest In addition, monitoring functions such as CB and isolator
developments in the technology are included, such as monitoring, disturbance recording and transformer supervision
extensive use of a data bus to link the various units involved, are provided.
and fault tolerance against loss of a particular link by providing
Because of the distributed topology used, synchronisation
multiple communications paths. The development process
of the measurements taken by the peripheral units is of vital
has been very rigorous, because the requirements for busbar
importance. A high stability numerically-controlled oscillator
protection in respect of immunity to maloperation are very
is fitted in each of the central and peripheral units, with time
high.
synchronisation between them. In the event of loss of the
The philosophy adopted is one of distributed processing of synchronisation signal, the high stability of the oscillator in
the measured values, as shown in Figure C6.20. Feeders each the affected feeder unit(s) enables processing of the incoming
have their own processing unit, which collects together data to continue without significant errors until synchronisation
information on the state of the feeder (currents, voltages, CB can be restored.
and isolator status, etc.) and communicates it over high-speed
The peripheral units have responsibility for collecting the
fibre-optic data links to a central unit. For large substations,
required data, such as voltages and currents, and processing
more than one central unit may be used, while in the case of
it into digital form for onwards transmission to the central unit.
small installations, all of the units can be co-located, leading
Modelling of the CT response is included, to eliminate errors
to the appearance of a traditional centralised architecture.
caused by effects such as CT saturation. Disturbance
For simple feeders, interface units at a bay may be used with recording for the monitored feeder is implemented, for later
the data transmitted to a single centrally located peripheral download as required. Because each peripheral unit is
unit. The central unit performs the calculations required for concerned only with an individual feeder, the protection
the protection functions. Available protection functions are: algorithms must reside in the central unit.
a. busbar protection The differential protection algorithm can be much more

sophisticated than with earlier technology, due to improvements
b. backup overcurrent protection
in processing power. In addition to calculating the sum of the

Busbar Protection
C6 10. Numerical busbar protection schemes
measured currents, the algorithm can also evaluate differences 10.1 Reliability considerations
between successive current samples, since a large change
In considering the introduction of numerical busbar protection
above a threshold may indicate a fault – the threshold being
schemes, users have been concerned with reliability issues
chosen such that normal load changes, apart from inrush
such as security and availability. Conventional high impedance
conditions do not exceed the threshold. The same
schemes have been one of the main protection schemes used
considerations can also be applied to the phase angles of
for busbar protection. The basic measuring element is simple
currents, and incremental changes in them.
in concept and has few components. Calculation of stability
One advantage gained from the use of numerical technology limits and other setting parameters is straightforward and
is the ability to easily re-configure the protection to cater for scheme performance can be predicted without the need for
changes in configuration of the substation. For example, costly testing. Practically, high impedance schemes have
addition of an extra feeder involves the addition of an extra proved to be a very reliable form of protection.
peripheral unit, the fibre-optic connection to the central unit
In contrast, modern numerical schemes are more complex,
and entry via the MMI of the new configuration into the central
with a much greater range of facilities and a much high
unit. Figure C6.21 illustrates the latest numerical technology
component count. Based on low impedance bias techniques,
employed.
and with a greater range of facilities to set, setting calculations
can also be more complex, studies of the comparative
reliability of conventional high impedance schemes and
modern numerical schemes have shown that assessing relative
reliability is not quite so simple as it might appear. The
numerical scheme has two advantages over its older
counterpart:
a. there is a reduction in the number of external components
such as switching and other auxiliary relays, many of the
functions of which are performed internally within the
software algorithms
b. numerical schemes include sophisticated monitoring
features which provide alarm facilities if the scheme is
faulty. In certain cases, simulation of the scheme functions
can be performed on line from the CT inputs through to
the tripping outputs and thus scheme functions can be
checked on a regular basis to ensure a full operational
mode is available at all times
Reliability analyses using fault tree analysis methods have
examined issues of dependability (e.g. the ability to operate
when required) and security (e.g. the ability not to provide
spurious/ indiscriminate operation). These analyses have
shown that:
a. dependability of numerical schemes is better than
conventional high impedance schemes
b. security of numerical and conventional high impedance
schemes are comparable
In addition, an important feature of numerical schemes is the
in-built monitoring system. This considerably improves the
potential availability of numerical schemes compared to
conventional schemes as faults within the equipment and its
operational state can be detected and alarmed. With the
conventional scheme, failure to re-instate the scheme correctly
after maintenance may not be detected until the scheme is
required to operate. In this situation, its effective availability
is zero until it is detected and repaired.
Figure C6.21:
Busbar protection relays using numerical technology (MiCOM
P740 range)

Busbar Protection
11. References C6
[C6.1] The Behaviour of Current Transformers subjected

to Transient Asymmetric Currents and the Effects on
Associated Protective Relays.
J. W. Hodgkiss.
CIGRE Paper Number 329, Session 15-25 June 1960.

C7
Transformer and
Transformer-Feeder Protection
Chapter
Transformer and
C7
Transformer-Feeder Protection
1. Introduction 287
2. Winding faults 287
3. Magnetising inrush 290
4. Transformer overheating 291
5. Transformer protection – overview 292
6. Transformer overcurrent protection 292
7. Restricted earth fault protection 293
8. Differential protection 293
9. Differential protection stabilisation during magnetising inrush conditions 296
10. Combined differential and restricted earth fault schemes 297
11. Earthing transformer protection 299
12. Auto-transformer protection 299
13. Overfluxing protection 300
14. Tank-earth protection 300
15. Oil and gas devices 301
16. Transformer-feeder protection 302
17. Intertripping 306
18. Condition monitoring of transformers 307
19. Examples of transformer protection 308

Transformer and Transformer-Feeder Protection
C7 1. Introduction
The development of modern power systems has been reflected e. abnormal operating conditions
in the advances in transformer design. This has resulted in a
f. sustained or uncleared external faults
wide range of transformers with sizes ranging from a few kVA
to several hundred MVA being available for use in a wide variety For faults originating in the transformer itself, the approximate
of applications. proportion of faults due to each of the causes listed above is
shown in Figure C7.1.
The considerations for a transformer protection package vary
with the application and importance of the transformer. To
reduce the effects of thermal stress and electrodynamic forces,
it is advisable to ensure that the protection package used
minimises the time for disconnection in the event of a fault
occurring within the transformer. Small distribution transformers
can be protected satisfactorily, from both technical and
economic considerations, by the use of fuses or overcurrent
relays. This results in time-delayed protection due to downstream
co-ordination requirements. However, time-delayed fault
clearance is unacceptable on larger power transformers used
in distribution, transmission and generator applications, due Winding and terminal
to system operation/stability and cost of repair/ length of outage
considerations. Core
Transformer faults are generally classified into six categories: Tank and accessories
a. winding and terminal faults
OLTC
b. core faults
c. tank and transformer accessory faults
Figure C7.1:
d. on–load tap changer faults Transformer fault statistics
2. Winding faults
A fault on a transformer winding is controlled in magnitude by For a fault on a transformer secondary winding, the
the following factors: corresponding primary current will depend on the transformation
ratio between the primary winding and the short-circuited
a. source impedance
secondary turns. This also varies with the position of the fault,
b. neutral earthing impedance so that the fault current in the transformer primary winding is
proportional to the square of the earth fault current in resistance-
c. transformer leakage reactance
earthed star winding fraction of the winding that is short-
d. fault voltage circuited. The effect is shown in Figure C7.2. Faults in the lower
e. winding connection third of the winding produce very little current in the primary
winding, making fault detection by primary current measurement
Several distinct cases arise and are examined below. difficult.
2.1 Star-connected winding with neutral point 2.2 Star-connected winding with neutral point
earthed through an impedance solidly earthed
The winding earth fault current depends on the earthing The fault current is controlled mainly by the leakage reactance
impedance value and is also proportional to the distance of of the winding, which varies in a complex manner with the
the fault from the neutral point, since the fault voltage will be position of the fault. The variable fault point voltage is also an
directly proportional to this distance. important factor, as in the case of impedance earthing. For

2. Winding faults C7
2.3 Delta-connected winding

100
No part of a delta-connected winding operates with a voltage
Percentage of respective maximum
90
to earth of less than 50% of the phase voltage. The range of
single-phase earth fault current
80
fault current magnitude is therefore less than for a star winding.
70
The actual value of fault current will still depend on the method
60
of system earthing; it should also be remembered that the
50
impedance of a delta winding is particularly high to fault
40
currents flowing to a centrally placed fault on one leg. The
30
impedance can be expected to be between 25% and 50%,
20
based on the transformer rating, regardless of the normal
10
balanced through-current impedance. As the prefault voltage
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 to earth at this point is half the normal phase voltage, the earth
Distance of fault from neutral fault current may be no more than the rated current, or even
(percentage of winding)
less than this value if the source or system earthing impedance
is appreciable. The current will flow to the fault from each side
through the two half windings, and will be divided between
two phases of the system. The individual phase currents may
therefore be relatively low, resulting in difficulties in providing
protection.
2.4 Phase to phase faults
Faults between phases within a transformer are relatively rare;
if such a fault does occur it will give rise to a substantial current
Figure C7.2: comparable to the earth fault currents discussed in Section 2.2.
Earth fault current in resistance-earthed star winding
2.5 Interturn faults
In low voltage transformers, interturn insulation breakdown
faults close to the neutral end of the winding, the reactance is is unlikely to occur unless the mechanical force on the winding
very low, and results in the highest fault currents. The variation due to external short circuits has caused insulation degradation,
of current with fault position is shown in Figure C7.3. or insulating oil (if used) has become contaminated by
moisture.
For secondary winding faults, the primary winding fault current
is determined by the variable transformation ratio; as the A high voltage transformer connected to an overhead
secondary fault current magnitude stays high throughout the transmission system will be subjected to steep fronted impulse
winding, the primary fault current is large for most points along voltages, arising from lightning strikes, faults and switching
the winding. operations. A line surge, which may be of several times the
rated system voltage, will concentrate on the end turns of the
winding because of the high equivalent frequency of the
20 surge front. Part-winding resonance, involving voltages up to
20 times rated voltage may occur. The interturn insulation of
the end turns is reinforced, but cannot be increased in
15 proportion to the insulation to earth, which is relatively great.
Partial winding flashover is therefore more likely. The
Current (per unit)
Fault current
subsequent progress of the fault, if not detected in the earliest
10 stage, may well destroy the evidence of the true cause.
A short circuit of a few turns of the winding will give rise to a
heavy fault current in the short-circuited loop, but the terminal
5
currents will be very small, because of the high ratio of
Primary current
transformation between the whole winding and the short-
circuited turns. The graph in Figure C7.4 shows the
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 corresponding data for a typical transformer of 3.25%
Distance of fault from neutral (percentage of winding)
impedance with the short-circuited turns symmetrically located
in the centre of the winding.
Figure C7.3:
Earth fault current in solidly earthed star winding

C7 2. Winding faults
2.8.1 Overload
100 10
Overload causes increased ‘copper loss’ and a consequent
Primary current (multiples of rated current)

Fault current (multiples of rated current)
Fault current in temperature rise. Overloads can be carried for limited periods
80 short circuited turns 8 and recommendations for oil-immersed transformers are given
in IEC 60354.
60 6 The thermal time constant of naturally cooled transformers lies
Primary input between 2.5-5 hours. Shorter time constants apply in the case
current
40 4
of force-cooled transformers.
2.8.2 System faults
20 2 System short circuits produce a relatively intense rate of heating
of the feeding transformers, the copper loss increasing in
proportion to the square of the per unit fault current. The typical
0 5 10 15 20 25 duration of external short circuits that a transformer can sustain
Turns short-circuited (percentage of winding)
without damage if the current is limited only by the self-
reactance is shown in Table C7.1. IEC 60076 provides further
Figure C7.4: guidance on short-circuit withstand levels.
Interturn fault current/number of turns short- circuited
Maximum mechanical stress on windings occurs during the
first cycle of the fault. Avoidance of damage is a matter of
transformer design.
2.6 Core faults
A conducting bridge across the laminated structures of the
core can permit sufficient eddy-current to flow to cause serious Transformer Fault current Permitted fault
overheating. The bolts that clamp the core together are always reactance (%) (Multiple of rating) duration (seconds)
insulated to avoid this trouble. If any portion of the core insulation 4 25 2
becomes defective, the resultant heating may reach a magnitude 5 20 2
sufficient to damage the winding. 6 16.6 2
The additional core loss, although causing severe local heating, 7 14.2 2
will not produce a noticeable change in input current and could
not be detected by the normal electrical protection; it is Table C7.1:
nevertheless highly desirable that the condition should be Fault withstand levels
detected before a major fault has been created. In an oil-
immersed transformer, core heating sufficient to cause winding
insulation damage will also cause breakdown of some of the 2.8.3 Overvoltages
oil with an accompanying evolution of gas. This gas will escape
Overvoltage conditions are of two kinds:
to the conservator, and is used to operate a mechanical relay;
see Section 15.3. a. transient surge voltages
2.7 Tank faults b. power frequency overvoltage
Loss of oil through tank leaks will ultimately produce a dangerous Transient overvoltages arise from faults, switching, and lightning
condition, either because of a reduction in winding insulation disturbances and are liable to cause interturn faults, as
or because of overheating on load due to the loss of cooling. described in Section 2.5. These overvoltages are usually limited
by shunting the high voltage terminals to earth either with a
Overheating may also occur due to prolonged overloading,
plain rod gap or by surge diverters, which comprise a stack
blocked cooling ducts due to oil sludging or failure of the forced
of short gaps in series with a non-linear resistor. The surge
cooling system, if fitted.
diverter, in contrast to the rod gap, has the advantage of
2.8 Externally applied conditions extinguishing the flow of power current after discharging a
surge, in this way avoiding subsequent isolation of the
Sources of abnormal stress in a transformer are:
transformer.
a. overload
Power frequency overvoltage causes both an increase in stress
b. system faults on the insulation and a proportionate increase in the working
flux. The latter effect causes an increase in the iron loss and
c. overvoltage
a disproportionately large increase in magnetising current. In
d. reduced system frequency

2. Winding faults C7
addition, flux is diverted from the laminated core into structural It follows that a transformer can operate with some degree of
steel parts. The core bolts, which normally carry little flux, may overvoltage with a corresponding increase in frequency, but
be subjected to a large flux diverted from the highly saturated operation must not be continued with a high voltage input at a
region of core alongside. This leads to a rapid temperature low frequency. Operation cannot be sustained when the ratio
rise in the bolts, destroying their insulation and damaging coil of voltage to frequency, with these quantities given values in
insulation if the condition continues. per unit of their rated values, exceeds unity by more than a
small amount, for instance if V/f > 1.1 . If a substantial rise
2.8.4 Reduced system frequency
in system voltage has been catered for in the design, the base
Reduction of system frequency has an effect with regard to of ‘unit voltage’ should be taken as the highest voltage for which
flux density, similar to that of overvoltage. the transformer is designed.
3. Magnetising inrush
The phenomenon of magnetising inrush is a transient condition

that occurs primarily when a transformer is energised. It is
Normal peak flux
not a fault condition, and therefore transformer protection Flux
must remain stable during the inrush transient.
Figure C7.5(a) shows a transformer magnetising characteristic. Magnetising current
To minimise material costs, weight and size, transformers are
generally operated near to the ‘knee point’ of the magnetising
characteristic., only a small increase in core flux above normal (a) Typical magnetising characteristic
operating levels will result in a high magnetising current.

Transient flux 80% residual
Under normal steady-state conditions, the magnetising current at switching
associated with the operating flux level is relatively small
(Figure C7.5(b)). However, if a transformer winding is energised Transient flux no residual
Voltage and flux
at switching
at a voltage zero, with no remanent flux, the flux level during
the first voltage cycle (2 x normal flux) will result in core Steady flux state
saturation and a high non-sinusoidal magnetising current Voltage
waveform – see Figure C7.5(c). This current is referred to as
magnetising inrush current and may persist for several cycles. Time
A number of factors affect the magnitude and duration of the

magnetising current inrush: (b) Steady and maximum offset fluxes
a. residual flux – worst-case conditions result in the flux peak

value attaining 280% of normal value Slow decrement
b. point on wave switching

Zero axis
c. number of banked transformers (c) Typical inrush current
d. transformer design and rating
e. system fault level
Zero axis
The very high flux densities quoted above are so far beyond
the normal working range that the incremental relative
permeability of the core approximates to unity and the
(d) Inrush without offset, due to yoke saturation
inductance of the winding falls to a value near that of the
‘air-cored’ inductance. The current wave, starting from zero,
increases slowly at first, the flux having a value just above the
Figure C7.5:
residual value and the permeability of the core being Transformer magnetising inrush

C7 3. Magnetising inrush
moderately high. As the flux passes the normal working value 3.1 Harmonic content of inrush waveform
and enters the highly saturated portion of the magnetising
The waveform of transformer magnetising current contains a
characteristic, the inductance falls and the current rises rapidly
proportion of harmonics that increases as the peak flux density
to a peak that may be 500% of the steady state magnetising
is raised to the saturating condition. The magnetising current
current. When the peak is passed at the next voltage zero,
of a transformer contains a third harmonic and progressively
the following negative half cycle of the voltage wave reduces
smaller amounts of fifth and higher harmonics. If the degree
the flux to the starting value, the current falling symmetrically
of saturation is progressively increased, not only will the
to zero. The current wave is therefore fully offset and is only
harmonic content increase as a whole, but the relative
restored to the steady state condition by the circuit losses.
proportion of fifth harmonic will increase and eventually exceed
The time constant of the transient has a range between 0.1
the third harmonic. At a still higher level the seventh would
second (for a 100kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a large
overtake the fifth harmonic but this involves a degree of
unit). As the magnetising characteristic is non-linear, the
saturation that will not be experienced with power transformers.
envelope of the transient current is not strictly of exponential
form; the magnetising current can be observed to be still The energising conditions that result in an offset inrush current
changing up to 30 minutes after switching on. produce a waveform that is asymmetrical. Such a wave
typically contains both even and odd harmonics. Typical
Although correct choice of the point on the wave for a single–
inrush currents contain substantial amounts of second and
phase transformer will result in no transient inrush, mutual
third harmonics and diminishing amounts of higher orders.
effects ensure that a transient inrush occurs in all phases for
As with the steady state wave, the proportion of harmonics
three-phase transformers.
varies with the degree of saturation, so that as a severe inrush
transient decays, the harmonic makeup of the current passes
through a range of conditions.
4. Transformer overheating
The rating of a transformer is based on the temperature rise Protection against overload is therefore based on winding
above an assumed maximum ambient temperature; under temperature, which is usually measured by a thermal image
this condition no sustained overload is usually permissible. technique. Protection is arranged to trip the transformer if
At a lower ambient temperature some degree of sustained excessive temperature is reached. The trip signal is usually
overload can be safely applied. Short-term overloads are also routed via a digital input of a protection relay on one side of
permissible to an extent dependent on the previous loading the transformer, with both alarm and trip facilities made
conditions. IEC 60354 provides guidance in this respect. available through programmable logic in the relay. Intertripping
between the relays on the two sides of the transformer is
The only certain statement is that the winding must not
usually applied to ensure total disconnection of the transformer.
overheat; a temperature of about 95 °C is considered to be
the normal maximum working value beyond which a further Winding temperature protection may be included as a part
rise of 8°C-10°C, if sustained, will halve the insulation life of of a complete monitoring package – see Section 18 for more
the unit. details.

5. Transformer protection - overview C7
The problems relating to transformers described in Sections

Fault type Protection used
2-4 above require some means of protection. Table C7.2
summarises the problems and the possible forms of protection Primary winding phase-phase fault Differential; overcurrent
that may be used. The following sections provide more detail Primary winding phase-earth fault Differential; overcurrent
on the individual protection methods. It is normal for a modern Secondary winding phase-phase fault Differential
relay to provide all of the required protection functions in a
Secondary winding phase-earth fault Differential; restricted earth fault
single package, in contrast to electromechanical types that
Interturn fault Differential, Buchholz
would require several relays complete with interconnections
and higher overall CT burdens. Core fault Differential, Buchholz
Tank fault Differential, Buchholz; tank-earth
Overfluxing Overfluxing
Overheating Thermal
Table C7.2:
Transformer faults/protection
6. Transformer overcurrent protection
Fuses may adequately protect small transformers, but larger controlled by time limit fuses connected across the secondary
ones require overcurrent protection using a relay and CB, as windings of in-built current transformers) or by relays
fuses do not have the required fault breaking capacity. connected to current transformers located on the transformer
primary side. Overcurrent relays are also used on larger
6.1 Fuses
transformers provided with standard circuit breaker control.
Fuses commonly protect small distribution transformers Improvement in protection is obtained in two ways; the
typically up to ratings of 1MVA at distribution voltages. In excessive delays of the HRC fuse for lower fault currents are
many cases no circuit breaker is provided, making fuse avoided and an earth-fault tripping element is provided in
protection the only available means of automatic isolation. addition to the overcurrent feature.
The fuse must have a rating well above the maximum
The time delay characteristic should be chosen to discriminate
transformer load current in order to withstand the short duration
with circuit protection on the secondary side.
overloads that may occur. Also, the fuses must withstand the
magnetising inrush currents drawn when power transformers A high-set instantaneous relay element is often provided, the
are energised. High Rupturing Capacity (HRC) fuses, although current setting being chosen to avoid operation for a secondary
very fast in operation with large fault currents, are extremely short circuit. This enables high-speed clearance of primary
slow with currents of less than three times their rated value. terminal short circuits.
It follows that such fuses will do little to protect the transformer,
serving only to protect the system by disconnecting a faulty
transformer after the fault has reached an advanced stage. Transformer rating Fuse
Table C7.3 shows typical ratings of fuses for use with 11kV Operating
Full load current Rated current
transformers. kVA time at 3 x
(A) (A)
rating(s)
This table should be taken only as a typical example;
considerable differences exist in the time characteristic of 100 5.25 16 3.0
different types of HRC fuses. Furthermore grading with 200 10.5 25 3.0
protection on the secondary side has not been considered. 315 15.8 36 10.0
6.2 Overcurrent relays 500 26.2 50 20.0

1000 52.5 90 30.0
With the advent of ring main units incorporating SF6 circuit
breakers and isolators, protection of distribution transformers
can now be provided by overcurrent trips (e.g. tripping Table C7.3:
Typical fuse ratings

C7 7. Restrictor earth fault protection
Conventional earth fault protection using overcurrent elements The system is operative for faults within the region between
fails to provide adequate protection for transformer windings. current transformers, that is, for faults on the star winding in
This is particularly the case for a star-connected winding with question. The system will remain stable for all faults outside
an impedance-earthed neutral, as considered in Section 2.1. this zone.
The degree of protection is very much improved by the The gain in protection performance comes not only from using
application of restricted earth fault protection (or REF an instantaneous relay with a low setting, but also because
protection). This is a unit protection scheme for one winding the whole fault current is measured, not merely the transformed
of the transformer. It can be of the high impedance type as component in the HV primary winding (if the star winding is
shown in Figure C7.6, or of the biased low-impedance type. a secondary winding). Hence, although the prospective current
For the high-impedance type, the residual current of three level decreases as fault positions progressively nearer the
line current transformers is balanced against the output of a neutral end of the winding are considered, the square law
current transformer in the neutral conductor. In the biased which controls the primary line current is not applicable, and
low-impedance version, the three phase currents and the with a low effective setting, a large percentage of the winding
neutral current become the bias inputs to a differential element. can be covered.
Restricted earth fault protection is often applied even when
the neutral is solidly earthed. Since fault current then remains
at a high value even to the last turn of the winding (Figure
C7.2), virtually complete cover for earth faults is obtained.
This is an improvement compared with the performance of
systems that do not measure the neutral conductor current.
Earth fault protection applied to a delta-connected or
unearthed star winding is inherently restricted, since no zero
sequence components can be transmitted through the
transformer to the other windings.
> Both windings of a transformer can be protected separately
with restricted earth fault protection, thereby providing high-
High impedance relay speed protection against earth faults for the whole transformer
with relatively simple equipment. A high impedance relay is
used, giving fast operation and phase fault stability.
Figure C7.6:
Restricted earth fault protection for a star winding
8. Differential protection
The restricted earth fault schemes described above in Section

7 depend entirely on the Kirchhoff principle that the sum of the
currents flowing into a conducting network is zero. A differential
system can be arranged to cover the complete transformer;
this is possible because of the high efficiency of transformer
operation, and the close equivalence of ampere-turns developed
on the primary and secondary windings. Figure C7.7 illustrates
the principle. Current transformers on the primary and secondary
sides are connected to form a circulating current system.
8.1 Basic considerations for transformer differential
protection
In applying the principles of differential protection to
transformers, a variety of considerations have to be taken into Figure C7.7:
account. These include: Principle of transformer differential protection

8. Differential protection C7
a. correction for possible phase shift across the transformer

windings (phase correction)
A
B
b. the effects of the variety of earthing and winding C
arrangements (filtering of zero sequence currents)
c. correction for possible unbalance of signals from current
transformers on either side of the windings (ratio correction)
d. the effect of magnetising inrush during initial energisation
e. the possible occurrence of overfluxing
In traditional transformer differential schemes, the requirements
for phase and ratio correction were met by the application of
external interposing current transformers (ICTs), as a
secondary replica of the main winding connections, or by a
delta connection of the main CTs to provide phase correction Figure C7.8:
only. Digital/numerical relays implement ratio and phase Differential protection for two-winding delta/star transformer
correction in the relay software instead, thus enabling most
combinations of transformer winding arrangements to be
8.4 Filtering of zero sequence currents
catered for, irrespective of the winding connections of the
primary CTs. This avoids the additional space and cost It is essential to provide some form of zero sequence filtering
requirements of hardware interposing CTs. where a transformer winding can pass zero sequence current
to an external earth fault. This is to ensure that out-of-zone
8.2 Line current transformer primary ratings
earth faults are not seen by the transformer protection as an
Line current transformers have primary ratings selected to in-zone fault. This is achieved by use of delta-connected line
be approximately equal to the rated currents of the transformer CTs or interposing CTs for older relays, and hence the winding
windings to which they are applied. Primary ratings will usually connection of the line and/or interposing CTs must take this
be limited to those of available standard ratio CTs. into account, in addition to any phase compensation necessary.
For digital/numerical relays, the required filtering is applied
8.3 Phase correction
in the relay software. Table C7.4 summarises the phase
Correct operation of transformer differential protection requires compensation and zero sequence filtering requirements. An
that the transformer primary and secondary currents, as example of an incorrect choice of ICT connection is given in
measured by the relay, are in phase. If the transformer is Section 19.1.
connected delta/star, as shown in Figure C7.8, balanced
8.5 Ratio correction
three-phase through current suffers a phase change of 30°.
If left uncorrected, this phase difference would lead to the Correct operation of the differential element requires that
relay seeing through current as an unbalanced fault current, currents in the differential element balance under load and
and result in relay operation. Phase correction must be through fault conditions. As the primary and secondary line
implemented CT ratios may not exactly match the transformer rated winding
currents, digital/ numerical relays are provided with ratio
Electromechanical and static relays use appropriate CT/ICT
correction factors for each of the CT inputs. The correction
connections to ensure that the primary and secondary currents
factors may be calculated automatically by the relay from
applied to the relay are in phase.
knowledge of the line CT ratios and the transformer MVA
For digital and numerical relays, it is common to use star- rating. However, if interposing CTs are used, ratio correction
connected line CTs on all windings of the transformer and may not be such an easy task and may need to take into
compensate for the winding phase shift in software. Depending account a factor of √3 if delta-connected CTs or ICTs are
on relay design, the only data required in such circumstances involved. If the transformer is fitted with a tap changer, line
may be the transformer vector group designation. Phase CT ratios and correction factors are normally chosen to achieve
compensation is then performed automatically. Caution is current balance at the mid tap of the transformer. It is
required if such a relay is used to replace an existing necessary to ensure that current mismatch due to off-nominal
electromechanical or static relay, as the primary and secondary tap operation will not cause spurious operation.
line CTs may not have the same winding configuration. Phase
The example in Section 19.2 provides an illustration of how
compensation and associated relay data entry require more
ratio correction factors are used, and that of Section 9.3
detailed consideration in such circumstances. Rarely, the
shows how to set the ratio correction factors for a transformer
available phase compensation facilities cannot accommodate
with an unsymmetrical tap range.
the transformer winding connection, and in such cases
interposing CTs must be used.

C7 8. Differential protection
Phase HV Zero LV Zero

Transformer Transformer Clock face
compensation sequence sequence
connection phase shift vector
)
required filtering filtering 3
Differential current (
Yes Yes
Yes 2
0° 0 0° Operate
Yes 70%
slope
1
Yes Yes 30%
Restrain slope
Setting range
-30° 1 30° Yes
(0.1 - 0.5 )
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Yes Effective bias (x )
Yes Yes
Yes
-180° 6 180° Figure C7.9:
Yes Typical bias characteristic
Yes Yes
of CT inputs can be used, connected as shown in Figure
30 11 -30° Yes C7.10(a). The separate load currents are summated in the
Yes CT secondary circuits, and will balance with the infeed current
Yes Yes on the supply side.
(H / 12) Hour -(H / 12) x Yes When more than one source of fault current infeed exists,
x 360° ‘H’ 360° Yes there is a danger in the scheme of Figure C7.10(a) of current
circulating between the two paralleled sets of current
‘H’: phase displacement ‘clock number’, according to IEC 60076-1 transformers without producing any bias. It is therefore
important a relay is used with separate CT inputs for the two
secondaries - Figure C7.10(b).
Table C7.4:
Current transformer connections for power transformers of When the third winding consists of a delta-connected tertiary
various vector groups with no connections brought out, the transformer may be
regarded as a two winding transformer for protection purposes
and protected as shown in Figure C7.10(c).
8.6 Bias setting
Bias is applied to transformer differential protection for the
same reasons as any unit protection scheme – to ensure
Source
stability for external faults while allowing sensitive settings to Loads
pick up internal faults. The situation is slightly complicated if

a tap changer is present. With line CT / ICT ratios and correction
factors set to achieve current balance at nominal tap, an off- >
nominal tap may be seen by the differential protection as an

(a) Three winding transformer (one power source)
internal fault. By selecting the minimum bias to be greater
Possible
than the sum of the maximum tap of the transformer and Source
fault
infeed
possible CT errors, maloperation due to this cause is avoided.
Some relays use a bias characteristic with three sections, as
shown in Figure C7.9. The first section is set higher than the >
transformer magnetising current. The second section is
set to allow for off-nominal tap settings, while the third has a (b) Three winding transformer (three power sources)
larger bias slope beginning well above rated current to cater Source
Possible
fault
for heavy through-fault conditions. infeed
8.7 Transformers with multiple windings

The unit protection principle remains valid for a system having >
more than two connections, so a transformer with three or (c) Three winding transformer with unloaded delta tertiary
more windings can still be protected by the application of
the above principles. The power transformer has only one of
its three windings connected to a source of supply, with the Figure C7.10: Differential protection arrangements for three-
other two windings feeding loads, a relay with only two sets winding transformers (shown single phase for simplicity)

9. Differential protection stabilisation during magnetising inrush conditions C7
The magnetising inrush phenomenon described in Section 3 The second harmonic is therefore an attractive basis for a
produces current input to the energised winding which has stabilising bias against inrush effects, but care must be taken
no equivalent on the other windings. The whole of the inrush to ensure that the current transformers are sufficiently large
current appears, therefore, as unbalance and the differential so that the harmonics produced by transient saturation do
protection is unable to distinguish it from current due to an not delay normal operation of the relay. The differential current
internal fault. The bias setting is not effective and an increase is passed through a filter that extracts the second harmonic;
in the protection setting to a value that would avoid operation this component is then applied to produce a restraining
would make the protection of little value. Methods of delaying, quantity sufficient to overcome the operating tendency due
restraining or blocking of the differential element must therefore to the whole of the inrush current that flows in the operating
be used to prevent mal-operation of the protection. circuit. By this means a sensitive and high-speed system can
be obtained.
9.1 Time delay
9.3 Inrush detection blocking – Gap detection technique
Since the phenomenon is transient, stability can be maintained
by providing a small time delay. However, because this time Another feature that characterizes an inrush current can be
delay also delays operation of the relay in the event of a fault seen from Figure C7.5 where the two waveforms (c) and (d)
occurring at switch-on, the method is no longer used. have periods in the cycle where the current is zero. The
minimum duration of this zero period is theoretically one
9.2 Harmonic restraint
quarter of the cycle and is easily detected by a simple timer
The inrush current, although generally resembling an in-zone t1 that is set to 1/f seconds. Figure C7.11 shows the circuit
fault current, differs greatly when the waveforms are compared. in block diagram form. Timer t1 produces an output only if
The difference in the waveforms can be used to distinguish the current is zero for a time exceeding 1/f seconds. It is
between the conditions. reset when the instantaneous value of the differential current
exceeds the setting reference.
As stated before, the inrush current contains all harmonic
orders, but these are not all equally suitable for providing
bias. In practice, only the second harmonic is used.
Bias
Inhibit Timer 1 Inhibit Timer 2 Trip
This component is present in all inrush waveforms. It is typical Differential Differential
Threshold comparator
of waveforms in which successive half period portions do
not repeat with reversal of polarity but in which mirror-image
symmetry can be found about certain ordinates.
Figure C7.11:
The proportion of second harmonic varies somewhat with the Block diagram to show waveform gap-detecting principle
degree of saturation of the core, but is always present as
long as the uni-directional component of flux exists. The
amount varies according to factors in the transformer design. As the zero in the inrush current occurs towards the end of
Normal fault currents do not contain second or other even the cycle, it is necessary to delay operation of the differential
harmonics, nor do distorted currents flowing in saturated iron relay by 1/f seconds to ensure that the zero condition can
cored coils under steady state conditions. be detected if present. This is achieved by using a second
The output current of a current transformer that is energised timer t2 that is held reset by an output from timer t1.
into steady state saturation will contain odd harmonics but When no current is flowing for a time exceeding 1/f seconds,
not even harmonics. However, should the current transformer timer t2 is held reset and the differential relay that may be
be saturated by the transient component of the fault current, controlled by these timers is blocked. When a differential
the resulting saturation is not symmetrical and even harmonics current exceeding the setting of the relay flows, t1 timer is
are introduced into the output current. This can have the reset and timer t2 times out to give a trip signal in 1/f seconds.
advantage of improving the through fault stability performance If the differential current is characteristic of transformer inrush
of a differential relay. then timer t2 will be reset on each cycle and the trip signal is
blocked.
Some numerical relays may use a combination of the harmonic
restraint and gap detection techniques for magnetising inrush
detection.

C7 10. Combined differential and resticted earth fault schemes
The advantages to be obtained by the use of restricted earth

fault protection, discussed in Section 7, lead to the system
being frequently used in conjunction with an overall differential
system. The importance of this is shown in Figure C7.12, from
which it will be seen that if the neutral of a star-connected Restricted earth
fault relay I >
winding is earthed through a resistance of one per unit, an

overall differential system having an effective setting of 20% Phase correcting
auxiliary current
transformers
will detect faults in only 42% of the winding from the line end.
Implementation of a combined differential/REF protection
scheme is made easy if a numerical relay with software ratio/
phase compensation is used. All compensation is made Id> Id> Id> Differential relay
internally in the relay.

Where software ratio/phase correction is not available, either
summation transformer or auxiliary CTs can be used. The Figure C7.14:
connections are shown in Figures C7.13 and C7.14 respectively. Combined differential and restricted earth fault protection
using auxiliary CTs
100
Care must be taken in calculating the settings, but the only
significant disadvantage of the Combined Differential/REF
80 scheme is that the REF element is likely to operate for heavy
(percentage of rated current)
n
tio
internal faults as well as the differential elements, thus making

Primary operating current
ec
ot
subsequent fault analysis somewhat confusing. However, the

pr
60
lt
saving in CTs outweighs this disadvantage.

u
fa
h
rt
ea
10.1 Application when an earthing transformer is

d
40 n
te
tio
ric
te
c connected within the protected zone
st
ro
Re
ia lp
nt A delta-connected winding cannot deliver any zero sequence
20 re
fi fe current to an earth fault on the connected system, any current
D
that does flow is in consequence of an earthed neutral
0 elsewhere on the system and will have a 2-1-1 pattern of
100 80 60 40 20 0
current distribution between phases. When the transformer
Percentage of winding protected
in question represents a major power feed, the system may
be earthed at that point by an earthing transformer or earthing
Figure C7.12: reactor. They are frequently connected to the system, close
Amount of winding protected when transformer is resistance to the main supply transformer and within the transformer
earthed and ratings of transformer and resistor are equal protection zone. Zero sequence current that flows through
the earthing transformer during system earth faults will flow
through the line current transformers on this side, and, without
an equivalent current in the balancing current transformers,
will cause unwanted operation of the relays.
The problem can be overcome by subtracting the appropriate
component of current from the main CT output. The earthing
transformer neutral current is used for this purpose. As this
Restricted represents three times the zero sequence current flowing,
earth
fault I > ratio correction is required. This can take the form of
relay
interposing CTs of ratio 1/0.333, arranged to subtract their
output from that of the line current transformers in each phase,
Id> Id> Id> Differential relay as shown in Figure C7.15. The zero sequence component is
cancelled, restoring balance to the differential system.
Alternatively, numerical relays may use software to perform
the subtraction, having calculated the zero sequence
Figure C7.13: component internally.
Combined differential and earth fault protection using
summation current transformer

10. Combined differential and resticted earth fault schemes C7
Provided restricted earth fault protection is not required, the

A
B
scheme shown in Figure C7.16 has the advantage of not
C requiring a current transformer, with its associated mounting
and cabling requirements, in the neutral-earth conductor. The
Earthing
1/0.333 scheme can also be connected as shown in Figure C7.17
transformer
when restricted earth fault protection is needed.
A
B
Differential relay Id> Id> Id> C
I >
Restricted earth fault relay I >
Earthing
transformer
Figure C7.15:
Differential protection with in-zone earthing
transformer, with restricted earth fault relay
Differential relay Id> Id> Id>
A high impedance relay element can be connected in the

neutral lead between current transformers and differential
relays to provide restricted earth fault protection to the winding.
Figure C7.17:
As an alternative to the above scheme, the circulating current Differential protection with in-zone earthing transformer, with
system can be completed via a three-phase group of alternative arrangement of restricted earth fault relay
interposing transformers that are provided with tertiary
windings connected in delta. This winding effectively short-
circuits the zero sequence component and thereby removes
it from the balancing quantities in the relay circuit; see Figure
C7.16.
A
B
C
Earthing
transformer
Differential relay Id> Id> Id>
Figure C7.16:
Differential protection with in-zone earthing transformer;
no earth fault relay

C7 11. Earthing transformer protection
Earthing transformers not protected by other means can use

the scheme shown in Figure C7.18. The delta-connected A
current transformers are connected to an overcurrent relay
B
having three phase-fault elements. The normal action of the
earthing transformer is to pass zero sequence current. The C
transformer equivalent current circulates in the delta formed
by the CT secondaries without energising the relay. The latter
may therefore be set to give fast and sensitive protection
against faults in the earthing transformer itself. I>
Earthing transformer
Figure C7.18:
Earthing transformer protection
12. Auto-transformer protection
Auto-transformers are used to couple EHV power networks

if the ratio of their voltages is moderate. An alternative to A
Differential Protection that can be applied to auto-transformers B
is protection based on the application of Kirchhoff’s law to a C
conducting network, namely that the sum of the currents

flowing into all external connections to the network is zero.
A circulating current system is arranged between equal ratio High
current transformers in the two groups of line connections Id> impedance
relay
and the neutral end connections. If one neutral current
transformer is used, this and all the line current transformers (a) Earth fault scheme
can be connected in parallel to a single element relay, thus
providing a scheme responsive to earth faults only; see Figure A
C7.19(a). B
C
If current transformers are fitted in each phase at the neutral
end of the windings and a three-element relay is used, a
A
differential system can be provided, giving full protection B
against phase and earth faults; see Figure C7.19(b). This C
provides high-speed sensitive protection. It is unaffected by
Id> Id> Id>
ratio changes on the transformer due to tap-changing and is
immune to the effects of magnetising inrush current. N
(b) Phase and earth fault scheme

It does not respond to interturn faults, a deficiency that is
serious in view of the high statistical risk quoted in Section
1. Such faults, unless otherwise cleared, will be left to develop
Figure C7.19:
into earth faults, by which time considerably more damage Protection of auto-transformer by high impedance differential
to the transformer will have occurred. relays

12. Auto-transformer protection C7
In addition, this scheme does not respond to any fault in a separate from the main winding protection. If the tertiary
tertiary winding. Unloaded delta-connected tertiary windings winding earthing lead is connected to the main winding neutral
are often not protected; alternatively, the delta winding can above the neutral current transformer in an attempt to make
be earthed at one point through a current transformer that a combined system, there may be ‘blind spots’ which the
energises an instantaneous relay. This system should be protection cannot cover.
13. Overfluxing protection
The effects of excessive flux density are described in Section harmonic detection feature, which can be used to detect such
2.8. Overfluxing arises principally from the following system a condition, as levels of this harmonic rise under overfluxing
conditions: conditions.
a. high system voltage
b. low system frequency
Operating
c. geomagnetic disturbances time (s)
1000
The latter results in low frequency earth currents circulating
through a transmission system.
100
Since momentary system disturbances can cause transient K=63
K=40
overfluxing that is not dangerous, time delayed tripping is 10 K=20
required. The normal protection is an IDMT or definite time K=5
characteristic, initiated if a defined V/f threshold is exceeded. 1 K=1
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
Often separate alarm and trip elements are provided. The
alarm function would be definite time-delayed and the trip
function would be an IDMT characteristic. A typical
characteristic is shown in Figure C7.20.
Geomagnetic disturbances may result in overfluxing without Figure C7.20:
the V/f threshold being exceeded. Some relays provide a 5th Typical IDMT characteristic for overfluxing protection
14. Tank-earth protection
This is also known as Howard protection. If the transformer

tank is nominally insulated from earth (an insulation resistance
of 10 ohms being sufficient) earth fault protection can be
provided by connecting a relay to the secondary of a current
transformer the primary of which is connected between the
tank and earth. This scheme is similar to the frame-earth fault
busbar protection described in Chapter [C6: Busbar
Protection].

C7 15. Oil and gas devices
All faults below oil in an oil-immersed transformer result in

localised heating and breakdown of the oil; some degree of 3 x Internal pipe
arcing will always take place in a winding fault and the diameter (min) Conservator
resulting decomposition of the oil will release gases. When
the fault is of a very minor type, such as a hot joint, gas is 5 x Internal pipe
released slowly, but a major fault involving severe arcing diameter (min)
causes a very rapid release of large volumes of gas as well
as oil vapour. The action is so violent that the gas and vapour
do not have time to escape but instead build up pressure
and bodily displace the oil.
When such faults occur in transformers having oil conservators,
the fault causes a blast of oil to pass up the relief pipe to
the conservator. A Buchholz relay is used to protect against 76mm typical
such conditions. Devices responding to abnormally high oil
pressure or rate-of-rise of oil pressure are also available and Transformer
may be used in conjunction with a Buchholz relay.
15.1 Oil Pressure relief devices
Figure C7.21:
The simplest form of pressure relief device is the widely used Buchholz relay mounting arrangement
‘frangible disc’ that is normally located at the end of an oil
relief pipe protruding from the top of the transformer tank.
The surge of oil caused by a serious fault bursts the disc, a cast housing which is connected in the pipe to the
so allowing the oil to discharge rapidly. Relieving and limiting conservator, as in Figure C7.21.
the pressure rise avoids explosive rupture of the tank and A typical Buchholz relay will have two sets of contacts. One
consequent fire risk. Outdoor oil-immersed transformers are is arranged to operate for slow accumulations of gas, the
usually mounted in a catchment pit to collect and contain other for bulk displacement of oil in the event of a heavy
spilt oil (from whatever cause), thereby minimising the internal fault. An alarm is generated for the former, but the
possibility of pollution. latter is usually direct-wired to the CB trip relay.
A drawback of the frangible disc is that the oil remaining in The device will therefore give an alarm for the following fault
the tank is left exposed to the atmosphere after rupture. This conditions, all of which are of a low order of urgency:
is avoided in a more effective device, the sudden pressure
relief valve, which opens to allow discharge of oil if the a. hot spots on the core due to short circuit of lamination
pressure exceeds a set level, but closes automatically as insulation
soon as the internal pressure falls below this level. If the b. core bolt insulation failure
abnormal pressure is relatively high, the valve can operate
c. faulty joints
within a few milliseconds, and provide fast tripping when
suitable contacts are fitted. d. interturn faults or other winding faults involving only lower
power infeeds
The device is commonly fitted to power transformers rated
at 2MVA or higher, but may be applied to distribution e. loss of oil due to leakage
transformers rated as low as 200kVA, particularly those in
When a major winding fault occurs, this causes a surge of
hazardous areas.
oil, which displaces the lower float and thus causes isolation
15.2 Rapid pressure rise relay of the transformer. This action will take place for:
This device detects rapid rise of pressure rather than absolute a. all severe winding faults, either to earth or interphase
pressure and thereby can respond even quicker than the
b. loss of oil if allowed to continue to a dangerous degree
pressure relief valve to sudden abnormally high pressures.
Sensitivities as low as 0.07bar/s are attainable, but when An inspection window is usually provided on either side of
fitted to forced-cooled transformers the operating speed of the gas collection space. Visible white or yellow gas indicates
the device may have to be slowed deliberately to avoid that insulation has been burnt, while black or grey gas
spurious tripping during circulation pump starts. indicates the presence of dissociated oil. In these cases the
gas will probably be inflammable, whereas released air will
15.3 Buchholz protection
not. A vent valve is provided on the top of the housing for
Buchholz protection is normally provided on all transformers the gas to be released or collected for analysis. Transformers
fitted with a conservator. The Buchholz relay is contained in with forced oil circulation may experience oil flow to/from the

15. Oil and gas devices C7
conservator on starting/stopping of the pumps. The Buchholz a transformer tank filled with oil have shown that operation
relay must not operate in this circumstance. times of 0.05s-0.1s are possible. Electrical protection is
generally used as well, either to obtain faster operation for
Cleaning operations may cause aeration of the oil. Under
heavy faults, or because Buchholz relays have to be prevented
such conditions, tripping of the transformer due to Buchholz
from tripping during oil maintenance periods. Conservators
operation should be inhibited for a suitable period.
are fitted to oil-cooled transformers above 1000kVA rating,
Because of its universal response to faults within the except those to North American design practice that use a
transformer, some of which are difficult to detect by other different technique.
means, the Buchholz relay is invaluable, whether regarded
as a main protection or as a supplement to other protection
schemes. Tests carried out by striking a high voltage arc in
16. Transformer-feeder protection
A transformer-feeder comprises a transformer directly

connected to a transmission circuit without the intervention
HV LV
of switchgear. Examples are shown in Figure C7.22.
The saving in switchgear so achieved is offset by increased
complication in the necessary protection. The primary
requirement is intertripping, since the feeder protection
remote from the transformer will not respond to the low current
fault conditions that can be detected by restricted earth fault
and Buchholz protections. LV HV HV LV
Either unrestricted or restricted protection can be applied;

moreover, the transformer-feeder can be protected as a single
zone or be provided with separate protections for the feeder
and the transformer. In the latter case, the separate protections
can both be unit type systems. An adequate alternative is
the combination of unit transformer protection with an HV LV
unrestricted system of feeder protection, plus an intertripping
feature.
16.1 Non-unit schemes
The following sections describe how non-unit schemes are
applied to protect transformer-feeders against various types
of fault.
16.1.1 Feeder phase and earth faults Figure C7.22:
Typical transformer-feeder circuits
High-speed protection against phase and earth faults can
be provided by distance relays located at the end of the
feeder remote from the transformer. The transformer constitutes Although the distance zone is described as being set ’half
an appreciable lumped impedance. It is therefore possible way into the transformer’, it must not be thought that half the
to set a distance relay zone to cover the whole feeder and transformer winding will be protected. The effects of auto-
reach part way into the transformer impedance. With a normal transformer action and variations in the effective impedance
tolerance on setting thus allowed for, it is possible for fast of the winding with fault position prevent this, making the
Zone 1 protection to cover the whole of the feeder with amount of winding beyond the terminals which is protected
certainty without risk of over-reaching to a fault on the low very small. The value of the system is confined to the feeder,
voltage side. which, as stated above, receives high-speed protection
throughout.

C7 16. Transformer-feeder protection
16.1.2 Feeder phase faults

A distance scheme is not, for all practical purposes, affected
by varying fault levels on the high voltage busbars and is ~
therefore the best scheme to apply if the fault level may vary
widely. In cases where the fault level is reasonably constant,
similar protection can be obtained using high set instantaneous
overcurrent relays.
These should have a low transient over-reach, defined as: = Relay setting =
Setting ratio =
IS − IF = Transient over-reach
×100%
IF Transient
over-reach (%) 5 25 50 100
where: 0.25 1.01 1.20 1.44 1.92
Is = setting current 0.5 0.84 1.00 1.20 1.60
IF = steady - state r.m.s. value of fault current which when 1.0 0.63 0.75 0.90 1.20
fully offset just operates the relay 2.0 0.42 0.50 0.60 0.80
The instantaneous overcurrent relays must be set without risk 4.0 0.25 0.30 0.36 0.48
of them operating for faults on the remote side of the 8.0 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.27
transformer.
Referring to Figure C7.23, the required setting to ensure that
the relay will not operate for a fully offset fault IF2 is given by: Figure C7.23:
Over-reach considerations in the application of transformer-
Is = 1.2 (1 + t) IF2 feeder protection
where I F2 is the fault current under maximum source

conditions, that is, when ZS is minimum, and the factor of It can be seen that for a given transformer size, the most
1.2 covers possible errors in the system impedance details sensitive protection for the line will be obtained by using
used for calculation of IF2, together with relay and CT errors. relays with the lowest transient overreach. It should be noted
As it is desirable for the instantaneous overcurrent protection that where r is greater than 1, the protection will not cover
to clear all phase faults anywhere within the feeder under the whole line. Also, any increase in source impedance above
varying system operating conditions, it is necessary to have the minimum value will increase the effective setting ratios
a relay setting less than IF1 in order to ensure fast and reliable above those shown. The instantaneous protection is usually
operation. applied with a time delayed overcurrent element having a
lower current setting. In this way, instantaneous protection
Let the setting ratio resulting from setting IS be is provided for the feeder, with the time-delayed element
IS covering faults on the transformer.
r =
I F1 When the power can flow in the transformer-feeder in either
direction, overcurrent relays will be required at both ends.
Therefore,
In the case of parallel transformer-feeders, it is essential that
rIF1 = 1.2 (1 + t) IF2 the overcurrent relays on the low voltage side be directional,
operating only for fault current fed into the transformer-feeder,
Hence,
as described in Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection for
ZS + Z L Phase and Earth Faults, Section 14.3].
r = 1. 2(1 + t )
ZS + Z L + ZT 16.1.3 Earth faults
ZS + Z L Instantaneous restricted earth fault protection is normally
r = 1. 2(1 + t )
(1 + x ) ( Z S + Z L ) provided. When the high voltage winding is delta connected,
a relay in the residual circuit of the line current transformers
1. 2(1 + t ) gives earth fault protection which is fundamentally limited to
= the feeder and the associated delta-connected transformer
1+x winding. The latter is unable to transmit any zero sequence
where: current to a through earth fault.
ZT
x =
ZS + Z L

16. Transformer-feeder protection C7
When the feeder is associated with an earthed star-connected 16.1.4 In-zone capacitance
winding, normal restricted earth fault protection as described
The feeder portion of the transformer-feeder will have an
in Section 7 is not applicable because of the remoteness of
appreciable capacitance between each conductor and earth.
the transformer neutral.
During an external earth fault the neutral will be displaced,
Restricted protection can be applied using a directional earth and the resulting zero sequence component of voltage will
fault relay. A simple sensitive and high-speed directional produce a corresponding component of zero sequence
element can be used, but attention must be paid to the capacitance current. In the limiting case of full neutral
transient stability of the element. Alternatively, a directional displacement, this zero sequence current will be equal in
IDMT relay may be used, the time multiplier being set low. value to the normal positive sequence current.
The slight inverse time delay in operation will ensure that
The resulting residual current is equal to three times the zero
unwanted transient operation is avoided.
sequence current and hence to three times the normal line
When the supply source is on the high voltage star side, an charging current. The value of this component of in-zone
alternative scheme that does not require a voltage transformer current should be considered when establishing the effective
can be used. The scheme is shown in Figure C7.24. setting of earth fault relays.
16.2 Unit schemes
The basic differences between the requirements of feeder
and transformer protections lie in the limitation imposed on
the transfer of earth fault current by the transformer and the
need for high sensitivity in the transformer protection,
suggesting that the two components of a transformer-feeder
should be protected separately. This involves mounting current
Relay >
transformers adjacent to, or on, the high voltage terminals
of the transformer. Separate current transformers are
desirable for the feeder and transformer protections so that
these can be arranged in two separate overlapping zones.
The use of common current transformers is possible, but
Relay > > > may involve the use of auxiliary current transformers, or
special winding and connection arrangements of the relays.
+ Intertripping of the remote circuit breaker from the transformer
Trip protection will be necessary, but this can be done using the
circuit
communication facilities of the feeder protection relays.
Although technically superior, the use of separate protection
systems is seldom justifiable when compared with an overall
Figure C7.24: system or a combination of non-unit feeder protection and
Instantaneous protection of transformer-feeder a unit transformer system.
An overall unit system must take into account the fact that zero
sequence current on one side of a transformer may not be
For the circuit breaker to trip, both relays A and B must operate,
reproduced in any form on the other side. This represents little
which will occur for earth faults on the feeder or transformer winding.
difficulty to a modern numerical relay using software phase/
External earth faults cause the transformer to deliver zero zero sequence compensation and digital communications to
sequence current only, which will circulate in the closed delta transmit full information on the phase and earth currents from
connection of the secondary windings of the three auxiliary one relay to the other. However, it does represent a more difficult
current transformers. No output is available to relay B. Through problem for relays using older technology. The line current
phase faults will operate relay B, but not the residual relay A. transformers can be connected to a summation transformer
Relay B must have a setting above the maximum load. As the with unequal taps, as shown in Figure C7.25(a). This
earthing of the neutral at a receiving point is likely to be solid arrangement produces an output for phase faults and also
and the earth fault current will therefore be comparable with some response for A and B phase-earth faults. However, the
the phase fault current, high settings are not a serious limitation. resulting settings will be similar to those for phase faults and
no protection will be given for C phase-earth faults.
Earth fault protection of the low voltage winding will be
provided by a restricted earth fault system using either three An alternative technique is shown in Figure C7.25(b).
or four current transformers, according to whether the winding
is delta or star-connected, as described in Section 7.

D D
E E
C7 16. Transformer-feeder protection D Bias winding

E Operating winding
Differential relays
(a) Circulating current system
A
Feeder
A
B
B
C
C
D D
E E
Pilots
D Bias winding Differential relays

E Operating winding
(a) Circulating current system

Relay electromagnets
(bias inherent)
(b) Balanced voltage system
Figure C7.25 (a):

Methods of protection for transformer-feeders using A
electromechanical static technology
B
Figure C7.25 (b):
Methods of protection for transformer- feeders using
The B phase is taken through a separate winding on another C electromechanical static technology
transformer or relay electromagnet, to provide another
balancing system. The two transformers are interconnected
with their counterparts at the other end of the feeder-
transformer by four pilot wires. Operation with three pilot cores
is possible but four are preferable, involving little increase in
pilot cost.
Pilots
Relay electromagnets
(bias inherent)
(b) Balanced voltage system

17. Intertripping C7
In order to ensure that both the high and low voltage circuit
breakers operate for faults within the transformer and feeder,
A
it is necessary to operate both circuit breakers from protection
B
normally associated with one. The technique for doing this
is known as intertripping. C
The necessity for intertripping on transformer-feeders arises

from the fact that certain types of fault produce insufficient
current to operate the protection associated with one of the Voltage
transformer
circuit breakers. These faults are:
a. faults in the transformer that operate the Buchholz relay
and trip the local low voltage circuit breaker, while failing
to produce enough fault current to operate the protection
associated with the remote high voltage circuit breaker
b. earth faults on the star winding of the transformer, which,
because of the position of the fault in the winding, again
produce insufficient current for relay operation at the
remote circuit breaker
c. earth faults on the feeder or high voltage delta-connected
winding which trip the high voltage circuit breaker only, Residual voltage relay
leaving the transformer energised from the low voltage
side and with two high voltage phases at near line-to-line
voltage above earth. Intermittent arcing may follow and Figure C7.26:
there is a possibility of transient overvoltage occurring Neutral displacement detection using voltage transformer
and causing a further breakdown of insulation
Several methods are available for intertripping; these are The relay normally receives zero voltage, but, in the presence
discussed in Chapter [D2: Signalling and Intertripping in of an earth fault, the broken-delta voltage will rise to three
Protection Schemes]. times the phase voltage. Earth faults elsewhere in the system
17.1 Neutral displacement may also result in displacement of the neutral and hence
discrimination is achieved using definite or inverse time
An alternative to intertripping is to detect the condition by characteristics.
measuring the residual voltage on the feeder. An earth fault
occurring on the feeder connected to an unearthed transformer
winding should be cleared by the feeder circuit, but if there
is also a source of supply on the secondary side of the
transformer, the feeder may be still live. The feeder will then
be a local unearthed system, and, if the earth fault continues
in an arcing condition, dangerous overvoltages may occur.
A voltage relay is energised from the broken-delta connected
secondary winding of a voltage transformer on the high
voltage line, and receives an input proportional to the zero
sequence voltage of the line, that is, to any displacement of
the neutral point; see Figure C7.26.

C7 18. Condition monitoring of transformers
It is possible to provide transformers with measuring devices A typical condition monitoring system for an oil-immersed
to detect early signs of degradation in various components transformer is capable of monitoring the condition of various
and provide warning to the operator in order to avoid a lengthy transformer components as shown in Table C7.5.
and expensive outage due to failure. The technique, which
There can be some overlap with the measurements available
can be applied to other plant as well as transformers, is called
from a digital/numerical relay. By the use of software to store
condition monitoring, as the intent is to provide the operator
and perform trend analysis of the measured data, the operator
with regular information on the condition of the transformer.
can be presented with information on the state of health of
By reviewing the trends in the information provided, the
the transformer, and alarms raised when measured values
operator can make a better judgement as to the frequency
exceed appropriate limits. This will normally provide the
of maintenance, and detect early signs of deterioration that,
operator with early warning of degradation within one or more
if ignored, would lead to an internal fault occurring. Such
components of the transformer, enabling maintenance to be
techniques are an enhancement to, but are not a replacement
scheduled to correct the problem prior to failure occurring.
for, the protection applied to a transformer.
The maintenance can obviously be planned to suit system
The extent to which condition monitoring is applied to conditions, provided the rate of degradation is not excessive.
transformers on a system will depend on many factors,
As asset owners become more conscious of the costs of an
amongst which will be the policy of the asset owner, the
unplanned outage, and electric supply networks are utilised
suitability of the design (existing transformers may require
closer to capacity for long periods of time, the usefulness of
modifications involving a period out of service – this may be
this technique can be expected to grow.
costly and not justified), the importance of the asset to system
operation, and the general record of reliability. Therefore, it
should not be expected that all transformers would be, or
need to be, so fitted.
Monitored equipment Measured quantity Health information
Voltage
Partial discharge measurement Insulation quality
(wideband voltage)
Bushings Loading
Load current Permissible overload rating
Hot-spot temperature
Oil pressure Insulation quality
Hot-spot temperature
Oil temperature
Permissible overload rating
Oil quality
Tank Gas-in-oil content
Winding insulation condition
Buchholz gas content Oil quality
Moisture-in-oil content Winding insulation condition
Position Frequency of use of each tap position
Drive power consumption OLTC health
Tap changer
Total switched load current OLTC contact wear
OLTC oil temperature OLTC health
Oil temperature difference
Cooling air temperature Cooler efficiency
Coolers
Ambient temperature
Pump status Cooling plant health
Conservator Oil level Tank integrity
Table C7.5:
Condition monitoring for transformers

19. Examples of transformer protection C7
This section provides three examples of the application of to the fault. Use of star connected main CTs and Yy0 connected
modern relays to transformer protection. The latest MiCOM ICTs provides a path for the zero sequence current to reach
P630 or P640 series relays provide advanced software to the protection relay. On the primary side of the transformer,
simplify the calculations, so an earlier relay is used to illustrate the delta connected main primary winding causes zero-
the complexity of the required calculations. sequence current to circulate round the delta and hence will
not be seen by the primary side main CTs. The protection
19.1 Provision of zero-sequence filtering
relay will therefore not see any zero-sequence current on the
Figure C7.27 shows a delta-star transformer to be protected primary side, and hence detects the secondary side zero
using a unit protection scheme. With a main winding connection sequence current incorrectly as an in-zone fault.
of Dyn11, suitable choices of primary and secondary CT
The solution is to provide the ICTs on the secondary side of
winding arrangements, and software phase compensation are
the transformer with a delta winding, so that the zero-sequence
to be made. With the MiCOM P630 or P640 series relays, phase
current circulates round the delta and is not seen by the relay.
compensation is selected by the user in the form of software-
Therefore, a rule can be developed that a transformer winding
implemented Interposing Current Transformers (ICTs).
with a connection to earth must have a delta-connected main
or ICT for unit protection to operate correctly.
Selection of Yy0 connection for the primary side ICTs and Yd1
Primary CTs Secondary CTs (–30°) for the secondary side ICTs provides the required
phase shift and the zero-sequence trap on the secondary
side.
19.2 Unit protection of a delta-star transformer
Figure C7.28 shows a delta-star transformer to which unit
protection is to be applied, including restricted earth fault
protection to the star winding.
Primary ICTs Unit protection relay Secondary ICTs
10MVA
Figure C7.27: 33/11kV
Transformer zero sequence filtering example Primary CTs Secondary CTs
With the Dyn11 connection, the secondary voltages and FLC = 175A FLC = 525A
currents are displaced by +30° from the primary. Therefore,

the combination of primary, secondary and phase correction
must provide a phase shift of –30° of the secondary quantities 600/1
relative to the primary.
For simplicity, the CTs on the primary and secondary windings
of the transformer are connected in star. The required phase
shift can be achieved either by use of ICT connections on the
primary side having a phase shift of +30° or on the secondary
side having a phase shift of –30°. There is a wide combination
of primary and secondary ICT winding arrangements that Primary ICTs Unit Protection Secondary ICTs
can provide this, such as Yd10 (+60°) on the primary and Yd3 Relay
(-90°) on the secondary.

Another possibility is Yd11 (+30°) on the primary and Yy0 (0°)
Figure C7.28:
on the secondary. It is usual to choose the simplest
Transformer unit protection example
arrangements possible, and therefore the latter of the above
two possibilities might be selected.
Referring to the figure, the ICTs have already been correctly
However, the distribution of current in the primary and
selected, and are conveniently applied in software. It therefore
secondary windings of the transformer due to an external
remains to calculate suitable ratio compensation (it is assumed
earth fault on the secondary side of the transformer must now
that the transformer has no taps), transformer differential
be considered. The transformer has an earth connection on
protection settings and restricted earth fault settings.
the secondary winding, so it can deliver zero sequence current

C7 19. Examples of transformer protection
19.2.1 Ratio compensation where:

Transformer HV full load current on secondary of main CTs VS = stability voltage setting
is:
VK = CT knee point voltage
175 / 250 = 0.7
K = relay stability factor
Ratio compensation = 1/0.7 = 1.428
IS = relay current setting
Select nearest value = 1.43
Rct = CT winding resistance
LV secondary current = 525/600 = 0.875
RL = CT secondary lead resistance
Ratio compensation = 1 / 0.875 = 1.14
RB = resistance of any other components in the relay circuit
19.2.2 Transformer unit protection settings
Rstab = stabilising resistor
A current setting of 20% of the rated relay current is
For this example:
recommended. This equates to 35A primary current. Some
protection relays have a dual slope bias characteristic with VK = 97V
fixed bias slope settings of 20% up to rated current and 80%
Rct = 3.7Ω
above that level. The corresponding characteristic is shown
in Figure C7.29. RL = 0.057Ω
For the relay used, the various factors are related by the graph
of Figure C7.30.
600
500
0.1
Differential current (A)
70
400
Operate 60
Overall operationtime - milliseconds
300
50
0.2
200
Restrain 40
0.3
Factor
100
Overall op time
30
0.4
0
0 200 400 600 800 Unstable
20 0.5
Effective bias (A) differential current Stable 0.6

Factor
10 0.7
0.8
0.9
Figure C7.29: 0 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Transformer unit protection characteristic
19.2.3 Restricted earth fault protection Figure C7.30:

REF operating characteristic for KBCH relay
MiCOM P630 series relay implements high-impedance
Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection. Operation is required
for a primary earth fault current of 25% rated earth fault current Starting with the desired operating time, the VK / VS ratio
(i.e. 250A). The prime task in calculating settings is to calculate and K factor can be found.
the value of the stabilising resistor Rstab and stability factor K. An operating time of 40ms (2 cycles at 50Hz) is usually
A stabilising resistor is required to ensure through fault stability acceptable, and hence, from Figure C7.30,
when one of the secondary CTs saturates while the others VK / VS = 4
do not.
K = 0.5
The requirements can be expressed as:
VS = IS Rstab and VS > KIf (Rct + 2RL + RB )

19. Examples of transformer protection C7
The maximum earth fault current is limited by the earthing change position into account to avoid the possibility of
resistor to 1000A (primary). The maximum phase fault current spurious trips at extreme tap positions. For this example, the
can be estimated by assuming the source impedance to be same transformer as in Section 19.2 will be used, but with an
zero, so it is limited only by transformer impedance to 5250A, on-load tapping range of +5% to -15%. The tap-changer is
or 10A secondary after taking account of the ratio located on the primary winding, while the tap-step usually
compensation. Hence the stability voltage can be calculated does not matter.
as
The stages involved in the calculation are as follows:
VS = 0.5 x 10 (3.7 + 2 0.057) = 19.07V
a. determine ratio correction at mid-tap and resulting
Hence, secondary currents
Calculated VK = 4 x 19.07 = 76.28V b. determine HV currents at tap extremities with ratio correction
However, c. determine the differential current at the tap extremities
Actual VK = 91V and VK / VS = 4.77 d. determine bias current at tap extremities
Thus from Figure C7.30, with K = 0.5, the protection is unstable. e. check for sufficient margin between differential and
operating currents
By adopting an iterative procedure for values of VK / VS and
K, a final acceptable result of VK / VS = 4.55, K = 0.6, is 19.3.1 Ratio correction
obtained. This results in an operating time of 40ms.
In accordance with Section 8.4, the mid-tap position is used
The required earth fault setting current Iop is 250A. The chosen to calculate the ratio correction factors. The mid tap position
E / F CT has an exciting current Ie of 1%, and hence using is –5%, and at this tap position:
the equation:
Primary voltage to give rated secondary voltage:
Iop = CT ratio x ( IS + nIe )
= 33 x 0.95 = 31.35kV
where:
and
n = no of CTs in parallel (= 4)
Rated primary current = 184A
IS = 0.377, use 0.38 nearest settable value.
Transformer HV full load current on secondary of main CTs
The stabilising resistance Rstab can be calculated as 60.21Ω. is:
The relay can only withstand a maximum of 3kV peak under 184/250 = 0.737
fault conditions. A check is required to see if this voltage is
Ratio compensation = 1/0.737
exceeded – if it is, a non-linear resistor, known as a Metrosil,
must be connected across the relay and stabilising resistor. = 1.357
The peak voltage is estimated using the formula:
Select nearest value = 1.36
V P = 2 2V K ( V F − V K ) LV secondary current = 525/600
where:
= 0.875
VF = If (Rct + 2RL + Rstab ) Ratio compensation = 1/0.875
and
= 1.14
If = fault current in secondary of CT circuit and substituting Both of the above values can be set in the relay.
values,
19.3.2 HV currents at tap extremities
Vp = 544V. Thus a Metrosil is not required.
At the +5% tap, the HV full-load current will be:
10
19.3 Unit protection for on-load tap changing
transformer 33 × 1. 05 × 3
The previous example deals with a transformer having no =166.6A primary
taps. In practice, most transformers have a range of taps to Hence, the secondary current with ratio correction:
cater for different loading conditions. While most transformers
166.6 × 1.36
have an off-load tap-changer, transformers used for voltage =
control in a network are fitted with an on-load tap-changer. 250
The protection settings must then take the variation of tap- = 0.906A

C7 19. Examples of transformer protection
At the -15% tap, the HV full-load current on the primary of 19.3.5 Margin between differential and operating
the CTs: currents
10 The operating current of the relay is given by the formula
=
33 × 0. 85 × 3 Iop = IS + 0.2Ibias
= 205.8 A Hence, at the +5% tap, with IS = 0.2
Hence, the secondary current with ratio correction: Iopt1 = 0.2 + ( 0.2 x 0.952 )
205.8 × 1.36 = 0.3904A
=
250
= 1. 12 A At the –15% tap,
19.3.3 Determine differential current at tap extremities Iop = IS + 0.2 + ( Ibias - 1 ) x 0.8
The full load current seen by the relay, after ratio correction (since the bias >1.0)
is 0.875 x 1.14 = 0.998A.
Iopt2 = 0.2 + 0.2 + ( 1.059 - 1 ) x 0.8
At the +5% tap, the differential current
= 0.4472A
Idifft2 = 0.998 - 0.906 = 0.092A
For satisfactory operation of the relay, the operating current
At the –15% tap, should be no greater than 90% of the differential current at
the tap extremities.
Idifft2 = 1.12 - 0.998 = 0.122A
For the +5% tap, the differential current is 24% of the operating
19.3.4 Determine bias currents at tap extremities
current, and at the –15% tap, the differential current is 27%
The bias current is given by the formula: of the operating current. Therefore, a setting of IS is satisfactory.
1
I bias = x ( I RHV + I RLV )
2
where:
IRHV = relay HV current
IRLV = relay LV current
Hence,
1
I biast1 = x ( 0.998 + 0.906 )
2
= 0.952A
and
1
I biast 2 = x ( 0.998 + 1.12 )
2
= 1.059A

C7

C8
Generator and
Generator-Transformer Protection
Chapter
Generator and
C8
Generator-Transformer Protection
1. Introduction 315
2. Generator earthing 316
3. Generator differential protection 317
4. Differential protection of generator-transformers 319
5. Inter-turn protection 319
6. Overcurrent protection 323
7. Stator earthfault protection 325
8. Stator earthfault protection for entire stator winding 329
9. Overvoltage protection 331
10. Undervoltage protection 331
11. Low forward power/reverse power protection 332
12. Unbalanced loading 333
13. Protection against inadvertent energisation 335
14. Under/overfrequency/overfluxing protection 335
15. Rotor faults 336
16. Loss of excitation protection 338
17. Pole slipping protection 341
18. Stator overheating faults 344
19. Complete generator protection schemes 344
20. Distributed generation 347
21. Examples of generator protection settings 350
22. References 357

Generator and Generator-Transformer Protection
C8 1. Introduction
The core of an electric power system is the generation. With governed by economic considerations, taking into account
the exception of emerging fuel cell and solar-cell technology the value of the machine, and the value of its output to the
for power systems, the conversion of the fundamental energy plant owner.
into its electrical equivalent normally requires a ‘prime mover’
The following problems require consideration when applying
to develop mechanical power as an intermediate stage.
the protection system:
The nature of this machine depends upon the source of
a. stator electrical faults
energy and in turn this has some bearing on the design of
the generator. Generators based on steam, gas, water or wind b. overvoltage
turbines, and reciprocating combustion engines are all in use.
c. low power / reverse power
Electrical ratings extend from a few hundred kVA (or even
less) for reciprocating engine and renewable energy sets, up d. overload / unbalanced loading
to steam turbine sets exceeding 1200MVA. e. overfrequency / underfrequency
Small and medium sized sets may be directly connected to f. inadvertent energisation
a power distribution system. A larger set may be associated
with an individual transformer, through which it is coupled to g. rotor electrical faults
the EHV primary transmission system. h. overfluxing
Switchgear may or may not be provided between the generator i. loss of excitation
and transformer. In some cases, operational and economic
advantages can be attained by providing a generator circuit j. loss of synchronism
breaker in addition to a high voltage circuit breaker, but special
demands will be placed on the generator circuit breaker for
interruption of generator fault current waveforms that do not
have an early zero crossing. Generator Main transformer
A unit transformer may be tapped off the interconnection
between generator and transformer for the supply of power
to auxiliary plant, as shown in Figure C8.1. The unit transformer
could be of the order of 10% of the unit rating for a large
HV busbars
fossil-fuelled steam set with additional flue-gas desulphurisation
plant, but it may only be of the order of 1% of unit rating for Unit transformer
a hydro set.
A modern generating unit is a complex system comprising
the generator stator winding, associated transformer and unit Auxiliary
transformer (if present), the rotor with its field winding and supplies switchboard
excitation system, and the prime mover with its associated
auxiliaries. Faults of many kinds can occur within this system
for which diverse forms of electrical and mechanical protection
Figure C8.1:
are required. The amount of protection applied will be Generator-transformer unit

2. Generator earthing C8
The single-phase earthfault of the stator winding is the most

common fault of a generator. In order to reduce the damage
to generators and other electric equipment under single-phase
earthfaults, different generator grounding methods are applied
in the different application scenarios. The main purposes are
to restrain the fault currents, the transient overvoltage and to
improve the sensitivity of the earthfault protection. The Ungrounded
grounding methods widely used are as follows:
Ungrounded: This ungrounded method is common for the
smaller generators especially when the machine's capacity
is less than 10MW. For the ungrounded machine, the single-
phase earthfault current is the sum of the capacitive currents.
When the fault current is less than 5A, it will not damage the
iron. When the machine's capacity increases, the capacitive
currents increase. This is especially true for the hydro-turbine
generator. The higher fault current causes electric arcs and Resonant ground
transient overvoltage. So for larger generators other grounding
methods are applied.
Resonant ground with a ground fault neutraliser: This
grounding method illustrates the ground fault neutraliser
(GFN) arrangement. In this grounding method, a distribution
transformer is used with a secondary reactor. The ohmic value
of this secondary reactor is carefully selected to compensate
for the capacitive reactance. This type of grounding limits the
single phase to ground fault current to values that will not
sustain an electric arc. It is applicable only where the zero
sequence capacitive reactance of the circuit does not change
significantly for different system conditions. In general, the High resistance ground
resonant grounding method suppresses a phase to ground
fault current in less than 1 A primary current. The majority of
existing generators having resonant grounding methods are
not tripped immediately, but an alarm is raised and an orderly
shutdown is started. This grounding method has the risk of
LC resonant overvoltage under some special scenarios. So
care is needed when applying this grounding method on
large HV generators.
High resistance ground with a distribution transformer
(equivalent to high resistance grounding): This grounding
method utilises a distribution transformer that provides high Solidly ground Low resistance ground
resistance in the primary circuit with a small resistance in the
secondary of the distribution transformer. The equivalent
primary resistance shall be no greater than the capacitive
reactance of the subsystem from generator to the LV windings Figure C8.2:
Methods of generator earthing
of the step-up transformer. It limits the maximum single phase
to ground fault current to a value in the range of approximately
3 A to 25 A, which is not of sufficient magnitude to operate
standard generator differential relays. Although this grounding In industrial applications which are mainly feeding local loads
method cannot block the electric arc effectively, it can restrain many generators are connected directly to the system bus
the transient overvoltage and trigger the sensitive earthfault without any interposing step-up transformers. In general,
protection relay. This grounding method is common for these may be relatively small generators and they will be
generators larger than 300MVA. connected to a solid or low impedance grounded system
[Ref C8.1: IEEE Guide for Generator Ground Protection].

C8 3. Generator differential protection
Failure of the stator windings or connection insulation can saturation effect of the generator CTs, but the bias current
result in severe damage to the windings and stator core. The will increase the relay setting, such that the differential spill
extent of the damage will depend on the magnitude and current is insufficient to operate the relay.
duration of the fault current. To respond quickly to a phase
In normal conditions, there is very small differential current
fault, sensitive and high-speed differential protection is
caused by the unbalance current between two CTs. The
normally applied to generators rated in excess of 1MVA.
threshold of the differential current Is1 shall avoid the mal-
If CTs are connected as shown in Figure C8.3, it can be seen operation under this normal unbalance current. The threshold
that current flowing through the zone of protection will cause setting Is1 can be set as low as 5% of rated generator current
current to circulate around the secondary wiring. If the CTs to provide protection for as much of the winding as possible.
are of the same ratio and have identical magnetising The bias slope break-point threshold setting Is2 would typically
characteristics they will produce identical secondary currents be set to a value (such as 120%) above generator rated
and so zero current will flow through the relay. If a fault exists current, to achieve external fault stability in the event of
within the zone of protection there will be a difference between transient asymmetric CT saturation. Bias slope setting K1
the outputs from these two CTs. This difference flowing through would typically be set at 0 to ensure high sensitivity for internal
the relay causes it to operate. faults while K2 would typically be set at 150% to provide
stability for external faults.
Stator
A
B
C
(a): Relay connections for biased differential protection
Figure C8.3:
Stator differential protection
Operate
Heavy through current, arising from an external fault condition
can cause one CT to saturate more than the other, resulting
in a difference between the secondary current produced by
Restrain
each CT. It is essential to stabilise the protection for these
conditions. Two methods are commonly used. One is biasing
technique, where the relay setting is raised as the through
current increases. Another is a high impedance technique,
where the relay impedance is such that under maximum (b) Biased differential operating characteristic
through fault conditions, the current in the differential element
is insufficient for the relay to operate.
3.1 Biased differential protection Figure C8.4:
Typical generator biased differential protection
The relay connections for this form of protection are shown
in Figure C8.4(a) and a typical bias characteristic is shown
in Figure C8.4(b). The differential current is the vector sum 3.2 High impedance differential protection
of the terminal currents I1 and I2. The bias current is half of
The principle of the high-impedance protection application
the scalar sum of the terminal currents. Normally a dual slope
is illustrated in Figure C8.5, together with a summary of the
percentage bias characteristic is implemented. The lower
calculations required to determine the value of external
slope provides sensitivity for internal faults, whereas the higher
stabilising resistance.
slope provides stability under through-fault conditions, during
which there may be transient differential currents due to the

3. Generator differential protection C8
Ie = CT magnetising current at Vs
Healthy CT Saturated CT Is1 is typically set to 5% of generator rated secondary current.
Protected zone
It can be seen from the above that the calculations for the
application of high impedance differential protection are more
complex than for biased differential protection. However, the
protection scheme is actually quite simple and it offers a high
Rst level of stability for through-faults and external switching
events.
With the advent of multi-function numerical relays and with a
Voltage across relay circuit
desire to dispense with external components, high impedance
differential protection is not as popular as biased differential
Vs = KI f (RCT + 2RL) - where K = 1.5
protection in modern relaying practice.
Stabilising resistor, RST, limits spill current to I s (relay setting)
Vs
RST = -R
Is R
I F = Maximum secondary through-fault current

Where RR = Relay burden
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the
current transformer
NLR NLR NLR

Figure C8.5:
Principle of high impedance differential protection
If the relay circuit is considered to be very high impedance,

= Stabilising resistor
the secondary current produced by the healthy CT will flow = Non-linear resistance
through the saturated CT. If the magnetising impedance of (Metrosil)
the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum
voltage across the relay ( V S ) circuit will be equal to the
secondary fault current multiplied by the connected impedance
Figure C8.6:
(RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
Relay connections for high impedance differential protection
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage
by increasing the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such
that the resulting current through the relay is less than its
3.3 CT requirements
current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is
relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The CT requirements for differential protection will vary
The value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula according to the relay used. Modern numerical relays may
shown in Figure C8.5. An additional non-linear resistor, Metrosil, not require CTs specifically designed for differential protection
may be required to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage to IEC 60044-1 class PX (or BS 3938 class X). However,
during internal fault conditions, as shown in Figure C8.6. But requirements in respect of CT knee-point voltage will still have
this is not commonly a requirement for generator differential to be checked for the specific relays used. High impedance
applications unless very high impedance relays are applied. differential protection may be more onerous in this respect
than biased differential protection. Normally to ensure the
To calculate the primary operating current, the following
high impedance differential protection will operate quickly
expression is used:
during an internal fault the CTs used to operate the protection
Iop = N x ( Is1 + nIe ) must have a knee-point voltage of at least 2 x Vs. Many factors
affect this, including the other protection functions fed by the
Where:
CTs and the knee-point requirements of the particular relay
Iop = primary operating current concerned. Relay manufacturers are able to provide detailed
guidance on this matter.
N = CT ratio
Is1 = relay setting
n = number of CTs in parallel with relay element

C8 4. Differential protection of generator-transformers
A common connection arrangement for large generators is Since a power transformer is included within the zone of
to operate the generator and associated step-up transformer protection, biased transformer differential protection, with
as a unit without any intervening circuit breaker. The unit magnetising inrush restraint should be applied, as discussed
transformer supplying the generator auxiliaries is tapped off in Chapter [C7: Transformer and Transformer-Feeder Protection,
the connection between generator and step-up transformer. Section 8.5]. Transient overfluxing of the generator transformer
Differential protection can be arranged as follows. may arise due to overvoltage following generator load rejection.
In some applications, this may threaten the stability of the
4.1 Generator/step-up transformer differential
differential protection. In such cases, consideration should
protection
be given to applying protection with transient overfluxing
The generator stator and step-up transformer can be protected restraint/blocking (e.g. based on a 5th harmonic differential
by a single zone of overall differential protection (Figure C8.7). current threshold). Protection against sustained overfluxing
This will be in addition to differential protection applied to the is covered in Section 14.
generator only.
4.2 Unit transformer differential protection
The current transformers should be located in the generator
The current taken by the unit transformer must be allowed by
neutral connections and in the transformer HV connections.
arranging the generator differential protection as a three-
Alternatively, CTs within the HV switchyard may be employed
ended scheme as shown in Figure C8.1. Unit transformer
if the distance is not technically prohibitive. Even where there
current transformers are usually applied to balance the
is a generator circuit breaker, overall differential protection
generator differential protection and prevent the unit
can still be provided if desired.
transformer through current being seen as differential current.
An exception might be where the unit transformer rating is
extremely low in relation to the generator rating, e.g. for some
Main hydro applications. The location of the third set of current
Generator transformer
transformers is normally on the primary side of the unit
transformer. One advantage is that unit transformer faults
Protected zone
would be within the zone of protection of the generator.
HV However, the sensitivity of the generator protection to unit
busbars
transformer phase faults would be considered inadequate,
due to the relatively low rating of the transformer in relation
to that of the generator. Thus, the unit transformer should have
its own differential protection scheme. Protection for the unit
transformer is covered in Chapter [C7: Transformer and
Transformer-Feeder Protection], including methods for
stabilising the protection against magnetising inrush conditions.
Figure C8.7:
Overall generator-transformer differential protection
5. Inter-turn protection
5.1 Inter-turn protection bars on each slot of the stator core so it is possible that two
stator bars of the same phase or even the same branch are
For the large generator, there are usually several parallel-
on the same slot of stator core. These two stator bars on the
connected branches of the stator winding for each phase. The
same slot are fully insulated under the normal conditions.
parallel-connected branches are good for the heat dissipation
However due to the complicated structure of the stator winding
and reduce the internal electromagnetic force. On large steam
and the stress damage during the operation, it is possible that
generators, the stator winding usually has two parallel-connected
inter-turn faults happen between two stator bars on the same
branches on each phase. The stator winding of a large hydro-
slot as shown in Figure C8.8. Furthermore, if the stator bar has
generator can have 4 branches, 6 branches, or more on each
multi turns, it has small insulation between each turn. A fault
phase.
between turns in a multi turn bar can be catastrophic. Inter-turn
The stator windings are normally formed into double-layer faults can happen between the branches of the same phase
structure except in very small generators. There are two stator or within the coils of the same branch, as shown in Figure C8.9.

5. Inter-turn protection C8
B2 X2
A B C
C2
Z1 26
27 28 29 30
24
25 C 31
32 U1 U5 V1 V5 W1 W5
(32) (33) 33
23 (31) 14 15
22 13 16 (34)
Y 34
Y2 F1 F2
(30) 12 17 (35) 35
21
A2 20
X (29) 11 18 (36) 36 U2 U6 V2 V6 W2 W6
19 (28) 10 1 (19) 1
18 (27) 9 2 (20)
A 2
A1
17 (26) 8 3 (21) 3
Y1 16 B (25) 7
6
4
5 (22)
4 Double Y connection
15 (24) (23) 5
14
13 Z 7
6
12
11 10 9 8 Z2
Figure C8.9
C1 Inter-turn faults indication
X1 B1
Inter-turn fault
Figure C8.8:
a1
Inter-turn fault in double-layer winding
i a1
The severity of the inter-turn fault is related with the turns in
the short circuit. Under the inter-turn fault, there are short i’ d id
circuit rings and additional circulation currents within the
winding, which could burn the winding and even stator core,
as shown in Figure C8.10. However the variations of the
currents on the generator terminal or the generator neutral
are slight, especially when the inter-turn fault is on the same
branch and involves only limited turns. The conventional Figure C8.10:
current differential protection compares the currents incoming Illustration of inter-turn fault on one branch
and outgoing, it cannot detect any inter-turn faults regardless
of the number of turns involved.
schemes, the parallel-connected branches in each phase of
For the large hydro-generator with several parallel-connected
the stator winding are split into two groups, as shown in Figure
branches, normally the line terminals of the parallel-connected
C8.11. If the numbers of the parallel-connected branches
branches are available on the generator neutral, so it can
are not the same in these two groups, a scale conversion is
apply the split-phase transverse current differential protection,
necessary before the calculation of the differential current.
or incomplete longitudinal differential protection or zero
The ratio of the CT should be selected carefully to ensure the
sequence current differential protection. These current based
unbalanced current is at the minimum when under normal
protections, described in later sections, can detect all the
conditions.
stator winding internal faults.
Except for the different CT connections, the implementation
For the large steam machine, normally there are only three
of transverse biased current differential protection is the same
line terminals on the generator neutral. Without enough line
as conventional biased current differential protection (refer
terminals, it is impossible to install the current based
to section 3). It can provide both better sensitivity and better
protections in the same way as for a hydro-generator. However,
stability but it requires one specific relay with two CT inputs,
it can apply the zero sequence overvoltage protection to
which is used only for inter-turn protection. An additional relay
detect the inter-turn faults and also internal phase-phase
is necessary for other protection purposes.
faults. This is described later in this section.
The philosophy of the setting calculation for transverse biased
5.2 Split phase transverse current differential protection
current differential protection is the same as conventional
In split phase transverse current differential protection biased current differential protection. The threshold of the

C8 5. Inter-turn protection
differential current and restraint factor shall avoid maloperation

due to the maximum unbalanced currents on both normal
condition and external fault condition. Normally, the threshold
of the differential current for transverse biased current
differential protection and the restraint factor are all a little
higher than the conventional biased current differential
protection, as the unbalanced current is likely to be greater.
A setting of 10% of rated current of the machine is generally
considered to be adequate. Inter-turn
fault
87G
Inter-turn
fault
87G
Figure C8.12:
Incomplete longitudinal current differential protection
5.4 Transverse zero sequence current differential

protection
Another method that could be used for inter-turn protection
is to use the zero sequence overcurrent protection function
using an additional single CT as shown in Figure C8.13. Ideally,
Figure C8.11:
Transverse biased current differential protection for in the normal condition with balanced burden, there is no
inter-turn fault current flowing between these two neutral points. However
due to the complicated machine structure, there are usually
unbalanced current components between neutral points,
especially the third harmonic current. For better performance
5.3 Incomplete longitudinal current differential of this application, it is essential to filter out the third harmonic
protection current with a high attenuation such as 40db to avoid
Another scheme that could be used on this type of hydro- maloperation due to the large third harmonic content. Choosing
generator is shown in Figure C8.12. This arrangement is an a suitable ratio of the single CT for this application can improve
attempt to get the benefits of the biased differential scheme the sensitivity. With the same current threshold, the smaller
for inter-turn protection with a saving in CTs and relays. ratio can obtain higher measurements of the fault current and
However, this arrangement is not as sensitive as the scheme then be more sensitive to the faults. However it has to ensure
using separate inter-turn relays or differential relays, due to CT saturation will not occur for the maximum fault currents
the relatively higher operation threshold and relatively lower and the maximum unbalance current shall also be less than
fault currents flowing in the CTs. If the inter-turn fault is only the CT primary rated current.
on one branch and the neutral end CT does not collect the To ensure stability under an external fault the current threshold
current from that branch with the fault, the current flowing in for the transverse zero sequence current differential protection
the CT normally is less than the threshold and this protection shall be greater than maximum unbalanced current under an
will not operate. Normally, this scheme requires the neutral external fault condition. This is typically set to 20% of the
end CTs having half the turns ratio of the terminal end CTs generator rated current.
and collecting the currents from half the parallel-connected
branches. The typical threshold of differential current is about An alternative to achieve both sensitivity and stability is to
10%-15% of rated current of the machine. apply an adaptive current threshold. Whilst the maximum
generator terminal current is less than the generator rated

5. Inter-turn protection C8
set of VTs is connected to the generator terminal, with the

start point of the primary winding connected to the generator
neutral as shown in Figure C8.14. The cable between these
two star points must be rated to full line volts to cope with
neutral displacement faults. The zero sequence voltage can
be measured directly from the voltage transformer broken
delta winding or derived from the three phase to neutral
voltages. In addition, one specific filter is necessary to remove
Fault
the 3rd harmonics, to ensure the stability of this protection
scheme. It is preferable that the attenuation of the 3rd
harmonics is greater than 40db.
51N
Direction of NPS current

for internal fault
Figure C8.13:
Transverse zero-sequence current differential protection
current, the current threshold is only greater than the maximum

unbalanced current under normal conditions. The default
sensitivity setting can be 5% of the generator rated current.
When the maximum generator terminal current is larger than VN
the generator rated current, the current threshold shall
increase linearly until the maximum unbalanced current under
external faults is reached. It is not easy to calculate the exact
maximum unbalanced currents under different operating
conditions. Normally it relies on the measurement data from
field tests.
5.5 Longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage protection
For a typical steam generator without enough line terminals Figure C8.14:
on the generator neutral, it can apply the longitudinal zero Longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage protection
sequence overvoltage protection to detect the inter-turn faults
and internal phase to phase faults. On the large steam Under the normal condition, the unbalanced voltage from the
generator, the branches and turns of the stator winding are VT broken delta winding is very small. So a smaller setting is
limited. Even if the inter-turn fault involves only very limited acceptable, which can ensure this protection scheme has a
turns, there will be obvious longitudinal zero sequence voltage. high sensitivity to detect an inter-turn fault with only a few turns
However on the large hydro-generator, normally there are involved. Under external faults, the unbalanced electric and
several branches and many turns, therefore the minor inter- magnetic parameters during the complicated transient states
turn faults will not cause enough zero sequence voltage. So of the generator can cause some zero sequence voltages.
the longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage protection has From the practical engineering measurements [Ref C8.1: IEEE
higher sensitivity on the steam generator. Normally it is not Guide for Generator Ground Protection], there are some zero
applied on hydro-generators. sequence voltages under the external fault, which could be
An inter-turn fault on one phase will reduce its voltage output, larger than the setting for inter-turn protection, as shown in
creating zero sequence voltage components. So the inter-turn Figure C8.15 [Ref C8.2: Problems in Voltage-Type Longitudinal
faults in a generator can be detected by observing the zero Zero-Sequence Inter-Turn Protection for Generators]. So, to
sequence voltage across the machine between the generator prevent this inter-turn protection element from maloperation for
terminal and generator neutral. Normally one set of VTs is the external faults, the element can be interlocked with a
installed specifically for inter-turn protection applications. This directional NPS overcurrent element. Only when the direction

C8 5. Inter-turn protection
of the NPS current is looking away from the machine, the inter-
turn protection can issue a trip signal. The directional NPS 15
overcurrent element shall be based on the CT at the generator
terminal side. A short time delay is usually used to ensure the
U/V
correct block from both directional NPS overcurrent and VTS. 0
The inter-turn protection by zero sequence overvoltage
protection avoids the maloperation due to the maximum
unbalanced voltage under normal conditions. Normally the -15
maximum unbalanced voltage can be measured during the 40 80 120
generator field test before normal operation. The default t/ms
setting is 2% of the generator rated voltage. A typical time
setting would be 0.1 s - 0.2 s. A long time delay increases
Figure C8.15: Zero sequence voltage across the generator
the risk of damage to the stator core. under external transformer HV earthfault
5.6 Summary
This section introduces four inter-turn protection solutions. Normally for the large hydro-generator inter-turn protection,
The split phase transverse current differential protection has two protection solutions are needed. Often, one solution is
high sensitivity and stability but more CTs and addition split phase transverse current differential protection and
protection relay are necessary. Transverse zero sequence another is transverse zero sequence current differential
current differential protection also has good sensitivity and protection. Longitudinal zero sequence overvoltage protection
application scheme is more simple. Incomplete longitudinal is normally for the inter-turn faults on a large steam generator.
current differential protection has a wider protection range It has high sensitivity but a short time delay is necessary for
including the generator terminal lines, but it may not detect good stability with direction NPS overcurrent blocking and
the inter-turn faults only on one branch and the current flowing VTS blocking.
in the faulted branch is not collected in this solution.
6. Overcurrent protection
Overcurrent protection of generators may take two forms. Plain energise the overcurrent protection, to allow a response to winding
overcurrent protection may be used as the principle form of fault conditions. Relay characteristics should be selected to take
protection for small generators, and back-up protection for larger into account the fault current decrement behaviour of the generator,
ones where differential protection is used as the primary method with allowance for the performance of the excitation system and
of generator stator winding protection. Voltage dependent its field-forcing capability. Without the provision of fault current
overcurrent protection may be applied where differential protection compounding from generator CTs, an excitation system that is
is not justified on larger generators, or where problems are met in powered from an excitation transformer at the generator terminals
applying plain overcurrent protection. will exhibit a pronounced fault current decrement for a terminal
fault. With failure to consider this effect, the potential exists for the
6.1 Plain overcurrent protection
initial high fault current to decay to a value below the overcurrent
It is usual to apply time-delayed plain overcurrent protection to protection pick-up setting before a relay element can operate,
generators. For generators rated less than 1 MVA, this will form unless a low current setting and/or time setting is applied. The
the principal stator winding protection for phase faults. For larger protection would then fail to trip the generator. The settings chosen
generators, overcurrent protection can be applied as remote must be the best compromise between assured operation in the
back-up protection, to disconnect the unit from any uncleared foregoing circumstances and discrimination with the system
external fault. Where there is only one set of differential main protection and passage of normal load current, but this can be
protection, for a smaller generator, the overcurrent protection will impossible with plain overcurrent protection.
also provide local back-up protection for the protected plant, in
In the more usual case of a generator that operates in parallel with
the event that the main protection fails to operate. The general
others and which forms part of an extensive interconnected system,
principles of setting overcurrent relays are given in Chapter [C1:
back-up phase fault protection for a generator and its transformer
Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earthfaults].
will be provided by HV overcurrent protection. This will respond
In the case of a single generator feeding an isolated system, to the higher-level backfeed from the power system to a unit fault.
current transformers at the neutral end of the machine should Other generators in parallel would supply this current and, being

6. Overcurrent protection C8
stabilised by the system impedance; it will not suffer a major

decrement. This protection is usually a requirement of the power
Current pick-up level
system operator. Settings must be chosen to prevent operation for
external faults fed by the generator. It is common for the HV
overcurrent protection relay to provide both time-delayed and
instantaneous high-set elements.
The time-delayed elements should be set to ensure that the
protected items of plant cannot pass levels of through fault current
in excess of their short-time withstand limits.
The instantaneous elements should be set above the maximum
possible fault current that the generator can supply, but less than
the system-supplied fault current in the event of a generator winding
fault. This back-up protection will minimise plant damage in the
event of main protection failure for a generating plant fault and
Voltage level
instantaneous tripping for an HV-side fault will aid the recovery of
the power system and parallel generation.
6.2 Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection
Figure C8.16:
The plain overcurrent protection setting difficulty referred to in the Voltage controlled relay characteristics
previous section arises because allowance has to be made both
for the decrement of the generator fault current with time and for
the passage of full load current. To overcome the difficulty of 6.2.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection
discrimination, the generator terminal voltage can be measured
The alternative technique is to continuously vary the relay element
and used to dynamically modify the basic relay current/time
pickup setting with generator voltage variation between upper and
overcurrent characteristic for faults close to the generating plant.
lower limits. The voltage is said to restrain the operation of the
There are two basic alternatives for the application of voltage-
current element.
dependent overcurrent protection, which are discussed in the
following sections. The choice depends upon the power system The effect is to provide a dynamic I.D.M.T. protection characteristic,
characteristics and level of protection to be provided. Voltage- according to the voltage at the machine terminals. Alternatively,
dependent overcurrent relays are often found applied to generators the relay element may be regarded as an impedance type with a
used on industrial systems as an alternative to full differential long dependent time delay. In consequence, for a given fault
protection. condition, the relay continues to operate more or less independently
of current decrement in the machine. A typical characteristic is
6.2.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection has two time/current
characteristics which are selected according to the status of a
generator terminal voltage measuring element. The voltage
threshold setting for the switching element is chosen according
to the following criteria. Current pick-up level
1. during overloads, when the system voltage is sustained

near normal, the overcurrent protection should have a
current setting above full load current and an operating
time characteristic that will prevent the generating plant
from passing current to a remote external fault for a period
in excess of the plant short-time withstand limits
2. under close-up fault conditions, the busbar voltage must
fall below the voltage threshold so that the second protection
characteristic will be selected. This characteristic should
be set to allow relay operation with fault current decrement
for a close-up fault at the generator terminals or at the HV Voltage level
busbars. The protection should also time-grade with
external circuit protection. There may be additional infeeds
to an external circuit fault that will assist with grading.
Figure C8.17:
Typical characteristics are shown in Figure C8.16. Voltage restrained relay characteristics

C8 7. Stator earthfault protection
The most probable mode of insulation failure is phase to earth. characteristic or a wattmetric technique (Chapter [C1:
An earthfault involving the stator core results in damage to Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earthfaults, Section 19])
the iron at the point of fault and welds laminations together. can also be used.
The damaged area can sometimes be repaired, but if severe
For direct-connected generators operating in parallel,
damage has occurred, a partial core rebuild will be necessary.
directional sensitive earthfault protection may be necessary.
Earthfault protection must be applied where impedance
This is to ensure that a faulted generator will be tripped before
earthing is employed that limits the earthfault current to less
there is any possibility of the neutral overcurrent protection
than the pick-up threshold of the overcurrent and/or differential
tripping a parallel healthy generator. When being driven by
protection for a fault located down to the bottom 5% of the
residually-connected phase CTs, the protection must be
stator winding from the star-point. The type of protection
stabilised against incorrect tripping with transient spill current
required will depend on the method of earthing and connection
in the event of asymmetric CT saturation when phase fault or
of the generator to the power system.
magnetising inrush current is being passed. Stabilising
7.1 Direct-connected generators techniques include the addition of relay circuit impedance
and/or the application of a time delay. Where the required
A single direct-connected generator operating on an isolated
setting of the protection is very low in comparison to the rated
system will normally be directly earthed. However, if several
current of the phase CTs, it would be necessary to employ a
direct-connected generators are operated in parallel, only
single Core Balance CT for the earthfault protection to ensure
one generator is normally earthed at a time. For the unearthed
transient stability.
generators, a simple measurement of the neutral current is
not possible, and other methods of protection must be used. Since any generator in the paralleled group may be earthed,
The following sections describe the methods available. all generators will require to be fitted with both neutral
overcurrent protection and sensitive directional earthfault
7.1.1 Neutral overcurrent protection
protection.
With this form of protection, a current transformer in the
The setting of the sensitive directional earthfault protection
neutral- earth connection energises an overcurrent relay
is chosen to co-ordinate with generator differential protection
element. This provides unrestricted earth-fault protection and
and/or neutral voltage displacement protection to ensure that
so it must be graded with feeder protection. The relay element
95% of the stator winding is protected. Figure C8.18 illustrates
will therefore have a time-delayed operating characteristic.
the complete scheme, including optional blocking signals
Grading must be carried out in accordance with the principles
where difficulties in co-ordinating the generator and
detailed in Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase
downstream feeder earthfault protection occur.
and Earthfaults]. The setting should not be more than 33%
of the maximum earthfault current of the generator, and a
lower setting would be preferable, depending on grading
considerations. Feeder
* Optional interlocked
earthfault protection
7.1.2 Sensitive earthfault protection > >> if grading problems exist
This method is used in the following situations:

a. direct-connected generators operating in parallel
b. generators with high-impedance neutral earthing, the earth
fault current being limited to a few tens of amps
> > >
c. installations where the resistance of the ground fault path Block* Block*
is very high, due to the nature of the ground In these cases, > >
conventional earthfault protection as described in Section
7.1.1 is of little use.
Open
The principles of sensitive earthfault protection are described
in Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and
Earthfaults, Section 17.1, 18 and 19]. The earthfault (residual)
current can be obtained from residual connection of line CTs,
a line-connected Core Balance CT, or a CT in the generator Minimum earthfault level = =
neutral. The latter is not possible if directional protection is
used. The polarising voltage is usually the neutral voltage
displacement input to the relay, or the residual of the three Figure C8.18:
phase voltages, so a suitable VT must be used. For Petersen Comprehensive earthfault protection scheme for
Coil earthing, directional sensitive earthfault based on Icos direct-connected generators operating in parallel

7. Stator earthfault protection C8
For cases (b) and (c) above, it is not necessary to use a

directional facility. Care must be taken to use the correct RCA
setting – for instance if the earthing impedance is mainly
resistive, this should be 0°. On insulated or very high
impedance earthed systems, an RCA of -90° would be used,
as the earthfault current is predominately capacitive.
2
Directional sensitive earthfault protection can also be used
for detecting winding earthfaults in an unearthed generator.
In the application case where several generators operate in 3 1
parallel and there is only one earthed generator, the relay
element is applied to the terminals of the generator and the
directional sensitive earthfault protection responds to faults
only within the unearthed machine windings. While there are
earthfaults on the external system, the zero sequence current 1 Derived from phase neutral voltages
cannot flow through the relay and hence the relay does not 2 Measured from earth impedance
operate. It will also not operate on the winding earthfault of 3 Measured from broken delta VT
the only earthed generator without the circulation path for the
zero sequence current, so that other types of earthfault
protection must also be applied. As any of the generators Figure C8.19:
could operate as the earthed machine each will require the Neutral voltage displacement protection
same protection.
7.1.3 Neutral voltage displacement protection
7.2.1 High resistance earthing – neutral overcurrent
In a balanced network, the addition of the three phase-neutral protection
voltages produces a nominally zero residual voltage, since
there would be little zero sequence voltage present. Any A current transformer mounted on the neutral-earth conductor
earthfault will set up a zero sequence system voltage, which can drive an instantaneous and/or time delayed overcurrent
will give rise to a non-zero residual voltage. This can be relay element, as shown in Figure C8.20. It is impossible to
measured by a suitable relay element. The voltage signal provide protection for the whole of the winding, and Figure
must be derived from a VT that is suitable – i.e. it must be C8.20 also details how the percentage of winding covered
capable of transforming zero-sequence voltage, so 3-limb can be calculated. For a relay element with an instantaneous
types and those without a primary earth connection are not setting, protection is typically limited to 90% of the winding.
suitable. This unbalance voltage provides a means of detecting This is to ensure that the protection will not maloperate with
earthfaults. The relay element must be insensitive to third zero sequence current during operation of a primary fuse for
harmonic voltages that may be present in the system voltage a VT earthfault or with any transient surge currents that could
waveforms, as these will sum residually. flow through the interwinding capacitance of the step-up
transformer for an HV system earthfault.
As the protection is still unrestricted, the voltage setting of
the relay must be greater than the effective setting of any A time-delayed relay is more secure in this respect, and it
downstream earthfault protection. It must also be time-delayed may have a setting to cover 95% of the stator winding. Since
to co-ordinate with such protection. Sometimes, a second the generating units under consideration are usually large,
high-set element with short time delay is used to provide instantaneous and time delayed relay elements are often
fast-acting protection against major winding earthfaults. Figure applied, with settings of 10% and 5% of maximum earthfault
C8.19 illustrates the possible connections that may be used. current respectively; this is the optimum compromise in
performance. The portion of the winding left unprotected for
7.2 Indirectly-connected generators an earthfault is at the neutral end. Since the voltage to earth
A directly-earthed generator-transformer unit cannot at this end of the winding is low, the probability of an earthfault
interchange zero-sequence current with the remainder of the occurring is also low. Hence additional protection is often not
network, and hence an earthfault protection grading problem applied.
does not exist. The following sections detail the protection 7.2.2 Distribution transformer earthing using a current
methods for the various forms of impedance earthing of element
generators.
In this arrangement, shown in Figure C8.21(a), the generator
is earthed via the primary winding of a distribution transformer.
The secondary winding is fitted with a loading resistor to limit
the earthfault current.

C8 7. Stator earthfault protection
and the voltage protection still functions in the event of an

open-circuited resistor. However, neither scheme will operate
in the event of a flashover on the primary terminals of the
transformer or of the neutral cable between the generator
and the transformer during an earthfault. A CT could be added
in the neutral connection close to the generator, to energise
a high-set overcurrent element to detect such a fault, but the
a fault current would probably be high enough to operate the
phase differential protection.
Loading
resistor
Generator stator winding using a current element
Figure C8.20:
Earthfault protection of high-resistance earthed generator
stator winding using a current element
(a) Protection using a current element
An overcurrent relay element energised from a current

transformer connected in the resistor circuit is used to measure
secondary earthfault current. The relay should have an
effective setting equivalent to 5% of the maximum earthfault
current at rated generator voltage, in order to protect 95% of Loading >
resistor
the stator winding. The relay element response to third
harmonic current should be limited to prevent incorrect
operation when a sensitive setting is applied. (b) Protection using a voltage element
As discussed in Section 7.2.1 for neutral overcurrent protection,

the protection should be time delayed when a sensitive setting
is applied, in order to prevent maloperation under transient
conditions. It also must grade with generator VT primary Figure C8.21:
Generator winding earthfault protection - distribution
protection (for a VT primary earthfault). An operation time in
transformer earthing
the range 0.5 s - 3 s is usual. Less sensitive instantaneous
protection can also be applied to provide fast tripping for a
heavier earthfault condition.
7.2.4 Neutral voltage displacement protection
7.2.3 Distribution transformer earthing using a
voltage element This can be applied in the same manner as for direct-
connected generators (Section 7.1.3). The only difference is
Earthfault protection can also be provided using a voltage- that there are no grading problems as the protection is
measuring element in the secondary circuit instead. The inherently restricted.
setting considerations would be similar to those for the current
operated protection, but transposed to voltage. The circuit A sensitive setting can therefore be used, enabling cover of
diagram is shown in Figure C8.21(b). up to 95% of the stator winding to be achieved.
Application of both voltage and current operated elements 7.3 Restricted earthfault protection
to a generator with distribution transformer earthing provides This technique can be used on small generators not fitted
some advantages. The current operated function will continue with differential protection to provide fast acting earthfault
to operate in the event of a short-circuited loading resistor protection within a defined zone that encompasses the

7. Stator earthfault protection C8
generator. It is cheaper than full differential protection but The initial bias slope is commonly set to 0% to provide
only provides protection against earthfaults. The principle is maximum sensitivity, and applied up to the rated current of
that used for transformer REF protection, as detailed in Chapter the generator. It may be increased to counter the effects of
[C7: Transformer and Transformer-Feeder Protection, Section CT mismatch. The bias slope above generator rated current
7]. However, in contrast to transformer REF protection, both is typically set to 150% of rated value. The initial current setting
biased low-impedance and high-impedance techniques can is typically 5% of the minimum earthfault current for a fault at
be used. the machine terminals.
7.3.1 Low-impedance biased REF protection 7.3.2 High impedance REF protection
This is shown in Figure C8.22. The main advantage is that the The principle of high impedance differential protection is
neutral CT can also be used in a modern relay to provide given in Chapter [C2: Line Differential Protection] and also
conventional earthfault protection and no external resistors described further in Section 3.2. The same technique can be
are used. Relay bias is required, as described in Chapter used for earthfault protection of a generator, using three
[C2: Line Differential Protection, Section 4.2], but the formula residually connected phase CTs balanced against a similar
for calculating the bias is slightly different and also shown in single CT in the neutral connection, as shown in Figure C8.23.
Figure C8.22. Settings of the order of 5% of maximum earthfault current at
the generator terminals are typical. The usual requirements
in respect of stabilising resistor and non-linear resistance to
guard against excessive voltage across the relay must be
Phase CT ratio 1000/1
Phase A taken, where necessary.
Phase B
Phase C
Neutral CT ratio
200/1
RST = Stabilising resistor

NLR = Non-linear resistance
(Metrosil)
NLR
RST
Relay
(highest of )+( x scaling factor)
2 ISEF
neutral CT ratio 200

where scaling factor = = = 0.2
phase CT ratio 1000
+ (scaling factor x )
Figure C8.23:
High impedance REF protection
Figure C8.22:
Low impedance biased REF protection of a generator

C8 8. Earthfault protection for entire stator winding
All of the methods for earthfault protection detailed in Section A problem encountered is that the level of third harmonic
7 leave part of the winding unprotected. In most cases, this voltage generated is related to the output of the generator.
is of no consequence as the probability of a fault occurring The voltage is low when generator output is low. In order to
in the 5% of the winding nearest the neutral connection is avoid maloperation when operating at low power output, the
very low, due to the reduced phase to earth voltage. However, third harmonic neutral undervoltage element can be inhibited
a fault can occur anywhere along the stator windings in the by a power element (kW, kVar or kVA). It can also be inhibited
event of insulation failure due to localised heating from a core when all the phase-phase voltages at the generator terminal
fault. In cases where protection for the entire winding is are below the threshold.
required, perhaps for alarm only, there are various methods
For effective application of this form of protection, there should
available.
be at least 1% Vn third harmonic voltage across the generator
8.1 Protection based on third harmonic voltage neutral earthing impedance under all normal operating
conditions. The third harmonic undervoltage threshold must
Most generators will produce third harmonic voltages to some
be set below the level of third harmonic voltage present under
degree due to non-linearity in the magnetic circuits of the
normal conditions. A typical value for this threshold could be
generator design. Under normal operating conditions the
0.5% Vn. The third harmonic overvoltage threshold must be
distribution of the third harmonic voltage along the stator
set above the level of third harmonic voltage present under
windings corresponds to Figure C8.24(a). The maxima occur
normal conditions. A typical value for this threshold could be
at the star point N and the terminal T. The values increase
1% Vn. A time delay for these elements can be set to ensure
with generator load, as shown in Figure C8.24(a). U’TE is the
the stability.
third harmonic voltage when the generator is off load and
U’’TE is the third harmonic voltage when the generator is fully As the fault location moves progressively away from the neutral
loaded. When a fault occurs in the part of the stator winding end, the drop in third harmonic voltage becomes less, so that
nearest the neutral end, the third harmonic voltage at the star at around 20-30% of the winding distance, it no longer
point N drops to near zero but the third harmonic voltage at becomes possible to discriminate between a healthy and a
the terminal T increases significantly, as shown in Figure faulty winding. Hence, a conventional earthfault scheme should
C8.24(b). Hence a relay element that responds to third be used in conjunction with a third harmonic scheme, to
harmonic voltage can be used to detect the fault near the provide overlapping cover of the entire stator winding. The
neutral end. If the third harmonic voltage is measured at the 3rd harmonic technique has to be blocked or is not operational
generator star point, an undervoltage characteristic is used. when the machine is stopped and when the machine is running
An overvoltage characteristic is used if the measurement is up and down. Also, some machines only produce a low level
taken from the generator line VT. The measurement of third of 3rd harmonic voltage (<1% Vn) and for these machines
harmonic voltage can be taken either from a star-point VT or the 3rd harmonic method of 100% stator earthfault protection
the generator line VT. In the latter case, the VT must be capable cannot be used.
of carrying residual flux, and this prevents the use of 3-limb
One alternative is to compare the third harmonic voltage at
types.
the neutral end UNE with the third harmonic voltage at the
terminal UTE. The operation setting is the ratio between these
two third harmonic voltages (UNE/UTE). When there is earthfault
U”TE near the neutral end, the third harmonic voltage at the neutral
G U’TE end decreases while the third harmonic voltage at the terminal
N 0 increases. So the ratio will be less than the setting. For this
N T T
solution there is no need to inhibit the operation when the
50% 100%
power output is low. The setting shall be greater than the
U’NE m
maximum ratio UNE/UTE under normal conditions.
U”NE
8.2 Protection based on low frequency injection
a) normal operation
G U” TE Another method for protecting the entire stator winding of a
U’TE generator is to deploy signal injection equipment to inject a
N T low frequency voltage into the star point or the terminals of
N0 T
the machine as shown in Figure C8.25. Typical injection
50% 100%
frequencies are 12.5 Hz or 20 Hz with 20 Hz being the most
m
b) stator earth fault at the star point popular. Under normal healthy conditions only a very small
m = relative number of turns
current flows via the stator earth capacitance due to the high
impedance of this path at low frequencies (Xc=1/2πfc, where
f is the low frequency injected signal and c is earth
Figure C8.24 Distribution of the 3rd harmonic component capacitance). In the event of an earthfault the measured
along the stator winding of a large generator

8. Earthfault protection for entire stator winding C8
current increases due to the smaller impedance of the The voltage to be injected into the generator neutral depends
earthfault path. From the injected voltage and the fault current on the driving low frequency voltage (voltage divider, load
the relay can determine the fault resistance. The protection resistor and bandpass filter) and on the transformation ratio
can also detect earthfaults at the generator terminals including of the neutral or earthing transformer. To prevent the secondary
connected components such as voltage transformers. This load resistance from becoming too small and ensure better
form of protection can provide earthfault protection when the measurement accuracy, a high secondary voltage, such as
generator is at standstill, prior to run-up. It is also an appropriate 500 V, should be chosen for the neutral or earthing transformer.
method to apply to variable speed synchronous machines. The low frequency voltage is fed to the relay via a voltage
Such machines may be employed for variable speed motoring divider which is applied when the secondary rated voltage
in pumped-storage generation schemes or for starting a large of the distribution transformer is higher than relay maximum
gas turbine prime mover. voltage input. The low frequency measuring current is fed via
a miniature current transformer. All interference deviating from
the nominal low frequency signal is filtered out. The fault
resistance can be derived by the low frequency voltage and
current fed to the relay.
Normally two stages of under-resistance element with definite
time delay are applied. The higher setting stage is to issue
Residually
connected the alarm signal. Typically the value for the primary fault
3-phase 20 Hz frequency generator resistance alarm setting is 3-8 k Ohms with typically 1-5 s
transformer
delay. The lower setting stage is to issue the trip signal.
Typically the value for the primary fault resistance trip setting
is 1-2 k Ohms with typically 0.3-1 s delay.
Band pass
filter
Distribution
transformer
Miniature RL V 64 S
CT
I 64 S
Figure C8.25: Circuit diagram of the 100% stator earthfault

protection with earthing (broken delta) transformer or neutral
transformer

C8 9. Overvoltage protection
Overvoltages on a generator may occur due to transient generator supplies little or no load. The terminal voltage will
surges on the network, or prolonged power frequency increase substantially, and in severe cases it would be limited
overvoltages may arise from a variety of conditions. Surge only by the saturation characteristic of the generator. A rise
arrestors may be required to protect against transient in speed simply compounds the problem. If load that is
overvoltages, but relay protection may be used to protect sensitive to overvoltages remains connected, the consequences
against power frequency overvoltages. in terms of equipment damage and lost revenue can be
severe. Prolonged overvoltages may also occur on isolated
A sustained overvoltage condition should not occur for a
networks, or ones with weak interconnections, due to the fault
machine with a healthy voltage regulator, but it may be caused
conditions listed earlier.
by the following contingencies:
For these reasons, it is prudent to provide power frequency
a. defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator
overvoltage protection, in the form of a time-delayed element,
when the machine is in isolated operation
either IDMT or definite time. The overvoltage threshold should
b. operation under manual control with the voltage regulator typically be set to 100% - 120% of the nominal phase-phase
out of service. A sudden variation of the load, in particular voltage seen by the relay. The time delay should be long
the reactive power component, will give rise to a substantial enough to prevent operation during normal regulator action,
change in voltage because of the large voltage regulation and therefore should take account of the type of AVR fitted
inherent in a typical alternator and its transient response. The typical delay to be applied
would be 1 s - 3 s, with a longer delay being applied for lower
c. sudden loss of load (due to tripping of outgoing feeders,
voltage threshold settings.
leaving the set isolated or feeding a very small load) may
cause a sudden rise in terminal voltage due to the trapped Sometimes a high-set element is provided as well, with a very
field flux and/ or overspeed short definite-time delay or instantaneous setting to provide
a rapid trip in extreme circumstances. The typical threshold
Sudden loss of load should only cause a transient overvoltage
setting to be applied would be 130 - 150% of the nominal
while the voltage regulator and governor act to correct the
phase-phase voltage, depending on generator manufacturers’
situation. A maladjusted voltage regulator may trip to manual,
advice.
maintaining excitation at the value prior to load loss while the
10. Undervoltage protection
Undervoltage protection is rarely fitted to generators. It is overloading or failure of the AVR. In some cases, the
sometimes used as an interlock element for another protection performance of generator auxiliary plant fed via a unit
function or scheme, such as field failure protection or transformer from the generator terminals could be adversely
inadvertent energisation protection, where the abnormality affected by prolonged undervoltage.
to be detected leads directly or indirectly to an undervoltage
Where undervoltage protection is required, it should comprise
condition.
an undervoltage element and an associated time delay. Settings
A transmission system undervoltage condition may arise when must be chosen to avoid maloperation during the inevitable
there is insufficient reactive power generation to maintain the voltage dips during power system fault clearance or associated
system voltage profile and the condition must be addressed with motor starting. Transient reductions in voltage down to
to avoid the possible phenomenon of system voltage collapse. 80% or less may be encountered during motor starting. The
time delay should be set to coordinate with downstream
However, it should be addressed by the deployment of ’system
protection and the System Back-up protection of the relay. The
protection’ schemes. The generation should not be tripped.
time delay would typically be in excess of 3 s - 5 s.
The greatest case for undervoltage protection being required
would be for a generator supplying an isolated power system,
where undervoltage may occur for several reasons, typically

11. Low forward power / reverse power protection C8
Low forward power or reverse power protection may be The power threshold setting of the reverse power protection
required for some generators to protect the prime mover. Parts shall be set according to Table C8.1 and depends on the
of the prime mover may not be designed to experience reverse application. A definite time delay on operation is necessary
torque or they may become damaged through continued to prevent spurious operation with transient power swings
rotation after the prime mover has suffered some form of that may arise following synchronization or in the event of a
failure. power transmission system disturbance.
11.1 Low forward power protection Reverse power protection may also be used to interlock the
opening of the generator set circuit breaker for ‘non-urgent’
Low forward power protection is often used as an interlocking
tripping, as discussed in the above section.
function to enable opening of the main circuit breaker for
non-urgent trips – e.g. for a stator earthfault on a high- As shown in Table C8.1, the motoring power of the generator
impedance earthed generator, or when a normal shutdown set would be as small as 0.2% rated power. For applications
of a set is taking place. This is to minimise the risk of plant where a protection sensitivity of better than 3% is required,
overspeeding when the electrical load is removed from a a metering class CT should be employed to avoid incorrect
high-speed cylindrical rotor generator. The rotor of this type protection behaviour due to CT phase angle errors when the
of generator is highly stressed mechanically and cannot generator supplies a significant level of reactive power at
tolerate much overspeed. While the governor should control close to zero power factor. Besides, the angle compensation
overspeed conditions, it is not good practice to open the main setting can compensate for the angle error introduced by the
circuit breaker simultaneously with tripping of the prime mover system CT and VT.
for non-urgent trips. For a steam turbine, for example, there
is a risk of overspeeding due to energy storage in the trapped
steam, after steam valve tripping, or in the event that the steam Motoring power
Prime mover Possible damage
valve(s) do not fully close for some reason. For urgent trip (% of rated)
conditions, such as stator differential protection operation, Fire/explosion due to
the risk involved in simultaneous prime mover and 0.5 - 6 unburnt fuel
Diesel engine 5% - 25%
generator breaker tripping must be accepted. Mechanical damage
to gearbox/shafts
When required for interlocking of non-urgent tripping applications,
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore
the threshold setting of the low forward power protection function
stiffness. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and
should be less than 50% of the power level that could result in risk of damage.
a dangerous overspeed transient on loss of electrical loading. 10-15
Some delay is desirable to avoid maloperation in the event of (split shaft)
power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/throttle Gas turbine gearbox damage
> 50%
closure. A typical time delay is 2 s. (single shaft)
Another typical application of low forward power protection Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high
motoring power compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid
would be for pump storage generators operating in the
disconnection is required to limit power loss or damage.
motoring mode, where there is a need to prevent the machine
0.2%-2% (blades
becoming unprimed (loss of load protection) which can cause out of water) blade and runner
blade and runner cavitations. It is typically set to 80 - 90% of Hydro
> 2% cavitation
the minimum load. For loss of load applications the pickup (blades in water)
time delay is necessary to avoid the maloperation during
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic
machine starting or interlock logic is applied to inhibit low flow detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss
forward power protection for a required time. of drive. Automatic disconnection is recommended for unattended
operation.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward
0.5% - 3% Thermal stress
power protection element can be disabled when the circuit (Condensing sets) damage on
breaker is open. Steam turbine
3% - 6% (Non- low-pressure turbine
condensing sets) blades
11.2 Reverse power protection (motoring protection)
Damage may occur rapidly with non-condensing sets or when
Reverse power protection is applied to prevent damage to vacuum is lost with condensing sets. Reverse power protection
mechanical plant items in the event of failure of the prime may be used as a secondary method of detection and might only
mover. Table C8.1 gives details of the potential problems for be used to raise an alarm.
various prime mover types and the typical settings for reverse
power protection. Table C8.1:
Generator reverse power problems

C8 12. Unbalanced loading
A three-phase balanced load produces a reaction field that, Maximum I2/In for Maximum (I2/In )2t
to a first approximation, is constant and rotates synchronously Generator type continuous for operation
with the rotor field system. Any unbalanced condition can be operation under faults, Kg
resolved into positive, negative and zero sequence Salient-pole:
components. The positive sequence component is similar to Indirectly cooled 0.08 20
the normal balanced load. The zero sequence component Directly cooled (inner
produces no main armature reaction. cooled stator and/or 0.05 15
field
12.1 Effect of negative sequence current
Cylindrical rotor synchronous:
The negative sequence component is similar to the positive Indirectly cooled rotor
sequence system, except that the resulting reaction field
Air cooled rotor 0.1 15
rotates in the opposite direction to the d.c. field system. Hence,
Directly cooled (inner cooled) rotor
a flux is produced which cuts the rotor at twice the rotational
velocity, thereby inducing double frequency currents in the 350 MVA 0.08 8
350>
900 MVA * **
field system and in the rotor body. The resulting eddy-currents 900>
1250 MVA * 5
are very large and cause severe heating of the rotor. 1250
1600 MVA 0.05 5
So severe is this effect that a single-phase load equal to the ** For these generators, the value of I2/In is calculated as follows:
normal three-phase rated current can quickly heat the rotor
I2 Sn - 350
slot wedges to the softening point. They may then be extruded = 0.8 -
under centrifugal force until they stand above the rotor surface, In 3 x 10
4
when it is possible that they may strike the stator core.

Synchronous machines will be able to withstand a certain ** For these generators, the value of (I2/In )2t is calculated as follows:
level of negative phase sequence stator current continuously.
All synchronous machines will be assigned a continuous 2
I2
maximum negative phase sequence current (I2MCR per-unit) t = 8 - 0.00545 (Sn - 350)
In
rating by the manufacturer. For various categories of generator,
minimum negative phase sequence current withstand levels
have been specified by international standards, such as IEC where Sn is the rated power in MVA
60034-1, as shown in Table C8.2.
Table C8.2:
Short time heating is of interest during system fault conditions
IEC 60034-1 Minimum negative sequence current withstand
and it is usual in determining the generator negative sequence levels
withstand capability to assume that the heat dissipation during
such periods is negligible. Using this approximation it is
possible to express the heating by the law: Where:
2
I2 2t= K τ = K g / I 2MCR , the thermal time constant
Where: Kg is the generator’s per-unit thermal capacity constant in
I2 = negative sequence component (per unit of MCR) seconds.
t = time (seconds) I2MCR is the generator’s per-unit maximum continuous I2 rating.
K = constant proportional to the thermal capacity of the The limiting maximum continuous temperature (ӨMCR) would
2
generator rotor be in the form Ө MCR = I 2MCR , as follow:
t
For heating over a period of more than a few seconds, it is 2
Ө MCR = I 2MCR (1-e ,t=∞
τ)
necessary to allow for the heat dissipation, otherwise the
generator maybe cut off incorrectly while the rotor temperature
12.2 Negative phase sequence protection
still remains within the machine's design thermal limits. As
shown in Figure C8.26, the true thermal model is above the This protection is applied to prevent overheating due to
I22t model when the negative sequence current is lower. negative sequence currents. Small salient-pole generators
have a proportionately larger negative sequence capacity
To consider the heat dissipation, the temperature depends
and may not require protection. A true thermal replica
on both the negative sequence component and the thermal
approach which considers the heat dissipation is often applied
time constant, as follows:
in numerical relays.
Ө∧ 2 t
= I 2 (1-e τ)

12. Unbalanced loading C8
Where:
10000 I2MCR = Generator per unit maximum continuous I2 rating
Kg = Generator thermal capacity constant(s)
1000
Iflc = Generator primary full-load current (A)
Ip = CT primary current rating (A)
The negative sequence protection element will respond to
100 system phase to earth and phase to phase faults. Therefore,
Indirectly cooled (air)
Indirectly cooled (H2)
the element must be set to grade with downstream earth and
350MW direct cooled phase fault protections. To aid grading with downstream
Time (sec)
10 660MW direct cooled devices a definite minimum operating time for the operating
1000MW direct cooled characteristic can be set, as the I2> tMIN setting shown in
Figure C8.27. This definite minimum time setting should be
1 Using I 22 t model set to provide an adequate margin between the operation of
Using true thermal the negative phase sequence thermal protection function and
model
external protection.
0.1 For levels of negative phase sequence current that are only
slightly in excess of the thermal element pick-up setting, there
will be a noticeable deviation between negative phase
sequence thermal protection current-time characteristic and
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 that of the simple I 22 t characteristic. For this reason, a
maximum negative phase sequence protection trip time setting
Negative sequence current (p.u.)
is provided, as the I2> tMAX setting shown in Figure C8.27.
This maximum time setting also limits the tripping time of the
negative phase sequence protection for levels of unbalance
Figure C8.26: where there maybe uncertainty about the machine’s thermal
Typical negative phase sequence current withstand of
withstand.
cylindrical rotor generators
From the above section 12.1, the time for which a level of
t
negative phase sequence current in excess of I2MCR can be
maintained is expressed as follows: I 2>
2 2 t MAX
K  I 2MCR 
t =- ×1n [1-   ]
2
I 2MCR  I2  ...Equation C8.1
The typical negative phase sequence thermal protection

element characteristic takes the form of
2 2
K  I 2set 
t =- ×1n [1-   ]
2
I 2set  I2 
Where K is the thermal capacity setting, I2set is thermal current I 2>
setting per unit. t MIN
To obtain correct thermal protection K and I2set > should be I 2> Current set I2
set as follows:
Set K as I flc 2
( ) ×K g
Ip Figure C8.27:
Negative phase sequence thermal characteristic
I
Set I2set > as I 2MCR ×( flc )
Ip

C8 13. Protection against inadvertent energisation
Accidental energisation of a generator when it is not running undervoltage element when the generator is operating
may cause severe damage to it. With the generator at standstill, normally. The voltage setting should be low enough to ensure
closing the circuit breaker results in the generator acting as that operation cannot occur for transient faults. A setting of
an induction motor; the field winding (if closed) and the rotor about 50% of rated voltage is typical. VT failure can cause
solid iron/damper circuits acting as rotor circuits. Very high maloperation of the protection, so the element should be
currents are induced in these rotor components, and also inhibited under these conditions.
occur in the stator, with resultant rapid overheating and
The pick-up time delay is necessary. It is to prevent initialisation
damage. Protection against this condition is therefore
of the element during system faults. The typical pick-up time
desirable.
delay is 5 s or it is at least in excess of the protection clearance
A combination of stator undervoltage and overcurrent can time for a close up phase to phase fault. In addition the drop-
be used to detect this condition. An instantaneous overcurrent off time delay is also necessary to ensures that the element
element is used, and gated with a three-phase undervoltage remains initialised following accidental closure of the circuit
element (fed from a VT on the generator side of the circuit breaker when the undervoltage detector could reset. A drop-
breaker) to provide the protection. The overcurrent element off delay of 0.5 s - 1 s will ensure that the element can operate
can have a low setting, as operation is blocked by three-phase when required.
14. Under/overfrequency/overfluxing protection
These conditions are grouped together because these In general, a generator or step-up transformer overfluxing
problems often occur due to a departure from synchronous condition will occur if the V/Hz ratio exceeds 1.05 p.u, such
speed. as a 5% overvoltage condition at rated frequency.
14.1 Overfluxing Besides, it is very important that the VT reference for overfluxing
protection is not the same as that used for the AVR. The
Overfluxing occurs when the ratio of voltage to frequency is
overfluxing protection based on V/Hz ratio shall reference the
too high. Either excessive voltage, or low frequency, or a
phase to phase voltage to avoid the maloperation under the
combination of both can produce high flux densities in the
earthfault condition which could cause the increase of phase
magnetic core of the generator or transformer. This could
voltage.
cause the core of the generator or transformer to saturate
and stray flux to be induced in un-laminated components that
have not been designed to carry flux. Overheating can then
occur, resulting in damage. 1.50
1.45
Both the generator and transformer shall have the capability
to tolerate the transient overfluxing, which may be caused by 1.40
the sudden loss of load. The typical overfluxing withstand 1.35
characteristics of the generator is shown in Figure C8.28. 1.30
n
Sustained overfluxing can arise during the generator running 1.25

up if excitation is applied too early with the AVR in service or
1.20
if the generator is run down with the excitation still applied.
1.15
Other overfluxing instances can occur from the failure of AVR HEC ALSTOM
or the errors in the manual control of the machine field circuit. 1.10
The sustained overfluxing conditions must be detected by a 1.05
DFEM
dedicated protection function that will raise an alarm and 1.00
possibly force an immediate reduction in excitation. 0 50 100 150
t/min
It is usual to provide a definite time-delayed alarm setting and
an instantaneous or inverse time-delayed trip setting, to match
the withstand characteristics of the protected generator and Figure C8.28:
transformer. Reference should be made to manufacturers Generator overfluxing withstand characteristics (three
withstand characteristics before formulating these settings. manufacturers), where n means per unit of V/Hz ratio with
rated values

14. Under/overfrequency/overfluxing protection C8
14.2 Under/overfrequency compared to load. Such events could be compensated for

by automatic load shedding. In this case, underfrequency
The most common occurrence of overfrequency is after
operation would be a transient condition. In the event of the
substantial loss of load. Severe overfrequency operation of
load shedding being unsuccessful, the generators should be
a high-speed generating set could result in plant damage as
provided with back-up underfrequency protection. For the
a result of the high centrifugal forces that would be imposed
high-speed turbine generators, not running at nominal
on rotating components. The governor fitted to the prime
frequency can cause abnormal blade resonances. If
mover normally provides protection against overfrequency.
prolonged, it could lead to turbine disc component fractures.
When a rise in running speed occurs, the governor should
Such effects can be accumulative and so operation at
quickly respond to reduce the mechanical input power, so
frequencies away from nominal should be limited as much as
that normal running speed is quickly regained. Overfrequency
possible, to avoid the need for early plant overhaul. So the
protection may be required as a back-up protection function
prime movers may have to be protected against excessively
to cater for governor or throttle control failure following loss
low frequency by tripping of the generators concerned. The
of load or during unsynchronized running.
protection function should be set so that declared frequency-
Overfrequency settings should be selected to coordinate with time limits for the generating set are not infringed. Typically,
normal, transient overfrequency excursions following full-load a 10% underfrequency condition should be continuously
rejection. The generator manufacturer should declare the sustainable.
expected transient overfrequency behaviour that should
Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the
comply with international governor response standards. A
underfrequency protection should coordinate with it. This will
typical overfrequency setting would be 10% above nominal.
ensure that generator tripping will not occur in the event of
Underfrequency may occur as a result of overload of successful load shedding following a system overload.
generators operating on an isolated system, or a serious fault Underfrequency protection could be set-up to coordinate with
on the power system that results in a deficit of generation multi-stage system load shedding.
15. Rotor faults
The field circuit of a generator, comprising the field winding It will be seen from Figure C8.29 that the flux is concentrated
of the generator and the armature of the exciter, together with on one pole but widely dispersed over the other and intervening
any associated field circuit breaker if it exists, is an isolated surfaces. The attracting force is in consequence large on one
d.c. circuit which is not normally earthed. If an earthfault pole but very weak on the opposite one, while flux on the
occurs, there will be no steady-state fault current and the quadrature axis will produce a balancing force on this axis.
need for action will not be evident. The result is an unbalanced force that in a large machine may
be of the order of 50-100 tonnes.
Danger arises if a second earthfault occurs at a separate
point in the field system, to cause the high field current to be A violent vibration is set up that may damage bearing surfaces
diverted, in part at least, from the intervening turns. Serious or even displace the rotor by an amount sufficient to cause it
damage to the conductors and possibly the rotor can occur to foul the stator.
very rapidly under these conditions.
15.1 Rotor earthfault protection
More damage may be caused mechanically. If a large portion
Two methods are available to detect this type of fault. The
of the winding is short-circuited, the flux may adopt a pattern
first method is suitable for generators that incorporate brushes
such as that shown in Figure C8.29. The attracting force at
in the main generator field winding. The second method
the surface of the rotor is given by:
requires at least a slip-ring connection to the field circuit:
B2A a. potentiometer method
F=
8π
b. a.c. injection method
where:
A = area
B = flux density

C8 15. Rotor faults
Figure C8.31(a). It comprises an injection source that is

Field winding Short circuit
connected between earth and one side of the field circuit,
through capacitive coupling and the measurement circuit.
The field circuit is subjected to an alternating potential at
substantially the same level throughout. An earthfault anywhere
in the field system will give rise to a current that is detected
as an equivalent voltage across the adjustable resistor by the
relay. The capacitive coupling blocks the normal d.c. field
voltage, preventing the discharge of a large direct current
through the protection scheme. The combination of series
capacitor and reactor forms a low-pass tuned circuit, the
intention being to filter higher frequency rotor currents that
may occur for a variety of reasons.
Other schemes are based on power frequency signal injection.
An impedance relay element is used, a field winding earthfault
reducing the impedance seen by the relay. These suffer the
draw back of being susceptible to static excitation system
harmonic currents when there is significant field winding and
excitation system shunt capacitance.
Greater immunity for such systems is offered by capacitively
coupling the protection scheme to both ends of the field winding,
where brush or slip ring access is possible (Figure C8.31(b)).
Figure C8.29:
Flux distribution on rotor with partial winding short circuit
15.1.1 Potentiometer method

This is a scheme that was fitted to older generators, and it is Generator
field Exciter
illustrated in Figure C8.30. An earthfault on the field winding winding
would produce a voltage across the relay, the maximum
voltage occurring for faults at the ends of the winding.
A ‘blind spot’ would exist at the centre of the field winding. L.F. injection
supply
To avoid a fault at this location remaining undetected, the ~ >
~
tapping point on the potentiometer could be varied by a
pushbutton or switch. The relay setting is typically about 5%
of the exciter voltage.
(a) Low frequency a.c. voltage injection - current measurement
Generator
field Exciter
winding
Field
winding > Exciter
Injection
supply
<
Figure C8.30:
Earthfault protection of field circuit by potentiometer method
(b) Power frequency a.c. voltage injection -
impedance measurement
15.1.2 Injection methods

Two methods are in common use. The first is based on low Figure C8.31:
frequency signal injection, with series filtering, as shown in Earthfault protection of field circuit by a.c. injection

15. Rotor faults C8
The low–frequency injection scheme is also advantageous in 15.3 Rotor shorted turn protection
that the current flow through the field winding shunt capacitance
As detailed in Section 15 a shorted section of field winding
will be lower than for a power frequency scheme. Such current
will result in an unsymmetrical rotor flux pattern and in
would flow through the machine bearings to cause erosion
potentially damaging rotor vibration. Detection of such an
of the bearing surface. For power frequency schemes, a
electrical fault is possible using a probe consisting of a coil
solution is to insulate the bearings and provide an earthing
placed in the airgap. The flux pattern of the positive and
brush for the shaft.
negative poles is measured and any significant difference in
15.2 Rotor earthfault protection for brushless flux pattern between the poles is indicative of a shorted turn
generators or turns. Automated waveform comparison techniques can
be used to provide a protection scheme, or the waveform can
A brushless generator has an excitation system consisting
be inspected visually at regular intervals. An immediate
of:
shutdown is not normally required unless the effects of the
a. a main exciter with rotating armature and stationary field fault are severe. The fault can be kept under observation until
windings a suitable shutdown for repair can be arranged. Repair will
take some time, since it means unthreading the rotor and
b. a rotating rectifier assembly, carried on the main shaft line
dismantling the winding.
out
Since short-circuited turns on the rotor may cause damaging
c. a controlled rectifier producing the d.c. field voltage for
vibration and the detection of field faults for all degrees of
the main exciter field from an a.c. source (often a small
abnormality is difficult, the provision of a vibration detection
‘pilot’ exciter)
scheme is desirable – this forms part of the mechanical
Hence, no brushes are required in the generator field circuit. protection of the generator.
All control is carried out in the field circuit of the main exciter.
Detection of a rotor circuit earthfault is still necessary, but
this must be based on a dedicated rotor-mounted system that
has a telemetry link to provide an alarm/data.
16. Loss of excitation protection
Loss of excitation may occur for a variety of reasons. If the 16.1 Protection against loss of excitation
generator was initially operating at only 20%-30% of rated
The protection used varies according to the size of generator
power, it may settle to run super-synchronously as an induction
being protected.
generator, at a low level of slip. In doing so, it will draw reactive
current from the power system for rotor excitation. This form 16.1.1 Small generators
of response is particularly true of salient pole generators. In
On the smaller machines, protection against asynchronous
these circumstances, the generator may be able to run for
running has tended to be optional, but it may now be available
several minutes without requiring to be tripped. There may
by default, where the functionality is available within a modern
be sufficient time for remedial action to restore the excitation,
numerical generator protection package. If fitted, it is arranged
but the reactive power demand of the machine during the
either to provide an alarm or to trip the generator. If the
failure may severely depress the power system voltage to an
generator field current can be measured, a relay element can
unacceptable level. For operation at high initial power output,
be arranged to operate when this drops below a preset value.
the rotor speed may rise to approximately 105% of rated
However, depending on the generator design and size relative
speed, where there would be low power output and where a
to the system, it may well be that the machine would be
high reactive current of up to 2.0p.u. may be drawn from the
required to operate synchronously with little or no excitation
supply. Rapid automatic disconnection is then required to
under certain system conditions.
protect the stator windings from excessive current and to
protect the rotor from damage caused by induced slip The field undercurrent relay must have a setting below the
frequency currents. minimum exciting current, which may be 8% of that
corresponding to the MCR of the machine. Time delay relays

C8 16. Loss of excitation protection
are used to stabilise the protection against maloperation in where:

response to transient conditions and to ensure that field current
generated
fluctuations due to pole slipping do not cause the protection n = EG = voltage
to reset. ES system
If the generator field current is not measurable, then the Ө = angle by which EG leads ES
technique detailed in the following section is utilised.
If the generator and system voltages are equal, the above
16.1.2 Large generators (>5 MVA) expression becomes:
For generators above about 5 MVA rating, protection against

ZR =
( X G + X T +Z S )(1− j cotθ 2) − X
loss of excitation and pole slipping conditions is normally G
applied.
2
The general case can be represented by a system of circles
Consider a generator connected to network, as shown in
with centres on the line CD; see Figure C8.33. Also shown is
Figure C8.32. On loss of excitation, the terminal voltage will
a typical machine terminal impedance locus during loss of
begin to decrease and the stator current will increase, resulting
excitation conditions.
in a decrease of impedance viewed from the generator
terminals and also a change in power factor.
XG XT ZS
EG ES 1.8
2.0
A
Load point
2.5
+jX
D
5.0 Loss of field
ZS XG+XT+ZS locus
D
EG
=1 XT
ES
q
ZR C
-R +R
A
XG
0.5
0.6
C 0.7
-jX
Figure C8.33:
Swing curves and loss of synchronism locus
Figure C8.32:
Basic interconnected system
The special cases of EG = ES and EG = O result in a straight-

line locus that is the right-angled bisector of CD, and in a
A relay to detect loss of synchronism can be located at point
circular locus that is shrunk to point C, respectively.
A. It can be shown that the impedance presented to the relay
under loss of synchronism conditions (phase swinging or When excitation is removed from a generator operating
pole slipping) is given by: synchronously the flux dies away slowly, during which period
the ratio of EG / ES is decreasing, and the rotor angle of the
ZR =
( X G + X T + Z S ) n (n - cosѲ - jsinѲ ) -X G
machine is increasing. The operating condition plotted on an
impedance diagram therefore travels along a locus that
(n-cosѲ ) 2 + sin 2Ѳ crosses the power swing circles. At the same time, it progresses
...Equation C8.2

16. Loss of excitation protection C8
in the direction of increasing rotor angle. After passing the corresponds to the maximum practicable rotor angle, taken
anti-phase position, the locus bends round as the internal to be at 120°. The locus of operation can be represented as
e.m.f. collapses, condensing on an impedance value equal a circle on the impedance plane, as shown in Figure C8.34,
to the machine reactance. The locus is illustrated in Figure stable operation conditions lying outside the circle.
C8.33.
On the same diagram the full load impedance locus for one
The relay location is displaced from point C by the generator per unit power can be drawn. Part of this circle represents a
reactance XG. One problem in determining the position of condition that is not feasible, but the point of intersection with
these loci relative to the relay location is that the value of the maximum rotor angle curve can be taken as a limiting
machine impedance varies with the rate of slip. At zero slip operating condition for setting impedance-based loss of
XG is equal to XD, the synchronous reactance, and at 100% excitation protection.
slip XG is equal to X"d, the sub-transient reactance. The
16.2 Impedance-based protection characteristics
impedance in a typical case has been shown to be equal to
X'd, the transient reactance, at 50% slip, and to 2X"d with a Figure C8.33 alludes to the possibility that a protection scheme
slip of 0.33%. The slip likely to be experienced with for loss of excitation could be based on impedance
asynchronous running is low, perhaps 1%, so that for the measurement. The impedance characteristic must be
purpose of assessing the power swing locus it is sufficient appropriately set or shaped to ensure decisive operation for
to take the value XG = 2X"d. loss of excitation whilst permitting stable generator operation
within allowable limits. One or two offset mho under impedance
This consideration has assumed a single value for XG. However,
elements (see Chapter [C3: Distance Protection] for the
the reactance Xq on the quadrature axis differs from the
principles of operation) are ideally suited for providing loss
direct-axis value, the ratio of Xd / Xg being known as the
of excitation protection as long as a generator operating at
saliency factor. This factor varies with the slip speed. The
low power output (20-30% Pn) does not settle down to operate
effect of this factor during asynchronous operation is to cause
as an induction generator. The characteristics of a typical
XG to vary at slip speed. In consequence, the loss of excitation
two-stage loss of excitation protection scheme are illustrated
impedance locus does not settle at a single point, but it
in Figure C8.35. The first stage, consisting of settings Xa1
continues to describe a small orbit about a mean point.
and Xb1 can be applied to provide detection of loss of
A protection scheme for loss of excitation must operate excitation even where a generator initially operating at low
decisively for this condition, but its characteristic must not power output (20-30% Pn) might settle down to operate as
inhibit stable operation of the generator. One limit of operation an induction generator.
Locus of constant MVA X

Normal machine operating impedance
XT Alarm
angle
0.75
Limiting
generation
point
Relay
characteristic Figure C8.35:
Locus of constant load angle
Diameter = Loss of excitation protection characteristics
Trip within circle
Pick-up and drop-off time delays td1 and tdo1 are associated
Figure C8.34: with this impedance element. Timer td1 is used to prevent
Locus of limiting operating conditions of synchronous machine operation during stable power swings that may cause the

C8 16. Loss of excitation protection
impedance locus of the generator to transiently enter the If a fast excitation system is employed, allowing load angles
locus of operation set by Xb1. However, the value must short of up to 120° to be used, the impedance diameter must be
enough to prevent damage as a result of loss of excitation reduced to take account of the reduced generator impedance
occurring. If pole-slipping protection is not required (see seen under such conditions. The offset also needs revising.
Section 17.2), timer tdo1 can be set to give instantaneous In these circumstances, typical settings would be:
reset. The second field failure element, comprising settings
a. impedance element diameter Xb1 = 0.5Xd
Xa2, Xb2, and associated timers td2 and tdo2 can be used to
give instantaneous tripping following loss of excitation under b. impedance element offset Xa1 = -0.75X'd
full load conditions.
c. time delay on pick-up, td1 = 0.5s - 10s
16.3 Protection settings
d. time delay on drop-off, tdo1 = 0s
The typical setting values for the two elements vary according
The typical impedance settings for the second element, if
to the excitation system and operating regime of the generator
used, are:
concerned, since these affect the generator impedance seen
by the relay under normal and abnormal conditions. For a • impedance element diameter
generator that is never operated at leading power factor, or
kV 2
at load angles in excess of 90° the typical settings are: X b2 =
MVA
a. impedance element diameter Xb1 = Xd
X a2 = − 0.5X'd
b. impedance element offset Xa1 = -0.5X'd
The time delay settings td2 and tdo2 are set to zero to give
c. time delay on pick-up, td1 = 0.5s - 10s instantaneous operation and reset.
d. time delay on drop-off, tdo1 = 0s
17. Pole slipping protection
A generator may pole-slip, or fall out of synchronism with the used for other purposes. However, since the reverse power
power system for a number of reasons. The principal causes conditions are cyclical, the element will reset during the forward
are prolonged clearance of a heavy fault on the power system, power part of the cycle unless either a very short pick-up
when the generator is operating at a high load angle close to time delay and/or a suitable drop-off time delay is used to
the stability limit, or partial or complete loss of excitation. eliminate resetting.
Weak transmission links between the generator and the bulk
The main advantage of this method is that a reverse power
of the power system aggravate the situation. It can also occur
element is often already present, so no additional relay
with embedded generators running in parallel with a strong
elements are required. The main disadvantages are the time
Utility network if the time for a fault clearance on the Utility
taken for tripping and the inability to control the system angle
network slow, perhaps because only IDMT relays are provided.
at which the generator breaker trip command would be issued,
Pole slipping is characterised by large and rapid oscillations
if it is a requirement to limit the breaker current interruption
in active and reactive power. Rapid disconnection of the
duty. There is also the difficulty of determining suitable settings.
generator from the network is required to ensure that damage
Determination of settings in the field, from a deliberate pole-
to the generator is avoided and that loads supplied by the
slipping test, is not possible and analytical studies may not
network are not affected for very long.
discover all conditions under which pole-slipping will occur.
Protection can be provided using several methods. The choice
17.2 Protection using an under impedance element
of method will depend on the probability of pole slipping
occurring and on the consequences should it occur. With reference to Figure C8.33, a loss of excitation under
impedance characteristic may also be capable of detecting
17.1 Protection using reverse power element
loss of synchronism, in applications where the electrical centre
During pole-slipping, there will be periods where the direction of the power system and the generator lies ‘behind’ the relaying
of active power flow will be in the reverse direction, so a point. This would typically be the case for a relatively small
reverse power relay element can be used to detect this, if not generator that is connected to a power transmission system

17. Pole slipping protection C8
XG >> (XT + XS). With reference to Figure C8.35; if pole- traversed so that tripping will not be initiated. The security of
slipping protection response is required, the time delay on this type of protection scheme is normally enhanced by the
drop-off tdo1 of the large diameter impedance measuring addition of a plain underimpedance control element (circle
element should be set to prevent its reset in each slip cycle, about the origin of the impedance diagram) that is set to
until the trip time delay on pick-up td1 has expired. prevent tripping for impedance trajectories for remote power
system faults.
As with reverse power protection, this would be an elementary
form of pole-slipping protection. It may not be suitable for Setting of the ohm elements is such that they lie parallel to
large machines where rapid tripping is required during the the total system impedance vector, and enclose it, as shown
first slip cycle and where some control is required for the in Figure C8.36.
system angle at which the generator circuit breaker trip
command is given. Where protection against pole-slipping
must be guaranteed, a more sophisticated method of
protection should be used. A typical reset timer delay for
pole-slipping protection might be 0.6s. For generator
transformer units, the additional impedance in front of the
relaying point may take the system impedance outside the
Relaying point
under impedance relay characteristic required for loss of
excitation protection. Therefore, the acceptability of this pole-
slipping protection scheme will be dependent on the
application. Slip locus
17.3 Dedicated pole-slipping protection

Large generator-transformer units directly connected to grid
systems often require a dedicated pole-slipping protection
scheme to ensure rapid tripping and with system angle control.
Pole-slipping protection can be directly based on the internal
phase angle between the generator terminal voltage and
electromotive force. If the internal phase angle exceeds the
configured angle for a definite period the pole-slipping element
can trip out. Pole-slipping protection can also be based on
the detection of the active power inversion within a definite Ohm relay 2
period. Two consecutive active power inversions mean one Ohm relay 1
rotation of the internal angle. When the number of active
power inversions achieves the setting the relay will trip.
Historically, dedicated pole-slipping protection schemes have
Figure C8.36:
usually been based on an ohm-type impedance measurement
Pole slipping detection by ohm relays
characteristic.
17.3.1 Pole slipping protection by impedance
measurement 17.3.2 Use of lenticular characteristic
Although a mho type element for detecting the change in A more sophisticated approach is to measure the impedance
impedance during pole-slipping can be used in some of the generator and use a lenticular impedance characteristic
applications, but with performance limits, a straight line ohm to determine if a pole-slipping condition exists. The lenticular
characteristic is more suitable. The protection principle is that characteristic is shown in Figure C8.37. The characteristic is
of detecting the passage of the generator impedance through divided into two halves by a straight line, called the blinder.
a zone defined by two such impedance characteristics, as
The inclination, Ө, of the lens and blinder is determined by
the angle of the total system impedance. The impedance of
The characteristic is divided into three zones, A, B, and C. the system and generator-transformer determines the forward
Normal operation of the generator lies in zone A. When a reach of the lens, ZA, and the transient reactance of the
pole-slip occurs, the impedance traverses zones B and C, generator determines the reverse reach ZB.
and tripping occurs when the impedance characteristic enters
The width of the lens is set by the angle Ө and the line PP',
zone C.
perpendicular to the axis of the lens, is used to determine if
Tripping only occurs if all zones are traversed sequentially. the centre of the impedance swing during a transient is located
Power system faults should result in the zones not being fully in the generator or power system.

C8 17. Pole slipping protection
Operation in the case of a generator is as follows. The

characteristic is divided into 4 zones and 2 regions, as shown
Blinder
in Figure C8.38.
Normal operation is with the measured impedance in zone
R1. If a pole slip develops, the impedance locus will traverse
though zones R2, R3, and R4. When entering zone R4 , a
trip signal is issued, provided the impedance lies below
reactance line PP' and hence the locus of swing lies within
or close to the generator – i.e. the generator is pole slipping
with respect to the rest of the system.
If the impedance locus lies above line PP', the swing lies far
out in the power system – i.e. one part of the power system,
including the protected generator, is swinging against the
rest of the network. Tripping may still occur, but only if swinging
is prolonged – meaning that the power system is in danger
Lens of complete break-up. Further confidence checks are
introduced by requiring that the impedance locus spends a
minimum time within each zone for the pole-slipping condition
to be valid. The trip signal may also be delayed for a number
of slip cycles even if a generator pole-slip occurs – this is to
both provide confirmation of a pole-slipping condition and
allow time for other relays to operate if the cause of the pole
slip lies somewhere in the power system. Should the
Figure C8.37: impedance locus traverse the zones in any other sequence,
Pole-slipping protection using lenticular characteristic and tripping is blocked.
blinder
X
Left-lens Right-lens
Power swing in system
S M
a Ang
Pole slipping
characteristic
Stable power swing
Blinder
Figure C8.38:
Definition of zones for lenticular characteristic

18. Stator overheating faults C8
Overheating of the stator may result from: ∆t ∆t

T(n) = Tmax × 1-e

τ  + T(n-1) ×e τ
a. overload
b. failure of the cooling system This assumes a thermal equilibrium in the form: Heat developed
c. overfluxing = Heat stored + Heat dissipated.
d. core faults Although current-operated thermal replica protection cannot

take into account the effects of ambient, it is often applied
With a modern protection relay, it is relatively simple to provide as a back-up to direct stator temperature measuring devices
a current-operated thermal replica protection element to (RTD) to prevent overheating due to high stator current. With
estimate the thermal state of the stator windings. The generator some relays, the thermal replica temperature estimate can
is considered to be a homogeneous body, developing heat be made more accurate through the integration of direct
internally at a constant rate and dissipating heat at a rate measuring resistance temperature devices.
directly proportional to its temperature rise, it can be shown
that the temperature at any instant is given by: Irrespective of whether current-operated thermal replica
t protection is applied or not, it is a requirement to monitor the
T = Tmax × (1-e τ) stator temperature of a large generator in order to detect
Where: overheating from whatever cause. Temperature sensitive
elements, usually of the resistance type, are embedded in
Tmax = final steady state temperature with the specific stator the stator winding at hot-spot locations envisaged by the
current I
manufacturer, the number used being sufficient to cover all
t = heating time constant variations. The elements are connected to a temperature
sensing relay element arranged to provide alarm and trip
With the thermal accumulation, the actual temperature in the
outputs. The settings will depend on the type of stator winding
relay execution cycle is given by:
insulation and on its permitted temperature rise.
19. Complete generator protection schemes
From the preceding sections, it is obvious that the protection d. overvoltage protection
scheme for a generator has to take account of many possible
e. undervoltage protection
faults and plant design variations. Determination of the types
of protection used for a particular generator will depend on f. overload/low forward power/ reverse power protection
the nature of the plant and upon economic considerations, (according to prime mover type)
which in turn is affected by set size. Fortunately, modern,
g. unbalanced loading
multi-function, numerical relays are sufficiently versatile to
include all of the commonly required protection functions in h. overheating
a single package, thus simplifying the decisions to be made. i. pole slipping
The following sections provide illustrations of typical protection
schemes for generators connected to a grid network, but not k. loss of excitation
all possibilities are illustrated, due to the wide variation in l. underfrequency
generator sizes and types.
m. inadvertent energisation
19.1 Direct-connected generator
n. overfluxing
A typical protection scheme for a direct-connected generator
is shown in Figure C8.39. It comprises the following protection o. mechanical faults
functions: Figure C8.39 illustrates which trips require an electrical trip
a. stator differential protection and which can be time delayed until electrical power has
been reduced to a low value. The faults that require tripping
b. overcurrent protection – conventional or voltage of the prime mover as well as the generator circuit breaker
dependent are also shown.
c. stator earthfault protection

C8 19. Complete generator protection schemes
Electrical trip of governor

Governor
trip
Emergency push button
Stator differential (biased/high

impedance)
Stator E/F (or neutral voltage
displacement)
Back-up overcurrent (or voltage
dependent O/C)
Lubricating oil failure
Mechanical faults (urgent)
Reverse/low forward power
Underfrequency
Pole slipping
Overfluxing
Inadvertent energisation
Loss of excitation
Stator winding temperature Excitation
Unbalanced loading circuit
breaker
Under/overvoltage Low power
interlock
Generator
Mechanical faults (non-urgent) circuit
breaker
N.B. Alarms and time delays omitted for simplicity
Figure C8.39:
Typical protection arrangement for a direct-connected generator
19.2 Generator-transformer units

These units are generally of higher output than direct-
connected generators, and hence more comprehensive
protection is warranted. In addition, the generator transformer
also requires protection, for which the protection detailed in
Chapter [C7: Transformer and Transformer-Feeder Protection]
is appropriate.
Overall biased generator/generator transformer differential
protection is commonly applied in addition, or instead of,
differential protection for the transformer alone. A single
protection relay may incorporate all of the required functions,
or the protection of the transformer (including overall generator/
generator transformer differential protection) may utilise a
separate relay.
Figure C8.40 shows a typical overall scheme.

19. Complete generator protection schemes C8
Electrical trip of governor Governor

trip
Emergency push button
Stator differential (biased/high

impedance)
Stator E/F (or neutral voltage
displacement)
Back-up overcurrent (or voltage
dependent O/C)
Lubricating oil failure
Mechanical faults (urgent)
Reverse/low forward power
Underfrequency
Pole slipping
Overfluxing
Overall differential (transformer

differential)
Excitation
Buchholz circuit
HV overcurrent breaker
HV restricted E/F
Generator
Transformer winding temperature circuit
breaker
Loss of excitation Low power
Stator winding temperature interlock
Unbalanced loading
Under/overvoltage
Mechanical faults (non-urgent)

N.B. Alarms and time delays omitted for simplicity
Figure C8.40:
Typical tripping arrangements for generator-transformer unit

C8 20. Distributed generation
The limitation of fossil primary energy sources and the

worldwide growing demand for electrical energy leads to the
need for alternative (renewable) energy source usage. This
trend is also driven by subsidies for renewable energy in
some countries. Especially wind and solar power plants are
built decentralised and distributed into the existing medium
G
and high voltage grid especially in the European countries.
~ =
These new types and small generator sizes are changing the = ~
existing grid and the protection needs.
The main challenges with these DGs are:
Figure C8.42:
a. fluctuation in produced electrical power Wind turbine generator system with DFIG
b. bi-directional load flow: MV grid HV grid
c. reduced rotating mass impact on grid stability
d. reduced short-circuit power
= ↑ =
e. detection of islanded sub-grids
~
f. neutral treatment in islanded sub-grids
g. stable operation of islanded sub-grids
Figure C8.43:
h. voltage control of power electronic converters at the same Solar power plant modeled as current source
speed as digital protection
j. radiation of harmonics impact on power quality
There is no clear definition of the size of distributed generators.
20.1 Generator types In the following small generators units of some 100 kVA up
to a few megawatts are considered.
The generator types used depend mainly on the energy
source. Synchronous machines are often used for small hydro 20.2 Protection aspects
plants, thermal power or (bio)gas plants. Power electronic
Depending on the generator type of the DG, common MV
converters are used for solar power plants, battery storage
protection methods (i. e. non-directional overcurrent protection)
systems and fuel cells. The power ratings of these smaller
are only suitable to a limited extent or cannot be applied.
DGs is in the range of some ten to hundreds of kVA.
20.2.1 Low fault currents
Wind turbine power plants of several MW often use a
synchronous machine in connection with a power electronic The thermal and electrical design of a.c./a.c. or d.c./a.c.
converter of the same rated power (Figure C8.41). Another converters (Figure C8.41 and Figure C8.43) will typically allow
design uses Doubly-Fed Induction Generators (DFIG) as a max. output of 110 … 120 % rated active power for several
asynchronous machine with power electronic converters of seconds. The transient capability will be in the same range due
approximately a third of the rated machine power (Figure to the small thermal time constants of the power electronic
C8.42). Smaller units will be equipped with directly coupled semiconductors. The transient reactive power output of DG
asynchronous machines. – and therefore the fault current contribution – depends on the
converter controllers. Newer converters are able to provide a
reactive current lreac in case of voltage drops ΔV (see Figure
C8.44). The amount of reactive current can be set via a slope
[Ref C8.3: Verordnung zu Systemdienstleistungen durch
Windenergieanlagen (Systemdienstleistungsverordnung)].
G ~ =
= ~
In all cases the fault current contribution of a converter-driven
DGs is in the range of the normal load current (or even lower).
Overcurrent protection is not suitable in such case. Using
distance or differential protection will allow the fault detection
but increases the investment costs.
20.2.2 Tapped lines
Figure C8.41:
Wind turbine generator system using full rated power Smaller (resp. bigger) DGs (e.g. wind or solar power plants)
electronic converters are typically connected to the MV (resp. HV) grid. In rural

20. Distributed generation C8
20.2.3 Active power dependent underfrequency load

∆ I reac / I r
1 .0 shedding
Underfrequency load shedding (UFLS) is used to prevent an
0.5 setable slope
electrical network from outages (blackouts). If the system
frequency gets below a certain threshold, portions of the
-0.5 -0.3 -0.1 0.1 0.3 0.5 DV / V
connected loads are disconnected to prevent further frequency
n
voltage support by decay. The amounts and frequency levels are typically defined
reactive power infeed
(overexcitation) -0.5
in Grid Codes.
Due to increasing DGs in distribution networks it is necessary
-1.0 to distinguish between pure load feeders and feeders with
generation (and loads) connected. It is advantageous not to
disconnect feeders with active power feed to the electrical
Figure C8.44: network in case of underfrequency events. UFLS schemes
Voltage support of newer DGs in case of voltage drops evaluating the direction of active power P are required to
distinguish between load and generation feeders (refer to
Chapter [D4: Frequency and Load Shedding]).
areas this is usually done by tapping an existing OHL nearby. 20.2.4 Reactive power dependent undervoltage
Q-V protection
The protection of the power plant itself will be done by
directional overcurrent (MV) or distance or differential Especially wind power plants of the first generation used
protection (HV) and depends on the low voltage ride trough simple asynchronous machines as generators. In case of
(LVRT) capabilities (Figure C8.45 [Ref C8.5: Grid code voltage drops these machines consume reactive power and
requirements for large wind farms]) of the DG. The impact of therefore further reduce the voltage at the PCC (point of
the line protection will depend on the rated power of the plant. common coupling) – the grid connection. To prevent a voltage
If auto-reclose is applied the DGs power plant must be tripped collapse such DGs need to be tripped in case of faults close
in case of a fault on the line. to the PCC. Newer DGs with full converters are able to provide
reactive power during faults and support the voltage in such
In case the intermediate infeed is of significant power the
a case (Figure C8.46).
following should be considered:
By evaluating the reactive power direction it’s possible to trip
a. intermediate infeed influences the distance measurements
the DGs in case of voltage drops. It is a requirement in some
(see Chapter [C3: Distance Protection])
Grid Codes [Ref C8.7: Transmission Code 2007], Figure
b. distance protection using aided schemes need to be C8.46 and [Ref C8.6: Lastenheft Blindleistungsrichtungs-
extended to multi-ended aided schemes Unterspannungsschutz (Q-U-Schutz)].
c. application of multi-ended differential protection To ensure the correct directional decision a minimum level of
reactive power flow and/or a minimum angle between P and
Q needs to be fulfilled. Q-V protection is typically time delayed
100 by approx. 500 ms before tripping the local DGs.
90
80
70
Q / S nom
60
HV MV 1 .0
P
V (%)
50
40 G
30
Q
20 0.5
10
Trip DG
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
time (s)
-1 .0 -0.5 0.5 1 .0 P / S nom
USA-Ireland-AESO Germany Denmark (<100kV)
UK Nordel Belgium (large voltage dips)
Belgium (small voltage dips) Sweden (<100MW) Sweden (>100MW)
New Zealand Hydro-Quebec Italy G
Spain

Required low voltage ride through capabilities of wind power Tripping area in case of voltage drops at the PCC in consumer
plants by different grid codes reference arrow system

C8 20. Distributed generation
20.3 Islanding detection

In the case of separating a network with distributed generators island detection
an island could be formed (Figure C8.47).
passive methods active methods
If there is a balance between generation and load in the
separated (medium voltage) network a stable operation of voltage at generator
several minutes has been observed in practice. This typically vector shift impedance meas.
is an unwanted situation due to the unknown star point frequency frequency modulation
treatment / earthing conditions. To prevent such operation the ROCOF phase modulation
islanding needs to be detected. This can be done at the line harmonics at network
feeder 1 and/or at the distributed generator 2 . volts + currents
impedance meas.
dP/dt short circuit switching
vector shift
communication
HV loss of comm.
(PLC)
MV transfer trip
ZE
VT
Figure C8.48:
Islanding detection methods
1
20.3.2 Rate of change of frequency relay
islanded network
A ROCOF relay detects the rate of change of frequency in

DG excess of a defined setpoint. The signal is obtained from a
voltage transformer connected close to the Point of Common
2 Coupling (PCC). One method used is to measure the time
period between successive zero-crossings to determine the
average frequency for each half-cycle and hence the rate of
Figure C8.47: change of frequency. The result is usually averaged over a
MV islanded network with DG number of cycles. Another common method used to get the
df/dt value is based on the Discrete Fourier Transformer (DFT).
The difference between the phase angles from two consecutive
Detection methods can be grouped into (Figure C8.48 [Ref DTFs can derive the frequency and the frequency difference
C8.8: Protection of Distributed Systems with Distributed over several cycles can derive the df/dt value.
Energy Resources]):
20.3.3 Setting guidelines
a. passive, based on local voltage (and current) measurements
Should loss of the Utility supply occur, it is extremely unlikely
b. active, interfering the network and/or the DG
that there will be an exact match between the output of the
c. communication based distributed generator(s) and the connected load in the
Most common passive methods using over- and undervoltage, remaining island. A small frequency change or voltage phase
over- and underfrequency, ROCOF and voltage vector shift. angle change will therefore occur, to which can be added any
There will be load flow situations with a local balanced generation changes due to the small natural variations in loading of an
and load resulting in the non-detection of the island. isolated generator with time. Once the rate of change of
frequency exceeds the setting of the ROCOF relay for a set
20.3.1 Voltage vector shift relay time, or once the voltage phase angle drift exceeds the set
A voltage vector shift relay detects the sudden change in angle, tripping occurs to open the connection between the
voltage phase angle beyond a defined setpoint. Again, the in-plant and Utility networks.
voltage signal is obtained from a voltage transformer connected
While it is possible to estimate the rate of change of frequency
close to the Point of Common Coupling (PCC). One method
from knowledge of the generator set inertia and MVA rating,
used is to measure the time period between successive zero-
this is not an accurate method for setting a ROCOF relay
crossings to determine the duration of each half-cycle, and
because the rotational inertia of the complete network being
then to compare the durations with the memorised average
fed by the embedded generation is required. For example,
duration of earlier half-cycles in order to determine the phase
there may be other DG to consider. As a result, it is invariably
angle drift.

20. Distributed generation C8
the case that the relay settings are determined at site during Nevertheless, because such protection is a common
commissioning. This is to ensure that the Utility requirements requirement of some Utilities, the ‘loss of mains’ protection
are met while reducing the possibility of a spurious trip under may have to be provided and the possibility of spurious trips
the various operating scenarios envisaged. However, it is very will have to be accepted in those cases. Site measurements
difficult to determine whether a given rate of change of over a period of time of the typical rates of frequency change
frequency will be due to a ‘loss of mains’ incident or a load/ occurring may assist in negotiations of the settings with the
frequency change on the public power network, and hence Utility, and with the fine-tuning of the protection that may
spurious trips are impossible to eliminate. Thus the provision already be commissioned.
of Loss of Utility Supply protection to meet power distribution
Utility interface protection requirements may actually conflict
with the interests of the national power system operator. With
the growing contribution of non-dispatched embedded
generation to the aggregate national power demand, the loss
of the embedded generation following a transmission system
incident that may already challenge the security of the system
can only aggravate the problem. [Ref C8.9: Survey of Rate
Of Change of Frequency Relays and Voltage] provides further
details of the operation of ROCOF relays and the problems
that may be encountered.
21. Examples of generator protection settings
This section gives examples of the calculations required for Generator data
generator protection. The first is for a typical small generator Prime
Rated Rated Rated Rated
installed on an industrial system that runs in parallel with the kVA kW PF
voltage current frequency speed
mover
type
Utility supply. The second is for a larger generator-transformer
Steam
unit connected to a grid system. 6250 5000 0.8 11000 328 50 1500
turbine
21.1 Protection settings of a small industrial

generator Generator parameters
Generator type Xd p.u. X'd p.u. CT Ratio VT Ratio
Salient details of the generator, network and protection
required are given in Table C8.3. The example calculations Salient Pole 2.349 0.297 500/1 11000/110
are based on a MiCOM P343 relay in respect of setting ranges,

etc. Network data
Maximum earth Minimum phase fault Maximum downstream
21.1.1 Differential protection Earthing resistor
fault current current phase fault current
Biased differential protection involves the determination of 31.7 Ω 200A 145A 850A
values for four setting values: Is1, Is2, K1 and K2 in Figure

C8.4. Is1 can be set at 5% of the generator rating, in accordance Existing protection
with the recommendations for the relay, and similarly the values Overcurrent settings Earthfault settings
of Is2 (120%) and K2 (150%) of generator rating. It remains Ct Ratio
Charact. Setting TMS Charact. Setting TMS
for the value of K1 to be determined. The recommended value 200/1 SI 144A 0.176 SI 48A 0.15
is generally 0%, but this only applies where CTs that conform
to IEC 60044-1 class PX (or the superseded BS 3938 Class
Table C8.3:
X) are used – i.e. CTs specifically designed for use in differential
Data for small generator protection example

C8 21. Examples of generator protection settings
protection schemes. In this application, the CTs are conventional subjected to fault or overload current in excess of the stator
class 5P CTs that meet the relay requirements in respect of short-time current limits. A curve should be provided by the
knee-point voltage, etc. manufacturer, but IEC 60034-1 demands that an AC generator
should be able to pass 1.5 times rated current for at least 30
Where neutral tail and terminal CTs can saturate at different
seconds. The operating time of the downstream protection
times due to transiently offset magnetising inrush or motor
for a three-phase fault current of 850 A is 0.682 s, so the
starting current waveforms with an r.m.s. level close to rated
voltage controlled relay element should have a minimum
current and where there is a high L/R time constant for the
operating time of 1.09 s (0.4 s time grading margin is used
offset, the use of a 0% bias slope may give rise to maloperation.
to cooperate with the downstream relay - see table C8.2).
Such waveforms can be encountered when plant of similar
With a current setting of 87.5 A, the operating time of the
rating to the generator is being energised or started.
voltage controlled relay element at a TMS of 1.0 is:
Differences between CT designs or differing remanent flux
levels can lead to asymmetric saturation and the production 0.14
of a differential spill current. Therefore, it is appropriate to 0 .02
= 3.01 s
select a non-zero setting for K1, and a value of 5% is usual
 850 
  −1
in these circumstances.  87.5 
21.1.2 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection Therefore a TMS of:
This protection is applied as remote backup to the downstream 1.09 = 0.362

overcurrent protection in the event of protection or breaker 3.01
failure conditions. This ensures that the generator will not
continue to supply the fault under these conditions. is required. Use 0.375, nearest available setting.
At normal voltage, the current setting must be greater than 21.1.3 Stator earthfault protection
the maximum generator load current of 328 A. A margin must The maximum earthfault current, from Table C8.3, is 200 A.
be allowed for resetting of the relay at this current (reset ratio Protection for 95% of the winding can be provided if the relay
= 95%) and for the measurement tolerances of the relay (5% is set to detect a primary earthfault current of 16.4 A, and
of IS under reference conditions), therefore the current setting this equates to a CT secondary current of 0.033 A. The nearest
is calculated as: relay setting is 0.04 A, providing protection for 90% of the
winding.
I vcset > 328 × 1.05
0.95 The protection must grade with the downstream earthfault
> 362.5 A protection, the settings of which are also given in Table C8.3.
At an earthfault current of 200 A, the downstream protection
The nearest settable value is 365 A, or 0.73 In. has an operation time of 0.73 s. The generator earthfault
protection must therefore have an operation time of not less
The minimum phase-phase voltage for a close-up single-phase
than 1.13 s. At a TMS of 1.0, the generator protection relay
to earthfault is 57%, so the voltage setting VS must be less
operating time will be:
than this. A value of 30% is typically used, giving VS = 33 V.
The current setting multiplying factor K must be chosen such
that KIS is less than 50% of the generator steady-state current  
 0 .14 
contribution to an uncleared remote fault. This information is
 s
( )
0 .02
not available (missing data being common in protection  200 − 1
studies). However, the maximum sustained close-up phase  20 
fault current (neglecting AVR action) is 145 A, so that a setting 1.13 = 0.38
chosen to be significantly below this value will suffice. A value = 2.97 s, so the required TMS is
2.97
of 87.5 A (60% of the close-up sustained phase fault current)
is therefore chosen, and hence K = 0.6. This is considered Use a setting of 0.4, nearest available setting.
to be appropriate based on knowledge of the system circuit 21.1.4 Neutral voltage displacement protection
impedances. The TMS setting is chosen to co-ordinate with
the downstream feeder protection such that: This protection is provided as back-up earthfault protection
for the generator and downstream system (direct-connected
a. for a close-up feeder three-phase fault, that results in almost generator). It must therefore have a setting that grades with
total voltage collapse as seen by the relay the downstream protection. The protection is driven from the
b. for a fault at the next downstream relay location, if the relay generator star- connected VT, while the downstream protection
voltage is less than the switching voltage is current operated.
It should also be chosen so that the generator cannot be

21. Examples of generator protection settings C8
It is therefore necessary to translate the current setting of the slipping conditions, a drop-off time delay td2 is provided and
downstream setting of the current-operated earthfault set to 0.5 s.
protection into the equivalent voltage for the NVD protection.
21.1.6 Negative phase sequence current protection
The equivalent voltage is found from the formula:
V eff =
( Ipe × Z e ) × 3 This protection is required to guard against excessive heating
from negative phase sequence currents, whatever the cause.
VT ratio The generator is of salient pole design, so from IEC 60034-1,
48 × 31.7 × 3 the continuous withstand is 8% of rating and the I 22 t value is
= 20 s. Using Equation C8.1, the required relay settings can
100
found as
= 45.6 V
where: I2>> = 0.05 and K = 8.6 s.
Veff = effective voltage setting The nearest available values are I2>> = 0.05 and K = 8.6 s.
Ipe = downstream earthfault current setting The relay also has a cooling time constant Kreset that is normally
set equal to the value of K. To co-ordinate with clearance of
Ze = earthing resistance heavy asymmetric system faults, that might otherwise cause
Hence a setting of 48 V is acceptable. Time grading is unnecessary operation of this protection, a minimum operation
required, with a minimum operating time of the NVD protection time tmin should be applied. It is recommended to set this to
of 1.13 s at an earthfault current of 200 A. Using the expression a value of 1. Similarly, a maximum time can be applied to
for the operation time of the NVD element: ensure that the thermal rating of the generator is not exceeded
(as this is uncertain, data not available) and to take account
t = K/(M-1)sec of the fact that the MiCOM P343 characteristic is not identical
where: with that specified in IEC 60034.
 V  The recommended setting for tmax is 600 s.
M=  
 V snvd 
and 21.1.7 Overvoltage protection
V = voltage seen by relay This is required to guard against various failure modes, e.g.
AVR failure, resulting in excessive stator voltage. A two-stage
Vsnvd = relay setting voltage protection is available, the first being a low-set time-delayed
the value of K can be calculated as 3.34. The nearest settable stage that should be set to grade with transient overvoltages
value is 3.5, giving an operation time of 1.18 s. that can be tolerated following load rejection. The second is
a high-set stage used for instantaneous tripping in the event
21.1.5 Loss of excitation protection of an intolerable overvoltage condition arising.
Loss of excitation is detected by a mho impedance relay Generators can normally withstand 105% of rated voltage
element, as detailed in Section 16.2. The standard settings continuously, so the low-set stage should be set higher than
for the MiCOM P340 series relay are: this value. A setting of 117.7 V in secondary quantities
Xa = -0.5 X'd × (CT ratio/VT ratio) (corresponding to 107% of rated stator voltage) is typically
used, with a definite time delay of 10 s to allow for transients
(in secondary quantities) due to load switch-off/rejection, overvoltages on recovery
= -0.5 × 0.297 × 19.36 × 500/100 from faults or motor starting, etc.
= -14.5 Ω The second element provides protection in the event of a

large overvoltage, by tripping excitation and the generator
Xb = Xd × (CT ratio/VT ratio)
circuit breaker (if closed). This must be set below the maximum
= 2.349 Ω × 19.36 × (500/100) stator voltage possible, taking into account saturation. As the
open circuit characteristic of the generator is not available,
= 227 Ω
typical values must be used. Saturation will normally limit the
The nearest settings provided by the relay are maximum overvoltage on this type of generator to 130%, so
a setting of 120% (132 V secondary) is typically used.
Xa = -14.5 Ω Xb = -227 Ω
Instantaneous operation is required. Generator manufacturers
The time delay td1 should be set to avoid relay element are normally able to provide recommendations for the relay
operation on power swings and a typical setting of 3 s is settings. For embedded generators, the requirements of the
used. This value may need to be modified in the light of local Utility may also have to be taken into account. For both
operating experience. To prevent cyclical pick-up of the relay elements, a variety of voltage measurement modes are
element without tripping, such as might occur during pole- available to take account of possible VT connections (single

or three-phase, etc.), and conditions to be protected against. 21.1.8 Underfrequency protection

In this example, a three-phase VT connection is used, and
This is required to protect the generator from sustained
overvoltages on any phase are to be detected, so a selection
overload conditions during periods of operation isolated from
of ‘Any’ is used for this setting.
the Utility supply. The generating set manufacturer will normally
provide the details of machine short-time capabilities. The
example relay provides four stages of underfrequency
Protection Quantity Value protection. In this case, the first stage is used for alarm
purposes and a second stage would be applied to trip the
5%
set.
Differential 120%
protection 5% The alarm stage might typically be set to 49 Hz, with a time
delay of 20 s, to avoid an alarm being raised under transient
150%
conditions, e.g. during plant motor starting. The trip stage
0.04
Stator earthfault might be set to 48 Hz, with a time delay of 0.5 s, to avoid
0.4 tripping for transient, but recoverable, dips in frequency below
Neutral voltage 48 V this value.
displacement 3.5
21.1.9 Reverse power protection
-14.5
The relay setting is 5% of rated power.
227
Loss of excitation
3s  0.05 × 5 × 10 6 
setting =  
0.5 s  CT ratio × VT ratio 
0.73
 0.05 × 5 × 10 6 
Voltage controlled 33 = 
overcurrent 0.6
 500 × 100 
0.375 =5W
0.05 This value can be set in the relay. A time delay is required to
8.6 s guard against power swings while generating at low power
Negative phase
8.6 s levels, so use a time delay of 5 s. No reset time delay is
sequence
1.5 s required.
600 s 21.2 Large generator transformer unit protection
meas mode three-phase
The data for this unit are given in Table C8.5. It is fitted with
operate mode any two main protection systems to ensure security of tripping in
1 setting 107% the event of a fault. To economise on space, the setting
1 function DT calculations for only one system, that using a MiCOM P343
Overvoltage
time delay 10 s relay are given. Settings are given in primary quantities
2 setting 120% throughout.
2 function DT 21.2.1 Biased differential protection
2 time delay 0 sec
The settings follow the guidelines previously stated. As 100%
1 setting 49 Hz stator winding earthfault protection is provided, high sensitivity
1 time delay 20 s is not required and hence Is1 can be set to 10% of generator
Underfrequency
2 setting 48 Hz rated current. This equates to 602 A, and the nearest settable
2 time delay 0.5 s value on the relay is 640 A (= 0.08 of rated CT current). The
settings for K1, Is2 and K2 follow the guidelines in the relay
function reverse power
manual.
setting 5W
Reverse power
time delay 5s
DO time 0s
Table C8.4:
Small generator protection example – relay settings

Iflt = minimum generator primary current for a multi-phase

Parameter Value Unit
feeder-end fault
Generator MVA rating 187.65 MVA
VN = no-load phase-neutral generator voltage
Generator MW rating 160 MW
Generator voltage 18 kV
Xd = generator d-axis synchronous reactance
Synchronous reactance 1.93 pu Xt = generator transformer reactance
Direct-axis transient reactance 0.189 pu Rf = feeder resistance
Minimum operating voltage 0.8 pu
Xf = feeder reactance
Generator negative sequence
0.08 pu
capability n = number of parallel generators
Generator negative sequence factor,
10 s
Kg Hence,
Generator third harmonic voltage
0.02 pu Iflt = 2893 A
under load
Generator motoring power 0.02 pu
and
alarm 1.1 pu
time V N 3(( nR f ) 2 +( X t +nX f ) 2 )
Generator overvoltage 5 s V flt =
delay
trip 1.3 pu
( nR f ) 2 +( X d + X t + nX f ) 2
Generator undervoltage not required
Max pole slipping frequency 10 Hz = 1304 V
Generator transformer rating 360 MVA
Generator transformer leakage
Iflt /Iset = 2893 / 7200 = 0.4
0.244 pu
reactance
Generator transformer overflux alarm 1.1 pu
So a suitable value of K is 0.3.
Generator transformer overflux alarm 1.2 pu
A suitable value of V2set is 120% of Vflt, giving a value of
Network resistance (referred to 18kV) 0.56 m 1565 V. The nearest settable value is 3000 V, minimum allowable
Network reactance (referred to 18kV) 0.0199 relay setting. The value of V1set is required to be above the
System impedance angle (estimated) 80 deg minimum voltage seen by the generator for a close-up phase-
Minimum load resistance 0.8 earthfault. A value of 80% of rated voltage is used for V1set,
14400 V.
Generator CT ratio 8000/1
Generator VT ratio 18000/120 21.2.3 Inadvertent energisation protection
Number of generators in parallel 2 This protection is a combination of overcurrent with
undervoltage, the voltage signal being obtained from a VT
Table C8.5: on the generator side of the system. The current setting used
System data for large generator protection example is that of rated generator current of 6019 A, in accordance
with IEEE C37.102 as the generator is for installation in the
USA. Use 6000 A nearest settable value. The voltage setting
cannot be more than 85% of the generator rated voltage to
21.2.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection
ensure operation does not occur under normal operation. For
The setting current Iset has to be greater than the full-load this application, a value of 50% of rated voltage is chosen.
current of the generator (6019 A). A suitable margin must be
21.2.4 Negative phase sequence protection
allowed for operation at reduced voltage, so use a multiplying
factor of 1.2. The nearest settable value is 7200 A. The factor The generator has a maximum steady-state capability of 8%
K is calculated so that the operating current is less than the of rating, and a value of Kg of 10. Settings of I2cmr = 0.06
current for a remote end three phase fault. The steady-state (=480 A) and Kg = 10 are therefore used. Minimum and
current and voltage at the generator for a remote-end three- maximum time delays of 1 s and 1300 s are used to co-ordinate
phase fault are given by the expression: with external protection and ensure tripping at low levels of
negative sequence current are used.
VN
I flt =
( nR f ) +( X d + X t + nX f ) 2
2

21.2.5 Overfluxing protection Xb1 = 0.5Xd = 1.666 Ω

The generator-transformer manufacturer supplied the following Xa1 = -0.75X'd = -0.245 Ω
characteristics:
Use nearest settable values of 1.669 Ω and 0.253 Ω. A time
delay of 5s is used to prevent alarms under transient conditions.
Alarm: V >1. 1
f For the trip stage, settings for high load as given in Section
16.3 are used:
Trip: V >1. 2, inverse time characteristic 2
18 2
f X b2 = kV = 1.727 Ω
Hence:
MVA 187.65
X a2 = -0.5X′d = -0.163 Ω
the alarm setting is 18000 × 1.05 = 315V/Hz
60 The nearest settable value for Xb2 is 1.725 Ω. A time delay of
A time delay of 5 s is used to avoid alarms due to transient 0.5 s is used.
conditions.
21.2.8 Reverse power protection
the trip setting is 18000 × 1.2 = 360V/Hz
60 The manufacturer-supplied value for motoring power is 2%
A TMS value of 10 is selected, to match the withstand curve of rated power. The recommended setting is therefore 1.6
supplied by the manufacturer. MW. An instrumentation class CT is used in conjunction with
the relay for this protection, to ensure accuracy of measurement.
21.2.6 100% Stator earthfault protection A time delay of 0.5 s is used. The settings should be checked
This is provided by a combination of neutral voltage at the commissioning stage.
displacement and third harmonic undervoltage protection. 21.2.9 Over/underfrequency protection
For the neutral voltage displacement protection to cover 90%
of the stator winding, the minimum voltage allowing for For underfrequency protection, the client has specified the
generator operation at a minimum of 92% of rated voltage is: following characteristics:
0.92 × 18kV × 0.1 Alarm: 59.3 Hz, 0.5 s time delay
3 1st stage trip: 58.7 Hz, 100 s time delay
= 956.1 V 2nd stage trip: 58.2 Hz, 1 s time delay
Use a value of 935.3 V, nearest settable value that ensures Similarly, the overfrequency is required to be set as follows:
90% of the winding is covered. A 0.5 s definite time delay is
used to prevent spurious trips. The third harmonic voltage Alarm: 62 Hz, 30 s time delay
under normal conditions is 2% of rated voltage, giving a value Trip: 63.5 Hz, 10 s time delay
of:
These characteristics can be set in the relay directly.
18kV × 0.02
21.2.10 Overvoltage protection
3
The generator manufacturers’ recommendation is:
= 207.8 V
Alarm: 110% voltage for 5 s
The setting of the third harmonic undervoltage protection
must be below this value, a factor of 80% being acceptable. Trip: 130% voltage, instantaneous
Use a value of 166.3 V. A time delay of 0.5 s is used. Inhibition This translates into the following relay settings:
of the element at low generator output requires determination
during commissioning. Alarm: 19800 V, 5 s time delay
Trip: 23400 V, 0.1 s time delay
21.2.7 Loss of excitation protection
The client requires a two-stage loss of excitation protection
function. The first is alarm only, while the second provides
tripping under high load conditions. To achieve this, the first
impedance element of the MiCOM P343 loss of excitation
protection can be set in accordance with the guidelines of
Section 16.3 for a generator operating at rotor angles up to
120°, as follows:

21.2.11 Pole slipping protection Protection Quantity Value

This is provided by the method described in Section 17.3.2. Is1 8%
Detection at a maximum slip frequency of 10 Hz is required. Is2 100%
Differential protection
The setting data, according to the relay manual, is as follows. K1 0%
K2 150%
Forward reach,
Vn3H< 166.3 V
Stator earthfault
ZA = Zn + Zt Vn3H delay 0.5 s
= 0.02 + 0.22 Neutral voltage displacement

Vsnvd 935.3 V
Time delay 0.5 s
= 0.24 Ω X1a -0.245 Ω
Reverse reach, X1b 1.666 Ω
td1 5s
ZB = ZGen
Loss of excitation Xa2 -0.163 Ω
= 2 × X'd Xb2 1.725 Ω
= 0.652 Ω td2 0.5 s
tD01 0s
Reactance line,
Iset 7200 A
ZC = 0.9 × Zt K 0.3
Voltage restrained overcurrent
V1set 14400 V
= 0.9 × 0.22
V2set 3000 V
= 0.198 Ω I2>> 0.06
where: Kg 10
Negative phase sequence Kreset 10
Zt = generator transformer leakage impedance tmin 1s
Zn = network impedance tmax 1300 s
V> meas mode three-phase
The nearest settable values are 0.243 Ω, 0.656 Ω, and 0.206 Ω
V> operate mode any
respectively.
V> 1 setting 19800 V
The lens angle setting, α, is found from the equation: V> 1 function DT
Overvoltage
1.54 - R l min  V> 1 time delay 5s
α min = 180 - 2tan
o −1
 Z +Z  V> 2 setting 23400
 ( A B)  V> 2 function DT
and, substituting values, V> 2 time delay 0.1 s
αmin = 62.5° P1 function reverse power

P1 setting 1.6 MW
Reverse power
Use the minimum settable value of 90°. The blinder angle, P1 time delay 0.5 s
Ө, is estimated to be 80°, and requires checking during P1 DO time 0s
commissioning. Timers T 1 and T 2 are set to 15 ms as Dead Mach I> 6000 A
experience has shown that these settings are satisfactory to Dead Mach V> 9000 V
detect pole slipping frequencies up to 10 Hz. Za 0.243 Ω
This completes the settings required for the generator, and Zb 0.656 Ω
the relay settings are given in Table C8.6. Of course, additional Zc 0.206 Ω
protection is required for the generator transformer, according Pole slipping protection 90°
to the principles described in Chapter [C7: Transformer and 80°
Transformer-Feeder Protection]. T1 15ms

T2 15ms
F>1 setting 62 Hz
F>1 time delay 30 s
Overfrequency
F>2 setting 63.5 Hz
F>2 time delay 10 s
F<1 setting 59.3 Hz
F<1 time delay 0.5 s
F<2 setting 58.7 Hz
Underfrequency
Table C8.6: F<2 time delay 100 s
Relay settings for large generator protection example F<3 setting 58.2 Hz
F<3 time delay 1s

C8 22. References
[C8.1] IEEE Guide for Generator Ground Protection

IEEE Std C37.101™-2006 (Revision of IEEE Std C37.101-
1993/Incorporates IEEE Std C37.101-2006/Cor1:2007)
[C8.2] Problems in Voltage-Type Longitudinal
Zero-Sequence Inter-Turn Protection for Generator
LI Yu-hai, LI jiu-hong, ZHANG Xiao-qing, XU Min, Electric
Power Automation Equipment, Vol.21, No.10, Oct.2001
[C8.3] Verordnung zu Systemdienstleistungen durch
Windenergieanlagen (Systemdienstleistungsverordnung)
SDLWindV, BGBI
page 1734, 2009
[C8.4] Continental Europe Operational Handbook
Appendix - Policy 5: Emergency Operations. entso-e, 2010
[C8.5] Grid Code Requirements for Large Wind Farms
A review of technical regulations and available wind turbine
technologies. M. Tsili, Ch. Patsiouras, S. Papathanassiou,
2012
[C8.6] Lastenheft Blindleistungsrichtungs-
Unterspannungsschutz (Q-U-Schutz)
FNN/VDE, 2010
[C8.7] Transmission Code 2007
Network and System Rules of the German Transmission
System Operators. VDN, 2007
[C8.8] Protection of Distributed Systems with
Distributed Energy Resources
CIGRE JWG B5/C6.26, 2015
[C8.9] Survey of Rate of Change of Frequency Relays
and Voltage
Phase Shift Relays for Loss of Mains Protection.
ERA Report 95-0712R, 1995.ERA Technology

C8

C9
A.C. Motor Protection

Chapter
C9
1. Introduction 361
2. Modern relay design 361
3. Thermal (overload) protection 362
4. Start/Stall protection 363
5. Short circuit protection 366
6. Earth fault protection 368
7. Negative phase sequence protection 370
8. Wound rotor induction motor protection 371
9. RTD temperature detection 372
10. Bearing failures 372
11. Undervoltage protection 372
12. Loss-of-load protection 373
13. Anti-backspin function 373
14. Additional protection for synchronous motors 373
15. Motor protection examples 374

C9 1. Introduction
There are a wide range of a.c. motors and motor characteristics The conditions for which motor protection is required can be
in existence, because of the numerous duties for which they divided into two broad categories: imposed external conditions
are used. All motors need protection, but fortunately, the more and internal faults. Table C9.1 provides details of all likely
fundamental problems affecting the choice of protection are faults that require protection.
independent of the type of motor and the type of load to
which it is connected. There are some important differences
between the protection of induction motors and synchronous External faults Internal faults
motors, and these are fully dealt with in the appropriate section. Unbalanced supplies Bearing failures
Motor characteristics must be carefully considered when Undervoltages Winding faults

applying protection; while this may be regarded as stating Single phasing Overloads
the obvious, it is emphasised because it applies more to Reverse phase sequence
motors than to other items of power system plant. For example,
the starting and stalling currents/times must be known when
applying overload protection, and furthermore the thermal Table C9.1:
Causes of motor failures
withstand of the machine under balanced and unbalanced
loading must be clearly defined.
2. Modern relay design
The design of a motor protection relay must be adequate to i. undervoltage protection

cater for the protection needs of any one of the vast range
j. loss-of-load protection
of motor designs in service, many of the designs having no
permissible allowance for overloads. A relay offering k. out-of-step protection
comprehensive protection will have the following set of
l. loss-of-supply protection
features:
m. auxiliary supply supervision
a. thermal protection
Note: Items k and l apply to synchronous motors only.
b. extended start protection
In addition, relays may offer options such as circuit breaker
c. stalling protection
condition monitoring as an aid to maintenance. Manufacturers
d. number of starts limitation may also offer relays that implement a reduced functionality
to that given above where less comprehensive protection is
e. short circuit protection
warranted (e.g. induction motors of low rating).
f. earth fault protection
The following sections examine each of the possible failure
g. winding RTD measurement/trip modes of a motor and discuss how protection may be applied
to detect that mode.
h. negative sequence current detection

3. Thermal (overload) protection C9
The majority of winding failures are either indirectly or directly Therefore, the thermal replica should take into account both
caused by overloading (either prolonged or cyclic), operation of these components, a typical equation for the equivalent
on unbalanced supply voltage, or single phasing, which all current being:
lead through excessive heating to the deterioration of the
winding insulation until an electrical fault occurs. The generally
accepted rule is that insulation life is halved for each 10° C
I eq = (I 2
1 + KI 22 )
rise in temperature above the rated value, modified by the
where
length of time spent at the higher temperature. As an electrical
machine has a relatively large heat storage capacity, it follows I1 = positive sequence current
that infrequent overloads of short duration may not adversely I2 = negative sequence current
affect the machine. However, sustained overloads of only a
few percent may result in premature ageing and insulation
failure. negative sequence rotor resistance
K = at rated speed.
Furthermore, the thermal withstand capability of the motor is
positive sequence rotor resistance
affected by heating in the winding prior to a fault. It is therefore
important that the relay characteristic takes account of the For an asynchronous motor, K can be estimated with the
extremes of zero and full-load pre-fault current known following formula:
respectively as the ‘Cold’ and ‘Hot’ conditions. Ts / Tn
K =2 -1
The variety of motor designs, diverse applications, variety of S n (I s / I n ) 2
possible abnormal operating conditions and resulting modes
of failure result in a complex thermal relationship. A generic Where
mathematical model that is accurate is therefore impossible Ts : starting torque
to create. However, it is possible to develop an approximate
model if it is assumed that the motor is a homogeneous body, Tn : rated torque
creating and dissipating heat at a rate proportional to Is : starting current
temperature rise. This is the principle behind the ‘thermal
replica’ model of a motor used for overload protection.
In : rated current
Normally K is within the range 2 to 9, according to motor data
The temperature T at any instant is given by:
sheet. It is generally a setting of the thermal overload
T=Tmax (1-e t/τ)
protection. A typical value of K is 3.
where: Finally, the thermal replica model needs to take into account
Tmax = final steady state temperature the fact that the motor will tend to cool down during periods
of light load, and the initial state of the motor. The motor will
τ = heating time constant have a cooling time constant, τr , that defines the rate of
Temperature rise is proportional to the current squared: cooling. Hence, the final thermal model can be expressed
as:
T=K(I R ) 2(1-e t/τ)
where: (
t = τ log e k 2 − A 2 ) (k 2
−1 ) ...Equation C9.1
IR = current which, if flowing continuously,

produces temperature Tmax in the motor where:
Therefore, it can be shown that, for any overload current I, τ = heating time constant
the permissible time t for this current to flow is: I eq
k =
I th
 
 1  A2 = initial state of motor (cold or hot) in percentage of the
t = τ log e  

 { 1 − (I R I)
2
} 

thermal state
If the initial thermal state is due to a constant load current IL,
the A2 factor can be computed by the equation A2=(IL= Ith)2
In general, the supply to which a motor is connected may
contain both positive and negative sequence components, Ith = thermal setting current
and both components of current give rise to heating in the Equation C9.1 takes into account the ‘cold’ and ‘hot’
motor. characteristics defined in IEC 60255 -149.

C9 3. Thermal (overload) protection
Some relays may use a dual slope characteristic for the heating Since the relay should ideally be matched to the protected
time constant, and hence two values of the heating time motor and be capable of close sustained overload protection,
constant are required. Switching between the two values takes a wide range of relay adjustment is desirable together with
place at a pre-defined motor current. This may be used to good accuracy and low thermal overshoot.
obtain better tripping performance during starting on motors
Typical relay setting curves are shown in Figure C9.1.
that use a star-delta starter. During starting, the motor windings
carry full line current, while in the ‘run’ condition, they carry
only 57% of the current seen by the relay. Similarly, when the
motor is disconnected from the supply, the heating time 100 000
constant τ is set equal to the cooling time constant τr.
Most of motors are designed to operate at a maximum ambient
temperature of 40°C. This value is defined in motor datasheet, 10 000
as the rated ambient temperature, used to defined the thermal = 60min
withstand (cold and hot curves). = 54min
The real operating ambient temperature could be less (e.g. 1000

= 48min
motor in caves) or more than the rated value. Most of thermal = 42min
relays proposed to connect an ambient temperature sensor = 36min
(e.g. with RTDs sensors), and this temperature is taken into
account in the thermal level estimation. The calculated heat 100
rise value could be increased or decreased when the

temperature is above or below the rated value. As defined in
the IEC60255-151, the motor thermal level is compensated
10 = 30min
by a factor Fa, defined by the following equation:
= 24min
Tmax - Tlimit = 18min
Fa = = 12min
Tmax - Ta 1
= 6min
= 1min
Where
Tmax is the motor maximum temperature
0
Ta is the actual ambient temperature of the motor 1 10
Thermal equivalent current in terms of the current
Tlimit is the ambient temperature design limits for operation thermal threshold >
at rated load without causing thermal degradation of insulation,

typically 40°C
Figure C9.1:
When temperature sensor is not available, a user setting could Thermal overload characteristic curves.
be provided to adjust the ambient temperature, when it is Cold curves. Initial thermal state 0%
different from typical value (40°C).
4. Start/stall protection
When a motor is started, it draws a current well in excess of However, when a star-delta starter is used, the line current
full load rating throughout the period that the motor takes to will only be √3 of the DOL starting current.
run-up to speed. The motor starting current reduces somewhat
Should a motor stall whilst running, or fail to start, due to
as motor speed increases. The starting current will vary
excessive loading, the motor will draw a current equal to its’
depending on the design of the motor and method of starting.
locked rotor current. It is not therefore possible to distinguish
For motors started DOL (direct-on-line), the nominal starting
between a stall condition and a healthy start solely on the
current can be 4-8 times full-load current.
basis of the current drawn. Discrimination between the two
conditions must be made based on the duration of the current

4. Start/stall protection C9
drawn. For motors where the starting time is less than the time. Figure C9.2 illustrates the principle of operation for a
safe stall time of the motor, protection is easy to arrange. successful start.
However, where motors are used to drive high inertia loads,
the stall withstand time can be less than the starting time. In
these cases, an additional means must be provided to enable
100
discrimination between the two conditions to be achieved.
4.1 Excessive start time/locked rotor protection
A motor may fail to accelerate from rest for a number of Relay current setting
reasons:
Motor starting current
a. loss of a supply phase
Relay time setting
b. mechanical problems 10
c. low supply voltage
Time (s)
d. excessive load torque
... etc.
A large current will be drawn from the supply, and cause
extremely high temperatures to be generated within the motor. 1
This is made worse by the fact that the motor is not rotating,
and hence no cooling due to rotation is available. Winding
damage will occur very quickly – either to the stator or rotor
windings depending on the thermal limitations of the particular
design (motors are said to be stator or rotor limited in this
respect). The method of protection varies depending on
whether the starting time is less than or greater than the safe 0.1
stall time. In both cases, from the motor standstill status, the 0.1 1 10
Current (p.u. )
initiation of the start may be sensed by detection of the closure
of the switch in the motor feeder (contactor or CB) and
optionally current rising above a starting current threshold
value – typically 200% of motor rated current. For the case Figure C9.2:
Motor start protection start time < safe stall time
of both conditions being sensed, they may have to occur
within a narrow aperture of time for a start to be recognised.
Special requirements may exist for certain types of motors
installed in hazardous areas (e.g. motors with type of protection 4.1.2 Start time => safe stall time
EEx ‘e’) and the setting of the relay must take these into Where motors are used to drive high inertia loads, the stall
account. Sometimes a permissive interlock for machine withstand time can be less than the starting time. For this
pressurisation (on EEx ‘p’ machines) may be required, and condition, a definite time overcurrent characteristic by itself
this can be conveniently achieved by use of a relay digital is not sufficient, since the time delay required is longer than
input and the in-built logic capabilities. the maximum time that the motor can be allowed to carry
4.1.1 Start time < safe stall time stalling current safely. An additional means of detection of
rotor movement, indicating a safe start, is required. A speed-
In the majority of cases the starting time of a normal induction sensing switch usually provides this function. Detection of a
motor is less than the maximum stall withstand time. Under successful start is used to select the relay timer used for the
this condition it is possible to discriminate on a time basis safe run up time. This time can be longer than the safe stall
between the two conditions and thus provide protection against time, as there is both a (small) decrease in current drawn by
stalling. the motor during the start and the rotor fans begin to improve
Protection is achieved by use of a definite time overcurrent cooling of the machine as it accelerates. If a start is sensed
characteristic, the current setting being greater than full load by the relay through monitoring current and/or start device
current but less than the starting current of the machine. The closure, but the speed switch does not operate, the relay
time setting should be a little longer than the start time, but element uses the safe stall time setting to trip the motor before
less than the maximum stall withstand time. Generally, the damage can occur. Figure C9.3(a) illustrates the principle of
time setting should be set 1 or 2 seconds above the start operation for a successful start, and Figure C9.3(b) for an
unsuccessful start.

C9 4. Start/stall protection
Normally the speed sensor indicates motor start or not. 4.3 Re-acceleration
Alternatively, some motor protection relays can distinguish In many systems, transient supply voltage loss (typically up
start and stall without external speed information. Such a relay to 2 seconds) does not result in tripping of designated motors.
estimates the motor slip based on the calculation of the They are allowed to re-accelerate upon restoration of the
positive sequence resistance of the machine. supply. During re-acceleration, they draw a current similar to
the starting current for a period that may be several seconds.
It is thus above the motor stall relay element current threshold.
The stall protection would be expected to operate and defeat
1 the object of the re-acceleration scheme if the allowable stall
CB closed time is less than the re-acceleration time.
0
Time
1 The undervoltage protection element can be used to detect
Current the presence of the voltage dip and voltage recovery. If, on
0
Speed Time recovery of the voltage, the current exceeds the stalling
1 current threshold within a definite time such as 5 seconds,
switch
information 0 then the re-acceleration is recognised. In that case, the re-
Time acceleration timer replaces the stall timer, as shown in Figure
Trip 1
command C9.4. If the current falls below the stalling current threshold
0
before the end of the expired of the re-acceleration timer, the
(a) Successful start re-acceleration is successful; otherwise the relay issues a trip
signal.
1 This function is disabled during the starting period.
CB closed
0
Time
1
Current
0 Phase current
start successful
Speed
1
switch
information 0 Stalling current
Stall time Time
Trip 1 Starting current
setting
command 0 0
Time
Time
Low voltage
(b) Unsuccessful start detection 5s window for re-acceleration
1
Figure C9.3:
Time
Relay settings for start time> stall time
Reacceleration Re-acceleration timer
successful
4.2 Stall protection 1
Should a motor stall when running or be unable to start 0

because of excessive load, it will draw a current from the
Time
supply equivalent to the locked rotor current. It is obviously
desirable to avoid damage by disconnecting the machine as
quickly as possible if this condition arises.
Figure C9.4:
Motor stalling can be recognised by the motor current
Motor re-acceleration
exceeding the start current threshold after a successful start
– i.e. a motor start has been detected and the motor current
has dropped below the start current threshold within the motor 4.4 Number of starts limitation
safe start time. A subsequent rise in motor current above the
motor starting current threshold is then indicative of a stall Any motor has a restriction on the number of starts that are
condition, and tripping will occur if this condition persists for allowed in a defined period to ensure that the thermal limit of
greater than the setting of the stall timer. An instantaneous the motor is not exceeded and to limit any mechanical impact
overcurrent relay element provides protection. from too many starts.

4. Start/stall protection C9
If the permitted number of starts in a given supervising period In Figure C9.6 two starts occur within 55 minutes. Without the
is reached, starting should be blocked for the remaining time Inhibit timer a new supervision period would start in 5 minutes
of that supervising period or the defined start inhibit time and permit a new start however as the Inhibit timer is set to
which is greater, as shown in Figure C9.5 and Figure C9.6. 10 minutes, starting is blocked until this expires (a further 5
minutes later).
The situation is complicated by the fact the number of
Motor start permitted ‘hot’ starts in a given supervising period is less
than the number of ‘cold’ starts, due to the differing initial
temperatures of the motor. The relay must maintain a separate
count of ‘cold’ and ‘hot’ starts. By making use of the data
ON
held in the motor thermal replica, ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ starts can
OFF be distinguished.
Start inhibition SUPERVISING TIME=60min
SUPERVISING TIME=60min Motor start
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
tn =8min Start inhibition SUPERVISING TIME=60min
INHIB. START TIME =10min
SUPERVISING TIME tn=60 - 8= 52min
SUPERVISING TIME=60min
ON
Figure C9.5: OFF

Motor start inhibition (a)
tn =55min
INHIB. START TIME =10min
In these two figures, the maximum number of starts is 2. Figure C9.5 SUPERVISING TIME - tn=5min
shows the situation where two starts have occurred within 8 minutes.
As the supervision time is set to 60 minutes no further starts are
permitted for 52 minutes even if the Inhibit start time expires. Figure C9.6:
Motor start inhibition (b)
5. Short circuit protection
Motor short-circuit protection is often provided to cater for protection is effectively worthless in these circumstances. It
major stator winding faults and terminal flashovers. Because is therefore only provided on motors fed via circuit breakers.
of the relatively greater amount of insulation between phase
5.1 Motor differential protection
windings, faults between phases seldom occur. As the stator
windings are completely enclosed in grounded metal, the The over current protection is usually applied for the motor
fault would very quickly involve earth, which would then operate stator winding faults. However the sensitivity of the over current
the instantaneous earth fault protection. A single definite time protection declines when the motor capacity increases. So
overcurrent relay element is all that is required for this purpose, when the motor capacity is more than 2000KW or the over
set to about 125% of motor starting current. The time delay current protection is not sufficiently sensitive, it is necessary
is required to prevent spurious operation due to CT spill to apply differential protection on larger motors via circuit
currents, and is typically set at 100ms. If the motor is fed from breakers to protect against phase-phase and single phase
a fused contactor, co-ordination is required with the fuse, and earth faults. Damage to the motor in case of a fault is minimised,
this will probably involve use of a long time delay for the relay as the differential protection can be made quite sensitive and
element. Since the object of the protection is to provide rapid hence detecting faults in their early stages.
fault clearance to minimise damage caused by the fault, the

C9 5. Short circuit protection
For details on the conventional differential protection (both the magnetic balance is broken and there are secondary
biased differential protection and the high impedance currents which will trigger the relay operation.
differential protection), refer to the section “Differential
Unlike the other protection applications, here the current
Protection of Direct Connected Generators” on chapter
transformers are normally installed very near the motor output
“Generator and Generator-Transformer Protection”.
terminal to avoid long cabling. So it only protects the motor and
The reliability of conventional differential protection relies on does not include the longer cables between motor and the control
the current transformer saturation characteristic, current switchgear.
transformer’s secondary burden and so on. As explained in
5.2.1 Settings
previous chapters, it is almost impossible that the two current
transformers have the same transient characteristics during In this section, it takes the unearthed system as example to
high current events such as motor starting. It is possible that introduce the setting rule for self balance differential protection.
the differential protection trips incorrectly under an external
In the normal condition, the unbalance current from the core
fault condition for similar reasons. So the settings for
balance current transformer is very small. The unbalance current
conventional bias differential protection cannot be very small
is due to the capacitive current of the motor (I’cm) not including
or additional restraint elements (such as CT saturation
the capacitive current of the cable from motor to control switchgear.
detection) must be provided to ensure stability in all conditions.
The current setting for self balance winding differential
5.2 Self balance differential protection
protection shall be larger than the maximum capacitive current
An alternative is to apply self balance winding differential of the motor when there are external faults on the other feeds
protection. It is also named as magnetic balanced differential or equipment, as shown in Figure C9.8. Compared with the
protection, as shown in Figure C9.7. Three core balance normal condition, the capacitive current will increase by a
current transformers are applied in the self balance winding maximum √3 due to the increase of the phase voltage under
differential protection. As with the more conventional approach the external single phase earth fault. Due to the relatively low
to differential protection both ends of the windings must be value of this capacitive current the protection current setting
accessible at the motor terminals. can be very small and the sensitivity is high. The capacitive
currents of the overall system under the distribution transformer
Both ends of each phase winding pass through the current
return to the system via the fault point, as shown in Figure
transformer in different directions. The conductors shall be
C9.9. The unbalance current of the core balance current
placed reasonably concentric within the window of the core
transformer is the overall system capacitive current.
balance current transformers to keep the spill current to a
minimum.
IA2
F3 F2
IB2
F6 F5 Y D
Motor
C
Icm
IC2
F9 F8
Icm
Figure C9.7:
Self balance winding differential protection
CBA
So under the normal condition, the magnetic flux and the Figure C9.8:
secondary current shall be very small. When there are phase- Capacity current distribution under external single phase
phase or single phase earth faults within the stator windings, earth fault

5. Short circuit protection C9
So if the sum of the capacitive currents of the overall system is

larger than the current setting, the self balance winding differential
protection can detect the internal single phase earth fault.
5.2.2 Summary
Compared with the conventional differential protection, the self
balance winding differential protection does not rely on the Y D
consistency of CT characteristics and its reliability is much higher.
The HV motor is connected within the distribution power system.
The distribution power system is usually insulated system or high Icm
impedance earthing system. So the single phase earth fault current
is lower and normally cannot trigger the conventional differential
Icm
protection. However due to the lower current setting, the self
balance differential protection can be sensitive to the single phase
∑Ι cap
earth fault of the HV motor stator. CBA
It should be noted that the protection zone of a self balance

differential protection does not normally include the cable
between the machine output terminals and controlling Figure C9.9:
Capacity current distribution under internal single phase earth
switchgear. An additional relay is needed to protect this cable.
fault
6. Earth fault protection
One of the most common faults to occur on a motor is a stator

winding fault. Whatever the initial form of the fault (phase-
phase, etc.) or the cause (cyclic overheating, etc.), the Upstream
presence of the surrounding metallic frame and casing will a
ensure that it rapidly develops into a fault involving earth.
Therefore, provision of earth fault protection is very important.
The type and sensitivity of protection provided depends c b
largely on the system earthing, so the various types will be a b c
dealt with in turn. It is common, however, to provide both Flow of
instantaneous and time-delayed relay elements to cater for current
major and slowly developing faults.
6.1 Solidly-earthed system
Most LV systems fall into this category, for reasons of personnel
safety. Two types of earth fault protection are commonly found
– depending on the sensitivity required.
For applications where a sensitivity of > 20% of motor
continuous rated current is acceptable, conventional earth
fault protection using the residual CT connection of Figure
C9.10 can be used.
MiCOM
A lower limit is imposed on the setting by possible load P241
unbalance and/or (for HV systems) system capacitive currents. Downstream
Care must be taken to ensure that the relay does not operate
from the spill current resulting from unequal CT saturation
during motor starting, where the high currents involved will Figure C9.10:
almost certainly saturate the motor CTs. Residual CT connection for earth fault protection

C9 6. Earth fault protection
It is common to use a stabilising resistor in series with the The effect of the stabilising resistor is to increase the effective
relay, with the value being calculated using the formula: setting of the relay under these conditions, and hence delay
tripping. When a stabilising resistor is used, the tripping
I st ...Equation C9.2
R stab =
IO
( Rct + kR l + R r ) characteristic should normally be instantaneous. An
alternative technique, avoiding the use of a stabilising resistor
is to use a definite time delay characteristic.
where:
The time delay used will normally have to be found by trial and
Ist = starting current referred to CT secondary
error, as it must be long enough to prevent maloperation
Io = relay earth fault setting (A) during a motor start, but short enough to provide effective
Rstab = stabilising resistor value (ohms) protection in case of a fault.
Rct = d.c. resistance of CT secondary (ohms) Co-ordination with other devices must also be considered. A
common means of supplying a motor is via a fused contactor
RI = CT single lead resistance (ohms) The contactor itself is not capable of breaking fault current
k = CT connection factor beyond a certain value, which will normally be below the
maximum system fault current – reliance is placed on the fuse
(= 1 for star pt at CT in these circumstances. As a trip command from the relay
= 2 for star pt at relay) instructs the contactor to open, care must be taken to ensure
that this does not occur until the fuse has had time to operate.
Rr = relay input resistance (ohms) Figure C9.11(a) illustrates incorrect grading of the relay with
the fuse, the relay operating first for a range of fault currents
in excess of the contactor breaking capacity. Figure C9.11(b)
illustrates correct grading. To achieve this, it may require the
use of an intentional definite time delay in the relay.
6.2 Resistance-earthed systems
Time These are commonly found on HV systems, where the

Fuse Contactor intention is to limit damage caused by earth faults through
breaking limiting the earth fault current that can flow. Two methods of
capacity resistance earthing are commonly used:
6.2.1 Low resistance earthing
E/F relay
In this method, the value of resistance is chosen to limit the
fault current to a few hundred amps – values of 200A-400A
being typical. With a residual connection of line CTs, the
Current minimum sensitivity possible is about 10% of CT rated primary
(a) Incorrect current, due to the possibility of CT saturation during starting.
For better sensitivity with lower current setting, it is necessary
to use a core-balance CT. The primary current of the core-
balance CT is no longer related to the normal line current. For
Time a core-balance CT, the relay may be set non-directional with
Fuse Contactor a current sensitivity of less than 30% of the minimum earth
breaking fault level but greater than three times the steady state
capacity charging current of the motor feeder. The setting should not
be greater than about 30% of the minimum earth fault current
E/F relay expected.
If the above setting guidelines for applying a non-directional
relay cannot be achieved due to the current magnitudes, then
Current a sensitive directional earth fault element will be required.
This eliminates the need to set the relay in excess of the
(b) Correct
maximum capacitive charging current for the protected
feeder.
Figure C9.11:
Grading of relay with fused contactor

6. Earth fault protection C9
The required time delay setting shall ensure that the contactor Protection for Phase and Earth Faults, Section 17 and 18]) for
does not attempt to interrupt fault current in excess of its breaking details.
capacity when the motor is supplied by a fused contactor.
6.3 Insulated earth system
6.2.2 High resistance earthing
See Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth
In some HV systems, high resistance earthing is used to limit Faults, Section 18] for details.
the earth fault current to a few amps. In this case, the system
6.4 Petersen coil earthed system
capacitive charging current will normally prevent conventional
sensitive earth fault protection being applied, as the See Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth
magnitude of the capacitive charging current will be Faults, Section 19] for details.
comparable with the earth fault current in the event of a fault.
The solution is to use a sensitive directional earth fault relay. A
core balance CT is used in conjunction with a VT measuring
the residual voltage of the system, with a relay characteristic
angle setting of +45° (see Chapter [C1: Overcurrent
7. Negative phase sequence protection
Negative phase sequence current is generated from any • Motor positive sequence impedance at slip s
unbalanced voltage condition, such as unbalanced loading,
loss of a single phase, or single-phase faults. The latter will
normally be detected by earth fault protection, however, a
( 2
) (
=  R1p + R'2p s + X1p + X'2p
 ) 2 0.5


fault location in a motor winding may not result in the earth
Hence, at standstill (s=1.0), impedance
fault protection operating unless it is of the sensitive variety.
0. 5
=  R1p + R 2' p
( ) + (X X 2' p  )
2 2
The actual value of the negative sequence current depends on +
1p
the degree of unbalance in the supply voltage and the ratio of  
the negative to the positive sequence impedance of the machine.
• The motor negative sequence impedance at slip s
The degree of unbalance depends on many factors, but the
negative sequence impedance is more easily determined.
( (2 − s )) ( )
2 0.5
=  R1p + R 2' p
2
+ X 1p + X 2' p 
Considering the classical induction motor equivalent circuit with 
magnetising impedance neglected of Figure C9.12:
(a) Positive phase sequence

(b) Negative phase sequence
equivalent circuit
equivalent circuit
Figure C9.12:
Induction motor equivalent circuit

C9 7. Negative phase sequence protection
and slip s is close to zero at normal running speed, the more susceptible in this respect, as the rotor resistance of
impedance such machines tends to be higher. Protection against negative
sequence currents is therefore essential.
0. 5
=  R1n + R 2' n 2
2
( ) ( )
2
+ X 1n + X 2' n  Normally motor protection relays have a negative sequence
 current measurement capability, in order to provide such
where: protection. The level of negative sequence unbalance depends
largely upon the type of fault. For loss of a single phase at
R1 is the stator resistance
start, the negative sequence current will be 50% of the normal
X1 is the stator leakage reactance starting current. It is more difficult to provide an estimate of
R'2 is the rotor equivalent resistance referred to stator the negative sequence current if loss of a phase occurs while
running. This is because the impact on the motor may vary
X'2 is the rotor equivalent leakage reactance referred to stator widely, from increased heating to stalling due to the reduced
suffix p indicates positive sequence quantities torque available.
and A typical setting for negative sequence current protection

must take into account the fact that the motor circuit protected
suffix n indicates negative sequence quantities by the relay may not be the source of the negative sequence
Now, if resistance is neglected (justifiable as the resistance current. Time should be allowed for the appropriate protection
is small compared to the reactance), it can be seen that the to clear the source of the negative sequence current without
negative sequence reactance at running speed is approximately introducing risk of overheating to the motor being considered.
equal to the positive sequence reactance at standstill. An This indicates a two stage tripping characteristic, similar in
alternative more meaningful way of expressing this is: principle to overcurrent protection. A low-set definite time-
delay element can be used to provide an alarm, with an IDMT
positive seq. impedance starting current element used to trip the motor in the case of higher levels of
=
negative seq. impedance rated current negative sequence current, such as loss-of- phase conditions
at start, occurring. This element should be set in excess of
and it is noted that a typical LV motor starting current is 6xFLC. the anticipated negative phase sequence current resulting
Therefore, a 5% negative sequence voltage (due to, say, from asymmetric CT saturation during starting, but less than
unbalanced loads on the system) would produce a 30% the negative phase sequence current resulting from loss of
negative sequence current in the machine, leading to excessive one phase during starting. Typical settings might be 20% of
heating. For the same motor, negative sequence voltages in CT rated primary current for the definite time element and
excess of 17% will result in a negative sequence current 50% for the IDMT element. The IDMT time delay has to be
larger than rated full load current. chosen to protect the motor while, if possible, grading with
other negative sequence relays on the system. Some relays
Negative sequence current is at twice supply frequency. Skin
may not incorporate two elements, in which case the single
effect in the rotor means that the heating effect in the rotor
element should be set to protect the motor, with grading being
of a given negative sequence current is larger than the same
a secondary consideration.
positive sequence current. Thus, negative sequence current
may result in rapid heating of the motor. Larger motors are
8. Wound rotor induction motor protection
On wound rotor machines, some degree of protection against times full load if a slight time delay of approximately 30
faults in the rotor winding can be given by an instantaneous milliseconds is incorporated. It should be noted that faults
stator current overcurrent relay element. As the starting current occurring in the rotor winding would not be detected by any
is normally limited by resistance to a maximum of twice full differential protection applied to the stator.
load, the instantaneous unit can safely be set to about three

9. RTD temperature detection C9
RTDs are used to measure temperatures of motor windings exceeds the appropriate setpoint(s). Occasionally, HV motors
or shaft bearings. A rise in temperature may denote overloading are fed via a unit transformer, and in these circumstances,
of the machine, or the beginning of a fault in the affected some of the motor protection relay RTD inputs may be
part. A motor protection relay will therefore usually have the assigned to the transformer winding temperature RTDs, thus
capability of accepting a number of RTD inputs and internal providing overtemperature protection for the transformer
logic to initiate an alarm and/or trip when the temperature without the use of a separate relay.
10. Bearing failures
There are two types of bearings to be considered: the anti- disconnecting the stalled motor rapidly to avoid consequential
friction bearing (ball or roller), used mainly on small motors damage. Refer to Section 4 on stall protection for details of
(up to around 350kW), and the sleeve bearing, used mainly suitable protection.
on large motors.
Failure of a sleeve bearing can be detected by means of a
The failure of ball or roller bearings usually occurs very quickly, rise in bearing temperature. The normal thermal overload
causing the motor to come to a standstill as pieces of the relays cannot give protection to the bearing itself but will
damaged roller get entangled with the others. There is therefore operate to protect the motor from excessive damage. Use of
very little chance that any relay operating from the input current RTD temperature detection, as noted in Section 9, can provide
can detect bearing failures of this type before the bearing is suitable protection, allowing investigation into the cause of
completely destroyed. Therefore, protection is limited to the bearing running hot prior to complete failure.
11. Undervoltage protection
Motors may stall when subjected to prolonged undervoltage open, otherwise a start will never be permitted. The voltage
conditions. Transient undervoltages will generally allow a and time delay settings will be system and motor dependent.
motor to recover when the voltage is restored, unless the They must allow for all voltage dips likely to occur on the
supply is weak. system during transient faults, starting of motors, etc. to avoid
spurious trips. As motor starting can result in a voltage
Motors fed by contactors have inherent undervoltage
depression to 80% of nominal, the voltage setting is likely to
protection, unless a latched contactor is used. Where a specific
be below this value. Re-acceleration is normally possible for
undervoltage trip is required, a definite time undervoltage
voltage dips lasting between 0.5-2 seconds, depending on
element is used. If two elements are provided, alarm and trip
system, motor and drive characteristics, and therefore the
settings can be used. An interlock with the motor starter is
time delay will be set bearing these factors in mind.
required to block relay operation when the starting device is

C9 12. Loss-of-load protection
Loss-of-load protection has a number of possible functions. low load (e.g. a compressor), the function may also need to
It can be used to protect a pump against becoming unprimed, be inhibited for the duration of the start, to prevent maloperation.
or to stop a motor in case of a failure in a mechanical
The setting will be influenced by the function to be performed
transmission (e.g. conveyor belt), or it can be used with
by the relay. A time delay may be required after pickup of the
synchronous motors to protect against loss-of-supply
element to prevent operation during system transients. This
conditions. Implementation of the function is by a low forward
is especially important for synchronous motor loss-of-supply
power relay element or a simple undercurrent relay when
protection.
there is not voltage input, interlocked with the motor starting
device to prevent operation when the motor is tripped and
thus preventing a motor start. Where starting is against a very
13. Anti-backspin function
A motor may be driving a very high inertia load. Once the CB This function uses an undervoltage if the phase-phase or
or contactor supplying power to the motor is switched off, the single phase remanent voltage of the motor is connected to
rotor may continue to turn for a considerable length of time the relay. The voltage threshold setting for the anti-backspin
as it decelerates. The motor has now become a generator protection should be set at some low value to indicate that
and applying supply voltage out of phase may result in the motor is stopped. If the relay can not get the remanent
catastrophic failure. In some other applications for example voltage, this function uses a simple time delay to indicate the
when a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, motor is stopped after the CB or contactor is open.
the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin the rotor
backwards. It would be very undesirable to start the motor at
this time. In these circumstances the anti-backspin function
is used to detect when the rotor has completely stopped, in
order to allow re-starting of the motor.
14. Additional protection for synchronous motors
The differences in construction and operational characteristics but eventually stall. Hence, it must be disconnected from the
of synchronous motors mean that additional protection is supply.
required for these types of motor. This additional protection
The current drawn during an out-of-step condition is at a very
is discussed in the following sections.
low power factor. Hence a relay element that responds to low
14.1 Out-of-step protection power factor can be used to provide protection. The element
must be inhibited during starting, when a similar low power
A synchronous motor may decelerate and lose synchronism
factor condition occurs. This can conveniently be achieved
(fall out-of-step) if a mechanical overload exceeding the peak
by use of a definite time delay, set to a value slightly in excess
motor torque occurs. Other conditions that may cause this
of the motor start time.
condition are a fall in the applied voltage to stator or field
windings. Such a fall may not need to be prolonged, a voltage The power factor setting will vary depending on the rated
dip of a few seconds may be all that is required. An out-of- power factor of the motor. It would typically be 0.1 less than
step condition causes the motor to draw excessive current the motor rated power factor i.e. for a motor rated at 0.85
and generate a pulsating torque. Even if the cause is removed power factor, the setting would be 0.75.
promptly, the motor will probably not recover synchronism,

14. Additional protection for synchronous motors C9
14.2 Protection against sudden restoration of supply The underfrequency setting value needs to consider the power
system characteristics. In some power systems, lengthy periods
If the supply to a synchronous motor is interrupted, it is
of operation at frequencies substantially below normal occur,
essential that the motor breaker be tripped as quickly as
and should not result in a motor trip. The minimum safe operating
possible if there is any possibility of the supply being restored
frequency of the motor under load conditions must therefore
automatically or without the machine operator’s knowledge.
be determined, along with minimum system frequency.
This is necessary in order to prevent the supply being restored
14.2.2 Low-forward-power protection
out of phase with the motor generated voltage.
This can be applied in conjunction with a time delay to detect
Two methods are generally used to detect this condition, in
a loss-of-supply condition when the motor may share a busbar
order to cover different operating modes of the motor.
with other loads. The motor may attempt to supply the other
14.2.1 Underfrequency protection loads with power from the stored kinetic energy of rotation.
The underfrequency relay element will operate in the case A low forward power relay can detect this condition. See
of the supply failing when the motor is on load, which causes Section 12 for details. A time delay will be required to prevent
the motor to decelerate quickly. Typically, two elements are operation during system transients leading to momentary
provided, for alarm and trip indications. reverse power flow in the motor.
15. Motor protection examples
This section gives examples of the protection of HV and LV 15.1.1 Thermal protection
induction motors.
The current setting ITH is set equal to the motor full load
15.1 Protection of a HV motor current, as it is a CMR rated motor. Motor full load current
can be calculated as 211A, therefore (in secondary quantities):
Table C9.2 gives relevant parameters of a HV induction motor
to be protected. Using a MiCOM P241 motor protection relay, 211
the important protection settings are calculated in the following
I TH = = 0.844
250
sections.
Use a value of 0.85, nearest available setting.
The relay has a parameter, K, to allow for the increased heating
Quantity Value
effect of negative sequence currents. In the absence of any
Rated output 1000kW CMR specific information, use K=3.
Rated Voltage 3.3kV Two thermal heating time constants are provided, τ1 and τ2.
Rated frequency 50Hz τ2 is used for starting methods other than DOL, otherwise it
Rated power factor/efficiency 0.9/0.92 is set equal to τ1. τ1 is set to the heating time constant, hence
Stall withstand time cold/hot 20/7s
τ1 = τ2= 25mins. Cooling time constant τr is set as a multiple
of τ1. With a cooling time constant of 75mins,
Starting current 550% DOL
Permitted starts cold/hot 3/2 τr = 3 × τ1
CT ratio 250/1 15.1.2 Short circuit protection
Start time@100% voltage 4s Following the recommendations of Section 5, with a starting
Start time@80% voltage 5.5s current of 550% of full load current, the short-circuit element
Heating/cooling time constant 25/75 min is set to 1.25 x 5.5 x 211A = 1450A. In terms of the relay
System earthing Solid nominal current, the setting value is 1450/250 = 5.8 IN .
Control device Circuit Breaker In order to avoid false tripping during start-up, there is a
minimum time delay of 100ms for currents in the range 100%
Table C9.2: to 120% of the setting and a minimum time delay of 40ms for
Motor data for example currents above 120% setting. These settings are satisfactory.

C9 15. Motor protection examples
15.1.3 Earth fault protection 15.1.6 Negative phase sequence protection

It is assumed that no Core Balance CT is fitted. A typical Two protection elements are provided, the first is definite
setting of 30% of motor rated current is used, leading to an time-delayed to provide an alarm. The second is an IDMT
earth fault relay setting of 0.3 x 211/250 = 0.25 IN. A stabilising element used to trip the motor on high levels of negative
resistor is required, calculated in accordance with Equation sequence current, such as would occur on a loss of phase
C9.2 to prevent maloperation due to CT spill current during condition at starting.
starting as the CTs may saturate. With the stabilising resistor
In accordance with Section 7, use a setting of 20% with a
present, instantaneous tripping is permitted.
time delay of 30s for the definite time element and 50% with
The alternative is to omit the stabilising resistor and use a a TMS of 1.0 for the IDMT element. The resulting characteristic
definite time delay in association with the earth fault element. is shown in Figure C9.14. The motor thermal protection, as it
However, the time delay must be found by trial and error during utilises a negative sequence component, is used for protection
commissioning. of the motor at low levels of negative sequence current.
15.1.4 Locked rotor/excessive start time protection
The current element must be set in excess of the rated current
10
of the motor, but well below the starting current of the motor
to ensure that a start condition is recognised (this could also
be achieved by use of an auxiliary contact on the motor CB Time (sec)
wired to the relay). A setting of 500A (2 x IN ) is suitable. The 1
associated time delay needs to be set to longer than the start
time, but less than the cold stall time. Use a value of 15s.
15.1.5 Stall protection 0.1
10 Current (A) 10000
The same current setting as for locked rotor protection can
be used – 500A. The time delay has to be less than the hot
stall time of 7s but greater than the start time by a sufficient Figure C9.14:
margin to avoid a spurious trip if the start time happens to Motor protection example negative sequence protection
be a little longer than anticipated. Use a value of 6.5s. characteristic
The protection characteristics for Sections 15.1.1-5 are shown

in Figure C9.13. 15.1.7 Other protection considerations
If the relay can be supplied with a suitable voltage signal,
stall protection can be inhibited during re-acceleration after
Motor tripping characteristics. a voltage dip using the undervoltage element (set to 80-85%
1000
of rated voltage). Undervoltage protection (set to approximately
80% voltage with a time delay of up to several seconds,
100
dependent on system characteristics) and reverse phase
protection can also be implemented to provide extra protection.
Time (sec)
10
Unless the drive is critical to the process, it is not justifiable
to provide a VT specially to enable these features to be
1
implemented.
0.1 15.2 Protection of an LV motor

LV motors are commonly fed via fused contactors and therefore
0.01
0.01 1 10 the tripping times of a protection relay for overcurrent must
be carefully co-ordinated with the fuse to ensure that the
contactor does not attempt to break a current in excess of
its rating. Table C9.3(a) gives details of an LV motor and
Cold thermal Stall
associated fused contactor. A MiCOM P211 motor protection
Hot thermal Start current (100%V)
S/C Start current (80%V) relay is used to provide the protection.
Locked rotor
15.2.1 CT ratio
The relay is set in secondary quantities, and therefore a
suitable CT ratio has to be calculated. From the relay manual,
Figure C9.13:
Protection characteristics for motor protection example a CT with 5A secondary rating and a motor rated current inthe

15. Motor protection examples C9
(a) LV motor example data In = motor rated primary current
Parameter Value Unit

Ip = CT primary current
Standard IEC 60034 Hence,
Motor voltage 400 V Ib = 5 × 132/150 = 4.4A
Motor kW 75 kW
With a motor starting current of 670% of nominal, a setting of
Motor kVA 91.45 kVA the relay thermal time constant with motor initial thermal state
Motor FLC 132 A of 50% of 15s is found satisfactory, as shown in Figure C9.15.
Starting current 670 %
Starting time 4.5 s
Contactor rating 300 A
250A
Contactor breaking 650 A
capacity
Contactor
Fuse rating 250 A
P211 CT
(b) Relay settings

Cable
Parameter Symbol Value Unit

Overcurrent Disabled - M
Overload setting 4.4 A (a) LV Motor protection - Contactor fed example
1000
Overload time delay 15 s
Unbalance 20 %
100
Unbalance time delay 25 s
Time
Loss of phase time delay 5 s

10
Table C9.3:
LV Motor protection setting example 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
trip time
range of 4-6A when referred to the secondary of CT is (b) Relay trip characteristic start current
required. Use of a 150/5A CT gives a motor rated current of
4.4A when referred to the CT secondary, so use this CT ratio.
Figure C9.15:
15.2.2 Overcurrent (short-circuit) protection Motor protection example - Contactor-fed motor
The fuse provides the motor overcurrent protection, as the
protection relay cannot be allowed to trip the contactor on
overcurrent in case the current to be broken exceeds the 15.2.4 Negative sequence (phase unbalance) protection
contactor breaking capacity. The facility for overcurrent
The motor is built to IEC standards, which permit a negative
protection within the relay is therefore disabled.
sequence (unbalance) voltage of 1% on a continuous basis.
15.2.3 Thermal (overload) protection This would lead to approximately 7% negative sequence current
in the motor (Section 7). As the relay is fitted only with a definite
The motor is an existing one, and no data exists for it except
time relay element, a setting of 20% (from Section 7) is
the standard data provided in the manufacturers catalogue.
appropriate, with a time delay of 25s to allow for short high-level
This data does not include the thermal (heating) time constant
negative sequence transients arising from other causes.
of the motor.
15.2.5 Loss of phase protection
In these circumstances, it is usual to set the thermal protection
so that it lies just above the motor starting current. The relay has a separate element for this protection. Loss of
a phase gives rise to large negative sequence currents, and
The current setting of the relay, Ib, is found using the formula
therefore a much shorter time delay is required. A definite
Ib = 5 × In / Ip time delay of 5s is considered appropriate.
where The relay settings are summarised in Table C9.3(b).

C10
A.C. Railway Protection

Chapter
C10
1. Introduction 379
2. Protection philosophy 379
3. Classical single-phase feeding 380
4. Catenary thermal protection 386
5. Catenary backup protection 387
6. Auto-transformer feeding 387
7. Feeder substation protection 391
8. Delta function 392
9. Example of classical system protection 394

C10 1. Introduction
Many regional, urban and high-speed inter-urban rail networks an existing non-electrified route is to be electrified), catenary
worldwide are electrified, to provide the motive power for faults are common. A typical fault rate is one fault per year
trains (Figure C10.1). per route kilometre of track. The relatively high fault rate,
coupled with the high mechanical tension in the contact wire
The electrification system serves as the contact interface for
(typically 6-20kN) demands fast fault clearance. Should a
current collection by each train, and in a.c. electrified railways
fault not be cleared quickly, the conductors that form the
as the means to distribute power. In general, one of two
catenary may break due to intense overheating, with the
philosophies are followed: an overhead catenary above the
consequent risk of further severe damage caused by moving
track, with power collection by a pantograph; or conductor-rail
trains and lengthy disruption to train services.
electrification, with current collection via contact shoes on a
surface of a special metallic conductor laid close to the
running rails. The latter arrangement is most commonly used
for d.c. traction, while the former arrangement is used for a.c.
and d.c. traction. Some rail routes have dual overhead and
conductor-rail electrification to facilitate route sharing by
different rail operators.
Overhead catenaries are generally considered to be safer,
as they are above the track, out of reach of rail personnel
and the public. They are the only way in which a traction feed
at high voltages can be engineered. They provide a single-
phase a.c. supply with a voltage in the range of 11kV-50kV
with respect to the running rails, although 1.5kV and 3kV d.c.
catenaries are predominant in some countries. When a
conductor-rail system is used, the supply voltage is generally
600V to 1700V d.c.
This chapter covers protection associated with HV overhead
a.c. catenary electrification. Due to the nature of many rail Figure C10.1:
routes and the limited electrical clearances (especially where Modern high-speed a.c. electric inter-urban train
2. Protection philosophy
The application of protection to electrical power transmission a greater safety hazard with railways, due to the higher
schemes is biased towards security whilst ensuring probability of people being close by (railway personnel
dependability only for the most severe faults within the working on the track, or passengers). Traction unit faults are
protected circuit. Being too adventurous with the application a fire hazard and a safety risk to passengers, especially in
of remote back-up protection should be avoided, since the tunnels. For these reasons, there will be a bias towards
consequences of unwanted tripping are serious. dependability of back-up protection at the expense of security.
The consequences of an occasional unwanted trip are far
In the case of electrified railways, there is a high probability
more acceptable (the control centre simply recloses the
that sustained electrical faults of any type (high resistance,
tripped CB, some trains are delayed while the control centre
remote breaker/protection failure etc.) may be associated
ensures it is safe to reclose) than the consequences of a
with overhead wire damage or a faulty traction unit. Fallen live
failure to trip for a fallen wire or a traction unit fault.
wires caused by mechanical damage or accident represent

3. Classical single-phase feeding C10
Classical single-phase a.c. railway electrification has been The infeed to the tracks in the ‘northbound’ direction is via
used since the 1920’s. Earlier systems used low frequency grid transformer T1 at the Feeder Station ( FS ). The power
supplies and in many countries, electrification systems using is then distributed via catenaries A and B above the northbound
16.7Hz and 25Hz supplies are still in use. The cost of and southbound tracks. At intervals, it is usual to parallel the
conversion of an extensive network, with a requirement for two catenaries at paralleling/sub-sectioning substations, as
through working of locomotives, throughout the necessary illustrated in the Figure C10.4. Load current can then flow in
changeover period, is usually prohibitive. the parallel paths, which reduces the impedance to the load
and hence the line voltage drops. As the substation terminology
Starting from Western Europe and with the influence spreading
implies, the provision of circuit breakers for each of the
worldwide, single-phase a.c. electrification at the standard
outgoing feeds to the catenaries also allows subsectioning
power system frequency of 50/60Hz, has become the
– i.e. the ability to disconnect supply from sections of catenary,
standard.
in the event of a fault, or to allow for maintenance. For a fault
Figure C10.2 illustrates classical 25kV feeding with booster on catenary ‘A’ in Figure C10.4, circuit breakers A at the
transformers ( BT ). feeder station and at SS1 would be tripped to isolate the
faulted catenary. The supply to the healthy sections of catenary
The booster transformers are used to force the traction return
current to flow in an aerially mounted return conductor,
B, C, D, E and F would be maintained.
anchored to the back of the supporting masts (Figure C10.3).
This arrangement limits traction current returning through the
rails and earth in a large cross-sectional loop, thereby reducing
electromagnetic interference with adjacent telecommunication
circuits. A step-down transformer connected phase to phase
across the Utility grid is generally the source of the traction
supply. The electrical feed to the train is via the overhead
Catenary wire
catenary, with the return current flowing via the rails and then
through the return conductor.
Contact wire
As the running rails are bonded to earth at regular intervals, Return conductor
they are nominally at earth potential. A single-pole circuit
breaker is all that is required to disconnect the supply to the
catenary in the event of a fault.
Figure C10.3:
Classical overhead line construction
Supply
transformer
Path of traction current

BT Return conductor BT
Grid supply
Catenary
Feeder station
25kV
(nominal)
Rails CB B CB A
Direction of travel
BT: Booster transformer Feeding
north
A C E
B D F
Figure C10.2:
Feeding south
Classical 25kV feeding with booster transformers
Direction of travel
: Bus section
: Feeder station
3.1 Classical system - Feeding diagram : Paralleling/Sub-sectioning substation
: Mid point substation
In practice, single-track railway lines are rare, and two or four : Neutral section
parallel tracks are more common. The overhead line equipment
is then comprised of two or four electrically independent
catenaries, running in parallel. Figure C10.4 shows the feeding
diagram for a typical two-track railway using a classical Figure C10.4:
electrification system. Classical 25kV feeding diagram

C10 3. Classical single-phase feeding
The infeed from T1 generally feeds only as far as the normally b. the prospective fault current levels at SS1, SS2 and MPSS
open bus section circuit breaker ( BS2 ) at the mid-point are progressively smaller, and the measured fault currents
substation ( MPSS ). Beyond the MPSS there is a mirror at these locations may be lower than rated current
image of the electrical arrangements T1 to BS2 shown in
c. during outages of grid supply transformers, alternative
Figure C10.4, with the remote end feeder station often 40-60km
feeding may be necessary. One possible arrangement is
distant from T1. BS2 must remain open during normal feeding,
to extend the normal feeding by closing the bus section
to prevent Utility power transfer via the single-phase catenary,
circuit breaker at the MPSS. The prospective current levels
or to avoid parallelling supplies that may be derived from
for faults beyond the MPSS will be much lower than normal
different phase pairs of the Utility grid – e.g. Phase A-B at
T1, and B-C at the next FS to the north. The same is true for
BS1, which normally remains open, as the T1 and T2
feeds are generally from different phase pairs, in an attempt
to balance the loading on the three phase Utility grid. The Catenary section A
neutral section ( NS ) is a non-conducting section of catenary

Fault current
used to provide continuity of the catenary for the pantographs Feeder contribution
via CB
of motive power units while isolating electrically the sections substation
Fault current contribution via section
of track. While only two (one per rail track) are shown for
simplicity, separating the tracks fed by T1 and T2 at the Feeder Catenary section B
Station, they are located at every point where electrical isolation
facilities are provided.
3.2 Classical system - Protection philosophy
Figure C10.5:
The grid infeed transformers are typically rated at 10 to 25MVA, ‘Hairpin’ fault current contribution
with a reactance of around 10% (or 2.5 Ω when referred to
the 25kV winding). Thus, even for a fault at the Feeder Station
busbar, the maximum prospective short circuit current is low Overcurrent protection is detailed in Section 5.
in comparison to a Utility system (typically only 10 times the
In addition to protection against faults, thermal protection of
rating of a single catenary). If a fault occurs further down the
the catenary is required to prevent excessive contact wire
track, there will be the additional impedance of the catenary
sag, leading to possible dewirements. Section 4 details the
and return conductor to be added to the impedance of the
principles of catenary thermal protection.
fault loop. A typical loop impedance would be 0.6Ω/km (1Ω
/mile). Account may have to be taken of unequal catenary Distance protection has been the most proven method of
impedances – for instance on a four-track railway, the protecting railway catenaries, due to its inherent ability to
catenaries for the two centre tracks have a higher impedance remain stable for heavy load current, whilst being able to
than those for the outer tracks due to mutual coupling effects. discriminatively trip for quite low levels of fault current. For
For a fault at the remote end of a protected section (e.g. general details of distance protection, see Chapter [C3:
Catenary section ‘A’ in Figure C10.4), the current measured Distance Protection]. Figure C10.5 shows how the fault current
at the upstream circuit breaker location (CB A at the FS) generally lags the system voltage by a greater phase angle
may be twice rated current. Thus at Feeder Stations, overcurrent than is usual under load conditions, and thus the impedance
protection can be applied, as there is a sufficient margin phase angle measurement is an important attribute of distance
between the maximum continuous load current and the fault relays for discriminating between minimum load impedance
current at the remote ends of catenary sections. However, and maximum remote fault impedance.
overcurrent protection is often used only as time-delayed
3.3 Distance protection zone reaches
back-up protection on railways, for the following reasons:
a. the protection needs to be discriminative, to ensure that Distance relays applied to a classical single-phase electrified
only the two circuit breakers associated with the faulted railway system have two measurement inputs:
line section are tripped. This demands that the protection a. a catenary to rail voltage signal derived from a line or
should be directional, to respond only to fault current busbar connected voltage transformer
flowing into the section. At location SS1, for example, the
b. a track feeder current signal derived from a current
protection for catenaries A and B would have to look back
transformer for the circuit breaker feeding the protected
towards the grid infeed. For a fault close to the FS on
section
catenary A, the remote end protection will measure only
the proportion of fault current that flows via healthy catenary
B, along the ‘hairpin’ path to SS1 and back along catenary
A to the location of the fault. This fault current contribution
may be less than rated load current (see Figure C10.5)

Distance relays perform a vector division of voltage by current 3.3.1 Zone 1

to determine the protected circuit loop impedance (Z ). Typical
The Zone 1 element of a distance relay is usually set to protect
relay characteristics are shown in the R + jX impedance
as much of the immediate catenary section as possible,
diagram, Figure C10.6.
without picking-up for faults that lie outside of the section. In
Solid faults on the catenary will present impedances to the such applications Zone 1 tripping does not need to be time-
relay along the dotted line in Figure C10.6. The illustrated graded with the operation of other protection, as the Zone 1
quadrilateral distance relay operating zones have been set reach ( Z1 ) cannot respond to faults beyond the protected
with characteristic angles to match the catenary solid-fault catenary section. Zone 1 tripping can be instantaneous (i.e.
impedance angle, which is usually 70 to 75 degrees. Two of no intentional time delay). For an under-reaching application,
the zones of operation have been set as directional, with the the Zone 1 reach must therefore be set to account for any
third being semi-directional to provide back-up protection. possible overreaching errors. These errors come from the
The measured fault impedance will be lower for a fault closer relay, the VTs and CTs and inaccurate catenary impedance
to the relay location, and the relay makes a trip decision when data. It is therefore recommended that the reach of the Zone
the measured fault impedance falls within its tripping zones. 1 element is restricted to 85% of the protected catenary
Three zones of protection (shown as Z1 , Z2 , Z3 ) are impedance, with the Zone 2 element set to cover the final
commonly applied. For each zone, the forward and resistive 15%.
impedance reach settings must be optimised to avoid tripping
3.3.2 Zone 2
for load current, but to offer the required catenary fault
coverage. All fault impedance reaches for distance zones are To allow for under-reaching errors, the Zone 2 reach ( Z2 )
calculated in polar form, Z∠Ѳ, where Z is the reach in ohms, should be set to a minimum of 115% of the protected catenary
and Ѳ is the line angle setting in degrees. For railway systems, impedance for all fault conditions. This is to guarantee
where all catenaries have a similar fault impedance angle, it coverage of the remote end not covered by Zone 1. It is often
is often convenient to add and subtract section impedances beneficial to set Zone 2 to reach further than this minimum,
algebraically and treat Z as a scalar quantity. in order to provide faster back-up protection for uncleared
downstream faults. A constraining requirement is that Zone
2 does not reach beyond the Zone 1 reach of downstream
catenary protection. This principle is illustrated in Figure
Typical solid fault impedance C10.7, for a four-track system, where the local breaker for
characteristic section H has failed to trip.
X
Max normal
load area
FS Z< Relay A SS1 SS2
Z3 A E
B F
Z2
C G
70% H
D H
Z1 CB failed CB open
closed
R A = Protected section impedance
H = Shortest following section F
Max regenerative load area
Figure C10.7:
Fault scenario for Zone 2 reach constraint (normal feeding)
Figure C10.6:
Polar impedance plot of typical trip characteristics
In order to calculate Z2 for the FS circuit breaker of protected

Relays at all of the track sectioning substations ( SS1, etc.) catenary ‘A’, a fault is imagined to occur at 70% of the shortest
will see the reverse-looking load and regeneration areas in following section. This is the closest location that unwanted
addition to those in the forward direction shown in Figure overlap could occur with Z2 main protection for catenary H.
C10.6. The reverse-looking zones, which are mirror images The value of 70% is determined by subtracting a suitable
of the forward-looking zones, have been omitted from the margin for measurement errors (15%) from the nominal 85%
diagram for clarity. Z1 reach for catenary H protection.

The apparent impedance of the fault, as viewed from relay two tracks. In a four-track system, it is usual for mutual induction
A at location FS is then calculated, noting that any fault to cause inner (middle) track catenaries to have a characteristic
impedance beyond SS1 appears to be approximately four impedance that is 13% higher than for the outside tracks.
times its actual ohmic impedance, due to the fault current
The calculation principle is similar to that for normal feeding,
parallelling along four adjacent tracks. The setting applied to
except that now the fault current is parallelling along three
the relay is the result of this calculation, with a further 15%
(= number of tracks minus one) adjacent tracks. The three
subtracted to allow for accommodation of any measurement
catenaries concerned are the protected catenary A, and the
errors at relay A location.
remainder of the healthy catenaries (R ), i.e. catenaries B
The equation for the maximum Zone 2 reach becomes: and C.
 ( A + R )  The equation for the maximum hairpin Zone 2 reach becomes:

( Z + 0. 7 H ) ×
R  ...Equation C10.1
   ( A + R) 
Z2 =
1. 15 

( Z + 0. 7D ) × R  ...Equation C10.2
 
where: Z2 =
1. 15
H = impedance of shortest following section
where:
A = impedance of protected section
D = impedance of shortest hairpin fed section
R = impedance of sections B, C, D in parallel
Z = impedance of sections A, B, C, D in parallel
R = impedance of sections B and C in parallel
The possibility of current following out and back along a
Z = impedance of sections A, B, C in parallel
hairpin path to a fault has already been discussed and it is
essential that the relay does not overreach under these To avoid overreaching for both normal feeding and hairpin
conditions. The feeding scenario is shown in Figure C10.8. fed faults, the lower of the two calculated impedances is used
as the Zone 2 reach setting.
3.3.3 Zone 3
FS SS1 The Zone 3 element would usually be used to provide overall
Z< Relay A
back-up protection for downstream catenary sections. The
A Zone 3 reach ( Z3 ) should typically be set to at least 115%
of the combined apparent impedance of the protected
Hairpin feeding
catenary plus the longest downstream catenary. Figure C10.9

B
shows the feeding considered:
The equation for the minimum Zone 3 reach (normal feeding)
C for Relay A becomes:
70% D
Relay A
CB open D CB failed FS Z< SS1 SS2
closed A
B
F
C
A = Protected section impedance
D = Shortest 'Hairpin Fed' section 100% E
D
CB failed CB open
closed
Figure C10.8:
A = Protected section impedance F
Fault scenario for maximum Zone 2 reach (hairpin feeding)
E = Longest following section
Figure C10.8 depicts a fault that has been cleared at one end
only, with the remote end breaker for section D failing to trip. Figure C10.9:
Fault scenario for Zone 3 minimum reach (normal feeding)
The fault is assumed to be on the lowest impedance catenary,
which is an important consideration when there are more than

used as the Zone 3 reach setting. Occasionally the Zone 3

 ( A + R ) 

Z 3 =. (
1.15 × Z + E × )  R 
...Equation C10.3 reach requirement may be raised further, to offset the effects
  of trains with regenerative braking, which would provide an
additional current infeed to the fault. An additional 5% reach
where: increase would generally be sufficient to allow for regenerative
under-reach.
E = impedance of longest following section
3.3.4 Reverse reaching zones
An impedance measurement zone with reverse reach is
R = impedance of sections B, C, D in parallel
typically applied to provide back-up protection for the local
Z = impedance of sections A, B, C, D in parallel busbar at a paralleling/sectionalising substation. A typical
reverse reach is 25% of the Zone 1 reach of the relay. Typically
It can be appreciated that hairpin feeding scenarios too must
Zone 3 is set with a reverse offset to provide this protection
be considered, and this is depicted in Figure C10.10: The
and also so that the Zone 3 element will satisfy the requirement
equation for the minimum Zone 3 reach (hairpin feeding)
for Switch-on-to Fault (SOTF) protection.
becomes:
3.3.5 Distance zone time delay settings
 ( A + R ) 
Z 3 = 1.15 × ( Z + D ) × 
 ...Equation C10.4 The Zone 1 time delay (tZ1) is generally set to zero, giving
 R  instantaneous operation.
where:
The Zone 2 time delay (tZ2) should be set to co-ordinate with
Zone 1 fault clearance time for downstream catenaries.
The total fault clearance time will consist of the downstream
Zone 1 operating time plus the associated breaker operating
FS SS1
Z< Relay A time. Allowance must also be made for the Zone 2 elements
A to reset following clearance of an adjacent line fault and also
for a safety margin. A typical minimum Zone 2 time delay is
of the order of 150-200ms. This time may have to be adjusted
B where the relay is required to grade with other Zone 2
Hairpin feeding
protection or slower forms of back-up protection for

downstream circuits.
C
The Zone 3 time delay (tZ3) is typically set with the same
considerations made for the Zone 2 time delay, except that
100% D the delay needs to co-ordinate with the downstream Zone 2
fault clearance. A typical minimum Zone 3 operating time
CB open D CB failed
would be in the region of 400ms. Again, this may need to be
closed
modified to co-ordinate with slower forms of back-up protection
for adjacent circuits.
F
3.4 Load avoidance
A = Protected section impedance Figure C10.4 shows how the distance relay trip characteristics
D = Longest hairpin fed section must avoid regions of the polar plot where the traction load
may be present. This has historically been achieved by using
shaped trip characteristics, such as the lenticular characteristic.
Figure C10.10: Commencing around 1990, the benefits of applying
Fault scenario for Zone 3 minimum reach (hairpin feeding) quadrilateral characteristics were realised with the introduction
of integrated circuit relays.
D = impedance of longest hairpin fed section A quadrilateral characteristic permits the resistive reach to
be set independently of the required forward zone reach,
which determines the position of the top line of the quadrilateral
R = impedance of sections B and C in parallel element. The resistive reach setting is then set merely to avoid
the traction load impedance by a safe margin and to provide
Z = impedance of sections A, B, C, D in parallel
acceptable resistive fault coverage. Figure C10.11 shows how
To avoid under-reaching for both normal feeding and hairpin the resistive reach settings are determined.
fed faults, the higher of the two calculated impedances is

than the worst-case power factor load angle, limiting the

resistive reach to Rg to avoid all load impedances. For
impedance angles greater than γ, the zone resistive reach R
e
danc
Impe ary
n
Cate
applies, and the fault arc resistive coverage is improved. This
Z3
is especially beneficial for Zone 3 back-up protection of
adjacent catenaries, where the apparent level of arc resistance
will be raised through the effect of parallel circuit infeeds at
the intervening substation.
Z2
Regen
Z1 Motoring load
Primary Ohms
Figure C10.11:
Resistive reach settings for load avoidance
For all quadrilateral characteristics, impedance point B is the

critical loading to avoid. The magnitude of the impedance is
calculated from Z=V/I taking the minimum operational
catenary voltage and the maximum short-term catenary
current. The catenary voltage is permitted to fall to 80% of
nominal or less at the train location under normal operating
conditions, and the short term current loading to rise to 160%
of nominal – these worst-case measured values should be Figure C10.12:
used when aiming to find the lowest load impedance. Polygon distance characteristics
The phase angle of point B with respect to the resistive axis

is determined as: 3.6 Impact of trains with regenerative braking
-1
Ө = COS (max lagging power factor) It is common for the Zone 1 characteristic to apply to the
The diagram shows how resistive reach E-F for Zone 1 has forward direction only. However, other zones may be set to
been chosen to avoid the worst-case loading by a suitable have a reverse reach – see Section 3.3.4 for details. Another
margin of 10%-20%. Zones 2 and 3 reach further, thus the case where reverse- reaching zones may be required is where
effect of any angular errors introduced by CTs, VTs etc. will trains having regenerative braking are used.
be more pronounced. It is therefore common to set the resistive Such trains usually regenerate at a leading power factor to
reaches progressively marginally smaller for zones with longer avoid the creation of overvoltages on the catenary. Where a
reaches. regenerating train contributes to fault current, the fault
A practical setting constraint to ensure that zones with long impedance measured by distance relays may shift up to 10°
reaches are not too narrow, and not overly affected by angle greater than α . Some railway administrations require that the
measurement tolerances, is for the resistive reach not to be fault impedance remains within the trip characteristic, and
less than 14% of the zone reach. does not stray outside the top left hand resistive boundary
of the polygon. This can be obtained by setting the reverse
3.5 Enhanced modern relay characteristics resistive reach (Rrv) to be greater than the forward resistive
Figure C10.12 illustrates the polygonal distance relay reach (Rfw).
characteristics of a modern numerical railway distance relay. 3.7 Other relay characteristics
Introduction of a γ setting modifies the basic quadrilateral
characteristic into a polygonal one, in order to optimise fault Recent relay technology developments also allow the use of
impedance coverage and load avoidance for modern railway detectors for rate of change of current and voltage (di/dt
applications. and dv/dt). These detectors are used to control the time
delays associated with time-delayed Zones 2 and 3, and
The use of the γ setting allows a load avoidance notch to be hence obtain better discrimination between load and fault
placed within the right-hand resistive reach line of the impedances. The technique is still in its infancy, but shows
quadrilateral. γ is chosen to be around 10 degrees greater significant potential for the future.

4. Catenary thermal protection C10
It is essential that railway catenaries remain in the correct relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over
position relative to the track, thus ensuring good current time. The heating leads to a temperature rise above ambient
collection by train pantographs. The catenary is designed to temperature, so in order to calculate the actual catenary
operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its temperature, the relay must know the ambient temperature
full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat along its’ length. This can be either set as an assumed ‘default’
dissipated by radiation etc. Overtemperature conditions ambient temperature, or measured, typically using a
therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed temperature probe mounted externally to the substation
to flow for a period of time. Economic catenary design building. However, the tension length of a contact wire may
demands that the catenary rating be that of the maximum be over 1km, and traverse cuttings and tunnels - with resulting
average continuous load expected. Peaks in loading due to significant changes in the local ambient temperature. Therefore,
peak-hour timetables, or trains starting or accelerating the probe should ideally be mounted in a location that most
simultaneously are accommodated using the thermal capacity accurately models the coolant air around the catenary for the
of the catenary - in much the same way as use is made of majority of the protected section:
transformer overload capacity to cater for peak loading.
a. if exposed to direct sunlight, then the probe should be
It can be shown that the temperatures during heating follow mounted to face the sun
exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease
b. if shaded from sunlight, such as running in a tunnel, then
of temperature occurs during cooling. It is important that the
the probe should be mounted on an exterior wall facing
catenary is not allowed to overheat, as this will lead to contact
away from the sun
wire supporting arms moving beyond acceptable limits, and
loss of the correct alignment with respect to the track. The c. if running in a cutting, shielded from wind, the probe should
period of time for which the catenary can be overloaded is be mounted in the lee of the substation
therefore a function of thermal history of the catenary, degree
d. if exposed to the wind, the probe should also be mounted
of overload, and ambient temperature with cooling conditions.
on an exposed wall
The tension in the catenary is often maintained by balance
It is virtually impossible to site the probe such as to exactly
weights, suspended at each end of tension lengths of contact
model the ambient conditions along the protected section,
wire. Overthermal temperature will cause the catenary to
and thus a typical error in the allowable temperature rise of
stretch, with the balance weights eventually touching the
between 1°C and 3°C will result (for well-sited and poorly-sited
ground. Further heating will then result in a loss of contact
probes, respectively). RTD and CT errors, along with relay
wire tension, and excessive sagging of the contact wire. To
tolerances may also introduce further errors of up to 1°C in
provide protection against such conditions, catenary thermal
the thermal model. Overall, the error in the temperature reading
protection is provided.
above the 20°C rated ambient could be 4°C. Therefore, relays
4.1 Catenary thermal protection method may have a setting to compensate for such measurement
tolerances, to ensure that the trip will not occur too late to
Catenary thermal protection typically uses a current based
prevent mechanical damage. Some relays may have an option
thermal replica, using load current to model heating and
to express the above tolerance as a percentage of the
cooling of the protected catenary. The element can be set
temperature at which a trip is required, rather than in absolute
with both alarm (warning) and trip stages.
terms.
The heat generated within the catenary is the resistive loss
(I2R × t). Thus, the thermal time characteristic used in the

C10 5. Catenary backup protection
Railway systems often use overcurrent protection as time- It operates on the basis of conventional definite-time overcurrent
delayed back-up protection for the main distance protection. protection, as described in Chapter [C1: Overcurrent Protection
Two different philosophies for overcurrent protection are typical: for Phase and Earth Faults]. The time settings are chosen to
ensure that the distance relay elements should operate first,
a. definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
thus the overcurrent elements only operate if the distance
b. back-up overcurrent protection (BUOC) elements fail, or if they are out of service for some reason.
5.1 Definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC) 5.2 Back-up overcurrent protection (BUOC)
This form of protection is continually in service, in parallel to This form of back-up protection is switched in service only
the distance relay elements, either included within the same during periods when the distance protection is out of service.
relay as the distance function, or as a separate relay. The latter A typical example is where VT supervision or a measuring
approach is currently more common for installations at Feeder circuit monitoring function detects a blown VT fuse or an MCB
Stations. This is due to the perceived increase in security and trip. In such instances the distance protection is automatically
reliability obtained from the redundancy of separate devices. blocked, and the BUOC elements are automatically brought
However, the trends evident in other protection applications to into service, such that catenary protection is not lost.
provide more functionality within a single relay will in time surely
Methods of setting overcurrent protection are covered in Chapter
apply to this area as well.
[C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults]. An
example of using overcurrent protection is given in Section 8.
6. Auto-transformer feeding
High-speed rail lines, with maximum speeds in excess of transformer feeding for the typical 25-0-25kV system found
200km/h (125mph) have much higher traction power demands. in Western Europe.
This is not only to cope with the peak power required for rapid
The use of auto-transformers ( AT ) results in distribution losses
acceleration to high speed, but also to cope with the steeper
that are lower than for classical 25kV feeding, and therefore
gradients that are commonly encountered along such routes.
can support the use of high power 25kV traction units. Feeder
The total traction power per train may amount to 12-16MW,
substation spacing can also be much greater than if a classical
comprising two or more power cars per unit and often two
feeding system is used. Fewer substations means less
units coupled together to form a complete train. The heavy
maintenance and reduced operating costs. Two-pole
load currents drawn may cause significant voltage drops
switchgear is normally used to isolate both the feeder and
across the catenary feeding impedance with a classical
catenary wires in the event of a fault on either wire.
feeding arrangement – depending on the section length being
fed and the traffic frequency (in both directions). To avoid a
decrease in train performance, feeder stations and parallelling
substations for classical systems would have to be sited at Supply
transformer
prohibitively short intervals. In such circumstances, especially
where the route involves new construction, auto-transformer
feeding is normally favoured. If Feeder
6.1 Description of auto-transformer feeding 50kV
AT
AT
Ic
Auto-transformer feeding uses a high voltage system
Catenary
comprising of a centre-tapped supply transformer, catenary
wire and a feeder wire. The feeder wire is aerially mounted 25kV
on insulators along the back of the overhead line masts. The
Rails
running rails are connected to the centre tap of the supply
transformer, and hence a train sees only half of the system AT: Auto-transformer : 1 unit of load current
voltage. Auto-transformers located at intervals along the tracks
ensure division of load current between catenary and feeder
wires that minimises the voltage drop between the supply Figure C10.13:
transformer and the train. Figure C10.13 shows auto- 25-0-25kV auto-transformer feeding

6. Auto-transformer feeding C10
However, some auto-transformer systems allow single wire transformer 50kV secondary winding is wound as a centre-
tripping, where separate distance protection is provided for tapped AT winding, and ATs are connected catenary-rail-
each wire. The protection would then monitor the two ‘halves’ feeder at each downstream substation and at intervening
of the system independently, with Protection Zones 1 and 2 locations.
typically set to 85% and 120% of the protected impedance
Figure C10.14 shows a typical protection one-line diagram
- similar to the protection of a classical catenary system.
for an auto-transformer-fed system, while Figure C10.15 shows
Figure C10.13 also illustrates the distribution of load current
the construction of the catenary system.
for a train situated midway between AT locations.
The topology of the AT system is often similar to the classical
system shown in Figure C10.4, except that the grid supply
25-0-25 kV Feeder substation
I> 2 x 25kV I> 2 x 25kV

* I>
as as Z< Section switch as as
Z< * * I> protection Z< * *
Z<
To Track via B.E.C.
To NO
Track NO
via
A.E.C. NO
To Track via I.B.
F Down
C C
F Up
C - Catenary B.E.C - Buried earth conductor
F - Feeder NO A.E.C - Aerial earth conductor
Figure C10.14:
Auto-transformer-fed system one-line diagram showing protection

C10 6. Auto-transformer feeding
1.20
Catenary wire
Contact wire
AEC Feeder wire
Aerial earth
conductor
(AEC)
7.25
6.30
5.50
5.08
1.34
3.57
3.25 4.50
Rail
level
750
C C 0.3
L L
Down Up
Buried earth conductor
(B.E.C)
Figure C10.15:
Typical auto-transformer–fed catenary layout
6.2 Auto-transformer system protection philosophy not usually possible to provide fully discriminative protection.
When the catenary and feeder currents are combined, the
From Figure C10.13 it can be seen that the summation (Ie -If)
relationship between impedance and distance-to-fault is non-
at any location will be equal to the downstream traction load
linear.
current. The same is true for fault current, and so physically
performing this current summation, through the parallel Consequently, it is more difficult to set Zone 1 to be under-
connection of feeder and catenary CT secondary windings, reaching and Zone 2 to be overreaching in the normal manner.
or mathematically summating within a protection relay, can The approach that is normally adopted is to set the Feeder
be the basis for auto-transformer circuit protection. Station distance protection to detect all faults along any track,
up to, but not beyond, the Mid-Point Substation. It can be
To discriminate between normal load current and feeder wire
arranged that operation of any distance relay will trip all
or catenary faults, distance protection is commonly applied,
Feeder Station breakers. In the event of any fault up to the
with (Ic -If ) being the measured current. The measured voltage
MPSS, simultaneous tripping of all the track feeder circuit
is generally the catenary to rail voltage. The relatively low
breakers at the FS will cut supplies to all tracks. Where this
reactance of the ATs – typically 1% on a 10MVA base –
scheme is adopted, the application of auto-reclosing is
ensures that any fault voltage drop on the catenary will be
essential to restore supplies to all but the permanently faulted
proportional to the feeder wire voltage drop.
section of catenary and feeder. The momentum of moving
When applying zones of distance protection to AT systems, trains will ensure that little speed is lost during the dead time
with double-pole tripping, it should be appreciated that it is of the auto-reclose sequences. Considerations relating to the

6. Auto-transformer feeding C10
application of auto-reclosure are detailed in Section 5.5. With entirely in the catenary-feeder loop rather than in the
high speed lines generally being better fenced, and having catenary-rail loop. Additionally, the impedance of the
fewer overbridges and greater electrical clearances compared catenary-feeder loop is lower than that of the catenary-rail
to classical systems, the infrequent losses of supply cause loop, as the feeder cable is a better conductor than the
few operational problems. As tripping of circuit breakers at rails
the FS isolates all line faults, there is then no need to have
c. beyond SS1, the effect of parallel feeding from other
switchgear at downstream substations rated to interrupt fault
circuits between the FS and SS1 means that slope ‘B ’
current. For economy, load-breaking switches are used instead
for a single circuit beyond SS1 is greater than slope ‘A’.
of breakers at SS1 and SS2 in Figure C10.4.
With reference to Figure C10.7, the system simulated is
6.3 Distance protection zone reaches four track, thus the gradient of ‘C ’ will be approximately
four times that of ‘A’ (marginally higher than four for the
Figure C10.16 illustrates the typical locus of impedance
inner tracks, and less than four for outer tracks)
measured at the FS, for a catenary-to-earth fault, at a variable
location upstream of SS2, for any one track. Considerations for the setting of distance relay reaches are
detailed in the following sections.
6.3.1 Zone 1
Z C Zmax
12 The Zone 1 elements of any FS distance relay should not
overreach and trip for faults beyond the MPSS, when the
Fault impedance (ohms)
11 B
10
9 Zmin mid-point bus section breaker is closed. If it is known that
8
7
the MPSS is definitely open, then there is no real reach
MPSS
6
Solid line constraint for distance protection. However, if the mid-point
5
4 A SS2 shows Z breaker is closed, or no status information is communicated
3 measured
to the protection to control overreach, through reversion to
2
1 SS1 an alternative setting group, then the relay must not trip for
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
the lowest impedance for a fault at the MPSS busbar. Referring
FS Distance to fault (km) to Figure C10.16, this fault impedance would be Zmin along
slope B (to 15km and 7.5 Ω). The applied Zone 1 setting
should be restricted to 85% of this impedance, to allow for
Figure C10.16: all measurement and impedance data tolerances.
Variation of impedance measurement with fault location along
track A lower reach setting might be necessary to prevent unwanted
tripping with aggregate magnetising inrush currents following
circuit energisation. This will depend on the response of the
While a similar effect exists for classically-fed systems, it is relay elements to inrush current and to the number of ATs
small by comparison and normally ignored. The impedance applied. For relays that have magnetising inrush restraint or
measured is defined as: some means of providing immunity or reduced sensitivity to
inrush currents such a constraint may not apply.
V catenary
Z =
(I catenary −I feeder ) 6.3.2 Zone 2
Allowing for under-reaching errors, the Zone 2 reach (Z2)
For clarity, only the impedances measured for a catenary-to-
should be set in excess of 115% of the protected line
earth fault located upstream of SS2 are plotted. The hump-
impedance for all fault conditions. The relevant impedance in
like impedance locus in Figure C10.16 has a number of
Figure C10.16 would be the Zmax peak between SS2 and MPSS.
identifiable trends:
A typical value of Zmax would be approximately 11.5 Ω at 13km
a. the initial slope of the locus, in Ω/km, shown as line distance from the feeder station.
‘A’. This is according to the catenary-to-rail loop impedance
If trains with regenerative braking are in service along the
(the 25kV loop in Figure C10.13), since the fault current
protected track a 20% additional reach margin would typically
flows almost entirely in the catenary-rail loop for faults
be applied.
close to a feeding point
With the stated Zone 1 and Zone 2 setting policy, relays at
b. at AT locations, slope ‘B’ shows how the effective ohms/
the Feeder Station provide complete track protection up to
km trend is less than half the catenary-to-feeder loop
the MPSS.
impedance (the 50kV loop in Figure C10.13) due to the
method of impedance measurement and due to the fault
current distribution. For a catenary-earth fault located at
an auto-transformer, the fault current will circulate almost

C10 6. Auto-transformer feeding
6.3.3 Zone 3 c. protection at the FS can trip for an AT fault. Since there
would typically be no circuit breakers at the SS and MPSS
Zone 3 may be applied to provide remote back-up protection
auto-transformer locations, AT protection should wait for
for faults beyond the MPSS, or with a longer reach to cover
loss of line voltage during the dead time of FS circuit
instances where ATs are switched out of service, such that
breakers before initiating the opening of a local motorised
the effective normal feeding impedance becomes higher.
disconnector switch. This action should take place within
6.4 Distance zone time delay settings and load the dead time so that the faulted AT will have been
avoidance disconnected before reclosure of the FS breakers
The principles used are identical to those for classical feeding, d. with radially fed tracks, multiple shot auto-reclosing is
with one exception. A short time delay of the order of 50ms often applied to dislodge any debris (wildlife or other stray
may be used with the Zone 1 element if a relay without material) that may have caused a semi-permanent fault.
magnetising inrush restraint is used. Before the last auto-reclose shot, it is common to disconnect
The relay uses ( Ie-If ), which is measuring the combined load all ATs downstream of the FS. With all ATs and paralleling
current of all trains at their pantographs. Therefore, the load removed the faulted circuit distance relays would then
impedance to avoid is that measured from catenary to rail see a linear relationship between the impedance measured
(the ‘25kV’ impedance in Figure C10.11). and the distance to fault. The results obtained from
conventional, integral fault location algorithms would then
6.5 Implications of using two-pole switching and offer rectification crews a fairly accurate estimate of where
auto-reclosure the permanent fault might be located
A full discussion of operational implications is beyond the e. it may be necessary to automatically increase the Zone
scope of this chapter, thus only the important points are listed: reaches of distance relay elements before the final auto-
a. it is usual to remove all parallelling between tracks prior reclose attempt to allow for the higher catenary-to-rail fault
to any breaker reclosing. This avoids repetitive re-tripping loop impedance up to the MPSS rather than the lower
of healthy catenary sections as multiple track feeder circuit catenary-feeder loop impedance. This may be achieved
breakers are being reclosed after clearance of a fault on by switching to an alternative setting group with Z2 set
one feeder. Paralleling is removed by opening the motorised higher than previously
isolators at all SS and MPSS locations. Following feeder 6.6 Backup protection
breaker reclosure, the tracks will be radially fed. A persistent
fault would only result in re-tripping of the faulted track Backup protection considerations for auto-transformer fed
circuit breakers systems are similar, in principle, to those for classical systems,
as described in Section 5.
b. in the period where tracks are being radially-fed, the relays
at the FS should only trip their own track circuit breakers.
Cross-tripping of parallel track circuit breakers should
be inhibited
7. Feeder substation protection
Each feeder substation comprises transformers, busbars, Other than this, there are no special requirements for the
cables, switchgear, etc. All of these items require protection. protection of feeder substation equipment and the forms of
Due to the much higher frequency of faults on the catenary protection detailed in Chapters [C1: Overcurrent Protection
system, special attention must be given to ensuring that the for Phase and Earth Faults] and [C7: Transformer and
substation protection remains stable for catenary faults, whilst Transformer-Feeder Protection] are directly applicable, on a
offering dependable protection for substation faults. single phase basis.

8. Delta function C10
A significant new protection feature is the Delta function for current at fundamental frequency and contain little harmonic
1 AC and 2 AC contact line systems which is intended to content. Harmonic levels are an important characteristic of
detect high resistance earth faults with minimal time delay. the current profile that can be utilised to distinguish between
As a basis an expanded harmonic supervision algorithm is load and fault conditions.
required, monitoring the 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Detection of high impedance faults is based on the fact that
AC traction load conditions are distinctly different to industrial fast current changes, or jumps, without a significant harmonic
medium-voltage applications. Due to the structure of contact content, e. g third harmonic, are indicative of fault conditions.
lines, the traffic situation and environment, a rapid and frequent This fact is well known and has been used in protection
variation in load and the occasional overload condition must applications for many years.
be taken into account. In addition to the varying load conditions,
For fault detection, the following elements must be securely
fault scenarios must also be accurately detected. While the fulfilled:
magnitude of fault current may vary from 40 % to 100 % of
the short circuit capacity, the frequency of fault inception a. Minimum base current available
coupled with the high tension in the contact wire makes fast b. Current jump ΔI detected
fault clearance the ultimate requirement for the protection
device. c. No inrush blocking
At times the short-circuit scenarios may not be fulfilled, d. Harmonic supervision of third harmonic not started
especially in the case of high impedance faults caused by Supervision of the third harmonic level can be used for both
wildlife, vegetation or bond open earth faults causing low blocking and stabilisation functionality. When the stabilisation
return current. The resultant fault current magnitudes can be function is activated, a multiplying factor is used to dynamically
similar to expected operating loads in such cases. In these increase the current jump threshold if harmonics due to load
circumstances, distance protection devices have difficulty are detected in the system.
detecting such faults.
The application may be viewed graphically as shown in Figure
Modern electrified locomotives for heavy load and high-speed C10.17.
passenger trains are provided with three-phase technologies
for the traction motors which make use of static converters
for onboard drives. This energy conversion produces a V = Catenary voltage
significant proportion of harmonics, particularly odd numbered I load = Catenary load current
harmonics. Typical percentage levels of harmonics, evaluated I fault = Catenary fault current
in 50 Hz contact lines, are provided in Table C10.2.
Harmonics Frequency Percentage V

Third harmonics 150 Hz ~ 20%
Fifth harmonics 250 Hz ~ 10 % I load

Others - ~8%
Ifault
ΔI = | Ifault | – | Iload |
Table C10.2:
Mean harmonic content, generated by engines
As indicated, the majority of the rolling stock loads introduce Figure C10.17:
significant third or fifth harmonic levels into the AC power Basic function ΔI
system, generated by the locomotive converters. AC traction
systems experience inrush current when inductive loads such A fault condition is detected by a current jump ΔI when a
as auto-transformers or track switch heating or the electrical minimum current level is exceeded at the same time. Inrush
rolling stock themselves are energised. These inrush currents, conditions, due to second harmonic detection, will block the
high in second harmonic components, are also present when complete function during the inrush event. Depending on the
electric locomotives pass through neutral sections. operating mode for the harmonic supervision, the ΔI criteria
will be blocked or stabilised with a detected high third
Load currents in contact lines are characterised by a
harmonic content.
substantial amount of measurable harmonic content. In
contrast, short circuit fault currents are mostly sine wave

C10 8. Delta function
In addition to the elements described for the basic application,

V = Catenary voltage
enhanced applications make use of one or more additional
I load = Catenary load current
elements to provide added reliability and enhanced
I fault = Catenary fault current
discrimination between load and fault conditions.
Ifault
The following additional elements must be fulfilled securely,
if enabled:
Δ
V
a. Current angle change Δϕ detected
b. Reactance supervision criteria
I load
c. Enhanced harmonic supervision of third and fifth harmonic
not started
ΔI = | Ifault | – | Iload |
d. No functional blocking by the auxiliary contact of the circuit
breaker
The current angle change and reactance supervision elements
make use of voltage signals to provide added stability and Figure C10.18:
discrimination. A minimum angle change criteria ensures the Basic function ΔI with additional stabilisation Δϕ
current change is due to the onset of a fault, rather than load,
while reactance supervision may be enabled to restrict the mode for harmonic supervision the ΔI criteria will be blocked
zone of operation to the immediate line section and avoid the or stabilised with a detected high third or fifth harmonic
need to time grade with downstream devices. Should failure component. The inrush detection function works as described
of the voltage transformer circuits occur, the function can in the basic application.
revert to the basic application or it may be blocked, if stability
is no longer maintained. The implementation for high impedance fault detection
performs a significant additional function in the protection of
Harmonic supervision may be expanded to include the fifth a.c. railway contact lines for many rail network operators. In
harmonic as well. This allows further flexibility to provide addition to the main distance and backup over-current
expanded stabilisation for the use of lower harmonic values protection devices, a third device for high impedance fault
for fault discrimination. detection was used in the past in many countries. By integrating
The application may be viewed graphically as shown in Figure all three protection elements and combining this with additional
C10.18. automation, supervision and self-monitoring, a modern
multifunctional railway protection device with comprehensive
A fault condition is detected by a ΔI value, stabilised by a functionality provides a cost-optimised solution for all a.c.
current angle change Δϕ, when a minimum current level is railway contact line installations.
exceeded at the same time. Depending on the operating

9. Example of classical system protection C10
Figure C10.19 depicts a typical 25kV system, where the 9.1 Section impedance data
settings for the relay protecting track feeder TF-1 at Substation
The first step is to calculate the primary impedance for the
S1 are to be calculated. The inputs to the relay are derived
catenary sections to be protected. Zone 1 for the relay
from the track feeder CT adjacent to the circuit breaker, and
associated with feeder TF-1 protects section 1, however the
from a section busbar VT at busbar S1 (a catenary-side VT
backup protection offered by Zones 2 and 3 must discriminate
would be equally suitable). The system data is given in Table
with downstream relays and so the impedance of sections 2,
C10.3. A MiCOM P438 relay is used in the example.
3 and 4 needs to be calculated too. In this example each pair
of catenaries runs between the common substations, and so
the impedance of adjacent sections will be identical. There
Busbar VT
Z< are situations where this is not the case, of which:
26.4/11kV
a. the sections to be protected consist of four tracks
TF1
1 3
b. the two tracks follow different routes due to the geography
600/1
of the route and hence may not be of the same length
Off-load 2 4 c. if there is a junction within a section

voltage
26kV TF2 are three examples.
S1 S2 S3
The equivalent section impedance per kilometer is given by
12.2km 13.7km the formula:
 BT impedance 
Zsect / km = line impedance / km +  
 BT spacing 
Figure C10.19:
Network diagram – Example calculation
 ( 0.051 + j 0. 21) 
(0. 26 + j 0.68 ) + 
3 
Catenary thermal protection Data  
Catenary impedance 0.26 + j0.68 Ω/km = 0.277 + j0.75Ω/ km
Booster transformer impedance 0.051 + j0.21 Ω = 0.8∠ 69.7°Ω/ km
Booster transformer spacing Every 3km
This will be rounded up to 70° as the nearest settable value
Maximum load current 900A
of the common characteristic line angle of the relay, α.
CB type Vacuum
Distance protection relays are often set and injection-tested
CB trip time 0.065 s
in terms of the impedance on the secondary side of the CTs/
Max zone 1 protection trip time 0.045 s VTs used. Therefore, it is helpful for testing if the primary
Catenary design temperature range for impedances on the system are converted to secondary
-18°C to 38°C
correct tension quantities. The equation to be used is:
Typical assumed max. winter temperature
(610A rating)
10°C CT ratio
′ t = Z sec t ×
Z sec
Typical assumed max. spring/autumn VT ratio
20°C
temperature (540A rating)
where:
Typical assumed summer temperature
23°C
(515A rating) Zsect = system impedance referred to primary
Worst-case assumed hottest ambient 28°C Z'sect = system impedance referred to secondary
Temperature for balance weights to touch
38°C Hence,
ground
Temperature at which 20% loss of tension, 600
48°C 1
train speeds must be restricted ′ t = Z sec t ×
Z sec
Temperature at which possible damage due 26400
to clashing of supports at overlaps occurs
56°C 110
Heating time constant - daytime 5 mins = Z sec t × 2. 5
Cooling time constant - nightime 7 mins
Table C10.3:
Electrified railway system data

C10 9. Example of classical system protection
9.2 Section impedance calculations Hence,

The section impedances can be calculated as follows:  24.4 + 24. 4 
 
9.2.1 Sections 1 and 2  24.4 
Z2 = (12. 2 + 0. 7 × 27.4 ) ×
The impedances for sections 1 and 2 are: 1. 15
2
Zsect = 12.2 x 0.8 = 9.76Ω = (12.2 + 0.7 × 27. 4 ) ×
1. 15
Z'sect = 9.76 x 2.5 = 24.4Ω
= 54.6 Ω
9.2.2 Sections 3 and 4
The impedances for sections 3 and 4 are: Notice how for two track feeding, (A+R)/R above becomes
2, due to a fault current split between two identical parallel
Zsect = 13.7 x 0.8 = 10.96Ω
paths.
Z'sect = 10.96 x 2.5 = 27.4Ω
9.4.2 ‘Hairpin’ feeding configuration
9.3 Zone 1 reach calculation for TF-1
Referring to Figure C10.8, it is apparent that with only two
The Zone 1 forward reach is set to be 85% of the section 1 tracks, inner tracks B and C are not present. Once circuit
impedance, referred to the secondary of the relay. breaker TF-2 at substation S1 is open, the impedance to the
fault is merely 170% times the impedance of track section 1
Hence, the forward reach is calculated as
or 2.
Z1fw = 24.4 x 0.85 = 20.75Ω
Thus, from Equation C10.2:
Zone 1 is not required to operate in the reverse direction, so
the setting Z1rv is set to blocked.
 (0. 7 × 24.4 ) 
9.4 Zone 2 reach calculation for TF-1 Z2 =  24. 4 + 
 1. 15 
Two configurations have to be considered in the setting of
the Zone 2 reach. These are: = 36.1Ω
a. the ‘follow-on’ configuration of Figure C10.7 For Zone 2 it is always the lower of the two calculated results
that is used.
b. the ‘Hairpin’ feeding configuration of Figure C10.8.
Therefore, use a setting of:
The setting required is the lowest of the above two
configurations. Forward reach Z2fw = 36.1Ω
9.4.1 ‘Follow-on’ configuration The Reverse reach, Z2rv, is set to blocked, as only forward
directional operation is required.
Figure C10.7 shows the condition to consider, with two track
feeding only for the area fed by Substation S1. Equation C10.1 9.5 Zone 3 reach calculation for TF-1
is used to calculate the reach:
In similar fashion to the Zone 2 reach, the ‘follow-on’ and
 ( A + R)  ‘Hairpin’ fault configurations have to be considered. As Zone
 ( Z + 0. 7 E ) × R  3 must tend to overreach rather than underreach, 120% of
  the fault impedance calculated is used as the setting and the
Z2 =
1. 15 higher of the two possible settings is used.
where: 9.5.1 ‘Follow-on’ fault configuration
Z = impedance of sections 1 and 2 in parallel Figure C10.9 shows the configuration for a follow-on fault with
A = the track section of interest, section 1 two tracks: It is apparent that the calculation is exactly as for
Zone 2 follow-on, except that the multiplier of 0.7 (70%) is
R = parallel fault current path (section 2) replaced by 1 (100%).
E = shortest following section (3 or 4) Z3 = (12.2 + 27.4) × 2 × 1.2 = 95.1Ω
9.5.2 ‘Hairpin feeding’ fault configuration
Repeating the same for hairpin feeding
(Figure C10.10, Equation C10.4):
Z3 = (24.4 + 24.4) × 1.2 = 58.6Ω

Hence, use a setting of: 9.7.2 Calculation of fault current

Forward reach Z3fw = 95.1Ω In order to determine the overcurrent settings, the fault current
measured by TF-1 CT for a fault adjacent to the S2 busbar
For Zone 3, a reverse reach is required to act a backup to the
needs to be calculated. There are two possible configurations
upstream protection. The usual setting is 25% of the Zone 1
to consider:
forward reach.
a. fault current for a fault at the end of section 1, with two
Therefore, use a setting of: Reverse reach
tracks in-service
Z3rv = 0.25 × 20.75 = 5.2Ω
b. current for a fault at the end of section 1, with section 2
9.6 Zone time delays isolated for maintenance
The Zone 1 time delay will be set to instantaneous operation For the first configuration, the fault current per track can be
(t1 = 0) – it is not common practice to time-grade this zone calculated as
with the primary protection fitted on board the trains.
E
Zone 2 (t2) should be delayed as follows: I f1 =
2+ ( Z t + Z sp )
t2 = CB max trip time + Relay max trip time + 50ms margin
where:
Hence,
E = source voltage = 26.4kV
t2 = 65 + 45 + 50 = 160ms
Zt = transformer impedance = 4.5 ∠ 88°Ω
As all of the protection and circuit breakers are identical, this
Zsp = parallel impedance of sections 1 and 2
value can be used for t2. If the downstream relays were
electromechanical (typically 40-70ms slower than numerical), = 9.76 ∠ 70°Ω/ 2
or the circuit breakers were oil insulated (OCBs, typically 40
Note that the fault current splits into two parallel paths, fed
to 60ms slower than VCBs), then the t2 delay would need to
via TF-1 and TF-2. Hence, the division by 2 in the equation
be extended accordingly. The 50ms margin allows for the
for calculating the per-track current measured by the
reset time of the Z2 element.
protection.
The Zone 3 time delay can typically be set double the minimum
Hence,
calculated above.
If1 = 1.4kA
However, as Zone 3 is often most at risk of unwanted pickup
due to train starting currents or momentary overloads, a longer For the second configuration,
setting of t3 = 500ms is applied. E
I f2 =
9.7 Overcurrent protection
(Z +Z )
t s1
Overcurrent protection can be applied to the 25kV system in
where:
Figure C10.19. For railway applications, non-directional
overcurrent protection is normal. The simplest application is Zs1 = impedance of section 1
for track feeders at Feeder Stations, such as TF-1. At this Hence,
location and with normal feeding, any fault current will naturally
be flowing away from the busbar, and so no reverse operation If2 = 1.84kA
can occur. At downstream substations it will not be possible 9.7.3 Overcurrent setting for BUOC instantaneous stage
to apply overcurrent protection in a similar way, and any
elements enabled would tend to be set with long time delays To prevent overreach, set at least 20% above the higher of
to ensure that all of the distance protection zones are given the two fault scenarios:
sufficient time to trip beforehand. Iinst = 1840 × 1.2 = 2200A
9.7.1 Back-up overcurrent (BUOC) at feeder stations The secondary current setting on the relay is found by dividing
Should the distance protection be out of service, two BUOC by the CT ratio:
overcurrent elements could be set. Firstly a high set overcurrent 2200
element is set to underreach the protected section, mimicking
I'inst = = 3.68A
600
Zone 1 operation. This can be set for instantaneous tripping.
Secondly, a lower-set overcurrent element can be applied to
complete protection for the TB-1 section, to overreach the end
of the protected section at S2. The overcurrent element of the
relay would be set accordingly and with a definite time delay.

C10 9. Example of classical system protection
9.7.4 Overcurrent setting for BUOC definite-time delayed the secondary current setting on the relay is found by dividing
stage by the CT ratio:
To ensure complete cover for short circuits in the protected 540
section, the setting should be no greater than 80% of the
I'refs = = 0.9A
600
lower of the two fault scenarios:
The ambient temperature tamb at which Irefp occurs is set at
Ioc ≤ 1400 × 0.8 = 1100A
20°C.
In terms of secondary quantities,
9.8.2 Mechanical damage protection
Ioc ≤ 1400 × 0.8 = 1100A
The catenary temperature at which mechanical damage may
begin to occur is 56°C. This must correspond to the MiCOM
1100
I'oc = = 1.86A P438 thermal trip command, and so:
600
tcatmax = 56°C
A time setting no less than the Zone 2 distance time delay
would be used, so tI'oc = 250ms is suitable. Account must be taken of the measurement errors described
in Section 4.1. The MiCOM P438 relay setting, Ѳtrip, must
All overcurrent protection must have a pickup in excess of
allow for these errors, which are taken to be 4°C. Hence,
the maximum expected load current. Assuming that the
maximum overloading would never exceed 150% of CT rating, Ѳtrip = (56 - 4)°C=52°C
the I'inst and I'oc settings are acceptable.
To avoid chattering of contacts when the load current is close
9.7.5 Definite time overcurrent (DTOC) to the trip threshold, a hysteresis setting is provided on reset.
Typically the hysteresis is set to 2%, such that following a trip,
It is not general practice to set instantaneous protection
the thermal model must cool by 2% before the trip contacts
elements that are running in parallel to the distance zones.
will reset.
Thus often just one definite time delayed stage is used. This
setting can be applied at all locations, and must be in excess 9.8.3 Dewirement protection
of the maximum load and overload current expected.
An alarm should be issued to warn the rail operator when
Idtinst ≥ 1.5 × Iflc speed restrictions are necessary, to avoid the risk of
dewirements. From Table C10.3, the catenary temperature at
where:
which there is a danger of dewirement is 48°C. The same
Iflc = full load current of feeder measurement errors apply as for the trip setting. Hence the
relay setting, Ѳwarning, is:
Hence,
Idtinst = 1.5 × 600 = 900A Ѳwarning = (48 - 4) = 44°C
9.8.4 Maximum ambient temperature
Referred to the secondary side of the CT,
It is possible to place a limit on the maximum ambient
900
I'dtinst = = 1.5A temperature that will be used by the thermal model, to avoid
600 over-restrictive loading constraints being imposed.
The time delay applied must be longer than the t3 distance From Table C10.3:
zone delay, so tI'dtinst would be acceptable.
tambmax = 28°C
9.8 Thermal protection
9.8.5 Default ambient temperature
The thermal data for the catenary are also given in Table
If ambient temperature compensation is not being used, an
C10.3. The calculation of the thermal protection settings is
assumed default coolant temperature ambient must be chosen.
given in the following sections.
The default ambient temperature must be chosen to be
9.8.1 Thermal reference current/ temperature sufficiently high to minimise the danger of undetected
The P438 requires a thermal rated current or reference current, problems occurring on hot days, when the ambient temperature
Iref , to be set that corresponds to full load current. The ambient is well in excess of the default value. Similarly, it must not be
temperature at which this applies qualifies this rated current. so high that alarms and/or trips occur unnecessarily. A default
The reference current referred to the CT primary is given in ambient temperature (tambdef ) of 20°C, would provide adequate
Table C10.3 as: protection, except for a calculated risk on certain hot summer
days. Note that the rated thermal current at this ambient is
Irefp = 540A Irefs.
The relay setting is in terms of the secondary current. Hence,

9.8.6 Thermal time constants

Parameter Symbol Value
The catenary thermal model requires heating and cooling
time constants to be specified. For most catenaries, the heating Zone 1 forward reach Z1fw 20.75 Ω
and cooling time constants would be expected to be equal.
However, this may not always be the case, for example the
Zone 1 backward reach Z1rv Blocked
cooling time constant at night may be longer than that Zone 2 forward reach Z2fw 36.1 Ω
applicable during the day. The relay can accommodate
different settings where required. Conservative settings that Zone 2 backward reach Z2rv Blocked
assume the worst case time constants for heating (τh) and
cooling (τc) would be to assume a day time heating time Zone 3 forward reach Z3fw 95.1 Ω
constant and night time cooling time constant.
Zone 3 backward reach Z3rv 5.2 Ω
Hence:
τh = 5min Zone 1 time delay t1 0s
τc = 7min Zone 2 time delay t2 160ms
The MiCOM P438 also allows the thermal rating of the Zone 3 time delay t3 500ms
protection to be modified, based on signals from opto inputs.
However, this facility is not used in this example. Back-up overcurrent Instantaneous
current setting I'inst 3.68A
9.9 Summary of catenary protection settings
Back-up overcurrent IDMT current
The protection calculations for the catenary are now complete.
setting I'oc 1.86A
The relay settings are summarised in Table C10.4.
Back-up overcurrent IDMT time delay
setting tI'oc 250ms
Definite time overcurrent protection

current setting I'dtinst 1.5A
Definite time overcurrent protection

time delay setting tI'dtinst 800ms
Thermal protection reference current Irefs 0.9A
Ambient temperature reference tamb 20°C
Thermal trip temperature Ѳtrip 52°C
Thermal warning temperature Ѳwarning 44°C
Maximum ambient temperature tambmax 28°C
Default ambient temperature tambdef 20°C
Heating time constant - daytime τh 5 min
Cooling time constant - nightime τc 7 min
Table C10.4:
Electrified railway system example-relay settings

Photo: J.Vogler
C11
Arc Protection

Chapter
C11
Arc Protection
1. Introduction 401
2. Arc flash phenomenon 402
3. Causes of arc faults in switchgear 403
4. Impacts and consequences of arc faults 404
5. Arc protection related standards 406
6. Arc protection and mitigation methods 407
7. The principle of arc protection based on simultaneous detection of light and overcurrent 408
8. How to avoid nuisance tripping caused by switching arcs 409
9. Arc protection systems 409
10. Elimination of the arc fault 411
11. Typical application examples 412

Arc Protection
C11 1. Introduction
High power arc faults in switchgear are rare events but their
consequences can be extremely severe. They can be
characterised as electrical explosions. Personnel may be
seriously affected by the radiation, heat, pressure wave, and
flying particles associated with the arc flash. These impacts
can also devastate the switchgear and cause substantial
economic losses either directly by destroying components
of the system or indirectly by causing process outages or
medical and legal expenses. Traditional overcurrent protection
is inefficient in the detection of arcing faults because it is too
slow. Faster protection methods are needed in order to
significantly reduce the released energy.
Energy Damage & hazard
Figure C11.2a:
Extensive Arcing time 47ms - Minor damage
damage
Limited
damage
Minimal Arcing time

damage
Figure C11.1:
Damage level dependent on the arcing time
This chapter describes the state-of-the-art arc protection

technology which is based on minimisation of arcing time by
very fast arc detection and elimination. By using simultaneous
detection of fault arc light and overcurrent it is possible to
reliably detect the arc within 2ms and phase-to-phase faults
within 1ms. The principle of this protection method and the
Figure C11.2b:
associated sensors, devices and systems are explained and Arcing time 500 ms - Copper busbars have evaporated
clarified by typical application examples. Figure C11.1
illustrates that limitation of the arcing time is an efficient way
to mitigate damages on arc faults. Figure C11.2a and C11.2b
show the results of a 50kA 3 phase internal arc test with short
and long arcing time.

Arc Protection
2. Arc flash phenomenon C11
An electric arc is a luminous discharge short circuit through

dielectric gas or fluid.
Arcs can be categorised as useful arcs (welding), breaking
arcs (in switching devices), and fault arcs. Fault arcs can
further be divided into low power arcs and high power arcs.
Examples of low power arc faults are series faults in power
systems (e.g. loose connections) and arcs in photovoltaic low
voltage systems. These arcs release very limited amount of
energy compared with high power arc faults.
This chapter is focused on high power arcs in gases where
the fault arc is formed between two or more conductive parts
of a power system, most commonly between two or more
phases or between phase and earth. The emphasis is in high
power fault arcs in air insulated switchgear. An arc fault in
switchgear is a short circuit through ionised gas (normally
air) between live parts or between one live part and earth. It
is very different from a bolted fault with a solid connection.
Air-insulated switchgear is commonly used, since dry air in
normal temperature is a reasonably good insulator. However,
when the temperature of the air is very high, more than 2000
K, thermal ionisation makes air conductive. The ionised air
and the ionised material from the electrodes form a conductive
plasma channel between the electrodes. The plasma consists
mainly of nitrogen and oxygen molecules, atoms and ions of
N and O, electrode material and electrons. The plasma is very
hot, temperatures as high as 20000 K have been reported,
and it radiates light. The light comes from hot particles and
from electrons returning from high energy states to lower
states.
In a high power arc fault very high amounts of electrical
energy turns into radiation and thermal energy extremely
rapidly. Due to the light and the high temperature with the
associated pressure wave and possible flying particles, arc Figure C11.3: [Photo: J.Vogler]:
Electrical explosions as result of an arc fault
faults can be characterised as electrical explosions (see
Figure C11.3).

Arc Protection
C11 3. Causes of arc faults in switchgear
Internal arc faults in switchgear are caused by something that corrosion and maloperation of switching devices are also
leads to a failure in the insulation. Many arc faults are caused possible causes of arcs. Many arc faults start as single phase
by direct human errors, such as forgotten tools, forgotten faults and then rapidly escalate into three-phase faults.
earthing connections or errors while working on equipment.
IEC Standard 62271-200 provides a good overview of possible
Loose connection, vibration, insufficient mechanical
locations and causes of internal arc faults as shown in Table
dimensioning and overvoltage can also lead to an arc fault.
C11.1.
Animals, contamination, dirt, moisture, ageing of insulation,
Locations where internal Possible causes of Examples of possible

arc faults are most likely to occur internal arc faults preventive measures
(1) (2) (3)
• Selection of adequate dimensions

Inadequate design
• Use of appropriate materials
• Avoidance of crossed cables connections
Connection compartments Faulty installation • Checking of workmanship on site
• Correct torque
Failure of solid or liquid insulation • Checking of workmanship and/or dielectric test on site
(defective or missing) • Regular checking of liquid levels, where applicable
• Interlocks
Disconnectors • Delayed reopening
Switches Maloperation • Independent manual operation
Earthing switches • Making capacity for switches and earthing switches
• Instructions to personnel
• Use of corrosion inhibiting coating and/or greases
• Use of plating
Corrosion
• Encapsulation, where possible
• Supplemental heating to prevent condensation
• Checking of workmanship by suitable means
Faulty assembly • Correct torque
Bolted connections and contacts
• Adequate locking means
During racking-in or racking-out of
withdrawable parts
E.g. due to dielectric change of state in • Checking of workmanship at site
combination with damage or distortion of
the plugging contacts and/or shutters
• Avoidance of these electrical influences by suitable
Ferro-resonance
design of the circuit
Instrument transformers
• Avoid short circuit by proper means for example,
Short circuit on low-voltage side for VTs
protection cover, low-voltage fuses
• Regular programmed maintenance
Circuit-breakers Insufficient maintenance
• Limitation of access by compartmentalisation
Error by personnel • Insulation of embedded live parts
Ageing under electric stresses • Partial discharge routine tests
All locations • Measures to ensure that the specified service

Pollution, moisture ingress of dust, vermin,
conditions are achieved
etc
• Use of gas filled compartments
• Surge protection
Overvoltages • Adequate insulation co-ordination
• Dielectric tests on site
Table C11.1:
Locations, causes and examples of measures to decrease the probability of internal arc faults [IEC Standard 62271-200]

Arc Protection
4. Impacts and consequences of arc faults C11
Figure C11.4 illustrates the impacts and consequences of

arc faults.
Psychological
trauma
Vaporised copper
Intense light, burning (volume 67.000 times solid copper)
and blinding radiation → Pressure wave
→ Toxic gases
High temperature
Shrapnel and
up to 20.000 K
molten metal
Heated air → Hazardous

pressure and sound wave voltage
(Air expands 1.600 fold)
Fire
Figure C11.4:
Consequences of arc faults
In a high power arc fault incident huge amounts of electrical arc flash can cause eye damage and it also plays a part in
energy are converted into radiation and thermal energy. The the burning impact of the arc (see Figure C11.5a to C11.5c).
radiation includes visible light. The very intense light of the
Figure C11.5a, 5b, 5c: Light arcing flash

Arc Protection
C11 4. Impacts and consequences of arc faults
Most of the burning effect comes from the thermal energy

which in fact has many impacts. The high temperature heats
up the air, and it vaporises the metal of the busbars. The hot
plasma and the convection of the hot gases can cause serious
arc burns to personnel.
Serious damage to equipment is also possible. If the arcing
time is high the busbars can be totally destroyed, and the
arc can burn holes to the switchgear housing.
Since arcs can ignite fire, additional damage to switchgear
or substations is possible. Personnel's clothes may catch fire
and increase the risk of burns. Additional safety hazard comes
from toxic gases, due to evaporation of metal parts. Humans
nearby are also vulnerable to hazardous voltage caused by
the fault, and an arc fault may cause subsequent psychological
trauma.
When the temperature of the air rises the volume of the air
increases. Furthermore, when metals evaporate, they expand Figure C11.6b:
dramatically (see Figure C11.6a and C11.6b). For example Damage after an arc fault
when copper evaporates its volume is 67000 times as large
as in the solid form. This instantaneous expansion creates
Arc blast gives arc fault incidents an explosive nature. Since
another major impact of the arc, the pressure wave. The
the peak value of the pressure, measured at the compartment
pressure wave, often called the arc blast, is dangerous to
walls, is normally reached 4-15ms after the ignition of the
humans. In addition to ear damage and lung collapse, it can
fault (peak pressure buildup time is relative to volume),
throw humans against walls or to the floor causing bone
mitigation of the pressure impact requires either efficient arc
fractures or more serious injuries. Additional injuries can be
containment, redirection of the arc blast or high speed
caused by flying particles and molten metal from the damaged
mitigation of the arc.
busbar and assembly.
The above mentioned consequences, serious safety hazard
and significant damage to equipment are not the only risks
caused by arc faults. Injury or even death of humans may
lead to substantial medical and legal expenses. When it comes
to equipment, indirect costs are possible as well. Prolonged
power and process outages due to the destroyed equipment
are possible and in process industries particularly the
interruption costs can be very high.
Figure C11.6a:
Damage after an arc fault

Arc Protection
5. Arc protection related standards C11
In some countries arc protection based on simultaneous phase-to earth arc fault current.
detection of light and overcurrent is a ‘de facto’ standard
IEEE Std 1584™-2002, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-
which means that practically all new industrial switchgear and
Flash Hazard Calculations, is a safety oriented guide. It
primary substations of the utilities are equipped with the
provides techniques to apply in determining the arc-flash
technology. However, currently in 2015, there are no
hazard distance and the incident energy to which employees
international standards directly standardising methodology
could be exposed during their work on or near electrical
or equipment for arc protection.
equipment. Its applications cover an empirically derived model
Currently available standards concerning arc fault issues are including enclosed equipment and open lines for voltages
the following: from 208 V to 15 kV, and a theoretically derived model
applicable for any voltage. The standard also provides a good
a. IEC 62271-200, High-voltage switchgear and controlgear
list of arc fault related definitions.
- Part 200: AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear
for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including One of the most central definitions is the concept of incident
52 kV, known as the international switchgear standard energy: The amount of energy impressed on a surface, a
certain distance from the source, generated during an
b. IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installations
electrical arc event. Incident energy is measured in joules
c. IEEE Std 1584™-2002, IEEE Guide for Performing Arc- per centimetre squared (J/cm²). The incident energy concept
Flash Hazard Calculations is used for developing strategies to minimise burn injuries.
d. NFPA 70E®, Standard for Electrical Safety in the The guide is based upon testing and analysis of the hazards
Workplace, 2015 Edition, NFPA (National Fire Protection presented by incident energy. It provides a detailed step-by-
Association) step process for arc flash analysis. This analysis ends up with
determining the incident energy level and the flash-protection
IEC 62271-200 (Edition 2.0, 2011) is a MV switchgear
boundary (The distance from live parts that are uninsulated
standard and it "specifies requirements for prefabricated
or exposed within which a person could receive a second
metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for alternating
degree burn) based on incident energy of 5.0 J/cm². One
current of rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including
should note that the analysis only covers the thermal impact
52 kV for indoor and outdoor installation and for service
of the arc fault, not the pressure related impact for example.
frequencies up to and including 60 Hz. Enclosures may include
fixed and removable components and may be filled with fluid The standard is well known but mostly utilised in North America.
(liquid or gas) to provide insulation." Arc faults are briefly Although incident energy levels are seldom calculated in
discussed in the standard. Europe, incident energy calculations are a useful tool when
comparing the effectiveness of different arc protection
The standard aims at preventing the occurrence of internal
methods. Because the incident energy level depends on four
arc faults. It gives a good list of locations where faults are
key parameters: the arcing current, the voltage, the working
most likely to occur, and explains causes of failure and
distance and the arcing time, it is relatively easy to see that
possible measures to decrease the probability of faults.
normally the most practical factors in the mitigation of the
Additionally IEC 62271-200 gives examples of supplementary
thermal impacts of arc faults are the arcing time and the
measures - in practice arc protection technologies - to provide
arcing current.
protection to persons:
IEEE Std 1584™-2002 includes reporting of the tests carried
a. rapid fault clearance times initiated by detectors sensitive
out with current-limiting fuses. The published figures confirm
to light, pressure or heat or by a differential busbar
the risk related to current-limiting fuses: high incident energy
protection
levels occur when the fault current is low, and the fuse is not
b. application of suitable fuses in combination with switching in its intended range of operation.
devices to limit the let-through current and fault duration
NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the
c. fast elimination of arc by diverting it to metallic short Workplace® by National Fire Protection Association addresses
circuit by means of fast-sensing and fast-closing devices electrical safety-related work practices, safety-related
d. remote operation instead of operation in front of the maintenance requirements and other administrative controls
switchgear and controlgear for the practical safeguarding of employees. It has some links
to arc protection and it provides some commonly used arc
e. pressure-relief device fault related definitions, such as:
f. transfer of a withdrawable part to or from the service a. Arc Flash Boundary: When an arc flash hazard exists,
position only when the front door is closed the distance from a prospective arc source at which a
IEC 62271-200 recognises two important ratings of the arc person could receive a second degree burn if an electrical
fault currents: a) three-phase arc fault current and b) single arc flash were to occur. (A second degree burn is possible

Arc Protection
C11 5. Arc protection related standards
by an exposure of unprotected skin to an electric arc NFPA 70E includes an informative annex giving guidance on
flash above the incident energy level of 5 J/cm² selection of arc-rated clothing and other PPE (Personal
Protective Equipment) when it is not practical to eliminate
b. Arc-Resistant Switchgear: Equipment designed to
exposure to incident energy.
withstand the effects of an internal arcing fault and that
directs the internally released energy away from the
employee
6. Arc protection and mitigation methods
Naturally the primary goal is to prevent arc faults by, for Incident energy calculations, based on testing, show that the
example, careful design, education of personnel and adequate released energy is proportional to the arc time. When traditional
maintenance of equipment. In some cases early detection overcurrent protection is applied, the arc time is normally
of developing faults is possible by special monitoring some hundreds of milliseconds. This leads to extensive
equipment. However, it is very difficult to totally eliminate arc damage and a serious safety hazard. This is why several
faults in distribution systems. different arc fault mitigation approaches have been introduced,
that are much more efficient than overcurrent protection.
As shown previously, the incident energy depends on the
voltage, working distance, arc current and arc duration. From The following Table C11.2 presents evaluation of some well
an arc protection point of view it is normally not possible to known arc mitigation methods.
effect the applied voltage. The working distance is only related
to humans working on the equipment, and it is often difficult
to increase this distance. In practice there are two major
approaches for decreasing the released energy: limitation of
the arc current or reduction of the arc time.
Method Benefits Drawbacks

• Good protection for personnel at least
Arc-resistant switchgear
when the doors are closed
Equipment designed to withstand the • If used as the only arc mitigation approach,
• Provides protection against the pressure
effects of an internal arc fault and that provides no protection to the equipment in the
impact
directs the internally released energy enclosure
• Gives very good protection if used in
away from the employee
combination with fast protection
Maintenance switch
A switch that when turned on (during
maintenance at a substation) makes • Rather good protection of personnel • Effective only during maintenance
circuit breakers operate without any
intentional delay
Zone-selective interlocking • Rather simple, relatively low costs • Not very fast
• Very fast operation and good protection if
• When fault current is low (as it can be for various
the fault current is in the operation range
Current-limiting fuses reasons) the arc time and the incident energy are
of the fuse
high
• Limits both current and arc time
• Increase cost and losses
Current-limiting reactors • Limit fault current
• Limited effect
• Complicated settings
Busbar differential protection • Fast protection • Requires careful CT selection
• Does not operate in cable terminal faults
Table C11.2:
Comparison of mitigation methods

Arc Protection
7. The principle of arc protection based on

simultaneous detection of light and overcurrent C11
The leading method in arc protection is based on simultaneous

very fast detection of light and overcurrent as shown in Figure
C11.7. This approach can be divided into two parts: Arc
detection and Arc mitigation. The arc can be detected within
<1 milliseconds which is outstanding performance compared
with conventional protection technology. The arc time varies
according to the elimination technology. When applying
conventional circuit breakers the arc time is some tens of
milliseconds. If a short-circuit device is applied, the arcing
time is less than half cycle.

Point type of optical sensor Fibre type of optical sensor
&
Light
Trip signal 7.2 Fast detection of overcurrent
Overcurrent In order to minimise the possible nuisance tripping caused by

external light, an overcurrent condition, i.e. detection of
overcurrent (secondary sensor) is often required in parallel
with the detection of light (primary sensor). The current can
be measured with normal (existing) current transformers. In
Figure C11.7: arc protection applications it is however necessary to minimise
Modern arc protection logic
the operation time and special methods are used to enable
the rapid detection of the overcurrent. Very fast (less than
1ms) detection of overcurrent is possible by applying an
Normally the overcurrent condition increases costs only a little
analogue comparator. The method is illustrated in Figure C11.10.
since existing current transformers can be used. However,
there are applications where "light only" based arc detection Because many arc faults start as single-phase faults, it is
can be applied. For example, if the probability of intense justified to detect phase-to-earth faults as well. If the arc is
external light can be practically closed out, measurement of detected and eliminated before it escalates into high-power
current would be very difficult, or where low cost is essential three-phase fault, the damage will be lower. The detection of
the "light only" condition can be justified. phase-to-earth arc fault is normally based on simultaneous
detection of light and zero-sequence overcurrent, but zero
7.1 Fast optical detection of light
sequence voltage can be utilised as well.
There is a strong correlation between the power of the arc and
the intensity of the observed light. Fault arcs can be detected
practically immediately by using light sensitive sensors, such 3xl
f
as photodiode (point type of sensor) or optical fibre (loop or
3xI + Io + U A/D
point type of sensor).
3xl
Io
There is not an exact universal sensitivity threshold value which 3xl
Comp
Pickup value Io
could always differentiate between light emanating from arc Io>> I>>
faults and the light coming from other sources. Practical

experience has shown that sensitivity of approximately 10000 CONF.
lux (visible light) gives excellent results. Sensors with the MEMORY
sensitivity of 10000 lux are very likely to detect the light in all
relevant arc fault situations with metal-enclosed switchgear FPGA
while at the same time the risk of false activation is low. This is
true especially in the cases where the detection of the arc is
confirmed by the simultaneous detection of overcurrent.
Point type of sensors (Figure C11.8) enable more selective CPU
protection than fibre loop sensors, identifying the location of
the arc more accurately. Loop sensors (Figure C11.9) are a
cost effective solution for applications where protection
selectivity is not a critical. Figure C11.10:
A method for very fast detection of overcurrent, utilising an
analogue comparator

Arc Protection
C11 8. How to avoid nuisance tripping caused by switching arcs
In almost all cases, both in medium voltage (MV) and low

voltage (LV) systems, the trip condition of simultaneous
detection of light and overcurrent has proven to be successful.
However, some low voltage circuit breakers (air-magnetic
type) emit light and other type of pollution while operating.
This problem can be mitigated by using special types of light
sensors, less sensitive or designed for limited wavelength
ranges or by applying pressure sensors.
9. Arc protection systems
9.1 Stand-alone arc protection systems An example of applications is a primary substation (HV/MV)
where arc faults can be selectively tripped . e.g. in cable
The simplest arc protection solutions can be based on stand-
terminations of outgoing feeders - a typical location of arc
alone devices (Figure C11.11). When "light only" detection
faults.
criteria is applied, all that is required is the optical sensors,
and a device that collects the information from the sensors
and sends the trip command to the appropriate circuit breaker.
Some wind power applications, secondary substations and
limited low voltage switchboards are examples of possible
application areas for stand-alone devices. Vamp 321
ON
OK
F1 F2
I O
vamp
Cable Vamp 321
ON
L> (CB, BB)
OK
F1 F2
I O
vamp
CB
BB
CB CB
Cable ON
Vamp 321
Cable ON
Vamp 321
Figure C11.11: F1
OK
F2 F1
OK
F2
Stand alone arc protection system

I O I O
vamp vamp
9.2 Arc protection integrated in numerical protection L> (CB, BB)
relays
Another cost effective and very widely applied solution is to
integrate arc protection into normal protection devices (Figure
Figure C11.12:
C11.12). Because most relays already include current
Integrated arc protection function in a protection device
measurement, it is relatively easy to add the input for light
sensors to achieve the light and overcurrent based trip
condition. However, the overcurrent detection must be very
fast.
When the relays are equipped with communication and several
light sensor inputs, selective arc protection can be provided.

Arc Protection
9. Arc protection systems C11
9.3 Dedicated arc protection systems circuit breakers, if both light and overcurrent are detected.
Very high speed communication between the components is
Arc protection is most often implemented by a separate system
an essential feature of the system, transmitting information
using arc flash detectors connected to dedicated arc
on detected light, detected overcurrent, addresses (location)
protection relays (Figure C11.13). Overcurrent and earth-fault
of detection, and trip commands.
protection is carried out by other relays. A comprehensive,
selective arc protection system comprises of optical sensors, A separate system enables large installations with selective
current transformers (normally no additional CTs are needed), protection and multiple protection zones. It provides very high
I/O units collecting data from the sensors and CTs, speed protection and can also provide some protection
communication cabling, and a master unit or several master redundancy.
units for final collection of all the sensor data. The master
unit(s) are measuring the current and tripping the appropriate
CBFP* CBFP
= Point sensor T2 T4
VAMP 321
VAM 4CD
V
T, T1, T2, T3, T4 = Trip
T3 T
S1, S2, S3 ... = Sensors
* Either CBFP or Direct Zone 1 trip
T1
T1 Zone 4
Zone 1
VAM 12L
V
Zone 2 Zone 3
T3 Zone 2.1 T1
Zone 2.2 Zone 2.3 Zone
e 2.4
4 Zone
Zone 2.5
5 Zone 2.6
T2 T3
T3
S1 S2 S3
S
S2 S3 S1
T T
T2 T1
VAM 12LD VAM 12LD VAM 3L

V
Figure C11.13:
Dedicated arc protection system

Arc Protection
C11 10. Elimination of the arc fault
10.1 The importance of the arc elimination time Fast communication between the arc protection relay and the
short-circuit device is vital. The combination of optical arc
The incident energy is proportional to the arcing time. From
detection and a short-circuit device provides extremely fast
a protection point of view the arcing time consists of two
and efficient protection. The arcing time is only a few
components: arc detection time and arc elimination time. By
milliseconds. The thermal impact of the fault is minimal, and
applying arc detection methods described above, minimal
the pressure impact is significantly mitigated.
arc detection time can be achieved. The arcing time then
depends almost entirely on arc elimination time. 10.4 Current-limiting fuses
10.2 Circuit breakers The use of current-limiting fuses in arc protection requires
good product and system knowledge otherwise the protection
In most applications arc protection relays send the trip signal
level may be much lower than expected. CL fuses can be
to appropriate circuit breakers which then open the circuit
very efficient in both limiting the current and reducing the arc
and extinguish the fault arc. In MV applications using arc
time. When the fault current is in the current-limiting range,
protection relays and CBs the total arcing time is in the order
the fuse is able to break the current very rapidly, and also
of 60ms, consisting of 1ms detection time and <60ms CB
reduce the peak current. The reduction of the peak current
operation time. The operating times of LV CBs are usually
is a benefit, because high current causes mechanical forces
shorter than MV CBs' operation times. When total arcing time
that are detrimental to transformers feeding the current. Figure
is in only a few tens of milliseconds, the thermal impacts of
C11.15 below illustrates the current-limiting impact of a CL
faults arcs are efficiently mitigated (see Figure C11.14).
fuse.
Prospective wave
I
(I rms = A)
B
Limited wave
Cut-off current
(peak value)
Figure C11.15:
Current-limitation of a CL fuse
Current-limiting fuses are not a perfect solution. They are very

Figure C11.14:
Low impact on an arc fault with fast arc protection trip effective in limiting the released energy only if they are in
their current-limiting range. Particularly in low voltage
applications it is difficult to determine the arc fault current
level. The current can be as low as 20-40 % of the bolted
10.3 Short-circuit devices (arc eliminators)
fault current. Low fault current can lead to prolonged arc
Arc eliminating by means of a short-circuit device (crowbar times and thus higher released energy and greater damage.
unit, arc quencher or high speed earthing device) is recognised
by IEC Standard 62271-200 as an option to provide the highest
possible level of protection to personnel in case of an internal
arc in MV switchgear. When using a short-circuit device the
arc protection systems sends trip commands to both the arc
eliminator and the appropriate circuit breakers. The short-
circuit device will create an intentional high speed short circuit
in the system so that the voltage collapses and the arc is
extinguished. The short-circuit current is then eliminated by
the circuit breaker within a few cycles.

Arc Protection
11. Typical application examples C11
11.1 Single main application

The following Figure C11.16 gives an overview of a single
main application.
VAM VAM VAM

10LD 10LD 10LD
0AN 1AN 2AN 3AN 4AN 5AN
VAMP
321
5BN
1BN 2BN 3BN
3CN 4BN
1CN 2CN
5CN
3DN 4CN
1DN 2DN 5DN
4DN
1EN 3EN 5EN
up-stream
breaker 2EN
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6
Figure C11.16:
Single main application
Every compartment is equipped with an arc sensor. The trip

output relay of AFS units control the incomer breakers. Any
of the point sensors will cause a trip of the main breaker to
mitigate the arc fault. Additionally overcurrent measurement
is taken account if the application requires a minimisation of
the possible nuisance tripping caused by external light.

Arc Protection
C11 11. Typical application examples
11.2 Main tie main application + CBF (circuit breaker

failure)
The following Figure C11.17 gives an overview of a main tie
main application with circuit breaker failure.
A B
Vamp 321 1
ON
F1
OK
F2 2
vamp
4 3
Zone 1 X1 X2 Zone 2 X3 X4 X4 X5
Figure C11.17:
Main tie main application
The protected target is a medium voltage enclosure with two enclosure backup detection. When defining the CBFP delay
separate incomers. The enclosure has a longitudinal busbar time, the standard break-time of the feeder circuit breaker of
between the incomers. To minimise the fault zone, the enclosure the enclosure must be taken into account.
is divided into two separate protection zones.
The main unit and extension units serve as trip units. The main
The different zones are divided by a bus-coupler circuit unit (1) trips its own feeder circuit breaker in zone 1 faults and
breaker and monitored by light sensors connected to the light serves as CBFP in zone 1 and 2 faults. The arc sensor units
detecting units (3 & 4). The system receives current criteria (3 and 4) trip the bus-coupler circuit breaker between zones
from the main unit(1) and current measurement unit (2), which 1 and 2 in faults in their own zone. The zone 2 light detecting
have been installed on incomers. unit (3) trips its own bus-coupler circuit breaker.
The CBFP (circuit breaker failure protection) contacts have
been wired to the HV side of the supply transformer for

Arc Protection
11. Typical application examples C11
11.3 Feeder selective multiple busbar application

The following Figure C11.18 gives an overview of a feeder
selective multiple busbar application.
Vamp 321 Vamp 321
ON ON
OK OK
F2 F2
I>
F1 F1
vamp
I> vamp
Q1 Q4
MF MF
E1.1 E1.2 E1.1 E1.2
Zone 3 Zone 3
Zone 1 Zone 2
Q5.1 Q5.2 Q5.3

MF MF MF
Zone 1
Feeder Feeder Zone 2
Zone 3
Feeder
Figure C11.18:
Multiple busbar application
The protected target is a medium voltage enclosure with breaker between different zone faults in their own zone. The
multiple separate incomers. The enclosure has a longitudinal outgoing feeder zone light detecting units trips their own
busbar between the incomers. To minimise the fault zone, the feeder circuit breakers.
enclosure is divided into four separate protection zones (zone1,
Selective tripping schemes on main units automatically adjust
2, 3 and Feeder). The different zones are divided by bus-
according to incomer disconnector positions (E1.x and E2.x)
coupler circuit breakers and monitored by light sensors
and changes the tripping logic accordingly. This will allow arc
connected to the light detecting units in zones 1, 2,3 and
flash protection to fullfill full selective protection.
feeder. The detection system receives current criteria from
the main units, which are installed on incomers. The outgoing feeder section is protected by using dedicated
light detecting units. These individially trip the corresponding
The main units and extension units serve as trip units. The
feeder circuit breaker to limit the impact without shutting down
main units trip their own feeder circuit breaker for internal arc
the entire busbar in the system e.g. cable fault.
faults when a fault is fed from their own incomer. The arc
sensor units in zones 1, 2 and 3 trip the bus-coupler circuit

D1
Auto-Reclosing

Chapter
D1
Auto-Reclosing
1. Introduction 417
2. Application of auto-reclosing 418
3. Auto-reclosing on HV distribution networks 419
4. Factors influencing HV auto-reclose schemes 419
5. Auto-reclosing on EHV transmission lines 421
6. High speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems 422
7. Single-phase auto-reclosing 424
8. High speed auto-reclosing on lines employing distance schemes 425
9. Delayed auto-reclosing on EHV systems 426
10. Operating features of auto-reclose schemes 427
11. Auto-close circuits 428
12. Examples of auto-reclose applications 428

Auto-Reclosing
D1 1. Introduction
Faults on overhead lines fall into one of three categories: areas are prone to this type of fault. Permanent faults, such
as broken conductors, and faults on underground cable
a. transient
sections, must be located and repaired before the supply can
b. semi-permanent be restored.
c. permanent Use of an auto-reclose scheme to re-energise the line after
a fault trip permits successful re-energisation of the line.
80-90% of faults on any overhead line network are transient
Sufficient time must be allowed after tripping for the fault arc
in nature. The remaining 10%-20% of faults are either semi-
to de-energise prior to reclosing otherwise the arc will re-strike.
permanent or permanent.
Such schemes have been the cause of a substantial
Transient faults are commonly caused by lightning and improvement in continuity of supply. A further benefit,
temporary contact with foreign objects. The immediate tripping particularly to EHV systems, is the maintenance of system
of one or more circuit breakers clears the fault. Subsequent stability and synchronism.
re-energisation of the line is usually successful.
A typical single-shot auto-reclose scheme is shown in Figures
A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a semi- D1.1 and D1.2. Figure D1.1 shows a successful reclosure in
permanent fault. The cause of the fault would not be removed the event of a transient fault, and Figure D1.2 an unsuccessful
by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but could be burnt reclosure followed by lockout of the circuit breaker if the fault
away during a time-delayed trip. HV overhead lines in forest is permanent.
Instant of fault
Operates Resets
Protection
Operating
time
Transient Trip coil Contacts Arc Contacts Closing circuit Contacts Contacts
fault energised separate extinguished fully open energised make fully closed
Circuit
breaker
Opening Arcing Closing

time time time
Operating time Dead time
System disturbance time Relay ready to respond to further fault incidents

Reclose initiated by protection (after successful reclosure)
Auto-reclose relay
Dead time Closing

pulse time
Reclaim time
Time
Figure D1.1:
Single-shot auto-reclose scheme operation for a transient fault

Auto-Reclosing
1. Introduction D1
Reclose
Operates Resets on to fault Operates Resets
Protection
Operating
time
Trip coil Contacts Arc Contacts Closing circuit Contacts Contacts Contacts Arc Contacts fully
Permanent energised separate extinguished fully open energised make fully closed separate Extinguished open
fault
Circuit
breaker
Opening Arcing Closing Trip coil
time time time energised
Operating time Dead time
Relay locks out for protection
Reclose initiated re-operation before reclaim
by protection time has elapsed
Auto-reclose
relay
Dead time Closing

pulse time
Reclaim time Reclaim time
starts resets
Time
Figure D1.2:
Operation of single-shot auto-reclose scheme on a permanent fault
2. Application of auto-reclosing
The most important parameters of an auto-reclose scheme The weighting given to the above factors is different for HV
are: distribution networks and EHV transmission systems and
therefore it is convenient to discuss them under separate
a. dead time
headings. Sections 3 and 4 cover the application of auto-
b. reclaim time reclosing to HV distribution networks while Sections 5 - 9
cover EHV schemes.
c. single or multi-shot
The rapid expansion in the use of auto-reclosing has led to
These parameters are influenced by:
the existence of a variety of different control schemes. The
a. type of protection various features in common use are discussed in Section 10.
b. type of switchgear The related subject of auto-closing, that is, the automatic
closing of normally open circuit breakers, is dealt with in
c. possible stability problems Section 11.
d. effects on the various types of consumer loads
e. Type of fault, Phase to Phase or Phase to Ground

Auto-Reclosing
D1 3. Auto-reclosing on HV distribution networks
On HV distribution networks, auto-reclosing is applied mainly a few seconds. With transient faults, the overall effect would
to radial feeders where problems of system stability do not be loss of supply for a very short time but affecting a larger
arise, and the main advantages to be derived from its use number of consumers. If only time-graded protection without
can be summarised as follows: auto-reclose was used, a smaller number of consumers might
be affected, but for a longer time period.
a. reduction to a minimum of the interruptions of supply to
the consumer When instantaneous protection is used with auto-reclosing,
the scheme is normally arranged to inhibit the instantaneous
b. instantaneous fault clearance can be introduced, with the
protection after the first trip. For a permanent fault, the time-
accompanying benefits of shorter fault duration, less fault
graded protection will give discriminative tripping after
damage, and fewer permanent faults
reclosure, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section.
As 80% of overhead line faults are transient, elimination of Some schemes allow a number of reclosures and time-graded
loss of supply from this cause by the introduction of auto- trips after the first instantaneous trip, which may result in the
reclosing gives obvious benefits through: burning out and clearance of semi-permanent faults. A further
benefit of instantaneous tripping is a reduction in circuit
a. improved supply continuity
breaker maintenance by reducing pre-arc heating when
b. reduction of substation visits clearing transient faults.
Instantaneous tripping reduces the duration of the power arc When considering feeders that are partly overhead line and
resulting from an overhead line fault to a minimum. The chance partly underground cable, any decision to install auto-reclosing
of permanent damage occurring to the line is reduced. The would be influenced by any data known on the frequency of
application of instantaneous protection may result in non- transient faults. Where a significant proportion of faults are
selective tripping of a number of circuit breakers and an permanent, the advantages of auto-reclosing are small,
ensuing loss of supply to a number of healthy sections. Auto- particularly since reclosing on to a faulty cable is likely to
reclosing allows these circuit breakers to be reclosed within aggravate the damage.
4. Factors influencing HV auto-reclose schemes
The factors that influence the choice of dead time, reclaim one power source, where power can be fed into both ends
time, and the number of shots are now discussed. of an inter-connecting line. A typical example is embedded
generation (see Chapter [C8: Generator and Generator-
4.1 Dead Time
Transformer Protection], or where a small centre of population
Several factors affect the selection of system dead time as with a local diesel generating plant may be connected to the
follows: rest of the supply system by a single tie-line.
a. system stability and synchronism The use of high-speed protection, such as unit protection or
distance schemes, with operating times of less than 0.05s is
b. type of load
essential. The circuit breakers must have very short operation
c. CB characteristics times and then be able to reclose the circuit after a dead time
d. fault path de-ionisation time of the order of 0.3s-0.6s to allow for fault-arc de-ionisation.
e. protection reset time It may be desirable in some cases to use synchronism check
logic, so that auto-reclosing is prevented if the phase angle
These factors are discussed in the following sections. has moved outside specified limits. The matter is dealt with
4.1.1 System stability and synchronism more fully in Section 9 on EHV systems.
In order to reclose without loss of synchronism after a fault 4.1.2 Type of load
on the interconnecting feeder, the dead time must be kept to On HV systems, the main problem to be considered in relation
the minimum permissible consistent with de-ionisation of the to dead time is the effect on various types of consumer load.
fault arc. Other time delays that contribute to the total system
disturbance time must also be kept as short as possible. The
problem arises only on distribution networks with more than

Auto-Reclosing
4. Factors influencing HV auto-reclose schemes D1
a. industrial consumers
Arc Time (s)
Most industrial consumers operate mixed loads comprising extinguished
Contacts Contacts
induction motors, lighting, process control and static loads. separate make
Trip Breaker fully open:
Synchronous motors may also be used. Dead time has to closing circuit energised Breaker
initiation fully
be long enough to allow motor circuits to trip out on loss closed
of supply. Once the supply is restored, restarting of drives
t1
can then occur under direction of the process control t2 t3 t4 t6
system in a safe and programmed manner, and can often t5
be fast enough to ensure no significant loss of production
or product quality Oil Vacuum Oil Air SF6 SF6
11kV 15kV 132kV 380kV 132kV 380kV
b. domestic consumers t1 0.06 0.038 0.03 0.035 0.04 0.02
t2 0.1 0.053 0.06 0.045 0.07 0.05
It is improbable that expensive processes or dangerous t3 0.08 0.023 0.2 0.235 0.03 0.01
conditions will be involved with domestic consumers and t4 0.16 0.048 0.35 0.065 0.08 0.06
t5 0.24 0.28 0.55 0.3 0.11 0.07
the main consideration is that of inconvenience and t6 0.02 0.07 0.01 0.02 0.12 0.04
compensation for supply interruption. A dead time of Note: 380kV data applicable to 400kV also. All times in seconds
seconds or a few minutes is of little importance compared

with the loss of cooking facilities, central heating, light and
audio/visual entertainment resulting from a longer supply Figure D1.3:
Typical circuit breaker trip-close operation times
failure that could occur without auto-reclosing
4.1.3 Circuit breaker characteristics
0.1s-0.2s should be adequate. On HV systems, therefore,
The time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a
fault de-ionisation time is of less importance than circuit
tripping and reclosing operation must be taken into
breaker time delays.
consideration, especially when assessing the possibility of
applying high speed auto-reclosing. 4.1.5 Protection reset time
a. mechanism resetting time If time delayed protection is used, it is essential that the timing
device shall fully reset during the dead time, so that correct
Most circuit breakers are ‘trip free’, which means that the
time discrimination will be maintained after reclosure on to a
breaker can be tripped during the closing stroke. After
fault. The reset time of the electromechanical I.D.M.T. relay
tripping, a time of the order of 0.2s must be allowed for
is 10 seconds or more when on maximum time setting, and
the trip-free mechanism to reset before applying a closing
dead times of at least this value may be required.
impulse. Where high speed reclosing is required, a latch
check interlock is desirable in the reclosing circuit When short dead times are required, the protection relays
must reset almost instantaneously, a requirement that is easily
b. closing time
met by the use of static, digital and numerical I.D.M.T. relays.
This is the time interval between the energisation of the
4.2 Reclaim time
closing mechanism and the making of the contacts. Owing
to the time constant of the solenoid and the inertia of the Factors affecting the setting of the reclaim time are discussed
plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s to in the following sections.
close. A spring-operated breaker, on the other hand, can 4.2.1 Type of protection
close in less than 0.2s. Modern vacuum circuit breakers
may have a closing time of less than 0.1s The reclaim time must be long enough to allow the protection
relays to operate when the circuit breaker is reclosed on to a
The circuit breaker mechanism imposes a minimum dead permanent fault. The most common forms of protection applied
time made up from the sum of (a) and (b) above. Figure D1.3 to HV lines are I.D.M.T. or definite time over-current and earth-
illustrates the performance of modern HV circuit breakers in fault relays. The maximum operating time for the former with
this respect. Older circuit breakers may require longer times very low fault levels could be up to 30 seconds, while for fault
than those shown. levels of several times rating the operating time may be 10
4.1.4 De-ionisation of fault path seconds or less.
As mentioned above, successful high speed reclosure requires In the case of definite time protection, settings of 3 seconds
the interruption of the fault by the circuit breaker to be followed or less are common, with 10 seconds as an absolute maximum.
by a time delay long enough to allow the ionised air to disperse. It has been common practice to use reclaim times of 30
This time is dependent on the system voltage, cause of fault, seconds on HV auto-reclose schemes. However, there is a
weather conditions and so on, but at voltages up to 66kV, danger with a setting of this length that during a thunderstorm,

Auto-Reclosing
D1 4. Factors influencing HV auto-reclose schemes
when the incidence of transient faults is high, the breaker For other types of trip mechanism this time could be much
may reclose successfully after one fault, and then trip and smaller, involving the recharging of energy storage capacitors
lock out for a second fault within this time. Use of a shorter or gas pressure. Here the reclaim time will be governed by
reclaim time of, say, 15 seconds may enable the second fault other factors.
to be treated as a separate incident, with a further successful
4.3 Number of Shots
reclosure.
There are no definite rules for defining the number of shots
Where fault levels are low, it may be difficult to select I.D.M.T.
for any particular auto-reclose application, but a number of
time settings to give satisfactory grading with an operating
factors must be taken into account.
time limit of 15 seconds, and the matter becomes a question
of selecting a reclaim time compatible with I.D.M.T. 4.3.1 Circuit breaker limitations
requirements.
Important considerations are the ability of the circuit breaker
It is common to fit sensitive earth-fault protection to supplement to perform several trip and close operations in quick succession
the normal protection in order to detect high resistance earth and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period.
faults. This protection cannot possibly be stable on through- Maintenance periods vary according to the type of circuit
faults, and is therefore set to have an operating time longer breaker used and the fault current broken when clearing each
than that of the main protection. This longer time may have fault. Use of modern numerical relays can assist, as they
to be taken into consideration when deciding on a reclaim often have a CB condition-monitoring feature included that
time. A broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground can be arranged to indicate to a Control Centre when
or a wood fence may cause this type of fault. It is rarely if maintenance is required. Auto-reclose may then be locked
ever transient and may be a danger to the public. It is therefore out until maintenance has been carried out.
common practice to use a contact on the sensitive earth fault
4.3.2 System conditions
relay to block auto-reclosing and lock out the circuit breaker.
If statistical information on a particular system shows a
Where high-speed protection is used, reclaim times of 1
moderate percentage of semi-permanent faults that could
second or less would be adequate. However, such short times
be burned out during 2 or 3 time-delayed trips, a multi-shot
are rarely used in practice, to relieve the duty on the circuit
scheme may be justified. This is often the case in forest areas.
breaker.
Another situation is where fused ‘tees’ are used and the fault
4.2.2 Energy recovery time level is low, since the fusing time may not discriminate with
the main I.D.M.T. relay. The use of several shots will heat the
In all cases the CB trip mechanism will take time to recover
fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow before the
enough energy to be able to perform a Close and Trip
main protection operated.
sequence. The reclaim time should not be set below this value.
For a motor wound spring this time could be significant (up
to 30 seconds) and therefore be the limiting parameter in
setting the reclaim time.
5. Auto-reclosing on EHV transmission lines
The most important consideration in the application of auto- Under healthy conditions, the amount of synchronising power
reclosing to EHV transmission lines is the maintenance of transmitted, P, crosses the power/angle curve OAB at point
system stability and synchronism. The problems involved are X, showing that the phase displacement between the two
dependent on whether the transmission system is weak or systems is Ѳ0.
strong. With a weak system, loss of a transmission link may
Under fault conditions, the curve OCB is applicable, and the
lead quickly to an excessive phase angle across the CB used
operating point changes to Y. Assuming constant power input
for re-closure, thus preventing a successful re-closure. In a
to both ends of the line, there is now an accelerating power
relatively strong system, the rate of change of phase angle
XY. As a result, the operating point moves to Z, with an
will be slow, so that delayed auto-reclose can be successfully
increased phase displacement, Ѳ1, between the two systems.
applied.
At this point the circuit breakers trip and break the connection.
An illustration is the interconnector between two power systems The phase displacement continues to increase at a rate
as shown in Figure D1.4. dependent on the inertia of the two power sources. To maintain

Auto-Reclosing
5. Auto-reclosing on EHV transmission lines D1
synchronism, the circuit breaker must be reclosed in a time

short enough to prevent the phase angle exceeding Ѳ2. This
angle is such that the area (2) stays greater than the area
Fault
(1), which is the condition for maintenance of synchronism.
This example, for a weak system, shows that the successful
Loads Loads
application of auto-reclosing in such a case needs high-speed
protection and circuit breakers, and a short dead time. On
strong systems, synchronism is unlikely to be lost by the
Normal system condition
A tripping out of a single line. For such systems, an alternative
Power
policy of delayed auto-reclosing may be adopted. This enables

C 2
X the power swings on the system resulting from the fault to
P Input line decay before reclosure is attempted.
Z
Y The various factors to be considered when using EHV auto-
1
Fault condition reclose schemes are now dealt with. High-speed and delayed
auto-reclose schemes are discussed separately.
0 0 1 2 B
Phase displacement
Figure D1.4:
Effect of high-speed three-phase auto-reclosing on system
stability for a weak system
6. High speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems
The first requirement for the application of high-speed auto- measures have to be adopted to ensure simultaneous tripping
reclosing is knowledge of the system disturbance time that at each end. These are described in Section 8.
can be tolerated without loss of system stability. This will
6.2 De-Ionisation of fault arc
normally require transient stability studies to be conducted
for a defined set of power system configurations and fault It is important to know the time that must be allowed for
conditions. With knowledge of protection and circuit breaker complete de-ionisation of the arc, to prevent the arc restriking
operating characteristics and fault arc de-ionisation times, when the voltage is re-applied.
the feasibility of high-speed auto-reclosing can then be
The de-ionisation time of an uncontrolled arc, in free air
assessed. These factors are now discussed.
depends on the circuit voltage, conductor spacing, fault
6.1 Protection characteristics currents, fault duration, wind speed and capacitive coupling
from adjacent conductors.
The use of high-speed protection equipment, such as
distance or unit protection schemes, giving operating times Of these, the circuit voltage is the most important, and as a
of less than 50ms, is essential. In conjunction with fast general rule, the higher the voltage the longer the time
operating circuit breakers, high-speed protection reduces required for de- ionisation. Typical values are given in Table
the duration of the fault arc and thus the total system D1.1.
disturbance time.
If single-phase tripping and auto-reclosing is used, capacitive
It is important that the circuit breakers at both ends of a fault coupling between the healthy phases and the faulty phase
line should be tripped as rapidly as possible. The time that tends to maintain the arc and hence extend the dead time
the line is still being fed from one end represents an effective required. This is a particular problem on long distance EHV
reduction in the dead time, and may well jeopardise the transmission lines.
chances of a successful reclosure. When distance protection
is used, and the fault occurs near one end of the line, special

Auto-Reclosing
D1 6. High speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems
hydraulic or pneumatic closing mechanisms are universal at

Minimum
Line voltage the upper end of the EHV range and give the fastest closing
de-energisation time
(kV) time. Figure D1.3 shows the operation times for various types
(seconds)
of EHV circuit breakers, including the dead time that can be
66 0.2 attained.
110 0.28 6.3.2 Air blast circuit breakers
132 0.3
Air blast breakers have been developed for voltages up to
the highest at present in use on transmission lines. They fall
220 0.35 into two categories:
275 0.38 a. pressurised head circuit breakers

b. non-pressurised head circuit breakers
40 0.45
In pressurised head circuit breakers, compressed air is
525 0.55
maintained in the chamber surrounding the main contacts.
When a tripping signal is received, an auxiliary air system
Table D1.1: separates the main contacts and allows compressed air to
Fault-arc de-ionisation times blast through the gap to the atmosphere, extinguishing the
arc. With the contacts fully open, compressed air is maintained
in the chamber.
6.3 Circuit breaker characteristics
Loss of air pressure could result in the contacts reclosing,
The high fault levels involved in EHV systems impose a very or, if a mechanical latch is employed, restriking of the arc in
severe duty on the circuit breakers used in high-speed auto- the de-pressurised chamber. For this reason, sequential series
reclose schemes. The accepted breaker cycle of break- isolators, which isolate the main contacts after tripping, are
make-break requires the circuit breaker to interrupt the fault commonly used with air blast breakers. Since these are
current, reclose the circuit after a time delay of upwards of comparatively slow in opening, their operation must be
0.2s and then break the fault current again if the fault persists. inhibited when auto-reclosing is required. A contact on the
The types of circuit breaker commonly used on EHV systems auto-reclose relay is made available for this purpose.
are oil, air blast and SF6 types.
Non-pressurised head circuit breakers are slower in operation
6.3.1 Oil circuit breakers than the pressurised head type and are not usually applied
Oil circuit breakers are used for transmission voltages up to in high-speed reclosing schemes.
300kV, and can be subdivided into the two types: ‘bulk oil’ 6.3.3 SF6 circuit breakers
and ‘small oil volume’. The latter is a design aimed at reducing
the fire hazard associated with the large volume of oil Many EHV circuit breakers are manufactured using SF6 gas
contained in the bulk oil breaker. as an insulating and arc-quenching medium. The basic design
of such circuit breakers is in many ways similar to that of
The operating mechanisms of oil circuit breakers are of two pressurised head air blast circuit breakers, and normally
types, ‘fixed trip’ and ‘trip free’, of which the latter is the most retain all, or almost all, of their voltage withstand capability,
common. With trip-free types, the reclosing cycle must allow even if the SF6 pressure level falls to atmospheric pressure.
time for the mechanism to reset after tripping before applying Sequential series isolators are therefore not normally used,
the closing impulse. but they are sometimes specified to prevent damage to the
Special means have to be adopted to obtain the short dead circuit breaker in the event of a lightning strike on an open
times required for high-speed auto-reclosing. Various types ended conductor. Provision should therefore be made to inhibit
of tripping mechanism have been developed to meet this sequential series isolation during an auto-reclose cycle.
requirement. 6.4 Choice of dead time
The three types of closing mechanism fitted to oil circuit At voltages of 220kV and above, the de-ionisation time will
breakers are: probably dictate the minimum dead time, rather than any
a. solenoid circuit breaker limitations. This can be deduced from Table
D1.1. The dead time setting on a high-speed auto-reclose
b. spring
relay should be long enough to ensure complete de-ionisation
c. pneumatic of the arc. On EHV systems, an unsuccessful reclosure is
more detrimental to the system than no reclosure at all.
CBs with solenoid closing are not suitable for high-speed
auto-reclose due to the long time constant involved. Spring,

Auto-Reclosing
6. High speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems D1
6.5 Choice of reclaim time 6.6 Number of shots

Where EHV oil circuit breakers are concerned, the reclaim High-speed auto-reclosing on EHV systems is invariably
time should take account of the time needed for the closing single shot. Repeated reclosure attempts with high fault levels
mechanism to reset ready for the next reclosing operation. would have serious effects on system stability, so the circuit
breakers are locked out after one unsuccessful attempt. Also,
the incidence of semi-permanent faults which can be cleared
by repeated reclosures is less likely than on HV systems.
7. Single-phase auto-reclosing
Single phase-to-earth faults account for the majority of a. three-phase trip and lockout for phase-phase or 3-phase
overhead line faults. When three-phase auto-reclosing is faults, or if either of the remaining phases should develop
applied to single circuit interconnectors between two power a fault during the dead time
systems, the tripping of all three phases may cause the two
b. use of a selector switch to give a choice of single- or
systems to drift apart in phase, as described in Section 5. No
three-phase reclosing
interchange of synchronising power can take place during
the dead time. If only the faulty phase is tripped, synchronising c. combined single- and three-phase auto-reclosing; single
power can still be interchanged through the healthy phases. phase-to-earth faults initiate single-phase tripping and
Any difference in phase between the two systems will be reclosure, and phase-phase faults initiate three-phase
correspondingly less, leading to a reduction in the disturbance tripping and reclosure
on the system when the circuit breaker recloses.
Modern numerical relays often incorporate the logic for all of
For single-phase auto-reclosing each circuit breaker pole the above schemes, for the user to select as required. Use
must be provided with its own closing and tripping mechanism; can be made of any user-definable logic feature in a numerical
this is normal with EHV air blast and SF6 breakers. The relay to implement other schemes that may be required.
associated tripping and reclosing circuitry is therefore more
The advantages of single-phase auto-reclosing are:
complicated, and, except in distance schemes, the protection
may need the addition of phase selection logic. a. the maintenance of system integrity
On the occurrence of a phase-earth fault, single-phase auto- b. on multiple earth systems, negligible interference with
reclose schemes trip and reclose only the corresponding pole the transmission of load. This is because the current in
of the circuit breaker. The auto-reclose function in a relay the faulted phase can flow through earth via the various
therefore has three separate elements, one for each phase. earthing points until the fault is cleared and the faulty
Operation of any element energises the corresponding dead phase restored
timer, which in turn initiates a closing pulse for the appropriate The main disadvantage is the longer de-ionisation time
pole of the circuit breaker. A successful reclosure results in resulting from capacitive coupling between the faulty and
the auto-reclose logic resetting at the end of the reclaim time, healthy lines. This leads to a longer dead time being required.
ready to respond to a further fault incident. If the fault is Maloperation of earth fault relays on double circuit lines owing
persistent and reclosure is unsuccessful, it is usual to trip to the flow of zero sequence currents may also occur. These
and lock out all three poles of the circuit breaker. are induced by mutual induction between faulty and healthy
The above describes only one of many variants. Other lines (see Chapter [C5: Protection of Complex Transmission
possibilities are: Circuits] for details).

Auto-Reclosing
D1 8. High-speed auto-reclosing on lines employing distance schemes
The importance of rapid tripping of the circuit breakers at to the circuit breakers at each end of the feeder could result
each end of a faulted line where high-speed auto-reclosing either in no dead time or in a dead time insufficient to allow
is employed has already been covered in Section 6. Simple de-ionisation of the fault arc. A transient fault could therefore
distance protection presents some difficulties in this respect. be seen as a permanent one, resulting in the locking out of
both circuit breakers.
Owing to the errors involved in determining the ohmic setting
of the distance relays, it is not possible to set Zone 1 of a Two methods are available for overcoming this difficulty. Firstly,
distance relay to cover 100% of the protected line – see one of the transfer-trip or blocking schemes that involves the
Chapter [C3: Distance Protection] for more details. Zone 1 is use of an intertrip signal between the two ends of the line
set to cover 80-85% of the line length, with the remainder of can be used. Alternatively, a Zone 1 extension scheme may
the line covered by time-delayed Zone 2 protection. be used to give instantaneous tripping over the whole line
length. Further details of these schemes are given in Chapter
Figure D1.5 illustrates this for a typical three-zone distance
[C4: Distance Protection Schemes], but a brief description
scheme covering two transmission lines.
of how they are used in conjunction with an auto-reclose
scheme is given below.
8.1 Transfer-trip or blocking schemes
Zone 3(J)
Zone 3(G) This involves use of a signalling channel between the two
Middle Zone 2 (G) Zone 2(J) ends of the line. Tripping occurs rapidly at both ends of the
Zone
End End faulty line, enabling the use of high-speed auto-reclose. Some
Zone Zone 1(G) Zone 1(J)
Zone complication occurs if single-phase auto-reclose is used, as
G H J K the signalling channel must identify which phase should be
tripped, but this problem does not exist if a modern numerical
Zone 1(H) Zone 1(K) relay is used.
Zone 2(H)
Zone 2(K) Irrespective of the scheme used, it is customary to provide
an auto-reclose blocking relay to prevent the circuit breakers
Zone 3(K)
auto-reclosing for faults seen by the distance relay in Zones
Zone 3(H) 2 and 3.
8.2 Zone 1 extension
Figure D1.5:
In this scheme, the reach of Zone 1 is normally extended to
Typical three zone distance scheme
120% of the line length and is reset to 80% when a command
from the auto-reclose logic is received. This auto-reclose logic
signal should occur before a closing pulse is applied to the
For this reason, a fault occurring in an end zone would be
circuit breaker and remain operated until the end of the reclaim
cleared instantaneously, by the protection at one end of the
time. The logic signal should also be present when auto-
feeder. However, the CB at the other end opens in 0.3-0.4
reclose is out of service.
seconds (Zone 2 time). High-speed auto-reclosing applied

Auto-Reclosing
9. Delayed auto-reclosing on EHV systems D1
On highly interconnected transmission systems, where the For example, if it were decided to charge the line initially from
loss of a single line is unlikely to cause two sections of the station A, the dead time in the auto-reclose relay at A would
system to drift apart significantly and lose synchronism, be set at, say, 5 seconds, while the corresponding timer in
delayed auto-reclosing can be employed. Dead times of the the auto-reclose relay at B would be set at, say, 15 seconds.
order of 5s-60s are commonly used. No problems are The circuit breaker at A would then reclose after 5 seconds
presented by fault arc de-ionisation times and circuit breaker provided that voltage monitoring relays at A indicated that
operating characteristics, and power swings on the system the busbars were alive and the line dead. With the line
decay before reclosing. In addition, all tripping and reclose recharged, the circuit breaker at B would then reclose with
schemes can be three-phase only, simplifying control circuits a synchronism check, after a 2 second delay imposed by the
in comparison with single-phase schemes. In systems on synchronism check relay element.
which delayed auto-reclosing is permissible, the chances of
If for any reason the line fails to ‘dead line charge’ from end
a reclosure being successful are somewhat greater with
A, reclosure from end B would take place after 15 seconds.
delayed reclosing than would be the case with high-speed
The circuit breaker at A would then be given the opportunity
reclosing.
to reclose with a synchronism check.
9.1 Scheme operation
9.2 Synchronism check relays
The sequence of operations of a delayed auto-reclose scheme
The synchronism check relay element commonly provides a
can be best understood by reference to Figure D1.6. This
three-fold check:
shows a transmission line connecting two substations A and
B, with the circuit beakers at A and B tripping out in the event a. phase angle difference
of a line fault. Synchronism is unlikely to be lost in a system
b. voltage
that employs delayed auto-reclose. However, the transfer of
power through the remaining tie-lines on the system could c. frequency difference
result in the development of an excessive phase difference The phase angle setting is usually set to between 20°– 45°,
between the voltages at points A and B. The result, if reclosure and reclosure is inhibited if the phase difference exceeds
takes place, is an unacceptable shock to the system. It is this value. The scheme waits for a reclosing opportunity with
therefore usual practice to incorporate a synchronism check the phase angle within the set value, but locks out if reclosure
relay into the reclosing system to determine whether auto- does not occur within a defined period, typically 5s.
reclosing should take place.
A voltage check is incorporated to prevent reclosure under
After tripping on a fault, it is normal procedure to reclose the various circumstances. A number of different modes may be
breaker at one end first, a process known as ‘live bus/dead available. These are typically undervoltage on either of the
line charging’. Reclosing at the other and is then under the two measured voltages, differential voltage, or both of these
control of a synchronism check relay element for what is conditions.
known as bus/live line reclosing’.
The logic also incorporates a frequency difference check,
either by direct measurement or by using a timer in conjunction
with the phase angle check. In the latter case, if a 2 second
timer is employed, the logic gives an output only if the phase
(a) Network diagram difference does not exceed the phase angle setting over a
period of 2 seconds. This limits the frequency difference (in
Protn. operated
(local or &
the case of a phase angle setting of 20°) to a maximum of
intertrip)
0.11% of 50Hz, corresponding to a phase swing from +20°
S Q AR
AR lockout
1 R Q in progress to -20° over the measured 2 seconds. While a significant
CB closed
1 0
frequency difference is unlikely to arise during a delayed
&
AR inhibit auto-reclose sequence, the time available allows this check
time
Reclaim timer to be carried out as an additional safeguard.
0
Dead time
As well as ‘live bus/dead line’ and ‘live bus/live line’ reclosing,
CB open
Protn. reset
& 0
& CB close sometimes ‘live line/dead bus’ reclosing may need to be
CB healthy command
System healthy S Q
implemented. A numerical relay will typically allow any
R Q
combination of these modes to be implemented. The voltage
tR: reclaim time ti: inhibit time td: dead time
settings for distinguishing between ‘live’ and ‘dead’ conditions
(b) Autoreclose logic for each CB
must be carefully chosen. In addition, the locations of the VTs
must be known and checked so that the correct voltage signals
Figure D1.6:
are connected to the ‘line’ and ‘bus’ inputs.
Delayed auto-reclose scheme logic

Auto-Reclosing
D1 10. Operating features of auto-reclose schemes
The extensive use of auto-reclosing has resulted in the existence 10.5 Anti-pumping devices
of a wide variety of different control schemes. Some of the
The function of an anti-pumping device is to prevent the circuit
more important variations in the features provided are described
breaker closing and opening several times in quick succession.
below.
This might be caused by the application of a closing pulse
10.1 Initiation while the circuit breaker is being tripped via the protection
relays. Alternatively, it may occur if the circuit breaker is closed
Modern auto-reclosing schemes are invariably initiated by the
on to a fault and the closing pulse is longer than the sum of
tripping command of a protection relay function. Some older
protection relay and circuit breaker operating times. Circuit
schemes may employ a contact on the circuit breaker. Modern
breakers with trip free mechanisms do not require this feature.
digital or numerical relays often incorporate a comprehensive
auto-reclose facility within the relay, thus eliminating the need 10.6 Reclaim timer
for a separate auto-reclose relay and any starter relays.
Electromechanical, static or software-based timers are used
10.2 Type of protection to provide the reclaim time, depending on the relay technology
used. If electromechanical timers are used, it is convenient to
On HV distribution systems, advantage is often taken of auto-
employ two independently adjustable timed contacts to obtain
reclosing to use instantaneous protection for the first trip,
both the dead time and the reclaim time on one timer. With
followed by I.D.M.T. for subsequent trips in a single fault incident.
static and software-based timers, separate timer elements are
In such cases, the auto-reclose relay must provide a means of
generally provided.
isolating the instantaneous relay after the first trip. In older
schemes, this may be done with a normally closed contact on 10.7 CB lockout
the auto-reclose starting element wired into the connection
If reclosure is unsuccessful the auto-reclose relay locks out
between the instantaneous relay contact and the circuit breaker
the circuit breaker. Some schemes provide a lockout relay with
trip coil. With digital or numerical relays with in-built auto-reclose
a flag, with provision of a contact for remote alarm. The circuit
facilities, internal logic facilities will normally be used.
breaker can then only be closed by hand; this action can be
With certain supply authorities, it is the rule to fit tripping relays arranged to reset the auto-reclose relay element automatically.
to every circuit breaker. If auto-reclosing is required, electrically Alternatively, most modern relays can be configured such that
reset tripping relays must be used, and a contact must be a lockout condition can be reset only by operator action.
provided either in the auto-reclose logic or by a separate trip
Circuit breaker manufacturers state the maximum number of
relay resetting scheme to energise the reset coil before reclosing
operations allowed before maintenance is required. A number
can take place.
of schemes provide a fault trip counting function and give a
10.3 Dead timer warning when the total approaches the manufacturer’s
recommendation. These schemes will lock out when the total
This will have a range of settings to cover the specified high-
number of fault trips has reached the maximum value allowed.
speed or delayed reclosing duty. Any interlocks that are needed
to hold up reclosing until conditions are suitable can be 10.8 Manual closing
connected into the dead timer circuit. Section 12.1 provides
It is undesirable to permit auto-reclosing if circuit breaker
an example of this applied to transformer feeders.
closing is manually initiated. Auto-reclose schemes include the
10.4 Reclosing impulse facility to inhibit auto-reclose initiation for a set time following
manual CB closure. The time is typically in the range of 2-5
The duration of the reclosing impulse must be related to the
seconds.
requirements of the circuit breaker closing mechanism. On
auto-reclose schemes using spring-closed breakers, it is 10.9 Multi-shot schemes
sufficient to operate a contact at the end of the dead time to
Schemes providing up to three or four shots using timing circuits
energise the latch release coil on the spring-closing mechanism.
are often included in an auto-reclose relay to provide different,
A circuit breaker auxiliary switch can be used to cancel the
independently adjustable, dead times for each shot.
closing pulse and reset the auto-reclose relay. With solenoid
Instantaneous protection can be used for the first trip, since
operated breakers, it is usual to provide a closing pulse of the
each scheme provides a signal to inhibit instantaneous tripping
order of 1-2 seconds, so as to hold the solenoid energised for
after a set number of trips and selects I.D.M.T. protection for
a short time after the main contacts have closed. This ensures
subsequent ones. The scheme resets if reclosure is successful
that the mechanism settles in the fully latched-in position. The
within the chosen number of shots, ready to respond to further
pneumatic or hydraulic closing mechanisms fitted to oil, air
fault incidents.
blast and SF6 circuit breakers use a circuit breaker auxiliary
switch for terminating the closing pulse applied by the auto-
reclose relay.

Auto-Reclosing
11. Auto-close circuits D1
Auto-close schemes are employed to close automatically The solution is to have a standby transformer T4 permanently
circuit breakers that are normally open when the supply energised from the primary side and arranged to be switched
network is healthy. This may occur for a variety of reasons, into service if one of the others trips on fault.
for instance the fault level may be excessive if the CBs were
The starting circuits for breaker CB4 monitor the operation
normally closed. The circuits involved are very similar to those
of transformer protection on any of the transformers T1, T2,
used for auto-reclosing. Two typical applications are described
and T3 together with the tripping of an associated circuit
in the following sections.
breaker CB1-CB3. In the event of a fault, the auto-close
11.1 Standby transformers circuit is initiated and circuit breaker CB4 closes, after a short
Figure D1.7 shows a busbar station fed by three transformers, time delay, to switch in the standby transformer. Some schemes
T1, T2, and T3. The loss of one transformer might cause employ an auto-tripping relay, so that when the faulty
serious overloading of the remaining two. However, connection transformer is returned to service, the standby is automatically
of a further transformer to overcome this may increase the disconnected.
fault level to an unacceptable value. 11.2 Bus coupler or bus section breaker
If all four power transformers are normally in service for the
system of Figure D1.7, and the bus sections are interconnected
by a normally-open bus section breaker instead of the isolator,
the bus section breaker should be auto-closed in the event
of the loss of one transformer, to spread the load over the
(Standby)
remaining transformers. This, of course, is subject to the fault
level being acceptable with the bus-section breaker closed.
CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4
with Starting and auto-trip circuits are employed as in the stand-
auto-closing
by scheme. The auto-close relay used in practice is a variant
of one of the standard auto-reclose relays.
Figure D1.7:
Standby transformer with auto-closing
12. Examples of auto-reclose applications
Auto-reclose facilities in common use for a number of standard

substation configurations are described in the following Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6
sections.
CB1A
12.1 Double busbar substation
CB2A
A typical double busbar station is illustrated in Figure D1.8.
Each of the six EHV transmission lines brought into the station CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6
is under the control of a circuit breaker, CB1 to CB6 inclusive, Bus C
Main
and each transmission line can be connected either to the
EHV BC
main or to the reserve busbars by manually operated isolators. Busbars
Reserve
Bus section isolators enable sections of busbar to be isolated
in the event of fault, and bus coupler breaker BC permits
sections of main and reserve bars to be interconnected.
Figure D1.8:
Double busbar substation

Auto-Reclosing
D1 12. Examples of auto-reclose applications
12.1.1 Basic scheme – banked transformers omitted

Each line circuit breaker is provided with an auto-reclose relay
that recloses the appropriate circuit breakers in the event of a
Bus A
line fault. For a fault on Line 1, this would require opening of EHV Line 1 EHV Line 2
CB1 and the corresponding CB at the remote end of the line.
The operation of either the busbar protection or a VT Buchholz
relay is arranged to lock out the auto-reclosing sequence. In
the event of a persistent fault on Line 1, the line circuit breakers
trip and lock out after one attempt at reclosure.
12.1.2 Scheme with banked transformers
Some utilities use a variation of the basic scheme in which Bus B
Transformers T1 and T2 are banked off Lines 1 and 2, as
shown in Figure D1.8. This provides some economy in the number
of circuit breakers required. The corresponding transformer
Figure D1.9:
circuits 1 and 2 are tee’d off Lines 1 and 2 respectively. The Single switch substation
transformer secondaries are connected to a separate HV busbar
system via circuit breakers CB1A and CB2A.
Auto-reclose facilities can be extended to cover the circuits If the line fault is persistent, 120 trips again and the motorised
for banked transformers where these are used. line isolator 103 is automatically opened. Circuit breaker
120 recloses again, followed by B1, so that both transformers
For example, a fault on Line 1 would cause the tripping of circuit T1 and T2 are then supplied from Line 2.
breakers CB1, CB1A and the remote line circuit breaker. When
Line 1 is re-energised, either by auto-reclosure of CB1 or by the A transformer fault causes the automatic opening of the
remote circuit breaker, whichever is set to reclose first, transformer appropriate transformer isolator, lock-out of the transformer
T1 is also energised. CB1A will not reclose until the appearance secondary circuit breaker and reclosure of circuit breaker
of transformer secondary voltage, as monitored by the secondary 120. Facilities for dead line charging or reclosure with
VT; it then recloses on to the HV busbars after a short time delay, synchronism check are provided for each circuit breaker.
with a synchronism check if required. 12.3 Four-switch mesh substation
In the event of a fault on transformer T1, the local and remote The mesh substation illustrated in Figure D1.10 is extensively
line circuit breakers and breaker CB1A trip to isolate the used by some utilities, either in full or part. The basic mesh
fault. Automatic opening of the motorised transformer isolator has a feeder at each corner, as shown at mesh corners
IT1 follows this. The line circuit breakers then reclose in the MC2, MC3 and MC4. One or two transformers may also be
normal manner and circuit breaker CB1A locks out. banked at a mesh corner, as shown at MC1. Mesh corner
A shortcoming of this scheme is that this results in healthy protection is required if more than one circuit is fed from a
transformer T1 being isolated from the system; also, isolator mesh corner, irrespective of the CT locations – see Chapter
L1 must be opened manually before circuit breakers CB1 [C6: Busbar Protection] for more details.
and CB1A, can be closed to re-establish supply to the HV
busbars via the transformer. A variant of this scheme is
designed to instruct isolator L1 to open automatically following
a persistent fault on Line 1 and provide a second auto-
reclosure of CB1 and CB1A. The supply to Bus C is thereby
restored without manual intervention.
12.2 Single switch substation
The arrangement shown in Figure D1.9 consists basically of two Line 1 Line 4
transformer feeders interconnected by a single circuit breaker Zone covered
by mesh corner
120. Each transformer therefore has an alternative source of protection
supply in the event of loss of one or other of the feeders.
For example, a transient fault on Line 1 causes tripping of Line 2 Line 3
circuit breakers 120 and B1 followed by reclosure of CB
120. If the reclosure is successful, Transformer T1 is
re-energised and circuit breaker B1 recloses after a short
Figure D1.10:
time delay. Four-switch mesh substation

Auto-Reclosing
12. Examples of auto-reclose applications D1
Considerable problems can be encountered in the application 12.3.4 Transformer fault (remote transformer)
of auto-reclosing to the mesh substation. For example, circuit
For a remote transformer fault, an intertrip signal is received
breakers 120 and 420 in Figure D1.10 are tripped out for
at the local station to trip breakers 120, 420, G1A and
a variety of different types of fault associated with mesh
G1B and inhibit auto-reclosing until the faulted transformer
corner 1 (MC1), and each requires different treatment as far
has been isolated at the remote station. If the intertrip persists
as auto-reclosing is concerned. Further variations occur if
for 60 seconds it is assumed that the fault cannot be isolated
the faults are persistent.
at the remote station. Isolator 103 is then automatically
Following normal practice, circuit breakers must be reclosed opened and circuit breakers120, 420, G1A and G1B are
in sequence, so sequencing circuits are necessary for the reclosed in sequence.
four mesh breakers. Closing priority may be in any order, but
12.3.5 Transient mesh corner fault
is normally 120, 220, 320, and 420.
Any fault covered by the mesh corner protection zone, shown
A summary of facilities is now given, based on mesh corner
in Figure D1.10, results in tripping of circuit breakers120,
MC1 to show the inclusion of banked transformers; facilities
420, G1A and G1B. These are then reclosed in sequence.
at other corners are similar but omit the operation of equipment
solely associated with the banked transformers. There may be circumstances in which reclosure onto a
persistent fault is not permitted – clearly it is not known in
12.3.1 Transient fault on Line 1
advance of reclosure if the fault is persistent or not. In these
Tripping of circuit breakers 120, 420, and G1B is followed circumstances, scheme logic inhibits reclosure and locks out
by reclosure of 120 to give dead line charging of Line 1. the circuit breakers.
Breaker 420 recloses in sequence, with a synchronism check.
12.3.6 Persistent mesh corner fault
Breakers G1A, G1B reclose with a synchronism check if
necessary. The sequence described in Section 12.3.5 is followed initially.
When CB 120 is reclosed, it will trip again due to the fault
12.3.2 Persistent fault on Line 1
and lock out. At this point, the logic inhibits the reclosure of
Circuit breaker 120 trips again after the first reclosure and CBs 420, G1A and G1B and locks out these CBs. Line
isolator103 is automatically opened to isolate the faulted line. isolator 103 is automatically opened to isolate the fault from
Breakers 120, 420, G1A and G1B then reclose in sequence the remote station.
as above.
12.3.3 Transformer fault (local transformer 1A)
Automatic opening of isolator 113A to isolate the faulted
transformer follows tripping of circuit breakers120, 420,
G1A and G1B. Breakers 120, 420 and G1B then reclose
in sequence, and breaker G1A is locked out.

D2
Signalling and Intertripping
in Protection Schemes
Chapter
Signalling and Intertripping

D2
in Protection Schemes
1. Introduction 433
2. Unit protection schemes 433
3. Teleprotection commands 433
4. Intertripping 434
5. Performance requirements 435
6. Transmission media, interference and noise 436
7. Signalling methods 441

Signalling and Intertripping in Protection Schemes
D2 1. Introduction
Unit protection schemes, formed by a number of relays located a. private pilot wires installed by the power authority
remotely from each other, and some distance protection
b. pilot wires or channels rented from a communications
schemes, require some form of communication between each
company
location in order to achieve a unit protection function. This
form of communication is known as protection signalling. c. carrier channels at high frequencies over the power lines
Additionally communications facilities are also required when
d. radio channels at very high or ultra high frequencies
remote operation of a circuit breaker is required as a result
of a local event. This form of communications is known as e. optical fibres
intertripping. Whether or not a particular link is used depends on factors
The communication messages involved may be quite simple, such as the availability of an appropriate communication
involving instructions for the receiving device to take some network, the distance between protection relaying points, the
defined action (trip, block, etc.), or it may be the passing of terrain over which the power network is constructed, as well
measured data in some form from one device to another (as as cost.
in a unit protection scheme). Protection signalling is used to implement Unit Protection
Various types of communication links are available for schemes, provide teleprotection commands, or implement
protection signalling, for example: intertripping between circuit breakers
2. Unit protection schemes
Phase comparison and current differential schemes use Details of Unit Protection schemes are given in Chapter [C1:
signalling to convey information concerning the relaying Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth Faults].
quantity - phase angle of current and phase and magnitude
Communications methods are covered later in this Chapter.
of current respectively - between local and remote relaying
points. Comparison of local and remote signals provides the
basis for both fault detection and discrimination of the
schemes.
3. Teleprotection commands
Some Distance Protection schemes described in Chapter Teleprotection systems are often referred to by their mode of
[C4: Distance Protection Schemes] use signalling to convey operation, or the role of the teleprotection command in the
a command between local and remote relaying points. Receipt system.
of the information is used to aid or speed up clearance of
faults within a protected zone or to prevent tripping from faults
outside a protected zone.

4. Intertripping D2
Intertripping is the controlled tripping of a circuit breaker so protection does not result in fault clearance – the fault is
as to complete the isolation of a circuit or piece of apparatus still fed from the remote end of the feeder, while feeder
in sympathy with the tripping of other circuit breakers. The unit protection may not operate as the fault is outside the
main use of such schemes is to ensure that protection at both protected zone.
ends of a faulted circuit will operate to isolate the equipment
d. some distance protection schemes use intertripping to
concerned. Possible circumstances when it may be used are:
improve fault clearance times for some kinds of fault – see
a. a feeder with a weak infeed at one end, insufficient to Chapters [C4: Distance Protection Schemes] and [C5:
operate the protection for all faults Protection of Complex Transmission Circuits].
b. feeder protection applied to transformer-feeder circuits. Intertripping schemes use signalling to convey a trip command
Faults on the transformer windings may operate the to remote circuit breakers to isolate circuits. For high reliability
transformer protection but not the feeder protection. EHV protection schemes, intertripping may be used to give
Similarly, some earth faults may not be detected due to back-up to main protections, or back-tripping in the case of
transformer connections breaker failure. Three types of intertripping are commonly
encountered, and are described below.
c. faults between the CB and feeder protection CTs, when
these are located on the feeder side of the CB. Bus-zone
Power transmission line
Trip Trip
I V V I
Intertrip Intertrip
Permissive Permissive
trip trip
Blocking Communication Blocking

Protection Teleprotection link Teleprotection Protection
relay command command relay
scheme (send) (receive) scheme
Telemetry Telemetry
Telecontrol Telecontrol
Telephone Telephone
Data Data
Communication Communication
systems systems
Figure D2.1:
Application of protection signalling and its relationship to other systems using communication (shown as a unidirectional system
for simplicity)

D2 4. Intertripping
4.1 Direct tripping 4.3 Blocking scheme

In direct tripping applications, intertrip signals are sent directly Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that
to the master trip relay. Receipt of the command causes circuit detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an
breaker operation. The method of communication must be external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in
reliable and secure because any signal detected at the a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the
receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end. The remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote
communications system design must be such that interference end protection operating if it had detected the external fault.
on the communication circuit does not cause spurious trips. Loss of the communications channel is less serious for this
Should a spurious trip occur, considerable unnecessary scheme than in others as loss of the channel does not result
isolation of the primary system might result, which is at best in a failure to trip when required. However, the risk of a spurious
undesirable and at worst quite unacceptable. trip is higher.
4.2 Permissive tripping Figure D2.1 shows the typical applications of protection
signalling and their relationship to other signalling systems
Permissive trip commands are always monitored by a
commonly required for control and management of a power
protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt
system. Of course, not all of the protection signals shown
of the command coincides with operation of the protection
will be required in any particular scheme.
relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault.
Requirements for the communications channel are less onerous
than for direct tripping schemes, since receipt of an incorrect
signal must coincide with operation of the receiving end
protection for a trip operation to take place. The intention of
these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring
within the protected zone.
5. Performance requirements
Overall fault clearance time is the sum of: retarded or missed completely. Performance is expressed in
terms of security and dependability. Security is assessed by
a. signalling time
the probability of an unwanted command occurring, and
b. protection relay operating time dependability is assessed by the probability of missing a
command. The required degree of security and dependability
c. trip relay operating time
is related to the mode of operation, the characteristics of the
d. circuit breaker operating time communication medium and the operating standards of the
The overall time must be less than the maximum time for which particular power authority.
a fault can remain on the system for minimum plant damage, Typical design objectives for teleprotection systems are not
loss of stability, etc. Fast operation is therefore a pre-requisite more than one incorrect trip per 500 equipment years and
of most signalling systems. less than one failure to trip in every 1000 attempts, or a delay
Typically the time allowed for the transfer of a command is of more than 50msec should not occur more than once per
of the same order as the operating time of the associated 10 equipment years. To achieve these objectives, special
protection relays. Typical operating times range from 5 to emphasis may be attached to the security and dependability
40ms dependent on the mode of operation of the teleprotection of the teleprotection command for each mode of operation
system. in the system, as follows.
Protection signals are subjected to the noise and interference 5.1 Performance requirements - Intertripping
associated with each communication medium. If noise Since any unwanted command causes incorrect tripping,
reproduces the signal used to convey the command, unwanted very high security is required at all noise levels up to the
commands may be produced, whilst if noise occurs when a maximum that might ever be encountered.
command signal is being transmitted, the command may be

5. Performance requirements D2
5.2 Performance requirements - Permissive tripping

TOP PUC & PMC
Security somewhat lower than that required for intertripping
10-1
is usually satisfactory, since incorrect tripping can occur only
10-2
if an unwanted command happens to coincide with operation Sec
10-3
0.06
of the protection relay for an out-of-zone fault. 0.05 10-4
0.04 10-5
For permissive over-reach schemes, resetting after a command 0.03
10-6
0.02
should be highly dependable to avoid any chance of 0.01 10-7
TOP PUC P
maloperations during current reversals. 0 MC TOP PUC P
MC TOP PUC P
Analogue Intertrip MC
5.3 Performance requirements - Blocking schemes Digital
Permissive trip
Blocking
Low security is usually adequate since an unwanted command ANALOGUE DIGITAL

Intertrip Intertrip
can never cause an incorrect trip. High dependability is TOP - 0.04sec TOP - 0.04sec
PUC -1.00E-03 PUC -1.00E-07 TOP - Maximum operating time
required since absence of the command could cause incorrect PMC -1.00E-01 PMC -1.00E-01
PUC - Probability of an unwanted
tripping if the protection relay operates for an out-of-zone Permissive trip Permissive trip command
TOP - 0.015sec TOP - 0.0015sec Security ≈ 100(1-PUC )%
fault. PUC -1.00E-01 PUC -1.00E-05
PMC -1.00E-01 PMC -1.00E-01 PMC - Probability of missing
Typical performance requirements are shown in Figure D2.2. a command
Blocking Blocking Dependability ≈ 100(1-PMC )%
TOP - 0.015sec TOP - 0.015sec
PUC -2.00E-02 PUC -1.00E-03
PMC -1.00E-01 PMC -1.00E-01
Figure D2.2:
Typical performance requirements for protection signalling
when the communication link is subjected to noise
6. Transmission media, interference and noise
The transmission media that provide the communication links 6.1 Private pilot wires and channels
involved in protection signalling are:
Pilot wires are continuous copper connections between
a. private pilots signalling stations, while pilot channels are discontinuous
pilot wires with isolation transformers or repeaters along the
b. rented pilots or channels
route between signalling stations. They may be laid in a trench
c. power line carrier with high voltage cables, laid by a separate route or strung
as an open wire on a separate wood pole route.
d. radio
Distances over which signalling is required vary considerably.
e. optical fibres
At one end of the scale, the distance may be only a few tens
Historically, pilot wires and channels (discontinuous pilot wires of metres, where the devices concerned are located in the
with isolation transformers or repeaters along the route same substation. For applications on EHV lines, the distance
between signalling points) have been the most widely used between devices may be between 10-100km or more. For
due to their availability, followed by Power Line Carrier short distances, no special measures are required against
Communications (PLCC) techniques and radio. In recent interference, but over longer distances, special send and
years, fibre-optic systems have become the usual choice for receive relays may be required to boost signal levels and
new installations, primarily due to their complete immunity provide immunity against induced voltages from power circuits,
from electrical interference. The use of fibre-optic cables also lightning strikes to ground adjacent to the route, etc. Isolation
greatly increases the number of communication channels transformers may also have to be provided to guard against
available for each physical fibre connection and thus enables rises in substation ground potential due to earth faults.
more comprehensive protection and monitoring of the power
system to be achieved by the provision of a large number of
communication channels.

D2 6. Transmission media, interference and noise
The capacity of a link can be increased if frequency division With a power system operating at, say, 132kV, where relatively
multiplexing techniques are used to run parallel signalling long protection signalling times are acceptable, signalling
systems, but some Utilities prefer the link to be used only for has been achieved above speech together with metering and
protection signalling. control signalling on an established control network.
Consequently the protection signalling was achieved at very
Private pilot wires or channels can be attractive to a Utility
low cost. High voltage systems (220kV and above) have
running a very dense power system with short distances
demanded shorter operating times and improved security,
between stations.
which has led to the renting of pilot links exclusively for
6.2 Rented pilot wires and channels protection signalling purposes.
These are rented from national communication authorities 6.3 Power line carrier communications techniques
and, apart from the connection from the relaying point to the
Where long line sections are involved, or if the route involves
nearest telephone exchange, the routing will be through cables
installation difficulties, the expense of providing physical pilot
forming part of the national communication network.
connections or operational restrictions associated with the
An economic decision has to be made between the use of route length require that other means of providing signalling
private or rented pilots. If private pilots are used, the owner facilities are required.
has complete control, but bears the cost of installation and
Power Line Carrier Communications (PLCC) is a technique
maintenance. If rented pilots are used, most of these costs
that involves high frequency signal transmission along the
are eliminated, but fees must be paid to the owner of the
overhead power line. It is robust and therefore reliable,
pilots and the signal path may be changed without warning.
constituting a low loss transmission path that is fully controlled
This may be a problem in protection applications where signal
by the Utility.
transmission times are critical.
High voltage capacitors are used, along with drainage coils,
The chance of voltages being induced in rented pilots is
for the purpose of injecting the signal to and extracting it from
smaller than for private pilots, as the pilot route is normally
the line. Injection can be carried out by impressing the carrier
not related to the route of the power line with which it is
signal voltage between one conductor and earth or between
associated. However, some degree of security and protection
any two phase conductors. The basic units can be built up
against induced voltages must be built into signalling systems.
into a high pass or band pass filter as shown in Figure D2.3.
Electrical interference from other signalling systems,
particularly 17, 25 and 50Hz ringing tones up to 150V peak, The high voltage capacitor is tuned by a tuning coil to present
and from noise generated within the equipment used in the a low impedance at the signal frequency; the parallel circuit
communication network, is a common hazard. Similarly, the presents a high impedance at the signal frequency while
signalling system must also be proof against intermittent short providing a path for the power frequency currents passed by
and open circuits on the pilot link, incorrect connection of 50 the capacitor.
volts d.c. across the pilot link and other similar faults.
The complete arrangement is designed as a balanced or
Station earth potential rise is a significant factor to be taken unbalanced half-section band pass filter, according to whether
into account and isolation must be provided to protect both the transmission is phase-phase or phase-earth; the power
the personnel and equipment of the communication authority. line characteristic impedance, between 400 and 600 ohms,
determines the design impedance of the filter.
The most significant hazard to be withstood by a protection
signalling system using this medium arises when a linesman It is necessary to minimise the loss of signal into other parts
inadvertently connects a low impedance test oscillator across of the power system, to allow the same frequency to be used
the pilot link that can generate signalling tones. Transmissions on another line. This is done with a 'line trap' or 'wave trap',
by such an oscillator may simulate the operating code or tone which in its simplest form is a parallel circuit tuned to present
sequence that, in the case of direct intertripping schemes, a very high impedance to the signal frequency. It is connected
would result in incorrect operation of the circuit breaker. in the phase conductor on the station side of the injection
equipment. The complete carrier coupling equipment is shown
Communication between relaying points may be over a two-
in Figure D2.4.
wire or four-wire link. Consequently the effect of a particular
human action, for example an incorrect disconnection, may The single frequency line trap may be treated as an integral
disrupt communication in one direction or both. part of the complete injection equipment to accommodate
two or more carrier systems. However, difficulties may arise
The signals transmitted must be limited in both level and
in an overall design, as, at certain frequencies, the actual
bandwidth to avoid interference with other signalling systems.
station reactance, which is normally capacitive, will tune with
The owner of the pilots will impose standards in this respect
that may limit transmission capacity and/or transmission
distance.

6. Transmission media, interference and noise D2
Line trap
To station
To line
Series
tuning
unit
Capacitor VT
To E/M VT To E/M VT
Shunt filter unit
75 ohms Coaxial cable

To HF equipment
Figure D2.3:
Typical phase-to-phase coupling equipment
the trap, which is inductive below its resonant frequency; the

result will be a low impedance across the transmission path,
preventing operation at these frequencies. This situation can
be avoided by the use of an independent 'double frequency'
or 'broad-band' trap.
The coupling filter and the carrier equipment are connected
by high frequency cable of preferred characteristic impedance
75 ohms. A matching transformer is incorporated in the line
coupling filter to match it to the HF (High Frequency) cable.
Surge diverters are fitted to protect the components against
transient overvoltages.
The attenuation of a channel is of prime importance in the
application of carrier signalling, because it determines the
amount of transmitted energy available at the receiving end
to overcome noise and interfering voltages. The loss of each
line terminal will be 1 to 2dB through the coupling filter, a
maximum of 3dB through its broad-band trap and not more
than 0.5dB per 100 metres through the high frequency cable.
An installation of PLCC equipment including capacitor voltage
transformers and line traps, in a line-to-line injection
arrangement, is shown in Figure D2.4.
Figure D2.4:
Carrier coupling equipment

D2 6. Transmission media, interference and noise
The high frequency transmission characteristics of power range and directional nature of the transmitter and receiver
circuits are good, with losses amounting to 0.02 to 0.2dB per aerial systems at these frequencies, large bandwidths can
kilometre depending upon line voltage and frequency. Line be allocated without much chance of mutual interference with
attenuation is not affected appreciably by rain, but serious other systems.
increase in loss may occur when the phase conductors are
Multiplexing techniques allow a number of channels to share
thickly coated with hoar-frost or ice. Attenuations of up to
the common bearer medium and exploit the large bandwidth.
three times the fair weather value have been experienced.
In addition to voice frequency channels, wider bandwidth
Receiving equipment commonly incorporates automatic gain
channels or data channels may be available, dependent on
control (AGC) to compensate for variations in attenuation of
the particular system. For instance, in analogue systems using
signals.
frequency division multiplexing, normally up to 12 voice
High noise levels arise from lightning strikes and system fault frequency channels are grouped together in basebands at
inception or clearance. Although these are of short duration, 12-60kHz or 60-108kHz, but alternatively the baseband may
lasting only a few milliseconds at the most, they may cause be used as a 48kHz signal channel. Modern digital systems
overloading of power line carrier receiving equipment. employing pulse code modulation and time division multiplexing
Signalling systems used for intertripping in particular must usually provide the voice frequency channels by sampling at
incorporate appropriate security features to avoid maloperation. 8kHz and quantising to 8 bits; alternatively, access may be
The most severe noise levels are encountered with operation available for data at 64kbits/s (equivalent to one voice
of the line isolators, and these may last for some seconds. frequency channel) or higher data rates.
Although maloperation of the associated teleprotection
Radio systems are well suited to the bulk transmission of
scheme may have little operational significance, since the
information between control centres and are widely used for
circuit breaker at one end at least is normally already open,
this. When the route of the trunk data network coincides with
high security is generally required to cater for noise coupled
that of transmission lines, channels can often be allocated
between parallel lines or passed through line traps from
for protection signalling. More generally, radio communication
adjacent lines.
is between major stations rather than the ends of individual
Signalling for permissive intertrip applications needs special lines, because of the need for line-of-sight operation between
consideration, as this involves signalling through a power aerials and other requirements of the network. Roundabout
system fault. The increase in channel attenuation due to the routes involving repeater stations and the addition of pilot
fault varies according to the type of fault, but most power channels to interconnect the radio installation and the relay
authorities select a nominal value, usually between 20 and station may be possible, but overall dependability will normally
30dB, as an application guide. A protection signal boost be much lower than for PLCC systems in which the
facility can be employed to cater for an increase in attenuation communication is direct from one end of the line to the other.
of this order of magnitude, to maintain an acceptable signal-
Radio channels are not affected by increased attenuation due
to-noise ratio at the receiving end, so that the performance
to power system faults, but fading has to be taken into account
of the service is not impaired.
when the signal-to-noise ratio of a particular installation is
Most direct intertrip applications require signalling over a being considered.
healthy power system, so boosting is not normally needed.
Most of the noise in such a protection signalling system will
In fact, if a voice frequency intertrip system is operating over
be generated within the radio equipment itself.
a carrier bearer channel, the dynamic operating range of the
receiver must be increased to accommodate a boosted signal. A polluted atmosphere can cause radio beam refraction that
This makes it less inherently secure in the presence of noise will interfere with efficient signalling. The height of aerial tower
during a quiescent signalling condition. should be limited, so that winds and temperature changes
have the minimum effect on their position.
6.4 Radio channels
6.5 Optical fibre channels
At first consideration, the wide bandwidth associated with
radio frequency transmissions could allow the use of modems Optical fibres are fine strands of glass, which behave as wave
operating at very high data rates. Protection signalling guides for light. This ability to transmit light over considerable
commands could be sent by serial coded messages of distances can be used to provide optical communication links
sufficient length and complexity to give high security, but still with enormous information carrying capacity and an inherent
achieve fast operating times. In practice, it is seldom economic immunity to electromagnetic interference.
to provide radio equipment exclusively for protection signalling,
A practical optical cable consists of a central optical fibre
so standard general-purpose telecommunications channel
which comprises core, cladding and protective buffer coating
equipment is normally adopted.
surrounded by a protective plastic oversheath containing
Typical radio bearer equipment operates at the microwave strength members which, in some cases, are enclosed by a
frequencies of 0.2 to 10GHz. Because of the relatively short layer of armouring.

6. Transmission media, interference and noise D2
To communicate information a beam of light is modulated in and protection signalling. In the latter case the available
accordance with the signal to be transmitted. This modulated bandwidth of a link is divided by means of time division
beam travels along the optical fibre and is subsequently multiplexing (T.D.M.) techniques into a number of channels,
decoded at the remote terminal into the received signal. On/ each of 64kbits/s (equivalent to one voice frequency channel
off modulation of the light source is normally preferred to which typically uses an 8-bit analogue-to-digital conversion
linear modulation since the distortion caused by non-linearities at a sampling rate of 8kHz). A number of Utilities sell surplus
in the light source and detectors, as well as variations in capacity on their links to telecommunications operators. The
received light power, are largely avoided. trend of using rented pilot circuits is therefore being reversed,
with the Utilities moving back towards ownership of the
The light transmitter and receiver are usually laser or LED
communication circuits that carry protection signalling.
devices capable of emitting and detecting narrow beams of
light at selected frequencies in the low attenuation 850, 1300 The equipments that carry out this multiplexing at each end
and 1550 nanometre spectral windows. The distance over of a line are known as 'Pulse Code Modulation' (P.C.M.) terminal
which effective communications can be established depends equipments. This approach is the one adopted by
on the attenuation and dispersion of the communication link telecommunications authorities and some Utilities favour its
and this depends on the type and quality of the fibre and the adoption on their private systems, for economic considerations.
wavelength of the optical source. Within the fibre there are
Optical fibre communications are well established in the
many modes of propagation with different optical paths that
electrical supply industry. They are the preferred means for
cause dispersion of the light signal and result in pulse
the communications link between a substation and a telephone
broadening.
exchange when rented circuits are used, as trials have shown
The degrading of the signal in this way can be reduced by that this link is particularly susceptible to interference from
the use of 'graded index' fibres that cause the various modes power system faults if copper conductors are used. Whilst
to follow nearly equal paths. The distance over which signals such fibres can be laid in cable trenches, there is a strong
can be transmitted is significantly increased by the use of trend to associate them with the conductors themselves by
'monomode' fibres that support only one mode of propagation. producing composite cables comprising optical fibres
embedded within the conductors, either earth or phase. For
With optical fibre channels, communication at data rates of
overhead lines use of OPGW (Optical Ground Wire) earth
hundreds of megahertz is achievable over a few tens of
conductors is very common, while an alternative is to wrap
kilometres, whilst greater distances require the use of
the optical cable helically around a phase or earth conductor.
repeaters. An optical fibre can be used as a dedicated link
This latter technique can be used without restringing of the
between two terminal equipments, or as a multiplexed link
line.
that carries all communication traffic such as voice, telecontrol

D2 7. Signalling methods
Various methods are used in protection signalling; not all need signalling equipments operating at voice frequencies exploit
be suited to every transmission medium. The methods to be the standardisation of the communication interface. Where
considered briefly are: voice frequency channels are not available or suitable,
protection signalling may make use of a medium or specialised
a. D.C. voltage step or d.c. voltage reversals
equipment dedicated entirely to the signalling requirements.
b. plain tone keyed signals at high and voice frequencies
Figure D2.5 illustrates the communication arrangements
c. frequency shift keyed signals involving two or more tones commonly encountered in protection signalling.
at high and voice frequencies
7.1 D.C. voltage signalling
General purpose telecommunications equipment operating
A d.c. voltage step or d.c. voltage reversals may be used to
over power line carrier, radio or optical fibre media incorporate
convey a signalling instruction between protection relaying
frequency translating or multiplexing techniques to provide
points in a power system, but these are suited only to private
the user with standardised communication channels. They
pilot wires, where low speed signalling is acceptable, with its
have a nominal bandwidth/channel of 4kHz and are often
inherent security.
referred to as voice frequency (vf) channels. Protection
Pilot wires
Pilot channel
Voice
frequency
Power line
Protection carrier
relay communication
scheme channel Power line carrier
Carrier
frequency
shift
On/off
keyed
carrier
Frequency
division
multiplex
Radio Radio
transmitter
PCM
primary
multiplex Optical fibre
Digital
general purpose
Optical
transmitter
Optical fibre
dedicated
Optical
Protection Communication
signalling Transmission media
equipment
equipment
Figure D2.5:
Communication arrangements commonly encountered in protection signalling

7. Signalling methods D2
7.2 Plain tone signals Frequency shift keyed voice frequency signals can be used
for all protection signalling applications over all transmission
Plain high frequency signals can be used successfully for the
media. Frequency modulation techniques make possible an
signalling of blocking information over a power line. A normally
improvement in performance, because amplitude limiting
quiescent power line carrier equipment can be dedicated
rejects the amplitude modulation component of noise, leaving
entirely to the transfer to teleprotection blocking commands.
only the phase modulation components to be detected.
Phase comparison power line carrier unit protection schemes
often use such equipment and take advantage of the very The operational protection signal may consist of tone sequence
high speed and dependability of the signalling system. The codes with, say, three tones, or a multi-bit code using two
special characteristics of dedicated 'on/off' keyed carrier discrete tones for successive bits, or of a single frequency
systems are discussed later. A relatively insensitive receiver shift.
is used to discriminate against noise on an amplitude basis,
Modern high-speed systems use multi-bit code or single
and for some applications the security may be satisfactory
frequency shift techniques. Complex codes are used to give
for permissive tripping, particularly if the normal high-speed
the required degree of security in direct intertrip schemes:
operation of about 6ms is sacrificed by the addition of delays.
the short operating times needed may result in uneconomical
The need for regular reflex testing of a normally quiescent
use of the available voice frequency spectrum, particularly
channel usually precludes any use for intertripping.
if the channel is not exclusively employed for protection
Plain tone power line carrier signalling systems are particularly signalling. As noise power is directly proportional to bandwidth,
suited to providing the blocking commands often associated a large bandwidth causes an increase in the noise level
with the protection of multi-ended feeders, as described in admitted to the detector, making operation in the presence
Chapter [C5: Protection of Complex Transmission Circuits]. of noise more difficult. So, again, it is difficult to obtain both
A blocking command sent from one end can be received high dependability and high security.
simultaneously at all the other ends using a single power line
The signal frequency shift technique has advantages where
carrier channel. Other signalling systems usually require
fast signalling is needed for blocked distance and permissive
discrete communication channels between each of the ends
intertrip applications. It has little inherent security, but additional
or involve repeaters, leading to decreased dependability of
circuits responsive to every type of interference can give
the blocking command.
acceptable security. This system does not require a channel
Plain voice frequency signals can be used for blocking, capable of high transmission rates, as the frequency changes
permissive intertrip and direct intertrip applications for all once only; the bandwidth can therefore be narrower than in
transmission media but operation is at such a low signal level coded systems, giving better noise rejection as well as being
that security from maloperation is not very good. Operation advantageous if the channel is shared with telemetry and
in the 'tone on' to 'tone off' mode gives the best channel control signalling, which will inevitably be the case if a power
monitoring, but offers little security; to obtain a satisfactory line carrier bearer is employed.
performance the output must be delayed. This results in
relatively slow operation: 70 milliseconds for permissive
intertripping, and 180 milliseconds for direct intertripping.
7.3 Frequency shift keyed signals
Frequency shift keyed high frequency signals can be used
over a power line carrier link to give short operating times (15
milliseconds for blocking and permissive intertripping, 20
milliseconds for direct intertripping) for all applications of
protection signalling. The required amount of security can be
achieved by using a broadband noise detector to monitor the
actual operational signalling equipment.

SCADA
IEC 61850 Fast Ethernet
I/O
D3
IEC 61850 and Applications

Chapter

D3
1. Introduction 445
1.1 What is IEC 61850? 446
1.2 Why choose IEC 61850? 446
1.3 History of IEC 61850 446
1.4 Evolution of IEC 61850 446
2. General philosophy 447
2.1 Global approach 447
2.2 Parts of the standard 447
2.3 Abstract service interface 449
2.4 Data modelling 450
2.5 Engineering process 453
2.6 Documentation 455
2.7 Interoperability vs. interchangeability 456
2.8 Advantages vs. conventional hard-wiring 457
3. Communication services 458
3.1 General communication architecture 458
3.2 Client-server communication 459
3.3 GOOSE communication 463
3.4 Sampled values 464
3.5 Time synchronisation 465
4. Typical applications 466
4.1 Applications with client-server communication 466
4.2 Applications with GOOSE communication 472
D3 1. Introduction
IEC 61850 is the international standard for the communication The flexible design of the standard allows it to support evolution
networks and systems for power utility automation. It allows coping with technology evolutions and domain extensions.
the implementation of distributed application functions, based
IEC 61850 is based on 3 pillars:
on Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) from different
manufacturers. Initially dedicated to communication inside a. A set of dictionaries: the information modelling or data model
substations, IEC 61850 is now the one central communication
b. A set of communication services available on several
standard of the Smart Grid IEC reference architecture as shown
communication layers
in Figure D3.1.
c. A configuration language: the backbone of the engineering
This chapter presents an overview of IEC 61850 and shows
workflow.
practical applications of this standard in the protective relays
domain. A further chapter outlines typical network architecture 1.1.1 IEC 61850 as a set of dictionaries
solutions and related redundancy concepts for Ethernet When a device receives an IEC 61850 data item there is no
solutions selected by IEC 61850 as the communication layer. ambiguity in the meaning of this information as it is clearly
defined in the dictionary. Every IEC 61850 domain (substation,
hydro etc.) shares a common dictionary. But also each IEC
61850 domain can own a specific dictionary for its own
definition. The link of data definition is done to create functional
Control centre
Wind power plant bricks used to model typical electrical and non-electrical
functions used in an application model.
1.1.2 IEC 61850 as a communication protocol
IEC 61850 IEC 61860
IEC 61860
Distributed energy resources
Hydro power plant The communication services have been defined in a generic
way in IEC 61850 through an Abstract Communication Service
Local
RTU
interface (ACSI).
SCADA
IEC 61850
ACSI is independent of any communication method but provides
basic functions such as read/write, browsing, event, setting,
IED IED CTs/VTs
control, file transfer etc.
This abstract specification is mapped on communication
Power utility substations
technologies such as:
a. Client-Server over MMS/IP (most common)
Figure D3.1:
IEC 61850 Smartgrid Architecture b. Client-Server over web services
c. Multicast on Ethernet (most common)
1.1 What is IEC 61850? d. Multicast on IP
The objective of the IEC 61850 standard is to offer a way of 1.1.3 IEC 61850 as a configuration language
exchanging meaningful information between field level devices The configuration language defines the structure of the
coming from different vendors in the context of electric utility configuration files used by the engineering workflow. This XML
energy automation. based schema (named SCL for System Configuration
But IEC 61850 is much more than just a communication protocol. Language) supports many activities:
It aims to offer ways to seamlessly and efficiently design an a. Specifying system requirements in terms of topology,
automation system from the very upstream specification part, primary devices and functions
down to commissioning, operation and maintenance. It has
b. Describing a complete system, following the life cycle of
been designed to specifically address the specifics of electricity
this system
transmission and distribution such as:
c. Describing the functional capabilities of devices (through
a. The reaction speed: a few milliseconds reaction time is
its communication interface)
achievable
The different actors of the engineering workflow exchange
b. Multicast capabilities: information can be sent by the
data using files based on SCL. These kinds of files are also
producer to a group of connected devices
standardised for specific usage, depending on the associated
c. EMC performance level: matching the specific electrical workflow state. This allows engineering tools to be interoperable
environment regarding system configuration process.

1. Introduction D3
1.2 Why choose IEC 61850? easier way to diagnose and repair and finally an agility increase,
so that installations can more easily cope with new functional
IEC 61850 seeks to overcome the problem of multiple vendors
requirements.
using multiple protocols or different solutions based on the
same protocol to convey essentially the same information. But nevertheless, as usual for such a complex standard, this
first version did not solve all potential interoperability problems
This is one of the key drivers, however there are many other
in one go. Issues have been registered in a web database
features and benefits that provide the user with more control
(http://tissue.iec61850.com/) and solved by extensions or
and better visibility of the system, maintenance and process:
corrections of the standard.
a. A single configuration file is used to define the system
Edition 2 of IEC 61850 was published in 2009. Previous parts
b. Direct, high speed, peer to peer communications simplifies have been improved by adding more precise descriptions of
or replaces wiring schemes (GOOSE) ambiguous points and fixing errors. IEC 61850 foundations
have been strengthened by various updates.
c. Common data models provide an interoperable solution
for data description between vendors New parts have been added, so that the scope of the standard
is no longer limited to substations, it now includes inter-
d. The inbuilt engineering process provides standardisation
substation communication, wind farm systems, control centres,
and common structures
distributed energy resources (DER), wide area measurement
e. Cost and delivery can be controlled and long term and protection automation control systems, hydro power
maintenance is simplified systems and power quality.
f. Data integrity built in means that the user understands the The standard is giving clear rules using so called “name space”
status of his communication network and can be assured extensions to add manufacturer or domain specific data without
that only valid signals are acted upon a risk of collision or interoperability break.
g. Contextual data allows for more and more automated In addition secured communication over WAN, high availability
solutions with products self identifying and describing seamless redundancy protocols (HSR/PRP), mapping IEC
h. An open protocol that allows future extensions. 61850/IEC 850-1-101/104 and mapping IEC 61850/DNP3 (IEEE
1815) are now defined to support this standard.
1.3 History of IEC 61850
1.4 Evolution of IEC 61850
Development of Substation Automation Systems has been very
rapid in the last few decades because of major advances in Evolutions of IEC 61850 will not stop with the Edition 2. On the
communication and microprocessor technologies. contrary, IEC 61850 will play a major role in the scope of the
smart grid. In 2015, IEC should release an amendment named
In the 1980s, utilities and manufacturers started developing Ed2.1. The scope and the quality of IEC 61850 quality shall
private communication protocols. Rapidly, the lack of compatibility be improved again.
led to the necessity for an international standardisation with the
effort to ensure interoperability. Utilities were frustrated with the A maintenance process is setup to handle technical issues
cost of supporting many device protocols and with the lack of (called TISSUES) raised after publication. Two categories of
freedom in choosing components within a solution. End-users TISSUES are defined. The first one, the most critical, called
complained that products and systems were not interoperable “IntOp” TISSUES must be handled by a vendor as soon as a
and that maintenance, installation and engineering costs were proposed fix is provided by the IEC committee. TISSUES of
getting higher and higher. the second category are improvement proposals. They are
taken into account for future versions of the standard.
IEC 61850 has been elaborated by the IEC technical committee
57 by merging concepts coming from two preceding standards: The Ed2.1 standard itself will be auto-generated from a
UCA2 from Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and the database, avoiding any typing or format mistakes. A machine
IEC 60870-5. readable data model will be available for engineering tools
usage. A web-access will be provided through the IEC web
Starting in 2002, IEC has published a list of separate consistent site in future.
documents establishing the Edition 1 of IEC 61850. Since the
introduction of this new standard several thousands of New parts are under development to extend the coverage to
substations were installed all over the world according to this new actors: feeder automation, power supply, battery storage,
Edition. FACTS (Flexible Alternative Current Transmission System) etc.
The main benefits are not only interoperability, but also a New parts, related to new communication and configuration
reduction in hardware equipment and its wiring thanks to the technologies are also under development: use of wide area
substitution by a single Ethernet cable, an enhancement of networks, use of web services, logic modelling, and statistical
the maintainability by the increased system observability, an calculation capabilities.

D3 2. General philosophy
This chapter covers the main aspect of IEC 61850. The first 2.2 Parts of the standard
section gives an overview of the IEC 61850 series, thereby
2.2.1 Documentation structure
one can go directly to the part of interest. The last three
sections explain the three foundations of IEC 61850: the data IEC 61850 documentation is quite extensive. The documentation
model, the communication services and the configuration is split into several parts. Some of them are normative
process. (International Standard). Others are only informative and can
be used as a guideline or overview (for instance part 7-5).
2.1 Global approach
Let’s describe briefly the documentation structure.
To achieve interoperability between IEDs from different
Parts 1 to 5 cover general requirements.
manufacturers, the standard has to specify a very precise
definition of both the functions and the communication Parts 7-3, 7-4, 7-4xx, describe the set of dictionaries (the
services, without compromising the needed flexibility. first pillar as introduced earlier).
A function can be defined as a task which has to be performed Parts 7-2, 8-1, 9-2 focus on communication services (the
by the electric utility automation system. A function has a well second pillar).
defined purpose, inputs and outputs. The standard defines
Part 6 deals with the configuration language (the third pillar)
many basic functions, named Logical Node (LN). Collectively,
LNs define the behaviour of the system. At the end, the real Finally, part 10 specifies the test cases which have to be
processing is done in physical devices. To achieve flexibility, performed to ensure the conformance of the implementation.
the standard allows the free allocation of a LN to the physical As a summary, the documentation defines how IEDs must be
devices, taking into account availability requirements, implemented, provides general information and guidelines
performance requirements, cost constraint, and device and specifies how a manufacturer can obtain an IEC 61850
capabilities etc. Communications services allow exchange conformance certificate.
of data between LNs which are not located in the same
physical devices. The following Figure D3.3 outlines the structure of the
documentation with the three pillars. The following Table D3.1
Figure D3.2 shows 4 IEDs that each contain one or more LNs lists the official IEC 61850 parts as of June 2015 (In Pink:
(PTOC, PDIS, PTRC, XCBR). The red lines represent the Dictionaries, Orange: Communication Protocols, Green:
communication services between IEDs. The black lines Configuration language).
represent communications between LNs inside some IEDs,
but they are private to the IED and not defined by the standard.
Introduction IEC 61850-1
Glossary IEC 61850-2
General requirements IEC 61850-3
IED1 IED2 System and project management IEC 61850-4
Logical node and data object
PTOC
Guidelines IEC 61850-7-5xx
Configuration description
PTOC classes IEC 61850-7-4 &

PDIS
language IEC 61850-7-1
7-4xx
Principles & models
PTRC
IEC 61850-7-1
Common data classes

& 80-1 & 90-x
PTRC
Communication requirements
IEC 61850-7-3
Abstract communication
Network service interface
IEC 61850-5
IEC 61850-7-2
IED3 IED4
XCBR XCBR Mapping on network
IEC 61850-8-1 & 9-2
Figure D3.2:
IEC 61850 smartgrid architecture Conformance testing IEC 61850-10
Figure D3.3:
IEC 61850 standard parts overview

2. General philosophy D3
Part Title Latest Previous

1 Introduction and overview ed2.0_2013-03 ed1.0_2003-04
2 Glossary ed1.0_2003-08
3 General requirements ed2.0_2013-12 ed1.0_2002-02
4 System and project management ed2.0_2011-04 ed1.0_2002-01
5 Communication requirements for functions and device models ed2.0_2013-01 ed1.0_2003-07
6 Configuration language for communication in electrical substations relate ed2.0_2009-12 ed1.0_2004-03
Basic communication structure
7-1 Principles and models ed2.0_2011-07 ed1.0_2003-07
7-2 Abstract communication service interface (ACSI) ed2.0_2010-08 ed1.0_2003-05
7-3 Common Data Classes ed2.0_2010-12 ed1.0_2003-05
7-4 Compatible logical node classes and data classes ed2.0_2010-03 ed1.0_2003-05
7-410 Hydroelectric power plants - Communication for monitoring end control ed2.0_2012-10 ed1.0_2007-08
7-420 Distributed energy resources logical nodes ed1.0_2009-03
7-510 Hydroelectric power plants - Modelling concepts and guidelines ed1.0_2012-03
Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
8-1 Mappings to MMS (ISO/IEC9506-1 and ISO/IEC 9506-2) ed2.0_2011-06 ed1.0_2004-05
9-1 Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link withdraw ed1.0_2003-05
9-2 Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3 ed2.0_2011-09 ed1.0_2004-04
10 Conformance testing ed2.0_2012-12 ed1.0_2005-05
Guideline to exchanging information from a CDC-based data model using IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC
80-1 ed1.0_2008-12
60870-5-104
90-1 Use of IEC 61850 for the communication between substations ed1.0_2010-03
90-4 Network engineering guidelines ed1.0_2013-08
90-5 Use of IEC 61850 to transmit synchrophasor information according to IEEE C37.118 ed1.0_2012-05
90-7 Object models for power converters in distributed energy resources (DER) system ed1.0_2013-02
Table D3.1:
List of IEC 61850 standard parts (published until the 30.04.2015)
If relevant, the reference of the previous version is also IEC 61850-4 describes the system lifecycle, the engineering
mentioned. Some parts are still in the first edition. You will requirements and the quality assurance.
notice that IEC has decided to withdraw the part 9-1.
IEC 61850-5 defines the communication requirements for
New parts of IEC 61850 are regularly published because of the functions. Part 5 decomposes the whole system behaviour
inclusion of new domains or methods of communication or guidelines. into the smallest functions, called Logical Nodes. All of them
are documented and categorised.
The main parts are: 6, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 8-1, 9-2 and 10 because
they provide the foundation of the interoperability characteristic 2.2.3 Parts linked to data model definition
of IEC 61850.
IEC 61850-7-4 specifies the information model of devices
2.2.2 General requirements and functions generally related to power utility automation. It
also contains the information model of devices and function-
IEC 61850-1 provides an introduction and an overview of
related applications in a substation.
IEC 61850.
IEC 61850-7-410 and IEC 61850-7-420 have the same part
IEC 61850-2 lists a collection of terminology and definitions
7-4 objective, but are dedicated respectively to distributed
used within the various part of the standard.
energy resources and hydroelectric power plants.
IEC 61850-3 provides general requirements: quality
IEC 61850-7-3 is applicable to the description of device
requirements (reliability, maintainability etc.), environmental
models and functions of substations and feeder equipment.
conditions.

It has a list of commonly used information that is referenced IEC 61850-7-510 explains the modelling of hydroelectric
in part 7-4 and 7-4xx. In particular, it specifies common basic power plants. There are other parts planned in this area as
information (named Common Data Class or CDC) for status, following:
measurement, control, setting and description.
a. 7-5: Application guide
2.2.4 Parts linked to communication services definition
b. 7-500: Use of logical nodes for modelling applications and
IEC 61850-7-2 applies to the ACSI communication for energy related concepts and guidelines for substations.
systems providing the following abstract communication
IEC 61850-80-x and IEC 61850-90-x series deal with
service interfaces:
communication mapping with other technologies. The parts
a. Abstract interface describing communications between a 80-x are mainly “Technical Specifications” (TS) which are
client and a remote server used as amendments to the IEC 61850 standard, e.g. mapping
of other standards like IEC 60870 series/DNP3/Modbus/web
b. Abstract interface for fast and reliable system-wide event
protocols or IEEE C34.94). The parts 90-x are used for
distribution between an application in one device and many
“Technical Reports” (TR), which are mostly definitions of new
remote applications in different devices (publisher/
features which could be integrated in any future major edition
subscriber)
of the standard (like communication between Substations,
c. Abstract interface for transmission of sampled measured Substations and Network Centres, LAN (Local Area Network)
values (publisher/subscriber). and WAN (Wide Area Network) etc.). These parts can be seen
as extensions to the standard with all requirements to be
IEC 61850-8-1 specifies a method of exchanging time-critical
added in each pillar of the IEC 61850.
and non-time-critical data through local-area networks
according to the abstract specification in IEC 61850-7-2 by 2.3 Abstract service interface
mapping ACSI to MMS and ISO/IEC 8802-3 frames. This is
To prepare the standard for future usage, the part IEC 61850-
often referred to as “System Bus”.
7-2 defines an abstract communication service interface
IEC 61850-9-2 defines the specific communication service (ACSI) for the link between the communication hardware and
mapping for the transmission of sampled values according driver software to the application. Figure D3.4 illustrates the
to the abstract specification in IEC 61850-7-2. It defines the principle based on the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection)
concrete means to communicate samples values from sensors communication layer model.
to IEDs. This is often referred to as “Process Bus”.
2.2.5 Part linked to the definition of substation
communication language Mapping to stack
SLOW Long-term
CHANGES Application (Objects, Services) definitions
IEC 61850-6 specifies a file format describing communication- Application Safe-guarding
Domain investments
related configurations and IED parameters, communication Substation
GOOSE Sampled Client - server
system configurations, switch yard (function) structures, and values communication Abstract
Interface
the relations between them. The main purpose of this format Adaptation Mapping per selected stack
is to exchange IED capability descriptions and SA system Stack
descriptions between IED and system engineering tools of Interface
FAST
CHANGES MMS
different manufacturers in a compatible way. This part also Communication
Real-time
Stack selection
requirements
Technology
defines the engineering process cycle with tool roles and TCP following
state-of-the-art
IP
different file types to reflect the different process phases to communication
Ethernet Link Layer technology
be done. Ethernet Physical Layer with Priority tagging
2.2.6 Parts linked to the definition of conformance testing

IEC 61850-10 specifies test-cases which must be passed Figure D3.4:
to prove a certain level of interoperability. It applies both to Abstract communication interface
IEDs and tools. It excludes functional testing. UCA/IEC
international users group uses this part as a foundation to
establish a conformance test procedure. This allows products The ACSI allows the development of hardware independent
to be tested in a uniform way and to obtain a certificate of software structures at the application level. This is done by
conformance to the standard. using a communication stack for the connection to the
hardware technology selected. As it is expected that the
2.2.7 Guideline parts hardware technology is continuously changing in future, e.g.
IEC 61850-7-1 explains the general concepts and can be from today’s 100MBit Ethernet to e.g. 1GBit Ethernet, the
used as a tutorial. It’s a good means to acquire a global software part can be kept unchanged as the adaptation to
understanding of the standard. the new hardware is managed by a new or updated

communication stack. The stack software itself has to provide The data model of a device is the description of all of its data
an interface to different layers and protocols to support the and their organisation. There is a minimum of 5 nested layers
different services used for IEC 61850. IEC 61850-8-1 and IEC used to define the structure of a data model of the device. All
61850-9-2 currently define the communication media upper levels are used to structure the information and as a
(Hardware level). Table D3.2 details the selected protocols container for data of a lower level. Figure D3.5 illustrates this
for each category of service with standard part name. principle. At the lowest level, the data values are managed by
Data Attributes (DA). Those are grouped to build Data Objects
(DO). At the next level DO are also grouped to build Logical Nodes
Sampled Time Client/server (LN). LN again are grouped to Logical Devices (LD) and LD to
values GOOSE synchronisation services Category
Physical devices. The standard allows two levels of DO or several
IEC 61850
levels of DA. These sub level elements are named as SDO (Sub
-9-2 IEC 61850-8-1 Standard
Data Object) and SDA (Sub Data Attribute). They are used when
MMS Application,
protocol presentation,
the element needs a deeper, more detailed differentiation.
SV GOOSE Time sync (SNTP) suite session layers
The standard defines the most typical objects which could
TCP/IP be added to the data model. Nevertheless this collection of
UPD/IP T-PROFILE
standard objects cannot contain elements for all available
SMV GOOSE
information provided by the functionality of an IED. By adding
Transport
HSR/PRP (optional)
network, data private elements to the data model, it can be extended so
802.1Q 802.1Q (optional) link layers that manufacturer specific data can be included as
1 Gb fibre 100 Mb fibre or copper Physical layer manufacturer specific LN or DO at the right level, without
breaking the interoperability.
Table D3.2:
Network mapping for IEC 61850
For “Sampled Values” (see section 3.4) according to part 9-2

and “GOOSE communication” (see section 3.3) according to Physical device T1
part 8-1, the data is transported on a low communication layer
as multicast on the MAC address level with its own defined
data structure and content. Contains 1..n
Time Synchronisation is managed by SNTP (Simple Network

LD
Time Protocol). IEEE Std1588:2009 can also be used when
higher precision is required. (Logical Device) Control
For “Client-Server communication”, MMS (Manufacturing Contains 1..n

Messaging Specification) is used. It was initially designed for
the manufacturing industry and it has been chosen, because
LN
it is able to support the complex naming and service model P5CBXCBR1
(Logical Node)
of IEC 61850 and the event reporting mechanism. Mapping Class = XCBR
of the Client-Server services from part 7-2 onto MMS is
Contains 1..n
relatively straightforward. TCP/IP is not the only transport
option, but today every device uses it.
A mapping of Client-Server services of part 7-2 using Web- DO
(Data Object) Pos
Services is coming and foreseen as the future part 8-2.
CDC = DPC
2.4 Data modelling Contains 1..n
Data modelling allows real world objects to be represented

in a virtual world, allowing information to be exchanged DA stVal
type : intermediate-state
digitally. Data is grouped in a structured way allowing a (Data Attribute) | off | on | bad-state
semantic to be applied to give a strong meaning to their virtual
representation. The semantic is represented by standardised
names listed in part 7-2, 7-3,7-4 and 7-4xx series of the IEC
61850 standard.
Figure D3.5:
Hierarchy of data model objects

2.4.1 Logical devices

LN class first letter / Category
A physical device is split into several Logical Devices (LD)
A Automatic control
to allow the structuring of different independent functional
groups of functions. A typical bay unit could contain a LD for C Supervisory control
protection, control or measurements. The grouping and D Distributed energy resources
structure depends strongly on the applications for which the
F Functional blocks
physical device is made. An IED hosts one or multiple
communication access points and related communication G Generic function references
services with one or multiple LDs inside. With Edition 2 of the H Hydro power
standard it is also possible to cascade multiple levels of LD.
I Interfacing and archiving
2.4.2 Logical nodes K Mechanical and non-electrical primary equipment
Each LD is a collection of Logical Nodes (LN). Each LN is L System logical nodes
an instance of a Logical Nodes class. Logical Node classes
M Metering and measurement
are defined in part 7-4 or part 7-4xx. A Logical Node class
represents a well defined autonomous function. For example, P Protection functions
class XCBR always represents a circuit breaker and class Q Power quality events detection related
PDIS a single zone element of the distance protection. LN
R Protection related functions
class names are always built with 4 letters. This first letter is
used to categorise the LN class. For example, PTOC, PDIS, S Supervision and monitoring
PTRC are all LN classes related to protection functions. Table T Instrument transformer and sensors
D3.3 shows the different categories available. The standard
W Wind power
gives a specific LN class for each dedicated type of application
function to define its mandatory or optional DOs. All LNs X Switchgear
instantiated from a given Logical Node class are not necessarily Y Power transformer and related functions
identical in terms of DO composition. The presence of some
Z Further (power system) equipment
DOs is mandatory. For others, the presence is optional or
depends on a set of well defined rules. That means that two
LNs built upon the same LN class can be composed of two Table D3.3:
different DO sets. LNs can exchange information to each LN class categories overview
other by using embedded DOs or DAs.
2.4.3 Data objects
Category
Each DO is an instance of a Common Data Class (CDC).
Status SPS,DPS,INS,ENS,ACT,ACD,SEC,BCR,HST,
CDCs are defined in part 7-3. Table D3.4 shows all the available information VSS
CDCs. CDCs are categorised into 7 categories: status
Measured
information, measured information, controls, status settings, information
MV,CMV,SAV,WYE,DEL,SEQ,HMV,HWYE,HDEL
analogue settings, description information and service tracking.
Controls SPC,DPC,INC,ENC,BSC,ISC,APC,BAC
A CDC is a defined class for a DO to list all data attributes
required to support all access services. Similar to LN, DO Status settings SPG,ING,ENG,ORG,TSG,CUG,VSG
instantiated from a given CDC can be different when additional Analogue
ASG,CURVE,CSG
DA gets added to the collection of DA given by the template. settings
Description
An example of a DO in LN class XCBR is the DO “Pos”, which DPL,LPL,CSD
information
contains mainly the DA “stVal” for the position of the circuit
CST,BTS,UTS,LTS,GTS,MTS,NTS,STS,CTS,OT,
breaker, the “t” for the timestamp and the “q” for quality. DA Service tracking
VSD
“stVal” is an enumeration with the four states “on”, “off”,
“intermediate-state” and “bad state”. “Pos” is based on the
CDC class “DPC” which can be controlled and monitored. Table D3.4:
This is based on the two wires used for the control and two CDC class overview
others for the status of a switching device.
The distance LN PDIS itself contains a DO “Str” for the starting 2.4.4 Data attributes
information and an “Op” for the trip (Operate) information for Each DO is a collection of Data Attributes (DA). A DA is
the distance element. The DO “Str” and “Op” are based on linked to each single information element of the DO and
CDC “SPS” as binary “Single Pole Status”. provides information such as the value, its time stamp, its

quality and other required information defined for each DO. The last example Ex3 represents a setting of an overcurrent
DA definition can be retrieved by looking inside the CDC protection. T1Protection/P5PHPTOC1.OpDlTmms.setVal
definition linked to the DO. DA is mainly defined by its represents the Operate delay time duration.
standardised name and its type. The type of DA can by basic
The value T1Protection/P5PHPTOC1.OpDlTmms.units.
(integer, float, string etc.) or already structured (Quality, Range,
multiplier makes it possible to know if the value is in seconds,
Unit, Vector etc.). Basic types are defined in part 7-2.
in milliseconds, or in any other unit.
Structured types are named ‘Constructed attribute classes’
and defined in part 7-3. Also standardised enumerations are 2.4.6 Communication modelling
defined in 7-3 and 7-4. They make use of standardised names.
The LD/LN/DO/DA hierarchy isn’t sufficient to model objects
2.4.5 Data reference for use by communication services. This section goes deeper
into the data model description, so that communication
All data owned by a given device has a standardised reference:
services can be more easily understood.
a name built according to a rule and with standardised names.
Physical Device, LD, LN, DO and DA build together as string From a network communication point of view, a system is a
to create a unique reference. Table D3.5 shows several set of communicating physical devices connected together
examples of DA references. For the DO and SDO part, the using communication networks. IEC 61850 models the system
associated CDC is mentioned. For the DA and SDA, the using “Sub Network” and “Access Point” entities.
associated format type is also mentioned.
Sub Network is a logical, visible subdivision of an IP network.
In example Ex1 (see 1st column in Table D3.5), T1Control/ Each device on the subnet has a common subnet IP address
P5CBXCMB1.Pos.stVal represents the position of the breaker. allowing simple segregation by creating a subnet mask to
Example Ex2 is more complex. It involves 3 levels of DA. isolate specific devices assigned.
T1Measurement/P5VECAMMXU1.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f Access Point represents a network interface of a physical

represents the current measurement of the Phase A of a device connected to one as used above to highlight that it is
measurement unit. a special expression “Sub Network”.
IEC 61850 reference for DA

LDName LNName DataName[.DataName[. ...]]
(Physical Device Name)
defined in part 7-4
defined in part 7-3
defined in part 7-3
defined in part 7-3
defined in part 7-3
defined in part 7-3

IEDname
LN Prefix
LN Suffix
LN Class
Ldinst
SDO
SDA
SDA
DO
DA
stVal
Pos Type : intermediate-
Ext1 T1 Control P5CB XCMB 1
CDC: DPC state | off | on |
bad-state
phsA mag
A cVal f
Ext2 T1 Measurement P5VECA MMXU 1 CDC: Type :
CDC: WYE Type: Vector Type: float
CMV AnalogueValue
OpDlTmms units multiplier

Ext3 T1 Protection P5PH PTOC 1
CDC: ING Type:Unit Type: enum
Table D3.5:
Reference overview for DA

Server is the logical grouping of Logical Devices. It controls Figure D3.6 outlines all entities required for communication
the access to the whole set of data exposed by a given physical purpose with properties and runtime behaviour of the
device through a given Access Point. Dedicated Authentication associated communication services. For the data transmission
mechanisms could be described at that level. Server is the owner each control block gets a data set assigned defining the data
of the data. A physical device can own several access points content behind it. When an event-triggered transmission for
and so it can communicate on several networks. Facilities are the control block is configured, a report will only happen,
provided, so that the same Server is exposed to manage this when one of the references in the assigned Data Set has
multiple network access. Figure D3.6 outlines all entities required changed its status. Similarly to data set, control blocks can
for communication purpose. The picture introduces the new be defined dynamically (during operation).
“Control Block”, “Data Set” and “LOG” entities.
2.5 Engineering process
2.5.1 Substation configuration language
Physical device (or IED)

Based on the very widely used eXtensible Markup Language
Contains 1..n
(XML) as the exchange data format, IEC 61850 provides a
Service Access Point Contains 0..n configuration language, the System Configuration Language
Contains 1..n Control Blocks Refers to one LOG
(SCL). SCL defines how the data is structured inside the file
Server to allow an interoperable way to import and export data
Contains 1..n
between the different tools from possibly different vendors.
Contains 0..n Log Control Block
Logical Device
The SCL is used to store all relevant information objects such
Contains 1..n as the data model, the supported services and the
Buffered and
Contains 0..n Unbuffered Report communication parameters of an IED in one common file.
Control Block
Secondly at a higher hierarchy level, an SCL file is used to
Logical Node
Contains 0..1 Setting describe the whole substation system with all its primary and
Refer to one
Control Block secondary equipment. It contains the collection of IEDs

Contains 0..n including the links between them and the primary equipment.
GOOSE Control Block
SCL is defined in IEC 61850-6. SCL benefits from the XML

Sample Value
Control Block format as it allows a deep control of the content through a
Contains 1..n normalised schema definition file (XSD files) specifically for
Contains 0..n
Data Object Data Set IEC 61850.
Refers to 0..n
The SCL file contains the following sub-sections:

a. The definition of the primary power system structure
Figure D3.6: (transformers, breakers, etc.) and how the apparatus is
Data model for communication services connected. The functional specification of the power system
switchyard equipment, and how it relates to the
A Data Set is an ordered group of DO and DA references called communication system and IEDs
the members of the data set. The membership and order of b. The communication system: how IEDs are connected to
the references in a data set shall be known to both the client/ networks and sub-networks, the IP addresses, multicast
subscriber and the server/publisher, therefore it is included as addresses, VLAN definition and other communication
a list in the data model and the ICD file. This capability avoids network parameters
the transmission of many references in the messages and
permits more efficient use of the communications bandwidth. c. For each IED: the logical devices configured on the IED,
Data Set can be usually pre-defined at configuration, but can the logical nodes, off-line configuration values, the
also be dynamically created or modified using a dedicated configuration of control blocks and data sets, supported
communication services model. This feature provides a lot of ACSI services
flexibility. d. A Data Type Template section with definition of LN, DO,
Control blocks are used for Logging, Reporting, Setting Group DA types and used format (e.g. list of enumeration types)
management, GOOSE and Sampled Values services to Subsection (a) helps LNs to perform their processing.
configure the transmission networks. Facilities are provided, Subsection (b) allows the binding to the network. With the
so that the same Server is exposed to work on several contents of subsection (c) and (d) the IED can build and
networks. initialise its runtime data model.
LOG is the data base where events are stored. The client can All this information is stored in various types of file with different
later retrieve them by using the logging services. subsets of data, described in Table D3.6.

SCL file File extension Description

IED capability The ICD contains a description of the functional capabilities of a specific IED type. It acts as an
ICD
description un-configured template to be configured in a System or IED Configuration Tool.
The IID contains a configured instance for a single IED for a specific IED of a project. It may have some
Instantiated IED
IID components already configured such as project addresses or data sets. This data can be imported to a
description
System Configuration Tool.
System The SSD describes the system specification including the single line diagram of the substation, the
specification SSD required substation switchyard equipment, their functions and all its required Logical Nodes. It can also
description contain specification of virtual IEDs which can be used to adapt the modelling to a profile.
Substation
The SCD contains the complete system configuration including the substation specification,
configuration SCD
all configured IED instances and the communication configurations.
description
The CID file is meant to be sent directly to the IED for configuration. It contains information related to
Configured IED
CID configuring the communications for a specific IED. It can contain standardised or private data in an
description
interoperable description.
System The SED describes interfaces for data that needs to be exchanged between different systems or projects.
exchange SED The SED gets exchanged between different System Configuration Tools (SCT) or different projects
description managed by the same SCT.
Table D3.6:
File types according IEC 61850-6
All these files allow data transfer between different engineering The IED Configuration Tool (IET) is a manufacturer specific
tools and devices independent of vendor. This eliminates or at least IED specific tool. It is able to:
some of the intermediate steps that are required when using
a. Create an ICD file as IED template
more traditional tools for substation engineering in projects
and helps to maintain data consistency. b. Configure a linked IED using private means
2.5.2 The engineering cycle c. import an SCD file to get data for an IED from the SCT
The IEC 61850 standard defines a methodology for engineering d. Export (IID) SCL files
a substation automation system in an object-oriented, multi-
e. Export a CID file or any other manufacturer specific format
vendor environment. Two main tools are used to achieve the
to configure the real IED (CID capability is not mandatory)
configuration process.
Figure D3.7 shows the data flow for a usual “Top Down
The System Specification Tool (SST) is used to specify a
configuration process”. The following list gives the detailed
system with all primary and secondary equipment of the
description for each step marked with a number, the red and
substation on the basis of the functional topology and required
green colour shows the engineering for two different vendor
logical nodes. The tool is able to:
IEDs:
a. Model a substation
1 Availability of ICD or IID files
b. Export an SSD file with the substation specification
Most organisations have a process to choose the standard
The System Configuration Tool (SCT) is an IED independent IEDs used in their substations, based on their specific
tool to specify a system. The tool is able to: protection and control philosophies and the required logical
nodes for their power system. This allows a pre-selection of
a. Import an ICD/IID files for the various IEDs used in the
the ICD files required for the system configuration.
system
Native IED configuration tools contain a mechanism to export
b. Configure communication parameters and dataflow
ICD files which act as a template for a specific IED containing
(configuration, data sets, control blocks, external
the logical nodes supported by the device and its capabilities.
references etc.,) for IEDs
In some cases, an organisation may have standardised
c. Export an SCD file with the modelling of the whole substation configuration parameters such as network addresses or
and used IEDs preconfigured data sets. In this case an IID file can be used.
The IID file would contain the same data as the ICD file, plus
d. Import a specification by mean of an SSD
it would also contain additional parameters regarding the
e. Exchange with other system configuration tools by import/ configuration for a specific IED. The objects in an IID can
export an SED (optional) already be reduced to those ones used in the dedicated
substation system.

proprietary way or by transferring a CID file with standardised

Database objects to the IED. In real life, this Top Down configuration
process is not sufficient. Often, during the process, changes
ICD or ICD or
SST
are made at the communication level. A further “Round Trip”
IID IID
SSD of the configuration process needs to be performed.
2
1
6 The impacted IED configurator exports its IID files for
3 a next “Round Trip” cycle.
7 SED
SCT 1 7 System configurator import
SCT 2
An SCD file is rebuilt by importing the IID file back into the
IID SCD SED system configuration tool. All related IED sections at the
6
6 substation level will be updated accordingly. A further repeat
8 4 of the top down cycle (steps 4 & 5) ensures that any IEDs
4 8
impacted by the IID are updated with new information.
IET 1 IET 2
8 Repetition of step 4 (2nd loop of the Top Down Cycle)
CID CID
9 Repetition of step 5 (2nd loop of the Top Down Cycle)
9 5 Several further cycles could be required to complete the
5 9
configuration process ending up at system configuration level
as final system documentation.
2.6 Documentation
Figure D3.7:
Top Down Cycle For the engineering and testing of IEDs the user needs
sufficient documentation of the supported services and data.
The standard specifies the IED file described in the engineering
2 SSD file setup process in section 2.5. This file contains the whole data model
In parallel, substation engineers define the substation and object classes in a structured ASCII format. In addition
specification based on their operating methodologies. This the standard specifies the following text files which each
includes defining the primary switchyard equipment, their vendor has to provide on request to the user:
functions, the single line diagram and choosing the necessary A “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement” (PICS)
logical nodes. This data contains a substation section of the lists all supported services with Yes/No statements so that a
project. user or tester understands the IED capabilities.
3 System engineering A “Model Implementation Conformance Statement” (MICS
Once the group of IEDs and the system specification have lists all used object classes which are given in the ICD file in
been defined, they can be imported into a system configuration the type template section.
tool. Within the system configuration tool the engineer can A “Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing”
define specific instances from the different IED templates (PIXIT) provides additional information on possible restrictions
and link them to the electrical process. The engineer can then and predetermined boundary conditions of the IED on the
define project-specific addressing and configure the data supported services and available data which is relevant for
model by defining the data sets for Reporting and GOOSE the conformance testing (e.g. a functional limitation or a remark
publishing/subscribing amongst the various IEDs. The to a special setting or configuration).
complete substation description, all IEDs and communications
configuration can be exported then as an SCD file. A “Technical Issue Conformance Statement“ (TICS) provides
a statement to each Tissue raised at the standardisation
4 IED configuration level engineering committee, if the IED already supports the corrected subject
The SCD file can be imported to various vendor specific ICTs of the standard or not. With each new conformity test this
to complete the protection, control, and device-specific document has to be updated to include all Tissues known at
configuration. The IED configuration tool is fully aware of the the moment of testing. For Tissues with relevance to the
data available to it from the system and can make use of this interoperability, it is essential for the conformity tester to
data in the protection logic. evaluate the impact when the IED is not designed according
the latest definitions.
5 IED download of configuration file
All these documents are mandatory for a vendor IED to get
When the IED specific configuration is completed, the a conformity certificate by any test institute.
configuration can be downloaded to the IED through a

2.7 Interoperability vs. interchangeability In terms of a communication protocol, it can only be said that
full interchangeability occurs when the IEDs or system
One of the main disadvantages of conventional communication
components from different vendors can provide the full
standards was always the limitations on the compatibility
collection of services and similar data content for the specific
between devices from different vendors to provide sufficient
substation in which it is installed. As the standard offers a
system functionality by exchanging data in the right form and
very flexible way of data modelling and a lot of space for
content and to use similar procedures to transmit them. The
interpretation of it, the data modelling for each vendor IED is
IEC 61850 standard has addressed this topic as a central
quite different. The related data model of an IED is known in
requirement under the heading of “Interoperability”.
IEC 61850 as “Product Naming”.
Interoperability is the ability of two or more intelligent
Product Naming (PN) is the fixed or default data model of
electronic devices from the same vendor, or different vendors,
the IED reflecting the complete hierarchy/structure of the
to exchange information and to use that information for correct
functions inside an IED. IEC 61850 also provides a user view
co-operation.
looking more from the substation and primary equipment side
To achieve this goal the standard provides the following key called “Functional Naming”.
elements:
Functional Naming (FN) is the reflection of the functional
a. Open modelling method to describe each possible data application view (like in a substation) in the naming of the
object in its functional context in such a way that each tool structural elements of an IED data model as LDname
and component in the system can understand and process (IEDname+LDInst) and LN pre/suffix. To reach any kind of
this data interchangeability, it is required to modify the data model in
the IED in such a way, that all data exchanged has the same
b. Standardised file format to exchange the data description
naming with same function behind it. IEDs that provide this
and device capabilities between tools of different vendors
capability provide “Flexible Product Naming” functionality.
without limitations
Flexible Product Naming (fPN) allows the data model of an
c. Standardised communication procedures called “services”
IED to be modified to reflect the hierarchy/structure defined
to allow system wide interaction between components of
by the overall scheme. This means that, from the communication
different vendors as a complete system
point of view, any IED can be remodelled to comply with the
d. Standardised mapping on a network to use unique overall substation control scheme structure and thus the IED
communication and hardware layers data definition can become vendor independent. Figures D3.8
e. Test method definition to confirm interoperable behaviour and D3.9 show two examples for the fPN remodelling.
of all system components There are of course other criteria for the interchangeability
For the last topic part 10 called “Conformance Testing” was such as the different hardware solutions, e.g. case and
added to ensure that each vendor or third party can execute mounting, power supply, wiring for CT/VT and I/O will be
a test of a product or system component to confirm its level different as well as the tools used for its configuration. Therefore
of interoperability to the standard. The main topic of the a communication standard can only provide a general basis
defined testing is the proof of the correct implementation of to reach compatibility without standardisation of the products
data modelling, services, description files and documentation. and system components.
This testing only proves that there is no inconsistency between
the data model, description file and documentation.
For the services all the different procedures and their use FN - Functional naming (Customer substation view)
Station Vtg Lvl Bay Function IED Subf LN Suffix DO DA
cases including fault reaction behaviour are validated.
IEDName (Server) PROT Prefix LN Suffix DO Name DA Name
The validation of which functional objects are modelled and Frankfurt 110 kV E2 Protection 1 Dtoc PTOC 2 Str stVal
how they are structured is out of scope of this conformance PN - Fix product naming (IED address mapping for device “P139”)
testing. This can lead to differences between the communication Station Vlt Lvl Bay Function Subf Prefix LN Suffix DO DA
IEDName (Server) LDinst Präfix LN Suffix DO Name DA Name
partners and results in an issue around the “interchangeability”.
P139 Protection DtpPhs PTOC 1 Str stVal
Interchangeability is the possibility to replace one intelligent fPN - Flexible product naming (After remodelling by an IED configurator)
electronic device by another one without additional Station Vtg Lvl Bay Function IED Subf LN Suffix DO DA
modifications of the equipment around it. This possibility is IEDName (Server) LDinst Prefix LN Suffix DO Name DA Name
Frankfurt 110 kV E2 Protection 1 Dtoc PTOC 2 Str stVal
normally only given when the same type of IED or system
component from the same vendor on the same product
platform is used as a replacement.
FN - Functional naming (Customer substation view)
Figure D3.8:
Example for fPN on protection elements
Frankfurt 110 kV E2 Control 1 QA1 XCBR 1 Pos stVal
PN - Fix product naming (IED address mapping for device “P139”)

Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide Station Vlt Lvl Bay Function Subf Prefix LN Suffix DO DA
456
P139 Control XCBR 1 Str stVal
fPN - Flexible product naming (After remodelling by an IED configurator)


Station Vlt Lvl Bay Function Subf Prefix LN Suffix DO DA
P139 Protection DtpPhs PTOC 1 Str stVal
Station
Vtg Lvl Bay Function IED Subf LN Suffix DO DA
IEDName (Server) LDinst Prefix LN Suffix DO Name DA Name
FN - Functional naming (Customer substation view) Substation Control from/to Network

System
Station Vtg Lvl Bay Function IED Subf LN Suffix DO DA d.c. Control Centre
Battery Infeed
IEDName (Server) PROT Prefix LN Suffix DO Name DA Name System
Feeder
Frankfurt 110 kV E2 Control 1 QA1 XCBR 1 Pos stVal Automation
Unit

Starcoupler
Station Vlt Lvl Bay Function Subf Prefix LN Suffix DO DA
P139 Control XCBR 1 Str stVal

IEDName (Server) LDinst Prefix LN Suffix DO Name DA Name
Frankfurt 110 kV E2 Control 1 QA1 XCBR 1 Pos stVal
Figure D3.9:
Example for fPN on control elements
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder n
2.8 Advantages vs. conventional hard-wiring

IEC 61850 provides a lot of areas for optimisation. One specific Figure D3.10:
area is the concept to use one single bus system, such as Conventional I/O wiring with feeder automation unit and serial
bus system
the Ethernet protocol and related network equipment, to
communicate between IEDs and all other system components
in a substation and beyond. In parallel with conventional Substation Control from/to Network
protocol links there are conventionally a considerable amount d.c.
System
Control Centre
Battery Infeed
of electrical wires installed in a substation to exchange binary System
Network
signals between all IEDs and system components. IEC 61850 Switch
Centre
Gatewayy
provides the opportunity to save cost by the reduction of the
required amount of wiring, binary inputs and outputs in the
Switch
IED. It can do this by the use of client-server or GOOSE
communication, which supports the high speed exchange of
binary data equivalent to the hardwire signals. By using
GOOSE the system is not only cheaper to install but it facilitates
testing, post design modifications and commissioning.
For illustration Figure D3.10 shows a typical wiring plan for a
complete substation with related I/O wiring. Here we show a
bay unit and feeder automation units collecting all signals
and providing them to the network control system using a Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder n
conventional 60870-5-103 bus in star whereas Figure D3.11 !

shows the optimised solution with an Ethernet redundant ring
and Gateway to the network control system. Figure D3.11:
Modern redundant ethernet installation

3. Communication services D3
This section describes the fundamental “Substation The Station Bus is dedicated to a substation, or power system
Communication Architecture”, which outlines the usage of or more globally, management system for control and
four communication models. The second section follows with protection. The communication at this level is a mix of fast
the Client-Server related communication services. The last data exchange for protection and automation and of data
three sections deal with GOOSE, Sampled Values and finally reporting with less time constraints but with more detailed
the Time Synchronisation. information flow.
Part 7-2 defines an abstract communication services interface On the lower level, the “Process Bus” is dedicated to the
(ACSI) for a compatible exchange of information among all exchange of data between primary devices and the control
available communication partners and IEDs in a substation. and protection IEDs.
The standard offers the following four types of communication
(1) Represents substation data exchange between the bay
models:
units at bay level and the substation control equipment at
a. Classical Client-Server services model station level. The criticality of the data allows usage of the
Client-Server service model (green marked lines). The same
b. GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event)
applies for data exchange within the station level (2).
communication with fast and reliable distribution of DO
and DA references based on Communication Publisher/ (3) and (4) shows the data exchange within the bay level
Subscriber model between the bay units (so called “IED to IED communication”).
GOOSE is used for that purpose (blue marked lines).
c. Sampled values distribution model based on Communication
Publisher/Subscriber model From the bay level down to the process bus level (5), control-
data is sent from bay units to the process using GOOSE.
d. Time synchronisation protocols
Often hardwires are still used here instead of a real process
3.1 General communication architectures bus (dotted black lines on the right bay level part).
Today, three communication levels are considered in IEC (6) represents the exchange of instantaneous data from the
61850: “station level”, “bay level” and “process level”. Figure process to the bay level, e.g. analogue values from current
D3.12 shows the related substation network architecture. and voltage transformers or status of sensors or switches.
Telecom
network
Control Centre
7
2
Station HMI Gateway
Level 1
1
Station Bus
3 3
4
Bay Level Control Protection Control Protection
5
Process Bus 6
Process Sensors & Actuators Sensors & Actuators

Level
S ample values
GOOSE
Client/Server
Figure D3.12:
Communication architecture

D3 3. Communication services
Analogue values are time critical and they need to be Figure D3.14 illustrates the basics of the Client-Server
transferred in a precise and chronological order. Sampled communication services. The communication starts by the
values distribution model is used (orange marked lines). For establishment of a connection using the “Associate” service.
the binary information the usage of GOOSE is usual. The Associate request message is sent by the client to the
server and contains input parameters. The response message
The telecontrol network is used to report data from the
is sent by the server to the client and contains output
substation to other network systems. Traditionally, this level
parameters. Often a Control Block or LN, DO or DA reference
(7) is based on SCADA protocols like DNP3, T101 or T104.
is used as input or output parameter, just to identify which
Part 90-2 is under preparation to define the link between a
part of the model the service acts upon. The response
station bus and a control centre using IEC 61850 services.
message contains the result of the processing of the input
The Station and Process Bus shown in Figure D3.12 can be parameters. This can be an error code if a failure occurs, the
carried out as a separate physical network or on basis of the requested information for a simple reading request or simply
same physical network by using virtual addressing to filter and an acknowledgement of the right command execution.
separate data at the network switch level.
3.2 Client-server communication
In software engineering a server is an entity that provides
information to other communication partners. All entities who
are interested in receiving this information are called clients.
Each client can request the server to open a continuous Client Server
connection to subscribe information. During the startup of Associate ( )
the connection the client can configure how the information
has to be transmitted. When a connection has been established, Associate_rsp (+)
the server sends all upcoming information to the client and

handles and responds to the requests from all the clients AnyRequest ( )
connected to it. A server can manage simultaneous
Client ready to send requests
AnyRequest_rsp (+)
and receive messages
connections to several clients as shown in Figure D3.13. A

client can also connect to several servers.
OneWayMessage
Release ( )
Release _rsp (+)
Client
Report
Figure D3.14:
Server C Procedures for Client-Server communication
Report
Response
Request
Two communication services are unidirectional, that means
a message is sent, but no response is expected. One is the
“Command Termination” service used in the “control model”.
Second is the “Report” service defined in the information
“Report model”. Finally, the client ends the data exchange
with the server by using a “Release” communication service.
3.2.1 Self-description of device
To work properly, clients e.g. a Human Machine Interface
(HMI) need to be configured by an ICD file, to understand
Server A Server B and visualise all information received by the servers. During
the opening of the connection the client often sends a self-
description service, to check that his configuration is in line
Figure D3.13: with the server data model.
Client-Server communication

Some clients, for example Operating or Test Software, can are changing their value and/or quality status, a report is sent
perform tasks without any pre-configuration. In this case, by the server using the service “Reporting”, to update all
self-description services are used to acquire the server data clients subscribing to the related data objects.
model to understand the available services and information.
The “Logging” services are provided when the event reporting
3.2.2 Real-time data access and retrieval is not required as the information is not time-critical, but the
changes should be traced and no data change should be
The data provided by a Server can be static with no change
lost. The client can request the data from time to time to collect
expected during operation (e.g. a serial number) or change
in a central long term storage.
slowly or rarely, dependent on the process behind it. Real-time
data access and retrieval services deal with data that is static Reports and logs are both controlled by a control block linked
or is changing slowly or not time-critical. The client can read to a Data Set. The data management behind both is very
this data from time to time to get an update by "Polling". The similar. When a data change occurs, each active report or log
data object retrieval services shall be used only when the control block evaluates if the change must generate an event
data change isn’t time-critical for the client. If a fast data based on its current configuration.
update is required, the client has to use the event reporting
Two kinds of reports are available, the “Unbuffered Reports”
services described in the next section. The typical service
and the “Buffered Reports”. Related control blocks are named
used to read data from a server is “GetDataValues”. Figure
as URCB (Unbuffered Report Control Block) and BRCB (Buffered
D3.15 illustrates how a client retrieves information about the
Report Control Block). With an Unbuffered Report a data change
vendor and software version of an IED. Reading DA NamPlt
will get lost by a client, if the change happens when the link is
in the LN LLN0 of the LD Measurement.
disconnected. In the case of Buffered Reports, the server keeps
a queue of the events. After a link recovery, the affected client
is able to retrieve older events from this data queue.
Report control blocks provide a lot of flexibility with
configuration parameters to define the content of the sending
message, sending cycle, deadbands for measurements,
behaviour during integrity scan or general interrogation.
Client Server
Figure D3.16 illustrates the basic usage of event reporting
services with buffered reports. Behind the pre-configuration
by the service “SetBRCBValues” the server is starting to send
GetDataValues ( )
reports in a pre-defined sending cycle. Other services are for
P139Measurements/ example “GetURCBValues” to read a control block configuration
LLN0.NamPlt
or “QueryLogAfter” to get data from the Logging queue.
GetDataValues_rsp (+)
Vendor=Schneider
swRev=3.7
desc= << Measurements
Logical Device >>
Client Server
Change in
Figure D3.15: Data Set
GetDataValues service member
SetBRCBValues( )
Using the service “SetDataValues”, a client can overwrite the value Data Set
of a data object on server side, when this capability is offered by SetBRCBValues_rsp(+)
the server. This is described in the IED configuration file (ICD/IID).
Report
3.2.3 Event reporting and logging Report 1 Control
block
The “Reporting” services are used to fulfill the requirement
Report 2
of event-driven information exchange. Event reporting is useful
to save network bandwidth and is much more efficient in
comparison to the traditional “Polling” procedure reading
cyclic data. As long as no data change happens, no data
transmission takes place. When one or multiple data objects Figure D3.16:
Procedure for reporting

3.2.4 Device control device is moving, the logical node representing the switching
device first sends an intermediate-state and then the new on/
For control the following services are available:
off position as requested. As soon as the end position gets
a. Direct control with normal security returned, the switch controller sends a positive “Report
b. Direct control with enhanced security Request” independent of the validation followed afterwards.
c. SBO control with normal security If the new status value is the one requested by the client, a
d. SBO control with enhanced security positive “Command Termination” is sent to close the sequence.
e. Status-only (for manual operation) only Figure D3.18 shows a select with unsuccessful selection. At
first the client sends a “Select Value Request” for on/off. If
“Direct control” is used when no pre-selection of the equipment another device has already been selected or is in operation,
is required, whereas “SBO control” require operator to first the switch controller returns a negative “Select Value Response”
select a control to ensure that no other process will execute the to abort the sequence.
control at the same time. Control with “normal security” does
not respond to the client with a value check result after operate.
Control “with enhanced security” is always sending a “command
termination” at the procedure completion to confirm if the Operator Switch Device
Interface Controller XCBR /
demanded state/position has been reached or not. Client CSWI XS WI
For the control of objects in the LN classes, e.g. the control of S elVal_req (on/off)
DO “Mod” to change the operating mode of a logical node, a S elVal_rsp-
direct control with normal or enhanced security is usually used.
For the control of switchgear equipment in substations it is
strongly recommended to use only the “SBO with enhanced
security”. The typical sequences for an SBO control with
Figure D3.18:
enhanced security are illustrated in Figures D3.17 to D3.20 SBO control with enhanced security
showing each single process step for understanding. Negative select response
Figure D3.17 shows the enhanced select and operate

procedure with successful termination. At first the client sends
Figure D3.19 shows a select and an operate with successful
a “Select Value Request” for an open (on) or a close (off).
cancellation by the client. At first the client sends a “Select
When receiving a positive “Select Value Response” back from
Value Request” for on/off. When receiving a positive “Select
the IED the same client sends an “Operate Request” for the
Value Response” the same client operator decides that the
open/close operation. Now the switch controller sends an
wrong device has been selected or the switching does not
“Activate Output Request” to the logical node representing
make sense anymore. Then a “Cancel Request” can be sent
the switching device (XCBR, XSWI). Directly afterwards it
to stop the procedure. Now the switch controller sends a
responds to the client with a positive “Operate Response” to
positive “Cancel Response” to close the sequence.
confirm the start of a switch actuation. While the primary
Operator Switch Device

Client CSWI XSWI Operator S witch Device
SelVal_req (on/off)
Client CS WI XS WI
SelVal_rsp+
Oper_req (on/off)
S elVal_req (on/off)
Activate output S elVal_rsp+
Oper_rsp+
Cancel_req
Intermediate position
Cancel_rsp+
On/Off position
Report_req (on/off)
Deactivate output
CmdTerm_req+
Figure D3.19:
SBO control with enhanced security
Figure D3.17:
Cancel command response
Positive command response and termination

Figure D3.20 shows a select and operate with time-out. The During operation a client may use “SetEditSGValue” to change
first part of the sequence is similar to the first case with positive parameters of a setting group during operation or
select and operate, but when activating the output, the position “SelectActiveSG” to switch from a group of parameters to
signals of the device are not changing. A possible reason for another one. For example, a group of parameters can be
this could be that the switching device did not start to operate used during summer and another during winter.
or that it did not reach the final position due to a mechanical
3.2.6 File transfer
error. With an expired supervision time the switch controller
sends a negative command termination as a result of the IEC 61850 provides basic file management facilities. A server
validation test. (IED) has to manage this with a real or virtual file system. File
transfer is used to upload files from a client to the server or
to download files from the server to the client. Typical files
transmitted from the client to the server are configuration or
Operator S witch Device
setting files. In the opposite direction recordings, loggings or
Client CS WI XS WI documentation files can be sent from the server to the client.
S elVal_req (on/off) The services used are “GetFile” for file retrieval as illustrated
S elVal_rsp+ in Figure D3.21 to retrieve a fault recording. In the opposite
Oper_req (on/off) direction, the “SetFile” service can be used to send e.g. a
Activate output
Oper_rsp+ CID file for the configuration to the server. Finally, a client can
have access to some file attributes using “GetFileAttributeValues”
or delete a file using “DeleteFile”.
sboTimeOutOp
Deactivate output
CmdTerm_req-
Figure D3.20:
Negative command termination
Client Server
All shown sequences are similar for a direct control procedure

except that the select request and response at the beginning
are not used. GetFile
3.2.5 Setting and setting group management 18.zip

/LD/P139Prot/18.zip
The initial physical device behaviour is defined by its setting
and configuration. During operation it can be useful to allow
adjustments of setting and configuration parameters in order GetFile_rsp(+)
to adapt them to changing circumstances. Providing an File
System
interoperable changing capability on parameters during
operation brings a lot of flexibility. Settings and setting groups
are defined in IEC 61850 for that purpose. They offer a 18.zip
standardised way to adjust the behaviour of a device.
Adjustments can be done either on a single parameter
(“Setting Management”) or on sets of parameters (“Setting
Group Management”). A given parameter is managed either Figure D3.21:
File transfer for fault recording
in standalone or through a set, but not both.
For Setting Management, a client uses the service
3.2.7 Substitution
“SetDataValues” to change parameters one by one. Setting
Group Management allows consistent management of a set Clients can request the server to replace a process value by
of parameters. Setting groups are managed using a Setting a fixed one. It can be useful in case of acquisition failure of
Group Control Block (SGCB).No data set is needed, because external equipment, e.g. a sensor which moves out of order.
the definition of the set of parameters is defined by the In IEC 61850, this mechanism to replace a process value for
standard as DOs for each LN. The initial values of those a dedicated time is called ‘Substitution’. The service
parameters are defined during the engineering phase. “SetDataValues” is used for that purpose. The substitution

mechanism is optional and is handled only on server side.

The clients handle the ‘substituted’ process value as a normal
value. The only difference is on the quality of the value: a
dedicated field indicates that the value has been substituted.
3.3 GOOSE communication
Publish/Subscribe communication is used for the transmission
of a “GOOSE” (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event)
message. GOOSE communication is used for the fast and Subscriber2 Subscriber1 Publisher
reliable distribution of DO or DA reference from one IED to
other IEDs. In comparison to Client-Server communication,
no dedicated link connection is required. As illustrated in
Figure D3.22, a “Publisher” posts a message to all IEDs in MessageA
the same network using a multicast address as destination
address. All subscribers (here “Subscriber A” and “Subscriber MessageB MessageB
B”) in the network receive this message and identifies if it
contains the same multicast address as if pre-configured in MessageC MessageC
their subscription. If this is the case, the IED processes the
data of this GOOSE to its internal function. If not, the message MessageD
will be ignored.
Figure D3.23:
Procedures for GOOSE communication
From a high level perspective, GOOSE fulfills the same

Subscriber A Subscriber B requirement as a Report, as it provides an event based
distribution of information. As the GOOSE model is designed
for high performance, it offers much less flexibility than report
mode but can transmit information to other devices in a few
milliseconds. To achieve the performance requirements, it is
Goose Message mandatory that the GOOSE message fits inside a single
Ethernet frame.
GOOSE behaviour is managed by a GOOSE control block
(GCB) and some communication parameters. As for Reporting,
a data set is linked to the GCB to list the published and
subscribed data.
The GOOSE message includes standard Ethernet fields, VLAN
Publisher flags (used to virtually isolate part of the communication
network), specific GOOSE related fields for identification and
timestamp and the values of each member of the data set.
Figure D3.22:
Configuration for GOOSE communication Table D3.7 provides more details on typical GOOSE message
with the following colour marking:
An IED usually receives GOOSE messages from different a. Green: Identification field to filter on the communication
IEDs as well as over several different multicast addresses. level
An example is shown in Figure D3.23, where a “Message A” b. Purple: Identification field to filter on data model level and
is received only by “Subcriber2”, as “Subscriber1” isn’t other general message information
subscribing to the same multicast address. “MessageB & C”
are both received at the same time by both “Subscriber1 and c. Blue: Data values of DO and DA references
2”. “MessageD”again is received only by “Subscriber1” as it d. Orange: Security or redundancy field
will be ignored by “Subscriber2” due to the unsubscribed
multicast address.

separate GOOSEs per application.

Field name Typical value
The GOOSE and Report models are very different but complementary
Multicast MAC address 01:0c:cd:01:00:02
ways to manage events. Depending on the performance or flexibility
Sender MAC address 00:80:f4:78:88:76
requirements, either one or other can be chosen.
VLAN id and priority 0,4
Ethertype IEC 61850/GOOSE (0x88b8)
PDU Length 420
APPID 2
Reserved1; Reserved2 Reserve for security
Control block reference P544System/LLN0$GO$gcb02
member
Change in Data Set
Time allowed to live 2010
Data set reference P544System/LLN0$DS07
GOOSEID P544System/LLN0$GO$gcb02
Event Timestamp 2014-12-18 23:04.8,972000
stNum 10
SqNum 240
Simulation bit 0
Config revision 10
Needs commissioning FALSE
Number data set entries 15
First data Depend of data set definition
…
Last data Depend of data set definition
Optional security fields Figure D3.24:
Optional PRP fields GOOSE publishing mechanism
Table D3.7:
3.4 Sampled values
Structure of a GOOSE frame
Sampled Values (SV) are defined in part 9-2. The goal of SVs
is to send sampled Current and Voltage data in a very precise
Loss of multicast messages can happen on an Ethernet and regular way from an intelligent transformer IED with
network. Subscribers are able to detect the loss of a message Ethernet interface called a “Merging Unit” (MU) to other units.
or the whole link because a special repetition mechanism is
used as illustrated in Figure D3.24. The message is sent in a The communication services for SV and GOOSE are very
slow cycle (“MaxTime”), with each repetition a counter value similar. Both use the Publish/Subscribe model and send
(“sqNum”) gets incremented. The “TimeAllowedToLive” sets multicast messages from one publisher MU to one or multiple
the validity time of the last message. If the subscriber receives subscribing IEDs which can use them for further processing.
an invalid “sqNum” or doesn’t receive a message before the Figure D3.25 illustrates the principle. SV generate a continuous
“TimeAllowedToLive” has expired, the GOOSE monitoring data stream on the Ethernet and consume a significant
indicates a loss of one of the subscribed message. bandwidth of the network traffic. Especially if multiple MUs
are running in the system, it is recommended to use a separate
When a change occurs in a member of the data set, a new bus system. As the SV are near to the process this separated
GOOSE message is sent by the Publisher as soon as possible. bus system is called in the standard “Process Bus” as shown
In this message, “sqNum” is set to zero and “stNum” is in Figure D3.25.
incremented. Based on this indication, the subscriber knows
that an event has occurred. This message is then repeated The IEDs themselves no longer need their own CT/VT interface
again much quicker and several times with increasing cycle hardware as they receive the sampled data over an Ethernet
time. After several retransmissions, the message is sent again interface. With respect to the synchronicity and precision of
in the “MaxTime” cycle. the received sampled data the IED can use them for its
protection, control, measurement or power quality purpose.
There are several other identification elements in addition to This can reduce the number of transformers and power leading
the multicast MAC address, to group GOOSE messages. hard-wiring, when the data sent by SV can satisfy the
Examples are the VLAN address which can be filtered by the specification of all connected IEDs.
network switches to reduce the traffic or the “AppID” to

T101/104 Gateway Substation

Client to Control
Network
NCS System
GPS
CLIENT- Station
Station Bus SERVER Level Backup Master Clock
Master Clock
Protection GOOSE Measure-

IED ment IED
Sampled Station Bus
SNTP PTP
Values Process Bus
1PPS
Bay Level
Merging
XCBR XSWI IED IED
Unit
Process Bus
Sensors & Actuators

Figure D3.25:
Sampled values via process bus

Figure D3.26:
Time synchronisation in IEC 61850
Typical sampling rates for SV in a 50Hz network:
a. Protection 4 kHz - 80 samples/period At the top level, a GPS receiver acts as a time server and
b. Measurement 12.8 kHz - 256 samples/period indicates the absolute time. As time synchronisation is critical,
a backup time server should be available, in best case using
A key requirement of the MU is to ensure the synchronisation a different type of media to the first one. It can be based on
of the sampling using time synchronisation over IEEE1588. a network or on a long wave radio (DCF77, MSF-60 etc.). The
Especially on sampled data for protection devices, a slight time server generates a 1 PPS or IRIG-B signal over a
slippage in the sampling time leads to a high error on the dedicated wiring or sends time information on the Ethernet
phase angle between the voltages and currents of the 3 Station Bus using a SNTP or PTP protocol.
phases. This may have a negative impact to the measurements
for the evaluation of the impedance phasors of the distance 1 PPS is referenced by IEC 61850-LE and is mainly used at
protection or can generate a delta of the current phasors the merging unit level. Data can be time-stamped with an
between the ends of the differential protection. accuracy of four microseconds. Like 1 PPS, IRIG-B is also
based on a pulse, but it also transmits the time data by a real
3.5 Time synchronisation message.
In IEC 61850 the information data has to be time-stamped when IEC 61850-8.1 specifies SNTP as the synchronisation protocol.
a change occurs. Each device embeds a clock to take the time SNTP uses a classical Client-Server mechanism. The central
stamp precisely. To generate a timestamp synchronously to other time server takes as well the server role for SNTP. All
IEDs, a central time synchronisation of this clock should happen. communication devices (IEDs, HMI, Gateway) are working
IEC 61850 refers to generally available time synchronisation as clients. Each client opens a separate client channel and
protocols such as the following: requests the new time information in a periodic cycle. Devices
using SNTP can offer a clock accuracy of about one
a. 1 PPS
millisecond.
b. IRIG-B
A new part of IEC 61850 is in progress to define the PTP
c. SNTP profile for the substation usage (Part 9-3 - Precision Time
Protocol Profile for Power Utility Automation). Contrary to SNTP,
d. PTP (IEEE1588)
PTP acc. IEEE 1588/IEC 61588 relies on the master-slave
Figure D3.26 shows a classical time synchronisation scheme. The time server broadcasts a sync message
architecture. periodically containing the reference time. PTP allows much
better performance than SNTP with an accuracy in the
microsecond area.

4. Typical applications D3
On applications with normal up to low time requirements the

IEC 61850 standard provides the “client-server communication” Substation
Control Unit 1 Substation
i.e. the Reporting. The services behind get transported via
S1
B ay Unit 1 Control Unit 2
the MMS stack on a higher application layer. Application
examples, where client-server communication is the preferred
S2
T1
method for transmission, are following in the next sections 1. 2. 2nd Select/
4.1. S elect/
Open/Close Switch selected
Open/Close
Request
Request Switch command
or rejection
3.
rejection
On applications with higher time constraints the normal client-
server communication over MMS is not fast enough to be S BO
Procedure
S BO
Procedure
usable. For this a dedicated service was foreseen in IEC

61850 which is the GOOSE communication. All information
exchanged over GOOSE is transmitted on the TCP Ethernet
communication layer. Application examples where GOOSE
communication is the main preferred method for transmission B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n
follow in section 4.2. F1 F2 F3 Fn
All data objects shown in the several tables of application
sections contain only the part of LN/DO/DA information used
in the application, the tables cannot be seen as a complete Figure D3.27:
picture of all DO/DA of the related LN classes. The tables Select-Before-Operate principle in IEC 61850
include a T/R column which show the direction to (R = Receive)
and from (T = Transmit) the IED to the client or other IEDs. In IEC 61850 there are several logical nodes defined to model
The IED name can be found in the related figure of the the different functional elements to manage switchgear control.
substation configuration. Names used for “LDInst” in the tables There are two main different kinds of switching devices in a
are examples only. substation:
4.1 Applications with client-server communication a. Circuit Breaker with fast switching speed and the capabilities
to interrupt load currents and fault currents
4.1.1 Substation control
b. Disconnector with slow switching speed and low switching
Controlling of switchgear equipment in an electrical substation
capabilities to connect substation parts or to create an
is a safety-related operating area. In modern substation control
earth connection for safety reason during maintenance.
networks there are mostly multiple operator interfaces as
communication clients which have the capability and in most The logical node which is directly connected to the primary
cases the authority to control switching devices. To ensure that process part is called “XCBR” for the circuit breaker and
only one client is able to initiate a control activation at the same “XSWI” for the disconnector. According to the standard a
time, the IEC 61850 standard provides a well defined “Select- switchgear position can have four different states for which
Before-Operate” (SBO) procedure as a common service. SBO it is modelled with common data class “Double Pole Control”
allows an exclusive reservation of substation equipment by a (DPC) for the control and for the feedback of the state as
pre-selection named in IEC 61850 as “SelectWithValue”, before shown in Table D3.9. Double pole stands here for the 2 wire
sending the real open or close command as “Operate” to control of the process, the IED has normally a binary output
actuate the control action. A second switching command for the close (switch on) command and a 2nd one for the open
coming from another client will be normally rejected as long (switch off) command. For the feedback of the switch position
as the object is selected, if there is no other principle used to there are two binary inputs providing the signals from the
allow multiple switching commands in parallel. The decision switch end contact for open and for close (“off” or “on”). If a
on how to handle switching commands in a limited network switch moves from open to close or close to open, there is an
section or in the entire substation is managed by the “Substation “intermediate-state” detectable when both inputs are de-
Interlocking” as described in section 1.2.2. energised as the switch is moving from one end position to
the other. When both switch signals are high it is seen as a
The SBO principle can be explained with help of Figure D3.27.
“bad-state”, as it must be an error in the wiring or the position
The substation shown has one infeed bay T1 and several feeder
feedback contacts of the switch. In addition, this state is used
bays F1 to Fn. There are two substation control clients S1 & S2
to indicate that the switch is found in an abnormal status.
as Operator Interface (OI) from where control commands can
be initiated. If OI S1 requests a Select at bay F2 in step “1”, In future the Logical Node to represent a circuit breaker or a
feeder bay unit F2 responds to this client with a “switch selected” disconnector can be hosted in an intelligent switch. A further
message in step “2”. As soon as the switch of F2 is selected logical node called switch controller “CSWI”, is located in the
to execute a control command, any further select or operate communication server itself, controlling the primary equipment
request will be rejected as shown in step “3”. interface nodes XCBR and XSWI. The position signals are

D3 4. Typical applications
using the same model. Where the XCBR and the XSWI do strongly recommended to use the service “SBO with enhanced
provide the actual position signals following the primary security” only. Refer to section 3.2.4 for detailed description
equipment, the CSWI may perform a suppression of the of this service.
intermediate-state, if required. The detailed data information
transmitted between client and IED server is shown in Table
D3.8 and D3.9. Bay F2 receives a control from the client via Open/Close
R equest System
CSWI.Pos.ctlVal (LN.DO.DA). The status response is sent
From Client Interlocking
using CSWI.Pos.stVal.
R elease, S witch
B locking Positions
T/R IED LDInst LN DO DA

R elease,
S witch Bay
->R F2 Control CSWI Pos ctlVal S witch
Controller B locking Bay
Interlocking
Controller
CS WI Interlocking
CILO
T-> F2 Control CSWI Pos stVal, q CS WI CILO
Table D3.8:
Transmitted data for substation control
Open/Close
Command
LN DO CDC DA Values S witch
Positions
CSWI Pos DPC ctlVal 0 = intermediate- Circuit Disconnector
stVal state Breaker Proxy Proxy
XCBR XS WI
1 = off
2 = on
3 = bad-state
CSWI Pos DPC stSeld 0 = false
Process
1 = true
XCBR Pos DPC stVal 0 = intermediate
XSWI state
1 = off Figure D3.28:
2 = on Logical nodes for control in IEC 61850
3 = bad-state
CILO EnaOpn SPS stVal 0 = false
1 = true 4.1.2 Local/remote control
CILO EnaCls SPS stVal 0 = false
Switching devices of a substation as described in the previous
1 = true
section can be controlled from different locations. Each
location is assigned a hierarchical level, following the principle
Table D3.9:
‘the closer to the switchgear, the lower the hierarchy’. Typically,
Modelled objects for substation control
“local” is understood if the control happens from the “local”
position inside the substation and in front of the control bay
unit, and “remote” as issued from a substation control system
For the safe and reliable switching in a bay or entire substation
or a network control centre in another room, floor, building or
there is a need to realise an interlocking. Most of the switches
region. To co-ordinate between control actuations from
can be opened or closed only with respect to the positions
different sources at the same time, the control device performs
of other switches. A dedicated logic is built as a control
a local/remote validation of the control commands against its
element which is called in IEC 61850 “interlocking” (CILO).
status before an SBO procedure is accepted. On the bay
See Figure D3.28 for the illustration of all control nodes
level, differentiation can be made between controls issued
according to the standard. We distinguish between bay
via the Human Machine Interface (HMI) on the front panel of
interlocking, which is always part of the bay unit in the
the bay unit and control equipment connected via binary
communication server, and the system interlocking, which is
inputs to the bay unit and controls issued directly via push
normally outside the bay equipment, controlling the entire
buttons on the switchgear equipment as emergency control
substation or a selected part of it. The CILO manages the
without consideration of any interlocking.
monitoring and the release of all controls of switches in the
bay, whereas the system interlocking monitors and releases Sometimes the local/remote switching is locked by a key switch
the control of switches. How the substation interlocking works on the bay unit HMI or by a separate one wired to a binary input
in an IEC 61850 environment is described in section 4.2.2. of the bay unit. So it is ensured that local control is only activated
For the control of switchgear equipment in substations it is when the operator with related switch authority uses this key.

LLN0.LocS ta LLN0.Loc CS WI.Loc XCB R .Loc

(local/remote for (local/remote for
(for complete LD)
complete LD) single switch)
XS WI.Loc
(local/remote for
single switch)
Control
Local S witch
S ervice Local Local
Local
Local Operation
R equest Local
Local Local
(from Client)
R emote
R emote R emote
R emote
R emote R emote
R emote R emote
Local
R emote
LLN0.MltLev
(for complete LD)
Figure D3.29:
Local/Remote control behaviour
The standard defines a dedicated data object “Loc” on different

hierarchical node levels, which each shows the current state
and behaviour of the individual switching devices or of the whole T-> F2 Control CSWI Loc stVal, q
logical device or of the bay unit (see Figure D3.29). As the IED
cannot know whether a control command received via IEC 61850 Table D3.10:
is issued from the operator control system location or from the Transmitted data for local/remote control
network control centre, all controls which are not issued locally
(i.e. from IED level) are dealt with as ‘remote’. There is an
additional information ‘originator.orCat’ provided with each control LN DO CDC DA Values
command which helps the IED to decide whether the control
LLN0 LocKey SPS stVal 0 = false (remote active)
hierarchy of the control command received matches the control 1 = true (local active)
authority the IED is set to. So, if Loc = false, control commands
LLN0 Loc SPS stVal 0 = false (remote control
other than local are rejected. The data object “LocKey” provided
accepted)
on the IED level and with logical nodes hosting controllable 1 = true (local control
objects can be used to set Loc to either ‘local’ or ‘remote’. On accepted)
the switchgear level, LocKey is typically representing the status LLN0 LocSta SPC stVal 0 = false (remote control
of a physical local/remote switch. Another data object object from network level
“LocSta” represents the control authority set to substation control accepted)
system (LocSta = true) or remote via Network Control Centre 1 = true (control from
station level accepted)
(LocSta = false). The object “MltLev” defines whether a bay unit
will accept a control command from different sources . With LLN0 MltLev SPG stVal 0 = false (single control
level acceptable)
MltLev = false the IED only accepts control commands of the
1 = true (multiple control
given level. With MltLev = true control commands of hierarchical levels acceptable)
levels closer to the switchgear are also accepted. Table D3.10
CSWI LocKey SPS stVal 0 = false (remote active)
and D3.11a summarises all relevant data objects of the local/
1 = true (local active)
remote switching.
CSWI Loc SPS stVal 0 = false (remote control
For safety reasons, a local/remote switchover is always accepted)
activated via operation at the bay device or at the switchgear 1 = true (local control
accepted)
via a binary contact and never via communication (therefore
SPS, not SPC). For this reason there is no control of any ‘Loc’ CSWI Pos DPC originator See table D3.11b
element from an OI client, the various states are only reported
from the bay unit to the client when changing. Table D3.11a:
Modelled objects for local/remote control

Each client initiating a control command has to provide his own The substation control system uses the client-server
“originator” information in the control request message. This communication from IEC 61850 as a service for request and
information comprises the hierarchical level (helping the IED to reporting as there are low timing requirements (reaction < 2
decide on acceptance), categories of reasons and the name seconds). For control commands the typical client supports
of the issuing client. The bay unit has to copy the originator the differentiation between control modes “with synchrocheck”
information into any responses following the control command. and “without synchrocheck”. If the control with synchrocheck
As on bay unit level a control command can be created via local is selected, the IED performs the check of the network
HMI, binary input or related communication interface, ‘Originator’ synchronism after having checked the bay and system-wide
has to be configured for all of these command sources. The interlocking. Once the conditions for synchronism have been
possible order categories are shown in Table D3.11b. checked successfully, the close command is released and
carried out. If the check fails, the command is blocked and
a corresponding message is generated.
LN DO CDC DA Values
The bay unit can report the successful or unsuccessful
CSWI Pos originator orCat 0 = not supported switch actuation and the measured values for voltage,
1 = bay-control frequency and phase angle difference, in parallel to the
2 = station-control
3 = remote-control new switch position using the logical Node RSYN for the
4 = automatic-bay synchronism check. The detailed data is shown in Tables
5 = automatic-station D3.12 and D3.13. Figure D3.30 illustrates the interactions
6 = automatic-remote between the different logical nodes in the bay unit. For the
7 = maintenance
8 = process measurement acquisition the nodes TVTR for the voltage
transformers are involved to retrieve the required
CSWI Pos originator orIdent String with control
source identification measurement values.
Table D3.11b:
Originator sub data attributes T/R IED LDInst LN DO DA
->R T1 Control CSWI Pos ctlVal

check
4.1.3 Control with synchrocheck T-> T1 Control CSWI Pos stVal, q
If network areas with different power infeeds have to be T-> T1 Control RSYN Rel, VInd, AngInd, stVal, q
connected, an additional function for switchgear control called HzInd
“synchronism check”, or abbreviated to “synchrocheck”, is T-> T1 Control RSYN DifVClc, DifHzClc, mag, q
used. This function tests before connection if both network DifAngClc
sections are synchronous to each other or the deviation is
within defined limits. The synchrocheck function measures if Table D3.12:
the following conditions are met: Transmitted data for control with synchrocheck
a. Difference of voltages | ∆U | < ∆U max

b. Difference of frequencies ∆ f < ∆ f max LN DO CDC DA Values
c. Difference of angles ∆α < ∆α max RSYN Rel SPS stVal 0 = false (blocked)
1 = true (released)
A closing of the related switch can be only allowed if the limits RSYN VInd SPS stVal 0 = false (met)
are not exceeded. The synchrocheck function is sometimes 1 = true (violated)
provided by a separate device but very often as an additional RSYN HzInd SPS stVal 0 = false (met)
function inside a control device. 1 = true (violated)
The synchrocheck can be requested as a first check prior to the RSYN AngInd SPS stVal 0 = false (met)
1 = true (violated)
decision to do a network connection or directly before the related
circuit breaker would be closed. For the second case the request CSWI LocKey SPS stVal 0 = false (remote)
1 = true (local)
can be combined with the control command of the switch.
RSYN DifVClc MV mag Voltage Difference
The synchrocheck can be managed either centrally or distributed. RSYN DifHzClc MV mag Frequency Difference
With the central concept, a dedicated IED performs the
RSYN DifAngClc MV mag Angle Difference
synchrocheck for the entire substation. Here a scheme needs
to ensure that this IED is provided the necessary measurands.
With the distributed concept, the synchrocheck is carried out Table D3.13:
Used IEC 61850 objects for synchrocheck
by each of the bay units where the networks can be connected.

Close Switch Delta V/f/phi

Request Status Measured Values
LN CB CDC Attribute Values
From Client to Client to Client
LLN0 SGCB INS NumOfSG Integer value of max. available SG
LLN0 SGCB INC ActSG Identification number of the active SG
Continuous LLN0 SGCB LActTm Time of the last SG change
update of
Switch S ynchronism
Controller R elease Check
CSWI R S YN
Table D3.15:
V/f/phi V/f/phi Modelled objects for setting group selection
Measurement
Close Pre-
Processing
Command In conformance with the IEC 61850 standard, a client shall
Voltage A/B/C Voltage Ref use the service SelectActiveSG to activate any of the available
Voltage
Circuit Voltage
Voltage
Transformer
Transformer
PSs. A service request is acknowledged with a positive
Breaker Voltage
Transformer
TVTR
XCBR TVTR
Transformer
TVTR
TVTR
response (write operation succeeded) if the service was used
with valid SGCBReference (System/LLN0.SGCB) and a valid
SettingGroupNumber (1 to NumOfSG). The attributes of SGCB
Process are not available for reporting. The identification number of
the active PS can be obtained by reading the value of the
attribute ActSG or by using a private DO in a data set.
Figure D3.30: 4.1.5 Transmission of disturbance recordings
Logical nodes used for synchrocheck
In cases when a fault occurs in the electrical network, the related
protection device detects this fault by its algorithm and clears
4.1.4 Selection of the parameter subset the fault by issuing a CB trip. A modern protection device
In some application cases, the protection settings have to be generates in parallel to the fault clearance a disturbance recording
adjusted when network conditions change during operation. of the analogue values retrieved during the fault, together with
Such a change could happen when additional loads or infeeds the most important binary signals, to allow a protection engineer
are connected, or the settings are changed under different to investigate the root cause of the fault afterwards. This
environmental conditions. To satisfy such requirements, disturbance recording can be retrieved from the protection IED
modern protection devices offer a certain number of parameter in different ways. To simplify the access to disturbance recordings
subsets, most of the common protection devices offer 4, 6 in the devices and to manage an autonomous archiving of all
or 8 parameter subsets (PS). Typically the first PS considers disturbances centrally in a substation, a dedicated disturbance
the normal protection settings, whereas the other ones provide analysis & archiving system can be set up in a communication
different setting values for the interim network conditions. system. Figure D3.31 illustrates such a disturbance recording
Parameter subsets can be swapped during operation without system in a typical substation network with file transfer for F2.
interrupting the protection function. The selection of the related
PS happens via HMI, binary input or the communication link
from the substation control system. Proprietary protocols like
Substation Control Unit Fault R ecording
IEC 60870-5-103 already provide dedicated definitions to System
support PS selection with adequate status and control
B ay Unit 1 S1 S2
command telegrams. IEC 61850 supports this use case by
the services of the Setting Group Control Block (SGCB). The T1
standard defines a control instance SGCB located in the S witch
S ubstation
B us
common node LLN0 of a LD, in this example the LD Protection
(see Table D3.14, LD name is an example only as it is not Disturbance
Recording
defined in the standard). Table D3.15. shows the application R cdMade

File
relevant attributes of SGCB. Transfer
CB
Trip
Fault
T/R IED LDInst LN CB Attribute Event
B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n

->R F2 Protection LLN0 SGCB NumOfSG
ActSG F1 F2 F3 Fn
LActTm
Table D3.14: Figure D3.31:

Transmitted data for setting group selection Principle of fault recording retrieval

By reporting “RcdMade” the protection relay indicates that

Fault R ecording S ystem IED.R ecords.R DR E
a disturbance recording was made and that a file can be Client Server
retrieved. Any subscriber to this information may now use file Fault detection
transfer routines to receive a copy of this file. Proprietary R DR E.R cdStr = true
Start Recording
protocols like IEC 60870-5-103 already provide dedicated R DR E.R cdMade = true
R DR E.FltNum = xxx
telegrams to support disturbance recording signalling and Trigger File Download End Recording
download. IEC 61850 supports this use case by file transfer GetFileAttributeValues
R equest File Transfer
services. The disturbance recording function of an IED is Response+
GetFile
represented by the following LN classes: Prepare File Transfer
R eceive and store MMS File Transfer

a. RDRE – Disturbance recorder function Disturbance Record Execute File Transfer
b. RADR – Disturbance recorder channel analogue

Figure D3.32:
c. RBDR – Disturbance recorder channel binary
File transfer to download fault records
RDRE is the function to manage the disturbance recording.
The information (header, data values) is stored in a COMTRADE catenary is not organised into one single long feeder line per
file. Some devices allow to configure whether the COMTRADE train direction, but it is a combination of multiple catenary
file is exposed as ASCII or as binary data. If IEC 61850 is segments for both directions and alternative tracks in parallel,
used to configure the disturbance recording function, RADR especially near to railway stations. For modern high speed
is the node to configure the analogue channels, RBDR is the trains there is as well in parallel to the feeder catenary a return
node to configure the binary channels. The most important conductor to support an auto-transformer solution (see Chapter
objects required to handle recordings are shown in Tables [C10: A.C. Railway Protection]).
D3.16 and D3.17. Figure D3.32 illustrates the sequence of
messages used to trigger, download and archive the files. The distance protection device protecting the catenary network
is located in each substation over the long railway track
between the different railway stations. The protection detects
T/R IED LDInst LN DO DA the faults by measuring the impedances of the lines. Dependent
T-> F2 Records RDRE RcdStr stVal, q on the actual network connections, the impedance changes
RcdMade stVal, q and the protection has to be adapted to protect the line in
FltNum stVal, q
GriFltNum stVal, q
the most reliable way.
Figure D3.33 shows an example of the electrical network of
Table D3.16: a typical railway track under normal conditions. All segments
Transmitted data for fault recordings of the catenary are in operation, the distance protection works
with an impedance threshold Z1 in both substations.
LN DO CDC DA Values
RDRE RcdStr SPS stVal 0 = false (no recording)
1 = true (record started)
RDRE RcdMade SPS stVal 0 = false (no new record)
1 = true (new record made
RDRE FltNum INS stVal Integer value of fault number
S ubstation 1 S ubstation 2
RDRE GriFltNum INS stVal Integer value of grid fault
number
Table D3.17: Z1 Z1
Modelled objects for fault recordings
S egment 1 S egment 2 S egment 3
4.1.6 Characteristics switching

For a few applications, the protection functions have to be
dynamically adapted to the situation of the electrical network or
modus of the electrical objects protected. IEC 61850 provides
a couple of different solutions to satisfy this requirement.
One practical example is the distance protection function for
an electrical catenary network for railways. Very often the Figure D3.33:
Rail catenary impedance - normal mode

If one of the catenary segments is now switched off for Z1 and directly afterwards an enable of the logical node
segment 2, as shown in Figure D3.34, the current flow is PDIS2 with impedance threshold value Z1´ to take over. The
different and the impedance of the remaining network system IED reacts with related response reports to confirm the change
changes. To adapt the protection device to the new of the LN states. The required data element is the data object
arrangement of the catenary the impedance threshold needs “Mod” with data attribute “ctlVal” for the control of the LN and
to be adjusted to Z1´. the data object “Beh” with the data attribute “stVal” for the
status returned (see Table D3.18, D3.19). The disabled LN
will be changed to state “off” and the enabled one from “off”
Substation
Control Unit
to “on”. “Beh” represents the real state of the LN. It’s computed
Substation 1 Substation 2
based on its own Mod value and the Mod of the LLN0 of its
PDIS1.Mod.
ctlVal = off
PDIS2.Mod.
LD. If the LLN0 Mod is set to off, all LN of the LD have their
ctlVal = on
Beh also set to off and so, the LNs are disabled by a higher
PDIS 1 .Beh.
stVal = off
hierarchical level.
PDIS 2.Beh.
stVal = on
Z1 ´ Z1 ´
Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3
->R S1 Protection PDIS1 Mod ctlVal
PDIS2
T-> S1 Protection PDIS1 Beh stVal, q
PDIS2
Table D3.18:
Figure D3.34: Transmitted data for characteristic switching
Rail catenary impedance – one segment lost
LN DO CDC DA Values
The change-over is initiated by an operator using the device PDIS1 Mod ENC ctlVal 1 = on
HMI or via the substation control system, which holds an PDIS2 2 = on-blocked
3 = test
image of the network configuration. With a switching of a 4 = test/blocked
circuit breaker there could be as well an automated change- 5 = off
over made to keep the protection up to date. PDIS1 Beh ENS stVal 1 = on
PDIS2 2 = on-blocked
The IEC 61850 standard provides two main solutions to
3 = test
manage this kind of application: 4 = test/blocked
5 = off
a. Selection of the Parameter Subset
b. Enabling/Disabling of Logical Nodes Table D3.19:
Detailed data for characteristic switching
For the selection of the parameter subset refer to section
4.1.4. Most of the common protection devices offer 4, 6 or 8
parameter subsets. Very often they are already used for other The IED obviously has to secure that at no time can it happen
reasons, in the case of the distance for railways for example that both PDIS nodes are in the “on” state at the same time.
to manage alternative infeed operation modes and for the The best implementation would be to automatically change
adjustment of the impedance levels during train starts or their the one to state “off” when the other is changed to state “on”
acceleration. Using the variation of the setting groups for and vice-versa.
another adaptation, the Enable/ Disable of Logical Nodes is
4.2 Applications with GOOSE communication
therefore the preferred solution by the railway utility companies.
4.2.1 Reverse interlocking
The timing requirements are not high at all, if the change-over
happens in about 1 second, it is sufficient. The selected Reverse interlocking can be used in radial networks with a single
communication method over IEC 61850 is therefore chosen infeed, to set up a simple busbar protection scheme. Figure
with client-server communication. The recommended mode D3.35 shows a simple busbar scheme with a transformer bay
is the “Direct control with enhanced security”. For the status T1 as infeed and Feeder bays F1 to Fn for the several outgoing
return it is recommended to use Reporting with spontaneous bays in a substation. In our example the highset overcurrent
transmission. For the change of the impedance the substation stage I>> of the definite time overcurrent device of T1 is set to
control system first sends a disable (blocking) of the related a short tripping time of 0.1 seconds. Additionally, this stage is
distance logical node PDIS1 with impedance threshold value configured to be blocked via a binary input. The first overcurrent

stage I> of the outgoing feeder bays F1 to Fn are set to a tripping

time of 0.3 seconds. The pickup signal of the I> stage or the
general pickup signal are configured to a binary output. The IF
f2
I> > tI> > 0.1 s
Substation Control
System
binary outputs of all the outgoing protection devices in F1 to Fn B lock Trip
are connected as a ring wire to the same blocking input of the I> tI> S witch
infeed protection (see red line in Figure D3.35). t 0 0.3s
T1 GOOS E
Message S ubstation
B us
Infeed F1 .Protection.PTOC.Str.general
F1 .Protection.PTR C.Str.q
F1 Feeder 1 Fn Feeder n
f2
I> > tI> > 0.1 s
Infeed
B lock Trip
0.1 s 0.1 s
I> tI> Trip I> tI> Trip
I> tI>
f1 t 0 f1 t 0
t 0 0.3s
T1 1 IF 1 IF
General S tart General S tart
F1 Feeder 1 Fn Feeder n
Figure D3.36:
0.1s 0.1s
I> tI> Trip I> tI> Trip Signal path reverse interlocking by GOOSE
f1 t 0 f1 t 0
1 1
General S tart General S tart
The pickup message of I> as PTOC/Str or the general starting
signal as PTRC/Str from the trip Conditioner has to be transmitted
by a GOOSE publishing channel from bay F1 to bay T1 (see
Figure D3.37). The related IEC 61850 model object is shown
Figure D3.35:
Signal path reverse interlocking by wire in line T-> of Table D3.20. In T1 itself the information out of the
subscribed GOOSE messages have to be assigned to the
related blocking signal of the I>> stage. The related IEC 61850
When a fault occurs at one of the outgoing feeders F1 to Fn, model object to indicate that a blocking is affected also is
the pickup of the protection instantaneously generates a shown in Table D3.20). As IED T1 “collects” all GOOSE
blocking signal to the protection device of the incoming feeder information from the different bays F1 to Fn, it has to form a
T1 via the configured output and its I>> stage is blocked to common blocking signal before connecting this to the I>>
prevent a trip condition (e.g. < 0.1 seconds). The outgoing PTOC function. An internal programming logic is required to
feeder protection in F1 to Fn generates a trip selectively to combine the virtual inputs by an OR logic. Other possible
its circuit breaker which is connected to the faulty outgoing internal blocking criteria can be integrated as well. The detailed
feeder line to clear the fault. The busbar and all other connected model information is shown in Table D3.21.
loads can remain operational.
When a fault occurs on the busbar itself, the I>> stage of the
infeed protection in T1 picks up but none of the outgoing
feeder protection units F1 to Fn generate the blocking signal Transmission
to other IED
since the affected protection devices of the outgoing feeders S tr Op Tr Transmission
to Client
do not pick up. Thus, the infeed protection switches off the Overcurrent S tr
Protection
infeed after 0.1 seconds. PTOC1 Op
When all protection devices of the busbar are connected via
IEC 61850 communication to the Ethernet network of the S tr Protection
Overcurrent Circuit Breaker
Protection
Trip Tr
substation, the GOOSE services can be used to transmit the PTOC2
Op Conditioning Proxy
PTR C Open XCBR
blocking signals from the feeder bays to the transformer bay Command
S tr
without the need of any additional electrical wires. The to Circuit
Overcurrent Op B reaker
information is transmitted in one direction only, i.e. to the virtual Protection
inputs of the incoming feeder protection (see Figure D3.36). PTOCn
The use of Ethernet communication thus replaces the ring wire

circuits and the required binary outputs of the outgoing feeder
protection units and the binary input at the incoming feeder
Figure D3.37:
protection unit for blocking the trip. This is saving cost for I/O Nodes involved for protection signalling
hardware, wiring and documentation. (Str = Starting, Op = Operate, Tr = Trip)

For a safe system-wide interlocking the following information

has to be collected by the interlocking logic:
T-> F1 Protection PTOC Str general, q
a. Position indications of all switching devices in the entire
T-> F1 Protection PTRC Str general, q
substation
T-> T1 Protection PTOC Blk stVal, q
b. Warning and alarm messages of the auxiliary equipment
(if bay-related interlocking included)
Table D3.20:
Transmitted data for reverse interlocking c. Initiation of the interlocking check
d. Release from the interlocking to the IED controlling the
LN DO CDC DA Values
switching devices
PTRC Str ACD general 0 = false There are generally three different implementation concepts
1 = true possible for a substation interlocking as illustrated in Figures
PTOC Blk SPS stVal 0 = false D3.38, D3.39, D3.40:
1 = true
a. Central interlocking by the substation control unit
Table D3.21: b. Central interlocking by a dedicated bay unit

Details on data modelling
c. Distributed interlocking by the bay units
For all information submitted via GOOSE, the quality attributes The request for the switching can originally come from the substation
.q have to be transmitted and evaluated on subscriber side to control system, the network control centre or locally on the front
ensure that the blocking is carried out correctly. The blocking panel HMI or the binary inputs on the bay unit wired from a remote
may only be activated as long as .q.validity is not marked as terminal unit (RTU). The IED can only execute a switching control
“invalid”. The transmission must be completed within less than command when it receives a release by the interlocking unit,
the set command time tl>> of the incoming feeder protection, otherwise it has to respond to the initiator with a rejection.
which is 0.1 seconds in our example. The time requirement
The concepts differ depending on which IEDs status indications
applies here for the transmission path from generation of the
are exchanged, in which IEDs the interlocking conditions are
pickup f1 until the actual blocking takes effect f2 (see Figure
checked and from where the release signals are generated. If
D3.36) according to IEC 61850 part 5, Edition 2, page 62. The
the substation control system is not involved in the interlocking
transmission must take place without delay, i.e. a spontaneous
procedure, it only receives updated status information from
transmission is an absolute precondition.
each IED about the new position of the switching devices.
Thus data can be transmitted reliably within a few milliseconds.
In the concepts a “Central interlocking by the substation control
The reverse interlocking is a part of the protection system and
unit” (Figure D3.38) and b “Central interlocking by a dedicated
as such is on a high safety level. This is why GOOSE services
bay unit” (Figure D3.39) the interlocking logic is integrated in one
are especially suitable for this application.
central unit. The central unit holds a process image that comprises
4.2.2 System-wide interlocking all information relevant for the all-embracing interlocking conditions.
The interlocking function in a substation serves to block the
operation of switching devices, if this is hazardous for humans,
Substation
devices or the whole substation equipment during active Bay Unit 1 Control Unit
service. The decision whether a switchgear actuation is blocked Switch
S1
Position
or released requires an evaluation of logical equations from T1 Release
the topological environment of the device in the form of a
relevant process information of active and inactive parts of the
Release Release Release R elease
electrical network. A differentiation is made between the bay-
related interlocking and system-wide substation interlocking. S witch S witch S witch S witch
Position Position Position Position
Bay-related interlocking considers the switch positions within

in a bay and also the conditions of the switchgear primary
equipment such as “spring/drive ready” or “pressure/insulation
monitoring” and auxiliary equipment like “MCB Trip”.
B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n
System-wide interlocking considers the positions and conditions F1 F2 F3 Fn
of all switching devices and their auxiliary equipment within
the entire substation or at least a part of it seen as an isolated
Figure D3.38:
system.
Central interlocking by the substation control unit

With an IEC 61850 network all three concepts can be used.

S ubstation
Control Unit
Nevertheless not all concepts can be realised in an interoperable
B ay Unit 1
S1 way. For the communication from bay unit to bay unit the GOOSE
Information
B1 communication has to be used (so-called “horizontal communication”)
T1 S witch
Dedicated B ay Unit
Positions which provides a fast transmission time and cyclical status update,
R elease
whereas the communication between the bay units and the
substation control system uses event-triggered reporting via the
S witch
Positions
S witch client-server communication (“vertical communication”). With
Positions
R elease typically one publishing GOOSE message the bay unit sends a
R elease multicast message to all other bays at the same time for subscribing
the data. With the client-server reporting the bay sends each data
change by a separate message per client connected.
B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n In case of the concept a the whole communication would
F1 F2 F3 Fn happen via client-server communication as a substation control
system has typically no GOOSE subscription capabilities. The
Figure D3.39: status reporting for switching devices is defined in IEC 61850
Central interlocking by a dedicated bay unit and this works fully interoperable. But for the send message
from the system interlocking to release switch executions,
dedicated new procedures and objects have to be defined,
All bay units have to transmit the relevant switchgear positions as the standard is currently not offering any standardised
to the central unit either continuously or for each status change. service. As this extension would be not interoperable, it is not
The release information calculated as a result of the central recommended to use the concept a for system-wide interlocking.
interlocking is sent to the corresponding bay units. This release Due to this a further description is not added to this document.
information is the basis for executing or blocking an open or
close control command by the bay units. Additionally it needs For the two other concepts b and c the main transmission uses
to be distinguished whether the interlocking for the bays is GOOSE communication as bay units typically have no client
integrated in the logic of the central interlocking unit or whether functionalities. A simple exchange of binary information is made
the bay unit manages its own bay-related interlocking. by sending the bay status information and control release
Dependent on this the number of interlocking equations in the information in case of concept b. The only case using client-
central unit may be quite different. server communication is the status update information to the
substation control system, which is unidirectional.
With the concept c “Distributed interlocking by the bay units“
(Figure D3.40), the all-embracing interlocking logic is distributed There are arguments in favour of concept b:
among all participating bay units in the substation. The a. For large substations the number of configurable GOOSE
interlocking logic of each bay unit calculates the interlocking virtual inputs could be exceeded, as each bay unit has to
conditions autonomously. Moreover, each bay unit provides the subscribe to the appropriate position signals of other bay
status information required by other bay units for calculating units
the interlocking conditions in a continuous way.
b. Maintenance of the system interlocking is easier, as not
all changes affect all the bay units
B ay Unit 1
S ubstation
Control Unit
In the opposite, the concept c provides:
S1 a. The most interoperable solution, as no additional signals
Information
T1 need to be defined. Concept c is therefore the closest
solution to the IEC 61850 standard
b. Testing is much simpler as it is bay-oriented
Positions
Positions Positions
c. Maintenance is higher than in concept b as for each new
or changed bay unit the interlocking equations in all other
bay units need to be updated
As an example Figure D3.41 shows the communication in the
Positions Positions Positions
B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n network for concept b. For the transmission of the switchgear
F1 F2 F3 Fn positions and the open/close release information the horizontal
communication via GOOSE is used. Additional reports will be
transmitted via vertical client-server communication to update the
Figure D3.40:
Distributed interlocking by the bay units status in the operator workstation and in the network control centre.

status value stVal is a double pole signal, it can take four different
Substation
B ay Unit 1 Control Unit values which are “intermediate-state”, “off”, “on” and “bad-
state”. For the indication of the switch “selected” state, the
Information
B1 switch controller LN CSWI contains the DA “stSeld”.
T1 Dedicated B ay Unit
Server -Client
Report S witch The release signals needed for concept b are modelled in
S ubstation
the LN CILO (control interlocking logic). The CILO contains
F1 .Control. CSWI .
Pos .stVal B us
DO “EnaOpn” and “EnaCls” to enable (release) or not of the

GOOS E
Positions F1 .Control.CS WI.
Pos.stVal
respective open and close controls of the switching device.
Release
F1 .Control.CILO.
EnaCls.stVal
F1 .Control.CILO.
The internal functional blocks in an IED for control according
to IEC 61850 are shown in Figure D3.42.
EnaOpn.stVal
Open/Close
Request
B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n From Client
F1 F2 F3 Fn
S witch
R elease Interlocking
Switch S ubscription
Controller
S witch Positions
Figure D3.41: CS WI
Controller
Interlocking
CILO
CILO
GOOS E
CS WI Status information
Interlocking communication via IEC 61850 from other units
Open/Close
The related objects which are transmitted in concepts b and Command
c are shown in Tables D3.22 and D3.23. The position indications Switch
S witch
Position
of the switching devices are modelled in IEC 61850 using the Circuit Breaker Disconnector Positions Publishing
Proxy Proxy GOOS E
Logical Node (LN) “XCBR” for a circuit breaker and “XSWI” for XCBR XS WI Status information
to other units
a disconnector. The data object (DO) “Pos” contains the status

information. The position details of a switching device are given
by the data attributes (DA) “stVal” for the status value itself and Figure D3.42:
“q” for the quality (e.g. “valid” or “invalid”). As the position Interaction bay with interlocking unit
For all concepts a, b, c all bay units send their status update
via report to the clients connected.
T-> F1 Control XCBR Pos stVal, q
XSWI stSeld In the case of concept b each bay unit continuously sends
T-> F1 Control CWSI Pos stVal, q
its switchgear position information and warning GOOSE
stSeld messages to the interlocking bay unit. The dedicated
->R F1 Control CILO EnaOpn stVal, q interlocking bay unit continuously generates the corresponding
EnaCls stVal, q EnaOpn and EnaCls signals based on the overall substation
situation within its interlocking logic and publishes GOOSE
Table D3.22: messages to return this information to all bay units in charge
Transmitted data for substation interlocking of their switching devices. If a client requests a select or an
operate for a circuit breaker or a disconnector, the
corresponding bay unit considers the EnaCls and EnaOpn
LN DO CDC DA Values release status from the interlocking unit in its checks. If the
XCBR Pos DPC stVal 0 = intermediate-state switching control action is permitted, then the command will
XSWI 1 = off be executed. If it is not allowed, then the command will not
2 = on be executed and a rejection message is returned to the client.
3 = bad-state
CSWI Pos DPC stSeld 0 = false In case of concept c, each bay unit continuously sends its
1 = true switchgear position information via a GOOSE message to all
CILO EnaOpn SPS stVal 0 = false other bay units. Each other bay unit has to subscribe to the
1 = true status GOOSE messages from the other bay units needed
CILO EnaCls SPS stVal 0 = false for its system-wide interlocking checking. If a client requests
1 = true a select or an operate for a circuit breaker or a disconnector,
the corresponding bay unit when receiving the command
Table D3.23: initiates an internal interlocking check and evaluates the
Transmitted data for substation interlocking interlocking status on basis of the received states from the

GOOSEs of other bays involved. If the switching control action The 1-of-n logic works for a defined substation or network
is permitted, then the command will be executed. If it is not area or possibly a whole substation. The pre-definition of the
allowed, then the command will not be executed and a network sections has to happen at the same time when the
rejection message is returned to the client. concept of the substation interlocking is chosen.
Figure D3.43 and D3.44 illustrate the interaction between the The 1-of-n logic is possible in all three concepts of the system-
different logical parts for both cases. wide interlocking:
a. Central interlocking by the substation control unit
S ubstation b. Central interlocking by a dedicated bay unit

Control Unit
c. Distributed interlocking by the bay units
Dedicated B ay Unit As the concept a is currently not feasible in an interoperable
way it is not considered in this section.
For the explanation of the 1-of-n logic, the interlocking concept
S witch c is used. All bay units execute the interlocking by themselves.
Open/Close
R equest Positions GOOS E For that each IED publishes GOOSE messages with the
Messages
positions of all switching devices. The modelling information
Continuous
R elease transmitted is given in Table D3.24.
B ay Unit 1 B ay Unit 2 LN DO CDC DA Values
XCBR Pos DPC stVal 0 = intermediate-

XSWI state
Figure D3.43: 1 = off
Interaction bay with interlocking unit 2 = on
3 = bad-state
XCBR Pos DPC stSeld 0 = false (unselected)
S ubstation XSWI 1 = true (selected)
Control Unit
Table D3.24:
Transmitted data for substation interlocking with 1-of-n logic
B ay
y Unit 1 B ay Unit n
Open/Close
R equest
Each bay unit sends the positions of its primary equipment
with the data object “Pos” with an “on”, “off”, “intermediate-
S witch S witch
Positions Positions
state” or “bad-state”. If a switching control operation has
GOOS E GOOS E been started the position moves from “on” or “off” into the
Messages Messages
“intermediate-state” until it reaches the opposite state with
B ay Unit
i 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 “off” or “on”. As described in section 4.1.1 “substation control”,
the switching control operation is prepared by a “Select”
before the real operation.
Figure D3.44:
Interaction bay to bay unit For the indication that a switch has been selected, an additional
status information “stSeld” can be modelled and set from
“unselected” to “selected” state. This state will be kept until
4.2.3 Uniqueness of control the final switch position is reached. Adding this object to the
GOOSE data set allows other bays to subscribe and to
A 1-of-n control logic has to ensure that only one switching
consider it in their bay control logic to be aware of any
control operation can occur at a given time in a pre-defined
upcoming and later running switch operations in other bays.
section of an electrical network. This means that only one
The bay control logic of these bays can reject any control
switching device (circuit breaker or disconnector) can be
request until at least one of the subscribed GOOSE messages
opened or closed at the same time. All other switch commands
from all the other bays signals “Selected” by “stSeld”.
need to be rejected. This function is very important in networks
where more than one substation or network control system As an example for concept c the first step for a close or open
have the authority to execute operations. command is the operator’s initiation of the operation via the

device front panel HMI on bay level or via the Operator

S ubstation
Interface (OI) of the substation control system. Figure D3.45 B ay Unit 1 Control Unit 1 S ubstation
Control Unit 2
shows in Step “1” a request coming from the OI ‘Select’ as S1
part of an SBO (Select-Before-Operate) command. The control T1 S2
procedure for SBO triggers the interlocking check and
Open/Close
responds in Step “2” with a positive confirmation that this
switchgear device was now selected. In the next important
4. Request
Switch command
rejection
5.
SBO
step “3” in Figure D3.46 the bay unit changes the status of Procedure
the “stSeld” of the chosen switchgear device to “selected”.

If a second control command is initiated during the whole
operation by the same or another front panel HMI or by the GOOSE
stSeld
same or another OI client, in Figure D3.47 shown in Step “4”,

Switch
the related bay unit can reject the control request directly, in Selected
Bay Unit 2 Bay Unit 3 Bay Unit 4 Bay Unit n

this example by a negative response to the SBO ‘Select’
F1 F2 F3 Fn
command to the second OI as illustrated by Step “5”.
Figure D3.47:
1-of-n logic - step 4 & 5
S ubstation
Control Unit 1 S ubstation
B ay Unit 1 Control Unit 2 Figure D3.48 shows the example for concept b for the data
S1
flow which is much simpler in terms of configuration. The
T1 1. S2 operator initiates a switching control via the Operator Interface
S BO (OI) of the substation control system. As shown in Step “1”
Procedure S witch command
Open/Close in operation a SBO request is transmitted from the OI to the bay unit F3.
R equest
The control procedure for SBO reacts by performing a system-
2. wide interlocking check and responds in Step “2” with a
positive confirmation that a switch is now selected. In the next
step “3” the bay unit changes the status of the “stSeld” of
the chosen switch as “selected” and updates immediately
the GOOSE content to the interlocking bay unit. The interlocking
B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 3 B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n bay unit reacts with an immediate update on the release
GOOSE messages back to all bay units of the affected system
F1 F2 F3 Fn
to block further switching operations by setting CILO EnaCls
and EnaOpn signals for all other switches to false state (see
Table D3.25).
Figure D3.45:
1-of-n logic - step 1 & 2
S ubstation
S ubstation Control Unit 1
B ay Unit 1 Control Unit 1 S ubstation
Control Unit 2 B ay Unit 1
S1
S1
T1 B1
S2 T1 Dedicated Bay Unit
Switch command
rejection
GOOSE
1. SBO
Procedure 2.
stSeld Open/Close
Request
Switch
3. 4.
Selected GOOSE
Switch EnaCls=false
Selected EnaOpn=false
3.
GOOSE
stSeld=true
GOOSE
GOOSE stSeld
stSeld
Switch
Switch Selected
Selected GOOSE
Bay Unit 2 Bay Unit 3 Bay Unit 4 stSeld Bay Unit n
Bay Unit 2 Bay Unit 3 Bay Unit 4 Bay Unit n
F1 F2 F3 Switch
Selected Fn F1 F2 F3 Fn
Figure D3.46: Figure D3.48:

1-of-n logic - step 3 1-of-n logic with dedicated interlocking unit

IEC 61850 since there are typically not just two communication
LN DO CDC DA Values
partners (in -103 master and slave) but rather a larger number
XCBR Pos DPC stVal 0 = intermediate- of controlling and monitoring communication clients that can
XSWI state have access to the bay units as servers.
1 = off
2 = on While testing a protection and/or control bay unit in a system
3 = bad-state
environment, a test engineer may have to test one or more
XCBR Pos DPC stSeld 0 = false functions, an IED or an application scheme. Dependent on
XSWI 1 = true
the scope of work, the test engineer has to define the structure
CILO EnaOpn SPS stVal 0 = false of functions which have to be put in functional isolation.
1 = true
Resulting from this definition one or more Logical Nodes (LN),
CILO EnaCls SPS stVal 0 = false
one or more Logical Devices (LD), one IED or a number of
1 = true
IEDs must be set to test mode. The strict subordination of the
behaviour of Logical Nodes under the behaviour of Logical
Table D3.25:
Devices allows a structured intervention into the IED concerning
Transmitted data for substation interlocking
the LN mode:
a. One or more LN:
If a second control command is initiated during the whole
access of LNxx.Mod controls this LN
switch operation time by the HMI or a second OI client, the
related bay unit can directly reject the control request, as the b. One or more LD:
incoming system-wide interlocking GOOSE from the dedicated access of LDxx.LLN0.Mod controls all subordinate LD
interlocking bay unit is blocking it by false states of the related and LN (LLN0 is the central LN of each LD)
EnaOpn and EnaCls signals.
c. One complete IED:
For the 1-of-n control logic application the same recommendations access of LD0.LLN0.Mod controls all LD of this IED
related to communication interruptions are valid as mentioned (Remark: LD0 is the central Logical Device for non-
in section 4.2.1 “Reverse Interlocking”. Dependent on the location functional LN of a Physical Device, if it exists)
of the interruption, a control command can be executed without
The most common way of testing today is to set a complete
problem or will be rejected. The most critical case is when a
bay unit to the test mode. Because of that further description
bay unit no longer receives any release signals from the
is given for this use case only. If the feature is supported in
dedicated interlocking bay unit (concept b) while a system OI
the IED, the activation of the test mode can be triggered by
still receives updates over client-server communication.
a binary input stimulated from the insertion of the test plug
Dependent on the GOOSE default definitions it could happen
into the secondary circuits. It is very usual to set the IED into
that a second bay unit accepts a switching command in parallel
test mode directly via front panel or the operating program.
when not receiving the stSeld information (concept c) or EnaOpn/
EnaCls information (concept b). To prevent this case, it would In a substation which is usually kept in operation during bay
be useful to report GOOSE error information using LN LGOS unit testing, the IED becomes isolated. This means that some
to each OI to signify that the system-wide interlocking is not analogue and binary inputs and outputs have to be disconnected
fully operational. For further consideration of fault conditions or changed over to safe state values to have no negative
refer to section 4.2.5 “General Requirements”. influence to the other equipment remaining in active operation.
On the communication link to the substation control system or
4.2.4 Bay unit testing
network control centre a dedicated message has to be
Before the first operation of a bay unit in a substation, or at communicated to inform about the unavailability for normal
regular intervals after commissioning, the functionality of that operation. Figure D3.49 illustrates how this information is
bay unit needs to be validated. During such tests the system provided in the client-server communication. In IEC 61850 the
and operators need to be aware that testing is in progress or test mode information is included in the data object “Beh” of
test actions need to masked from the operators as not relevant each logical node, including LLN0 which represents the global
information. state of the parent logical device. Tables D3.26 and D3.27
show the details of the related data object which changes its
As an example a substation control log should not include
status for IED F2. The data attribute “stVal”, normally in “on”
test messages and test values as they are not relevant for the
state, changes to the state “test”, if the binary outputs are still
normal operation. On the other hand, it is important to block
connected during the testing to the primary equipment. If they
commands from external communications during the ongoing
are isolated for the testing which is very usual, the state changes
testing if they are not sent specifically for testing purposes.
to the “test/blocked” mode accordingly. If the output isolation
Conventional serial standard protocols like IEC60870-5-103 and test mode changes in two individual steps, the mode first
provide a solution “monitor direction blocked” to satisfy this moves from “on” to “on-blocked” and then to “test/blocked” or
requirement. Such a solution cannot be used in the scope of from “on” to “test” and then to “test/blocked”.

S ubstation LN DO CDC DA SDA Values

S1
CSWI Pos DPC q test 0 = false (off)
S2 1 = true (on)
T1
LNN0.Beh.stVal S erver-Client Table D3.29:
= test or Communication
test/blocked Client message with marking of test mode
LNN0.Beh.stVal
= test or
test/blocked
The connected clients of the substation and network control

system have to react by highlighting this state change of the
IED to test mode on their Operator Interface. Furthermore
they may ignore all further incoming messages from the IED
B ay Unit 2
B ay Unit 3
B ay Unit 4 B ay Unit n under test to avoid misinterpretation or malfunction of the
Under TES T
F1 F2 F3 Fn equipment not considered as in test mode.
In the opposite case, a client could be used to support the
Figure D3.49:
testing by generating special control commands to the IED.
IED in test mode with related indication to the outside In IEC 61850 such test commands are sent with a dedicated
equipment in a substation marking “Test” in each message to this IED. The IED itself
must react only to those messages which are sent with marking
“Test”.
When a bay unit is placed in Test mode then each of its
T-> F2 Various LLN0 Beh stVal, q GOOSE messages must also reflect this by modifying DA.
others This marking uses the quality DA .q.test = true similar to that
used for reporting. The subscribing IED has to react by
Table D3.26: considering the received data as no longer relevant for its
Transmitted data for signalling test mode operation whilst the publisher remains in test mode. The
detection is only possible when the quality DA for each signal
is configured to the GOOSE data set. See also the section
LN DO CDC DA Values 4.2.5 “General Requirements” describing a concept to handle
LLN0 Beh ENS stVal 1 = on this use case. Figure D3.50 illustrates the example of an IED
Others e.g. 2 = on-blocked F2 under test in a complete substation sending its “test mode”
CSWI 3 = test information to the other IEDs. The annex of part 7-4 defines
PTOC 4 = test/blocked
5 = off how each communication partner should handle each kind
of element in test or normal mode.
Table D3.27:
Detailed data for signalling test mode
S ubstation
For each LD the central node “LLN0” changes “Beh” when S1
its state gets modified by the “Mod”, to signal the state change S2
for the LD itself. If so, each LN in this LD, e.g. CSWI for control T1
or PTOC for protection, will change the state of “Beh” as well.
As this information is usually an element of all data sets, GOOS E
q/test=true
spontaneous reports of all related nodes, which change their GOOS E

states to test mode, are sent to all clients accordingly. This Communication
and all further reports to these clients will have data marked
as produced while in test mode (data attribute .q as shown
GOOS E
in Table D3.28 and D3.29). GOOS E
q/test=true
q/test=true
B ay Unit 3 GOOS E B ay Unit n

B ay Unit 2 B ay Unit 4
Under TES T q/test=true
T/R IED LDInst LN DO DA F1 F2 F3 Fn

T-> F2 Control CSWI Pos q
Figure D3.50:
Table D3.28: IED in test mode with related indication to the outside
Signalling of messages for testing equipment in a substation

There are several functions of a bay unit to be tested in a IEDs in test mode and from those which remain in normal
substation, the most common test cases are: operation. Once this complex testing is made, the
communication loss test (fall-back to a default value) should
a. Primary switchgear testing
also be tested to check the right behaviour in a complex
b. Isolated protection function testing of a bay unit network.
c. Isolated control function testing of a bay unit with or without The testing capabilities in an IEC 61850 network environment
switchgear consideration are manifold as the standard provides a comprehensive
functionality around this. This can be seen as one of the key
d. Client-server communication testing of a bay unit to the
advantages of this standard. At least when the bay units work
substation control system
on sampled values over Ethernet from Merging Units
e. GOOSE communication testing of a bay unit transformers, the testing equipment can simulate every
f. Protection scheme testing of multiple bay units with or analogue signal over the same Ethernet as the Merging Units.
without GOOSE communication Only the ‘Sim’ indication is recognized by the IED under test
which analogue values have to be processed. If all binary
For the primary switchgear testing it makes sense to switch inputs and outputs are processed by GOOSE messages, the
the related bay unit to test mode beforehand. Then the operator data exchange with information marked ‘test’ prevents
is informed that a test is ongoing. An IED which is set to test misinterpretation. When switching an IED to the test mode,
mode is still connected to the primary equipment and thus no test plug is required, as all information goes over Ethernet
the control testing typically is made directly via front panel and all the partners know which information is based on test
HMI of the bay unit. and which on operation. Testing equipment installed at a
For the isolated protection function testing the entire device central place where it is connected to the substation Ethernet
has to be switched into “test/blocked” mode. Normally a test will make it perfect. The user will benefit from accessing all
plug is used to disconnect the CT/VT and to short-circuit the devices from one workplace, saving the time to move from
CT connections to the primary substation transformers and one device to the other. Figure D3.51 illustrates this highly
to connect the analogue inputs and some of the binary in/ sophisticated test method of the future.
outputs to a secondary injection test set.
For the isolated control function testing the IED is set into the
same mode as for the protection testing (“test/blocked”). To T1 01 /1 04 Gateway S ubstation
Disturbance
Client to Control
Archive
test the whole chain of control function, a test client is required NCS S ystem
to send control commands with the test attribute activated. Command
with .q.test = false Command
If the connection to the switchgear has to be included in the S tation B us with .q.test = true
testing, the binary control outputs have to be kept connected S ER VER /

CLIENT GOOS E
S ER VER /
to the primary to initiate a real circuit breaker or disconnector CLIENT Trip Command
with .q.test = true
activation (“test”only). Parallel

GOOS E IED in Test
IED in
Test Equipment
operation
To test the client-server communication to a client, the bay unit Operating
S imulated
Measurements
Measurements LPHD.S im.stVal
should be switched to the “test-blocked” mode and the affected with S im = false = true
with S im = true
S ampled Values
Process B us
clients to a dedicated test mode. From then on, each message
sent from or to the bay unit is then only to be used for testing. S ampled Values
In principle a client could possibly work for equipment under Merging

XCBR XS WI
test and equipment in operation marking its controls with or Unit
without test information. However for unintentional wrong actions

during testing it might be in too dangerous in practice.
For the GOOSE communication testing more and more test
equipment provides test features over Ethernet. Testing is
Figure D3.51:
facilitated for instance by simulating the GOOSE messages IED in test mode with related indication to the outside
published by other IEDs or by checking the content of the equipment in a substation
GOOSE received which is marked with test attributes. IEDs
which support the simulation functionality indicate this with
the DO “Sim” in the LN “LPHD” of related LD.
To test a complete application of multiple bay units using
GOOSE, all affected IEDs have to be switched into the “test”
mode. Dependent on the test attribute received, the subscriber
can differentiate between GOOSE messages coming from

4.2.5 General requirements

LN DO CDC DA SDA Values
When using GOOSE for data transmission, the quality attribute XCBR Pos DPC q validity 0 = good
shall be always evaluated. The possibilty to convey information XSWI test 1 = invalid
about the data quality of each information value is a key 2 = reserved
feature of IEC 61850. On the publisher side it has to be 3 = questionable
0 = false (off)
assured that each information value is accompanied by its 1 = true (on)
data attribute ‘q’, to allow the subscriber run a data quality
LGOS St SPS stVal 0 = GOOSE inactive
dependent processing. The GOOSE monitoring on the 1 = GOOSE active
subscriber side must inform the processing functions whether
the information received can be used for processing. In case
Table D3.31:
of missing GOOSE messages, the subscriber may modify Transmitted data for GOOSE monitoring
the data quality attributes of each affected piece of information.
In devices which support the change-over to default value/
quality upon the detection of the loss of a GOOSE message Another use case is the activation of the test mode of a
the subscriber function can substitute the last received publishing IED described in section 4.2.4 “Bay Unit Test”. In
information by pre-configured values and qualities. (see this case the quality sub attribute “test” should be evaluated
example for a system-wide interlocking logic in Figure D3.52). as not relevant for the normal operation if the subscribing IED
These defaults should be defined carefully to prevent is not in test mode as well.
malfunctions in the application. The data evaluated is shown To prevent data being lost when (due to frame collisions in
in Table D3.30 and D3.31. IED F2 continuously receives the Ethernet network), a GOOSE message is repeated
GOOSE messages from IEDs T1 and F1 containing their switch subsequently in increasing time intervals until its normal slow
positions, for an interlocking logic. If the data attribute “q” sending cycle (without status change) has been restored. To
shows e.g. a validity of “invalid”, the latest received switch detect a GOOSE communication interrupt, the IED should
position can no more be used. provide a monitoring function. The standard provides a
dedicated Logical Node LGOS with a status value “St” for the
indication of the communication status (see Figure D3.52).
The data transmitted is shown in Table D3.30 and D3.31.
F1 PTOC.Blk
Default Value
The number of GOOSE messages or sampled values in the
B ay Unit 2
GOOS E If GOOSE faulty affected network should not become too high (-> e.g. no
F1 . Protection.PTOC
B locking Overcurrent merging unit on the same bus as substation control system)
.Str.general
F1 . Protection.PTOC PTOC to ensure the high demands on the transmission time.
.Str.q
GOOSE status
S witch A significant improvement of the GOOSE transmission time

Positions GOOS E
Monitoring
can be achieved if all network components (IEDS and
LGOS switches) support ‘VLAN’ so that GOOSE messages can be
GOOS E 0 = GOOSE faulty
1 = GOOSE received
prioritised. If such a method is required due to the network
F2. Protection.PTOC
B ay Unit 3 .Str.general B ay Unit 1 Report load conditions, all corresponding IEDs have to provide this
F2 T1
F2. Protection.PTOC
.Str.q F2.S ystem. configuration capability - which might not be the case as this
LGOS .S t
is an optional function in IEC 61850.
Using redundancy protocols to improve the availability and
Figure D3.52: reliability of the communication links is very useful. But for
GOOSE monitoring with LGOS protection applications special attention has to be paid.
Protocols like RSTP e.g. are not recommended, as the
reconfiguration time for the network after any failure in the
T/R IED LDInst LN DO DA system takes up to several seconds, which means that
->R F2 Control XCBR Pos stVal, q applications such as reverse interlocking are not operable
XSWI during this interruption time. There are other protocols to
T-> F2 System LGOS St stVal, q choose from, like HSR or PRP, which are able to manage a
reconfiguration in a few milliseconds.
Table D3.30:
Transmitted data for GOOSE monitoring

D4
Frequency and Load Shedding

Chapter

D4
1. Introduction 485
2. Frequency protection 486
3. Load shedding 488
4. Load restoration 490
5. Turbine abnormal 491
6. References 492
D4 1. Introduction
Generation plant normally operates reliably within a defined initiated only after the event and whilst some salvaging of the
frequency band around nominal frequency. However, it can situation can be achieved, this form of corrective action may
only tolerate short time operation at frequencies outside the not be effective enough and cannot cope with sudden load
nominal range without sustaining damage. This consideration increases, causing large frequency decays in very short times.
also applies to some types of load. Conditions which can In such cases a device that can anticipate the severity of
affect the generation frequency include overloads caused by frequency decay and act to disconnect loads before the
a sudden increase in load (e.g. switching on a motor) or loss frequency actually reaches dangerously low levels, can
of a generator set or sudden loss of load due to a downstream become very effective in containing damage.
fault. Frequency protection is generally used to protect against
During severe disturbances, the frequency of the power
the overload conditions in generator protection as described
system oscillates as various generators try to synchronise on
in the Generator Protection part of this manual. Fast-acting
to a common frequency. The measurement of instantaneous
current-based protection is generally used to clear short
rate of change of frequency can be misleading during such
circuit faults.
a disturbance. The frequency decay needs to be monitored
Generation and utilisation need to be well balanced in any over a longer period of time to make the correct decision for
industrial, distribution or transmission network. As load load shedding.
increases, the generation needs to be correspondingly
Normally, generators are rated for a lifetime operation in a
increased to maintain the frequency of the supply because
particular band of frequency and operation outside this band
there are many types of frequency-sensitive electrical
can cause mechanical damage to the turbine blades.
apparatus that can be damaged when network frequency
Protection against such out-of-band operation is required
departs from the allowed band for safe operation. At times,
when the frequency does not improve, even after load shedding
when sudden overloads occur, the frequency drops at a rate
measures have been taken, to trip the turbine. Faster turbine
decided by the system inertia constant, magnitude of overload,
trip clearance times are required for lower system frequency,
system damping constant and various other parameters.
as in case of severe frequency decay.
Unless corrective measures are taken at the appropriate time,
frequency decay can go beyond the point of no return and Whilst load shedding leads to an improvement in the system
cause widespread network collapse. In a wider scenario, this frequency, the disconnected loads do need to be reconnected
can result in “Blackouts”. after the system has become stable again. Loads should only
be restored if the frequency remains stable, above a defined
To put the network back into a healthy state, considerable
restoration level, for a set period of time. Minor frequency
amount of time and effort is required to re-synchronise and
excursions below the restoration level, of short time duration,
re-energise the system, potentially involving an expert team
can be tolerated during the restoration process, but longer
of power system protection and control engineers. If recovering
term excursions will cause restoration to be abandoned. The
from a blackout also “black start capable” power plants might
number of load restoration steps is normally less than the
be needed (e.g. pump storage).
number of load shedding steps to reduce repeated
Protective relays that can detect a low frequency condition disturbances while restoring load.
are generally used in such cases to automatically disconnect
The amount of load to be shed in such emergency situations
unimportant loads (also called loadshedding) in order to save
is typically defined in Grid Codes [Ref D4.1: Continental
the network, by re-establishing the balance of the “generation-
Europe Operational Handbook Appendix].
load equation”. However, with such devices, the action is

2. Frequency protection D4
Protective relays that provide frequency protection require a Over-frequency protection operates if the input frequency is
voltage input in order to provide accurate voltage and greater than a set overfrequency threshold and usually includes
frequency measurements. Additionally, accurate rate of a definite time operate delay. It is often used as a basis for
change of frequency measurement is required for advanced initiating load restoration.
types of frequency protection. The ability of the frequency
2.3 ROCOF 81R
and df/dt measurements to track with real power system
frequency profiles (e.g. in frequency decay or oscillating As mentioned in earlier sections, conditions involving very large
scenarios) is required to ensure correct operation of the load - generation imbalances may occur, accompanied by rapid
protection. Also, these measurements should be immune to decline in system frequency. This corresponds to a high negative
harmonics or noise spikes on the voltage inputs which can rate of change of frequency where the df/dt value provides
cause problems with zero-crossing based techniques. indication of the mismatch between generation and load, i.e.
how much load should be shed. If the discrepancy is large, then
Generally all types of frequency protection include the
shedding of one or two stages of load may be insufficient to
capability of being optionally blocked by an undervoltage
stop the decline in frequency. In such a situation, it is advantageous
condition. This ensures that the voltage has not collapsed
to have an element that identifies the high rate of decline of
due to a fault condition and avoids unnecessary load shedding
frequency, and adapts the load shedding scheme accordingly.
actions.
Since the rate of change monitoring is independent of
2.1 Underfrequency 81U
frequency, the element can identify frequency variations
Frequency variations on a power system are an indication that occurring close to nominal frequency and thus provide early
the power balance between generation and load has been warning to the operator on a developing frequency problem.
lost. In particular, an under-frequency condition implies that Additionally, the element could also be used as an alarm to
the net load is in excess of the available generation. Such a warn operators of unusually high system frequency variations.
condition can arise, when an interconnected system splits,
Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) protection often has
and the load left connected to one of the subsystems is in
different operating modes where it can be set to operate for
excess of the capacity of the generators in that particular
only negative rate of change, or positive rate of change, or
subsystem. Industrial plants that are dependent on utilities
either. It usually includes a definite time operate delay.
to supply part of their loads will experience under-frequency
conditions when the incoming lines are lost. In load shedding applications, it is usually set for negative df/
dt operation. It is often used in conjunction with under-
An under-frequency condition at nominal voltage can result
frequency protection in these applications to provide extra
in over-fluxing of generators and transformers and many types
flexibility in dealing with severe load to generation imbalances.
of industrial loads have limited tolerances on the operating
frequency and running speeds e.g. synchronous motors. In a Chinese application, df/dt is used to block 81U if df/dt
Sustained under-frequency has implications on the stability exceeds the related setting. This is done to differentiate
of the system, whereby any subsequent disturbance may between system faults and the deficit of active power. Typically,
lead to damage to frequency sensitive equipment and even 2 stages of 81U are employed, one set to 49.25 Hz with time
blackouts, if the under-frequency condition is not corrected delay 20 s and one set to 48.5 Hz with time delay 0.1 s with
sufficiently quickly. a df/dt> inhibit set to 5 Hz/s. The df/dt> inhibit of 5 Hz/s is
typical for large power systems, however, no df/dt inhibit is
Under-frequency protection operates if the input frequency
used for small systems (such as DG).
is less than a set underfrequency threshold and usually
includes a definite time operate delay. It is often used as a Considerable care should be taken when setting this element
basis for initiating load shedding. because it is not supervised by a frequency setting. Setting
of the time delay or increasing the number of df/dt averaging
2.2 Overfrequency 81O
cycles will lead to a more stable element, but this should be
Over-frequency running of a generator arises when the considered against the loss of fast tripping capability as the
mechanical power input to the machine exceeds the electrical tripping time is extended. Stability under oscillating frequency
output. This could happen, for instance, when there is a conditions should also be considered, for instance when
sudden loss of load due to tripping of an outgoing feeder generators are synchronising or power swings occur.
from the plant to a load centre. Under such overspeed
2.4 Supervised ROCOF 81RF
conditions, the governor should respond quickly so as to
obtain a balance between the mechanical input and electrical Conditions may arise in an electrical network where the load
output, thereby restoring normal frequency. Over-frequency to generation imbalance is considerable and this may result
protection is required as a back-up to cater for slow response in relatively rapid changes of the system frequency. In such
of frequency control equipment. a case, maintaining the system stability is an onerous task,
and calls for quick corrective action.

D4 2. Frequency protection
High speed load shedding cannot be achieved by monitoring 2.5 Average ROCOF 81RAV
the system frequency alone and the rate of change of system
Owing to the complex dynamics of power systems, variations
frequency becomes an equally critical parameter to use.
in frequency during times of generation - load imbalance do
In the load shedding scheme as shown in Figure D4.1, it is not follow any regular patterns and are highly non-linear.
assumed under falling frequency conditions that by shedding
Oscillations will occur as the system seeks to address the
a stage of load, the system can be stabilised at frequency
imbalance, resulting in frequency oscillations typically in the
f2. For slow rates of decay, this can be achieved using the
order of 0.1 Hz (inter area oscillations) to 1 Hz (local
under-frequency protection element set at frequency f1 with
generators), in addition to the basic change in frequency. Due
a suitable time delay. However, if the generation deficit is
to the oscillatory nature of frequency excursions, the
substantial, the frequency will rapidly decrease and it is
instantaneous measurement value for df/dt can sometimes
possible that the time delay imposed by the under-frequency
be misleading, either causing unexpected operation or
protection will not allow for frequency stabilisation. In this
excessive stability.
case, the chance of system recovery will be enhanced by
disconnecting the load stage based upon a measurement of For this reason, some relays also provide an element for
rate of change of frequency and bypassing the time delay. monitoring the longer term frequency trend, thereby reducing
the effects of non-linearities in the system and providing
Frequency supervised rate of change of frequency protection
increased security to the rate of change of frequency decision.
operates when the frequency is below a set value and the
rate of change of frequency exceeds a set value and usually The average rate of change of frequency element is initiated
includes a define time operate delay. It is often used in when the measured frequency crosses the supervising
conjunction with under-frequency protection in load shedding frequency threshold and a timer is started. As shown in Figure
applications. D4.2, at the end of the set time period ∆t, the frequency
difference ∆F, is evaluated and if this exceeds the setting,
a trip output is given.
Frequency
fn
Supervising frequency
f
f1 True slope for the time ∆t
Slow decay ∆F
f
f2
∆t
Rapid decay
Time Rapid decay
t
Figure D4.1:
Frequency supervised ROCOF protection
Figure D4.2:
Average rate of change of frequency protection

3. Load shedding D4
Automatic under-frequency load shedding may be used in 3.2 Frequency-based theory

extreme conditions to stabilise the balance between generation
In the event of severe system overload or loss of generation
and load after an electrical island has been formed, dropping
conditions, the system frequency will decline exponentially
enough load to allow the frequency to stabilise in the island.
to a new reduced value below the nominal frequency. The
The required amount of load to be shed is usually defined in time constant of the exponential decay as well as the new
grid codes [Ref D4.1: Continental Europe Operational frequency level is governed by certain parameters such as
Handbook Appendix]. For entso-e grid Figure D4.3 applies. the system inertia constant, system damping constant, etc.
The following formula gives the rate of change of frequency
for a particular system contingency.
Load
shedding
amount
Assuming that the standing load and generation remain
50%
45%
constant as the frequency changes, the instantaneous rate
40% of change of frequency at the time of an overload is given
35%
30%
by:
ΔP x fn
Instantaneous rate of change of frequency, df
25% Not
20% needed =-
15%
Minimum
dt 2H
10% Load shedding
Where:
5% recommended
∆P = overload in per unit
49.4 49.2 48.8 48.6 48.4 48.2 47.8 47.6 47.4 Frequency
(Hz) Connected load - Available generation
=
Available generation
Figure D4.3:
Recommended load shedding according to entso-e
fn = nominal system frequency (in Hz)
H = combined inertia constant of the power system
(MWsec/MVA)
Automatic undervoltage load shedding responds directly to
voltage conditions in a local area. Load is shed in stages to  H 1 MVA 1 + ... + H n MVA n 
restore reactive power relative to demand in order to contain =  
a voltage collapse problem.  MVA 1 + ... + MVA n 
Load shedding could be initiated in situations where two where n subscripts 1, 2, ..., n refer to individual generating
transformers are normally connected in parallel, but one is lost units
due to a fault. Here the transformer protection or supervision
The inertia constant H used in the formula above is essentially
device can detect a transformer overload condition and initiate
a measure of the kinetic energy in a generator rotor. For some
an Overload Alarm which then results in load shedding.
types of large steam generator sets, the inertia constant can
3.1 Frequency-based be as high as 10, however, a value below 5 is more typical
especially when considering other types of generator. Lower
Frequency-based load shedding is usually applied as a
values tend to dominate with smaller rotor masses e.g. wind
number of stages or levels where each level corresponds to
turbines, and can make the power system more prone to
a frequency value below nominal and is associated with a
serious frequency disturbances for sudden load changes.
certain value of load. The levels are organised into a series
Typically, values between 2 and 5 may be used as defaults
of descending frequency steps. Usually, the loads which are
if no other knowledge is available.
shed are prioritised, such that non-essential loads will be
shed first. The loads associated with loadshed levels can be Real loads, particularly motor loads, do vary with frequency
modified by the user to take account of factors such as night and have a tendency to decrease as frequency reduces. This
or day or summer or winter or tariff-based peak lopping. will have some beneficial effect on system stability and will
reduce the effects of the overload condition. Taking this load
Several protection functions may be associated with each
reduction factor into account, the frequency deviation from
loadshed level, such as time delayed underfrequency
nominal is given by:
protection and frequency supervised rate of change protection. ΔP x fn  - td 

1-e  2H 

The actual suite of protections used will depend on analysis Frequency deviation from nominal, Δf =
of the given network to be protected to ensure that damage
d  
where:
does not occur to generation and load. Also, if there is
embedded generation associated with the load, it is d = load reduction (or damping) factor
recommended that active power protection is used to take = Percentage change in load
account of the direction of flow of active power, since the
embedded generation will be supporting the overall generation.
Percentage change in frequency

D4 3. Load shedding
The above equations are a result of vast simplifications. The Loadshed levels correspond to voltage levels below nominal,
actual frequency change will be influenced by governor droop prioritised in a set of descending steps.
characteristics, load dynamics, interconnections between
Where there is embedded generation associated with the
various generators, system stabilisers etc. However, the
load, it is recommended that reactive power protection is
frequency deviations calculated in the formulae described
used to take account of the direction of flow of reactive power
may be a good measure of the rate of change of frequency
since the embedded generation will be supporting the overall
for the purpose of setting the relay.
generation.
3.3 Active power dependent
3.5 Fast load shedding
Due to the increasing distributed generation in distribution
Most power systems run on an N-1 basis for the majority of
networks, see Chapter [C8: Generator and Generator-Transformer
the network to ensure the loss of any plant will not affect the
Protection, Section 20], it is necessary to distinguish between
generation/load balance. This rule can be ignored if the loss
pure load feeders and feeders with generation (and loads)
of plant will have no impact on the system stability, for example,
connected. It is advantageous not to disconnect feeders with
where the plant is only a few percent of the total system. N-1
active power feed to the electrical network in case of
may still be employed for small plant but this is done for
underfrequency events.
reliability rather than stability.
By evaluating the direction of active power flow the blocking
There are, however, situations where the system is run without
area of UFLS is determined (Figure D4.4).
N-1 for major items of plant. This allows a greater utilisation
of assets but means that the loss of generation, lines or load
could cause a system blackout. In this situation a fast load
Q / Snom shedding (FLS) or special protection scheme is employed.
HV MV 1.0 These schemes rebalance the system before the critical
P P
clearance time is exceeded, ensuring the system remains
G
stable.
Q Q
0.5
A FLS scheme constantly monitors the generation/load balance
Block UFLS
and, considering the system topology, continuously determines
what balancing action would be required for any loss of plant.
-1.0 -0.5 0.5 1.0 A typical critical clearance time for such a system would be
P / Snom
a few hundred milliseconds. Since this includes breaker
operating time and, in the worst case CB fail operating time,
-0.5
P P the FLS operating time is typically less than 100 ms and
G sometimes less than 50 ms. The majority of this time is taken
Q Q transferring the trip information to remote plant.
-1.0
Considering acquisition and processing times it is not possible
to collect and process this data in real time and respond
Figure D4.4: within the required time to a loss of plant. Instead FLS schemes
Blocking area for UFLS in the generator reference arrow consider the current generation, load, spinning reserve and
system (GRAS) system topology and pre-determine the required trip response
to any loss. This is typically refreshed every few seconds. The
response needs to consider priorities of different loads when
For equal treatment of all customers connected to an electrical load shedding. Since there is very little commonality between
grid using underfrequency load shedding, the relay should such applications the FLS is usually custom engineered.
be able to switch between the predefined frequency levels These schemes can become very complex with thousands
on request. This can be done locally (e.g. binary inputs, of loads, user prioritising and operational restrictions
function keys) or by communication protocols. complicating the solutions. Therefore they are only applied
when N-1 is prohibitively expensive.
3.4 Undervoltage-based
A typical FLS has the following components:
Some load shedding schemes are based on undervoltage
protection, for instance, in applications where there are small Acquisition
air conditioning motor loads which are susceptible to stalling
The system needs to know the system power flow and
when subjected to voltage dips. Motor loads are essentially
sometimes the reactive power flow as well as equipment
constant kVA devices, which means that a voltage dip causes
status. There is a trade-off between data volume and usability.
a corresponding increase in current which increases the need
For example acquiring the power from the substation incomer
for local reactive power support.

3. Load shedding D4
allows less data to be used but limits all feeders within that Tripping
substation to the same priority. Accessing data from further
A network must be provided to convert the trip information
into the system will be more costly since either more acquisition
provided by the FLS computer to the breakers required to
units will be needed or data accessed from more IEDs. These
trip. This network may consist of fibre optics, microwave, radio
IEDs may not have the same communications protocols
or PLC to transmit this information to remote sites. To meet
requiring more integration engineering. Once the acquisition
the low clearance times a dedicated network is usually
points have been determined the data needs to be sent to
provided which will have a dedicated receiver for each breaker
the main FLS computer. For power flow this transfer needs to
which requires tripping. A balance between cost and flexibility
occur within a few seconds and therefore may travel by a
must be achieved. This is usually done by providing tripping
traditional SCADA network providing it has adequate
for generators individually and loads in groups. The grouping
performance. Alternatively it can travel via a dedicated FLS
of loads reduces the cost of tripping equipment but impacts
network. Loss of generation or load is detected by plant status
on the FLS Computer engineering as it affects priorities.
and therefore this information needs to be transferred very
quickly which is usually done via a dedicated FLS network. Fast load shedding of specific equipment is required when
it becomes faulty. This can be achieved by the equipment
Computation
providing a status output which is detected by a supervisory
Due to the volume of information that needs consideration, a system to initiate fast load shedding.
centralised computer is normally used to perform the FLS
The main consideration of these schemes is security. Since
calculations. In some applications such as parallel line
their main function is to trip plant, any maloperation could
overrating the operation is fixed and does not require any
lead to false trips, risking system blackouts and negating the
user inputs. Other applications such as isolated oil and gas
value of the system. To improve system security critical parts
networks may require operator inputs to adjust load shed
of the FLS are often measured independently (such as breaker
priorities. In these cases the centralised computer will need
status) to avoid reliance on existing plant and ensure secure
to either provide a dedicated HMI or interface with the normal
acquisition. The FLS computer is often duplicated and used
SCADA. The role of the centralised computer is to transfer
with 2 of 2 logic. For the tripping equipment high reliability
the power and plant status information into trip commands.
equipment with added message security is also used. These
These trip commands can take the form of contact outputs
measures obviously increase the cost of FLS schemes.
or communications signals.
4. Load restoration
Following a load shed event, measures should be taken to

reinstate load following system recovery, which may be Frequency
facilitated by providing additional generation. Dependent
upon the severity of the load shed event, an expert team may fnom
be involved with restoration in accordance with an agreed fLR

recovery plan. Recovery is then based on manual (local and
fLS
remote) reconnection and synchronisation of items of plant
in the network.
4.1 Automatic restoration F< S tr
t F< Op
Following a small scale underfrequency-based load shed F< Op
event, typically in an industrial application, it may be acceptable F> S tr

t F> Op
to automatically restore loads. The load shed event will initiate F> Op
a time window during which the system frequency should 200ms
LR Op
recover to a level that restoration can be undertaken, otherwise
Time
restoration is abandoned. The monitoring of the power system
frequency is performed by an overfrequency protection
element, where the restoration delay is given by the set operate
delay (see Figure D4.5). Operation of the protection results Figure D4.5:
in a pulse output used to reconnect the load. Automatic restoration based on overfrequency

D4 4. Load restoration
The restoration function will tolerate short term frequency

excursions below the restoration level, however, longer term
excursions will result in the automatic restoration attempt
being abandoned (see Figure D4.6).
Frequency
fnom
fLR
fLS
t< t F> R s
F< S tr
t F< Op
F< Op
F> S tr
t F> Op
F> Op
200ms
LR Op
Time
Figure D4.6:
Automatic restoration with short term frequency excursion
5. Turbine abnormal
Turbine abnormal frequency protection 81AB is provided to

Frequency
protect the turbine blade from potential damage due to
prolonged under/overfrequency operation of the generator. band 1
Typically there are up to six frequency bands which can be
Normal frequency
programmed, each having an integrating timer to record the fn Time
time spent within the band as shown in Figure D4.7. Each
band 2
frequency band includes a user settable operate time setting
and provides start and operate digital outputs.
band 3
It is recommended that this protection is in service when the
generator is synchronised to the system or when separated band 4
from the system but supplying auxiliary load.
band 1
band 2
band 3
band 4
Figure D4.7: Band timer profiles

Generator turbine abnormal frequency protection

6. References D4
[D4.1] Continental Europe Operational Handbook Appendix

- Policy 5: Emergency Operations. entso-e, 2010

E1
Type Testing,
Offer Safety and Reliability
Chapter
E1
Type Testing,
Offer Safety and Reliability
1. Introduction 495
2. Functional tests 498
3. Electrical type tests 499
4. Electromagnetic compatibility tests 500
5. Product safety type tests 505
6. Environmental type tests 507
7. Software type tests 509
8. Dynamic validation tests 510
9. Production tests 513

Type Testing, Offer Safety and Reliability
E1 1. Introduction
The testing of protection equipment schemes presents a

number of problems. This is because the main function of
protection equipment is solely concerned with operation under
system fault conditions, and cannot readily be tested under
normal system operating conditions. This situation is aggravated
by the increasing complexity of protection schemes and use
of relays containing software.
The testing of protection equipment may be divided into four
stages:
a. type tests according reference standards
b. routine factory production tests
c. commissioning tests
d. periodic maintenance tests
1.1 Reference standards
Figure E1.1:
Measuring and protection relays must be compliant with the Example of marking on products
standard IEC 60255-1. This is the standard of reference for
protection relays, which cover, through different chapters,
common requirements of use (i.e. rated values, burden, The standards that cover most aspects of relay performance
accuracy, etc.), environmental requirements (mechanical, are IEC 60255 and ANSI C37.90. However, compliance may
climatic), electro-magnetic compatibility and protection also involve consideration of the requirements of IEC 61000,
functional requirements. Some definitions and tests are 60068 and 60529, while products intended for use in the EEC
described in more detail in specific chapters. It is particularly also have to comply with the requirements of Directives
the case for functional tests (IEC 60255-1xx), for product 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC. Since type testing of a digital
safety (IEC 60255-27), for environmental tests (IEC 60068-2- or numerical relay involves testing of software as well as
xx) and electromagnetic compatibility requirements (IEC hardware, the type testing process is very complicated and
60255-26). For this specific chapter, the different levels of more involved than a static or electromechanical relay.
immunity are in conformity with the standard IEC 61000-6-5 1.3 Routine factory production tests
which describes the immunity for power station and substation
environments including protection relays. These are conducted to prove that relays are free from defects
during manufacture. Testing will take place at several stages
Local requirements or specific application requirements and during manufacture, to ensure problems are discovered at the
recommendation can be specified for the product, for example: earliest possible time and hence minimise remedial work. The
IACS – Specific recommendations for marine, extent of testing will be determined by the complexity of the
ATEX for explosive environments, relay and past manufacturing experience.
ANSI/IEEE standards and particularly IEEE C37.90.1, IEEE 1.4 Commissioning tests
C37.90.2, IEEE C37.90.3 for North America,
GOST for Russia, ENA for UK, CEI 016, for Italy, etc. These tests are designed to prove that a particular protection
scheme has been installed correctly prior to setting to work.
Some specific logos are applied on the products as a proof of All aspects of the scheme are thoroughly checked, from
compliance to some directives and recommendations. Examples installation of the correct equipment through wiring checks
include ATEX for explosive atmospheres, CE for European and operation checks of the individual items of equipment,
directives, cUL or UL marking for North American market, finishing with testing of the complete scheme.
GOST for Russia, EAC for Eurasian conformity, see Figure E1.1.
1.5 Periodic maintenance checks
1.2 Type tests
These are required to identify equipment failures and
Type tests are required to prove that a relay meets the published degradation in service, so that corrective action can be taken.
specification and complies with all relevant standards. Since Because a protection scheme only operates under fault
the principal function of a protection relay is to operate correctly conditions, defects may not be revealed for a significant period
under abnormal power conditions, it is essential that of time, until a fault occurs. Regular testing assists in detecting
the performance be assessed under such conditions. faults that would otherwise remain undetected until a fault
Comprehensive type tests simulating the operational conditions occurs.
are therefore conducted at the manufacturer’s works during
the development and certification of the equipment.

1. Introduction E1
1.6 Type test reports d. an unambiguous identification of the equipment: model

reference at least
The type test reports are considered as a part of the
documentation of the digital and numerical protection relays. e. the date(s) of performance of the test
They give proof that the device is compliant with its specification
f. a statement of what tests are performed and to what
as it is claimed in it documentation according the IEC 60255-1
international standards, including the dates
standard. They can be provided to the customer on request.
A test report can contain the results according to one standard g. the acceptance criteria used
or several standards.
h. the tools and instrumentation used
According the IEC 60255-1 standard, type testing a product
i. the test conditions and method
which is part of a product family shall be considered sufficient
to cover the entire product family provided a documented risk j. the test results and, when relevant, a statement to the
assessment is carried out to determine which type tests are effect that the results relate only to the equipment tested
valid and which tests need to be repeated on the rest of the and possibly a product family
product family. k. the test conclusion (pass/fail) and when appropriate
All tests can be in one or several tests reports at the convenience and needed, opinions and interpretations from laboratory
of the manufacturer. Regarding the evolution of the products, experts
some tests can be done at different periods, and some of them 1.7 Accredited laboratories
not performed. It depends on the impact of the evolution of
the product. For example, there is no need to re-perform some To give confidence to the customer, the type test report can
mechanical tests if the evolution is only on some electronic be issued by an accredited laboratory to be sure the test has
components. Some tests reports can be several years old and been performed according the standard.
some of them very recent. 1.7.1 Accreditation
The test report report collection should include the following The accreditation of a laboratory is delivered according to ISO/
results: IEC 17025 standard which guarantees the level of competency
a. product safety requirements (including thermal short time of the laboratory to perform some tests, the independency and
rating) integrity of the laboratory in terms of test results.
b. EMC requirements as well as for emissions and immunity The accreditation defines a list of standards for which the
laboratory has competency and capability to perform the tests.
c. energising quantities including rated burden, voltage dips
and change of auxiliary energising quantity The International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC)
denotes the collaboration of accreditation bodies that registers
d. digital outputs contact performance calibration laboratories, testing laboratories and/or inspection
e. communication requirements (e.g. IEC 61850 certificates, etc.) bodies. Examples of accredited laboratories are shown in
Figure E1.2.
f. climatic environmental requirements (cold, dry heat, change
of temperature, damp heat)
g. mechanical requirements (vibration, shock, bump, seismic)
h. enclosure protection
i. functional requirements (steady-state simulation, dynamic
simulation, etc.)
According to specific applications of the protection relay, some
other test reports can be provided to the customer (e.g. salt
mist, corrosion, etc.)
ACCREDITED
Each test report includes at least the following basic information: Calibration Laboratory
CERT#979.02
a. the name(s), function(s) and signature(s) or equivalent

identification of person(s) authorising the test report
b. the name and address of the laboratory, and the location
where the tests are carried out
c. the name and address of the requester (e.g. a manufacturer
Figure E1.2:
or a customer)
Example of logos of different National Accreditation Services

E1 1. Introduction
The accreditation is delivered by a governmental body which The certification laboratories contribute to the specification
is listed to the ILAC (International Laboratory Accreditation for the test bench and the improvement of the working
Cooperation). An in-house laboratory of a manufacturer or a procedure for IEC 61850 conformance testing execution and
third party laboratory follows exactly the same rules. The approval.
accreditation is regularly reviewed and confirmed by the local
There are two kinds of certification laboratories qualified by
governmental accreditation service.
UCA® International Users Group:
1.7.2 Accredited type test reports
a. a level A laboratory is an independent third-party test centre
To recognise that a test report is (and certified ISO 9001 or ISO/IEC 17025 Quality System
issued from an accredited by local bodies)
laboratory, the logo of a
b. a level B laboratory is a test centre which can subordinate
governmental accreditation body
to IEC 61850 server or client supplier (certified ISO 9001 or
should be clearly readable on the
ISO/IEC 17025 Quality System)
test report. For ILAC registered
ACCREDITED
laboratories the ILAC logo is often The accreditation is delivered by UCA® International Users
Calibration Laboratory
visible on the test report as shown Group for server or client devices. Level A and level B labs
CERT#979.02
in Figure E1.3. use the test procedures published by the UCA® International
Users Group. Their test report must be reviewed by UCA®
The accredited test report is
for acceptance and the IEC 61850 certificate is stamped with
Figure E1.3: archived by the accredited
UCA® International Users Group.
ILAC logo laboratory and cannot be
communicated without the 1.8.2 IEC 61850 certificate and report accredited
authorisation of the test report
IEC 61850 certificate test procedure is published and maintained
requester.
by UCA® International Users Group as shown in Figure E1.5.
1.8 IEC 61850 communication testing When an accredited laboratory completes the certification tests
according to the test procedure strictly without issues, the test
1.8.1 IEC 61850 accreditation and recognition
report and test logs are sent to UCA® International Users
IEC 61850 international standards is dedicated for Group for review. If the UCA® International Users Group accept
communication networks and systems for Power Utilities the test report and test logs, the accredited laboratory can
Automation. The part 10 of IEC 61850 specifies standard issue the certificate with the UCA® International User Group
techniques for testing of conformance of client or server, as stamp. The certificate will be posted in the UCA® International
well as specific measurement techniques to be applied when Users Group website http://www.ucaiug.org/.
declaring performance parameters. The use of these techniques
will enhance the ability of the system integrator to integrate
IEDs easily, operate IEDs correctly, and support the applications
IEC TC57 IEC 61850 Devices and
as intended. The role of the test facilities for conformance Working group Documents documents
testing and certifying the results are beyond the scope of this
part of IEC 61850.
IEC 61850-10 Tailored
The UCA® International Users Test procedures test plan
Group (logo shown in Figure

E1.4) is a corporation consisting Technical Technical
issues procedure
of utility user and supplier changes Test execution
companies that is dedicated to Problems and

status
promoting the integration and UCA lug
Test report Fix defects
Figure E1.4: quality program
UCA® International interoperability of electric/gas/
Usergroup water utility systems through the
use of international standards- IEC 61850
NO YES
Defects?
based technology. It is a User Certificate
Group for IEC 61850 standard.

UCA® International Users Group is the only corporation which
delivers lab accreditation and recognition for conformance Figure E1.5:
Interfaces between IEC working group, UCA Iug and
testing for IED servers, clients and network devices. laboratories

2. Functional tests E1
The functional tests consist of applying the appropriate inputs When a numerical relay with many functions is considered,
to the relay under test and measuring the performance to each of which has to be type-tested, the functional type-testing
determine if it meets the specification. They are usually carried involved is a major issue. In the case of a recent relay
out under controlled environmental conditions. The testing development project, it was calculated that if one person had
may be extensive, even where only a simple relay function is to do all the work, it would take 4 years to write the functional
being tested, as can be realised by considering the simple type-test specifications, 30 years to perform the tests and
overcurrent relay element of Table E1.1. several years to write the test reports that result. Automated
techniques/ equipment are clearly required, and are covered
To determine compliance with the specification, the tests
in Section 7.
listed in Table E1.2 are required to be carried out. This is an
expensive and time consuming task, involving many engineers
and technicians.
Element Range Step size Three phase non-directional pick up and drop
0.05 - 4In (IDMT) 0.01 In Test 1 off accuracy over complete current setting
Is> range for both stages
0.05 - 40In (DT) 0.01 In
Directionality Forward/reverse/non-directional Three phase directional pick up and drop off
Test 2 accuracy over complete RCA setting range in
RCA -95° to + 95° 1° the forward direction, current angle sweep
Characteristic DT/IDMT
Three phase directional pick up and drop off
Definite time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 s Test 3 accuracy over complete RCA setting range in
IEC standard inverse the reverse direction, current angle sweep
IEC very inverse Three phase directional pick up and drop off
IEC IDMT time delay Test 4 accuracy over complete RCA setting range in
IEC extremely inverse
the forward direction, voltage angle sweep
UK long time inverse
Three phase directional pick up and drop off
Time multiplier setting
0.01 - 15 0.01 Test 5 accuracy over complete RCA setting range in
(TMS)
the reverse direction voltage angle sweep
IEEE moderately inverse
Test 6 Three phase polarising voltage threshold test
IEEE very inverse
Accuracy of DT timer over complete setting
IEEE IDMT time delay IEEE extremely inverse Test 7
range
US-CO8 inverse
Accuracy of IDMT curves over claimed
US-CO2 short time inverse Test 8
accuracy range
Time dial (TD) 0.5 - 15 0.1 Test 9 Accuracy of IDMT TMS/TD
IEC reset time (DT only) 0 - 100 s 0.01 s Effect of changing fault current on IDMT
Test 10
IEEE reset time IDMT/DT operating times
IEEE DT reset time 0 - 100 s 0.01 s Minimum pick-up of starts and trips for IDMT
Test 11
IEEE moderately inverse curves
IEEE very inverse Test 12 Accuracy of reset timers
IEEE IDMT reset time IEEE extremely inverse Effect of any blocking signals, opto inputs,
Test 13
US-CO8 inverse VTS, autoreclose
US-CO2 short time inverse Test 14 Voltage polarisation memory
Table E1.1: Table E1.2:

Overcurrent relay element features Overcurrent relay element functional type tests

E1 3. Electrical type tests
Various electrical type tests must be performed, as follows: input circuits and output relays. The auxiliary supply can be
either a.c. or d.c., supplied from a number of sources or safe
3.1 Rating tests
supplies - i.e. batteries, UPSs, generators, etc., all of which
Rating type tests are conducted to ensure that components may be subject to voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage
are used within their specified ratings and that there are no variations. Relays are designed to ensure that operation is
fire or electric shock hazards under a normal load or fault maintained and no damage occurs during a disturbance of
condition of the power system. This is in addition to checking the auxiliary supply.
that the product complies with its technical specification. The
Tests are carried out for both a.c. and d.c. auxiliary supplies
following are amongst the rating type tests conducted on
and include mains variation both above and below the nominal
protection relays, the specified parameters are normally to
rating, supply interruptions derived by open circuit and short
IEC 60255-1.
circuit, supply dips as a percentage of the nominal supply,
3.2 Relay burden repetitive starts. The duration of the interruptions and supply
dips range from 2 ms to 60 s intervals. A short supply
The burdens of the auxiliary supply, optically isolated inputs,
interruption of at least 20 ms whilst the relay is 50% loaded
VTs and CTs are measured to check that the product complies
should not cause any malfunction of the relay.
with its specification. The burden of products with a high
number of input/output circuits is application specific, i.e. it Malfunctions include the operation of output relays and
increases according to the number of optically isolated input watchdog contacts, the reset of microprocessors, alarm or
and output contact ports which are energised under normal trip indication, disturbance recording, acceptance of
power system load conditions. It is usually envisaged that not corrupted data over the communication link and the corruption
more than 50% of such ports will be energised in any of stored data or settings.
application.
For a longer supply interruption, or dip in excess of 20 ms,
3.3 Relay inputs the relay self recovers without the loss of any function, data,
settings or corruption of data. No operator intervention is
Relay inputs are tested over the specified ranges. Inputs
required to restore operation after an interruption or dip in
include those for auxiliary voltage, VT, CT, frequency, optically
the supply. Many relays have a specification that exceeds this
isolated digital inputs and communication circuits.
requirement, tolerating dips of up to 200 ms without operation
3.4 Relay output contacts being affected.
Protection relay output contacts are type tested to ensure In addition to the above, the relay is subjected to a number
that they comply with IEC 60255-27 and ANSI C37.90 of repetitive starts or a sequence of supply interruptions.
standards. Particular withstand and endurance type tests Again the relay is tested to ensure that no damage or data
have to be carried out using d.c., since the normal supply is corruption has occurred during the repetitive tests.
via a station battery.
Specific tests carried out on d.c. auxiliary supplies include
3.5 Auxiliary supplies reverse polarity, a.c. waveform superimposed on the d.c.
Digital and numerical protection relays normally require an supply and the effect of a rising and decaying auxiliary
auxiliary supply to provide power to the on-board voltage. All tests are carried out at various levels of loading
microprocessor circuitry and the interfacing opto-isolated of the relay auxiliary supply.

4. Electromagnetic compatibility tests E1
There are numerous tests that are carried out to determine the It is not a new subject and has been tested for by the military
ability of relays to withstand the electrical environment in which ever since the advent of electronic equipment. EMC can cause
they are installed. The substation environment is a very severe real and serious problems, and does need to be taken into
environment in terms of the electromagnetic interference that account when designing electronic equipment. EMC tests
can arise. There are many sources of interference within a determine the impact on the relay under test of high-frequency
substation, some originating internally, others being conducted electrical disturbances of various kinds. Relays manufactured
along the overhead lines or cables into the substation from or intended for use in the EEC have to comply with EEC Directive
external disturbances. 2004/108/EC in this respect. To achieve this, in addition to
designing for statutory compliance to this Directive, the following
The type and level of those disturbances are defined in the
range of tests are carried out:
standard IEC 61000-6-5 according to the location in the station
(see Figure E1.6). The most common sources are: a. radiated emission
a. switching operations b. conducted emission
c. electrostatic discharge
b. system faults
d. radio-frequency (RF) immunity
c. lightning strikes
e. magnetic field immunity
d. conductor flashover f. d.c. dip and short interruption immunity
e. telecommunication operations e.g. mobile phones, walkie g. a.c. dip and short interruption immunity
talkies etc h. a.c. ripple on d.c. supply
A whole suite of tests are performed to simulate these types i. gradual shut down/start-up for d.c. power supply
of interference, and they fall under the broad umbrella of what j. conducted disturbance induced by radio-frequency
is known as EMC, or Electromagnetic Compatibility tests.
k. fast transients immunity
Broadly speaking, EMC can be defined as: l. surge immunity
‘The ability of equipment to co-exist in the same m. slow and fast damped oscillatory wave
electromagnetic environment’ n. power frequency interference
Control building H
Switchyard area H
Shielding
High-voltage
Shielded area equipment
H
p
Telecom. H
room/building P Relay house/kiosk
(protections, etc.)
l
Remote
l l f
Power
unit
line
carrier
f h
t f h
t
Remote earth Earth network
Type of location for enclosure,

power supply and functional earth ports Type of signal port connections
H Normal location in HV substations - l Local - examples are connections within the control building t Telecommunication - examples are connections
examples are control buildings, relay to power line carrier and remote terminal units
houses or switchyard areas f Field - examples are connections in the switchyard
area and in a relay house/kiosk p Protected, if any - examples are connections inside
P Protected location, if any - example is an a shielded room
area in a control building h HV equipment - examples are connections to circuit
breakers, voltage/current transformers, etc
Figure E1.6:
Example of selection of specifications for apparatus and related connections (IEC 61000-6-5) in power substation

E1 4. Electromagnetic compatibility tests
4.1 d.c. and a.c. voltage dip and short interruption For auxiliary power supplies with a large operating range, the
tests are performed at minimum, maximum, and other voltages
This is a test to determine the maximum length of time that
across this range, to ensure compliance for the complete range.
the relay can withstand an interruption in the auxiliary supply
The interference is applied using a full wave rectifier network,
without de-energising, e.g. switching off, and that when this
connected in parallel with the battery supply. The relay must
time is exceeded and it does transiently switch off, that no
continue to operate without malfunction during the test.
maloperation occurs. It simulates the effect of a loose fuse
in the battery circuit, or a short circuit in the common d.c. 4.3 Gradual shut-down/start-up for a.c. & d.c. power
supply, interrupted by a fuse. Another source of d.c. supply
interruption is if there is a power system fault and the battery
The a.c. voltage change takes place over a short period, and
is supplying both the relay and the circuit breaker trip coils.
may occur due to change of load or stored energy in local
When the battery energises the coils to initiate the circuit
power networks. The primary cause of d.c. voltage variations
breaker trip, the voltage may fall below the required level for
is the discharging and recharging of battery systems; however
operation of the relay and hence a d.c. interrupt occurs. The
they are also created when there are significant changes to
test is specified in IEC 61000-4-29 for d.c. power supply and
the load condition of the d.c. network. The test is specified
IEC 61000-4-11 for a.c. power supply and comprises
in IEC 61000-4-29 for d.c. power supply and IEC 61000-4-11
interruptions of 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200 ms, 500 or 1000
for a.c.
ms. For interruptions lasting up to and including 20 ms. The
relay must not de-energise or maloperate, while for longer 4.4 Slow & fast damped oscillatory wave
interruptions it must not maloperate. The relay is powered
During opening or closing disconnector operations, between
from a battery supply, and both short circuit and open circuit
both contacts of the operated device, a large number of
interruptions are carried out. Each interruption is applied 10
restrikes take place due to the slow speed of the contacts.
times, and for auxiliary power supplies with a large operating
Therefore, disconnector switch operations generate very
range, the tests are performed at minimum, maximum, and
fast transients, which propagate as travelling waves in the
other voltages across this range, to ensure compliance over
busbars of the substation. The electrical length of the shielded
the complete range.
conductors and the length of the open circuit busbars determine
4.2 a.c. ripple on d.c. supply the oscillation frequencies of the transient overvoltages.
It consists of a 100 KHz or 1 MHz decaying sinusoidal
This test (IEC 61000-4-17) determines that the relay is able
waveform for slow damped oscillatory wave and 3 MHz, 10
to operate correctly with a superimposed a.c. voltage on the
MHz, or 30 MHz for fast damped oscillatory wave (see Figure
d.c. supply. This is caused by the station battery being
E1.8). The interference is applied across each independent
charged by the battery charger, and the relevant waveform
circuit (differential mode) and between each independent
is shown in Figure E1.7. It consists of a 12% peak-to-peak
circuit and earth (common mode) via an external coupling
ripple superimposed on the d.c. supply voltage.
and switching network. The product is energised in both
normal (quiescent) and tripped modes for this test, and must
not maloperate when the interference is applied. The test is
specified in IEC 61000-4-18 standard.
60.00
50.00
40.00
Voltage (V)
30.00
20.00
Voltage
10.00 0
Time
0.00
349
436
958
784
1306
1045
697
262
88
523
610
1393
871
175
1219
1132
1
Time (ms)
Figure E1.7: Figure E1.8:

a.c. ripple superimposed on d.c. test Slow damped oscillatory waveform

4.5 Fast transient specification after the test sequence and shall not incur any
permanent damage. The test is specified in IEC 61000-4-5
The fast transient test simulates the HV interference caused
standard.
by disconnector operations in GIS (gas-insulated switchgear)
substations or breakdown of the SF6 (Sulphur Hexafluoride) 4.7 Power frequency interference
insulation between conductors and the earthed enclosure.
This test simulates the type of interference that is caused
This interference can either be inductively coupled onto relay
when there is a power system fault and very high levels of
circuits or can be directly introduced via the CT or VT inputs.
fault current flow in the primary conductors or the earth grid.
It consists of a series of 15 ms duration bursts at 300 ms
This is the common mode disturbance in the range d.c. to
intervals, each burst consisting of a train of 50 ns wide pulses
150 kHz and can be induced onto control and communications
with very fast (5 ns typical) rise times (Figure E1.9), with a
circuits. The international standard used is IEC 61000-4-16.
peak voltage magnitude of 4 kV.
The test voltages shall be applied in common mode to power
supply, control, analogue signals and communication ports.
The relay shall not maloperate during the test, and shall still
Burst period, 300 ms perform its main functions within the claimed tolerance.
V Burst duration (1/15 ms) 4.8 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

This test simulates the type of high voltage interference that
occurs when an operator touches the relay’s front panel after
t being charged to a high potential. This is exactly the same
phenomenon as getting an electric shock when stepping out
of a car or after walking on a synthetic fibre carpet. In this
case the discharge is only ever applied to the front panel of
V 5 ns rise time, 50 ns pulse width
the relay, with the cover both on and off as shown in Figure
E1.10.
Repetition period t
Figure E1.9:
Fast transient waveform
The product is energised in both normal (quiescent) and

tripped modes for this test. It must not maloperate when the
interference is applied in common mode via the integral
coupling network to each circuit in turn, for 60 seconds.
Interference is coupled onto communications circuits, if
required, using an external capacitive coupling clamp. The
test is specified in IEC 61000-4-4 standard.
4.6 Surge immunity
The surge immunity test simulates interference caused by
major power system disturbances such as capacitor bank
switching and lightning strikes on overhead lines within 5 km Figure E1.10:
ESD testing
of the substation. The test waveform has an open circuit
voltage of 4 kV for common mode surges and 2 kV for
differential mode surges. The test waveshape consists on
Two types of discharges are applied, air discharge and
open circuit of a 1.2/50 rise/fall time and a short circuit current
contact discharge. Air discharges are used on surfaces that
of 8/20 rise/fall time. The generator is capable of providing
are normally insulators, and contact discharges are used on
a short circuit test current of up to 2 kA, making this test
surfaces that are normally conducting.
potentially destructive. The surges are applied sequentially
under software control via dedicated coupling networks in
both differential and common modes with the product
energised in its normal (quiescent) state. The product shall
not maloperate during the test, shall still operate within

IEC 61000-4-2 is the relevant standard this test, for which the Radiated emissions measurements are to ensure that the
test parameters are: interference radiated from the equipment is not at a level that
could cause interference to other equipment. This test, using
a. cover on: Class 4, 8 kV contact discharge, 15 kV air discharge
equipment as shown in Figure E1.12, is normally carried out
b. cover off: Class 3, 6 kV contact discharge, 8 kV air discharge on an Open Area Test Site (OATS) where there are no reflecting
structures or sources of radiation, and therefore the
In both cases above, all the lower test levels are also tested.
measurements obtained are a true indication of the emission
The discharge current waveform is shown in Figure E1.11.
spectrum of the relay. An example of a plot obtained during
conducted emissions tests is shown in Figure E1.13.
100
90
Current, % of Peak
80 Rise Time = 0.7 to 1.0 ns

70 Current specified for 30 ns and 60 ns
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Time, ns
Figure E1.11:
ESD current waveform
The test is performed with single discharges repeated on Figure E1.12:

each test point 10 times with positive polarity and 10 times Example of radiated emission test equipment
with negative polarity. The time interval between successive
discharges is greater than 1 second. Tests are carried out at
each level, with the relay in the following modes of operation:
Quasi-peak limits
a. current and voltage applied at 90% of setting (relay not Average limits
tripped) Typical trace
100
b. current and voltage applied at 110% of setting (relay tripped) 90
80
c. main protection and communications functions are tested 70

Emissions Level, dBuV
to determine the effect of the discharge. To pass, the relay 60
50
shall not maloperate, and shall still perform its main functions
40
within the claimed tolerance 30
20
4.9 Conducted and radiated emission
10
These tests arise primarily from the essential protection 0

0.1 1 Frequency, MHz 10 100
requirements of the European Community (EU) directive on
EMC.
Figure E1.13:
These require manufacturers to ensure that any equipment Conducted emissions test plot
to be sold in the countries comprising the European Union
must not interfere with other equipment. To achieve this it is
necessary to measure the emissions from the equipment and When performing these two tests, the relay is in a quiescent
ensure that they are below the specified limits. condition, i.e. not tripped, with currents and voltages applied
at 90% of the setting values. This is because for the majority
Conducted emissions are measured only from the equipment’s of its life, the relay will be in the quiescent state and the
power supply ports and are to ensure that when connected emission of electromagnetic interference when the relay is
to a mains network, the equipment does not inject interference tripped is considered to be of no significance. Tests are
back into the network which could adversely affect the other conducted in accordance with IEC 60255-25 and IEC 61000-
equipment connected to the network. 6-4, and are detailed in Table E1.3.

Radiated tests interference when directed at the front and back of the relay
can enter freely onto the PCBs inside. When performing this
Frequency range Specified limits Test limits
test, the relay is in a quiescent condition, i.e. not tripped, with
30-230 MHz 30dB(µV/m) at 30m 40dB(µV/m) at 30m currents and voltages applied at minimum of the setting
230-1000 MHz 37dB(µV/m) at 30m 47dB(µV/m) at 30m values. However, spot checks are performed at selected
Conducted tests frequencies when the main protection and control functions
of the relay are exercised, to ensure that it will operate as
Frequency range Specified limits Test limits
expected. The test is specified in IEC 61000-4-3 standard.
79dB(µV) 79dB(µV)
0,15 – 0,5 MHz quasi-peak quasi-peak Level for IEC: Class III, 10V/m, 80MHz -2700MHz with 80%
66dB(µV) average 66dB(µV) average of amplitude modulation (AM) at 1kHz
73dB(µV) 73dB(µV) Level for ANSI/IEEE: 20V/m 80MHz - 1000MHz with 80% of
0,5 – 30 MHz quasi-peak quasi-peak
amplitude modulation (AM) at 1kHz
60dB(µV) average 60dB(µV) average
(ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 : equipment built to US standards).
Table E1.3:
4.11 Conducted disturbance induced by RF - immunity
Test criteria for conducted/radiated emission tests
tests
This test is applicable to the immunity against source of
4.10 Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field
disturbance electromagnetic field, coming from intended RF
immunity
transmitters, that may act on the whole length of cables
This tests the immunity of electrical and electronic equipment to connected to installed equipment. with all the cabling taken
radiated electromagnetic energy, and is typically undertaken in a into account. The interference has to be physically introduced
semi-anechoic chamber as shown in Figure E1.14. by conduction, hence the conducted immunity test. When
performing this test, the relay is in a quiescent condition, i.e.
not tripped, with currents and voltages applied at minimum
of the setting values. However, spot checks are performed at
selected frequencies when the main protection and control
functions of the relay are exercised, to ensure that it will
operate as expected. The test is specified in IEC 61000-4-6
standard. Level: Class III, 10 V r.m.s., 150 kHz - 80 MHz
4.12 Magnetic field tests
These tests are designed to ensure that the equipment is
immune to magnetic interference. The three tests, power
frequency, pulsed and damped oscillatory magnetic field,
arise from the fact that for different site conditions the level
and waveshape is altered. An example of the test configuration
is shown in Figure E1.15.
4.12.1 Power frequency magnetic field
These tests simulate the magnetic field that would be
experienced by a device located within close proximity of the
power system. Testing is carried out by subjecting the relay
to a magnetic field generated by two induction coils. The relay
Figure E1.14: is rotated such that in each axis it is subjected to the full
Example of radiated test immunity in semi-anechoic chamber magnetic field strength. IEC 61000-4-8 is the relevant standard,
using a signal level of:
Although the test standards state that all 6 faces of the - Long magnetic field: 30 A/m continuously
equipment should be subjected to the interference, in practice - Short magnetic field: 300 A/m (1 to 3 s)
this is not carried out. Applying interference to the sides and To pass the power frequency test, the relay shall not maloperate,
top and bottom of the relay would have little effect as the and shall still perform its main functions within the claimed
circuitry inside is effectively screened by the earthed metal tolerance. During the application of the short duration test,
case. However, the front and rear of the relay are not completely the main protection function shall be exercised and verified
enclosed by metal and are therefore not at all well screened, that the operating characteristics of the relay are unaffected.
and can be regarded as an EMC hole. Electromagnetic

4.12.2 Pulsed magnetic field

power system during a transient fault condition. According
to IEC 61000-4-9 standard, the equipment is configured as
for the power frequency magnetic field test, and the waveshape
is applied with a level of 300 A/m. The relay shall not mal-
operate, and shall still perform its main functions within the
claimed tolerance during the test.
4.12.3 Damped oscillatory magnetic field
power system during a transient fault condition. IEC 61000-4-
10 standard specifies that the generator for the coil shall
produce an oscillatory waveshape with a frequency of 0.1 MHz
and 1 MHz, to give a signal level in accordance with the level
of 30 A/m.
Figure E1.15:
Example of power frequency/pulse/damped oscillatory
magnetic field test equipment
5. Product safety type tests
A number of tests are carried out to demonstrate that the After a damp heat test the pass criterion is a minimum of 10 MΩ.
product is safe when used for its intended application. The
5.3 Dielectric voltage withstand
essential requirements are that the relay is safe and will not
cause an electric shock or fire hazard under normal conditions Dielectric Voltage Withstand testing is carried out as a routine
and in the presence of a single fault. A number of specific test on every unit prior to dispatch (example see Figure E1.16).
tests to prove this may be carried out, as follows. The purpose of this test is to ensure that the product build is
as intended by design. This is done by verifying the clearance
5.1 Thermal withstand
in air, thus ensuring that the product is safe to operate under
The thermal withstand of VTs, CTs and output contact circuits normal use conditions. The following tests are conducted unless
is determined to ensure compliance with the specified otherwise specified in the product documentation:
continuous and short-term overload conditions. In addition to
a. 2.0 kV r.m.s., 50/60Hz for 1 minute between all terminals and
functional verification, the pass criterion is that there is no
case earth and also between independent circuits, in
detrimental effect on the relay assembly, or circuit components,
accordance with IEC 60255-27. Some communication circuits
when the product is subjected to overload conditions that may
are excluded from this test, or have modified test requirements
be expected in service. Thermal withstand is assessed over a
e.g. those using D-type connectors
time period of 1 s for CTs and 10 s for VTs.
b. 1.5 kV r.m.s., 50/60 Hz for 1 minute across normally open
5.2 Insulation resistance
contacts intended for connection to tripping circuits,
The insulation resistance test is carried out according to IEC in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.90
60255-5, i.e. 500 V d.c. 110%, for a minimum of 5 seconds.
c. 1.0 kV r.m.s., 50/60 Hz for 1 minute across the normally open
This is carried out between all circuits and case earth, between contacts of watchdog or changeover output relays,
all independent circuits and across normally open contacts. in accordance with IEC 60255-27
The acceptance criterion for a product in new condition is a
minimum of 100 MΩ.

5. Product safety type tests E1
apply in the case of circuits using D-type connectors. The test

generator characteristics are as specified in IEC 60255-27 and
are shown in Figure E1.17. No disruptive discharge (i.e. flashover
or puncture) is allowed. If it is necessary to repeat either the
Dielectric Voltage or High Voltage Impulse Withstand tests
these should be carried out at 75% of the specified level, in
accordance with IEC 60255-27, to avoid overstressing insulation
and components.
5.5 Single fault condition assessment
An assessment is made of whether a single fault condition
such as an overload, or an open or short circuit, applied to the
product may cause an electric shock or fire hazard. In the case
of doubt, type testing is carried out to ensure that the product
is safe.
5.6 Earth bonding impedance
Figure E1.16: Class 1 products that rely on a protective earth connection for
Example of set-up of dielectric test with generator
safety are subjected to an earth bonding impedance (EBI) type
test. An example of the test installation is shown in figure E1.18.
The routine dielectric voltage withstand test time may be shorter This ensures that the earth path between the protective earth
than for the 1 minute type test time, to allow a reasonable connection and any accessible earthed part is sufficiently low
production throughput, e.g. for a minimum of 1 second at 110% to avoid damage in the event of a single fault occurring. The
of the voltage specified for 1 minute. test is conducted using a test voltage of 12 V maximum and
a test current of twice the recommended maximum protective
5.4 Insulation withstand for over-voltages fuse rating. After 1 minute with the current flowing in the circuit
The purpose of the High Voltage Impulse Withstand type test under test, the EBI shall not exceed 0.1 Ω.
is to ensure that circuits and their components will withstand
overvoltages on the power system caused by lightning. Three
positive and three negative high voltage impulses, 5 kV peak,
are applied between all circuits and the case earth and also
between the terminals of independent circuits (but not across
normally open contacts). As before, different requirements
Voltage
Figure E 1.18:
Example of earth bonding impedance test done between the
front panel of the protection relay and the metal parts
5kV peak Time

Rise time (10 % to 90 %) = 1.2 s
Duration (50 %) = 50 s 5.7 CE marking
A CE mark on the product, or its packaging, shows that
compliance is claimed against relevant European Community
Figure E1.17: directives e.g. Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/EC and
Generator characteristics for insulation withstand test Electromagnetic.

E1 6. Environmental type tests
Various tests have to be conducted to prove that the relay can 6.2 Humidity test
withstand the effects of the environment in which it is expected
The humidity test is performed to ensure that the product will
to work. They consist on the following tests:
withstand and operate correctly when subjected to 93%
a. temperature relative humidity at a constant temperature of 40°C for 56
days. Tests are performed to ensure that the product functions
c. humidity
correctly within specification after 21 and 56 days. After the
d. enclosure protection test, visual inspections are made for any signs of unacceptable
corrosion and mould growth. The test is specified in IEC
e. mechanical
60068-2-78 standard.
These tests are described in the following sections.
6.3 Cyclic temperature/humidity test
6.1 Temperature test
This is a short-term test (6 days) that stresses the relay by
Temperature tests are performed to ensure that a product can subjecting it to temperature cycling in conjunction with high
withstand extremes in temperatures, both hot and cold, during humidity. The test does not replace the 56 day humidity test,
transit, storage and operating conditions. but is used for testing minor modifications to prove that the
a. Storage and transit conditions are defined as a temperature design is unaffected. The applicable standard is IEC 60068-
range of -25°C to +55°C (special cases -40°C to +70°C) 2-30 and test conditions of:
b. Operating conditions are defined as a temperature range +25°C ± 3°C and at least 95% relative humidity +55°C ± 2°C
of –25°C to +55°C (special cases -40°C to +70°C) and 93% ± 3% relative humidity are used, over the 24 hour
cycle shown in Figure E1.20.
c. Dry heat withstand tests are performed at 70°C for 96 hours
with the relay de-energised For these tests the relay is placed in a humidity cabinet, and
energised with normal in-service quantities for the complete duration
d. Cold withstand tests are performed at –40°C for 96 hours of the tests. In practical terms this usually means energising the
with the relay de-energised relay with currents and voltages such that it is 10% from the
e. Operating range tests are carried out with the product threshold for operation. Throughout the duration of the test the
energised, checking all main functions operate within relay is monitored to ensure that no unwanted operations occur.
tolerance over the specified working temperature range Once the relay is removed from the humidity cabinet, its insulation
–25°C to +55°C (special cases -40°C to +70°C) resistance is measured to ensure that it has not deteriorated to
The test is specified in IEC 60068-2-1 standard. below the claimed level. The relay is then functionally tested again,
and finally dismantled to check for signs of component corrosion
and growth. The acceptance criterion is that no unwanted operations
shall occur including transient operation of indicating devices.
100 96%
Relative humidity %
90 95% 95%
80 90%
70 15min 80%
15min
15min Start of
End of temperature temperature
rise fall
Upper temp. +2°C Time

+55°C
Upper temp. -2°C
Ambient Temperature ∞C
±0.5h +28°C
+25°C
3h 3h +22°C Time
12h 0.5h 6h
24h
Figure E1.19: Figure E1.20:

Climatic chambers Cyclic temperature/humidity test profile

6. Environmental type tests E1
After the test the relay’s insulation resistance should not have during transportation. These tests are performed with the
significantly reduced, and it should perform all of its main protection product de-energised.
and communications functions within the claimed tolerance. The
After these tests, the product must still operate within its specification
relay should also suffer no significant corrosion or growth, and
and show no signs of permanent mechanical damage.
photographs are usually taken of each PCB and the case as a
record of this. Equipment undergoing a seismic type test is shown in Figure
E1.21, while the waveform for the shock/bump test is shown in
6.4 Fast cyclic temperature
Figure E1.22. The test levels for shock and bump tests are:
This test is intended to determine the effect on the product of
a. shock response (energised):
a change of temperature or a succession of changes of
3 pulses, each 10g, 11 ms duration
temperature. The effect of such tests is determined by:
b. shock withstand (de-energised):
a. values of high and low conditioning temperature
3 pulses, 15g, 11 ms duration
b. the rate of change
c. bump (de-energised):
c. the number of cycles 1000 pulses, 10g, 16 ms duration
d. the amount of heat transfer onto or from the product under The test is specified in the standards IEC 60255-21-1, IEC
test 60255-21-2, IEC 60255-21-3.
The test is specified in IEC 60068-2-14 standard.
6.5 Enclosure protection test
Enclosure protection tests prove that the casing system and
connectors on the product protect against the ingress of dust,
moisture, water droplets (striking the case at pre-defined angles)
and other pollutants. An ‘acceptable’ level of dust or water may
penetrate the case during testing, but must not impact the normal
product operation, safety or cause tracking across insulated parts
of connectors. This test is specified in IEC 60529 standard.
6.6 Mechanical tests
Mechanical tests simulate a number of different mechanical
conditions that the product may have to endure during its
lifetime. These fall into two categories:
a. response to disturbances while energised
Figure E1.21:
b. response to disturbances during transportation Example of seismic-vibration test equipment
(de-energised state)
Tests in the first category are concerned with the response to
1.2A
vibration, shock and seismic disturbance. The tests are A
designed to simulate normal in-service conditions for the 0.8A
product, for example earthquakes. These tests are performed Pulse shape (half sine)
in all three axes, with the product energised in its normal +0.2A
0
(quiescent) state. -0.2A
0.4D D D
During the test, all output contacts are continuously monitored
for change using contact follower circuits. Vibration levels of 2.5D 2.5D
1gn, over a 10 Hz-150 Hz frequency sweep are used. Seismic 2.4D = T1
tests use excitation in a single axis, using a test frequency of 6D = T2
35 Hz and peak displacements of 7.5 mm and 3.5 mm in the D - duration of nominal pulse
x and y axes respectively below the crossover frequency and A - peak acceleration of nominal pulse
peak accelerations of 2.0 gn and 1.0 gn in these axes above T1- minimum time for monitoring of pulse when conventional
shock/bump machine is used
the crossover frequency.
T2 - as T1 when a vibration generator is used
The second category consists of vibration endurance, shock
withstand and bump tests. They are designed to simulate the
Figure E1.22:
longer-term affects of shock and vibration that could occur Shock/bump impulse waveform

E1 7. Software type tests
Digital and numerical relays contain software to implement the determining if the outputs from the unit(s) are correct for those
protection, measurement and control-command functions of a inputs. ‘White box’ testing is concerned with testing the internal
relay. This software must be thoroughly tested, to ensure that structure of the unit(s) and measuring the test coverage, i.e.
the relay complies with all specifications and those disturbances how much of the code within the unit(s) has been executed
of various kinds do not result in unexpected results. during the tests. The objective of the unit testing may, for example,
Software is tested in various stages: be to achieve 100% statement coverage, in which every line of
the code is executed at least once, or to execute every possible
a. unit testing
path through the unit(s) at least once.
b. integration testing
7.3 Unit testing environment
c. functional qualification testing
Both Dynamic and Static Unit Testing are performed in the host
The purpose of unit testing is to determine if an individual function
environment rather than the target environment. Dynamic Unit
or procedure implemented using software, or small group of
Testing uses a test harness to provide the environment in which
closely related functions, is free of data, logic, or standards
the unit tests can be executed. The test harness is designed
errors. It is much easier to detect these types of errors in
such that it simulates the interfaces of the unit(s) being tested
individual units or small groups of units than it is in an integrated
- both software-software interfaces and software-hardware
software architecture and/or system. Unit testing is typically
interfaces - using what are known as stubs. The test harness
performed against the software detailed design and by the
provides the test data to those units being tested and outputs
developer of the unit(s).
the test results in a form understandable to a developer. There
Integration testing typically focuses on these interfaces and also are many commercially available testing tools to automate test
issues such as performance, timings and synchronisation that harness production and the execution of tests.
are not applicable in unit testing. Integration testing also focuses
7.4 Software/software integration testing
on ‘Stressing’ the software and related interfaces.
Integration testing is ‘black box’ in nature, i.e. it does not take Software/Software Integration Testing is performed in the host
into account the structure of individual units. It is typically environment. It uses a test harness to simulate inputs and outputs,
performed against the software architectural and detailed design. hardware calls and system calls (e.g. the target environment
The specified software requirements would typically also be operating system).
used as a source for some of the test cases. 7.5 Software/hardware integration testing
Functional qualification testing includes a verification test and a Software/Hardware Integration Testing is performed in the target
validation test. environment, i.e. it uses the actual target hardware, operating
The verification test is to demonstrate the product fulfils its design system, drivers etc. It is usually performed after Software/Software
specification; the test will be performed on prototype or simulation Integration Testing. Testing the interfaces to the hardware is an
devices. important feature of Software/Hardware Integration Testing. Test
cases for Integration Testing are typically based on those defined
The validation test is to demonstrate the product fulfils its
for Validation Testing. However the emphasis should be on finding
requirement for its intended use, when placed into intended
errors and problems. Performing a dry run of the validation
environment (real or simulated).
testing often completes Integration Testing.
7.1 Static unit testing
7.6 Verification testing
Static Unit Testing (or static analysis as it is often called) analyses
the unit(s) source code for complexity, precision tracking, The purpose of verification testing is to verify that the product
initialisation checking, value tracking, strong type checking, fulfils its product specification. It could be done by the software
macro analysis etc. While Static Unit Testing can be performed design engineer or be done by someone independent; it could
manually, it is a laborious and error prone process and is best be opened-box (white-box) or black-box testing. All features of
performed using a proprietary automated static unit analysis the protection relay should be tested, one by one, to check if
tool. It is important to ensure that any such tool is configured they comply with their product specification.
correctly and used consistently during development. 7.7 Validation testing
7.2 Dynamic unit testing The purpose of validation testing is to validate that the product
Dynamic Testing is concerned with the runtime behaviour of the meets the user requirements of the product. It should be done
unit(s) being tested. by someone independent of the software development and
Dynamic unit testing can be sub-divided into ‘black box’ approached as a ‘black box’ testing as a whole. For the protection
testing and ‘white box’ testing. ‘Black box’ testing verifies the relay, no attention should be paid to the software architecture;
implementation of the requirement(s) allocated to the unit(s). attention should be paid to protection output, user interface
It takes no account of the internal structure of the unit(s) being (keypad, display, configuration tools), records and communication
tested. It is only concerned with providing known inputs and signal at the same time if one fault is injected). Validation tests

7. Software type tests E1
not only cover functional tests such as protection, control, 7.9 Software modifications - Regression testing
measurements, recording, data logging and communication,
Regression Testing is not a type test in its’ own right. It is the
but also cover non-functional tests such as performance,
overall name given to the testing performed when an existing
robustness and endurance tests. The validation tests can be
software product is changed. The purpose of Regression Testing
complemented by field tests to evaluate the behaviour of the
is to show that unintended changes to the functionality (i.e. errors
protection relays in a real situation and its intended environment.
and defects) have not been introduced. Each change to an
Each validation test should have predefined evaluation criteria,
existing software product must be considered in its own right.
to be used to decide if the test has passed or failed. The
It is impossible to specify a standard set of regression tests that
evaluation criteria should be explicit with no room for interpretation
can be applied as a ‘catch-all’ for introduced errors and defects.
or ambiguity.
Each change to the software must be analysed to determine
7.8 Traceability of verification and validation tests what risk there might be of unintentional changes to the
functionality being introduced. Those areas of highest risk will
Product offer requirements are provided by marketing to describe
need to be regression tested. The ultimate regression test is to
the intended use of the product and intended environment.
perform the complete Validation Testing programme again,
Product specification requirement are provided by R&D to
updated to take account of the changes made. Regression
describe how the product will be designed to meet the offer
Testing is extremely important. If it is not performed, there is a
requirements. Generally, each documented product specification
high risk of errors being found in the field. Performing it will not
requirement should be covered by at least one verification test
reduce to zero the chance of an error or defect remaining in the
case, and each documented product offer requirement should
software, but it will reduce it. Determining the Regression Testing
be covered by at least one validation test case. But in practice,
that is required is made much easier if there is traceability from
some verification test is very close to validation test, in this case
properly documented software requirements through design
the verification test case could be used as evidence to show
(again properly documented and up to date), coding and testing.
how the offer requirement to be covered. It is important to use
requirements versus test cases matrix to prove this.
8. Dynamic validation tests
There are two possible methods of dynamically proving the and static relays, a radically different approach is required
satisfactory performance of protection relays or schemes; the for dynamic testing of numerical relays.
first method is by actually applying faults on the power system
8.2 Use of microprocessor based simulation equipment
and the second is to carry out comprehensive testing on a
power system simulator. The former method is extremely The complexity of numerical relays, reliant on software for
unlikely to be used; lead times are lengthy and the risk of implementation of the functions included, dictates some kind
damage occurring makes the tests very expensive. It is of automated test equipment. The functions of even a simple
therefore only used on a very limited basis and the faults numerical overcurrent relay (including all auxiliary functions)
applied are restricted in number and type. For these reasons can take several months of automated, 24 hours/day testing
different power system simulators have been developed. They to test completely. If such test equipment was able to apply
can be divided into two types: realistic current and voltage waveforms that closely match
those found on power systems during fault conditions, the
a. those which use analogue models of a power system
equipment can be used either for type testing of individual
b. those which model the power system mathematically using relay designs or for a complete protection scheme designed
digital simulation techniques for a specific application. In recognition of this, a new
generation of power system simulators has been developed,
8.1 Use of power system analogue models
which is capable of providing a far more accurate simulation
For many years, relays have been tested on analogue models of power system conditions than has been possible in the
of power systems such as artificial transmission lines, or test past. The simulator enables relays to be tested under a wide
plant capable of supplying significant amounts of current. range of system conditions, representing the equivalent of
However, these approaches have significant limitations in the many years of site experience. This kind of simulation where
current and voltage waveforms that can be generated, and the relay interacts directly with the simulator is usually called
are not suitable for automated, unattended, testing programs. simulation with Hardware In the Loop (HIL).
While still used on a limited basis for testing electromechanical

E1 8. Dynamic validation tests
8.2.1 Simulation hardware the transient can be simulated using sophisticated power
systems analysis software and the results transferred digitally
Equipment is now available to provide high-speed, highly
to the simulator, or the event recorder recording of the transient
accurate modelling of a section of a power system. The
can be used, in either digital or analogue form, as inputs to
equipment is based on distributed microprocessor-based
the simulator model. Output signal conversion involves circuits
hardware containing software models of the various elements
to eliminate the quantisation steps normally found in
of a power system, and is shown in Figure E1.23.
conventional Digital/Analogue conversion. Analogue models
of the system transducer characteristics can be interposed
between the signal processors and the output amplifiers when
required. This equipment shows many advantages over
traditional test equipment:
a. the power system model is capable of reproducing high
frequency transients such as travelling waves
b. tests involving very long time constants can be carried out
c. it is not affected by the harmonic content, noise and
frequency variations in the a.c. supply
d. it is capable of representing the variation in the current
associated with generator faults and power swings
Figure E1.23:
Digital power system simulator for relay and protection
e. saturation effects in CTs and VTs can be modelled
scheme testing f. a set of test routines can be specified in software and then
left to run unattended (or with only occasional monitoring)
The modules have outputs linked to current and voltage sources to completion, with a detailed record of test results being
that have a similar transient capability and have suitable output available on completion.
levels for direct connection to the inputs of relays – i.e. 1 A / 5 A block schematic of the equipment is shown in Figure E1.24.
A for current and 100V / 110V / 115V / 120V for voltage or It is based on a computer which calculates the digital data
sample values according to IEC 61850-9-2. representing the system voltages and currents. The computer
Inputs are also provided to monitor the response of relays controls conversion of the digital data into analogue signals, and
under test (contact closures for tripping, GOOSE message it monitors and controls the relays being tested.
according to IEC 61850, etc.) and these inputs can be used 8.2.2 Simulation software
as part of the model of the power system. The software is also
capable of modelling the dynamic response of CTs and VTs Unlike most traditional software used for power systems analysis,
accurately. When it is desired to check the response of a the software used is suitable to model the fast transient phenomenons
relay or protection scheme to an actual power system transient, that occur in the first few milliseconds after fault inception. Two
IA
IB Linear
D/A CT Current
Equipment under test
interpolation
conversion model amplifier
circuits
IC
VDU
VA
Computer I/O
VB Linear
Keyboard Sub- D/A VT Voltage
interpolation
system conversion model amplifier
circuits
VC
Contact
status
monitor
Storage Key :
CT - Current transformer
VT - Voltage transformer Signalling
VDU- Visual display unit Channel Simulation
Figure E1.24:
Block diagram of microprocessor based automated test system

8. Dynamic validation tests E1
very accurate simulation programs are used, one based on time m. two equipments can be linked together to simulate a system
domain and the other on frequency domain techniques. model with two relaying points
In both programs, single and double circuit transmission lines are The simulator is also used for the production testing of relays, in
represented by fully distributed parameter models. The line which most of the advantages listed above apply. As the tests and
parameters are calculated from R,L,C parameters or from the measurements are made automatically, the quality of testing is also
physical construction of the line (symmetrical, asymmetrical, greatly enhanced. Further, in cases of suspected malfunction of
transposed or non-transposed), taking into account the effect of a relay in the field under known fault conditions, the simulator can
conductor geometry, conductor internal impedance and the earth be used to replicate the power system and fault conditions, and
return path. It also includes, where appropriate, the frequency conduct a detailed investigation into the performance of the relay.
dependence of the line parameters in the frequency domain
Finally, complex protection schemes can be modelled, using both
program. The frequency dependent variable effects are calculated
the physical relays intended for use (Hardware in the Loop) and
using Fast Fourier Transform algorithms and the results are
virtual relays embedded in the software, to check the suitability of
converted to the time domain.
the proposed scheme under a wide variety of conditions.
The fault can be applied at any point in the system and can be
To illustrate this, Figure E1.25 shows a section of a particular power
any combination of phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth, resistive,
system modelled. The waveforms of Figure E1.26 show an example
or non-linear phase to earth arcing faults. For series compensated
of three phase voltages and currents at the secondary of VT and
lines, flashover across a series capacitor following a short circuit
CT for a given fault conditions.
fault can be simulated.
The frequency domain model is not suitable for developing faults
and switching sequences, therefore a power system simulator,
working in the time domain, is employed in such cases. BUS1
1.00000 / 0.00000
BUS3
0.99499 / -5.73896
N1 N2 N3 N7 N8 N9
AC Type
In addition to these two programs, a simulation program based RRL
A
529.0
on lumped resistance and inductance parameters is used. This RRL

B
529.0
C
simulation is used to represent systems with long time constants src RRL
EII=15.195653kV
BUS1
1.00000 / 0.00000
N6 N5 N4
T1 529.0
Tmva = 100.0 MVA
and slow system changes due, for example, to power swings. BRK1A A
13.8
1
230.0
1 A
BRK1B B 2 2 B
8.2.3 Simulator applications BRK1C C 3 3 C
#1 Y Y #2
The simulator is used for checking the accuracy of calibration and BREAKER
performing type tests on a wide range of protection relays during OPERATION
their development. It has the following advantages over traditional

test methods:
a. ‘state of the art’ power system modelling data can be used
Figure E1.25:
to test relays Example of application study of a power system
b. freedom from frequency variations and noise or harmonic
content of the a.c. supply
c. the relay under test does not burden the power system 100
VBURA1 VBURA1 VBURA1
50
simulation
Volts
-50
d. all tests are accurately repeatable -100

IBUR1A IBUR1B IBUR1C
10
e. wide bandwidth signals can be produced 5

Amps
f. a wide range of frequencies can be reproduced -5
-10
g. selected harmonics may be superimposed on the power 100 VBURA2 VBURB2 IBURC2
50
frequency
Volts
-50
h. the use of direct coupled current amplifiers allows time -100

IBUR2A IBUR2B IBUR2C
constants of any length 2
i. capable of simulating slow system changes

Amps
j. reproduces fault currents whose peak amplitude varies -1
0 0.02222 0.04444 0.06667 0.08889 0.11111 0.13333 0.15556 0.17778 0.2
with time
k. transducer models can be included
Figure E1.26:
l. automatic testing removes the likelihood of measurement Example of application study of a power system with display of
and setting errors CT/VT signals

E1 9. Production tests
Production testing of protection relays is becoming far more

demanding as the accuracy and complexity of the products
increase. Electronic power amplifiers are used to supply
accurate voltages and currents of high stability to the relay
under test. The inclusion of a computer in the test system
allows more complex testing to be performed at an
economical cost, with the advantage of speed and
repeatability of tests from one relay to another.
Figure E1.27 shows a technical inspection of components
and incoming electronic boards before product assembly.
Figure E1.28:
Computer controlled testbench
A printout of the test results can also be produced if

required.
Because software is extensively tested at the type-testing
stage, there is normally no need to check the correct
functioning of the software. Checks are limited to determining
that the analogue and digital I/O is functioning correctly.
This is achieved for inputs by applying known voltage and
current inputs to the relay under test and checking that the
software has captured the correct values.
Similarly, digital outputs are exercised by using test software
to actuate each output and checking that the correct output
Figure E1.27: is energised. Provided that appropriate procedures are in
Technical inspection of electronic boards place to ensure that only type-tested software is downloaded,
there is no need to check the correct functioning of the
software in the relay.
Figure E1.28 shows a computer-controlled test bench. The The final step is to download the software appropriate to
hardware is mounted in a special rack. Each unit of the test the relay and store it in the memory of the device.
system is connected to the computer via an interface bus.
Individual test programs for each type of relay are required,
but the interface used is standard for all relay types. Control
of input waveforms and analogue measurements, the
monitoring of output signals and the analysis of test data
are performed by the computer.

E1

E2
Relay Commissioning

Chapter
E2
Relay Commissioning
1. Commissioning tests 517
2. Secondary injection test equipment 520
3. Secondary injection testing 523
4. Primary injection testing 524
5. Testing of protection scheme logic 526
6. Tripping and alarm annunciation tests 526
7. Periodic maintenance tests 527
8. Protection scheme design for maintenance 528
9. References 528
Relay Commissioning
E2 1. Commissioning tests
Installation of a protection scheme at site creates a number of j. primary injection tests on each relay to prove stability for
possibilities for errors in the implementation of the scheme to external faults and to determine the effective current setting
occur. Even if the scheme has been thoroughly tested in the for internal faults (essential for some types of electromechanical
factory, wiring to the CTs and VTs on site may be incorrectly relays)
carried out, or the CTs/VTs may have been incorrectly installed.
k. testing of protection scheme logic
The impact of such errors may range from simply being a
nuisance (tripping occurs repeatedly on energisation, requiring This section details the tests required to cover items (a)–(f)
investigation to locate and correct the error(s)) through to failure above.
to trip under fault conditions, leading to major equipment
Section 2 covers secondary injection test equipment
damage, disruption to supplies and potential hazards to
personnel. The strategies available to remove these risks are Section 3 details the secondary injection testing that may be
many, but all involve some kind of testing at site. carried out (i)
Commissioning tests at site are therefore invariably performed Section 4 covers primary injection testing (j)
before protection equipment is set to work. The aims of Section 5 details the checks required on any logic involved
commissioning tests are: in the protection scheme (k)
a. to ensure that the equipment has not been damaged during Section 6 details the tests required on alarm/tripping circuits
transit or installation tripping/alarm circuits (h).
b. to ensure that the installation work has been carried out 1.1 Insulation tests
correctly
All the deliberate earth connections on the wiring to be tested
c. to prove the correct functioning of the protection scheme should first be removed, for example earthing links on current
as a whole transformers, voltage transformers and d.c. supplies. Some
The tests carried out will normally vary according to the insulation testers generate impulses with peak voltages
protection scheme involved, the relay technology used, and exceeding 5kV. In these instances any electronic equipment
the policy of the client. In many cases, the tests actually should be disconnected while the external wiring insulation is
conducted are determined at the time of commissioning by checked.
mutual agreement between the client’s representative and the The insulation resistance should be measured to earth and
commissioning team. Hence, it is not possible to provide a between electrically separate circuits. The readings are
definitive list of tests that are required during commissioning. recorded and compared with subsequent routine tests to check
This section therefore describes the tests commonly carried for any deterioration of the insulation.
out during commissioning.
The insulation resistance measured depends on the amount
The following tests are invariably carried out, since the protection of wiring involved, its grade, and the site humidity. Generally,
scheme will not function correctly if faults exist. if the test is restricted to one cubicle, a reading of several
a. wiring diagram check, using circuit diagrams showing all hundred megohms should be obtained. If long lengths of site
the reference numbers of the interconnecting wiring wiring are involved, the reading could be only a few megohms.
b. general inspection of the equipment, checking all connections, 1.2 Relay self-test procedure
wires on relays terminals, labels on terminal boards, etc. Digital and numerical relays will have a self-test procedure that is
c. insulation resistance measurement of all circuits detailed in the appropriate relay manual. These tests should be
followed to determine if the relay is operating correctly. This will
d. perform relay self-test procedure and external communications
normally involve checking of the relay watchdog circuit, exercising
checks on digital/numerical relays
all digital inputs and outputs and checking that the relay analogue
e. test main current transformers inputs are within calibration by applying a test current or voltage.
For these tests, the relay outputs are normally disconnected from
f. test main voltage transformers
the remainder of the protection scheme, as it is a test carried out
g. check that protection relay alarm/trip settings have been to prove correct relay, rather than scheme, operation.
entered correctly
Unit protection schemes involve relays that need to communicate
h. tripping and alarm circuit checks to prove correct functioning with each other. This leads to additional testing requirements. The
communications path between the relays is tested using suitable
In addition, the following checks may be carried out, depending
equipment to ensure that the path is complete and that the received
on the factors noted earlier.
signal strength is within specification. Numerical relays may be
i. secondary injection test on each relay to prove operation at fitted with loopback test facilities that enable either part of or the
one or more setting values entire communications link to be tested from one end.

Relay Commissioning
1. Commissioning tests E2
After completion of these tests, it is usual to enter the relay

Test plug isolating
settings required. This can be done manually via the relay front current transformers Variable transformer
from relay coils 250V 8A
panel controls, or using a portable PC and suitable software.
A B C
Whichever method is used, a check by a second person that
the correct settings have been used is desirable, and the A
settings recorded. Programmable scheme logic that is required 250V
To relay a.c. supply
is also entered at this stage. P1 coils V
S1
1.3 Current transformer tests
The following tests are normally carried out prior to energisation P2 S2 Step-up transformer
if required
of the main circuits. Main circuit
breaker open
1.3.1 Polarity check
Each current transformer should be individually tested to verify
that the primary and secondary polarity markings are correct; Figure E2.2:
Testing current transformer magnetising curve
see Figure E2.1. The ammeter connected to the secondary of
the current transformer should be a robust moving coil,
permanent magnet, centre-zero type. A low voltage battery is saturation current. This will be in excess of the CT secondary
used, via a single-pole push-button switch, to energise the current rating. As the magnetising current will not be sinusoidal,
primary winding. On closing the push-button, the d.c. ammeter, a moving iron or dynamometer type ammeter should be used.
A, should give a positive flick and on opening, a negative flick.
It is often found that current transformers with secondary ratings
of 1A or less have a knee-point voltage higher than the local
mains supply. In these cases, a step-up interposing transformer
P2 P1
_ must be used to obtain the necessary voltage to check the
S2 S1 +
magnetisation curve.
1.4 Voltage transformer tests
Voltage transformers require testing for polarity and phasing.
1.4.1 Polarity check
_ +
A The voltage transformer polarity can be checked using the
method for CT polarity tests. Care must be taken to connect
the battery supply to the primary winding, with the polarity
ammeter connected to the secondary winding. If the voltage
transformer is of the capacitor type, then the polarity of the
transformer at the bottom of the capacitor stack should be
Figure E2.1:
Current transformer polarity check checked.
1.4.2 Ratio check
1.3.2 Magnetisation curve This check can be carried out when the main circuit is first
Several points should be checked on each current transformer made live. The voltage transformer secondary voltage is
magnetisation curve. This can be done by energising the compared with the secondary voltage shown on the nameplate.
secondary winding from the local mains supply through a 1.4.3 Phasing check
variable auto-transformer while the primary circuit remains
open; see Figure E2.2. The secondary connections for a three-phase voltage
transformer or a bank of three single-phase voltage transformers
The characteristic is measured at suitable intervals of applied must be carefully checked for phasing. With the main circuit
voltage, until the magnetising current is seen to rise very rapidly alive, the phase rotation is checked using a phase rotation
for a small increase in voltage. This indicates the approximate meter connected across the three phases, as shown in Figure
knee-point or saturation flux level of the current transformer. E2.3. Provided an existing proven VT is available on the same
The magnetising current should then be recorded at similar primary system, and that secondary earthing is employed, all
voltage intervals as it is reduced to zero. that is now necessary to prove correct phasing is a voltage
Care must be taken that the test equipment is suitably rated. check between, say, both ‘A’ phase secondary outputs. There
The short-time current rating must be in excess of the CT should be nominally little or no voltage if the phasing is correct.
secondary current rating, to allow for the measurement of the

Relay Commissioning
E2 1. Commissioning tests
However, this test does not detect if the phase sequence is If the three-phase voltage transformer has a broken-delta
correct, but the phases are displaced by 120° from their correct tertiary winding, then a check should be made of the voltage
position, i.e. phase A occupies the position of phase C or across the two connections from the broken delta VN and VL,
phase B in Figure E2.3. This can be checked by removing the as shown in Figure E2.3. With the rated balanced three-phase
fuses from phases B and C for example and measuring the supply voltage applied to the voltage transformer primary
phase-earth voltages on the secondary of the VT. If the phasing windings, the broken-delta voltage should be below 5V with
is correct, only phase A should be healthy, phases B and C the rated burden connected.
should have only a small residual voltage. Correct phasing
1.5 Protection relay setting checks
should be further substantiated when carrying out ‘on load’
tests on any phase-angle sensitive relays, at the relay terminals. At some point during commissioning, the alarm and trip settings
Load current in a known phase CT secondary should be of the relay elements involved will require to be entered and/
compared with the associated phase to neutral VT secondary or checked. Where the complete scheme is engineered and
voltage. The phase angle between them should be measured, supplied by a single contractor, the settings may already have
and should relate to the power factor of the system load. been entered prior to despatch from the factory, and hence
this need not be repeated. The method of entering settings
varies according to the relay technology used. For
A electromechanical and static relays, manual entry of the settings
B for each relay element is required. This method can also be
used for digital/numerical relays. However, the amount of data
C
to be entered is much greater, and therefore it is usual to use
appropriate software, normally supplied by the manufacturer,
for this purpose. The software also makes the essential task of
making a record of the data entered much easier.
Once the data has been entered, it should be checked for
compliance with the recommended settings as calculated from
the protection setting study. Where appropriate software is
used for data entry, the checks can be considered complete
if the data is checked prior to download of the settings to the
relay. Otherwise, a check may be required subsequent to data
V
entry by inspection and recording of the relay settings, or it
may be considered adequate to do this at the time of data
entry. The recorded settings form an essential part of the
commissioning documentation provided to the client.
A B C
Phase rotation
meter
C B
Figure E2.3:
Voltage transformer phasing check

Relay Commissioning
2. Secondary injection test equipment E2
The purpose of secondary injection testing is to prove the

correct operation of the protection scheme that is downstream
from the inputs to the protection relay(s). Secondary injection
tests are always done prior to primary injection tests. This is
because the risks during initial testing to the LV side of the
equipment under test are minimised. The primary (HV) side
of the equipment is disconnected, so that no damage can
occur. These tests and the equipment necessary to perform
them are generally described in the manufacturer’s manuals
for the relays, but brief details are given below for the main
types of protection relays.
2.1 Test blocks/plugs for secondary injection equipment
It is common practice to provide test blocks or test sockets
in the relay circuits so that connections can readily be made
to the test equipment without disturbing wiring. Test plugs of
either multi- finger or single-finger design (for monitoring the
current in one CT secondary circuit) are used to connect test
equipment to the relay under test.
The top and bottom contact of each test plug finger is
separated by an insulating strip, so that the relay circuits can
be completely isolated from the switchgear wiring when the
test plug is inserted. To avoid open-circuiting CT secondary
terminals, it is therefore essential that CT shorting jumper links
are fitted across all appropriate ‘live side’ terminals of the
test plug BEFORE it is inserted. With the test plug inserted in
position, all the test circuitry can now be connected to the
isolated ‘relay side’ test plug terminals. Some test blocks
incorporate the live-side jumper links within the block and Figure E2.4:
these can be set to the ‘closed’ or ‘open’ position as Test block/plugs
appropriate, either manually prior to removing the cover and
inserting the test plug, or automatically upon removal of the 2.2 Secondary injection test sets
cover. Removal of the cover also exposes the colour-coded
face-plate of the block, clearly indicating that the protection The type of the relay to be tested determines the type of
scheme is not in service, and may also disconnect any d.c. equipment used to provide the secondary injection currents
auxiliary supplies used for powering relay tripping outputs. and voltages. Many electromechanical relays have a non-linear
current coil impedance when the relay operates and this can
Withdrawing the test plug immediately restores the connections cause the test current waveform to be distorted if the injection
to the main current transformers and voltage transformers supply voltage is fed directly to the coil. The presence of
and removes the test connections. Replacement of the test harmonics in the current waveform may affect the torque of
block cover then removes the short circuits that had been electromechanical relays and give unreliable test results, so
applied to the main CT secondary circuits. Where several some injection test sets use an adjustable series reactance
relays are used in a protection scheme, one or more test to control the current. This keeps the power dissipation small
blocks may be fitted on the relay panel, enabling the whole and the equipment light and compact.
scheme to be tested, rather than just one relay at a time.
Many test sets are portable and include precision ammeters
Test blocks usually offer facilities for the monitoring and and voltmeters and timing equipment. Test sets may have
secondary injection testing of any power system protection both voltage and current outputs. The former are high voltage,
scheme. The test block may be used either with a multi-fingered low current outputs for use with relay elements that require
test plug to allow isolation and monitoring of all the selected signal inputs from a VT as well as a CT. The current outputs
conductor paths, or with a single finger test plug that allows are high current, low voltage to connect to relay CT inputs.
the currents on individual conductors to be monitored. A test
block and test plugs are illustrated in Figure E2.4. It is important, however, to ensure that the test set current
outputs are true current sources, and hence are not affected
by the load impedance of a relay element current coil. Use
of a test set with a current output that is essentially a voltage

Relay Commissioning
E2 2. Secondary injection test equipment
source can give rise to serious problems when testing as also will the phase angles between the individual voltages
electromechanical relays. Any significant impedance mismatch or currents making up a 3-phase output set. Much greater
between the output of the test set and the relay current coil precision in the setting of the magnitudes and phase angles
during relay operation will give rise to a variation in current is possible, compared to traditional test sets. Digital signals
from that desired and possible error in the test results. The to exercise the internal logic elements of the relays may also
relay operation time may be greater than expected (never be provided. The alarm and trip outputs of the relay are
less than expected) or relay ‘chatter’ may occur. It is quite connected to digital inputs on the PC so that correct operation
common for such errors to only be found much later, after a of the relay, including accuracy of the relay tripping
fault has caused major damage to equipment through failure characteristic, can be monitored and displayed on-screen,
of the primary protection to operate. Failure investigation then saved for inclusion in reports generated later, or printed for
shows that the reason for the primary protection to operate an immediate record to present to the client. Optional features
is an incorrectly set relay, due in turn to use of a test set with may include GPS time synchronising equipment and remote-
a current output consisting of a voltage source when the relay located amplifiers to facilitate testing of unit protection
was last tested. Figure E2.5 shows typical waveforms resulting schemes, and digital I/O for exercising the programmable
from use of test set current output that is a voltage source scheme logic of relays.
– the distorted relay coil current waveform gives rise to an
The software for test sets is capable of testing the functionality
extended operation time compared to the expected value.
of a wide variety of relays, and conducting a set of tests
automatically. Such sets ease the task of the commissioning
engineer. The software will normally offer options for testing,
V relay/source
ranging from a test carried out at a particular point on the
characteristic to complete determination of the tripping
characteristic automatically. This feature can be helpful if
there is any reason to doubt that the relay is operating correctly
Saturation level of
magnetic circuit with the tripping characteristic specified. Figure E2.6 illustrates
(current) limited
Time
only by D.C. a PC-based test set.
resistance of
relay coil
Relay with saturation

of CDG magnetic circuit
(phase shift from CDG
inductive load shown).
a) Relay current coil waveform distorted due to use of voltage source
Sinusoidal CURRENT when changing impedance of relay

is swamped out by high source impedance
Time
Typical VOLTAGE waveform

appearing across relay
current coils with sinusoidal I
above the relay setting (10 x shown).
b) Relay current coil waveform distorted due to use of a current source
Figure E2.5:
Relay current coil waveforms
Test sets are computer based and comprise a PC (usually a

standard laptop PC with suitable software) and a power
amplifier that takes the low level outputs from the PC and
amplifies them into voltage and current signals suitable for
application to the VT and CT inputs of the relay. The phase Figure E2.6:
angle between voltage and current outputs will be adjustable, PC-based secondary injection test set

Relay Commissioning
2. Secondary injection test equipment E2
Traditional test sets use an arrangement of adjustable used. Figure E2.7 shows the circuit diagram of a traditional
transformers and reactors to provide control of current and test set suitable for overcurrent relay resting, while Figure
voltage without incurring high power dissipation. Some relays E2.8 shows the circuit diagram for a test set for directional/
require adjustment of the phase between the injected voltages distance relays. Timers are included so that the response
and currents, and so phase shifting transformers may be time of the relay can be measured.
A
Coarse Range
control adjusting CT
reactor
K2 K1 I
Fine control I> Relay

250V variable
a.c. coil
supply transformer
Start Stop
timer timer
Injection Relay short-circuiting

Backing Medium transformer switch
transformer control
10% control reactor
Relay current, I = Ammeter reading (A) K1 x K2
Figure E2.7:
Circuit diagram of traditional test set for overcurrent relays
Supply switch
A
B 440V
C 3 phase
N 4 wire supply
Variable Choke
transformer
for current
control Relay
I> current element
Range
adjusting CT
A PA
Relay
PA V I>
440/110V voltage element
phase
shifting Variable transformer for current control
transformer
To other voltage V Voltmeter
elements A Ammeter
of relay PA Phase angle
under test meter
(if required)
Figure E2.8:
Circuit diagram for traditional test set for directional / distance relays

Relay Commissioning
E2 3. Secondary injection testing
The purpose of secondary injection testing is to check that

Fault A-N
the protection scheme from the relay input terminals onwards X( )
is functioning correctly with the settings specified. This is 22.5
achieved by applying suitable inputs from a test set to the 20.0
inputs of the relays and checking if the appropriate alarm/ 17.5
trip signals occur at the relay/control room/CB locations. The 15.0
extent of testing will be largely determined by the client 12.5
10.0
specification and relay technology used, and may range from
7.5
a simple check of the relay characteristic at a single point to
5.0
a complete verification of the tripping characteristics of the
2.5
scheme, including the response to transient waveforms and
0.0
harmonics and checking of relay bias characteristics. This
-2.5
may be important when the protection scheme includes -5.0
transformers or generators. -7.5
-10.0
The testing should include any scheme logic. If the logic is
-15.0 -10.0 -5.0 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 R( )
implemented using the programmable scheme logic facilities
available with most digital or numerical relays, appropriate
digital inputs may need to be applied and outputs monitored Figure E2.9:
(see Section 13). It is clear that a test set can facilitate such Distance relay zone checking using search technique and
tests, leading to a reduced time required for testing. tolerance bands
3.1 Schemes using digital or numerical relay technology

The policy for secondary injection testing varies widely. In X
some cases, manufacturers recommend, and clients accept,
that if a digital or numerical relay passes its’ self-test, it can
Zn
be relied upon to operate at the settings used and that testing
can therefore be confined to those parts of the scheme
external to the relay. In such cases, secondary injection testing
ZM *
is not required at all. More often, it is required that one element
*
of each relay (usually the simplest) is exercised, using a
R
secondary injection test set, to check that relay operation
occurs at the conditions expected, based on the setting of
PSB-Zone
the relay element concerned.
Another alternative is for the complete functionality of each
relay to be exercised. This is rarely required with a digital or
Figure E2.10
numerical relay, probably only being carried out in the event Testing of power swing blocking element – discrete points
of a suspected relay malfunction.
To illustrate the results that can be obtained, Figure E2.9
shows the results obtained by a test set when determining
the reach settings of a distance relay using a search technique.
Another example is the testing of the power swing blocking
element of a distance relay. Figure E2.10 illustrates such a
test, based on using discrete impedance points.
This kind of test may not be adequate in all cases, and test
equipment may have the ability to generate the waveforms
simulating a power swing and apply them to the relay (Figure
E2.11).
3.2 Schemes using electromechanical / static relay
technology
Schemes using single function electromechanical or static
relays will usually require each relay to be exercised. Thus a
scheme with distance and back-up overcurrent elements will Figure E2.11:
require a test on each of these functions, thereby taking up Simulated power swing waveform

Relay Commissioning
3. Secondary injection testing E2
more time than if a digital or numerical relay is used. Similarly, 3.3 Test circuits for secondary injection testing
it may be important to check the relay characteristic over a
The test circuits used will depend on the type of relay and
range of input currents to confirm parameters for an overcurrent
test set being used. Unless the test circuits are simple and
relay such as:
obvious, the relay commissioning manual will give details of
a. the minimum current that gives operation at each current the circuits to be used. Commonly used test circuits can also
setting be found in reference [Ref E2.1: Protection Relay Application
Guide, Chapter 23]. When using the circuits in this reference,
b. the maximum current at which resetting takes place
suitable simplifications can easily be made if digital or
c. the operating time at suitable values of current numerical relays are being tested, to allow for their built-in
measurement capabilities – external ammeters and voltmeters
d. the time/current curve at two or three points with the time
may not be required.
multiplier setting TMS at 1
All results should be carefully noted and filed for record
e. the resetting time at zero current with the TMS at 1
purposes. Departures from the expected results must be
Similar considerations apply to distance and unit protection thoroughly investigated and the cause determined. After
relays of these technologies. rectification of errors, all tests whose results may have been
affected (even those that may have given correct results)
should be repeated to ensure that the protection scheme has
been implemented according to specification.
4. Primary injection testing
This type of test involves the entire circuit; current transformer scheme having been proven satisfactory from the secondary
primary and secondary windings, relay coils, trip and alarm injection tests.
circuits, and all intervening wiring are checked. There is no
4.1 Test facilities
need to disturb wiring, which obviates the hazard of open-
circuiting current transformers, and there is generally no need An alternator is the most useful source of power for providing
for any switching in the current transformer or relay circuits. the heavy current necessary for primary injection. Unfortunately,
The drawback of such tests is that they are time consuming it is rarely available, since it requires not only a spare alternator,
and expensive to organise. Increasingly, reliance is placed but also spare busbars capable of being connected to the
on all wiring and installation diagrams being correct and the alternator and circuit under test. Therefore, primary injection
installation being carried out as per drawings, and secondary is usually carried out by means of a portable injection
injection testing being completed satisfactorily. Under these transformer (Figure E2.12), arranged to operate from the local
circumstances, the primary injection tests may be omitted. mains supply and having several low voltage, heavy current
However, wiring errors between VTs/CTs and relays, or windings.
incorrect polarity of VTs/CTs may not then be discovered until
These can be connected in series or parallel according to
either spurious tripping occurs in service, or more seriously,
the current required and the resistance of the primary circuit.
failure to trip on a fault. This hazard is much reduced where
Outputs of 10V and 1000A can be obtained. Modern PC-
digital/numerical relays are used, since the current and voltage
controlled test sets have power amplifiers capable of injecting
measurement/display facilities that exist in such relays enable
currents up to about 200A for a single unit, with higher current
checking of relay input values against those from other proven
ratings being possible by using multiple units in parallel.
sources. Many connection/wiring errors can be found in this
way, and by isolating temporarily the relay trip outputs, If the main current transformers are fitted with test windings,
unwanted trips can be avoided. these can be used for primary injection instead of the primary
winding. The current required for primary injection is then
Primary injection testing is, however, the only way to prove
greatly reduced and can usually be obtained using secondary
correct installation and operation of the whole of a protection
injection test equipment. Unfortunately, test windings are not
scheme. As noted in the previous section, primary injection
often provided, because of space limitations in the main
tests are always carried out after secondary injection tests,
current transformer housings or the cost of the windings.
to ensure that problems are limited to the VTs and CTs involved,
plus associated wiring, all other equipment in the protection

Relay Commissioning
E2 4. Primary injection testing
4.3 CT polarity check

If the equipment includes directional, differential or earth fault
relays, the polarity of the main current transformers must be
A
checked. It is not necessary to conduct the test if only
250V a.c. overcurrent relays are used.
supply
The circuit for checking the polarity with a single-phase test
set is shown in Figure E2.14.
Variable transformer Injection transformer Temporary

40A 250/10 + 10 + 10 + 10V three-phase
10kVA short circuit
A
Figure E2.12: 250V a.c. Primary
Traditional primary injection test set supply injection
test set B
4.2 CT ratio check Relay

C
Current is passed through the primary conductors and
measured on the test set ammeter, A1 in Figure E2.13. The
A
secondary current is measured on the ammeter A2 or relay
display, and the ratio of the value on A1 to that on A2 should
closely approximate to the ratio marked on the current
transformer nameplate. Figure E2.14:
Polarity check on main current transformers
A B C Test plug A short circuit is placed across the phases of the primary
insulation circuit on one side of the current transformers while single-
phase injection is carried out on the other side. The ammeter
connected in the residual circuit, or relay display, will give a
Temporary reading of a few milliamperes with rated current injected if
short
circuit
the current transformers are of correct polarity. A reading
proportional to twice the primary current will be obtained if
Optional ammeter
they are of wrong polarity. Because of this, a high-range
ammeter should be used initially, for example one giving full-
P1 Relay scale deflection for twice the rated secondary current. If an
S1 electromechanical earth-fault relay with a low setting is also
connected in the residual circuit, it is advisable to temporarily
short-circuit its operating coil during the test, to prevent
possible overheating. The single-phase injection should be
S2 carried out for each pair of phases.
P2
4.4 Primary injection testing of relay elements
Relay or
test block As with secondary injection testing, the tests to be carried
contact
fingers out will be those specified by the client, and/or those detailed
in the relay commissioning manual. Digital and numerical
relays usually require far fewer tests to prove correct operation,
Primary injection and these may be restricted to observations of current and
test set
voltage on the relay display under normal load conditions.
250V
a.c. supply
Figure E2.13:
Current transformer ratio check

Relay Commissioning
5. Testing of protection scheme logic E2
Protection schemes often involve the use of logic to determine only exception to this may be if the relevant ‘default’ scheme
the conditions under which designated circuit breakers should is used. Such logic schemes will have been proven during
be tripped. Simple examples of such logic can be found in relay type testing, and so there is no need for proving tests
Chapters [C1: Overcurrent Protection for Phase and Earth during commissioning. However, where a customer generates
Faults] and [D1: Auto-Reclosing]. Traditionally, this logic was the scheme logic, it is necessary to ensure that the
implemented by means of discrete relays, separate from the commissioning tests conducted are adequate to prove the
relays used for protection. Such implementations would occur functionality of the scheme in all respects. A specific test
where electromechanical or static relay technology is used. procedure should be prepared, and this procedure should
However, digital and numerical relays normally include include:
programmable logic as part of the software within the relay,
a. checking of the scheme logic specification and diagrams
together with associated digital I/O. This facility (commonly
to ensure that the objectives of the logic are achieved
referred to as Programmable Scheme Logic, or PSL) offers
important advantages to the user, by saving space and b. testing of the logic to ensure that the functionality of the
permitting modifications to the protection scheme logic through scheme is proven
software if the protection scheme requirements change with
c. testing of the logic, as required, to ensure that no output
time. Changes to the logic are carried out using software
occurs for the relevant input signal combinations
hosted on a PC (or similar computer) and downloaded to the
relay. Use of languages defined in IEC 61131, such as ladder The degree of testing of the logic will largely depend on the
logic or Boolean algebra is common for such software, and criticality of the application and complexity of the logic. The
is readily understood by Protection Engineers. Further, there responsibility for ensuring that a suitable test procedure is
are several commonly encountered protection functions that produced for logic schemes other than the ‘default’ one(s)
manufacturers may supply with relays as one or more ‘default’ supplied lies with the specifier of the logic. Relay manufacturers
logic schemes. cannot be expected to take responsibility for the correct
operation of logic schemes that they have not designed and
Because software is used, it is essential to carefully test the
supplied.
logic during commissioning to ensure correct operation. The
6. Tripping and alarm annunciation tests
If primary and/or secondary injection tests are not carried c. the correct flag indications are given
out, the tripping and alarm circuits will not have been checked.
d. there is no maloperation of other apparatus that may be
Even where such checks have been carried out, CB trip coils
connected to the same master trip relay or circuit breaker.
and/or Control Room alarm circuits may have been isolated.
In such cases, it is essential that all of the tripping and alarm Many designs of withdrawable circuit breaker can be operated
circuits are checked. while in the maintenance position, so that substation operation
can continue unaffected except for the circuit controlled by
This is done by closing the protection relay contacts manually
the circuit breaker involved. In other cases, isolators can be
and checking that:
used to avoid the need for busbar de-energisation if the circuit
a. the correct circuit breakers are tripped involved is not ready for energisation.
b. the alarm circuits are energised

Relay Commissioning
E2 7. Periodic maintenance tests
Periodic testing is necessary to ensure that a protection scheme and numerical relays, the in-built self-testing routines can be
continues to provide satisfactory performance for many years expected to reveal and annunciate most faults, but this does
after installation. All equipment is subject to gradual degradation not cover any other components that, together, comprise the
with time, and regular testing is intended to identify the protection scheme. Regular inspection and testing of a
equipment concerned so that remedial action can be taken protection scheme is therefore required. In practice, the
before scheme maloperation occurs. However, due care should frequency of testing may be limited by lack of staff or by the
be taken in this task, otherwise faults may be introduced as a operating conditions on the power system.
direct result of the remedial work.
It is desirable to carry out maintenance on protection equipment
The clearance of a fault on the system is correct only if the at times when the associated power apparatus is out of service.
number of circuit breakers opened is the minimum necessary This is facilitated by co-operation between the maintenance
to remove the fault. A small proportion of faults are incorrectly staff concerned and the network operations control centre.
cleared, the main reasons being: Maintenance tests may sometimes have to be made when the
protected circuit is on load. The particular equipment to be
a. limitations in protection scheme design
tested should be taken out of commission and adequate back-
b. faulty relays up protection provided for the duration of the tests. Such
back-up protection may not be fully discriminative, but should
c. defects in the secondary wiring
be sufficient to clear any fault on the apparatus whose main
d. incorrect connections protection is temporarily out of service.
e. incorrect settings Maintenance is assisted by the displays of measured quantities
f. known application shortcomings accepted as improbable provided on digital and numerical relays. Incorrect display of
occurrences a quantity is a clear indication that something is wrong, either
in the relay itself or the input circuits.
g. pilot wire faults due to previous unrevealed damage to a
pilot cable 7.2 Maintenance tests
h. various other causes, such as switching errors, testing Primary injection tests are normally only conducted out during
errors, and relay operation due to mechanical shock initial commissioning. If scheme maloperation has occurred
and the protection relays involved are suspect, or alterations
The self-checking facilities of numerical relays assist in have been made involving the wiring to the relays from the VTs/
minimising failures due to faulty relays. Defects in secondary CTs, the primary injection tests may have to be repeated.
wiring and incorrect connections are virtually eliminated if
proper commissioning after scheme installation/alteration is Secondary injection tests may be carried out at suitable intervals
carried out. The possibility of incorrect settings is minimised to check relay performance, and, if possible, the relay should
by regular reviews of relay settings. Network fault levels change be allowed to trip the circuit breakers involved. The interval
over time, and hence setting calculations may need to be between tests will depend upon the criticality of the circuit
revised. Switching and testing errors are minimised by adequate involved, the availability of the circuit for testing and the
training of personnel, use of proven software, and well-designed technology of the relays used. Secondary injection testing is
systematic working procedures. All of these can be said to be only necessary on the selected relay setting and the results
within the control of the user. should be checked against those obtained during the initial
commissioning of the equipment.
The remaining three causes are not controllable, while two of
these three are unavoidable – engineering is not science and It is better not to interfere with relay contacts at all unless they
there will always be situations that a protection relay cannot are obviously corroded. The performance of the contacts is
reasonably be expected to cover at an affordable cost. fully checked when the relay is actuated.
7.1 Frequency of inspection and testing Insulation tests should also be carried out on the relay wiring
to earth and between circuits, using a 1000V tester. These tests
Although protection equipment should be in sound condition are necessary to detect any deterioration in the insulation
when first put into service, problems can develop unchecked resistance.
and unrevealed because of its infrequent operation. With digital

Relay Commissioning
8. Protection scheme design for maintenance E2
If the following principles are adhered to as far as possible, f. a single auxiliary switch should not be used for interrupting
the danger of back-feeds is lessened and fault investigation or closing more than one circuit
is made easier:
g. terminations in relay panels require good access, as these
a. test blocks should be used, to enable a test plug to be may have to be altered if extensions are made. Panels
used, and a defective unit to be replaced quickly without are provided with special test facilities, so that no
interrupting service connections need be disturbed during routine testing
b. circuits should be kept as electrically separate as possible, h. junction boxes should be of adequate size and, if outdoors,
and the use of common wires should be avoided, except must be made waterproof
where these are essential to the correct functioning of the
i. all wiring should be ferruled for identification and phase-
circuits
coloured
c. each group of circuits which is electrically separate from
j. electromechanical relays should have high operating and
other circuits should be earthed through an independent
restraint torques and high contact pressures; jewel
earth link
bearings should be shrouded to exclude dust and the
d. where a common voltage transformer or d.c. supply is use of very thin wire for coils and connections should be
used for feeding several circuits, each circuit should be avoided. Dust-tight cases with an efficient breather are
fed through separate links or fuses. Withdrawal of these essential on these types of electromechanical element
should completely isolate the circuit concerned
k. static, digital and numerical relays should have test facilities
e. power supplies to protection schemes should be accessible from the front to assist in fault finding. The relay
segregated from those supplying other equipment and manual should clearly detail the expected results at each
provided with fully discriminative circuit protection test point when healthy
9. References
[E2.1] Protective Relays Application Guide

3rd edition, 1987.

AX1
Terminology

Appendix
AX1
Terminology
The introduction of computer technology means that the

Protection Engineer must now be familiar with a range of
technical terms in this field, in addition to the terms long
associated with Protection and Control. Below is a list of terms
and their meanings that are now commonly encountered in the
Protection and Control field.
A 531 N 540
B 532 O 541
C 532 P 542
D 534 R 543
E 535 S 544
F 536 T 546
G 536 U 546
H 537 V 547
I 537 W 547
K 539 X 547
L 539 Y 547
M 539 Z 547
Terminology
AX
1 A
AC Alternating Current. Anti-pumping A feature incorporated in a Circuit

device Breaker or reclosing scheme to
ACB Air Circuit Breaker.
prevent repeated operation where
Access point Represent a network interface of a the closing impulse lasts longer
physical device connected to one than the sum of the relay and CB
Communication Sub Network. operating times.
Accuracy The accuracy of a transducer is AO Analogue Output.
defined by the limits of intrinsic
AR Auto Reclose: A function associated
error and by the limits of variations.
with CB, implemented to carry out
Accuracy class A number used to indicate the reclosure automatically to try to
accuracy range of a measurement clear a transient fault.
transducer, according to a defined
ARBITER Proprietary protocol for time
standard.
synchronisation from ARBITER
ACSI Abstract Communication Service Systems, Inc. Paso Robles,
interface (acc. Communication California USA.
standards like IEC 61850).
Arcing time The time between instant of
Active power A transducer used for the separation of the CB contacts and
transducer measurement of active electrical the instant of arc extinction.
power.
Auto-transformer A power transformer that does not
ADC Analogue to Digital Converter. provide galvanic isolation between
primary and secondary windings.
A/D conversion The process of converting an
analogue signal into an equivalent AUX Auxiliary.
digital one, involving the use of an
Auxiliary circuit A circuit which is usually energised
analogue to digital converter.
by the auxiliary supply but is
Adjustment The operation intended to bring a sometimes energised by the
transducer into a state of measured quantity.
performance suitable for its use.
Auxiliary relay An all-or-nothing relay energised via
AGC Automatic Gain Control. another relay, for example a measuring
relay, for the purpose of providing
AGR Nuclear Advanced Gas Cooled
higher rated contacts, or introducing a
Reactor.
time delay, or providing multiple
AI Analogue Input. outputs from a single input.
AIS Air Insulated Switchgear. Auxiliary supply An a.c. or d.c. electrical supply
Alarm An alarm is any event (see below) other than the measured quantity
tagged as an alarm during the which is necessary for the correct
configuration phase. operation of the transducer.
All-or-nothing relay An electrical relay which is intended AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator.
to be energised by a quantity,
whose value is either higher than
that at which it picks up or lower
than that at which it drops out.
ANSI American National Standards
Institute (standards).

Terminology
AX
B 1
Back-up protection A protection system intended to Broadcast Communication message from one
supplement the main protection in communication source to all connected partners
case the latter should be in a communication network.
ineffective, or to deal with faults in
Booster transformer A current transformer whose
those parts of the power system
primary winding is in series with the
that are not readily included in the
catenary and secondary winding in
operating zones of the main
the return conductor of a
protection.
classically-fed a.c. overhead
Bay Set of LV, MV, or HV plant and electrified railway. Used at intervals
devices, usually controlled by a bay to ensure that stray traction return
computer. currents, with their potential to
cause interference in nearby
BC Bay Computer: Computer
communication circuits, are
dedicated to the control of one or
minimised.
several bays within a substation.
BT Booster Transformer.
BCD Binary Coded Decimal.
Burden The loading imposed by the circuits
BCP Bay Control Point: A local keypad at
of the relay on the energising
bay level to control the elements of
power source or sources,
a single bay.
expressed as the product of
Biased relay A relay in which the characteristics voltage and current (volt-amperes,
are modified by the introduction of or watts if d.c.) for a given
some quantity other than the condition, which may be either at
actuating quantity, and which is ‘setting’ or at rated current or
usually in opposition to the voltage. The rated output of
actuating quantity. measuring transformers, expressed
in VA, is always at rated current or
Bias current The current used as a bias quantity
voltage and it is important, in
in a biased relay.
assessing the burden imposed by a
BIOS Basic Input/Output System (of a relay, to ensure that the value of
computer or microprocessor). burden at rated current is used.
C Capacitance. CB Circuit Breaker.

CAD Computer Aided Design. CBC Compact Bay Controller: Small
capacity bay computer for Medium
Calibration The set of operations which
Voltage applications.
establish, under specified
conditions, the relationship between CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer.
values indicated by a transducer
CCR Central Control Room.
and the corresponding values of a
quantity realised by a reference CDC Common Data Class (data model
standard. (This should not be element in IEC 61850).
confused with ‘adjustment’, q.v.).

Terminology
AX
1 C
CDM Conceptual Data Modelling is an Client Entity that requests a service from a
activity whose aims are: server in a communication network.
• to define objects and links and Closing impulse time The time during which a closing
naming conventions for their impulse is given to the CB.
identifications
Closing time The time for a CB to close, from the
• to guarantee interoperability time of energisation of the closing
between subsystems circuit to making of the CB contacts.
• to define standard exchange Communication Service to exchange information
formats between system service between two communication
configurator and subsystem partners with well-defined
configurator. procedures and data models.
CET Central European Time. Compliance voltage For current output signals only,
(accuracy limiting the output voltage up to which
Characteristic The angle between the vectors
output voltage) the transducer meets its accuracy
angle representing two of the energising
specification.
quantities applied to a relay and
used for the declaration of the Conjunctive test A test of a protection system
performance of the relay. including all relevant components
and ancillary equipment
Characteristic The curve showing the operating
appropriately interconnected. The
curve value of the characteristic quantity
test may be parametric or specific.
corresponding to various values or
combinations of the energising Control services A set of communication services
quantities. used by a client to act on the
process or on a IED.
Characteristic The maximum value of the System
impedance ratio Impedance Ratio up to which the Conversion The relationship of the value of the
(C.I.R.) relay performance remains within coefficient measurand to the corresponding
the prescribed limits of accuracy. value of the output.
Characteristic A quantity, the value of which Core balance A ring-type Current Transformer in
quantity characterises the operation of the current which all primary conductors are
relay, for example, current for an transformer passed through the aperture of the
overcurrent relay, voltage for a CBCT. Hence the secondary
voltage relay, phase angle for a current is proportional only to any
directional relay, time for an imbalance in current. Used for
independent time delay relay, sensitive earth-fault protection.
impedance for an impedance relay.
Counting relay A relay that counts the number of
Check protection An auxiliary protection system times it is energised and actuates
system intended to prevent tripping due to an output after a desired count has
inadvertent operation of the main been reached.
protection system.
CSV Character (or Comma) Separated
CHP Combined Heat and Power. Values format: A widely used format
for the exchange of data between
CID Configured IED Description (IEC
different software, in which the
61850 engineering file format
individual data items are separated
based on XML/SCL).
by a known character – usually a
Circuit insulation The highest circuit voltage to earth comma.
voltage on which a circuit of a transducer
CT Current Transformer.
may be used and which determines
its voltage test. Current transducer A transducer used for the
measurement of a.c. current.
Class index The number which designates the
accuracy class.

Terminology
AX
C 1
CVT Capacitor Voltage Transformer:

A voltage transformer that uses
capacitors to obtain a voltage
divider effect. Used at EHV
voltages instead of an
electromagnetic VT for size/cost
reasons.
DA Data Attribute (data model element Dependent time A measuring relay for which times
in IEC 61850). measuring relay depend, in a specified manner, on
the value of the characteristic
DAC Digital to Analogue Converter.
quantity.
DAR Delayed Auto-Reclose.
DER Distributed Energy Resource.
DAT Digital Audio Tape.
DFT Discrete Fourier Transformation.
Data model Data structure of an IED used to
DG Distributed Generation.
communicate with other
communication partners. Digital signal A microprocessor optimised in both
processor hardware architecture and software
Data set Ordered group of DO (Data Object)
instruction set for the processing of
and DA (Data Attribute) references.
analogue signals digitally, through
DBMS Data Base Management System. use of the DFT and similar
techniques.
DCF 77 LF transmitter located at
Mainflingen, Germany, Digital signal A technique for the processing of
broadcasting a time signal on a processing digital signals by various filter
77.5 kHz frequency. algorithms to obtain some desired
characteristics in the output. The
DCP Device Control Point: Local keypad
input signal to the processing
on device level to control the
algorithm is usually the digital
switchgear, often combined with
representation of an analogue
local/remote switch.
signal, obtained by A/D conversion.
DCS Distributed Control System.
Directional relay A protection relay in which the
Dead time The time between the fault arc tripping decision is dependent in
(auto- reclose) being extinguished and the CB part upon the direction in which the
contacts re- making. measured quantity is flowing.
De-ionisation time The time required for dispersion of Discrimination The ability of a protection system to
(auto-reclose) ionised air after a fault is cleared so distinguish between power system
that the arc will not re-strike on conditions for which it is intended to
re-energisation. operate and those for which it is not
Delayed An auto-reclosing scheme which intended to operate.
auto-reclose has a time delay in excess of the Distortion factor The ratio of the r.m.s. value of the
minimum required for successful harmonic content to the r.m.s. value
operation. of the non- sinusoidal quantity.

Terminology
AX
1 D
DNP, DNP3 Distributed Network Protocol: A Drop-out A relay drops out when it moves
proprietary communication protocol (or drop-off) from the energised position to the
used on secondary networks un-energised position.
between HMI, substation
Drop-out The ratio of the limiting values of
computers or bay computers and
/pick-up ratio the characteristic quantity at which
protective devices.
the relay resets and operates. This
DO Data Object (data model element in value is sometimes called the
IEC 61850). differential of the relay.
DOL Direct-on-Line. DSP Digital Signal Processor, Digital
Signal Processing.
Direct-on-line A method of motor starting, in
which full line voltage is applied to DT Definite Time.
a stationary motor.
Earth fault A protection system which is Electromechanical An electrical relay in which the
protection system designed to respond only to faults relay designed response is developed by
to earth. the relative movement of
mechanical elements under the
Earthing A three-phase transformer intended
action of a current in the input
transformer essentially to provide a neutral point
circuit.
to a power system for the purpose
of earthing. EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility:
Immunity against electromagnetic
Effective range The range of values of the
interferences.
characteristic quantity or quantities,
or of the energising quantities to Embedded Generation that is connected to a
which the relay will respond and generation distribution system (possibly at
satisfy the requirements concerning LV instead of HV) and hence poses
it, in particular those concerning particular problems in respect of
precision. electrical protection.
Effective setting The ‘setting’ of a protection system E.m.f. Electro-Motive Force (or voltage).
including the effects of current
Energising The electrical quantity, either
transformers. The effective setting
quantity current or voltage, which along or in
can be expressed in terms of
combination with other energising
primary current or secondary
quantities, must be applied to the
current from the current
relay to cause it to function.
transformers and is so designated
as appropriate. EPROM Electrically Programmable Read
Only Memory.
Electrical relay A device designed to produce
sudden predetermined changes in Error The actual value of the output
one or more electrical circuits after (of a transducer) minus the intended value of the
the appearance of certain output, expressed algebraically.
conditions in the electrical circuit or
Ethernet Most used networking technology
circuits controlling it.
for LAN.
NOTE: The term ‘relay’ includes
Event An event is any information
all the ancillary equipment
acquired or produced by the digital
calibrated with the device.
control system.

Terminology
AX
F 1
FACTS Flexible Alternative Current statements of accuracy for

Transmission System. frequency transducers to refer to
‘percent of centre-scale frequency’
FAT Factory Acceptance Test: Validation
and, for phase angle transducers,
procedures witnessed by the
to an error in electrical degrees).
customer at the factory.
FLS Fast Load Shedding.
Fault passage A sensor that detects the passage
indicator of current in excess of a set FN Functional Naming is the reflection
value (i.e. current due to a fault) at of the functional application view
the location of the sensor. Hence, it (like in a substation) in the naming
indicates that the fault lies of the structural elements of an IED
downstream of the sensor. data model in IEC 61850.
FBD Functional Block Diagram: One of FPI Fault Passage Indicator.
the IEC 61131-3 programming
fPN Flexible Product Naming in IEC
languages.
61850 to describe the capability of
FC Functional constraint (data model an IED to allow restructuring of the
element in IEC 61850). device data model.
Fiducial value A clearly specified value to which Frequency A transducer used for the
reference is made in order to transducer measurement of the frequency of
specify the accuracy of a an a.c. electrical quantity.
transducer. (For transducers, the
Full duplex A communications system in
fiducial value is the span, except for
communication which data can travel simultaneously
transducers having a reversible and
in both directions.
symmetrical output, when the
fiducial value may be either the
span or half the span as specified
by the manufacturer. It is still
common practice, however, for
Gateway The Gateway is a computer which Global A system used for locating objects
provides interfaces between the positioning system on Earth precisely, using a system
local computer system and one or of satellites in geostationary orbit in
several SCADA (or RCC) systems. space. Used by some numerical
relays to obtain accurate time
GBit Giga-Bit (transfer rate for data
information.
communication).
GMT Greenwich Mean Time.
GCB GOOSE Control Block (GOOSE =
Generic Object Oriented Substation GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation
Event) used to configure the Event (used for fast data transfer on
subscription of a GOOSE in the low communication layer acc. IEC
IEC61850 communication network. 61850).
GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear (usually GPS Global Positioning System.
SF6).
GTO Gate Turn-off Thyristor.

Terminology
AX
1 H
Half-duplex A communications system in which HRC High Rupturing Capacity

communication data can travel in both directions, (applicable to fuses).
but only in one direction at a time.
HSR a) High Speed Reclosing
High-speed A reclosing scheme where
b) High availability Seamless
reclosing re-closure is carried out without any
Redundancy protocol (see IEC
time delay other than that required
62439-3).
for de-ionisation, etc.
HV High Voltage.
HMI Human Machine Interface: The
means by which a human inputs HVDC High Voltage Direct Current.
data to and receives data from a
computer-based system. Usually
takes the form of a Personal
Computer (PC) (desktop or
portable) with keyboard, screen
and pointing device.
I Current. IED Intelligent Electronic Device:

Equipment containing a
ICCP Term used for IEC 60870-6-603
microprocessor and software used
protocol.
to implement one or more functions
ICD IED Capability Description (IEC in relation to an item of electrical
61850 engineering file format equipment (e.g. a bay controller,
based on XML/SCL). remote SCADA interface/protocol
converter). A microprocessor-
ICT Interposing Current Transformer
based numerical relay is also an
(software implemented).
IED. IED is a generic term used to
I.D.M.T. Inverse Definite Minimum Time. describe any microprocessor-
IEC International Electro Technical based equipment, apart from a
Commission (standards). computer.
IEC 60870-5- Set of conventional communication IEEE Institute of Electrical and

101/103/104 protocols used for automation Electronics Engineers.
sytems named as "Telecontrol IEEE 1588 Also named PTP for Precision Time
equipment and systems: Protocol.
Transmission protocols for the
IEEE 1815 IEEE name for DNP3.
informative interface of protection
equipment" (T101 for network IET IED Configuration Tool (acc. IEC
control level, T103 for substation 61850).
control level, T104 for mapping of
IID Instantiated IED Description (IEC
T101 over Ethernet).
IEC 61850 International standard for the based on XML/SCL).
communication networks and
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor.
systems for power utility
automation.

Terminology
AX
I 1
Independent time A measuring relay, the specified Interoperability Ability of two or more intelligent
measuring relay time for which can be considered electronic devices from the same
as being independent, within vendor, or different vendors, to
specified limits, of the value of the exchange information and to use
characteristic quantity. that information for correct co-
operation.
Influence quantity A quantity which is not the subject
of the measurement but which Intrinsic error An error determined when the
influences the value of the output transducer is under reference
signal for a constant value of the conditions.
measurand.
Inverse time A dependent time delay relay
Input quantity The quantity, or one of the delay relay having an operating time which is
quantities, which constitute the an inverse function of the electrical
signals received by the transducer characteristic quantity.
from the measured system.
Inverse time relay An inverse time relay having an
Instantaneous relay A relay that operates and resets with definite operating time that tends towards a
with no intentional time delay. minimum time minimum value with increasing
(I.D.M.T.) values of the electrical
NOTE: All relays require some
characteristic quantity.
time to operate; it is possible,
within the above definition, to IRIG-B An international standard for time
discuss the operating time synchronisation.
characteristics of an
ISO International Standards
instantaneous relay.
Organisation.
Insulated gate A special design of transistor that is
IP Internet Protocol.
bipolar transistor suitable for handling high voltages
and currents (relative to an ordinary I/O Input/Output.
transistor). Frequently used in static
power control equipment (inverters,
controlled rectifiers, etc) due to the
flexibility of control of the output.
Interchangeability Possibility to replace one intelligent
electronic device by another one,
without additional modifications of
the equipment around it. This
possibility is normally only given
when the same type of IED or
system component from the same
vendor on the same product
platform is used as a replacement.

Terminology
AX
1 K
K-bus Term used for the Courier protocol Knee-point e.m.f. That sinusoidal e.m.f. applied to the
(K-bus courier) on K-Bus interface. secondary terminals of a current
transformer, which, when increased
by 10%, causes the exciting current
to increase by 50%.
L Inductance. LN Logical Node (data model element

in IEC 61850).
LAN Local Area Network.
Local control mode When set for a given control point it
LCD Liquid Crystal Display.
means that the commands can be
LD a) Ladder Diagram. One of the IEC issued from this point.
61131-3 programming languages
Lock-out Prevention of a CB reclosing after
b) Logical Device (data model (auto-reclose) tripping.
element in IEC 61850).
Long-term stability The stability over a period of one
LDC Line Drop Compensator. year.
LED Light Emitting Diode. Low-speed See Delayed Auto-Reclose.
auto-reclose
Limiting value of The upper limit of output current
the output current which cannot, by design, be LV Low Voltage.
exceeded under any conditions.
Main protection The protection system which is Measurand A quantity subjected to

normally expected to operate in measurement.
response to a fault in the protected
Measuring element A unit or module of a transducer
zone.
which converts the measurand, or
Maximum Values of current and voltage part of the measurand, into a
permissible values assigned by the manufacturer corresponding signal.
of the input current which the transducer will withstand
Measuring range That part of the span where the
and voltage indefinitely without damage.
performance complies with the
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker. accuracy requirements.
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker. Measuring relay An electrical relay intended to
switch when its characteristic
Mean-sensing A transducer which actually measures
quantity, under specified conditions
transducer the mean (average) value of the input
and with a specified accuracy,
waveform but which is adjusted to
attains its operating value.
give an output corresponding to the
r.m.s. value of the input when that
input is sinusoidal.

Terminology
AX
M 1
Metering (non-tariff) Values computed depending on the MPSS Mid Point Sectioning Substation (for
values of digital or analogue inputs electrified railways).
during variable periods.
MTA Maximum Torque Angle.
Metering (tariff) Energy values computed from
Multicast Communication message from one
digital and/ or analogue inputs
communication source to a group of selected
during variable periods and
partners in a communication
dedicated to energy measurement
network.
for billing (tariff) purposes.
Multi-element A transducer having two or more
MICS Model Implementation Conformance
transducer measuring elements. The signals
Statement (IEC 61850 engineering
from the individual elements are
file).
combined to produce an output
Mid point A substation located at the signal corresponding to the
sectioning electrical interface of two sections measurand.
substation of electrified railway. It contains
Multi-section A transducer having two or more
(MPSS) provision for the coupling of the
transducer independent measuring circuits for
sections electrically in the event of
one or more functions.
loss of supply to one section.
Multi-shot A reclosing scheme that permits
MMS Manufacturing Messaging
reclosing more than one reclosing operation
Specification (used acc. IEC 61850
of a CB after a fault occurs before
as interface between TCP/IP and
lock-out occurs.
the application layer).
MV Medium Voltage.
ModBus Proprietary communication protocol
used on secondary networks
between HMI, substation
computers or bay computers and
protective devices.
N/C Normally Closed. NPS Negative Phase Sequence.

N/O Normally Open. NS Neutral Section (electrified
railways).
Nominal range A specified range of values which it
of use is intended that an influence Numerical relay A protection relay which utilises a
quantity can assume without the Digital Signal Processor to execute
output signal of the transducer the protection algorithms in
changing by amounts in excess of software.
those specified.
NVD Neutral Voltage Displacement
Notching relay A relay which switches in response (protection).
to a specific number of applied
impulses.

Terminology
AX
1 O
OCB Oil Circuit Breaker. Output common An unwanted alternating voltage

mode interference which exists between each of the
Off-load tap A tap changer that is not designed
voltage output terminals and a reference
changer for operation while the transformer
point.
is supplying load.
Output current The current produced by the
OHL Overhead Line
(of a transducer) transducer which is an analogue
OLTC On Load Tap Changer. function of the measurand.
On load tap A tap changer that can be operated Output load The total effective resistance of the
changer while the transformer is supplying circuits and apparatus connected
load. externally across the output
terminals.
Opening time The time between energisation of a
CB trip coil and the instant of Output power The power available at the
contact parting. (of a transducer) transducer output terminals.
Operating current The current at which a relay will Output series mode An unwanted alternating voltage
(relay) pick up. interference voltage appearing in series between the
output terminals and the load.
Operating time The time between energisation of a
(CB) CB trip coil and arc extinction. Output signal An analogue or digital
representation of the measurand.
Operating time With a relay de-energised and in its
(relay) initial condition, the time which Output span (span) The algebraic difference between
elapses between the application of the lower and upper nominal values
a characteristic quantity and the of the output signal.
instant when the relay operates.
Overcurrent relay A protection relay whose tripping
Operating time The curve depicting the relationship decision is related to the degree by
characteristic between different values of the which the measured current
characteristic quantity applied to a exceeds a set value.
relay and the corresponding values
Overshoot time The overshoot time is the difference
of operating time.
between the operating time of the
Operating value The limiting value of the relay at a specified value of the
characteristic quantity at which the input energising quantity and the
relay actually operates. maximum duration of the value of
input energising quantity which,
OPGW Optical Ground Wire: A ground
when suddenly reduced to a
wire that includes optical fibres to
specific value below the operating
provide a communications link.
level, is insufficient to cause
OSI 7-layer model The Open Systems Interconnection operation.
7-layer model is a model developed
by ISO for modelling of a
communications network.

Terminology
AX
P 1
Parametric A conjunctive test that ascertains Power electronic An electronic device (e.g. thyristor
conjunctive test the range of values of each device or IGBT) or assembly of such
parameter for which the test meets devices (e.g. inverter). Typically
specific performance requirements. used in a power transmission
system to provide smooth control of
PCB Printed Circuit Board.
output of an item of plant.
PCC Point of Common Coupling.
Power factor The factor by which it is necessary
PD Physical Device (data model to multiply the product of the voltage
element in IEC 61850). and current to obtain the active power.
PED Power Electronic Device. Power line carrier A means of transmitting information
communication over a power transmission line by
Phase angle A transducer used for the
using a carrier frequency
transducer measurement of the phase angle
superimposed on the normal power
between two a.c. electrical quantities
frequency.
having the same frequency.
PPS Positive Phase Sequence.
Pick-up A relay is said to ‘pick-up’ when it
changes from the de-energised Protected zone The portion of a power system
position to the energised position. protected by a given protection
system or a part of that protection
PICS Protocol Implementation
system.
Conformance Statement (IEC 61850
engineering file). Protection The apparatus, including protection
equipment relays, transformers and ancillary
Pilot channel A means of interconnection
equipment, for use in a protection
between relaying points for the
system.
purpose of protection.
Protection relay A relay designed to initiate
PIXIT Protocol Implementation eXtra
disconnection of a part of an
Information for Testing (IEC 61850
electrical installation or to operate a
engineering file).
warning signal, in the case of a
PLC Programmable Logic Controller: fault or other abnormal condition in
A specialised computer for the installation. A protection relay
implementing control sequences may include more than one
using software. electrical element and accessories.
PLCC Power Line Carrier Communication. Protection scheme The co-ordinated arrangements for
PN Product Naming is the fixed or the protection of one or more
default data model of the IED elements of a power system. A
reflecting the complete hierarchy/ protection scheme may comprise
structure of the functions inside an several protection systems.
IED in IEC 61850. Protection system A combination of protection
Point of common The interface between an in-plant equipment designed to secure,
coupling network containing embedded under predetermined conditions,
generation and the utility usually abnormal, the disconnection
distribution network to which the of an element of a power system, or
in-plant network is connected. to give an alarm signal, or both.
POW Point-on-Wave: Point-on-Wave Protocol A set of rules that define the

switching is the process to control method in which a function is
the moment of switching to carried out – commonly used in
minimise the effects (inrush respect of communications links,
currents, overvoltages). where it defines the hardware and
software features necessary for
successful communication between
devices.

Terminology
AX
1 P
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol (see PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network.
IEC 62439-3).
PT100 Platinum resistance temperature
PSM Plug Setting Multiple: A term used probe.
in conjunction with electromechanical
relays, denoting the ratio of the fault
current to the current setting of the
relay.
R Resistance. Reclaim time The time between a successful

(auto-reclose) closing operation, measured from
R.m.s. sensing A transducer specifically designed
the time the auto-reclose relay
transducer to respond to the true r.m.s. value
closing contact makes until a
of the input and which is
further reclosing sequence is
characterised by the manufacturer
permitted in the event of a further
for use on a specified range of
fault occurring.
waveforms.
REF Restricted Earth Fault.
Ratio correction A feature of digital/numerical relays
that enables compensation to be Reference Conditions of use for a transducer
carried out for a CT or VT ratio that conditions prescribed for performance testing,
is not ideal. or to ensure valid comparison of
results of measurement.
Rating The nominal value of an energising
quantity that appears in the Reference range A specified range of values of an
designation of a relay. The nominal influence quantity within which the
value usually corresponds to the CT transducer complies with the
and VT secondary ratings. requirements concerning intrinsic
errors.
RCA Relay Characteristic Angle.
Reference value A specified single value of an
RCB Report Control Block used to
influence quantity at which the
configure the publishing of a report
transducer complies with the
by the related communication server.
requirements concerning intrinsic
RCD Residual Current Device. A errors.
protection device which is actuated
Relay See Protection Relay.
by the residual current.
Report Set of data sent from a server to a
RCP Remote Control Point: The Remote
client in a communication network.
Control Point is a SCADA interface.
Several RCP’s may be managed Resetting value The limiting value of the
with different communication characteristic quantity at which the
protocols. Physical connections are relay returns to its initial position.
done at a Gateway or at substation
Residual current The algebraic sum, in a multi-phase
computers or at a substation HMI.
system, of all the line currents.
Reactive power A transducer used for the
Residual voltage The algebraic sum, in a multi-phase
(Var) transducer measurement of reactive electrical
system, of all the line-to-earth
power.
voltages.

Terminology
AX
R 1
Response time The time from the instant of ROCOF Rate Of Change Of Frequency.
application of a specified change (protection relay)
of the measurand until the output
ROCOV Rate Of Change Of Voltage.
signal reaches and remains at its
(protection relay)
final steady value or within a
specified band centred on this RSVC Relocatable Static Var Compensator.
value.
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector.
Reversible output An output current which reverses
RTOS Real Time Operating System.
current polarity in response to a change of
sign or direction of the measurand. RTU Remote Terminal Unit: An IED used
specifically for interfacing between
Ripple content With steady-state input conditions,
a computer and other devices.
of the output the peak-to-peak value of the
Sometimes may include control/
fluctuating component of the output.
monitoring/storage functions.
R.m.s. Root Mean Square.
RMU Ring Main Unit.
SAT Site Acceptance Test: Validation based on XML/SCL).

procedures for equipment executed
Server Entity that manages data and
with the customer on site.
responds to requests from clients
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data in a communication network.
Acquisition.
Setting The limiting value of a ‘characteristic’
SCD Substation Configuration or ‘energising’ quantity at which the
Description (IEC 61850 engineering relay is designed to operate under
file format based on XML/SCL). specified conditions. Such values
are usually marked on the relay and
SCL Substation Configuration Language:
may be expressed as direct values,
Normalised configuration language
percentages of rated values, or
for substation modelling (as
multiples.
expected by IEC 61850-6).
SFC Sequential Function Chart: One of
SCP Substation Control Point: HMI
the IEC 61131-3 programming
computers at substation level
languages.
allowing the operators to control the
substation. Short-term stability The stability over a period of 24 hours.
SCS Substation Control System. Simplex A communications system in which
communications data can only travel in one direction.
SCT System Configuration Tool (acc. IEC
system
61850).
Single-shot An auto-reclose sequence that
SDA Sub Data Attribute (data model
reclosing provides only one reclosing
operation, lock-out of the CB
SDO Sub Data Object (data model occurring if it subsequently trips.
S.I.R. System Impedance Ratio.
SED System Exchange Description (IEC

Terminology
AX
1 S
Single element A transducer having one measuring Starting relay A unit relay which responds to
transducer element. abnormal conditions and initiates
the operation of other elements of
SLD Single Line Diagram.
the protection system.
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol:
STATCOM A particular type of Static Var
Used acc. IEC 61850 for time
Compensator, in which Power
synchronisation.
Electronic Devices such as GTO’s
SOE Sequence Of Events. are used to generate the reactive
power required, rather than
SOTF Switch On To Fault (protection).
capacitors and inductors.
Specific A conjunctive test using specific
Static relay An electrical relay in which the
conjunctive test values of each of the parameters.
designed response is developed by
Spring winding time For spring-closed CB’s, the time for electronic, magnetic, optical or
the spring to be fully charged after other components without
a closing operation. mechanical motion. Excludes relays
SSD System Specification Description using digital/numeric technology.
(IEC 61850 engineering file format Static var A device that supplies or consumes
based on XML/SCL). compensator reactive power, comprised solely of
SST System Specification Tool (acc. IEC static equipment. It is shunt-
61850). connected on transmission lines to
provide reactive power
ST Structured Text: One of the IEC compensation.
61131-3 programming languages.
STC Short Time Current (rating of a CT).
Stability The ability of a transducer to keep
(of a transducer) its performance characteristics Storage conditions The conditions, defined by means
unchanged during a specified time, of ranges of the influence
all conditions remaining constant. quantities, such as temperature, or
any special conditions, within which
Stability The quantity whereby a protection the transducer may be stored
(of a protection system remains inoperative under (non-operating) without damage.
system) all conditions other than those for
which it is specifically designed to SVC Static Var Compensator.
operate. System disturbance The time between fault inception
Stability limits The r.m.s. value of the symmetrical time (auto-reclose) and CB contacts making on
(of a protection component of the through fault successful re-closure.
system) current up to which the protection System The ratio of the power system
system remains stable. impedance ratio source impedance to the
impedance of the protected zone.

Terminology
AX
T 1
T101, T103 Term used for IEC 60870-5-101 and Time delay A delay intentionally introduced into
-103 protocol. the operation of a relay system.
Tap changer A mechanism, usually fitted to the Time delay relay A relay having an intentional
primary winding of a transformer, to delaying device.
alter the turns ratio of the
Tissue Technical issues on a standard
transformer by small discrete
raised after its publication.
amounts over a defined range.
TPI Tap Position Indicator (for
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/
transformers).
Internet Protocol: A common
protocol for the transmission of TR Technical Report (of a standard)
messages over the Internet.
Transducer A device that provides a d.c. output
TCS Trip Circuit Supervision. (electrical quantity having a definite
measuring relationship to the a.c. measurand.
TC57 Technical Committee 57 working for
transducer)
the IEC and responsible for
producing standards in the field of Transducer with A transducer which gives an offset
Protection (e.g. IEC 61850) zero (live zero) predetermined output other than
zero when the measurand is zero.
TF a) Transfer Function of a device
(usually an element of a control Transducer with A transducer whose output is zero
system) suppressed zero when the measurand is less than a
certain value.
b) Transient Factor (of a CT).
TS Technical Specification (of a
Through fault The current flowing through a
standard).
current protected zone to a fault beyond
that zone.
TICS Technical Issue Conformance
Statement (IEC 61850 engineering
file).
Unicast Message from one source to one Unrestricted A protection system which has no
communication selected partner in a protection clearly defined zone of operation
communication network. and which achieves selective
operation only by time grading.
Unit electrical A single relay that can be used
relay alone or in combination with others. UCA Utility Communications Architecture.
Unit protection A protection system that is UFLS Underfrequency Load Shedding.
designed to operate only for
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply.
abnormal conditions within a clearly
defined zone of the power system. UTC Universal Time Coordinates.

Terminology
AX
1 V
V Voltage. VLAN Virtual Local Area Network.

VCB Vacuum Circuit Breaker. Voltage transducer A transducer used for the
measurement of a.c. voltage.
VDEW Term used for IEC 60870-5-103
protocol. The VDEW protocol is a VT Voltage Transformer.
subset of the IEC 60870-5-103
protocol (VDEW: German
association of the electro-technical
and water industry.
Vector group A feature of digital and numerical
compensation relays that compensates for the
phase angle shift that occurs in
transformers (including VT’s) due to
use of dissimilar winding
connections – e.g. transformers
connected delta/star.
W, X, Y, Z
WAN Wide Area Network. X/R Ratio of system reactance to

resistance.
Web service Standardised method of
communication between two Y Admittance (reciprocal of
devices on a communication impedance).
network.
Z Impedance.
X Reactance.
XML Extensible Markup Language: Used
to structure ASCII characters to
define specific data file formats.

Terminology
AX
1

AX2
ANSI & IEC
Function References
Appendix
AX2
ANSI & IEC
Function References
There are three methods for indicating protection relay functions IEC 60617, and uses graphical symbols with the operating
in common use. One is using Logical Nodes from the IEC 61850 quantity symbol. To assist the Protection Engineer in converting
standard, one is given in ANSI Standard C37-2, and uses a from one system to the other, a cross reference list of IEC LN,
numbering system for various functions plus additional letters ANSI device numbers and their IEC equivalents is given in
when further clarification is required. The last one is given in Figure AX2.1.
Description IEC 61850 ANSI IEC 60617 Description IEC 61850 ANSI IEC 60617
Overspeed relay PZSO *) 12 ω> Inverse time earth fault I >

PTOC 51G
overcurrent relay
Underspeed relay PZSU 14 ω<
Definite time earth I >
PTOC 51N
fault overcurrent relay
Distance relay PDIS 21 Z<
Voltage restrained/
Overtemperature relay PTTR 26 Ө> controlled overcurrent PVOC 51V U I>
relay
Undervoltage relay PTUV 27 U<
Power factor relay POPF / PUPF 55 cos ϕ >
Directional overpower
PDOP 32 P>
relay Overvoltage relay PTOV 59 U>
Underpower relay PDUP 37 P< Neutral point
PTOV 59N Ursd >
displacement relay
Undercurrent relay PTUC 37 I<
Earth-fault relay PTOC 64 I >
Negative sequence
PTOC 46 I2 >
overcurrent relay Directional
PTOC 67 I>
overcurrent relay
Negative sequence
PTOV 47 U2 >
overvoltage relay Directional
PTOC 67N I >
earth fault relay
Thermal relay PTTR 49
Phase angle relay PPAM 78 ϕ>
Instantaneous
PIOC 50 I >> Autoreclose relay RREC 79 O 1
overcurrent relay
Inverse time I> Underfrequency relay PTUF 81U f<
PTOC 51
overcurrent relay
Overfrequency relay PTOF 81O f>
Figure AX2.1: Id >
Differential relay PDIF 87
IEC 61850 / ANSI number / IEC symbol comparison
*) proposed, but not standardized
AX3
Index

Appendix
AX3
Index
A 553 N 578
B 556 O 579
C 557 P 580
D 562 Q 583
E 566 R 583
F 568 S 587
G 569 T 590
H 571 U 596
I 572 V 597
J 575 W 598
L 575 Z 598
M 577
Index
AX
3 A
Chapter Section Page (s)

20Hz low frequency injection source generator C8 8.2 329
A.C. electrified railway protection C10 1-9 379-394
A.C. pilot wire protection, unit protection of multi-ended feeders C5 3.1 249
Abstract service interface according IEC61850 D3 2.3 449
Acceleration scheme (distance relays) C4 3.3 238
Access point in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Accuracy of current transformers B2 4.1 113
Active power dependent load shedding D4 3.3 489
Additional features of numerical relays B1 6 102
Advantages vs conventional/hard-wiring according IEC 61850 D3 2.8 457
Air circuit breakers (ACBs), use in auto-reclose schemes D1 6.3.2 423
Algebra, vector A2 2 25
Analysis, symmetrical component A3 3 41
ANSI relay numbers AX2 Appendix 2 550
Anti-backspin function of motors C9 13 373
Anti-pumping devices, auto-reclose schemes D1 10.5 427
Apparent impedance seen by distance relays, multi-ended feeders C5 4.1 252
Application of auto-reclosing D1 2 418
Application of directional overcurrent relays C1 14.3 165
Application of unit protection systems to mesh corner substations C2 8.2 196
Application of unit protection to breaker and a half substations C2 8.2 196
Applications with client-server communication according IEC 61850 D3 4.1 466
Applications with GOOSE communication according IEC 61850 D3 4.2 472
Arc flash on circuit breakers B3 5.7 135
Arc flash phenomenon C11 2 402
Arc protection and mitigation methods C11 6 407
Arc protection principles C11 7 408
Arc protection related standards C11 5 406
Arc protection: C11 1-11 401-412
Arc flash phenomenon C11 2 402
Arc protection and mitigation methods C11 6 407
Arc protection related standards C11 5 406
Arc protection systems: C11 9 409
Arc protection integrated in numerical protection relays C11 9.2 409
Dedicated arc protection systems C11 9.3 410
Stand-alone arc protection systems C11 9.1 409
Causes of arc faults in switchgear C11 3 403
Elimination of the arc fault C11 10 411

Index
AX
A 3

Arc protection:
How to avoid nuisance tripping caused by switching arcs C11 8 409
Impacts and consequences of fault arcs C11 4 404
The principle of arc protection: C11 7 408
Fast detection of overcurrent C11 7.2 408
Fast optical detection of light C11 7.1 408
To protect circuit breakers B3 5.7 135
Typical application examples C11 11 412
Arc resistance formula C3 7.3 217
Armature reaction, of synchronous machines A4 3 58
Arrangement of busbar protection schemes C6 7 269
Arrangement of CT connections:
In high impedance busbar protection C6 8.5 276
In low impedance busbar protection C6 9.5 279
Asymmetry of synchronous machine A4 7 63
Asynchronous running C8 16.1.1 338
Attracted armature relays B1 2.1 95
Auto-close circuits D1 11 428
Automatic changeover systems for industrial/commercial networks B3 9 140
Automatic load restoration D4 4.1 490
Auto-reclosing: D1 1-12 417-428
Anti-pumping devices D1 10.5 427
Application of D1 2 418
Circuit breaker characteristics D1 4.1.3, 6.3 420, 423
Dead time D1 4.1, 6.4, 9 419, 423, 426
De-ionisation of fault path D1 4.1.4, 6.2 420, 422
Delayed D1 9 426
High-speed D1 8 425
Initiation of D1 10.1 427
Lock-out D1 10.7 427
Multi-shot D1 10.9 427
Number of shots (attempts) D1 4.3, 6.6 421, 424
On EHV lines D1 5-9 421-426
On HV distribution networks D1 3-4 419
Operating features D1 10 427
Reclaim time D1 4.2, 10.6 420, 427
Reclosing impulse D1 10.4 427
Reset time D1 4.1.5 420

Index
AX
3 A

Auto-reclosing:
Single-phase D1 7 424
Single-shot D1 6.6 424
System stability and synchronism D1 4.1.1 419
Three-phase D1 3, 6, 9 419, 422, 426
Type of load D1 4.1.2 419
Use with blocking schemes D1 8.1 425
Use with transfer trip protection schemes D1 8.1 425
Use with zone 1 extension scheme D1 8.2 425
Auto-transformer:
Equivalent circuits A4 16 70
Feeding of a.c. electrified railways: C10 6 387
5 387
Backup protection C10
6.6 391
Description C10 6.1 387
Distance protection zone reaches C10 6.3 390
Distance protection zone time delay settings C10 6.4 391
Implication of two-pole switching and auto-reclosure C10 6.5 391
Protection philosophy C10 6.2 389
Positive sequence equivalent circuit A4 16.1 70
Protection C7 12 299
Special conditions of neutral earthing, zero sequence reactance A4 16.3 71
Zero sequence equivalent circuit A4 16.2 70
Auxiliary supplies: Electrical type tests E1 3.5 499
Average rate of change of frequency protection 81RAV D4 2.5 487

Index
AX
B 3

Back-up protection: A1 9 18
For a.c. electrified railways C10 5 387
Balanced voltage system, unit protection C2 5 192
Balanced voltage unit protection scheme for Tee’d feeders C5 3.2 250
Bar primary current transformers B2 4.5.2 115
Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction A2 6 32
Bay unit testing as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.2.4 479
Bearing failures on motors C9 10 372
Behaviour of distance relays with earth faults C5 2.2.3 246
Bias in unit protection systems C2 4.2 191
Biased differential relays C2 4.2 191
Blocking schemes, distance protection: C4 4 240
Multi-ended feeders C5 5.3 255
Using zone 1 element C4 4.1.2 241
Weak infeed conditions C4 4.2 241
Boundary characteristic of distance relay C3 2 211
Branch law A2 6.1 32
C6 9.6.6 281
Breaker fail protection
C11 11.2 413
Breaker operating times D1 4.1.3 420
Broken delta connection of voltage transformers B2 2.6 109
Buchholz protection C7 15.3 301
Buchholz relay C7 15.3 301
Busbar:
Differential C6 7-10 269-282
Faults C6 2 263
Numerical: C6 10 282
Frame-earth (Howard) C6 6 266
Mesh corner C6 7.2.1 271
Schemes C6 5 266
Speed C6 3.1 264
Stability C6 3.2 264
Types of protection system C6 4 265
Principles C6 7 269
Protection C6 3-10 264-282
High impedance C6 8 272
Low impedance C6 9 277
Bushing current transformers B2 4.5.2 115

Index
AX
3 C

Cable circuits A4 18 73
Cable data A4 24 82
Cable gland insulation in frame-earth protection schemes C6 6.1 266
Calculation of overcurrent relay settings C1 13 163
Calculation of series impedance (overhead lines and cables) A4 19 74
Calculation of shunt impedance (overhead lines and cables) A4 20 75
Calculations, fault A3 2, 4-6 39, 43-50
Capacitor control B3 11.1 142
Capacitor protection B3 11 141
Capacitor voltage transformers: B2 3 111
Transient behaviour B2 3.2 112
Voltage protection of B2 3.1 111
Carrier channels D2 6.3 437
Carrier unit protection systems C2 9 197
Cascade voltage transformers B2 2.8 110
Catenary back-up protection: For a.c. electrified railways C10 5 387
Catenary thermal protection: For a.c. electrified railways C10 4.1 386
Characteristic angle of a relay C1 14.2 164
Characteristic time/current curves of IDMT relays C1 4 156
Characteristics switching: As application with IEC 61850 D3 4.1.6 471
Characteristics:
Of circuit breakers D1 4.1.3 420
Of distance relays C3 7 216
Of generators A4 2-6 57-61
Of motors C9 2-7 361-370
Of overcurrent relays C1 4-8, 14, 16 156-159, 164, 167
Check feature for frame-earth busbar protection C6 6.4 268
Check system:
For frame-earth protection C6 6.4 268
For high impedance busbar protection C6 8.3 274
For low impedance protection C6 9.3 278
Choice of dead time D1 6.4 423
Choice of harmonic (transformer protection) C7 9.2 296
Choice of reclaim time D1 6.5 424
Circuit breakers:
Arc flash B3 5.7 135
Arc protection B3 5.7 135

Index
AX
C 3

Circuit breakers:
Improved safety B3 5.7 135
Types:
Air B3 5.3 133
Miniature (MCB) B3 5.1 132
Moulded case (MCCB) B3 5.2 133
Oil B3 5.4 134
SF6 B3 5.6 135
Vacuum B3 5.5 134
Characteristics:
Closing time D1 4.1.3 420
Dead time D1 6.4 423
For auto-reclose schemes D1 4.1.3, 6.3 420, 423
Interrupting time C1 11.1 161
Monitoring numerical relays B1 6.3 102
Opening time D1 4.1.3 420
Circuit laws A2 6.1 32
Circuit quantities A2 4 28
Circuit theorems A2 6.2 32
Circuit variables A2 4.1 28
Circulating current system, unit protection C2 4 190
Class X (BS3938) current transformers B2 4.4 115
Classical single-phase feeding of a.c. electrified railways: C10 3 380
Distance protection zone reaches C10 3.3 381
Enhanced modern relay characteristics C10 3.5 385
Feeding diagram C10 3.1 380
Impact of trains with regenerative braking C10 3.6 385
Load avoidance C10 3.4 384
Protection philosophy C10 3.2 381
Closing impulse time D1 10.4 427
Closing time of circuit breakers D1 4.1.3 420
Combined differential and restricted earth fault protection of transformers C7 10 297
Combined I.D.M.T. and high set instantaneous overcurrent relays C1 5 157
Commissioning tests of protection relays: E2 1 517
Current transformer test: E2 1.3 518
Magnetisation curve E2 1.3.2 518
Polarity check E2 1.3.1 518

Index
AX
3 C

Commissioning tests of protection relays:
Insulation test E2 1.1 517
Periodic maintenance tests: E2 7 527
Frequency of inspection and testing E2 7.1 527
Maintenance tests E2 7.2 527
Primary injection tests: E2 4 524
CT polarity check E2 4.3 525
CT ratio check E2 4.2 525
Primary injection testing of relay elements E2 4.4 525
Test facilities E2 4.1 524
Protection relay setting checks E2 1.5 519
Protection scheme design for maintenance E2 8 528
Relay self-test procedure E2 1.2 517
Secondary injection test equipment: E2 2 520
Secondary injection test sets E2 2.2 520
Test blocks/plugs for secondary injection equipment E2 2.1 520
Secondary injection testing: E2 3 523
Schemes using digital or numerical relay technology E2 3.1 523
Schemes using electromechanical / static relay technology E2 3.2 523
Test circuits for secondary injection testing E2 3.3 524
Testing of Protection Scheme Logic (PSL) E2 6 526
Tripping and alarm annunciation tests E2 5 526
Voltage transformer test: E2 1.4 518
Phasing check E2 1.4.3 518
Ratio check E2 1.4.2 518
Communication links D2 1, 7.2 433, 442
Communication modelling:
In the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Communication services:
According IEC 61850 D3 3 458
Client-server communication: D3 3.2 459
Device control D3 3.2.4 461
Event reporting and logging D3 3.2.3 460
File transfer D3 3.2.6 462
Real-time data access and retrieval D3 3.2.2 460
Self-description of device D3 3.2.1 459

Index
AX
C 3

Communication services: Client-server communication:
Setting and setting group management D3 3.2.5 462
Substitution D3 3.2.7 462
General communication architecture D3 3.1 458
GOOSE communication D3 3.3 463
Sampled values D3 3.4 464
Time synchronisation D3 3.5 465
Comparison of transfer trip and blocking schemes C4 6 242
Complex numbers A2 3.2 27
Complex quantities A2 3 26
Complex transmission circuits, protection of C5 1-7 245-257
Complex variables A2 3.1 26
Composite error of current transformers B2 2 107
Condition monitoring of transformers C7 18 307
Conditions for direction comparison, unit protection C2 3 190
Connections for directional relays C1 14, 17.1 164, 170
Contact systems for relays A1 10.1 19
Control block in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Control with synchrocheck as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.1.3 469
Convention of direction of current flow, unit protection C2 2 190
Co-ordination of earth fault relays in three-phase four wire systems B3 7.2 137
Co-ordination of relays with fuses C1 12.3 163
Co-ordination problems in industrial and commercial networks B3 7 137
Co-ordination procedure for overcurrent protection relays C1 2 153
Core balance current transformer (CBCT) B2 4.5.3 115
Core faults:
In generators C8 3 317
In power transformers C7 2.6 289
Core-balance current transformers B2 4.5.3 115
Cross country fault analysis A3 4.6 46
CT polarity check for primary injection tests of protection relays E2 4.3 525
CT ratio check for primary injection tests of protection relays E2 4.2 525
Current differential protection scheme C2 8, 10 194, 197
Current distribution due to a fault A3 5 47
Current distribution factors A3 5.1 47
Current polarisation of directional earth fault relays C1 17.1.2 171
Current reversal on double circuit lines, distance protection C5 2.2.1 245

Index
AX
3 C

Current setting of a relay C1 10 161
Current transformers: B2 4-5 113-121
Accuracy B2 4.1 113
Accuracy class B2 4.2 114
Accuracy limit current B2 4.3 114
Bar primary B2 4.5.2 115
Bushing B2 4.5.2 115
Class PX (IEC 60044-1) B2 4.4 115
Class X (BS 3938) B2 4.4 115
Construction B2 4.5 115
Equivalent circuit B2 4 113
Errors B2 4.1 113
Hall-effect B2 5.2.1 125
Harmonics in B2 4.11 120
Hybrid B2 5.1.2 122
Knee-point voltage B2 4.4 115
Line current B2 4.6 116
Linear B2 4.6.3 116
Magnetisation curve E2 1.3.2 518
Magnetisation curve B2 4.4 115
Novel B2 5 121
Open circuit secondary voltage B2 4 113
Optical B2 5.1 121
Rated short-time current B2 4.9 117
Secondary current rating B2 4.8 117
Secondary winding impedance B2 4.7 116
Summation B2 4.5.4 115
Supervision in numerical relays B1 6.2 102
Test windings B2 4.12 120
Tests E2 1.3 518
Transient response B2 4.1 113

Index
AX
D 3

D.C. voltage signalling D2 7.1 441
Data attribute in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.4 451
Data modelling according IEC61850 D3 2.4 450
Data object in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.3 451
Data reference in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.5 452
Data set in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Dead line charging D1 9.2 426
Dead time in auto-reclose schemes D1 4.1, 6.4, 9 419, 423, 426
Definite time overcurrent relay C1 9 160
Definition of:
Protection equipment A1 2 13
Protection scheme A1 2 13
Protection system A1 2 13
Definitions of terms used in protection, control and automation AX1 Appendix 1 529
De-ionisation of fault path D1 4.1.4, 6.2 420, 422
Delayed auto-reclose scheme D1 9 426
Delta function for a.c. electrified railways C10 8 392
Delta/star transformer overcurrent protection C7 6 292
Delta-connected winding of a transformer C7 2.3, 7 288, 293
Determination of sequence currents A3 3 41
Device control as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.4 461
Device numbers, list of ANSI AX2 Appendix 2 550
Differential protection:
Digital systems C2 8 194
Electromechanical systems C2 7 193
For sectionalised and duplicate busbars C6 7.1 269
Numerical systems C2 8 194
Of busbars C6 7-10 269-282
Of direct connected generators C8 3 317
Of generator-transformers C8 4 319
Of multi-ended feeders C5 3 249
Of parallel feeders C5 2.1 245
Of transformer feeders C2 12.2 206
Static systems C2 7 193
Using high impedance relays C2 5 192
Using low impedance relays C2 4 190
Using optical fibre signalling C2 8.1 195

Index
AX
3 D

Digital current differential protection systems C2 8 195
Digital relays B1 4 97
Direct and quadrature axis values of machines A4 8, 11 63, 65
C4 4 240
Directional comparison blocking schemes
C5 5.5 255
Directional comparison unblocking scheme C4 5 242
Directional control of impedance type distance relays C3 7.2 216
Directional relays:
Connections C1 17.1 170
Earth fault C1 17-19 170-173
Overcurrent C1 14 164
Phase fault C1 14 164
Discrimination:
By current C1 3.2 154
By time C1 3.1 154
Time and current C1 3.3, 11 155, 161
Distance relay:
Apparent impedance seen by C5 4.1 252
Application example C3 12 230
C3 10 227
Application problems C5 4 252
D1 8 425
Application to:
a.c. electrified railways C10 2, 6 379, 387
Multi-ended feeders C5 5 255
Parallel feeders C5 2 245
Plain feeders C3 6 215
Characteristics: C3 7 216
Amplitude and phase comparison C3 7.1 216
Fully cross-polarised mho C3 7.5 219
Lenticular C3 7.4.3 219
Offset mho C3 7.4 218
Other C3 7.9 222
Partially cross-polarised mho C3 7.6 220
Plain impedance C3 7.2 216
Quadrilateral C3 7.7 221
Self polarised mho C3 7.3 217

Index
AX
D 3

Distance relay:
Performance of:
Digital types C3 3.2 213
Electromechanical types C3 3.1 212
Numerical types C3 3.2 213
Static types C3 3.1 212
Schemes: C4 1-6 235-242
Acceleration C4 3.3 238
Blocking over-reaching schemes C4 4 240
Comparison of transfer trip and blocking schemes C4 6 242
Direct under-reach transfer tripping scheme C4 3.1 237
Directional comparison unblocking C4 5 242
Lines using high-speed auto-reclose D1 8 425
Permissive over-reach transfer tripping C4 3.4 238
Permissive under-reach transfer tripping C4 3.2 237
Permissive under-reaching acceleration C4 3.3 238
Transfer trip C4 3 237
Weak infeed conditions C4 3.5, 4.2 239, 241
Zone 1 extension C4 2 236
Settings: C3 6 215
Other zones C3 6.4 215
Reverse zones C3 6.4 215
Zone 1 C3 6.1 215
Zone 2 C3 6.2 215
Zone 3 C3 6.3 215
Starters for switched distance protection C3 8.1 224
Switched distance protection relays C3 8.1 224
Under-reach C3 10.3 227
Under-reach on parallel lines C5 2.2.2 246
Voltage supervision in C3 10.7 228
Zones of protection C3 6 215
Current reversal on double circuit lines C5 2.2.1 245
Earth fault impedance measurement C3 9.2 225
Effect of earthing method C3 9 225

Index
AX
3 D

Distance relay:
Effect of source impedance C3 9 225
Example setting calculation C3 12 230
Features of C3 7, 11 216, 229
Forward reach limitations C3 10.5 228
Implementation C3 8 223
Minimum length of line C3 10.2 227
Minimum voltage at relay terminals C3 10.1 227
Over-reach C3 10.4 228
Percentage over-reach C3 10.4 228
Percentage under-reach C3 10.3 227
Phase fault impedance measurement C3 9.1 225
Principles of C3 2 211
Distributed generation: C8 20 347
Islanding detection C8 20.3 349
Low voltage ride through (LVRT) C8 20.2.2 347
Q-U protection C8 20.2.4 348
Reactive current C8 20.2 347
Underfrequency load shedding C8 20.2.3 348
Distribution transformer earthing of generators C8 2, 7.2.2, 7.2.3 316, 326, 327
Disturbance recorder function in numerical relays B1 6.4 102
Documentation for IED according IEC 61850 D3 2.6 455
Double busbar substation, application of auto-reclose to D1 12.1 428
Double circuit lines, current reversal on C5 2.2.1 245
Double frequency or broad band trap D2 6.3 437
Double-layer winding C8 5.1 319
Dual fed substations, earth fault protection in B3 7.2 137
Dynamic unit testing of protection relays E1 7.2 509
Dynamic validation type tests of protection relays E1 8 510

Index
AX
E 3

Earth fault impedance measurement using distance relays C3 9.2 225
Earth fault protection for entire generator stator winding C8 8 329
Earth fault protection:
Of generators C8 3, 7, 8 317, 325, 329
Of induction motors C9 6 368
Of transformers C7 6-8, 10 292-293, 297
On insulated networks C1 18 171
On Petersen Coil earthed networks C1 19 173
Sensitive C1 16.3, 17 169, 170
Time grading of C1 16.2 169
Using overcurrent relays C1 16-19 167-173
With residually-connected CTs B3 7.1 137
Earthing arrangements for frame-earth protection C6 6.1 266
Earthing transformer protection C7 11 299
Earthing, system, effect of on zero sequence quantities A3 6 50
Effect of:
Earthing methods on distance relays C3 9 225
Fault current on distance relays, multi-ended feeders C5 4.3 253
Pre-fault load on distance relays, multi-ended feeders C5 4.2 253
Saturation on machine reactances A4 12 66
Source impedance on distance relays C3 9 225
System earthing on zero sequence quantities A3 6 50
Effective setting of earth fault relays C1 16.1 167
Effective setting of electromechanical earth fault relays C1 16.1.2 168
Electrical faults in stator windings C8 3 317
Electrical faults in stator windings C9 6 368
Electromagnetic voltage transformers: B2 2 107
Cascade type B2 2.8 110
Errors in B2 2.1 107
Protection of B2 2.4 109
Residual connection of B2 2.6 109
Transient performance B2 2.7 110
Voltage factor B2 2.2 108
Electromechanical relays B1 2 95
Electromechanical unit protection systems C2 7 193
Embedded generation C8 20 347

Index
AX
3 E

End zones of a protected feeder (distance protection schemes) C4 1 235
Engineering cycle according IEC 61850 D3 2.5 453
Engineering process according IEC 61850 D3 2.5 453
Environmental Type Test of protection relays: E1 6 507
Cyclic temperature/humidity test E1 6.3 507
Enclosure protection test E1 6.5 508
Fast cyclic temperature E1 6.4 508
Humidity test E1 6.2 507
Mechanical tests E1 6.6 508
Seismic test equipment E1 6.6 508
Temperature test E1 6.1 507
Equations and network connections for various types of faults A3 4 43
Equivalent circuits:
Auto-transformer A4 16 70
Cables A4 23 81
Current transformer B2 4 113
Induction motor C9 7 370
Overhead lines A4 23 81
Synchronous generator A4 2-8 57-63
Transformer A4 14-15 67-68
Voltage transformer B2 2 107
Errors:
In current transformers B2 4.1 113
In relays C1 11.2 161
In voltage transformers B2 2.1 107
Event reporting and logging in IEC 61850 as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.3 460
Evolution of IEC 61850 D3 1.4 446
Example relay setting calculations:
a.c. electrified railways C10 9 394
Complex transmission circuits C5 7 257
Distance C3 12 230
Earth fault, overcurrent C1 20.2 180
Generator C8 21 350
Industrial systems B3 11 141
Parallel feeders – distance C5 7.1 257

Index
AX
E 3

Example relay setting calculations:
Parallel feeders overcurrent C1 20.3 181
Phase fault C1 20.1 175
Ring main C1 20.4 182
Transformer C7 19 308
Unit protection C2 12 204
Examples of auto-reclosing schemes D1 12 428
Examples of electromechanical unit protection systems C2 7 193
Examples of static unit protection systems C2 7 193
Extremely inverse overcurrent relay C1 7 159
F
Factors influencing HV auto-reclose schemes D1 4 419
Fast load shedding D4 3.5 489
Fault calculations A3 2-6 39-50
Fault current contribution from induction motors B3 8 139
Feeder substation protection for a.c. electrified railways C10 8 392
Ferro-resonance B2 3.3 112
File transfer as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.6 462
Flags A1 10.2 19
Forward reach limitations of distance relays C3 10.5 228
Four-switch mesh substation,auto-reclosing applied to D1 12.3 429
Four-wire dual-fed substations B3 7.2 137
Frame-earth protection (Howard protection): C6 6 266
Check system C6 6.4 268
Scheme for double bus station C6 6.3 268
Single busbar C6 6.1 266
With sectioned busbars C6 6.2 267
Frequency of Inspection and Testing of protection relays E2 7.1 527
Frequency Protection: D4 1-6 485-492
Active power dependent load shedding D4 3.3 489
Automatic load restoration D4 4.1 490
Average rate of change of frequency protection 81RAV D4 2.5 487
Fast load shedding D4 3.5 489
Frequency supervised rate of change of frequency protection 81RF D4 2.4 486
Generator turbine abnormal protection D4 5 491

Index
AX
3 F

Frequency Protection:
Load restoration D4 4 490
Load shedding D4 3 488
Overfrequency protection 81O D4 2.2 486
Rate of change of frequency protection 81R D4 2.3 486
Underfrequency based load shedding D4 3.1 488
Underfrequency protection 81U D4 2.1 486
Undervoltage based load shedding D4 3.4 489
Frequency shift keyed signals, protection signalling using D2 7.3 442
Frequency supervised rate of change of frequency protection 81RF D4 2.4 486
Fully cross-polarised mho relay C3 7.5 219
Fundamental theory A2 1 25
Fundamentals of protection practice A1 1-12 11-21
Fuses for use with distribution transformers C7 6.1 292
Fusing factor B3 4.3 132
G
Gas and oil surge relay (Buchholz relay) for transformers C7 15.3 301
Gas devices for protection of transformers C7 15 301
General requirements as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.2.5 482
Generator overfluxing withstand characteristics C8 14.1 335
Generator turbine abnormal protection D4 5 491
Generator: C8 1-21 315-350
Complete schemes:
For direct-connected generators C8 19.1 344
Generator-transformer units C8 19.2 345
Distributed generation C8 20 347
Earthing C8 2 316
Examples of protection calculations C8 21 350
Impedances:
Direct axis A4 8, 11 63, 65
Effect of saturation A4 11 65
Negative sequence A4 9 65
Positive sequence A4 13 66
Quadrature axis A4 5, 8, 11 60, 63, 65
Zero sequence A4 10 65

Index
AX
G 3

Generator: Impedances:
Protection:
Differential protection of direct-connected generators C8 3 317
Differential protection of generator-transformer units C8 4 319
Earth fault protection for entire stator winding C8 8 329
Inadvertent energisation C8 13 335
Inter-turn fault C8 5 319
Loss of excitation C8 16 338
Low forward power C8 11.1 332
Negative phase sequence C8 12 333
Neutral voltage displacement C8 7.1.3, 7.2.4 326, 327
Overcurrent protection C8 6 323
Overfluxing C8 14.1 335
Overfrequency C8 14.2 336
Overheating C8 18 344
Overspeed C8 11.1 332
Overvoltage C8 9 331
Pole slipping protection C8 17 341
Reverse power C8 11.2 332
Rotor earth faults C8 15.1 336
Rotor faults C8 15 336
Rotor shorted turn protection C8 15.3 338
Stator earth fault C8 7, 8 325, 329
Unbalanced loading C8 12 333
Underfrequency C8 14.2 336
Undervoltage C8 10 331
Voltage controlled overcurrent C8 6.2.1 324
Voltage restrained overcurrent C8 6.2.2 324
Winding protection C8 3 317
Generator-transformer protection C8 4 319
GOOSE control block in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Grading margins for overcurrent relays: C1 11-12 161-162
Earth fault relays C1 16.2 169
Fuse to fuse C1 12.2 163
Fuse to relay C1 12.3 163
Grading margins for overcurrent relays: Relay to relay C1 12.1 162
Grading of ring mains C1 15, 20.4 166, 182

Index
AX
3 G

Ground fault neutraliser (GFN) C8 2 316
H
Hardware architecture of numerical relays B1 5.1 99
Harmonic content of inrush waveform, transformer C7 3.1 291
Harmonics 3rd & 5th for a.c. electrified railways C10 8 392
Harmonics in current transformers B2 4.11 120
Heating of induction motor windings C9 3, 7 362, 370
High impedance busbar differential protection: C6 8 272
Check feature C6 8.3 274
CT supervision C6 8.4 274
Effective setting C6 8.2 273
Practical details of C6 8.6 276
Primary operating current C6 8.2 273
High impedance earthfaults for a.c. electrified railways C10 8 392
High impedance relays in busbar protection C6 8 272
High resistance earthing of generators C8 2 316
High resistance ground with a distribution transformer C8 2 316
High speed auto-reclosing:
On EHV systems D1 6-8 422-425
On lines using distance relays D1 8 425
High voltage capacitor of line coupling equipment D2 6.3 437
History of IEC 61850 D3 1.3 446
Howard protection (frame-earth protection) C6 6 266
HRC fuse applications C7 6.1 292
HRC fuse applications B3 4 131
HRC fuses B3 4 131
Hysteresis effect B2 4.10.2 119

Index
AX
I 3

IDMT overcurrent relay C1 4 156
IEC 61850 and applications D3 1-4 445-466
IEC 61850 applications D3 4 466
IEC 61850 communication standard: D3 1-3 445-458
Abstract service interface D3 2.3 449
Data modelling: D3 2.4 450
Access point D3 2.4.6 452
Communication modelling D3 2.4.6 452
Control block D3 2.4.6 452
Data attributes D3 2.4.4 451
Data objects D3 2.4.3 451
Data reference D3 2.4.5 452
Data set D3 2.4.6 452
GOOSE control block D3 2.4.6 452
Logical devices D3 2.4.1 451
Logical nodes D3 2.4.2 451
Physical device D3 2.4 450
Report control block D3 2.4.6 452
Server D3 2.4.6 452
SubNetwork D3 2.4.6 452
Engineering process: D3 2.5 453
Engineering cycle D3 2.5 453
IED configuration tool D3 2.5 453
Substation configuration language D3 2.5 453
System configuration tool D3 2.5 453
System specification tool D3 2.5 453
Global approach D3 2.1 447
Parts of the standard D3 2.2 447
IEC relay symbols AX2 Appendix 2 550
IED D3 1 445
IED configuration tool according IEC 61850 D3 2.5 453
Impedance notation A2 5 31
Impedances:
Fault current contribution from B3 8 139
Generator:
Direct-axis A4 11 65
Negative sequence A4 9 65

Index
AX
3 I

Impedances: Generator:
Positive sequence A4 13 66
Quadrature axis A4 5, 11 60, 65
Zero sequence A4 10 65
Induction motor:
Negative sequence C9 7 370
Positive sequence C9 7 370
Transformer:
Positive sequence A4 14, 16 67, 70
Zero sequence A4 15, 16 68, 70
Implementation of distance relays C3 8 223
Incomplete longitudinal current differential protection of generator C8 5.3 321
Incorrect relay operation, reasons for A1 4 15
Indicating lamps in protection schemes A1 10.2 19
Indication or flags A1 10.2 19
Induction motor characteristics C9 3-7 362-370
Induction motor equivalent circuit C9 7 370
Induction motor protection: C9 2-13, 15 361-373, 374
Anti-backspin C9 13 373
Bearing failures C9 10 372
Earth fault C9 6 368
Examples of C9 15 374
Faults in rotor windings C9 8 371
Locked rotor C9 4 363
Loss of load C9 12 373
Modern relay design C9 2 361
Negative phase sequence C9 7 370
Number of starts limitation C9 4.4 365
Re-acceleration C9 4.3 365
Stalling C9 4.2 365
Starting C9 4.1 364
Thermal C9 3 362
Undervoltage C9 11 372
Industrial and commercial power system protection: B3 1-13 129-150
Automatic changeover systems B3 9 140
Busbar arrangement B3 2 129

Index
AX
I 3

Industrial and commercial power system protection:
Capacitor control B3 11.1 142
Characteristics B3 4.1 131
Co-ordination problems B3 7 137
Discrimination B3 4.2 131
Discrimination in B3 3 130
Effect of ambient temperature B3 4.4 132
Examples of protection B3 12 146
Fault current contribution from induction motors B3 8 139
Fusing factor B3 4.3 132
HRC fuses: B3 4 131
Motor power factor correction B3 11.2 142
Power factor correction B3 11 141
Protection against overvoltage B3 10 141
Protection against reverse phase sequence B3 10 141
Protection against undervoltage B3 10 141
Protection of cables by B3 4.3 132
Protection of capacitors B3 11.3 142
Protection of motors by B3 4.5 132
Industrial circuit breakers B3 5 132
Industrial consumers, auto-reclosing requirements D1 4.1.2 419
Inrush waveform of transformers C7 2 287
Instantaneous overcurrent relays, characteristics of C1 5 157
Instrument transformers: B2 1-5 107-121
Capacitor voltage B2 3 111
Current B2 4 113
Electromagnetic voltage B2 2 107
Novel B2 5 121
Insulated networks, earth fault protection of C1 18 171
Insulation tests of protection relays E2 1.1 517
Interchangeability according IEC 61850 D3 2.7 456
Interference and noise, effect on protection signalling D2 6 436
Interoperability vs Interchangeability according IEC 61850 D3 2.7 456
Intertripping:
Blocking scheme:
Performance requirements D2 5.3 436
Signalling D2 4.3 435

Index
AX
3 I

Intertripping:
By d.c. signal on separate pilots D2 7.1 441
Direct tripping, signalling D2 4.1 435
For multi-terminal lines C5 5 255
For transformers C7 17 306
Intertripping, performance requirements D2 5.1 435
Methods D2 4 435
Permissive tripping:
Performance requirements D2 5.2 436
Signalling D2 4.2 435
Signalling for D2 4 435
Interturn fault protection for the generator stator winding C8 5 319
Interturn faults in power transformers C7 2.5 288
Inverse overcurrent relays:
Extremely inverse C1 7 159
IDMT C1 4 156
Very inverse C1 6 158
In-zone capacitance C7 16.1.4 304
Issues with numerical relays B1 7 104
J
Junction law A2 6.1 32
L
Lenticular characteristic of distance relay C3 7.4.3 219
Line attenuation, power line carrier communications D2 6.3 437
C1 18.2,19 171-173
Line charging current C2 8, 12 194, 205
C7 16.1.4 304
Line differential protection C2 1-13 189-207
Line trap D2 6.3 437
Lines Tapped (T-lines) C8 20.2.2 347
List of ANSI device numbers AX2 Appendix 2 550
List of IEC protection symbols AX2 Appendix 2 550
Live line reclosing D1 9.1 426
Load restoration D4 4 490

Index
AX
L 3

Load shedding D4 3 488
Local/Remote control as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.1.2 467
Lock-out in auto-reclosing schemes D1 6.6, 10.7 424, 427
Logic systems B1 6.6 103
Logical Device in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.1 451
Logical Node in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.2 451
Longitudinal zero sequence over voltage protection of generator C8 5.5 322
Loss of excitation protection for generators C8 16 338
Loss of excitation protection for synchronous motors C9 14.1 373
Loss of load protection of motors C9 12 373
Low forward power protection of generators C8 11.1 332
Low frequency injection method 100% earth fault protection of generator C8 8.2 329
Low impedance biased differential protection C6 9.6 279
Low impedance differential protection (biased):
Busbars C6 9 277
Check feature C6 9.3 278
CT supervision C6 9.4 279
Effective setting C6 9.2 278
For generators C8 3.1 317
For transformers C7 8 293
Primary operating current C6 9.2 278
Low speed (delayed) auto-reclosing D1 9 426

Index
AX
3 M

Machine reactances (synchronous machines) A4 8-12 63-66
Machine reactances, effect of saturation A4 12 66
Magnetically polarised armature relays B1 2.1 95
Magnetisation curve of a current transformer B2 4.4 115
Magnetising inrush in power transformers C7 3 290
Maintenance tests for protection relays E2 7.2 527
Maloperation with reverse faults, distance relays, multi-ended feeders C5 4.4 254
Manipulation of complex quantities A2 3 26
Manual closing of circuit breakers, auto-reclosing schemes D1 10.8 427
Margins, grading for overcurrent relays C1 11-12 161-162
Mathematical operators A2 3.3 27
Maximum torque angle of relay (MTA) C1 14.2.2 165
Measuring transformers: B2 1-5 107-121
Current B2 4 113
Novel B2 5 121
Merz-Price protection systems C2 1 189
Mesh law A2 6.1 32
Mesh substation, four-switch, auto-reclosing applied to D1 12.3 429
Methods of protection signalling D2 7 441
Mho relay:
Fully cross-polarised C3 7.5 219
Lenticular C3 7.4 218
Offset mho C3 7.4 218
Partially cross-polarised C3 7.6 220
Self-polarised C3 7.3 217
Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) B3 5.1 132
Minimum length of line for distance protection C3 10.2 227
Minimum voltage at relay terminals C3 10.1 227
Motor currents during starting conditions C9 4 363
Motor differential protection C9 5.1 366
Motor power factor correction B3 11.2 142
Motor protection C9 1-15 361-374
Motor windings, heating of C9 3 362
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) B3 5.2 133
Multi-ended feeders protection of C5 3-5 249-255

Index
AX
M 3

Multi-shot auto-reclosing D1 10.9 427
Mutual compensation C5 2.2 245
Mutual coupling, effect of on unit and distance protection schemes C5 2 245
N
Nature and effect of transformer faults C7 1 287
Negative phase sequence protection of generators C8 12 333
Negative phase sequence protection of motors C9 7 372
Negative sequence network A3 3.2 42
Negative sequence reactance:
Synchronous generator A4 9 65
Network connections for various types of fault A3 4 43
Network reduction A2 6.3 33
Neutral voltage displacement (NVD) protection C8 21.1.4 351
Neutral voltage displacement relay C8 7.1.3, 7.2.4 326, 327
Noise and interference in protection signalling systems D2 6 436
Non-linear resistor, use in busbar protection schemes C6 8.6.7 276
Non-unit transformer-feeder protection schemes C7 16.1 302
Notation, impedance A2 5 31
Novel instrument transformers B2 5 121
Number of shots, auto-reclosing schemes D1 4.3, 6.6, 10.9 421, 424, 427
Number of starts limitation of induction motors C9 4.4 365
Numerical busbar protection C6 10 283
Numerical busbar protection,reliability considerations C6 10.1 283
Numerical differential protection system C2 8 194
Numerical relay issues B1 7 104
Numerical relay software B1 5.2 101
Numerical relays B1 5-7 98-104

Index
AX
3 O

Offset mho distance relay C3 7.4 218
Ohm distance relay C3 7.2 216
Oil and gas devices for transformer protection C7 15 301
Oil circuit breakers (OCBs) B3 5.4 134
Opening time of circuit breakers D1 4.1.3 420
Operating features of auto-reclose schemes D1 10 427
Operation indicators A1 10.2 19
Operation of induction motors with unbalanced voltages C9 7 370
Operators in vector algebra A2 3.3 27
Optical fibre channels D2 6.5 439
Out-of-step tripping for generators C3 7.8 221
Out-of-step tripping for generators C8 17 341
Output devices, of relays A1 10 19
Overcurrent protection C1 1-21 153-185
Overcurrent relay:
90A1 quadrature connection C1 14.2 164
Calculation of settings C1 13, 16 163, 167
Definite time C1 9 160
Directional earth fault C1 17 170
Directional phase fault C1 14 164
Earth fault protection C1 16 167
Grading margin C1 11-12 161-162
Instantaneous C1 5 157
Inverse definite minimum time C1 4 156
Other characteristics C1 8 159
Timing error C1 11.2 161
Transient over-reach C1 6.1 158
Overcurrent starters for distance relays C3 8.1 224
Overfluxing in power transformers C7 2.8.3, 2.8.4, 13 289, 290, 300
Overfrequency protection 81O D4 2.2 486
Overhead lines: A4 18-22 73-80
Calculation of impedances A4 19-20 74-75
Data A4 24 82
Equivalent circuits A4 21-22 78-80
With or without earth wires A4 21 78

Index
AX
O 3

Overheating of generators C8 18 344
Overheating of power transformers C7 4 291
Overload protection:
Of generators C8 18 344
Of motors C9 3 362
Of transformers C7 2.8.1, 4 289, 291
Over-reach of a distance relay C3 10.4 228
Over-reach, transient, of a relay C1 6.1 158
Overshoot of overcurrent relays C1 11.3 161
Overspeed of generators C8 11.1, 14.2 332, 336
Overvoltage protection of generators C8 9 331
P
Parallel feeders, overcurrent protection of C1 14.3 165
Parallel feeders, distance protection of C5 2.2 245
Parallel feeders, unit protection of C5 2.1 245
Parallel-connected branches of the stator winding C8 5.1 319
Partially cross-polarised mho relay C3 7.6 220
Parts of IEC 61850 D3 1.2, 2.2 446, 447
B2 4 113
Peak voltage developed by current transformers
C6 8.6.7 276
Percentage under-reach of distance relays C3 10.3 227
Performance of distance relays C3 3 212
Periodic maintenance tests of protection relays E2 7 527
Permissive intertrip over-reaching scheme C4 3.4 238
Permissive intertrip under-reaching scheme C4 3.2 237
Petersen coil, protection of networks earthed using C1 19 173
Phase comparison protection schemes C2 10.1, 11 197, 201
Phase comparison protection schemes for Tee’d feeders C5 3.3 251
Phase fault impedance measurement using distance relays C3 9.1 225
Phase fault overcurrent relay settings C1 13 163
Phase reversal protection B3 10 141
Phase shift due to system capacitance C2 11.1 201
Phase unbalance relays C9 7 370
Phase-phase fault analysis A3 4.2 44
Phase-phase-earth fault analysis A3 4.3 45

Index
AX
3 P

Physical device in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4 450
Plain impedance relay C3 7.2 216
Plain tone signals, protection signalling using D2 7.2 442
Pole slipping of generators C8 17 341
Polyphase systems A2 4.4 30
Positive sequence equivalent circuits:
Cables A4 23 81
Overhead transmission lines A4 22 80
Synchronous machine A4 8 63
Transformer A4 14 67
Positive sequence network A3 3.1 42
Positive sequence reactance of synchronous machine A4 4, 8 59, 63
Power factor correction B3 11 141
Power line carrier communications (PLCC) technique D2 6.3 437
Power line carrier unit protection phase comparison schemes C5 3.2 250
Power quantities A2 4.3 29
Power swing blocking C3 10.6 228
Power system plant A4 1 57
Power transformer:
Measuring transformers B2 1-5 107-125
Two-winding transformers A4 14.1 67
Unit systems A1 5.2 16
Power/angle curve D1 5 421
Primary injection testing of relay elements E2 4.4 525
Primary injection tests: E2 4 524
CT polarity check E2 4.3 525
CT ratio check E2 4.2 525
Test facilities E2 4.1 524
Primary protection A1 9 18
Principles of distance relays C3 2 211
Principles of time/current grading C1 3 154
Principles of unit protection systems C2 1 189
Private pilot wires and channels D2 6.1 436
Product safety tests of protection relays: E1 5 505
CE marking E1 5.7 506

Index
AX
P 3

Product safety tests of protection relays:
Dielectric voltage withstand E1 5.3 505
Earth bonding impedance E1 5.6 506
Insulation resistance E1 5.2 505
Insulation withstand for overvoltages E1 5.4 506
Single fault condition assessment E1 5.5 506
Thermal withstand E1 5.1 505
Production testing of relays E1 9 513
Production tests of protection relays E1 9 513
Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) in numerical relays B1 6.6 103
Protection against:
Asynchronous operation for generators C8 16 338
Pole slipping for generators C8 17 341
Power swings–distance relays C3 7.8 221
Sudden restoration of supply C9 14.2 374
Protection equipment testing E1 1-7 495-509
Protection equipment, definition of A1 2 13
Protection of:
a.c. electrified railways C10 1-9 379-394
Busbars C6 1-10 263-282
Capacitors B3 11.3 142
Complex transmission circuits C5 1-8 245-260
Generators C8 1-20 315-347
Motors C9 1-14 361-373
Multi-ended feeders–distance protection C5 4, 5 252, 255
Multi-ended feeders–unit protection C5 3 249
Phase reversal B3 10 141
Series compensated lines C5 6 256
Synchronous motors C9 14 373
Transformer-feeders C7 16 302
Transformers C7 1-10 287-297
Voltage transformers B2 2.4 109
Protection performance A1 4.6 15
Protection relay B1 1-7 95-104
Protection relay setting checks E2 1.5 519
Protection requirements for busbars C6 3 264

Index
AX
3 P

Protection reset time, auto-reclose schemes D1 4.1.5 420
Protection scheme design for maintenance of protection relays E2 8 528
Protection scheme, definition of A1 2 13
Protection signalling: D2 1-7 433-441
Effect of interference D2 6 436
Effect of noise on D2 6 436
For unit protection schemes D2 2 433
Intertripping D2 4 434
Methods D2 7 441
Performance requirements D2 5 435
Signalling methods D2 7 441
Transmission media D2 6 436
Protection system, definition of A1 2 13
Pull-out protection for synchronous motors C9 14.1 373
Q
Quadrature axis machine impedances A4 5, 11 60, 65
Quadrature connected relays C1 14.2 164
Quadrilateral relay C3 7.7 221
R
Radio channels, protection signalling D2 6.4 439
Railways: C10 1-9 379-394
Autotransformer feeding C10 6 387
Catenary backup protection C10 5 387
Catenary thermal protection C10 4 386
Classical single-phase feeding C10 3 380
Delta function C10 8 392
Example of classical system protection C10 9 394
Feeder substation protection C10 7 391
Protection of a.c. electrified C10 1-9 379-394
Protection philosophy C10 2 379
Rate of change of frequency protection 81R D4 2.3 486
Rating tests as electrical type tests E1 3.1 499
Re-acceleration of induction motors: of induction motors C9 4.3 365

Index
AX
R 3

Reactances:
Auto-transformer A4 16, 17 70, 71
Cables A4 18, 20, 23, 24 73, 75, 81, 82
Overhead transmission lines A4 18-22, 24 73-80, 82
Synchronous machine A4 4, 8-12 59, 63-66
Transformer A4 14-15, 17 67-68, 71
Reaction, armature, of synchronous machines A4 3 58
Real-time data access and retrieval as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.2 460
Reclaim time in auto-reclosing D1 4.2, 6.5, 10.6 420, 424, 427
Reclosing:
Delayed D1 9 426
High-speed D1 6-8 422-425
Of EHV networks D1 5 421
Of HV networks D1 3 419
Of live lines D1 9.1 426
Recommended grading margins C1 12 162
Relay burden at electrical type tests E1 3.2 499
Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) C1 14.2.2 165
Relay Inputs at electrical type tests E1 3.3 499
Relay output contacts at electrical type tests E1 3.4 499
Relay self-test procedure of protection relays E2 1.2 517
Relay types: B1 1-5 95-98
Digital B1 4 97
Directional C1 14, 17 164, 170
Distance C3 7 216
Earth fault C1 16 167
Electromechanical B1 2 95
Numerical B1 5, 6 98, 102
ROCOF C8 20.3.2 349
Static B1 3 96
Voltage vector shift C8 20.3.1 349
Relay:
Application of directional overcurrent C1 14.3 165
Bias (of differential relays) C2 4.2 191

Index
AX
3 R

Relay:
C1 14.2 164
Characteristic angle (RCA)
C3 7.3 217
Characteristics:
ANSI C1 4 156
Custom C1 8 159
Definite time C1 9 160
Distance C3 7 216
IDMT C1 4 156
IEC C1 4 156
Instantaneous C1 5 157
Neutral voltage displacement C8 7.1.3, 7.2.4 326, 327
Connections for directional elements C1 14, 17.1 164, 170
Contact systems A1 10.1 19
Current setting C1 10 161
Data management in numerical relays B1 7.2 104
Deterioration in service A1 4.5 15
Example setting calculations:
Distance C3 12 230
Generator C8 21 350
Overcurrent C1 20.1 175
Ring main C1 20.4 182
Transformer C7 19 308
Unit protection C2 12 204
Features of numerical relays B1 5-6 98-102
Flags A1 10.2 19
Grading margins C1 11-12 161-162
Installation of A1 4.3 15
Issues with numerical relays B1 7 104
Maximum torque angle C1 14.2.2 165
Operation indicators A1 10.2 19
Output devices A1 10 19
Overshoot C1 11.3 161

Index
AX
R 3

Relay:
Performance, definition for distance relays C3 3 212
Production testing E1 9 513
Relay characteristic angle C1 14.2 164
Selectivity A1 5 16
Self testing B1 5 98
Setting study, basic requirements C1 2 153
Speed of operation A1 7 17
Stability A1 6 17
Targets A1 10.2 19
Testing and commissioning B1 7.3 104
Time grading margin C1 11 161
Timing error C1 11.2 161
Transient over-reach C7 16.1.2 303
Trip circuit supervision A1 12 21
Tripping circuits A1 11 20
Type testing of E1 1-7 495-509
Voltage setting in busbar protection C6 8.6.3 276
Reliability of numerical busbar protection C6 10.1 283
Reliability of protection equipment A1 4 15
Remanence flux, effect of in a current transformer B2 4.10.2 119
Rented pilot circuits and channels D2 6.2 437
Report control block in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Requirements of the signalling channel D2 5 435
Residual compensation in distance relays C3 9.2 225
Residual current A3 6.1 50
Residual flux, effect of in a current transformer B2 4.10.2 119
Residual voltage A3 6.1 50
Residually connected voltage transformers B2 2.6 109
Resonant ground with a ground fault neutraliser C8 2 316
Restricted earth fault protection:
Of generators C8 7.3 327
Of transformers C7 7 293
Reverse faults, maloperation of distance protection schemes on C5 4.4 254
Reverse Interlocking as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.2.1 472
Reverse looking relay setting, distance relay blocking schemes C4 4.1.1 240
Reverse power protection of generators C8 11.2 332

Index
AX
3 R

Ring mains:
Example of grading C1 20.4 182
Grading of C1 15 166
ROCOF relay C8 20.3.2 349
Rotor earth fault protection for synchronous generator C8 20.3.1 349
Rotor protection (generator) C8 15 336
S
Salient pole rotor, synchronous machine A4 5 60
Saturation of current transformers B2 4.10 117
Secondary injection test equipment for protection relays E2 2 520
Secondary injection test sets for protection relays E2 2.2 520
Secondary injection testing of protection relays E2 3 523
Selection of the parameter subset as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.1.4 470
Selectivity of protection equipment A1 5 16
Self-balance differential protection of motors C9 5.2 367
Self-description of device as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.1 459
Self-testing (of numerical relays) B1 5 98
Sensitive earth fault protection:
Of generators C8 7.1.2 325
Of motors C9 6 368
Overcurrent C1 16.3, 17-19 169, 170-173
Sensitivity of protection equipment A1 8 17
Sequence networks A3 3 41
Sequence reactances:
Cables A4 23 81
Overhead transmission lines A4 18-22 73-80
Synchronous generator A4 8-10 63-65
Series compensated lines, protection of C5 6 256
Series sealing, relay tripping circuits A1 11.1 20
Server In the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Setting and setting group management as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.5 462
Setting of overcurrent relay C1 10 161

Index
AX
S 3

SF6 circuit breakers, use in auto-reclose schemes D1 6.3.3 423
Shunt fault equations A3 4 43
Shunt reinforcing with series sealing, relay tripping circuits A1 11.3 20
Shunt reinforcing, relay tripping circuits A1 11.2 20
Sign conventions A2 4.2 29
Signalling performance requirements D2 5 435
Signalling, protection D2 1-7 433-441
Simulation hardware of protection relays E1 8.2.1 511
Simulation software of protection relays E1 8.2.2 511
Simulator applications of protection relays E1 8.2.3 512
Single frequency line trap D2 6.3 437
Single-phase auto-reclosing D1 7 424
Single-phase open circuit fault analysis A3 4.5 46
Single-phase systems A2 4.4 30
Single-phase to earth fault analysis A3 4.1 44
Single shot auto-reclosing D1 4.3, 6.6 421, 424
Single switch substation, auto-reclose applied to D1 12.2 429
Software modifications - regression testing of protection relays E1 7.9 510
Software Type Testing of protection relays E1 7 509
Software version control in numerical relays B1 7.1 104
Software/Hardware integration testing of protection relays E1 7.5 509
Software/Software integration testing of protection relays E1 7.4 509
Speed of protection equipment A1 7 17
Split phase transverse current differential protection of generator C8 5.2 320
Stabilising resistance C2 4.1 190
Stability of protection equipment A1 6 17
Stalling of induction motors C9 4.2 365
Standard IDMT overcurrent relays C1 4 156
Standby transformer, auto-close schemes D1 11.1 428
Star/delta theorem, Kennelly’s A2 6.2 32
Star-connected winding of a transformer, impedance earthed C7 2.1 287
Star-connected winding of a transformer, solidly earthed C7 2.2 287
Starting protection for induction motors C9 4.1 364
Starting relays for switched distance protection C3 8.1 224
Static differential protection systems C2 7 193
Static relays B1 3 96
Static unit testing of protection relays E1 7.1 509

Index
AX
3 S

Stator protection:
For generators C8 3 317
For induction motors C9 3, 6 362, 368
Stator windings, electrical faults in:
Generators C8 3 317
Induction motors C9 3, 6 362, 368
Steady-state theory of synchronous machines A4 4 59
SubNetwork in the IEC 61850 data model D3 2.4.6 452
Substation Configuration Language (SCL) according IEC 61850 D3 2.5 453
Substation control as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.1.1 466
Substitution as communication service of IEC 61850 D3 3.2.7 462
Sub-transient reactance of generators A4 8, 11 63, 65
Sudden restoration of supply, synchronous motor protection C9 14.2 374
Summation arrangements, unit protection C2 6 192
Superposition theorem A2 6.2 32
Supervision of trip circuits A1 12 21
Switch-on-to-fault feature C3 6.4 215
Symmetrical component theory A3 3 41
Synchronism check relay D1 9.2 426
Synchronous machines: A4 2 57
Armature reaction A4 3 58
Asymmetry A4 7 63
Cylindrical rotor A4 4 59
Direct axis reactances A4 4-11 59-65
Negative sequence reactance A4 9 65
Quadrature axis reactances A4 5, 11 60, 65
Reactances A4 4-12 59-66
Salient pole rotor A4 5 60
Saturation, effect on reactances A4 12 66
Steady-state theory of A4 4 59
Transient analysis A4 6 61
Zero sequence reactance A4 10 65
Synchronous motor protection: C9 14 373
Low forward power protection C9 14.2.2 374
Out-of step protection C9 14.1 373
Protection against sudden restoration of supply C9 14.2 374
Underfrequency protection C9 14.2.1 374

Index
AX
S 3

System configuration tool according IEC 61850 D3 2.5 453
System earthing, effect of on zero sequence quantities A3 6 50
System fault studies A3 5 47
System specification tool according IEC 61850 D3 2.5 453
System tripping angles, unit protection schemes C2 11.2 201
System Zo/Z1 ratio A3 6.2 50
System ZS/ZL ratio, distance relay performance C3 4 213
System-wide interlocking as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.2.2 474
T
Tank-earth protection (transformers) C7 14 300
Targets A1 10.2 19
Tee’d feeder unit protection schemes C5 3.2-3.3 250-251
Telephone type pilots D2 6.1, 6.2 436, 437
Teleprotection signalling systems D2 3 433
Terminology AX1 Appendix 1 529
Test block E2 2.1 520
Test blocks/plugs for secondary injection equipment for protection relays E2 2.1 520
Test facilities for primary injection to protection relays E2 4.1 524
Test plug E2 2.1 520
Testing of Protection Scheme Logic of protection relays E2 6 526
Tests:
Commissioning E2 1 517
Equipment, secondary injection tests E2 2 520
Maintenance E2 7.2 527
Primary injection E2 4 524
Production E1 9 513
Protection scheme logic E2 6 526
Secondary injection E2 2, 3 520, 523
Tripping and alarm annunciation E2 5 526
Type:
Dynamic validation E1 8 510
Electrical E1 3 499
Electromagnetic compatibility E1 4 500
Environmental E1 6 507
Product safety E1 5 505

Index
AX
3 T

Tests: Type:
Software E1 7 509
Theorems, circuit A2 6.2 32
Theory:
Current transformer B2 4 113
Synchronous machine A4 2-12 57-66
Voltage transformer B2 2 107
Thermal protection:
Of a.c. electrified railway catenary C10 4 386
Of generator C8 18 344
Of motor C9 3 362
Of transformer C7 4, 18 291, 307
Thévenin’s theorem A2 6.2 32
Third harmonic voltage method 100% earth fault protection of generator C8 8.1 329
Three terminal lines, protection of C5 3 249
Three-phase auto-reclosing D1 3, 6, 9 419, 422, 426
Three-phase fault analysis A3 4.4 45
Three-phase fault calculations A3 2 39
Time grading of earth fault relays C1 16.2 169
Time multiplier setting (TMS) C1 4 156
Time synchronisation in numerical relays B1 6.5 103
Time synchronisation of relays C2 8.1 195
Time/current characteristics of overcurrent relays C1 4 156
Traceability of verification and validation tests of protection relays E1 7.8 510
Transactor C2 5 192
Transfer trip distance protection schemes: C4 3 237
Direct under-reach scheme C4 3.1 237
Permissive over-reach scheme C4 3.4 238
Permissive under-reach scheme C4 3.2 237
Permissive under-reaching acceleration scheme C4 3.3 238
Weak infeed conditions C4 3.5 239
Transformer:
Condition monitoring C7 18 307
Core faults C7 2.6 289
Equivalent circuits A4 14-15 67-68
Faults, nature and effect C7 2 287

Index
AX
T 3

Transformer:
Impedances A4 17 71
Instrument: B2 1-5 107-121
Current B2 4 113
Magnetising inrush C7 3 290
Novel B2 5 121
Overheating C7 4 291
Overload conditions C7 2.8.1 289
Overvoltage conditions C7 2.8.3 289
Positive sequence equivalent circuit A4 14 67
Protection: C7 5-15 292-301
Buchholz relay C7 15.3 301
Combined differential and earth–fault C7 10 297
Delta/star connected C7 8 293
Delta-connected windings C7 7 293
Intertripping C7 17 306
Oil and gas devices C7 15 301
Overfluxing C7 13 300
Overload protection C7 2.8.1 289
Restricted earth fault C7 7 293
Tank-earth C7 14 300
Thermal C7 4, 18 291, 307
Reactances:
Positive A4 14, 17 67, 71
Zero A4 15, 17 68, 71
Zero sequence equivalent circuit A4 15 68
C2 12.2 206
Transformer-feeder protection of
C7 16 302
Transient analysis of synchronous machines A4 6 61
Transient factor of a current transformer B2 4.8 117
Transient fault D1 1 417
Transient instability in unit protection systems C2 4.1 190

Index
AX
3 T

Transient over-reach of a relay C1 5 157
Transient reactance of generator A4 6, 8.2 61, 64
Transient response:
Of a capacitor voltage transformer B2 3.2 112
Of a current transformer B2 4.10 117
Of a voltage transformer B2 2.7 110
Translay ‘S’ static circulating current unit protection C2 7.2 193
Translay balanced voltage electromechanical unit protection system C2 7.1 193
Transmission line with or without earth wires A4 21 78
Transmission lines:
Data A4 24 82
Equivalent circuit A4 18-22 73-80
Series impedance A4 19, 22 74, 80
Shunt impedance A4 20, 22 75, 80
Transmission media interference and noise: D2 6 436
Optical fibre channels D2 6.5 439
Power line carrier communications techniques D2 6.3 437
Private pilot wires and channels D2 6.1 436
Radio channels D2 6.4 439
Rented pilot wires and channels D2 6.2 437
Transmission of disturbance recording as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.1.5 470
Transverse zero sequence current differential protection of generator C8 5.4 321
Trip circuit supervision A1 12 21
Tripping and alarm annunciation tests for protection relays E2 5 526
Tripping circuits A1 11 20
Turns compensation of a current transformer B2 4.1.2 113
Turns compensation of a voltage transformer B2 2.1 107
Type testing of protection relays: E1 1-7 495-509
Accreditation E1 1.7.1 496
Accredited labs E1 1.7 496
Accredited type test reports E1 1.7.2 497
Commissioning tests E1 1.4 495
Dynamic unit testing E1 7.2 509
Dynamic validation type tests E1 8 510
Electrical type tests: E1 3 499
Functional tests E1 2 498

Index
AX
T 3

Type testing of protection relays:
Electromagnetic compatibility tests: E1 4 500
a.c. ripple on d.c. supply E1 4.2 501
Conducted and radiated emission E1 4.9 503
Conducted disturbance induced by RF - immunity tests E1 4.11 504
Damped oscillatory magnetic field E1 4.12.3 505
d.c. and a.c. voltage dip and short interruption E1 4.1 501
Electrostatic discharge test E1 4.8 502
Fast transient test E1 4.5 502
Gradual shut-down/start-up for a.c. & d.c. power supply E1 4.3 501
Magnetic field tests E1 4.12 504
Power frequency interference E1 4.7 502
Electromagnetic compatibility tests:
Power frequency magnetic field tests E1 4.12.1 504
Pulsed magnetic field E1 4.12.2 505
Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test E1 4.10 504
Slow & fast damped oscillatory wave E1 4.4 501
Surge immunity test E1 4.6 502
Environmental type test of protection relays: E1 6 507
Cyclic temperature/humidity test E1 6.3 507
Enclosure protection test E1 6.5 508
Fast cyclic temperature E1 6.4 508
Humidity test E1 6.2 507
Mechanical tests E1 6.6 508
Seismic test equipment E1 6.6 508
Temperature test E1 6.1 507
IEC61850 accreditation and recognition E1 1.8.1 497
IEC61850 certificate and report accredited E1 1.8.2 497
IEC61850 communication testing E1 1.8 497
Periodic maintenance checks E1 1.5 495
Product safety tests of protection relays: E1 5 505
CE marking E1 5.7 506
Dielectric voltage withstand E1 5.3 505
Earth bonding impedance E1 5.6 506
Insulation resistance E1 5.2 505
Insulation withstand for over-voltages E1 5.4 506
Single fault condition assessment E1 5.5 506

Index
AX
3 T

Type testing of protection relays: Product safety tests of protection relays:
Thermal withstand E1 5.1 505
Reference standards E1 1.1 495
Routine factory production tests E1 1.3 495
Software modifications - regression testing E1 7.9 510
Software type testing E1 7 509
Software/hardware integration testing E1 7.5 509
Software/software integration testing E1 7.4 509
Static unit testing E1 7.1 509
Traceability of verification and validation tests E1 7.8 510
Type test reports E1 1.6 496
Type tests E1 1.2 495
Unit testing environment E1 7.3 509
Use of microprocessor-based simulation equipment E1 8.2 510
Use of power system analogue models E1 8.1 510
Validation testing E1 7.7 509
Verification testing E1 7.6 509
Types of busbar protection systems C6 4 265
Typical applications with IEC61850: D3 4 466
Applications with client-server communication: D3 4.1 466
Characteristics switching D3 4.1.6 471
Control with synchrocheck D3 4.1.3 469
Local/remote control D3 4.1.2 467
Selection of the parameter subset D3 4.1.4 470
Substation control D3 4.1.1 466
Transmission of disturbance recording D3 4.1.5 470
Applications with GOOSE communication: D3 4.2 472
Bay unit testing D3 4.2.4 479
General requirements D3 4.2.5 482
Reverse interlocking D3 4.2.1 472
System-wide interlocking D3 4.2.2 474
Uniqueness of control D3 4.2.3 477
Typical examples of time and current grading, overcurrent relays C1 20 175

Index
AX
U 3

Unbalanced loading (negative sequence protection): of generators C8 12 333
Unbalanced loading (negative sequence protection): of motors C9 7 370
Underfrequency based load shedding D4 3.1 488
Underfrequency protection 81U D4 2.1 486
Underfrequency protection of generators C8 14.2 336
Under-power protection of generators C8 11.1 332
Under-reach of a distance relay C3 10.3 227
Under-reach of distance relay on parallel lines C5 2.2.2 246
Undervoltage based load shedding D4 3.4 489
Uniqueness of control as application with IEC 61850 D3 4.2.3 477
Unit protection schemes:
Current differential C2 4, 10 190, 197
Line differential C2 1-13 189-207
Parallel feeders C5 2.1 245
Phase comparison C2 11 201
Signalling in D2 2 433
Tee’d feeders C5 3.2-3.3 250-251
Translay C2 7.1, 7.2 193, 193
Using carrier techniques C2 9 197
Unit protection: C2 1-13 189-207
Balanced voltage system C2 5 192
Circulating current system C2 4 190
Digital protection systems C2 8 194
Electromechanical protection systems C2 7 193
Numerical protection systems C2 8 194
Static protection systems C2 7 193
Summation arrangements C2 6 192
Unit testing environment of protection relays E1 7.3 509
Unit transformer protection (for generator unit transformers) C8 4.2 319
Use of microprocessor based simulation equipment of protection relays E1 8.2 510
Use of power system analogue models of protection relays E1 8.1 510

Index
AX
3 V

Vacuum circuit breakers (VCBs) B3 5.5 134
Validation testing of protection relays E1 7.7 509
Van Warrington formula for arc resistance C3 7.3 217
Variation of residual quantities A3 6.3 51
Vector algebra A2 2 25
Verification testing of protection relays E1 7.6 509
Very inverse overcurrent relay C1 6 158
Voltage and phase reversal protection B3 10 141
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection C8 6.2.1 324
Voltage dependent overcurrent protection C8 6.2 324
Voltage distribution due to a fault A3 5.2 49
Voltage factors for voltage transformers B2 2.2 108
Voltage limit for accurate reach point measurement C3 5 214
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection C8 6.2.2 324
B2 2-3 107-111
Voltage transformers:
E2 1.4 518
Capacitor B2 3 111
Cascade B2 2.8 110
Errors B2 2.1 107
Phasing check E2 1.4.3 518
Ratio check E2 1.4.2 518
Residually-connected B2 2.6 109
Secondary leads B2 2.3 109
Supervision in distance relays C3 10.7 228
Supervision in numerical relays B1 6.2 102
Transient performance B2 2.7 110
Voltage factors B2 2.2 108
Voltage vector shift relay C8 20.3.1 349

Index
AX
W 3

Warrington, Van, formula for arc resistance C3 7.3 217
Wattmetric protection, sensitive C1 19.2 174
Wound primary current transformer B2 4.5.1 115
Z
Zero sequence equivalent circuits:
Auto-transformer A4 16.2 70
Synchronous generator A4 10 65
Transformer A4 15 68
Zero sequence network A3 3.3 43
Zero sequence quantities, effect of system earthing on A3 6 50
Zero sequence reactance:
Of cables A4 24 82
Of generator A4 10 65
Of overhead lines A4 21, 24 78, 82
Of transformer A4 15, 17 68, 71
Zone 1 extension scheme (distance protection) C4 2 236
Zone 1 extension scheme in auto-reclose applications D1 8.2 425
Zones of protection A1 3 13
Zones of protection, distance relay C3 6 215

Fundamentals of Protection Practice: Network Protection & Automation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fundamentals of Protection Practice: Network Protection & Automation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fundamentals of Protection Practice: Network Protection & Automation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A1

9. Primary and back-up protection 18

10. Output devices 19

11. Tripping circuits 20

12. Trip circuit supervision 21

The purpose of an electrical power system is to generate and

L1A G5 T7 380kV 110kV

L1B 380kV 33kV

11 Network Protection & Automation Guide

Many items of equipment are very expensive, and so the

Network Protection & Automation Guide 12

13 Network Protection & Automation Guide

Figure A1.5: Figure A1.6:

Network Protection & Automation Guide 14

15 Network Protection & Automation Guide

Network Protection & Automation Guide 16

The term ‘stability’ is usually associated with unit protection

17 Network Protection & Automation Guide

9. Primary and back-up protection A1

Network Protection & Automation Guide 18

A1 10. Output devices

Self reset 10.2 Operation indicators

19 Network Protection & Automation Guide

11. Tripping circuits A1

PR 52a TC The main disadvantage of this method is that such series

Network Protection & Automation Guide 20

A1 12. Trip circuit supervision

PR 52a TC Schemes using a lamp to indicate continuity are suitable for

C The above schemes are commonly known as the H4, H5 and

(d) Implementation of H5 scheme in numerical relay

21 Network Protection & Automation Guide

Network Protection & Automation Guide

Network Protection & Automation Guide

3. Manipulation of complex quantities 26

4. Circuit quantities and conventions 28

6. Basic circuit laws, theorems and network reduction 32

where the operator j indicates that the component y is

25 Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide

22 From Equations A2.1 and A2.2:

The representation of a vector quantity algebraically in terms

3. Manipulation of complex quantities

algebra, complex quantities in rectangular form can be

|Z2| Z1 - Z2= (x1- x2 ) + j(y1- y2 ) ...Equation A2.6 (see Figure A2.2)

3.1 Complex variables

Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide 26

A2 3. Manipulation of complex quantities

27 Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide

4. Circuit quantities and conventions A2

Circuit analysis may be described as the study of the response

Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide 28

A2 4. Circuit quantities and conventions

∑ E =∑ IZ ...Equation A2.13 (a) Diagrammatic

29 Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide

4. Circuit quantities and conventions A2

Q is the product of voltage and the quadrature component of

S = P + jQ ...Equation A2.16 Figure A2.5:

A system is single or polyphase depending upon whether the Ea = Ea

Schneider Electric - Network Protection & Automation Guide 30

The per unit or percentage value of any impedance in the